JP7454184B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines that display symbols in a variable manner using a display means and award a predetermined gaming value when the display result becomes a specific display result. This type of gaming machine is provided with a plurality of light emitting bodies, which emit light in various ways in relation to the display on the display means. Among such gaming machines, a gaming machine that uses a plurality of light emitters to emit light in a rainbow pattern has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2019-017517A

However, in the gaming machine described above, although the rainbow mode of light emission indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is high due to the fluctuating display of symbols, the probability of the rainbow mode of light emission being suppressed is low, so the rainbow mode is The player may not be able to tell that a light emitting effect is being provided, and as a result, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest .

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are presented below. In addition, the effects, etc. will be explained as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention will be shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined symbol change based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery start condition, and is capable of awarding a profit after the predetermined symbol variation ends,
a light emitting section provided at a predetermined position;
specific rainbow light emission control means for causing the light emitting section to emit light in a specific rainbow manner;
a separate light emitting section that is a separate member from the light emitting section and capable of emitting light in the specific rainbow mode;
The separate light emitting unit is provided with a plurality of light emitters, and the specific rainbow mode can be expressed by light emission from the plurality of light emitters,
The separate light emitting unit is not determined to be abnormal even when it is not connected to the gaming machine,
The specific rainbow light emission control means causes the light emitting section and the separate light emitting section to emit light in the specific rainbow mode, respectively, during a specific period when the predetermined symbol variation is not being executed. It is possible to cause the separate light emitting section to emit light in the specific rainbow mode, regardless of whether or not it is in a state where it can emit light in the specific rainbow mode,
The specific period does not start at the same time as the period in which the predetermined symbol variation is not executed, but rather when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the period in which the predetermined symbol variation is not executed. can be started later
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the following means will be disclosed for reference as inventions different from the present invention.
Means 1:
A game board having a game area is provided, a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area to execute a symbol variation game, and a jackpot is achieved by deriving a jackpot result in the symbol variation game. In a gaming machine that is capable of executing a game and is capable of executing the symbol variation game by setting a predetermined setting value regarding the game when the power is turned on,
A main control means, a production control means,
a transmission means for transmitting information from the main control means to the production control means;
Equipped with
The main control means starts a setting confirmation state in which the set value that has been set can be confirmed when a predetermined confirmation start condition is met, and ends the setting confirmation state when a predetermined confirmation end condition is met. can be,
When starting the setting confirmation state, information regarding the start of the setting confirmation state is transmitted from the main control means to the production control means through the transmission means,
When terminating the setting confirmation state, information regarding the termination of the setting confirmation state is transmitted from the main control means to the production control means through the transmission means,
When the effect control means receives information regarding the start of the setting confirmation state, it starts a setting confirmation notification to inform the outside that the setting confirmation state is started, and when receiving information regarding the end of the setting confirmation state, the effect control means starts the setting confirmation notification to inform the outside that the setting confirmation state is started, and when the effect control means receives information regarding the end of the setting confirmation state, This will end the confirmation notification,
If a transmission cut-off situation occurs in which information transmission by the transmission means is disabled and the production control means cannot receive information regarding the end of the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state may be terminated even after the setting confirmation state has ended. Confirmation notification will continue,
The continued setting confirmation notification continues even after the transmission interruption situation is resolved.

In the above configuration, if a transmission cut-off situation occurs in which information transmission by the transmission means is impossible and the production control means cannot receive information regarding the end of the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation can be performed even after the setting confirmation state has ended. The notification is made to continue, and the continued setting confirmation notification continues even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved. Therefore, if a transmission cutoff situation is caused illegally during the settings confirmation state, the transmission cutoff situation will be resolved. Regardless of whether or not the fraud occurs, it will leave a trace and act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine (for example, see paragraphs 3023 to 3073, FIGS. 271 to 273, etc.).

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the lock seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cylinder lock in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a) and showing the main parts. FIG. 12(c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of the product of this example and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front and lower. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upward moving end position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where it has moved to the raised position. It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship of the production operation part outer periphery decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected in (a). It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between them, and (c) is an illustration in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and back direction, and the production operation unit FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact sensing bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the device. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. 62(a) is a sectional view taken along the line U--U in FIG. 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). 66A is a cross-sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the door frame as it is and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view showing each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of a production operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. It is a back view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 3 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled, viewed from above the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the bottom of the front. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail and the like according to a second embodiment when viewed from the back and showing a portion of the tank rail in an enlarged manner. (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a ( It is a perspective view of tank rail etc. of a) seen from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carcar line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. It is a perspective view which shows the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment seen from the right back, and showing the part of the tank rail in an enlarged manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment seen from the left back, and showing the tank rail part enlarged. (a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of an external terminal board, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged top part. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114B is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the upper right back, and (c) is a perspective view of (a) ) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 116; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 116, viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right back. 119(a) is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a), viewed from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the K-ke line. 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit in (a) seen from the lower right back. (a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Koko line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sasa line in (a). FIG. FIG. 129(a) is a sectional view taken along the line C--C in FIG. 129(a). 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the back. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how the ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 127 is resolved. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool into the board unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 viewed from the front right. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 when viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 145 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged left side of FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145. FIG. (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel board and an obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate disassembled and viewed from the front in FIG. 148, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate disassembled and viewed from the rear in FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. 148 is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate seen from the rear and viewed from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship shown in FIG. 151 seen from the front, broken down into main components, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 152 seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit and the back lower rear decoration body of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit have respectively moved to the raised position. The back lower front decoration of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the gaming area, and the back upper and rear decoration of the back upper and rear presentation unit has moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration. , is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body. In the state of FIG. 155, the front left side decoration body and the front right side decoration body of the back bottom front decoration body of the back bottom front presentation unit have moved to the open position, and the front side of the game board shows a state in which the central decoration body has appeared. It is a diagram. A state in which the back top and rear decorative body of the back top and rear production unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration body of the back top and rear production unit has risen and is in contact with the back top and rear decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing. In the state of FIG. 157, the front of the game board showing the state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back lower front decoration of the back lower front presentation unit have moved to the open position and the central decoration has appeared. It is a diagram. The back top front decoration of the back top front production unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration of the back top and rear production unit has moved to the rear of the back top front decoration, and the back bottom The back lower front decoration of the front direction unit rises and moves below the back upper front decoration, and at the same time the back lower rear decoration of the back lower rear direction unit rises and moves behind the back lower front decoration. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which it is in contact with the upper and lower back decorations. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, showing the inside of the game area where game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory shown in FIG. 162, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is a diagram. (a) is a front view of the ball guidance unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guidance unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sous line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the so-so line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the so-so line in FIG. 164. 164 is a cross-sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 as seen from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 as seen from the front left. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; 168 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 167; FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 174 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 173. 174 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on following FIG. 174. FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a front view of the game board of a third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding performance advance judgment processing (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a lottery table for low probability (A), a lottery table for high probability (B), a jackpot symbol determination table (C), an immediate short hit symbol determination table (D), and a small winning symbol determination table (E) . It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol stop processing (step S284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding relief frequency count processing (step S394). It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of gaming states. This is a specific example of performance until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state. This is a specific example of a performance when a ball enters the second starting port during execution of a count performance. This is a specific example of the performance until the lottery result becomes an instant hit. It is a time chart showing a count suppression period. It is a time chart showing an immediate short hit symbol invalid period. It is a time chart showing when the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalidation period are used together. It is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC performance. It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). It is a time chart showing the performance progress when the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). It is a time chart showing the performance progress when the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation before and after an immediate short hit occurs. It is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied before an immediate short hit occurs. It is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied after an immediate short hit. 3 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating operations at power-on to execute RAM clear. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a history display that can be displayed during a period when settings of setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed. It is a time chart showing behavior related to normal symbols when the power is turned on. It is a time chart showing a change in the gaming state when a RAM clear operation is performed during the time saving state. It is a time chart showing a change in the gaming state when a RAM clear operation is performed during execution of symbol variation in which the special symbol is displayed 600 times in a low probability state. This is a modified example of the RAM clear condition showing an operation at power-on to execute RAM clear. It is a time chart showing changes in the game state when the power supply is restored after the power supply to the main control board is cut off. It is a time chart showing changes in the game state when the power supply is restored and a setting key ON signal is input after the power supply to the main control board is cut off. It is a time chart showing the progress of the performance in the case where the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit. It is a time chart showing the performance progress when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit. It is a time chart showing the performance progress when a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit. It is a time chart showing the performance progress in the case where the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol variation in which the special symbol is varied and displayed 600 times in the low probability state. It is a time chart showing the performance progress when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation in which the special symbol is displayed 600 times in a low probability state. It is a time chart showing the performance progress when a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation in which the special symbol is displayed 600 times in a low probability state. They are a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modified example. It is a time chart showing the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state B. It is a time chart showing the immediate short winning time during the control of the low probability time saving state A that started 100 times with the jackpot C as an opportunity. It is a block diagram showing the connection between a pachinko machine and external equipment. This figure shows a situation when a pachinko machine transits from a low probability non-time saving state to a low probability time saving state B, and then further transitions from a low probability time saving state B to a low probability time saving state C. This figure shows a situation when a pachinko machine transits from a low probability non-time saving state to a low probability time saving state C, and then further transitions from the low probability time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. It is a front view showing a function display unit. This figure shows a situation when a pachinko machine transits from a low probability time saving state B to a low probability time saving state A via a jackpot, and then further transitions from a low probability time saving state A to a low probability time saving state C. It is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the power is turned on. Various tables showing a pattern determination table (A) at the time of normal winning and a list (B) of opening/closing patterns of the variable winning opening in the modified example. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the gaming state and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of a game state in a modification. In the modified example, the lottery table at low probability (A), the lottery table at high probability (B), the jackpot symbol determination table (C), the immediate short hit symbol determination table (D), and the small hit symbol determination table (E). Various tables shown. Various tables showing an instantaneous short win pattern determination table (A) during a non-time-saving state in a modified example, and an instantaneous short win pattern determination table (B) during a time-saving state. Various types showing a lottery table (A) in a low probability state, a lottery table (B) in a high probability state, a jackpot symbol determination table (C) in a non-time saving state, and a jackpot symbol determination table (D) in a time saving state in a modified example. table. In the modified example, the symbol determination table for normal winning (A), the list of opening/closing patterns of the variable winning opening (B), the immediate short winning symbol determination table for non-time saving state (C), the immediate short winning symbol determination for time saving state Various tables showing table (D). (a) An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state when the specific immediate short hit has not been won in the first special symbol lottery, and (b) An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state when the specific immediate short hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of gaming states. It is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. This is a specific example of performance when there is no variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol. This is a specific example of performance when starting the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol. It is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the start of the help mode L start performance is delayed. This is a specific example of a performance when the start of the help mode L start performance is delayed. It is an explanatory view showing a door frame top unit and a production operation unit which are detachable from a door frame. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing ID code determination targets. It is an explanatory view showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided in the door frame. It is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion performance executed as a performance during symbol fluctuation. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of a suggestion performance executed as a performance while symbols are changing when there is a component whose ID code does not match on the game board. It is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect A during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of button effect B during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect C during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart showing an example when there is no operation of the effect operation section in button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of a case where an immersion prevention display is executed after execution of a simulated rainbow effect. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of erasing the addictive prevention display after the simulated rainbow effect is executed. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where execution of a simulated rainbow effect is restricted. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the light emission of LED is confirmed at the time of execution of a simulated rainbow effect. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a single rainbow decoration part is attached to a game board. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a single rainbow decoration part. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a simulated rainbow effect is executed when a single rainbow decoration part is attached. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a single rainbow decoration part. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when there is an error in the initial position of the back and front decorations. It is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which a rainbow-like effect image cannot be visually recognized on the effect display device. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the first to third abnormalities occur during execution of a rainbow effect. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after power is turned on. It is an explanatory view showing an annular decoration part. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using an annular decoration part. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line connection is maintained during the setting confirmation state. In an abnormal situation where the command line connection is cut off during the settings confirmation state, the time showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a winning entry is detected in each starting port after the command line is reconnected after the settings confirmation state ends. It is a chart. 12 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state is terminated in a situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line connection is maintained during the setting confirmation state. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine in the case where the command line is disconnected during the settings confirmation state, and a winning entry is detected in each starting port after the command line is reconnected after the settings confirmation state ends. be. 12 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line is disconnected at the start of the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation state is ended after the command line is reconnected during the setting confirmation state. 12 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state is terminated in a situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. This shows a history display that can be displayed during a period when setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is disconnected. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line is reconnected while the door frame is open in a situation where the frame decoration member is disconnected after the command line connection is cut off. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line is reconnected before opening the main body frame in a situation where the frame decoration member becomes unconnected after the connection of the command line is cut off. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the command line is disconnected during the settings confirmation state and the frame decoration member becomes disconnected after the command line is reconnected after the settings confirmation state ends. be.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 that includes a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 that includes a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player and a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1. , a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. We are prepared.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is provided, an effect display device 1600 which is placed in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100. A front unit 2000 is provided, and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. (For example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2004, gate 2002, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. Thus, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and displays the lower right unit 2400 and the back unit. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 of 3000, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, etc. are used to perform light emitting effects and movable effects. , can entertain players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flatly to the right on the right side surface from a part on the opposite side to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat plate-like lower lateral fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper lateral fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 13a, and The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d has a flat plate shape and extends briefly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the curtain front member 42 (curtain interior space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders and communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the plurality of inclined blades 46b transmit the air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 to the handle cover unit 290 located diagonally above and in front. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player inserts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, it is not released from the port member 47 to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 or to other players who are roaming around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the performance sound can be heard, the interest of the players can be attracted by the performance sound, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output sound with deeper bass, thereby entertaining the players and preventing them from losing interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 , a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 , a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 , and the upper side of the pan unit 200 . a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit; The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a door window 101a penetrating back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 installed near the right end in rear view at the lower rear side of door frame base 101, and the back side of door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side in view, the handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, the handle unit 180 moves the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher. 540 to play a game by hitting into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side in a front view so that the hinge can rotate, and the front side of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 The gaming area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. .

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in front view and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.). A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b when viewed from the front. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front and back and allows the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in front view of the upper part of a rectangle extending vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board etc. of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 34(a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening/closing and locking the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key hole 132 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 that is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates when a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132 is rotated, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction at a lower part than the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a part to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A first arm 136 in the form of a band plate, whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135; A second arm 137 in the form of a band plate is rotatably attached at a position below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to the rear cover 115 and both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the cylinder attachment frame 115 so as to be rotatable therewith. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axis. are doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a protruding outward from the lower ends of the left and right sides in a cylindrical shape and is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side is fitted with a screw (not shown). It is removably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be explained. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment As shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. At the same time, both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to positions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise at an angle of 90 degrees from a normal state using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It happens. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is There is almost no force trying to rotate it clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is applied to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do so increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 will be larger than that on the first arm 136. , the second cam member 135 is rotated counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

In addition, when the key is used to return to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, an action opposite to that described above is used. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from a normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first cam member 134 moves downward, and the second arm 137 whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 can be rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is hardly any force trying to rotate it in the direction of .

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second cam member 135 rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is transmitted to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. and the rotation center of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes smaller in the first arm 136, whereas In the arm 137, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force increases, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state and then rotated 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the key operates in the opposite manner to the above. I will do it.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) is connected at any rotational position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected to transmit the rotation. By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133) can be rotated, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked effectively.

Moreover, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, by transmitting rotation by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to any desired position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the pachinko machine 1 The increase in costs can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who is aware of the configuration may insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 using the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened and a fraudulent act may be carried out. On the other hand, the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmitting member 133 located at a position away from the axis (backward) of the cylinder body 131, so that a tool cannot be inserted into the rear of the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present in the relevant part, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 with respect to the first arm 136, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. The portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 that is attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts furthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It becomes a state of being. Therefore, by having one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. The key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly without much resistance being applied to the rotation, making it easy to unlock and lock the lock, and without forcing the key inserted into the keyhole to be rotated. This can prevent the key from being damaged, and can prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and a pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Moreover, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 having a smooth rod shape (band plate shape). Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. By making the arm 136 and the second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 from being unlocked due to unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650. be able to.

Note that in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but is not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts. , etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 37(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 160) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Note that the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, in which the operation transmitting portion 242b that the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with, is biased upward by a spring, so that the game ball B is not placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extracting member 143, etc. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball B is moved in and out of the first starting port 2004 etc. by manipulating the attached string, the illegal game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that are fired by the ball firing device 540 and do not reach the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also allows the player to view the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper tray 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be explained. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 that are attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 that will be described later; and a disc-shaped handle guide 196 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. A front lens 185 is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring part 195c connecting the tips of the parts 195b, and two rings extending in an arc shape around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub part 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend counterclockwise from positions at angles of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend to a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

This handle 195 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated to be electrically continuous from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect a touch on the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, even if the outer ring portion 195c is rotated, the game ball B can be hit.

The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the attachment stays 196b are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer ring portions 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, into the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three attachment bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two on the upper left of the outer circumference, two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See Figure 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls each group with 3 systems, for a total of 15 systems, so that each of the 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can emit light in full color. That's what I do.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. Each group of the 10 LEDs 184a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since this handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which number is greater than the number of electric wires making up the wiring cable to be connected, is controlled individually (in this case, as a group). Since the number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front handle lens 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward, and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The front handle lens 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes in accordance with the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with a force depending on the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact and the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 195 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side than the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. an inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative board 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted; It includes an annular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylinder part 291a that extends back and forth with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer circumferential ring part 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylinder part 291a that has an inner diameter that becomes smaller toward the front from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a. a cylindrical rear cylinder part 291c that penetrates the middle wall part 291b and extends back and forth with an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base 181a of the handle base 181; and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder part 291c. The handle base 181 is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d that protrude inwardly from the handle base 181 and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion in the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a. A cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward to 291f, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a, and a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a in a region between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. An opening 291h passing through the lower part of the portion 291a is provided.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate shape with an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively unrotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylindrical portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylindrical portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in a range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three circumferential directions at angular intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearwardly than the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the U-shaped guide portion By positioning the guide piece 291g within the guide portion 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a to the vicinity of the flange part 291e, and has a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and passes through the front cylinder part 291a. .

The inner 292 includes an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and a larger outer diameter than the flange part 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to near the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base part 292a from the front, and the base part 292a is located behind the flange part 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape that swells outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 groups: 2 on the lower left from the center, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. (See Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and is designed to control a total of 18 systems, 3 systems for each group, so that each of the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and signals from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as address, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the steering wheel cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b divides the LED driver into six groups according to the command. Each set of the 12 LEDs 293a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate part 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and approximately the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base part 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate part 294a. It has a cylindrical side plate part 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short distance. In this board cover 294, a front plate part 294a is located between the flange part 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate part 294b extends to the base part 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end that has the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and has a spindle (kamakura-shaped or bowl-shaped) shape that expands toward the rear. , etc.), and is provided with a plurality of cutout openings 295b (four in this case) in the circumferential direction, which are cut out from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and a plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed to match the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). Note that when molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled into the pachinko machine 1, and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is placed inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291. The handle 195, the front handle lens 185, and the like are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is connected to the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 while sandwiching the part that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. 101b.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, an outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outside of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. This handle guide 196 has a rear end side of the guide part 196a inserted (locked) between the front cylinder part 291a and the outer cylinder part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange part 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, so that the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 can emit light. In addition to being able to decorate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 with light emitting light, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light emitting light.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 has a cutout opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player who inserts his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub part 195a and the outer peripheral ring part 195c of the handle 195. I can do it.

Note that the upper notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notch 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 is inserted. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the bottom It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they will pass through the gap between the front cylinder part 291a and the leg part 292b of the inner 292, and It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed in the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2. It is provided on the extension line of the blade part 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid body 40 in the inclination direction. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) released obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player inserts his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (playing device for driving game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, you can hook your finger on the right side notch opening 295b and pull it. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring part 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring part 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by gripping the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b by hooking your fingers on the handle cover 295. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant force even if the user does not keep twisting his hand. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven in by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can select a driving operation suitable for the player.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c is provided, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is not provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have a shape that has never been seen before, can be seen in the area where the player is playing, giving a strong impact to the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play at the pachinko machine 1, and to encourage the players who are roaming around the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, when operating the handle 195, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained and amused by the new sensation of operating the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and outputs a performance sound from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to The air inside the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 is caused by sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 transfer the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in the gaming area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 can be supplied to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , it is possible to surprise the player, foreshadow the arrival of an opportunity, and change the amount of operation of the handle, thereby entertaining the player and making it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the hands and fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, the stress on the player can be alleviated and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, as described above, the handle 195 and The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle cover unit 290 is provided, is absorbed by the grill member 46. Since the stimulation is guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various sensors provided on the handle 195 (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc., it is possible to make the handle unit 180 difficult to damage, and the damage to the handle unit 180 can cause injury to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer circumferential ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to a steering wheel of a car, so it is similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine that allows players to play without hesitation. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

Furthermore, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a downwardly facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Because of the provision of the This makes it possible to give a feeling of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, which reduces the player's anxiety about inserting his or her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and makes the player feel more comfortable. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a penetrating notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened toward the front, even if liquid such as a drink or the game ball B gets into the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for liquid etc. discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of handle cover 295 having the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub part 195a allows the handle to be grasped and operated with the hand, similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the spoke part 195b allows the operation to be performed using only the fingers. The handle cover unit can be operated by using the portion 195c like a steering wheel of a car, by gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b by putting your fingers on the outer ring portion 195c, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which operations such as pinching the inside and outside of the ball 290 with fingers can be performed, and various driving operations (handle operations) for driving game balls B can be performed. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate depending on the game state, the player's state, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to The user can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b may be gripped with fingers, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, it is also possible to perform handle operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to provide players with a wide variety of handle operations. , it is possible to make steering wheel operations more enjoyable and prevent players from getting bored.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance in which the handle 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a good appearance and attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. By suppressing the upward pressure on the gaming area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to avoid narrowing the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a relatively large. The large gaming area 5a allows the pachinko machine 1 to stand out, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the light-emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c is not obstructed by the player's hands, making the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c more noticeable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look bad, and the door frame 3 can have a good look.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring part 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also includes a flange part 291e and a flange part 291e that restricts movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring part 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke parts 195b and the outer ring part 195c Even if the handle 195 is touched, the game ball B can be driven in, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made capable of a variety of driving operations (handle operations) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 having a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is attached to and protrudes forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) that is attached to the right side of the mounting base, and a ball that is attached to the top of the mounting base. A rental operation unit 220, an upper plate ball pre-extraction unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit, It is equipped with

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, a plate left decoration unit 270 and A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touched and operated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, and an operation section base 315. An annular production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320, and an operation part attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A relay board unit 330 is provided.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 350 that can protrude upward from the production operation cover unit 310 and is provided with the production operation unit 301, and a production operation unit 350 that is attached to the operation base 315 to operate the production operation. A production operation part lifting mechanism 360 that supports the production operation part unit 350 so as to be able to rise and fall, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. There is.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than in the left and right center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guiding passage section 201a (FIG. 73) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a when viewed from the front sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled into the tray unit 200, its bottom surface extends from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls on it), the game ball B can remove static electricity.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. It is a sectional view showing the main part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of the product of this example and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that vertically penetrates through the bottom wall and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided at the front of the center axis. The lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape extending straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the lower plate ball supply port 211j is configured to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202b, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265, the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed. Since the ball extraction hole 202b and the ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower tray 202, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B from inside the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are transferred to the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the details will be described later, but as shown in FIG. It is tilted to. To be more specific, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow therethrough. It is tilted diagonally forward to the left so that the distance is the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis line (the line shown by the dashed line) of the rear end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c (the ball discharge port 150d). I am moving it to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower plate 202 (the part of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a moves to the left. With 202a closed, the game balls B can be prevented from being concentrated and stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply is stopped. Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends diagonally and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which the game balls B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray ball The game ball B released from the post-ejection unit 240 (ball ejection guiding path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. This allows the game balls B to be properly stored throughout the lower tray 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area left in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front surface of the pan unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a pan unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the pan unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper plate ball operating unit 220 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-bulb removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. An upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) is provided, which extends vertically through the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the upper tray by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222. After the ball is removed, the ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211a is located in front of the ball socket (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the plate base unit 210, and The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball socket of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Moreover, the tray unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guide part 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower tray 202 to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guide section 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left side of the lower tray 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50(a), this ball guide portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower ball supply port 211c. Specifically, the ball guide portion 213 forms a left inner wall that faces the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c formed in a cylindrical shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guiding portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the tray unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower tray 202) and the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. A distance (gap) is created that allows for the flow of water. As a result, when the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guide section 241c from the upper tray 201 comes into contact with the ball guide section 213 from the right side, it will be guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide section 213, and the game ball B will be guided to the left front by the slope of the ball guide section 213. The ball B can be guided to the left end side of the lower tray 202, which is away from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202. In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball removal hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j in a conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, so that the ball is guided by the ball extraction guide path 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the left inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it will roll forward while bouncing to the right, and will be sent to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b in the lower tray 202. Instead, they are stored in the right area of the lower tray 202 where the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of game balls B (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) is concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, and If the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will not be released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, and the tank will not be full. There is a possibility that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and it will be determined that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the ball guide part 213 is provided, the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guide part 241c is guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. can do. In addition, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply Pass between the left side wall of the opening 211c (ball guide section 213) and the rear end of the lower tray 202, and from the foul cover unit 150 (ball ejection port 150d) or the upper tray ball extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c). The game balls B released to the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be stored throughout the lower tray 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In order to support the above-mentioned effects, the inventors of the present application have found that when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, the amount of water stored in the lower tray 202 of the product of this embodiment and the conventional product is The number of game balls B was counted. Game balls B were counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the lower tray 202 of this embodiment (the product of this embodiment) had a higher number of stored game balls B than the conventional product in all rounds. It was confirmed that it was possible to store approximately 40% more game balls B on average than the conventional product.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays connections between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The pan unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the pan unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and pays cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine can be displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the machine after deducting the amount for the loaned game balls B, to adjust the volume, and to adjust the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball extraction button 222 arranged near the left end of the top surface of the base part 221, and a button on the top surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is placed on the right side of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and a ball lending button 224 is placed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 located at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221. It includes a volume adjustment button 227 placed in front and a light amount adjustment button 228 placed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the word "ball" written on its top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen from the player side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section 226 when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sounds for production such as music, voices, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. This volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The area has a pattern that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the volume adjustment button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume increases, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume decreases.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light intensity of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The part has a light bulb pattern on it. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. This light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes darker when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light control button 228 is black) to make it difficult for players to confuse them.

By the way, when the volume and light intensity are adjusted using the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301, the player participation type production that requires the operation of the production operation section 301 is not executed. At times, by operating the effect operation section 301 as appropriate, a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light intensity, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation section 302 is operated. This requires changing the volume of the volume, the brightness of the light amount, etc., and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and light amount. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be directly adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity is It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before upper plate ball removal and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 49. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A spring (not shown) that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward and then backward on the rear surface of the rear base 241; It is provided with a ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides it to the right in rear view.

The ball socket opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 enter the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiver (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the actuation receiver. A protruding operation transmission portion 242b is provided. The operation receiver has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operating receiving part penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an upper plate ball extracting member on the upper surface of the operating receiving part. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact with it. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can be moved downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 positions the upper plate ball removal slider 242 at the upward movement end due to the biasing force of the spring, and removes the upper plate ball via the operation receiving part of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The eject button 222 is located at the end of the upward movement. Furthermore, since the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the batted ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 moves downward and comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the ball extractor 143 can now move downward, and the ball extractor 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extractor 143, and the partition portion 143a is connected to the entrance port 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b are ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction member 143 returns to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 feeds the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharges them to the lower tray 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, when the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located at the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. is provided with a lower front decoration part 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A plate left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulges 252a, respectively.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a production operation unit attachment part to which the production operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left and right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 27, 50, and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal cover is aligned with the lower plate ball removal button 263. 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the ball in the lower plate 202 is inserted through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200.

Note that when the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. returns to its normal position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The plate left decoration unit 270 includes a plate left decoration body 271 that has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has translucency, and a plate left decoration body that has translucency that penetrates the plate left decoration body 271. It includes a lens 272 and a plate left decorative board 273 that is provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, its left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate left decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate left decoration board 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate right decoration unit 275 includes a plate right decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has translucency, and a plate right decoration body 276 that has translucency and passes through the plate right decoration body 276. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 which is provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate right decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decorative body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 sides are higher. As a result, the player can hook his/her finger using the level difference between the plate left decorative unit 270, the plate right decorative unit 275, and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 can be evened out. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 52(a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front bottom. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upward moving end position, and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the unit has moved to the raised position. FIG. 56 is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downwardly moving end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. (vibration), and allows the player to participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 is provided above a pressing operation section 303. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 of the outer diameter of the production operation unit 300.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200 and has a spherical outer shape, and a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is attached to the outside and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a performance operation unit mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and used to decorate the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (upper unit cover 312) with light. An outer peripheral decorative board 320, an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operating unit base 315 so as to cover the production operating unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and an operating unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operating unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the production operation unit 350, and the production operation unit 350. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be movable upwardly and backwardly from the top surface of the production operation section cover unit 310 by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting section of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation section base 315. The production operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the production operation unit 300 (around the production operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upwardly and backwardly, and an annular structure having an insertion hole 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and into which the production operation section 301 is inserted. A unit upper cover 312 is provided. The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the production operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the performance operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The production operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately 1/2 the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 has at least a unit upper cover 312 having translucency, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. Further, the performance operation section cover unit 310 is connected such that a plate left decoration body 271 and a plate right decoration body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 is covered with a unit lower cover 311 on the front and lower side, and is covered with a unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301 on the upper side. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operating unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a that is open at the top, and a flange 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates a performance operation unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in a production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Furthermore, a board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange part 315b so as to sandwich the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 315. The operation section relay board unit 330 covers a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315, an operation section relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation section relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333 is attached to the board base 331 as shown in FIG.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), an outer button decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. It relays connections between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, and the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation section unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the production operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303. It is.

The production operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 352 that is inserted into the button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disc-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to be raised and lowered by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button base 354 arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular outer button decoration board 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

The production operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is connected to the button sleeve 353 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface part 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a cylindrical cylindrical part 351b extending downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface part 351a, and a cylindrical part 351b. It has a locking part 351c projecting downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape constituting a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular decoration having a diameter approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation section cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed into a dish shape with an inner side bulging upward by a certain width from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and has a flat inner side. This makes the contact sensing body 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat plate-like downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punched metal, so that the capacitance relative to the entire area is suppressed, thereby preventing false detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decorative board 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 can be easily detected. It can be decorated with light emitting light.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the top or side surface of the button body 351. I can do it. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The sleeve body 353a has an outer diameter that is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and a length that is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit the light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is in the shape of a disc having approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that are symmetrical with respect to the center and that extend vertically through the center, a center hole 354b that extends vertically through the center, and a center hole 354b that projects from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. A pair of guide pins 354c are provided. The guide shafts 362 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The center hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 further includes a flat detection piece 354d that extends downward and is detected by a press detection sensor 373 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The button base 354 has a lower surface in contact with the upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The outer button decorative board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on double concentric circumferences. Specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration board 355, the area on the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact sensing body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the production operation section 301 moves forward and backward. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation section 301 (performance operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, vibrations from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the performance operation section 301 in a good manner. Furthermore, the influence of the vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and the sensor IC and output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects capacitance with a sensor electrode, and outputs an ON signal when a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor is exceeded. Note that in this embodiment, an ON signal is output when a predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of levels of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The production operation unit 350 of this embodiment includes a contact detection body 352 that is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 and is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 can be detected via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the production operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button body It is possible to detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351. For this reason, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the touch operation section 302 using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

This production operation section unit 350 is supported by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to rise and fall in the vertical direction. When the production operation section unit 350 is in the most downwardly moved state (normal state), the top surface part 351a of the button body 351 is aligned with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310, and the production operation section unit 350 is not operated. The unit 300 appears to be one sphere. Then, when the production operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state in which it protrudes higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

To be more specific, when the production operation unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it will not move further downwards even if it is pressed, and is in a state where it cannot be pressed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the press. Detected by sensor 373. As a result, a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is detected.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, when operating the contact operation unit 302, the top surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal which has irregularities due to a plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation section 302. In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is covered by the button body 351, by forming minute irregularities, a plurality of lines, etc. on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be provided to the touch operation part 302. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation section 302, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the performance operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is preferable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation base 315, and is capable of raising and lowering the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the main body 315a of the operation base 315 below the performance operation unit 350 and has an approximately circular outer periphery. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically and have lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362, a disc-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and a disc-shaped upper base 363 that is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and emits light upward. It includes a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and which urges the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an operation button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and an operating button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating and lowering drive motor 367. A driving gear 368 in the form of a spur gear, a driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the driving gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a driven gear 369 that is rotated by the driven gear 369. and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 has a lower end connected to an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough and is rotatably attached to the elevating cam that raises and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the press operation unit 303, and an elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation detection sensor 374 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361 and a holding member under the elevation spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380. A protrusion force detection sensor 375 that detects the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the stage 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base main body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base main body 361a, and a lifting spring that passes through the base main body 361a together with a pair of guide shafts 362. 365 through a pair of through holes 361c. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion force detection sensor 375 are attached to the top surface of the base body 361a. Furthermore, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. By bringing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button interior decorative board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration board 364 can decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light as appropriate.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through the center thereof. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a rotates counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (presentation operation unit 350) is biased upward by the elevating spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Furthermore, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a portion that faces the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the upper protrusion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the production operation section unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 becomes in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates. When the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 350. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the coupling portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370. The rotational position of is detected.

The ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit 350 in a vertically movable manner via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and also supports the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The performance operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through the above. In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) relative to the production operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. can be done. Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can decorate the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration board 364 as appropriate.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is latched to a locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a) ). In this normal state, the production operation unit 350 is located at the end of downward movement via the button base 354, and even if the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the production operation cannot be performed. The lower unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit top cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350 match, and the production operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevation drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 in the normal state (the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), it engages with the elevation drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 371c to the left side of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

Note that the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact with, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381, although details will be described later. can. Since the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the holding member 385 under the lifting spring, the production operation unit 350 is raised with a protruding force corresponding to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. It can be projected into position.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the top surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is lowered from the top surface of the unit upper cover 312. It also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lift spring 365 in this raised position, the production operation unit 350 presses the lift spring 365. The button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( A press on the press operation section 303) is detected.

In order to return the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so the third cam 371e moves the guide pin 354c is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward via the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In addition, when returning the production operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381 of the ejecting force adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also decreases. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and to reduce damage (failure) to the operation button lift drive motor 367. Further, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the button base 354 stops moving downward, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the production operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In addition, in the above, in the production operation part elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( Although an example has been described in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project from the lowered position to the raised position at once, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved from the lifting cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of 371 and moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a clockwise direction when viewed from above. It may also be rotated in the circumferential direction. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 354c to the third cam 371e. It will move upward along. When the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 can be moved upwardly at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 is pushed to the pressing operation section 303. It can function as

Note that when the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. Thereby, the load applied to the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be made lighter.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation section unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2004 or By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. can.

In addition, at least one shallow recessed portion capable of locking the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be stably projected to a position with the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least in one location in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the elevating cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the force (of force) for the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) to protrude upward by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward. It is possible to change the ejection force (ejection force). The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, and a pinion gear in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. The adjusting screw 384 has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; 384, a pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and lower ends of a pair of lift springs 365 are in contact with a holding member 385 under the lift spring.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft protruding into a gap between the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in the vertical direction. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a that extends back and forth, a threaded hole 385b that vertically passes through the center of the main body 385a and is threadedly engaged with the screw part 384b, and It has a downwardly recessed spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . In the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385, the guide shaft 362 passes through the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 to rotate the adjustment screw 384, thereby moving the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction through the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

When the elevating force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the elevating spring lower holding member 385 upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 increases. Become. On the other hand, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 to urge the production operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Accordingly, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation section unit 350 upward can be reduced. Thereby, the upward protrusion force of the production operation section unit 350 can be adjusted by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the highest level. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 is the largest. As a result, when the ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is moved by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. By stopping the upward movement of the lifting spring 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 as appropriate, so when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button body. 351 is detected, and the performance operation unit 350 is projected by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the detected target. At times, the protruding force of the button body 351 may be varied by appropriately selecting the vertical position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, it is possible to vary the strength applied to the player's fingers, etc., so that when the button body 351 makes strong contact, something good may happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that this is the case, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game. Therefore, according to the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the gaming state (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005) By increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the button body 351, it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest to the player.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by adding twist to the spring. However, in order to make the production operation unit 350 protrude, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it will be difficult to use it differently from the original use. This causes stress to act on the compression coil spring, leading to early deterioration of the internal structure and risk of damage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. Stable protrusion can be achieved over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed into a spherical shape as a whole, and includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by the player. The production operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing. The contact operation section 302 is provided above the press operation section 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 in such a state that the projection direction of the press operation section 303 (the performance operation section unit 350) which can protrude upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the production operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300. Thereby, the production operation section 301 is easily visible to a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the presentation operation unit 300, the press operation section 303 (the presentation operation section unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the presentation operation section unit 350 is This corresponds to the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the press operation section 303 is pressed downward, the press operation section 303 (performance operation section unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 appears to the player as a mere spherical decoration, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 disposed below a unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the press operation section 303 (production operation section unit 350). An annular outer-button decorative board 355 is arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and an inner-button decorative board 364 is arranged further inside thereof. The production operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button inner decoration board 364, the button outer decoration board 355, and the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Note that the LEDs 355a inside the inner button decorative board 364 and the outer button decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, the light transmittance is improved. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (towards the player) in a good manner.

The performance operation unit 300 can decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 with light emission using the LED 320a of the performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Moreover, the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer peripheral surface can be decorated with light by the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355. Further, the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 can be decorated with light by the LED 364a of the button interior decoration board 364.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the production operation section outer circumference decorative board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inside decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, so that By sequentially emitting light, a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the press operation section 303 can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect in which the light spreads from the center of the press operation part 303 to the outside, and a light emission effect in which the light spreads from the outside to the center of the press operation part 303 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a converging light emission effect.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the touch operation section 302 can enable touch operations depending on the player participation type performance to be performed.

As a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance) in which the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is not protruded, for example, a performance image that prompts the user to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs audio, sound effects, etc. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the process moves to the next presentation stage. Note that when a contact is detected, the button body 351 is decorated with light by emitting light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the player has accepted the contact operation. The contact operation unit 302 may be provided with a feeling of operation. At this time, the player's expectations for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game) are determined by the light emitting color, light emitting brightness, light emitting pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation section 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the touch operation has been accepted. Note that at this time, the vibration motor 356 may be used to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to give the player an indication of their expectations for the game. good.

In addition, as a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance), a performance image that prompts the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and audio, sound effects, etc. are output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (his/her hand or finger) to the top surface of the button body 351, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (production operation unit 350). It is caused to protrude upward (pop up) by the biasing force of the spring 365. To be more specific, in a normal state, when the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operating button lifting drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves toward the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), and due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the production operation section unit 350 (button body 351, press operation section 303) together with the button base 354 forcefully protrudes upward to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is positioned higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player. It can strongly attract interest.

Thereafter, the game moves to an effect in which the button body 351 (press operation section 303) is pressed, and the player is entertained by pressing the button body 351 (press operation section 303). To be more specific, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and pressing the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved. As the button body 351 moves downward, the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the performance can be changed using the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with a player participation type performance.

In addition, during the above performance, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or weakens the protrusion force (force) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, thereby adjusting the player's expectations for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion force. It is also possible to make it suggest. Furthermore, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In a performance that causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the movement range (within the protrusion range) of the button body 351 that projects upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like, giving a shock, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, and the strength of the protrusion force may indicate to the player the level of expectation for the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the contact detection body 352 detects whether the player's finger or the like is outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user approaches the user. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers, etc., so the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, and the degree of expectation for the game is indicated to the player by the strength or weakness of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation section unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is made to protrude with a strong protrusion force by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully and generate a sound (protrusion sound), so the protrusion sound may surprise the player. I can do it. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made to protrude with a weak protrusion force using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 protrudes. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

For the performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the urging force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is It may also be possible to perform an effect that causes the user to perform a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as a performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, a performance such as a touch operation on the protruding button body 351 may be performed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated by contact. In addition, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby making it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move. 302) can be easily touched.

In addition, as for the effect of protruding the effect operation part unit 350, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Although an example has been shown in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b (locking part 371c) to the second cam 371d. It is not limited to this.

For example, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 can be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to move the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 can be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, so that the button body 351 stops protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude partway through the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the press operation section 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, expectations for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain players.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the protruding production operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the production operation unit 350 is protruded, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. to its minimum state. As a result, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is at its weakest, so the production operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation. Can entertain. In addition, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the holding member 385 under the vertical movement spring 365 is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The biasing force may be set to any strength from the strongest to the weakest. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a more variety of functions can be played. It is possible to present effects and make it difficult for players to get bored.

In addition, as a performance using the performance operation unit 300, a contact detection body is installed so that the contact of a player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of levels of threshold values may be provided according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each level. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 increases as the player's finger approaches the button body 351 (contact sensing body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. By providing a multi-stage detection, it may be used for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, or the game By dividing the presentation into stages such as when the player's hand or finger is in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the presentation according to each stage, a variety of presentations can be presented to the player even with a single contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it possible to make it difficult for players to get bored of the game, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), as shown in FIG. It may also be in a state where it is moved downward. Thereby, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365. Moreover, the urging force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the holding member 385 under the lifting spring.

In this way, the performance operation unit 300 of the present embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation type performances, so it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performances, and to keep the players from getting bored. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, in the production operation unit 300, an annular (two circular arcs combined) production operation part outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided on the top of a spherical production operation part cover unit 310, and a production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the performance operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative board 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the production operation section unit 350, a button decoration board 364 whose position is fixed is provided. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the production operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation part outer circumference decorative board 320 and button inner decoration board 364, and as the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 and button inner decoration board 364 approach, the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield is connected to the ground (GND) between the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 or button inner decoration board 364 changes by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down, the contact detection sensor main body 358 A shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the production operation part outer circumference decorative board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 allows the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 to It is possible to reduce the influence of changes in capacitance due to the proximity of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent false detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Next, a dish unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of a production operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between the plate unit and the plate unit, and (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plate left decoration unit, a plate right decoration unit, a production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the production is performed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the operation unit and the like. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right parts, a left contact detection body 390L and a right contact detection body 390R. A left contact detection sensor body 391L and a right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when the player moves his or her fingers from the left side to the right side on the top surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes sensing, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-sensing. becomes. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both 391R on the right are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-sensing, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R returns to its original value. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. is determined by the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, and the patterns of their changes. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player participatory performance that allows the contact operation section 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the touch operation section 302. Note that by adding more contact detectors, more complex motions can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact by a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, any one of them will be detected. Contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation section 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, parts where the player may get injured, parts that may cause trouble to other players). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent activity, etc.), and when any contact detection body 393 detects a human body, etc., a caution or a warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switch between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired part (contact detection body 352). . Note that the switching unit 394 may be ``a device that is switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor,'' ``a device that is switched by another electronic circuit,'' or ``a movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c). unit 270, plate right decoration unit 275, and effect operation unit 300) that are switched as the unit 270 moves, etc.

For example, in the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type performance is executed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 in the order in which they are touched, and the contact detection bodies 393 detect whether or not the player's finger or the like has touched the contact detection bodies 393. good. Thereby, it is possible to present to the player a highly game-like, player-participatory performance using the plurality of contact sensing bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300 are made to be able to move forward and backward, the first plate is placed on the front side of the production operation unit 300. In addition to providing the contact detection body 393a, a second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are to be retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. It may also be possible to switch it so that it does.

As a result, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player, and the forward movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. Make it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressuring the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed at the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc., and when the player's finger or the like is inserted into the gap, the production operation unit 300 etc. If the operation unit 300 and the like are moved back to the initial position, there is a risk that the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving the production operation unit 300 and the like that have been moved forward to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's hand, etc., the movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. to the rear is stopped and the hand, etc. is removed from the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc. The player is notified of the guidance, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the production operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 that detects the contact of a player's finger or the like is star-shaped, so that it has decorativeness (design). Note that the shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a shape imitating a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, etc. As a result, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has a decorative property (design property), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be formed of a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as above can be achieved. It should be noted that it is desirable to provide the contact sensing element on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers and the like do not touch it directly.This can avoid wear of the contact sensing element and also improve the tactile sensation with the surface member. It can be made smooth.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the button decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact sensing body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), A contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the production operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(b), the contact sensing body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the decorative body 398 provided below is not visible due to the metallic luster of the contact sensing body 397. , the decoration 398 may be made visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 when contact with the surface member 396 is detected. good.

Further, the contact sensing body 352 may be formed so as to be unrecognizable to the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact sensing body include "one formed of a transparent member" and "one formed so as to be visible integrally with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body". As a result, the production operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot detect the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of a finger or the like with respect to the player or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and a player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the side, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detection body 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest. I can do it.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is a sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame left side base 421. The decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame has a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and the lower part of the front side of the left side base 421 of the door frame. The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are covered with a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front side. a left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423; A door frame left side decoration body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and an upper and lower left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. A left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light forward from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and a first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. and a lower left side light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similar to the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the left side base 421 of the door frame are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). In addition, when molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. An LED 422b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 422a and 8 second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

On the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three groups: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, a total of 15 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, there are two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and the right side is formed to be uneven. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. An LED 423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups. Thus, a total of 21 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a comes into contact with the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 424a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, which will be described later. It is. This holding tube 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, at the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the holding tube 424b, the second part of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing from the through hole 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated onto the light guide shaft 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a comes into contact with the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 425a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guiding member 428 and a cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guiding member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. This holds the light guiding shaft portion 428a and the light guiding shaft portion 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which is facing closer, is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides, and the left side of the door frame is illuminated with equal light intensity. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decoration body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. The left side decoration body 426 of the door frame further includes a decoration part 426b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft parts 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 427a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft parts 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 428a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 428a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft parts 429a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 429b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 429a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This lower left side light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed in the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward than a lower portion, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. This door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end below the door window 101a and the pan unit base 210 of the pan base unit 210. The speaker port 211b is located above the speaker port 211b. Moreover, the upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are placed at a position a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. , the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light is emitted from the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame. is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. (light), the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than other parts.

In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft part 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, and the middle left side light guiding member 428 The light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side lower light guide member 429 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides. Even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows will be difficult to see, and the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame will not be evenly spaced. It can be decorated with light emitting light on a surface.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decoration body 426 has a decoration part 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, and light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 due to the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, Since the decorative part 426b is provided in the area where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft part 427a, the light guide shaft part 428a, and the light guide shaft part 429a can be made difficult to see. The appearance of the light emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along the line A-H in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front are mounted, and the lower part of the front of the right side base 431 of the door frame. A lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, an upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and a lower decorative board 432 on the lower right side of the door frame. A right side reflector 434 is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433, and a right side reflector 434 of the door frame is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration body 435.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432. A right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a having a predetermined shape and penetrating left and right. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431, and is configured to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A right-side left lens 439 having translucent properties and a decorative portion 439a to be fitted therein, and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439 having a translucent property and having a decorative portion 439a fitted thereto, and a plurality of lenses that are attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A right-side right lens 441 having a light-transmitting property and having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close a decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width from side to side. In addition, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends downward from the upper end almost straight to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439, and a right side right lens). A plurality of reflector parts 431a are provided at the height where the decorative parts 441a) are provided, and are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end. These reflector parts 431a have a rear end side that is inside the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a that is inclined toward the side surface side, and a bottom surface that is curved.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is , penetrates in the left and right direction (concave from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the right side base 431 of the door frame reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and a third LED 433c of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction to decorate the decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, and a third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 16 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 432a, 8 second LEDs 432b, and 4 third LEDs 432c, are mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so each first LED 432a, second LED 432b, Since the third LED 432c and the third LED 432c each emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 21 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the LED driver 432d on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later, The third LED 433c is divided into two groups, and a total of 24 systems, including three systems for one group on the upper side, are controlled.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires and one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 groups, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 2 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 LEDs on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The upper two third LEDs 433c of the divided groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and a third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 22 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 433a, which is provided with second LEDs 433b on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between them) of the second LEDs 433b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c, so each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, In order to cause each of the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 27 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame can only control up to 24 systems at maximum, the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame has the third LED 433c divided into two groups. Of these, three systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side) 2) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has two wires that supply power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one control signal line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to the main clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of Each group includes 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups. Each can be made to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a comes into contact with the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The sides are shaped like a saucer that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. This is to hold the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame facing from the through hole 434a on both upper and lower sides of the light guiding shaft 436a and the light guiding shaft 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward. The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides, so that the right side decorative body of the door frame It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the light guide shaft 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decoration body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426. Furthermore, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further includes a decoration part 435b that has a certain shape recessed in an arc and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft parts 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 436a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding tubes 434b from the top of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip end surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This upper right side light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 436a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft parts 437a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 437b that connects the lower ends of the six light guide shaft parts 437a. , made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the decorative body 435. This lower right side light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 437a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a front end formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inside (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). When the decorative portion 439a is fitted into the decorative hole 438a, its surface coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 439a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. This door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed so that its vertical direction is approximately the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Moreover, the front end side of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame right side left side decorative body 438, has an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. It is molded in two colors using two types of resin, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and protrudes to the right to attach to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). When the decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a, its surface coincides with the outside (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (see FIG. 70). The right lens 441 on the right side is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and is connected to the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration of the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 441a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern parts on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are different from those on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial pattern part on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes more forward than a portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from the upper end to the lower end. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely protrudes forward from the top to approximately half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side to see the inside of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) in the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed into a screen shape, it can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. By making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without worrying about it.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. , the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 and a door frame right side lower decorative board. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (light guided) forward by the light guide shaft part 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft part 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a dotted manner brighter than other parts.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 lights up the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, thereby changing the reflector part of the door frame right side base 431. 431a, the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the decorative part 439a of the right side right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame is fitted into the decorative hole 439a. The decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side can be decorated with light emission. Furthermore, since parts of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a) can be decorated with light, other players cannot see this pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can stand out and has high appeal to players.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Because of the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b is transmitted to the rear door. The frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are illuminated to decorate with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front side. It can be used to decorate or prevent luminescence. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435, the rear door frame right side left side decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be completely independently illuminated and decorated, so It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light-emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, a first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and a light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides, so that the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame is illuminated with light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be evenly illuminated in a planar manner.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side decorative body 435 with a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decoration body 435 due to the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows will not be projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the area where the light guide shaft 435b is located, it is possible to make the shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a difficult to see, thereby improving the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the left side door frame unit 420 and the right side unit 430, respectively.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top and bottom plate (not shown) are connected to the bottom end of the door frame.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration 451 to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker. It includes a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from above, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top cover 452 when viewed from above. Further, the door frame top decoration body 453 has a front surface formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending from side to side. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 457a to emit light.

A pair of top center speakers are provided spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters and output high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a portion behind the inside of the upper parts of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. has been done. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71, and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the unit upper cover 312 and button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are semi-tubular. Because of this, the entire circumference of the door window 101a can be seen as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights to the player.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration body 271, a plate right decoration body 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration body 426, a door frame right side decoration body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration body 453, a plate left decorative board 273, a plate right decorative board 278, a production operation section outer circumference decorative board 320, a left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By causing the LEDs to emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, and a light emitting effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, since the large spherical production operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200, the visual impact can be increased. This allows the operation section 303) to stand out.

In addition, in a normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 as the production operation section 301 is continuously aligned with the top surface of the unit top cover 312, forming one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable. It is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from a pachinko machine, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to increase the appeal to the players. It is possible to make it easier to select machine 1.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300, the production operation section 301 (contact operation section 302 The upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entire performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, and the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical performance operation section 301, and it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of a player participation type performance in which the player operates the performance operation section 301. In addition, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, thereby making it more interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, a door frame right side unit 430 is shown as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 as an example.

To be more specific, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the outer surface of the door frame 3 are made of two different colors and two types of synthetic resins with different translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, with a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, circular or radial patterns are formed.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a is visible, and the opaque outer layer 3b is visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior with an emphasized circular or radial pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern on the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, making it relatively circular and Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior appearance emphasizes the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a.

In addition, in FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration part 441a fitted into the decoration hole 440a is part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthetic By appropriately selecting and combining the color, light transmittance, etc. of the resin (resin), it is possible to make the appearance significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without incurring any cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, by changing the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot, and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look for players. It is possible to increase the appeal of

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame molded in two colors. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiments, circular or radial patterns are formed, but the invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295 provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the left side of the right side of the door frame. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and a polka dot pattern decoration is created by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is also applied to the decorative body at the same time. There is no need to apply desired decorations by painting or the like after the formation, and the effort required for decorations can be omitted and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outside appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the circle of the polka dot pattern and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. If they are formed using the same color with different ratios, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are of the same color, giving the appearance that the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b will cause The polka dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka dots. In this way, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. Costs can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and pachinko machines 1 from different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment becomes colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can give a strong impact to players who are roaming around the game hall and can attract players.

Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances is provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward in the door frame 3, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, etc. are provided, so the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorative bodies to improve the appearance. I can do it.

Furthermore, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made transparent so that it cannot be seen from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin with high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body to be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, the surface of the inner layer 3a can be patterned (patterned by shape, painted, printed, pasted with a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and when the model is changed, a transparent outer layer 3b is applied. By using a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , it is possible to suppress the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, a third LED 432c of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and a lower decorative board on the right side of the door frame are capable of irradiating light inside the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame. 433 third LEDs 433c, and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the door frame 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is illuminated. The part of the layer 3a (the polka dot part) can be decorated with bright light, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light to improve the appearance. The light-emitting decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be enjoyed, and a decline in player's interest can be suppressed.

Also, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be decorated with light by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that are irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be decorated with light emitting light, and the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame can be made to look beautiful for games. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the attention of players.

Further, as described above, the decorations of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances. (molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c may emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface or the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the player is not in use can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is emitting light, and by changing the decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player. To explain in detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a at a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED will not emit light. In this state, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the part of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed, so that the inner layer is exposed to the surface of the outer layer 3b. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion become visible, and a different decoration is visible than when the LED is not emitting light. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is decorated with light. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light, so depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED, the decoration is decorated with light. It is possible to change the parts that are decorated with light, and the decoration that is decorated with luminescence can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decoration body can be made different by emitting light from the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED light up according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorations can alert the player to the arrival of a chance or a change in the hitting operation (for example, hitting right). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to suggest and can perform a variety of performances.

In addition, since the amount of protrusion in the front and rear direction of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) is different, Since the impression (view) of this pachinko machine 1 can be made different when viewed from the front left and from the front right, the pachinko machine 1 can be played around the game hall where it is installed. Even if a player passes in front of this pachinko machine 1, when approaching this pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1 will be drawn because the appearance will be different from the previous time. This makes it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players who are roaming around the game hall to select a pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by rotating the handle 195 by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b. It has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel.

In the handle 195, the front side of a central hub portion 195a is covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. It is divided into 5 groups: 1, 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery, and 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by broken lines in FIG. 72: two on the lower left from the center, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into six groups: the two on the bottom right and the two on the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the handle 195 or to direct the light toward the center of the handle 195. A light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated or a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be decorated with light by the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decoration 435 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are semi-tubular. Because of this, the player can see the decoration as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A lower side decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

To be more specific, the plate left decorative board 273 includes four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LED 273a of the plate right decorative board 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 273a are controlled by six systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The plate right decorative board 278 includes four LEDs 278a mounted on the front side in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED drivers on the plate left decorative board 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for causing a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, there are four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b are mounted, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. A first LED 432a divided into two sets, a second LED 432b divided into three sets, a third LED 432c divided into two sets, and a third LED divided into two sets on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The upper set of third LEDs 433c among the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and third LED 433c of each set are controlled by an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

On the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front side arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b are mounted, four third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower side. and an LED driver 433d for causing the light to emit light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and the 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower 1 group divided into 2 groups? , 24 systems are controlled by LED drivers 433d, and each set of first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in an asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the border. Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

Note that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are The numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are arranged symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create data of an LED lighting pattern for performing a light emission effect.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front side at intervals in the left-right direction, and the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the light to emit light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by nine systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is equipped with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two groups, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, The light from the first LED 433a of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is transmitted through the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the lower left side guiding member. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, players can see a light-emitting effect that emits bright light in the form of dots on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light-emitting effect that flashes brightly in spots can make players ``awk''.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the lower left side of the door frame Second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame, LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, top left decorative board of the door frame By making the LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the light can be produced so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to the player.

In other words, in the door frame 3, a light emitting effect is performed in which spot light is emitted on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 using the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface light emission) using the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. 72. I can do it.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and from there forward. Therefore, compared to the general surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the openings 426a and the openings 435a can be spot-emitted with high brightness and brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame is illuminated as a spot with high brightness, the glare will not make it difficult to see inside the gaming area 5a facing from the door window 101a, and the game can be played through the door window 101a. The game balls B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the left side decoration body 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration body 435 are made to protrude forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and emit spot light with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that project forward. Since the light from the spot emission is provided on the vertical line), the light from the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (toward the door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and The inside of the gaming area 5a is not difficult to see, and other players can be drawn to the pachinko machine 1 by emitting spot light with high brightness.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, parts that emit spot light are provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which protrude forward on the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer circumference of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emitting part is located outside of the player, so the player will not block the spot light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the high-intensity spot light is visible even to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to other players about the existence of this pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can attract players who are playing around the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for causing spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft part 427a, light guide shaft part 428a, light guide shaft part 429a, light guide shaft part 436a, and light guide shaft part 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the LEDs for the two surfaces have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the LEDs on the left side of the door frame 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame are illuminated with the same amount of light. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the top surface. A production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided. This production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 of the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, 6 LEDs 320a are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner periphery, and 3 are provided at intervals on a circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer periphery.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322, four LEDs are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided at intervals between the inner and outer circumferences. They are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals of three on the circumference near the outer circumference near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 73, 6 LEDs on the inner circumference, 3 sets of 2 LEDs each in the circumferential direction, and 3 LEDs on the middle circumference. They are divided into 9 groups in total: 3 groups with 1 piece each, and 3 groups with 3 pieces each in the circumferential direction of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference. Furthermore, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. The 3 pieces are divided into 3 groups of 1 piece each, and the 9 pieces on the outer circumference are divided into 2 groups of 3 pieces near each end, for a total of 7 groups. That is, in the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, a light emission production in which the light rotates in the production operation section 301 or a light emission in which light is concentrated in the center can be produced. It is possible to show the player a performance and a light emission performance in which light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the outside of the door window 101a facing the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction is different from each other on the outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. 435, a left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted, and a lower left side decoration on the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted. A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and guides the light from the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forwards it. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 to be irradiated, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the right side of the door frame are provided. By causing the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame to emit light, the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are illuminated. Light emitting decoration (surface luminescence) can be performed in a planar manner, and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light irradiated forward is transmitted to the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is emitted forward from their front ends (front end faces), and the light is emitted forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Corresponding to the tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to decorate the area with dots of light (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. By appropriately emitting light from the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the gaming area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the whole of the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner, or a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emission in dots. Since the entire side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with luminescence in a planar manner, and a portion can be decorated with luminescence in a dotted manner, a variety of luminescence effects can be shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and also to keep the player entertained, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated, and the system on the right side of the door frame. The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated are made bilaterally symmetrical with respect to each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are in different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side When creating the data, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side may be used as the data for the door frame right side decoration 435 side, or the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side and the door frame side may be used. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that on the right side decorative body 435 side, the effort required to create lighting pattern data can be reduced (with the same creation time) ) It becomes easier to construct data for more complex lighting patterns, and it is possible to show players a variety of lighting effects using lighting patterns. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit a sufficient lighting effect for the light emitting effects in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the right and left sides of the door frame 101a.

Further, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the two second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided with the first LED 433a in between are of the same system. , first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b provided in the LEDs 422b, 423b, and 433b are always lit at the same time, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a, the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are illuminated from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly decorated with light in a planar manner.

In addition, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are Parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are decorated with dots of light by the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see a light-emitting effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as emitting light in a planar manner and partially emitting dot-like light. It is possible to strongly attract the attention of players through light-emitting effects, etc., and the light-emitting effects that emit sparkling spots in the form of dots, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, can make players ``ah-ha''. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative board 433 is shaped asymmetrically with respect to each other, at first glance it appears that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame are assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid incorrectly attaching the lower right side decorative board 433, improve assembly workability, and suppress increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Next, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, are shown. The upper side decorative board 432, the lower door frame right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. That's what I do. As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board is reflected to the front side, making it possible to decorate the front decorations etc. with brighter light. This makes the decorative board less noticeable.

Note that the white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identification parts 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification section 7 includes a character identification section 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b using different colors (indicated by different shades of shading in FIG. 74). It has .

To be more specific, as the character identification part 7a, the plate left decorative board 273 has the characters "lower left", the plate right decorative board 278 has the characters "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the characters "upper left". The lower left decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has the characters "lower left," the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "upper right," and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "lower right." The text is "Top Middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "Top Left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "Top Right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification part 7b is applied not to the entire rear surface but only partially so as not to interfere with soldering of LEDs etc. mounted on the decorative board. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In addition, in the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but the various decorative boards provided in the handle unit 180, the production operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc. Identification parts 7 such as character identification part 7a and color identification part 7b may also be provided on the decorative board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification section 7 includes both the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification section 7a may be used. However, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to use a decorative board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during assembly work, and to improve the workability of assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be It is possible to reflect the light to the front side on the front side of the decorative board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light, and the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player's side), improving the appearance. You can make it better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification part 7b serving as the identification part 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, a desired (desired color) can be determined just by looking at a part of the decorative board. ) can recognize whether it is a decorative board or not. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards overlap during assembly, as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, the desired decorative board can be easily found, reducing the time and effort required for assembly. can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative board, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, the same color If there is a decorative board provided with the identification part 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative substrate, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative substrate that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, you can easily recognize whether you have prepared extra decorative boards or not enough decorative boards. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the necessary number of decorative boards, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing from other boards is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the operator can read the characters in the character identification part 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear surfaces of each decorative board are white, and the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface, so that the decorations provided in front of the decorative board have high transparency. Also, the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (player side), and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the white front surface of the decorative board can reflect the light from the LED forward. This makes it possible to decorate the decorative body with brighter light, and to entertain the players with the highly effective light-emitting performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional parts are not visible from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly due to visibility, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration (gaming machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by providing them on the back of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to omit the trouble of coloring the functional parts and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired part where it is desired to detect approach or contact of a player By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired part, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect changes in capacitance, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. In response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392, predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512. On the other hand, when the contact detection body 393 of the desired part and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in other parts and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected. will be disconnected, so even if the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 provided at the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact sensing body 393 will be disconnected. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 are not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 at the desired location is reliably detected. can be used to prevent false detections.

In this way, among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. It becomes possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means, the number of channels involved in detecting the approach or contact of a player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, and the increase in the number of performance means allows players to enjoy a more diverse range of performances. In addition to making it difficult for the players to get bored, it is possible to fully entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 are set at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 depending on the game state. The contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, and control the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to ignore a predetermined caution or alarm by means of this method, it is possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392, and to relatively reduce the number of channels that can be used for production. The number can be increased, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor body containing electronic components such as sensor ICs and output circuits can be installed in areas that are difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players. can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 by simply connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor body 392, the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected to each other. This reduces the number of parts compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. This reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and also eliminates the need for designing the routing of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented.

Further, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact sensing body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can select the contact sensing body 393 to be detected. When a player participatory performance is executed in which a plurality of distributed contact sensing bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection sensor body 392 at the timing when the player touches them in order. By switching the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detectors 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the production operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player comes close to the contact detection body 352 made of a metal plate with the player side covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with 351 (performance operation unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the outside button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating and lowering. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button interior decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the production operation unit 350, a predetermined production is output, so the production operation unit 350 is activated as a non-contact operation unit or It can function as a touch operation section. Since the performance operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed and operated by the player when it is protruded, the performance operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation. Since it is possible to perform a variety of production operations such as operation, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that is different from conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be pressed, and it is easy to embody a pachinko machine 1 that has an appearance that is different from other pachinko machines. By differentiating the pachinko machine from the other machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button body 351). Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the capacitance and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to the time of contact in multiple stages, a performance corresponding to each stage can be output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, so that the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its appeal to players can be increased.

In addition, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of performance operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, so it is possible to perform player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible for the players to enjoy the player participation type performance, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate in which a plurality of holes are formed, the plurality of holes prevent the player from touching the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of a plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact sensing body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance. It is possible to widen the range in which the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is detected. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, so as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged and , when the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing a player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, it is difficult to miss the operation timing in a player participation type performance, and the player can be reliably participated in the player participation type performance. This performance can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as a presentation means provided on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side can be inserted through the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. The light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the medium decorative board 364 can be outputted to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing is provided with a contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even if the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced. 350 can be made less likely to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the production operation unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the production operation unit 350 without any hesitation, and can operate the production operation unit 350. To make a player participatory performance more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact sensing body 352 can be made thinner than when the contact sensing body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to make it easy to provide the contact detection body 352, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, making it more appealing to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be designed easily.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal, so the contact sensing body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be easily shaped into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button body 351, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to the player touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed. In a player participatory performance using the player as an operation part, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the performance can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact sensing body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. Therefore, the effort required for cleaning can be reduced, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side. A predetermined performance can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be It is possible to reliably enjoy the performance outputted through (via) the operation unit 350 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the contact sensing body 352 is provided in such a way that the presentation means is covered by the contact detection body 352, it is possible to compactly organize the contact detection body 352 (the presentation operation section unit 350) and the presentation means, as described above. To provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by making it easy to install a performance operation unit 350 and a performance means etc. in a desired part of the pachinko machine 1, which have the above-mentioned effects. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the performance is activated. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to prevent the player from approaching the performance operation unit 350. Or contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350, the production operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the production operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the production operation unit 350, it will come into contact with (collide with) the player, and the player will be in contact with the production operation unit 350. When the performance operation section unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player a performance using physical force such as pushing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to players with performances that have not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players to the performance operation unit 350. The protrusion of the performance operation section unit 350 can be reliably noticed.

When projecting the production operation unit 350, if the holding member 385 under the elevating spring of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the elevating spring 365 (upward), the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lifting spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes weaker and the urging force can be increased, and the lifting spring 365 is By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the production operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be projected with various protruding forces, it is possible to increase the variation of performances based on physical force, making it difficult for players to get bored, and making it possible to control the performance operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect caused by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the protruding force of the production operation unit 350 is changed depending on the gaming state, when the player approaches or contacts the production operation unit 350 with his or her fingers, a strong force is applied to the production operation unit 350. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, making him think that something good will happen (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is configured as a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player participation type performance is executed, by having the player perform a pressure operation on the performance operation unit 350, the game can be played. The player can participate in the participatory performance, enjoy the pressing operation of the performance operation section unit 350, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible for players who place their hands or fingers on the production operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) to be able to perform the press operation at any time. When a player participatory performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Even without providing guidance on the start of execution of the performance, it is possible to quickly make the player aware of the start of execution of the performance with player participation, and increase the desire to press the performance operation section unit 350 to start the performance with player participation. You can enjoy it even more.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared to the case where the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude using a drive motor. Therefore, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected. Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the production operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and cause the production operation unit 350 to protrude with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 to the time of contact in multiple stages. By making the game stand out with a projecting force, it is possible to present a more diverse range of performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, by causing the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 to pop up when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can enter the performance operation unit 350 that is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. When approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches in the performance operation section unit 350 changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, it is possible to detect contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the detection body 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is activated by the capacitance. Players can be detected. Then, by detection of the contact detection sensor body 358 or movement (pressure) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer button decoration board 355, the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board A predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the performance operation unit 350 or approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest in playing games.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation section unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) is connected to the performance operation section (non-contact operation section, contact operation section). You can make it work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances or retreats (presses) the performance operation unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation unit 350 can function like a performance operation unit (press operation unit). For this reason, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored, and it is also possible to make the players enjoy the player participation type performance, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of a contact detection body 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface part 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact sensing body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined performance are provided, and each It becomes possible to perform different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Further, since a predetermined performance is executed by the player's detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the performance operation (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a sense of operation to the touch operation (contact operation), and it is possible to make the performance operation more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, it includes a performance operation unit 350 that the player can move forward and backward (press), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Therefore, in a player participation type performance, the player is required to perform an operation to move the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (press operation), or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. I can do it. When a player participates in a player participation type production, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player in the participatory performance, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the production operation unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the production operation unit 350 is locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, until a performance such as advancing or retracting the performance operation unit 350 is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is prevented from moving forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking on its own. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel distrustful or anxious due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and making the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable. You can make it possible to

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position apart from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor that has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is difficult for players to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be selected according to the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned functions and effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the production operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. When the user approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396 with the button outer decorative substrate 355, the inner button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the contact sensing element 352 or the contact sensing element 397 The capacitance of the button changes, and a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player side by the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light irradiated to the button, and the performed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398, Since it is formed along the decorative part provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397 is part of the decorative part, and the game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting a player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, it is assumed that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be concerned about the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397, and the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 will not be bothered by the player. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 will not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effects of the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covers the outside of the button. Since the decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 is configured to perform a production in which light is irradiated to the player side, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the production operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and it is also possible to provide the player with a sense of operation using light. Therefore, for example, when executing a player participation type production, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact sensor 352 or the contact sensor 397 approaches or contacts the player's finger or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. By detecting the contact, the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration body 398 executes the effect, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the kata performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Since it is possible to change the effect of the outside button decorative board 355, button inside decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 depending on the distance from the outside button decorative board 355, depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the presentation by the decorative board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button, and it is possible to show a more diverse presentation to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the variety of presentation. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 are detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is configured to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member, so that, for example, When the contact sensing body 397 is made of a metal vapor deposited film, it can be made transparent by making the vapor deposited film thin, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by making the vapor deposited film thick and have a metallic luster. I can do it. Alternatively, if the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punched metal with a design such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection bodies 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable from the player side, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacitance is increased when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front side). As a result of the change, a predetermined effect is produced by the effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact sensing body 395 (including the contact sensing body 352, the left contact sensing body 390L, the right contact sensing body 390R, the contact sensing body 393, the contact sensing body 397, etc.) for displaying the Since the contact sensing body 395 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact sensing body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact sensing body 395. Since the means presents a predetermined effect via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can function as the performance operation section 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the production operation section 301 appears to have a design, which is unlike any previous pachinko machine. Since the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the operation section 301, it can give a strong impact to players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as described above, the touch detection body 395 etc. with a design can give a strong impact to the player, so it is possible to strongly arouse interest in the touch detection body 395 etc. (button body 351). It is possible to increase expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to make the operation of the button body 351 enjoyable when a player participation type performance in which the button body 351 is operated is executed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, some effects may be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the performance operation section 301 (button body 351) for presenting the performance by means of means. Therefore, when a player participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, by prompting the player to approach or touch the button body 351, the button body 351 is first activated by the contact detection body 395, etc. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation section 301, and it is possible to give a surprise to the player and make the player participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player participatory performance is executed by operating the performance operation section 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing that it is the performance operation section 301, the contact detection body 395 etc. may become static. Since the capacitance changes and the performance is presented by the performance presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presentation means in accordance with the change in capacitance in the contact detection body 395 etc., the player's finger or the like does not touch the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized. In addition, since the effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395, etc., contact is caused by the approach of the player's finger, etc. to the button body 351 that covers the contact detection body 395, etc. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making it difficult for the user to get bored with the game.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punched metal, expanded metal, wire mesh, etc. is used as the conductive contact sensing body 395 etc., It is possible to impart a design to the contact sensing body 395, etc., to prevent deterioration in appearance due to the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to make the contact sensing body 395, etc. stand out, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer circumferential shape of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct something with design properties without forming the contact sensing body 395 etc. into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust, food and drink stains, etc. do not adhere to the contact sensing body 395 etc., and the effort required for cleaning is simplified. It can be made into something. To be more specific, since the contact detection body 395 is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drinks easily adheres to the irregularities, and it takes time and effort to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering to the pachinko machine, and as it is easy to clean, the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact sensing body 395 etc., the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a metal vapor deposited film or the like. If a material that enhances the design, such as foil stamping, is used, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by a player, and it is possible to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as mentioned above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact sensing body 395 etc. Since it is possible to use materials that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player as the sensing body 395, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the materials used for the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to meet the needs of the user. The contact sensing body 395 and the like can be formed from a suitable material.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or touching the button body 351 covering the contact sensing body 395 etc., the button body 351 and the contact sensing body 395 Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., it is possible that the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with a finger or the like due to the effect presented via the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc. This allows the player to intuitively recognize the player's actions, and allows the player to enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. Since the effects presented to the player are executed via the button body 351, the contact sensing body 395, etc., the button body 351 can function like a contact operation section, and the presented effects can improve the operational feel. can be given, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can perform multiple operations, the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with his/her finger or the like, and the contact detection body 352 is activated. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 emit light to cause the game to be activated through the button main body 351. A light-emitting effect in which a player is illuminated with light, a effect in which the vibration motor 356 vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with the button body 351 through (via) the button body 351, and a effect that causes the button body 351 to protrude upwards by the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360. As a result, the button body 351 can function as the contact operation section 302, and the player can enjoy it. You can do it. Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the user's desire to operate the button body 351. Then, with the player's finger or the like touching the button body 351, by moving the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303, so that the contact detection object 352 detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., and the pressing operation of the button body 351 allows the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored and keeping the player interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Further, a detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface part 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 will cause the button main body 351 to It is possible to detect the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like with the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit Since the sensor body 358 can be placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353, which is remote from the upper surface part 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be placed in an inconspicuous area. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, there are provided an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation part lifting/lowering mechanism 360, so that light and light can be transmitted to the player through the button main body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily applied, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball firing device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a ball launcher 540 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

The main body frame base 501 also has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 has a main body frame release switch for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch is installed. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinged and rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left and right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment part 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is installed. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86, 87, and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. Can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device taken at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 89(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape open to the rear and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position of about 1/3 height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward to the left in rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper ball removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. is emitted downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b is opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in the normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B will stay and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), the system also controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detecting it. Temporarily stop it until the

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is smaller, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and The space is in communication with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made wider, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (Fig. 96). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a specified number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and is attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and lock the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 98(a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is capable of being inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and is detachable from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and which is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and from the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow part 552f has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to pass through.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This results in changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging part 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging part 553b from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b in a constant direction. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. A detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outside sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the bottom surface A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is covered with overflow. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a position 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir section 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this part. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game balls B spilled outside the main body frame 4 are caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guiding part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, so that the bulging portion 553b is made to extend from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed. Since the game balls B are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and rides on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, since the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view of the tank rail portion of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, viewed from behind. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) 2 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. In the tank rail 553A of the second embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball rectifying member 556A are included in the tank rail 553 of the above embodiment. , the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and similar structures will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c that meanders in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. This meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protective walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends upstream from the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a. It has an opening 555c passing through the cover part 555a between the pair of protection walls 555b. The pair of protection walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a spherical rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A. It has a flat rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A contacts the game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a line. The game ball B is restrained from moving quickly to the downstream side, thereby preventing ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, due to the weight of the electric wire, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A There is a possibility that the ball will not be able to rotate upward, and there is a possibility that the ball rectifying member 556A will not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying effect on the game balls B. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, fully exhibiting the rectifying action, and preventing the ball from biting inside the tank rail 553A. Occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A where the height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in multiple stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the flow velocity of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is possible to prevent the upper game balls B from moving to the downstream side first. This can reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

Furthermore, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Place the terminal board near the terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which electric wires are connected, or arrange the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the main body frame including the tank rail and the like according to the third embodiment, viewed from the rear right and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame including the tank rail and the like according to the third embodiment when viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing the upper part enlarged. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the upper right back, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment seen from the upper right. It is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 116 as seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 116 as seen from the rear.

The tank rail, etc. of the third embodiment is the tank rail, etc. of the first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stop member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of 557), and the same configurations as above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails and the like of this embodiment include a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is box-shaped and open upwards and extends left and right, and a ball tank 552 that extends left and right of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part where the tank is located, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper from the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

This tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that becomes lower in height toward the downstream) through which dirt, dust, etc. within the tank rail 553 can fall. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided below each of a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is open toward the bottom and rear of the tank rail 553, extends left and right, and is formed in a size that cannot allow the game ball B to pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly viewed from behind through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's fingers or a thin stick through the opening 553d. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the ball clogging that has occurred in the area through the opening 553d. In addition, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted up through the opening 553d via the game ball B at the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail, etc. is located to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes off a predetermined range above the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 553 from a spaced part to the left end between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 on the tank rail 553; A ball rectifying member 556 provided between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 , a ball stopper member 557 provided near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 , and a ball stopper member 557 provided in the vicinity of the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 , and the first rail cover 554 . A protective cover 559 straddles the ball rectifying member 556 from halfway in the left-right direction and covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 halfway in the left-right direction.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, on the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one row, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two rows to one row, the game balls B in the upper row are When trying to pass the game balls B in the lower row, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming due to ball jamming). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of this embodiment, when the game balls B are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, inside the tank rail 553, the game balls B on the upper stage side come into contact with the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from trying to overtake the game ball B on the lower side. Thereby, the game balls B on the lower tier side move to the downstream side first, and the game balls B on the upper tier side move behind them, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the upper game ball B presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and its own weight causes the upper game ball to The ball B can be pressed downward, and by vertically swinging the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a), the movement of the upper game ball B to the lower side can be encouraged, and the tank rail It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at this part of 553 (the part whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

The protective cover 559 includes a band-like top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat front plate part 559c extending downward from the front side and left side of the front plate part 559c, and a flat guide plate part 559d extending forward from the front plate part 559c. The top plate part 559a and the guide plate part 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of the portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

When the protective cover 559 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the top plate portion 559a is positioned so as to cover the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction. A space is formed between the ball flow regulating member 556 and the ball flow regulating member 556 to be able to swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends further to the right than the top plate portion 559a, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553. The guiding plate part 559d has a portion on the front side of the top plate part 559a protruding forward from the front plate part 559c by a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to be able to guide the game ball B to the left. has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is sloped more gently than the slope of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a small gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B cannot enter therein.

The protective cover 559 can prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from coming into contact with the outside when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and touching it from below, or by inserting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d with the operator's finger. This can be confirmed by pressing upward with a button or by lifting it via the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which for some reason has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558, to the left by the guide plate portion 559d, so that it can be discharged outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are formed of a transparent material, and are arranged inside the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Furthermore, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, dirt, dust, etc. are prevented from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Furthermore, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is impossible to touch the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B from above. Therefore, if dirt, dust, etc. are attached to the game ball B etc., it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in this embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that the plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom. To be more specific, if dirt or dust is attached to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B inside the tank rail 553, it may come into contact with the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and be removed through the game ball B or the game ball B. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be swayed by the player, dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B etc. can be removed. Then, dirt, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B etc. can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, the portion where the tank rail 553 extends to the left with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided at the rear of the external terminal board 558. When the electric wire connected to contacts the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the weight of the electric wire causes the ball rectifying member 556 to rotate upward even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game balls B by the ball rectifying member 556 may not be fully exerted.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to a wire whose tip has been stripped of its sheath, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the wire connection terminal 558a is connected to the wire connection terminal 558a. If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, there is a risk that a short circuit will occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connecting terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can rotate upward, fully exerting the rectifying action, and controlling the flow inside the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if the wire comes off from the external terminal board 558 for some reason and its tip comes into contact with the game ball B located behind the external terminal board 558, a short circuit will occur and the necessary information will not be transferred to the computer in the game hall. You will not be able to receive them, and there will be an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate part 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body It can be discharged outward from the left side of the frame 4. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit caused by the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding short circuits in the electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 causes the game ball B to be ejected to the left side of the main body frame 4, so that the game ball B is placed behind the main body frame 4. It is possible to avoid problems such as coming into contact with various electric wires and wiring provided on the side and causing disconnections or short circuits.

[4-13. Another embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 620A of an embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a front view of the board unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the back. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cooke line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a sectional view taken along the K-ke line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the above board unit 620 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. An out ball passage 663 is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 flows, and a game where the out ball passage 663 is disposed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball removal guiding section 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in front view. The game balls B guided by the ball removal guide section 627 circulate, and the ball removal passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal passage 665 are closed. and a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open to the front and long from side to side. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide part 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall 662a. In addition, a bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed into a box shape with the rear side of the partition wall 662a open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the insides of the ball removal guiding section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly viewed from the upper and lower sides of the base unit 660, making it easier to check for ball clogging, etc. There is.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 includes a ball discharge receiving section 663a that is open upwardly at approximately the center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a ball discharge receiving section 663a for receiving game balls B received in the ball discharging receiving section 663a. An out ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies the game balls B in a line while meandering greatly in the left and right direction, a downward guiding section 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a line downward by the out ball rectifying section 663b, and a lower end of the downward guiding section 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided at the rear of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed to have a depth in the front-rear direction of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving part 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lower.

The out-ball rectifying section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end side becomes lower toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving section 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the front-rear direction becomes narrower as it goes downstream (to the left), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, it is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. It has depth. In addition, in the part of the out-ball rectifying part 663b that is to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving part 663a, the vertical height decreases as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the part of the ball discharge receiving part 663a that is on the left side is The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out ball rectifying section 663b.

The lower guide part 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying part 663b which is below the ball discharge receiving part 663a, and the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall part) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backwards in a small crank-like curve. As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located further back than the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide portion 663c. The downward guide portion 663c is curved so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a horizontally extending portion. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it will not jump upward toward the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes through.

The ball ejection guiding portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball ejection receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball removal guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opening toward the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream side bent rearward and extending to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the bulb removal passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a in the rear base 662. The bulb removal passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of the game ball B ahead of the rear end of the rear base 662. That is, a gap larger than one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball ejection passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding part 627, and has the same slope as the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is lower than the ball ejection receiving part 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) and a bulb removal outlet 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately protrude inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball discharge passage 665 allows the game balls B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag pattern. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c can be suppressed.

This ball ejecting passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide part 665a and the vertical guide part 665b, so when the ball ejecting lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B from the ball tank 552. , many game balls B can be smoothly guided and ejected.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 The system detects this and discharges it to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (take out) the game balls B from inside the ball tank 552, etc., operate the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 and move the game balls B ejected to the ball removal path 580b side to the out ball path 663. The balls are discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through a ball removal guiding section 627 and a ball removal passageway 665, which are separate and independent from the ball removal guide section 627 and ball removal passageway 665. As a result, only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected accurately. can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to determine the exact number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the number of game balls B hit in the game area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting hole 2005, the first The number of game balls B received in the winning holes such as the big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B received in the winning hole after being hit into the gaming area 5a. This is the sum of the number of game balls B that were received into the out port 1008 and ejected from the game board 5 without being thrown, and the number of game balls B that were hit into the game area 5a (number of fired balls). It is about.

Note that the payout rate (ball rate) changes depending on the gaming status, so the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as follows: number ÷ number of out pitches within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period.

Further, according to this embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is removably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, and The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and since the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, an "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. As a result, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are connected to A pachinko machine 1 in which the influence of electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of game balls B on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and malfunctions caused by the circulation of game balls B are reduced. It can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose distribution speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifier 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game Since a player wants to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is difficult to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of the game board 5 by eliminating the need to provide an out ball detection unit (out ball detection unit), and to secure space on the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing the production device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game ball B can circulate through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage to the inside of the ball ejection passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game balls B ejected from the ball ejection passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, a meandering out ball rectifying section 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding section 665b from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude is provided in the ball ejecting passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball outlet passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet passage 665 are designed to open downward. Since the game balls B are ejected downward from the pachinko machine 665, it becomes difficult for the game balls B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines Damage to machines, walls, etc. can be avoided. In addition, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and on the island equipment side, the game balls B are discharged from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction passage 665. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since a base unit 660 in which a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be By simply ejecting the game ball B hit into the area 5a downward, it is possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. , it is possible to have a simple (easy) configuration, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the ball removal outlet 665c of the ball removal passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the ball removal outlet 665c and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball outlet passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2. Since the ejected game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B flowing vigorously through the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. Damage to the outer frame 2 can be avoided, and a pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged can be provided.

In addition, since the ball extraction outlet 665c of the ball extraction passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the part where the game balls B are collected on the island equipment side ( There is no need to advance the out-receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the effort of installing the Pachinko machine 1 and the effort of moving the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the above board unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125, 126, and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG. 126(a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. To be more specific, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a merging portion 663e that merges with the ball-extraction discharge passage 665. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end thereof serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects briefly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. . As a result, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game hall, the parts for collecting game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the guide piece 667 can direct the ejection direction of the game ball B diagonally backward and downward, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is connected to the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side within the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island facility. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out ball passage 663 (out ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, it is possible to widen the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4. Therefore, by moving the out ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663 can be avoided. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and removed from below at the out ball outlet 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out bulb passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. A sensor cover 668 that restricts downward movement of the sensor 664 is provided.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out bulb rectifying portion 663b in the out bulb passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 includes a main body part 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose proximal end side is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and a sensor cover 668 for detecting the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body part 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion that coincides with the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a and is elastically deformable. have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached at its proximal end to a portion of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outside of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c to lock the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a comes into contact with the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closes the locking claw portion 668c. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. through which it is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of this sensor cover 668 also serves as an out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release the locking from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body part 668a so that the locking claw part 668c moves downward, the main body part 668a of the sensor cover 668 is exposed to the bottom surface of the sensor 664. The out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the object that may be touched (for example, the outer frame 2 A certain amount of clearance is created between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it, thereby preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. However, as mentioned above, by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below, so the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may be touched, such as the outer frame 2. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. To be more specific, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from above. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 may open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during a game and the out sensor 664 falls off, the out sensor 664 will detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been hit into the gaming area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 etc. will notify the occurrence of an abnormality. Upon notification of this abnormality occurrence, the staff of the game hall, etc. will open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the objects that may come in contact with the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out bulb rectifying portion 663b. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly viewed from below. Therefore, when game balls B are jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually confirmed from the outside, making it possible to identify at a glance the location where the game balls B are jammed. This allows the game ball B to be freed from clogging at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, this pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 can be replaced from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside the bulb removal passage 665, etc.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so a game that has been interrupted due to the out sensor 664 being damaged can be restarted quickly. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the frustration of players due to interruptions in play and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 does not come away from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a hanging state and does not fall off, it is possible to avoid losing the sensor cover 668.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer part of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front and rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of game balls B is limited to the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side It is relatively small on the locking claw 668c side (the other end side) that is locked on the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the force is applied to the sensor cover 668 at one end where it is rotatably attached. Since the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is difficult to release, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[4-14. Third embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 according to a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment in which the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit are omitted, viewed from the front right, and FIG. 127(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 128(b) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the lower right back. 129(a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 127, (b) is a sectional view taken along the Corco line in (a), and (c) is a sectional view taken along the Sasa line in (a). FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C--C in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the back. 133(a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the front, and FIG. 133(b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the back. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing how to eliminate ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing how to prevent a linear unauthorized tool from entering the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 127.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above-described board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

This board unit 700 is provided with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and is provided behind the first ball path 701 so that the game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow. A second ball path 702 through which game balls B can be distributed; a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701; and a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 that detects ball B, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flow. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance opening upward, and each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 detects the game ball B one by one with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. Discharge downward.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game balls B received in the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, The game balls B received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 are configured to flow through the second ball path 702. ing. In other words, the configuration is such that out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, the winning holes (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, and the second big winning hole 2007 of the game board 5 are If a fraudulent act is committed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, making it possible to detect a fraudulent act against the winning opening. .

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 has a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and has a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 are provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. A ball path member 713 having a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate ball clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 and to prevent unauthorized tools from entering. A security cover 714 is provided to be openable and closable, a passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. A frame relay board 716 is provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and upward and long in the left and right directions. The front base 711 accommodates a ball path member 713 therein from the rear. The front base 711 closes off the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball socket 711a that is open long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall portion, and a release port 711b that is opened at a position to the right of the left-right center of the lower peripheral wall portion. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the release port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and long in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes off the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball extraction passage 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in front view, and guides it downward to discharge it. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely open to the rear. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715. The part of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 in the ball extraction passage 705 (the part on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side is closed by a passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 includes a first discharge guiding part 712a that receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball route 701 of the ball route member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide part 712a of the ball route member 713. It has a second discharge guide part 712b that receives the game ball B that has passed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide part 712a opens toward the front. , the inlet of the second discharge guiding portion 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b are provided at the same position in the front and rear direction. The first discharge guiding part 712a and the second discharge guiding part 712b are open rearwardly at the rear side relative to the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the respective exits of the bulb removal passage 705, the first discharge guide part 712a, and the second discharge guide part 712b are located to the left of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711, and the left They are arranged in order from the top to the right. The outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 has a front end side that widens forward greatly and a rear end side that widens a little rearward with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b (Fig. 128(b) ). That is, the outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 is formed larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the exits of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a that extends vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c; A rectifying wall portion 713e extending obliquely to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a rectifying wall portion 713e that increases in height toward the right from a position spaced to the right with respect to the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f extends to the right than the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and An upper wall portion 713h extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and open upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located on the right side with respect to the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also extends vertically upward from the lower wall upper part 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall part 713e and from the left end of the lower wall upper part 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf part 713b. The protruding inner wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downwardly toward the left from the middle of the left side of the inner wall portion 713k, and the eaves portion 713l extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a hanging wall part 713m extending, and a lower wall lower part 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall part 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall part 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is vertically cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and includes a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 also includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the upper lower wall 713j, the middle wall 713k, the hanging wall 713m, and the lower lower wall 713n into front and rear parts.

Moreover, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches in the upper left shelf part 713b, the upper right shelf part 713d, and the lower shelf part 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end of each one toward the partition wall part 713p side. It has a notch 713q. Each notch 713q is provided so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, which is smaller in the front and back direction than the radius of the game ball B, Through the gap, dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by an upper lower wall 713j, a hanging wall 713m, and a lower lower wall 713n on the front side of the partition wall 713p, and is surrounded by a sensor housing in which the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. A rear sensor accommodating part in which the second ball sensor 704 is housed is surrounded by the upper lower wall 713j, the hanging wall 713m, and the lower lower wall 713n on the rear side of the front part 713s and the partition wall part 713p. 713t.

The front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t are arranged so that the detection holes of the first spherical sensor 703 and the second spherical sensor 704 are located below the area between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f. In other words, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection holes facing to the right. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend from the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part to the left of the inner wall part 713k. .

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a first ball guide portion 713u that is provided at a portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n, projects downward, and is open to the rear. have. When the first sphere guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the entrance side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. The first ball guide part 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f in front of the partition wall part 713p to the right and then to the rear. It can be delivered to the first discharge guiding part 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall part 713p in the ball path member 713, a part of the lower wall lower part 713n is opened downward (a part of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 accommodated in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t). ) An inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 is located below. Thereby, behind the partition wall part 713p, the game balls B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f can be delivered to the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is directed vertically downward. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f allow the plurality of game balls B to be rectified in a line and guided downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (the downstream direction in which the game balls B circulate), so that the game Depending on the flow rate of balls B, etc., there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, if ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened and the clearing port 711b is opened. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f, and the game ball B bitten by the tool is inserted. You can clear the ball jam by poking the ball.

By the way, since the lower shelf part 713f is provided with a cutout part 713q for eliminating ball clogging and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, it is possible to prevent wire-like illegal tools such as piano wire or catheters from falling. from below through the notch 713q to the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and then insert the tip of the unauthorized tool into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk that a fraudulent act may be carried out against the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). There is a similar fear that such an unauthorized tool may be inserted not only in the lower shelf part 713f but also in the upper left shelf part 713b and the upper right shelf part 713d where the notch part 713q is provided.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of plate-shaped inhibition ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it will come into contact with the inhibiting rib 713o and the tip will Movement can be prevented, and further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Note that in the upper right shelf section 713d and the upper left shelf section 713b, on the right side of the middle wall section 713k, their lower and left and right sides are the rectifying wall section 713e and the lower wall where the notch section 713q is not provided. Since the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b are closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the notches 713q of the corresponding parts. Fraudulent acts will not occur via the cutout 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches 713q provided in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, so that dirt and dust are directed downward through the notches 713q. (See Figure 136). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part in the upper left shelf 713b are discharged onto the rectifying wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle part. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall 713k. This prevents dust and the like from adhering to the first bulb sensor 703 and second bulb sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t. It protrudes to the left from the front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left from the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall part 713k, since the eaves part 713l extends to the left from the upper part of the front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper left shelf part 713b. Dirt and dust that has fallen downward through the notch 713q is guided to the left by the slope of the eaves section 713l, and is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, causing the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 to protrude to the left beyond the inner wall section 713k. It is possible to prevent the wire from falling onto the wiring cable and the connector, and it is possible to avoid problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 forms the first ball path 701. The rear left wall 713a, upper left shelf 713b, step wall 713c, upper right shelf 713d, rectifying wall 713e, lower shelf 713f, right wall 713g, groove wall 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guiding portion 712b.

The security cover 714 is formed into a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side is rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and held horizontally, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b and prevents the elastic locking portion 714a from locking. When the release port 711b is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and made vertical, the release port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the release port 711b.

When the security cover 714 is in the closed state, it is possible to close the release port 711b of the front base 711, so that a linear unauthorized tool can enter the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the first ball path 701) from the release port 711b. It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f to clear the ball clogging of the game balls B. I can do it. This work to clear the ball jam is carried out with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

When the security cover 714 has the release port 711b open (vertically), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking part 714a side) is connected to the object that is likely to come into contact with it (here, behind the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate ball clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with an object (the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thereby, forgetting to close the security cover 714 can be avoided, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is possible to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in the same state. An object that may come into contact with the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably mounted around an axis in the left and right direction, an object that may come into contact with the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when it comes into contact with the security cover 714, the body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 getting caught on the object that may come into contact with it, and damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may come into contact with it can be avoided. .

In addition, the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely gets jammed with the game balls B between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f, and is basically left in the closed state, so it cannot be opened. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705 which is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes a portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game balls B flowing through the second discharge guiding section 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 holds the frame relay board 716 between the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is held between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. .

In the base unit 710 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129(a), from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711, the upper left shelf 713b and part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 are connected. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B that has fallen onto the upper left shelf section 713b or the upper right shelf section 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf section 713d onto the lower shelf section 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf section 713f, they will be broken down by the upper rectifying wall section 713e so that they are aligned in a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the lower shelf section 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf section 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall section 713p, it falls into the ball B that is accommodated in the front sensor accommodating section 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guide section 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, if it is located behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t, and then discharged downward through the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game balls B flow through separate paths before and after the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first ball path 701 is located in front of the partition wall 713p, and a second ball path 702 is located behind the partition wall 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 forward of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 transfers the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 in order to extract the game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc. It can be discharged downward through. The game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guiding part 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guiding part 712b (second ball path 702), and ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 are The game ball B is delivered to a part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) on the side that collects it.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the plurality of notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, dirt can be removed through the notches 713q. Since dirt and dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid dust and the like from interfering with the circulation of game balls B, and to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, etc. can be done.

In addition, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, it is possible to check from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) whether or not game balls B are clogged in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily confirmed. In addition, since a notch 713q is provided in the lower shelf 713f at a portion of the ball path member 713 where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf are provided with a cutout 713q. If a ball jam occurs between the part 713f and the outer frame 2, open the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and open the security cover 714 to insert a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be cleared using the tool.

Furthermore, a release port 711b that opens downward is provided below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a crime prevention cover 714 that closes the release port 711b is provided. In addition to being able to clear the ball jam as described above, by keeping the clearing port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear unauthorized tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701 or It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the front end side around the axis in the left and right direction, it is possible to open and close the main body frame 4 in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close it against the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it (the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), making it impossible to close the main body frame 4. It is possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the cover, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward are provided. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it can contact the inhibition rib 713o and prevent the tip from moving; Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guiding portion 712a and second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since a complicated distribution route is configured to allow the wire to flow, even if a linear unauthorized tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guiding portion 712a or the second discharge guiding portion 712b, the complicated route will prevent the intrusion. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all the game balls B released from the game board 5, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration for detecting the out ball B (for example, an out ball detection unit), and the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced. It is possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 and the safe ball detected by the second ball sensor 704 are By comparing the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game As a player, he wants to pay out many game balls B, so if the displayed payout rate is large, he can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

Additionally, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player's side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal path 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 702 Game balls B without balls are not counted. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, an out ball flows through the first ball path 701 and a safe ball flows through the second ball path 702, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 The safe ball may flow through the second ball path 702, and the out ball may flow through the second ball path 702, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path, regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be used for circulation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the release port 711b, but the invention is not limited to this, and the release port 711b is opened and closed by sliding back and forth or left and right. Good as a thing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall part 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 can be separated into two parts before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although the ball is ejected through one of two ball paths, the present invention is not limited to this. The game balls B passed through and released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 as seen from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the back. . FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory etc. made transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board shown by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. FIG. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 195 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable prize opening 2003, which provides a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player upon acceptance or passage of the game balls B. A first starting hole 2004, a second starting hole 2005, a first big winning hole 2006, and a second big winning hole 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in the general winning hole 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, and the This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B within the game area 5a are performed so that the game ball B is accepted or passes through the two major winning holes 2007 and the like.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160 etc.) for controlling the contents is provided.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a panel relay board that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The apparatus further includes a back unit 3000 that can be used.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general prize openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B shot into the game area 5a, and which are provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. a gate 2002 which detects the passing of the game ball B, and a variable prize opening 2003 which makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. , a first starting port 2004 and a second starting port 2005 that are provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. A first grand prize opening 2006 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first grand prize prize. It is provided in a position different from the opening 2006, and depends on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. It is provided with a second grand prize opening 2007 that can accept game balls B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the table unit 2000 further includes a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B. .

Further, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2004, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has four general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and a lower right unit 2400 which is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022. They are provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and a gate 2002 are provided near the vertical center of the gaming area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A gate member 2600 having a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and A back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 is placed behind the back box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guide unit 3100 which is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and through which game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, and a back ball guide unit 3100 near the front end inside the back box 3010. a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 provided in the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back upper front display unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at approximately the same position in the front and back direction as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200; The back lower front effect unit 3400 provided at the rear lower part of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010, and the back upper and rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back upper front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 155 etc.), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front is used for games. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122, and the lower full ball path unit 610 is opened. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, back unit 3000, etc. arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 145, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N in the front or attach the front unit 2000. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Furthermore, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

In addition, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and back, and is spaced apart in the left and right direction at the upper and lower edges, respectively, and is formed to have a thin board thickness. (See FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. It is.

In the panel board 1110, a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the upper side of the center. The right side and lower side have a wide width that allows a plurality of game balls B to be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width that does not allow a plurality of game balls B to line up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins extending outward from the holding step. Three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging steps 1114 on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 are arranged, and the panels protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding steps. It includes a pair of engagement pieces that engage with two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the holding portion with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being accommodated in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, and the player It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the players, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled to the game board 5, covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting section 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 or the out-ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball path 663 are detected (counted) one by one by an out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 141, 143, 144, and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. It is equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front side and back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not there has been unauthorized modification, or whether an unauthorized IC has been mounted). from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning hole sensor 3001, a first starting hole sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a first big winning hole sensor 2525, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first winning opening solenoid 2524, the second winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch the setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected via). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), signals from the setting key switch 1311a and signals from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has a vertical distance between its right side and left side that is almost the same as a vertical distance between the right side and left side of the main control board 1310 , and a horizontal distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and a setting key switch 1311a has a press operation section above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is located on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is located above and to the left of the setting key switch 1311a (bottom left of the setting switch button 1311b), where the switch button 1311b is arranged. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged further down, and is located near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a press operation section is disposed at.

In this embodiment, the setting key is at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). In this case, the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the insertion slot, other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal of this OK key ON can be turned on. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized with only the setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although they are exposed, there are "gaps" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation section of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the openings corresponding to the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, wire intrusion prevention parts are molded on the cover body for each of these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch The wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b should be routed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also connects various signals from the setting key switch 1311a. (In other words, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted. The wiring pattern (to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns through which signals are transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting switching button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be briefly explained. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. A "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON to power on the pachinko machine 1. Note that the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 131Of is operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and It may be possible to change the setting value when a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON. Next, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the settings of a setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Every time a person who changes the settings of a setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. The value increases from 1 to 1, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, returns to the initial value of 1, increases by 1 again, and controls to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key where the setting key is turned ON). Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from its rotational position to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and determined setting values in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, moving the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key was turned on) to the original position (in other words, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g by pressing the push operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the set value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and then the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. This improves work efficiency.

The person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and from lighting the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turning it off.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying confirmation of the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage has occurred), and then , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to open the first By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who displays the currently set setting values must first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), and then Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. Among them, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains turned off, and even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, this press operation does not work. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (that is, Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are as follows: When the power is restored at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is as described above. 1, or after the power is restored after a power outage (momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the , turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power restoration," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power restoration."

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the allocation rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. It is used to select the small winning symbol determination table that will be used, the normal time transition determination table that defines the percentage of the determination value for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Note that the various tables used in various lottery decisions are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8. In addition, in this example, setting values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and each is set to have a different jackpot probability, but although it is possible to set multiple setting values, all of them It is possible to set the set values to be the same (the jackpot probability is the same). For example, while six setting values can be set, the settings can be made in one step so that all the setting values become the setting value 1. In this way, if all set values are set value 1, a state in which the set values can be changed occurs in the setting change state, and even if the set values are switched, the setting values will change from set value 1 to set value 1. 1, and the set value remains unchanged. Further, even if the setting value is confirmed in the setting confirmation state, the setting value 1 will always be confirmed. Here, there are pachinko machines 1 that require changing the setting value (changing the jackpot probability) and pachinko machines 1 that do not require changing the setting value (changing the jackpot probability). By making it possible to make all set values the same, the control program can be shared and used regardless of whether or not the set values need to be changed. In addition, for the pachinko machine 1 that does not require changing the setting values (changing the jackpot probability), the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a, etc. is left in place, and only one setting value is set instead of allowing six setting values to be set. It may also be possible to achieve the setting in one step.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible) and displays an error message to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects the game balls B launched into the game area 5a through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B played is displayed. Among the game balls B fired into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160, etc.), and this detection signal is sent to the main body via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a could be set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting key switch 1311a' can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on. In this case, move the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on as the enter key ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be referred to as "modified example (1) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a molded structure. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a, or may be near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with an enter key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switch button 1311b should be routed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. In the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance from each other). In addition, when a setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The aspect of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as "Modified example (2) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a finger is touching the ball, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The signals may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; When it is not touched, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and/or when the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is not ON. On the other hand, when the launching of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (aspects of the handle touch sensor (including the aspect of a single button operation sensor) ) may be written as "Modified example (3) of decision key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. The firing reference pulses are branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing timing control circuit 633b at the dispensing control board 633, and are inputted to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. It may also be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while determining that the enter key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the game board 5 is provided with a distance measurement sensor capable of detecting The signal may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. The distance sensor detects light emitted by a light emitting part that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, thereby making it possible to detect the player's actions. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and when it determines that there is movement, it turns on the enter key. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "modification of the enter key (5)") .

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modified example (6) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (in other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, OK key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting the pulse may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys that the enter key is ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, turns on the enter key, and OFF (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modified example (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal are The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V), and at the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a can turn ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. It is also possible to determine whether it is ON or OFF. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (an aspect of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "modified example (8) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening so that wires etc. cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

In addition, the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error cancellation switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed are affixed to the positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch, respectively, so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch). ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the payout control board 633 should be routed between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch. They are formed so as not to approach each other on the control board 633 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately, Also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch should be routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed. In addition, when a determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (9) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON. Good too. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, When the press operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (10) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error release switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the push operation section is being operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and notifies the payout control MPU of that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that fact. When this happens, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on (aspect 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (11) of the enter key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is set In the past, the operation signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed between the opening and the corresponding opening and modifying the payout control board 633, a wire intrusion prevention section is provided with the cover body for the opening. The structure is molded into

Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f may be disposed on the payout control board 633 near an error release switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the press operation part) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation part may be used as the RAM clear switch 131Of. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotary operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various types of switches can be mentioned. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for the error release switch should be routed. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (12) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring during the processing, and the command created in the command transmission process of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows setting values to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the push operation part of the button is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. ).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the out of bulb detection sensor 574 or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or may determine the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, out of ball detection sensor 574, or payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the setting key switch 1311a' (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified example (16) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the main body frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the OK key, and after turning on the OK key, close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the door frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, while the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main body frame 4. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be referred to as "modified example (18) of enter key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the initial position and then turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input, while determining that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input. If it is not present, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the main control board 1310. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The enter key button may be placed on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches having a lever, slide switches having a sliding part, rotary switches having a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is provided with an enter key button and a RAM clear switch 1310f, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed. They are formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, when a decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (Aspect 2 of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is input to the RAM clear switch. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the enter key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (RAM clear switch Aspect 3 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (21)"). Note that the period during which the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch to be described later, an error release switch is not required on the payout control board 633.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Gate sensor 2601, various sensors for various winning holes (for example, general winning hole sensor 3001, first starting hole sensor 3002, second starting hole sensor 2401, variable winning hole sensor 2526, first big winning hole sensor 2525, second big winning hole sensor The main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (various sensors, etc.). This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modification example (22) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the gate 2002 or open the various winning slots in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to feed the game ball B to the out port 1008 or feed the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the stepping motor, DC motor, The operation of the movable body (accessory object) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid, and the operation of the movable object (accessory object) is controlled based on the detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a' may be used (optical function The aspect of the object sensor (which may also include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification of enter key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, so that the optical sensor can detect the original position of the movable object (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory object) so as to detect the operation position, etc.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to detect illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the magnetic sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (24) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to move the magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1. By applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed, and the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a that is divided and formed on the game board 5 is changed, and the course of the game ball B is changed to the various prize openings and gate parts (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of entering a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor, and also determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. It is also possible to determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the vibration sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (25) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to control the game. A radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent activities in which the game balls B are fraudulently obtained by causing malfunction of various sensors of the various winning holes provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the radio wave sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (26) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the production operation section unit 350 A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the , and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation section 302 of the production operation section unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, The signals may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the production operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (27) of enter key").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which was composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 was installed separately. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. , it is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body in order to prevent wire intrusion into the opening. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, if the structure of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above (setting change board box (This aspect may be referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the settings of the setting key switch 1311a are A wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring patterns for transmitting the signals from and to the terminals (main control The connections to the terminals of the connector MSCN of the board 1310 are also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, wiring pattern from which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and wiring pattern from which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. However, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal were formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). 1311a, one of the wiring patterns is transmitted via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on this setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided in 1310 via a harness (a mode of routing the wiring pattern may be referred to as "determination key modification (29)").

Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the enter key (the mode of selection combination of the modified examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the enter key"). ”).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, increasing the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which the probability (advantage degree) has only a single preset value and does not require any setting changes. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification where there is only a single set value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the set value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. I can do it.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and light up the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable body to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). (Accessory objects) can be moved and the light emitters can be lit. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, Time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of symbol variation until entering the player waiting state, variations can be given to the time from the end of symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern that specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned, which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessories)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demonstration performance is changed and set, variations can be given to the content of the demonstration performance that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, it is possible to vary the default volume that is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light emitter, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the default brightness are changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, or have different gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitting body, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Furthermore, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be selected as appropriate and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the push operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on process to be described later. Clear the game except for , and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In addition, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and stores data in the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. In other words, when powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are satisfied when the power is restored to the Pachinko machine 1, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. It happens. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned on by pressing the button, the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed. be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required that the setting key be turned on. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in a setting value confirmation display process that is performed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later. Display on container 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the press operation section be pressed when powering on the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned ON, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not need to be pressed (when described as "a modification of predetermined setting value display permission conditions") ). In this case, when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and instead In the input process, initial settings and start-up settings for the built-in WDT are performed before the game is started, and after that, interrupt permission settings and the like are performed to proceed with the game. Note that when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is set to the initial state. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a performs a main body frame opening process to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied and setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, it is possible to prevent When the power is restored after a momentary power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted. The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs settings such as enabling interrupts. While the game is in progress, when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and then The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a collects balls by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and outputted to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. to be displayed. Therefore, the current setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h (this may be described as a "modified example of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, there is no need to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the modification example (30) of the enter key described above.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming status), lottery results for normal symbols, lottery results for special symbols, etc. .

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the functional display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the gaming status and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display device made up of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the gate 2002.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the opening 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by lottery according to the reception of game balls B into the second starting opening 2005. A second special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result of It is equipped with.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions of the opening/closing pattern of the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of rounds.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 160).

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of a set plate 1650 that attaches the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of a set plate 1650 that is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, which will be described in detail later (FIGS. 151 to 153). ). The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general prize openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B shot into the game area 5a, and which are provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. a gate 2002 which detects the passing of the game ball B, and a variable prize opening 2003 which makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. , a first starting port 2004 and a second starting port 2005 that are provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. A first grand prize opening 2006 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first grand prize prize. It is provided in a position different from the opening 2006, and depends on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. A second grand prize opening 2007 that can accept game balls B is provided.

In addition, the table unit 2000 further includes a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B. .

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged near the left end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. The variable prize opening 2003 is arranged at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged above the first starting port 2004 on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first large winning hole 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning hole 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the gaming area 5a. The second big prize opening 2007 is arranged close to the right end of the game area 5a, slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a.

The first sub-out opening 2021 is arranged between the second big winning opening 2007 and the left end of the gaming area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is located to the right of the second starting port 2005.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2004, and a starting port unit 2100 on the front view left side of the starting port unit 2100. On the other hand, there is a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , a lower right unit 2400 that is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and includes the variable winning opening 2003, the first A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2006, a second big prize opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 near the vertical center of the gaming area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A gate member 2600 is provided and has a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a and is made up of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

Although the details will be described later, the lower right unit 2400 is capable of receiving the game ball B received in the second grand prize opening 2007, and has a pseudo grand prize opening 2402 with a larger opening than the second grand prize opening 2007, A pseudo-out port 2404 is provided for discharging game balls B not accepted into the big winning port 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2004 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the first starting port 2004 is opened upwardly, and the first starting port 2004 is opened in the left and right direction of the center accessory 2500. Located directly below the center. More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game ball B released from the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513 is received into the first starting port 2004 with a high probability.

The starting port unit 2100, while attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and delivers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. I can do it. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with four general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B. The four general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning holes 2001 opens upward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the four general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 145 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149, etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , is equipped with.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning hole 2402 extending left and right across the entire width in the left and right direction, and a pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402. It has a pseudo-out opening 2404 provided below near the left end of the pseudo-big winning opening 2402. The pseudo big winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens larger (wider) on the left and right than the second big winning hole 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of a normally used big winning hole, which is 135 mm.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo large winning opening door 2405 that opens and closes the pseudo large winning opening 2402, and a pseudo large winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo large winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 149, etc.) ). The pseudo big prize opening door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and its lower side is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is located to the right of the pseudo-out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo-big winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is located to the right of the second starting port 2005. are located adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out exit 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the left and right side is located near the right side of the lower right rail 1004. It is formed in a length that covers the upper part.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2407 that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a partition 2410 that protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 and can form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. The base plate 2407 and the partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second start hole 2005, the second sub-out hole 2022, the pseudo large prize hole 2402, and the pseudo out hole 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo large prize hole sensor 2403 is provided on the rear side of the base plate 2407. The pseudo large prize hole 2402 and the pseudo out hole 2404 are provided inside the partition 2410.

The partition part 2410 includes a bottom wall part 2411 that extends left and right over the entire width and is sloped so that the right end side is higher, and a first standing wall part 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall part 2411. , a right slanted wall 2413 extending obliquely from the upper end of the first standing wall 2412 to the lower left, and a right lateral wall 2414 extending horizontally from the lower end of the right slanting wall 2413 to the first standing wall 2412; A second standing wall portion 2415 is spaced leftward from the right side wall portion 2414 and extends upward from the first standing wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right side wall portion 2414; A left slanted wall 2416 extends obliquely to the lower right from a portion at the same height as the upper end of the first standing wall 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second erected wall 2415; A left horizontal wall portion 2417 that extends horizontally to the left of the standing wall portion 2415; and an inclined wall portion 2418 that extends obliquely to the lower left from the left end of the left horizontal wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411; , and a third vertical wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length that is approximately one game ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length of the second big prize opening 2007 in the left-right direction. The distance between the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length of the second large winning opening 2007 in the left and right direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion of the left side wall portion 2417 between the second vertical wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418. The pseudo big prize opening 2402 is arranged directly under the right side wall 2414, the left side wall 2417, and the inclined wall 2418, and the part along the inclined wall 2418 is cut out diagonally from the horizontally long rectangle. Due to its shape, it opens towards the front. The pseudo outlet 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third vertical wall portion 2419 intersect.

The lower right unit 2400 also includes a flat lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of a triangular frame formed by a first standing wall portion 2412, a right slanted wall portion 2413, and a right horizontal wall portion 2414. and closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, left slanted wall portion 2416, and left horizontal wall portion 2417, and extends forward of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the flat plate-shaped lower right decorative part 2432, the lower right decorative part 2431, and the lower right left decorative part 2432, and extends forward from the base plate 2407 in a downward arrow shape. It has a protruding lower right middle decorative part 2433 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

Furthermore, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and allows the pseudo big prize opening 2402, the lower right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433 to be independent of each other. It further includes a lower right decorative board 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light and decoration are mounted.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes decorative stickers having translucency on the front surfaces of each of the pseudo big prize opening door 2405, the lower right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433. is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is installed at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a in a state where the gaming balls B cannot be circulated to the right side and the lower side when assembled to the gaming board 5. The front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward around the upper part of each of the right inclined wall section 2413, the second standing wall section 2415, and the left inclined wall section 2416, and there are a plurality of obstacles in the area. Nail N is planted. Further, a portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second grand prize opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall section 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall section 2568 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and the right side of the second standing wall section 2415, that is, the inside of the partition section 2410 is It is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent from the area 5a.

In addition, when the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right with respect to directly below the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418 The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. Above the second starting port 2005, second sub-out port 2022, and inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in these areas. It is set up.

Further, when the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. Moreover, the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 and the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo big winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 inside the partition 2410 (pseudo gaming area 2010). Inside this dividing part 2410, it is formed so that only the game ball B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can circulate.

In the lower right unit 2400, in a normal state, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 so that it cannot accept the game ball B. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the dividing section 2410 (pseudo game area 2010) passes through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and passes through the bottom wall part 2411. After flowing upward and rolling to the left along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, the third standing wall portion 2419 prevents further rolling to the left and opens forward at that portion. It is accepted into the pseudo-outlet 2404 that is located there. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a, but is ejected downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo outlet 2404 is provided close to the outlet 1008. The player can be given the illusion that the game ball B, which has rolled toward the side and been received by the pseudo-out port 2404, has actually rolled on the lower right rail 1004 and been received by the out port 1008.

The pseudo big prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is used to display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the game ball B being accepted into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. 2. When the pseudo big prize opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, it rotates around the bottom side so that the top end moves forward, and the top end is positioned slightly above the bottom end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (gaming panel 1100) so that the rear side is lower. In this state, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can receive the game ball B. When the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is in a state where it can receive the game ball B, when the gaming ball B flows down in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it hits the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 protruding forward. It is guided backward by the slope of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and accepted into the pseudo big winning opening 2402.

The pseudo big prize opening 2402 extends to the left even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500 without being accepted into the second big prize opening 2007. When the big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, when the game ball B is released downward from the right release passage 2565, the game ball B is also received into the pseudo big winning opening 2402. It is possible to give the player the illusion that he or she is playing the game.

In addition, since it extends to the left directly under the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opening and closing, it is not accepted into the second big winning opening 2007. The game ball B, which was released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and received into the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, appears to have been received into the pseudo big winning port 2402. It can create an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the player side even through the open pseudo big winning hole 2402. By making this pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 visible, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole.

This pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined performance by detecting the game balls B, and opening and closing the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 by counting the number of game balls B. . By opening and closing the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 depending on the number of game balls B accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, it is possible to make it easier to create the illusion that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole. can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of this embodiment, it has a pseudo grand prize opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of a normally used grand prize opening of 135 mm and extends longer from side to side. It is possible to give players the illusion that the machine is equipped with a large winning opening that they have never seen before, and it can give a strong impact to players, and it can also be used as a pachinko machine for players to play. It is possible to make it easier for players to actively select the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase its appeal to players.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 are located above the pseudo big winning hole 2402, which is larger in the left and right direction than the second big winning hole 2007. and a sloped wall part 2418 between the right side wall part 2414 and the left side wall part 2417 which are separated by approximately half the distance in the left and right direction of the second big prize opening 2007 (the right sloped wall part 2413 and the left sloped wall part). 2416), and the game ball B is received into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. As a result, the plurality of game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can be concentrated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo grand prize opening 2402, so that the game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can be A player can be made to have the illusion that a larger number of game balls B than balls B are accepted into a pseudo big winning hole 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. FIG. 148(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel board and the obstruction nail, and FIG. 148(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 148(a) seen from the front. 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 148, viewed from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 148. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 148, with only the center right front plate viewed from the rear and viewed from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the production display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The center accessory 2500 includes a variable prize opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B in accordance with the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, and a first start. A first big prize that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It is equipped with an opening 2006 and a second big winning opening 2007.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is inserted into the game area 5a. Game ball B is prevented from entering the frame.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 of the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is shaped to follow the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is not noticeable. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. Then, the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 can be released from the warp exit 2512 which is open in a frame behind the front side of the game panel 1100 and is capable of releasing the game ball B that entered the warp entrance 2511. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the lateral direction (center emitting portion 2513a) and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central release part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8e-1. First Attacker Department]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker part 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501. The first attacker part 2520 of the center accessory 2500 responds to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the variable winning opening door 2521 which opens and closes the variable winning opening 2003 and the gate 2002. A variable winning hole solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160 etc.) that is energized to operate the variable winning hole door 2521, and a variable winning hole sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning hole 2003. There is.

In addition, the first attacker section 2520 is configured to accept the game ball B into the first big prize opening door 2523 which opens and closes the first big prize opening 2006, and into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. a first grand prize opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 160, etc.) which is energized to operate the first grand prize opening door 2523 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by; , and a first big winning hole sensor 2525 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006.

Furthermore, the first attacker section 2520 includes a transparent flat center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second left guide passage 2532 (see FIG. 137 etc.).

In the center accessory 2500, a first attacker part 2520 is provided above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501. The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning hole 2003 and a first big winning hole 2006.

The variable prize opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, on the front side of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, near the approximate center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500, It opens towards the left. Further, the first large prize opening 2006 opens upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B, directly above the variable winning hole 2003.

The variable prize opening door 2521 is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower end side extends back and forth, and when it is in an upright state (normal state), the game ball B can be received into the variable prize opening 2003. can be closed. When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the variable winning opening 2003 is brought into a state where the game ball B can be received (open state). ). When the variable winning opening 2003 is in the open state, the upper end of the variable winning opening door 2521 is higher than the lower end and is further tilted lower to the right, so that the variable winning opening flows down from above. The game ball B that has come into contact with the upper surface of the winning opening door 2521 can be guided to the variable winning opening 2003 on the right side.

The game ball B accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. be done.

The first big prize opening door 2523 has a flat plate shape that slopes lower to the left, and is provided so as to be movable forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In a normal state, the first big prize opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006. In this state, the game ball B that has flown down above the first big prize opening door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first big prize opening door 2523 and flows through the second left guide passage 2532. .

When the first big prize opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first big prize opening door 2523 retreats backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is placed against the first big prize opening 2006. It can be brought into acceptable condition. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2006 in this state flows down in front of the flange part 2502 and is placed at a site at a height between the first big prize opening 2006 and the variable winning hole 2003. It is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 located there, and then guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 directly above the variable winning hole 2003. Thereafter, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a left guide path group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (in this case, two) paths through which game balls B can flow. There is. In other words, a left guide passage group 2530 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, which is made up of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can circulate. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is formed to necessarily pass through the left guide path group 2530.

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided at a position below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom with respect to the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game balls B in circulation can be visually recognized in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 includes a first left guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a second left guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the first left guide passage 2531. The first left guide passage 2531 and the second left guide passage 2532 are partitioned by a passage wall 2533 that projects forward from the flange portion 2502.

A first grand prize opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of this second left guide passage 2532. Therefore, if you want the first big prize opening 2006 to accept the game ball B, it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the second left guide path 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage group 2540 that is provided at the upper right corner and is composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) It is formed so that the game ball B, which is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop portion 1006 and is driven to the right side above the center accessory 2500, always passes through the right guide path group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a vertical length that is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. This right guide path group 2540 allows the game balls B in circulation to be visually recognized in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall part 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and the right first guide passage 2541. and a second right guide passage 2542. The entrance of the first right guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the second right guide passage 2542 are separated from each other in the left and right directions.

The first right guide passage 2541 extends backward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion immediately below the entrance and then extends downward, and then extends from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position to the left with respect to directly below the entrance. It also extends forward, with an exit opening diagonally to the lower right. In addition, the second right guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and is lined up on the right side of the exit of the first right guide passage 2541, with the outlet opening diagonally to the lower right. are doing. In other words, the first right guide passage 2541 and the second right guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right sides intersect.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) when the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the blocking portion 1006 are located in the right first guide passage 2541. It is formed so as to enter one guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide path 2541 is released to the side closer to the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide path 2542 is released to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. Although the details will be described later, the game ball B that has entered the second guide area 2712 has a high possibility of being accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, so the game ball B enters the second guide path 2542 on the right. When the game ball B enters, it is more likely to be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 than when it enters the first right guide passage 2541.

This right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 that can detect the game balls B circulating in the first right guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of game balls B detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 is equal to or less than a predetermined number per hour during a game situation in which the player is required to play "right-handed", the game situation can be made more enjoyable. In order to do so, it is possible to encourage "right-handed hitting" or to instruct the hitting strength to avoid acceptance into the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming part 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker part 2560 provided below the space forming part 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). ). The space forming part 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall part 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height about half of the total height of the gaming area 5a. The second attacker part 2560 has a second big prize opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided at the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming part 2550, a flange part 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall part 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. The space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall part 2551 projecting forward from the right side of the flange part 2502 and a lower part of the space forming part 2550 in the peripheral wall part 2501 projecting forward from the flange part 2502. It has a guide wall part 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening part 2553 penetrating the flange part 2502 back and forth between the right wall part 2551 and the peripheral wall part 2501 and the guide wall part 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap between the right rail 1005 and the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a cutout portion 2551a near the upper portion that penetrates from side to side. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 so that an interval approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. In this opening 2553, the side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 is a certain distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and the side closer to the right wall 2551 becomes farther away from the right wall 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, the side of the flange portion 2502 near the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guiding wall portion 2552 extends vertically with a constant width to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guiding wall portion 2552. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to become wider to the left as it goes downward.

When the game board 5 is assembled into the opening 2553, some of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 are inserted from the rear. The plurality of faulty nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific faulty nail group 2700 implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, although details will be described later. In other words, the space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of rear protrusions 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend left and right, and are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The rear protrusions 2554 are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so that the front and rear directions thereof are staggered. Thereby, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange part 2502 in the space forming part 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front and rear direction by the front ridge 2555d and the rear ridge 2554.

Furthermore, the space forming part 2550 includes a transparent flat center right front plate 2555 that covers the area from the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 to the front end of the right wall part 2551, and a translucent plate attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. (See FIG. 149, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes off the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first accommodating parts 2555a which penetrate in the front and back and each accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (assembled nail parts 2701), and a plurality of first accommodating parts 2555a which penetrate in the front and back and which accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (assembled nail parts 2701). A second accommodating portion 2555b in which the head of the nail N is accommodated, a peeling hole 2555c penetrating back and forth at a portion where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and a peeling hole 2555c that bulges rearward from the rear surface and extends left and right. It has a plurality of protrusions 2555d provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating part 2555a is provided in the shape of a long hole that forms a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line that surrounds and is in contact with the head of the plurality of faulty nails N (combined nail part 2701) accommodated therein. It is being In this embodiment, one first accommodating part 2555a is formed in a size that accommodates the heads of two obstacle nails N, and the center of the first accommodating part 2555a is different from the center of the obstacle nail N. It is eccentric. The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at positions corresponding to each of the faulty nails N of the specific faulty nail group 2700, which will be described later.

Note that the gap between the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b is within the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, more preferably 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to keep it within the range of . If the gap is smaller than this range, when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, it may affect the obstacle nail N and cause the obstacle nail N to bend. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, which takes time and effort, which may increase costs. In addition, if the gap is larger than this range, when the obstacle nail N bends due to the impact caused by the contact with the game ball B, the degree of bending will exceed the allowable range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk that

This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N accommodated in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b, so that the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game balls B can be restricted. It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstructing nail N due to an external impact caused by a The game balls B can be circulated in a stable state in the impaired nail group 2700, and the effects of the specific impaired nail group 2700 can be continuously exhibited, and the movement of the game balls B in the specified impaired nail group 2700 It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining people.

Furthermore, as described above, since the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 can suppress the deformation of the obstructing nail N, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the obstacle nail N. It is possible to reduce the effort required for maintenance of the faulty nail N.

In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the front sides of the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. It is not possible to touch the faulty nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b from the front. This makes it possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, if the faulty nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b via the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, the trace will remain on the center right front plate seal 2556. It is possible to easily notice a problem with the faulty nail N.

With the center right front plate seal 2556 affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side of the peeling hole 2555c, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is removed from the rear with the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the center right front plate seal 2556, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555. Thereby, it is possible to improve the workability of reapplying the center right front plate seal 2556 during manufacturing and sorting work during disposal.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of the triangular part surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall part 2501, the guide wall part 2552, and the closing wall part 2566 when assembled to the game board 5, so the peeling hole 2555c Through the 2555c, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the area where the game balls B are distributed, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed. .

Further, the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by pasting the center right front plate sticker 2556 on the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible for the player to On the other hand, it can be made difficult to make the user aware of the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it can be made difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front protrusions 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear protrusions 2554 bulging from the flange portion 2502. These front ridges 2555d are provided so that the up and down directions are staggered with respect to the rear ridges 2554. Thereby, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange part 2502 in the space forming part 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front and rear direction by the front ridge 2555d and the rear ridge 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Department]
The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 has a second large winning opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 that is provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. It has . The right end of the second big prize opening 2007 is located at a position slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is located at the entire width within the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right. The second grand prize opening 2007 is provided at a higher position than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right side wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall part 2551 of the space forming part 2550.

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 can open and close the second big prize opening 2007 by moving back and forth in the front and back direction with the second big winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007. A lottery was made by receiving the game ball B into the flat second prize opening door 2562 which is closed and tilted lower to the left, and into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It has a second grand prize opening solenoid 2563 that is energized to open and close the second grand prize opening door 2562 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol.

In addition, the second attacker section 2560 is provided above the second grand prize opening door 2562 in front of the flange section 2502, and has an attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left, and a second great prize opening 2007. A right discharge passage 2565 extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side and is capable of discharging the game ball B downward; It has a closing wall portion 2566 that forms a part of the guide wall portion 2552 and extends leftward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends lower to the left at a height slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and has a ceiling wall composed of a part of the peripheral wall part 2501 and a closing wall part 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is constituted by a second large prize opening door 2562. This attacker passage 2564 has a plurality of rear protrusions 2564a that bulge forward, extend in the vertical direction, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction at the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502. , in a portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the center lower right front plate 2572, which will be described later, is bulged rearward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to alternate with a plurality of rear protrusions 2564a. A plurality of protrusions (not shown) are provided. The plurality of front and rear protrusions 2564a allows the game ball B to flow to the left in the attacker passage 2564 while meandering in the front and back direction, and also suppresses the circulation speed.

The right discharge passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a left and right width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The right discharge passage 2565 has an outlet located at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is constituted by the attacker left wall part 2568, and the left wall is constituted by a part of the peripheral wall part 2501.

Furthermore, the second attacker part 2560 protrudes forward from the flange part 2502 on the right side of the second big winning opening door 2562, and is higher than the right end of the second big winning opening door 2562 and slightly higher than the right end of the closing wall part 2566. The attacker right wall part 2567 extends downward from the lower position, and the attacker's right wall part 2567 protrudes forward from the flange part 2502 on the left side of the second big winning opening door 2562 and is lower than the left end of the second big winning opening door 2562. In the left-right direction, there is a space between the attacker left wall 2568 extending downward from the attacker, the right shelf 2569 extending lower to the left from the lower end of the attacker right wall 2567, and the right shelf 2569. A left shelf part 2570 extends downwardly to the right from near the upper end of the attacker left wall part 2568 to form a gap, and a left shelf part 2570 is provided in the center between the left shelf part 2570 and the right shelf part 2569. It has an inner wall portion 2571.

The second big prize opening 2007 is defined in the left and right direction by an attacker right wall part 2567 and an attacker left wall part 2568. In other words, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the width in the left-right direction of the second big prize opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the second grand prize opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent briefly to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper end of the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, making it impossible for the game ball B to move back and forth between the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf section 2569 and the left shelf section 2570 are located above the lower end of the attacker left wall section 2568. A second big prize opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled to the game board 5.

The second attacker section 2560 extends in front of an attacker passage 2564, a right discharge passage 2565, and a space formed by an attacker right wall section 2567, an attacker left wall section 2568, a right shelf section 2569, and a left shelf section 2570. It further includes a closed center lower right front plate 2572 in the form of a transparent flat plate (see FIG. 137, etc.).

In the normal state, the second attacker part 2560 has the front end of the second big prize opening door 2562 protruding forward from the front surface of the flange part 2502, and cannot accept the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2007. It is closed to. The second grand prize opening door 2562, which opens and closes the second grand prize opening 2007, is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and back, so it is difficult to see when viewed from the front. , it is difficult to tell whether it is open or closed.

In this normal state, the game ball B that has been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has flown down the right guide path group 2540 and the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) is connected to the guide wall part 2552 and the right wall. It flows down from between the part 2551 and the second attacker part 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that was not accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 and flowed down onto the second big winning port door 2562 enters the attacker passage 2564 while meandering in the front and back direction by the plurality of ridges front and rear ridges 2564a. After rolling to the left, it enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second big prize opening door 2562, and is returned to the gaming area 5a from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565.

The second attacker part 2560 of this center accessory 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located on the attacker left wall forming the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the game ball B is prevented from coming and going between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, an area (pseudo game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right discharge passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the dividing section 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall section 2568, the right shelf section 2569, and the left shelf section 2570 in the second attacker section 2560. 2010 has been formed. In this pseudo game area 2010, only game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, the second big prize opening solenoid 2563 is activated according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. When energized, the second large prize opening door 2562 moves backward, and the second large prize opening 2007 becomes in a state where it can receive the game ball B. At this time, the game balls B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 and the game balls B flowing down from the space forming part 2550 to the second grand prize opening 2007 are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007.

After the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf 2569 or the left shelf 2570, it is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2561 and released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. It will be done. In this second attacker section 2560, two second big prize opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, so even if many game balls B are accepted into the second big prize opening 2007 in a short time, they will not be delayed. can be detected.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 has a first accommodating portion 2555a that accommodates the heads of the plurality of faulty nails N of each set of nails 2701 constituting the specific faulty nail group 2700. , it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N, and prevent the obstacle nail N from deforming due to the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or some external impact. (bending) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unintended flow of the game balls B, and it is possible to allow the game balls B to flow in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the effects of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It becomes possible to continuously exhibit the movement of the game ball B on the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, according to the center accessories 2500, the second grand prize opening door 2562, which opens and closes the second grand prize opening 2007, is shaped like a flat plate extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. Since the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning opening door 2562 back and forth in the front and rear directions, it is possible to make the second winning opening door 2562 difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the big prize opening 2007. As a result, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) provided below the second big winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous. can be strongly attracted to the player, and can create a strong illusion as if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole. Therefore, if a pachinko machine is equipped with a large prize opening that has never been seen before, it can create an illusion for players, give a strong impact to players, and encourage players to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to actively select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play, and it is possible to increase its appeal to players.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

[5-8f. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 143, 144, and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly below the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable prize opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Directly above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Further, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens toward the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 where a normal symbol lottery is performed to open and close a variable prize opening 2003 when the game ball B passes through the gate, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. have. In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, upstream of the second large winning hole 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center role 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of set nail parts 2701 in which a plurality of fault nails N arranged adjacent to each other form one set, and the plurality of set nail parts 2701 are connected to one game ball each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow passage through B. In this embodiment, the set nail part 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific faulty nail group 2700 is provided so that the parts (gap parts) between the plurality of set nail parts 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern, The game ball B can be guided by the portion 2701. Thereby, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guiding region 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guiding region 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guide area 2710 is composed of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guide area 2711. The first guide area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the left side from the center of the guide wall part 2552. The second guide area 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the second right guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to a position on the right side from the center of the guide wall part 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific failure nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges to the right. To be more specific, in the first guiding region 2711 and the second guiding region 2712, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the circular arc, a straight line connects the braided nail portions 2701 near the upper end and the lower end. The circular arc formed by the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the inner side of the circular arc is provided so as to be in contact with the circular arc. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left and right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the vertically extending portions are reduced, making it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left and right direction.

Furthermore, the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are the pegs located below between the two pegs 2701 spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. 2701 is provided to the right of the center between the two upper pegs 2701 (on the side far from the center of the arc). This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712.

Furthermore, the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 have gaps spaced apart above and below the plurality of pegs 2701 arranged in an arc shape. They are provided so as to be located higher toward the right column. In other words, in the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the two pegs 2701 that are paired in the left and right direction, the right side The braided nail portion 2701 is arranged higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

The guidance area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward in a meandering manner in the left-right direction by a plurality of set nail parts 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, compared to the area where the obstacle nails N are planted in a general arrangement, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down, and the falling time of the game ball B to the predetermined position ( (arrival time) can be delayed. In addition, in the set nail part 2701, by forming a set of two obstacle nails N, the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased compared to when the obstacle nail N is configured with one obstacle nail N, and the game ball B can collide with the obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of ball B is increased.

In the guidance area 2710, the plurality of pegs 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, so the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or right outer side through the part of the space. Sometimes I put it away. In other words, the game ball B moves from the first guide area 2711 to the second guide area 2712, moves from the second guide area 2712 to the first guide area 2711, or moves from the first guide area 2711 to the left outer side. or move from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 will come into contact with the guide wall 2552, and between the guide wall 2552 and the attacker right wall 2567 (the second big winning It will flow down to the top of the opening door 2562 or inside the second grand prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that has moved from the first guidance area 2711 to the left outside is located between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, after the plurality of protrusions 2554 provided on the flange 2502. And it flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the plurality of protrusions front 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall 2552 and flows down between the guide wall 2552 and the attacker right wall 2567 (on the second grand prize opening door 2562 or inside the second grand prize opening 2007). .

The game ball B that has moved from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside is located between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall section 2551, and between the rear ridges 2554 of the plurality of protrusions provided on the flange section 2502 and the center right front plate. It flows down while meandering in the front and rear direction due to the plurality of protrusions in front 2555d provided in 2555. Then, it flows down to the first sub-out port 2021 or between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or inside the second big winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it will flow through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside There is a possibility that it will be accepted into one sub-out port 2021. In other words, in this embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 is higher in the second right guide passage 2542 than in the first right guide passage 2541. . Therefore, the player can perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the first right guide path 2541. In other words, when "hitting to the right", by hitting the ball harder, it becomes easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with subtle adjustments. There is no need to worry, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if only one obstacle nail N constitutes a set nail part, a pair will be formed with respect to the obstacle nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. Other obstructing nails N become obstructing nails N in all directions forming gaps around the obstructing nail N. In other words, one obstacle nail N is responsible for forming gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 changes greatly due to the deformation of one obstacle nail N. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute game balls B in a stable state. In addition, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the gap must be adjusted to the desired distance with respect to the obstacle nails N provided in all directions, which requires a lot of effort for maintenance. becomes.

On the other hand, when the assembled nail section 2701 is configured by a plurality of obstacle nails N as in this embodiment, the direction of the adjacent obstacle nails N with respect to a certain obstacle nail N in the assembled nail section 2701 is as follows. Since the adjacent obstacle nails N are responsible for forming the gap, it is possible for a certain (one) obstacle nail N to be responsible for forming the gap only in some directions, and the gap is The number of obstacle nails N that form a pair can be reduced. Thereby, even if one obstacle nail N of the set nail part 2701 bends, there are few parts of the gap that will be affected, so it is possible to suppress a change in the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710. In addition, when a certain faulty nail N is bent, the gap between the faulty nail N and the faulty nail N in some directions only needs to be adjusted to the desired distance, which saves maintenance compared to adjusting the gap in all directions. This time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the heads of the obstacle nails N are inserted and accommodated in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. The nail assembly part 2701 made up of a plurality of obstacle nails N is housed in the first housing part 2555a so that the periphery of the head thereof is surrounded.

As a result, in the specific faulty nail group 2700, the movement of the head of the faulty nail N is restricted by storing the faulty nail N in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation (bending) of the obstructing nail N due to the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or some external impact, and the game ball It is possible to reduce the unintended flow of balls B, and it is also possible to distribute the game balls B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be sustained. It is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B on the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the specific faulty nail group 2700, as described above, the heads of the faulty nails N are accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby preventing the deformation of the faulty nails N. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N at the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the specific faulty nail group 2700, the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b that accommodate the heads of the faulty nails N are attached to the center right front plate sticker 2555 affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. Since the nail N is closed, it is impossible to touch the nail N from the front. Thereby, it is possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, when the faulty nail N of the specific faulty nail group 2700 is bent from the front, a trace of the bending remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, making it easier to notice the problem of the faulty nail N.

In addition, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has the function of sorting the incoming game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second grand winning port 2007. This function is an important function that affects the ball payout rate. All nail adjustments are prohibited in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the center right front plate 2555 and the center Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific failure nail group 2700, no nail adjustment can be performed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plurality of nail sets 2701 forming the specific faulty nail group 2700 were shown as being composed of two faulty nails N, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three It may be constructed using the above-mentioned obstacle nails N. When the set nail part 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, the plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a line or arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, quadrangle, pentagon, or hexagon. Also good.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the guidance region 2710 by the specific faulty nail group 2700 is composed of two regions, the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, but the invention is not limited to this. , may be composed of one region, or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, since the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, the first special symbol is If the second grand prize opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short period of time so that the game ball B can be received, the game Even if the player attempts to drive the game ball B so that it reaches the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when it can be accepted, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 causes the game ball B to reach the second grand prize opening 2007 at the desired timing. It can be made difficult to reach the ball B, and it can be difficult to find the timing to hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to make the game more rewarding and enjoyable for the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstacle nails N, so compared to the case where it is constructed from a synthetic resin member, the structure is The cost for the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost for the Pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo gaming area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo game area 2010 is independent from the game area 5a, and is an area where only specific game balls B can be distributed. Specifically, the pseudo game area 2010 is the area where only the game ball B (the so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can be distributed. This pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 includes a portion where the front surface of the flat game panel 1100 with the game area 5a provided in front thereof is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. A pseudo-big prize that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the nail N and the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has an opening 2402 and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging game balls B that are not accepted into the pseudo big winning port 2402 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo big prize opening 2402 that serves as an acceptance port that can accept the game balls B, and a pseudo output port 2404 that discharges the game balls B. It has a similar configuration to the inside of the gaming area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the partition part 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the right shelf 2569, the left shelf 2570, and the middle wall 2571 of the second attacker section 2560. The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall part 2412 of the partition part 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall part 2568 of the second attacker part 2560, the second standing wall part 2415 of the dividing part 2410, the left horizontal wall part 2417, the inclined wall part 2418, and the third standing wall part 2419. ing. The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the lower end by the bottom wall part 2411 of the partition part 2410.

In the pseudo game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker part 2560 and the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this area.

The second big prize opening 2007 as a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big prize opening door 2562. Since this second big prize opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward in the front and back direction, it is difficult to see the second big winning opening door 2562 from the player side. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the parts that are partitioned from the game area 5a (such as the dividing part 2410 and the attacker left wall part 2568 of the center accessory 2500) are transparent. At the same time, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, it is difficult for the player to see the pseudo game area 2010 as a part of the game area 5a. You can create the illusion that

The pseudo big winning hole 2402 provided in the pseudo gaming area 2010 is formed to be longer in the left and right direction than the second big winning hole 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second big winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since this pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened toward the front, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed (normally In the state), the side thereof is facing forward, and the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is visible to the player.

For this reason, when a player looks at this pachinko machine 1, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 will be more conspicuous than the second big prize opening 2007, which is unlike anything seen in previous pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player think that the game has a large winning opening that is not available in the first place, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of this embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 makes the pseudo big winning hole 2402 unable to accept the game ball B. Closed. In addition, in the normal state, since the second grand prize opening 2007 is closed by the second grand prize opening door 2562, the game that is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second grand prize opening door 2562 The ball B rolls to the left on the second big prize opening door 2562 and is released into the gaming area 5a through the right release passage 2565. Therefore, under normal conditions, game balls B do not circulate within the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, and the second special symbol is drawn according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol. When the big prize opening door 2562 retreats, the game ball B can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is accepted into the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game balls B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flow down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the forwardly exposed portion of the game panel 1100. At this time, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and goes to the bottom. It flows down onto the wall 2411 and rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and then is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third vertical wall 2419, and flows forward at that part. The pseudo-out port 2404 that is open is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. In other words, it is ejected from the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 appears to the player as being in the out port 1008. It can create the illusion that you are accepted by others. Thereby, it is possible to create an illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, it is possible to create an illusion that the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 in the pseudo gaming area 2010 is the same as the game in which the gaming ball B passes through the big winning opening in a conventional pachinko machine. If the game ball B is not accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, the player can be disappointed. On the other hand, since the game ball B accepted in the second big prize opening 2007 is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo big prize opening 2402, it is distributed to the second big prize opening 2007. Upon acceptance, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. As a result, the game ball B is paid out even though the game ball B is not accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, so it is possible to make the player feel like he has won, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo big winning opening door 2405, which stands out from the front, opens and closes, so the player instantly notices that the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open for acceptance. can be set. Thereby, it is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed hitting") so that the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. Further, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of notice, or the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed as one of the signals instructing the player to "hit right." This pseudo big winning hole 2402 is entered only when the player hits the right hand, so it is easy for the player to intuitively understand.

For this reason, for example, before the second big prize opening 2007 becomes available for acceptance, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed with a flicker to cause the player to "hit the right hand". . This makes it easier for the "right-hit" game ball B to reach the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second grand prize opening 2007 is ready for acceptance, making it possible for the player to enjoy the game even more. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the second big prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern during a "jackpot" game, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 also opens and closes, many game balls B can be drawn in a short time through the second big winning opening 2007. By supplying the game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 and distributing many game balls B within the pseudo game area 2010, it is possible for the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and the games within the pseudo game area 2010. You can do it. At this time, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B will be accepted into the large pseudo big winning hole 2402, so the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in player's interest can be suppressed. can be done.

In this embodiment, the left and right direction of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is formed larger than the second big winning hole 2007, but above the pseudo big winning hole 2402, there is a right side wall part 2414, a left side wall part 2417 and A slanted wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the left slanted wall portion 2416) enters a pseudo big winning hole. 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is approximately half the distance of the second big prize opening 2007 in the left and right direction. Therefore, since the plurality of game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 are concentrated in a narrow area and headed toward the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 are The player can be made to have the illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

The pseudo big prize opening 2402 of this embodiment does not pay out the game ball B or give a benefit to the player upon receiving the game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can be set to an opening/closing pattern that is not seen in the big winning hole of conventional pachinko machines (for example, 337 time, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beat, 16 beat, BGM, or a predetermined pattern). can be opened and closed at the same tempo as the music, etc.), which can entertain the players.

In addition, in addition to the obstacle nails N, a windmill W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. By making the windmill W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002, and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B are gathered above the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532. As a result, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be passed through the second left guide path 2532 with a higher probability than through the first left guide path 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the second left guide passage 2532 will circulate downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and will flow down the left side of the variable prize opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532, there is a first grand prize opening 2006 that is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2523 under normal conditions, and the second left guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2523 and flows down. Then, the first big prize opening door 2523 is opened according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. When the game ball B enters the second left guide passage 2532 while moving backward, it will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B accepted into the first big prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball guidance of the back unit 3000 It is discharged downward via unit 3100. When a game ball B is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2525, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be gathered directly above the gate 2002 at a lower part than the variable prize winning opening 2003. Thereby, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B flows downward on both the left and right sides of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery of normal symbols is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning hole 2003 becomes in a state where it can accept the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning hole 2003 is ready to accept, the variable winning hole door 2521 rotates to the left, so the game ball B that circulates through the second left guide passage 2532 has a high probability of winning a variable prize. 2003. The game ball B accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, then detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and sent downward. is discharged to. When a game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided between the gate 2002 and the upper left side unit 2300 from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens toward the left in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The windmill W is arranged closer to the center accessory 2500 between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are caused by the gate 2002 and the game balls B that have flown around the right outside of the gate 2002 flowing mainly down the area to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is arranged so that Therefore, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated on the left outside of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 passes through the warp passage and exits from the warp exit 2512 that opens within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is provided near the lower end of the center part in the left-right direction of the center accessory 2500. It is supplied to stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction and is discharged from either the central discharge section 2513a or the side discharge section 2513b so as to flow back into the gaming area 5a.

Since the center release part 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2004 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release part 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first start port 2004. It is received into the starting port 2004. The game ball B released from the side release parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a is accepted into the first starting port 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special symbol is carried out and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are provided.

Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 are received in the out port 1008 and discharged outside the gaming area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guiding section 1003 and then discharged downward.

A game ball B that has passed on the right side of the center of the windmill W has a high probability of hitting the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally in two upper and lower rows along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game balls B that have not flown down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side through the right side of the windmill W flow down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center of the windmill W flows down onto the shelf section 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls to the right on the shelf section 2301, and then moves onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. flows down to.

The game ball B, which flows on the right side of the center of the windmill W and flows down to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located below the center accessory 2500 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction ( There is a possibility that the fuel is guided toward the first starting port 2004) and accepted into the first starting port 2004. In addition, on the upper side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are diagonally arranged, there is a gap through which one game ball B can pass, so it may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001 of the side unit 2200. Game balls B that are not accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 are discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B that has flown down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally is caused to move in the left and right direction of the game area 5a by the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided toward the center, and is not received into the first starting port 2004, but is received into the out port 1008 and discharged from the gaming area 5a. On this lower stage side, since there are a plurality of gaps in the middle through which one game ball B can pass, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. At the top, it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming part 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker part 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. In the space forming part 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker part 2560, a specific fault nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of fault nails N is provided.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is relatively strongly hit aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, comes into contact with the blocking part 1006 and enters the right first guide path 2541 of the right guide path group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which was hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and enters the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the second right guide passage 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the first right guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 and then moves downward from the side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 between the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. released. Then, the game ball B that passed through the right first guide path 2541 enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming part 2550, and moves in the left and right direction within the first guide area 2711. It flows down in a meandering manner. The game ball B that has circulated through the first guide area 2711 comes into contact with the guide wall part 2552 and also flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall part 2552.

The plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guiding area 2711 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass. Through this, the game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side (second guiding area 2712) of the first guiding area 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall part 2501 and flows down to the guide wall part 2552. At this time, the plurality of rear protrusions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 cause the water to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flown down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall portion 2552. The game ball B that has moved from the first guidance area 2711 to the right outside will flow through the second guidance area 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side closer to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B that passed through the right second guide path 2542 enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming part 2550, and moves in the left and right direction within the second guide area 2712. It flows down in a meandering manner. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide area 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall part 2552 and also flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall part 2552.

The plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the second guiding area 2712 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass. Through this, the game ball B may move to the left outer side (first guide area 2711) or right outer side of the second guiding area 2712. The game ball B that has moved from the second guidance area 2712 to the left outside flows through the first guidance area 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guidance area 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall 2551, and passes between the guidance wall 2552 and the right wall 2551. Flows down to the body part. At this time, the plurality of rear protrusions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 cause the water to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game balls B guided by this specific faulty nail group 2700 have a suppressed distribution speed and are kept at the same height compared to the part where the faulty nails N are planted in a general gauge arrangement. It will flow with a delay.

Game balls B that have passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming section 2550) and have not been accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 are sent from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567 to the second attacker section. Enter the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second big prize opening 2007 of 2560. In a normal state, the second grand prize opening door 2562 moves forward and closes the second grand prize opening 2007 so that it cannot be accepted, so the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 is After rolling to the left on the upper surface of the body, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the rear ridge 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front of the ridge of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the second attacker part 2560 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left horizontal wall part 2417). do. Then, with a certain degree of probability, it is received into the second starting port 2005 that is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although the probability of acceptance into the second starting port 2005 is lower, it is accepted into the second sub-out port 2022 which is open on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a lottery of a second special symbol is carried out and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

Game balls B released from the right release passage 2565 and not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 roll obliquely toward the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

The game balls B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 are the lottery results of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, or the lottery result of the first special symbol. When the second grand prize opening door 2562 retreats in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol, it is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by either of the two second big winning hole sensors 2561 provided below. When a game ball B is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2561, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 from the second big prize opening 2007 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. When the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, it flows down onto the bottom wall part 2411 through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, and flows along the slope of the bottom wall part 2411. After rolling to the left, it is received into the pseudo outlet 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When game balls B are circulating in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the second special symbol When the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the lottery result, there is a high probability that it will come into contact with the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and be accepted into the rear pseudo big winning opening 2402. It will be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance.

The performance using the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small win", etc.) When the second big prize opening 2007 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 opens the pseudo big prize opening 2402 for presentation. At that time, the peripheral control board 1510 can know the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 opens, so the degree to which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, it will be in a high probability state (so-called probability variable state) after a "big hit". On the other hand, when there are many missed wins in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that the player will be in a low probability state (so-called normal non-probability variable state) after hitting the jackpot. Furthermore, it is possible to suggest probability settings (generally, six levels of settings 1 to 6) based on such a state of missing data.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the normal state, there is only a possibility that it will be accepted into the second starting port 2005 where a privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is Since there is no possibility that the game ball B will pass through or be accepted into the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

To be more specific, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. Regarding the lottery result, the special variation time for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol to the player is set longer for the lottery result of the second special symbol than the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the second special symbol lottery result takes longer to consume the reserved number, even if the number of game balls B accepted per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. , the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed using the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Furthermore, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B that is put out is one. For this reason, under normal conditions, even if you hit the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that it will only be accepted by the second starting hole 2005, and even if it is accepted by the second starting hole 2005, you will receive a bonus. Since the number of game balls B paid out is one, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hit the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game balls B are received in the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007, a privilege of paying out many game balls B is given. In order to make it possible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 need to receive the game ball B, so that they are It is necessary to draw a first special symbol and a second special symbol that can be accepted.

For this reason, under normal conditions, the player is advised to play the game so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004. The driving operation of the ball B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first starting port 2004 It is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B by the player.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, a "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, since the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007 opens and closes, it is necessary to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B can be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007. Not only can the operation be enjoyed, but also the anticipation for receiving the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 can be increased.

Specifically, when the first grand prize opening 2006 becomes available for receiving, a driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second big prize opening 2007 becomes available for receiving, it is possible to perform a driving operation (“hitting right”) so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a right guide path group 2540 consisting of a right first guide path 2541 and a right second guide path 2542, and a specific obstacle A guide region 2710 consisting of a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage through which it flows facilitates acceptance into the second sub-out port 2022, so that the desired guide can be achieved. The driving force of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the passageway (in this case, the first right guide passage 2541), and the driving operation of the game ball B is instructed to the player. Can be entertained.

In addition, the second grand prize opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left and right directions than the first grand prize opening 2006, so at first glance it seems to the player that the second grand prize opening 2007 is faster than the first prize opening 2006. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is possible to accept many game balls B. As a result, when the second grand prize opening 2007 becomes available for acceptance, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the second It is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the grand prize opening 2007 and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is received in the second big prize opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 where a pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and it is also possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B within the pseudo game area 2010, suppressing a decrease in interest. can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted into the first starting hole 2004 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the guided game ball B is provided. The general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and A back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 is placed behind the back box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guide unit 3100 which is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and through which game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, and a back ball guide unit 3100 near the front end inside the back box 3010. a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 provided in the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back upper front display unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at approximately the same position in the front and back direction as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200; The back lower front effect unit 3400 provided at the rear lower part of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010, and the back upper and rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back upper front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 155 etc.), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151(a) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the front, and FIG. 151(b) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the back. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box shown in FIG. 151 seen from the front, broken down into main components, and FIG. 152(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 151 seen from the back. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 152, viewed from the front, and FIG. 153(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 153(a), viewed from the back.

The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 opened to the front, a back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box provided behind the back box rear unit 3030. A back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of the board 3010 is provided. The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by a lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box shape with an open front and has an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and is provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a, on which the back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) is placed. two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lower side near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface 3010b. It includes a lock mechanism section 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be slidable left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the vertical center of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the back box rear unit 3030 is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear with the lock slider 3020 being slid to the left in rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view with the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1652 from moving backward. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for attaching the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft supports 3010f that can rotatably support the shaft portion 3041a of the back board unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft supports 3010f on the rear surface. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back board unit 3040 is locked.

The back box rear unit 3030 is removably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from the rear. The back box rear unit 3030 includes a production display device 1600 that can display a predetermined production image, a set plate 1650 to which the production display device 1600 is attached to the front side and is attached to the back box 3010, and a set plate 1650 that is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650. and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which a peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed into a rectangular flat plate having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that are spaced apart from the upper side in the left-right direction and protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing groove 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that is open toward the front on the front side. The liquid crystal mounting part 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In this embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other when viewed from the front. The set plate 1650 is transparent. Thereby, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually confirmed from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160, etc.) having a peripheral control section 1511 and a performance display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. has been done. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of set plate 1650 such that the upper side of peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly below the upper side of set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, there is an area with a height of approximately 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. It is formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and has a thin box shape in the front and back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. We are prepared. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. Further, the board box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010g of the back box 3010 at the tip of the L-shaped portion extending left and right.

This back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled into the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back board unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. Further, the L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 extending left and right is located between the rear lower end of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

This back board unit 3040 can be assembled into a back box by releasing the lock between the locking part 3010g and the locking claw 3041b and rotating the locking claw 3041b rearward about the shaft part 3041a. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the rear box rear unit 3030 can be attached to and removed from the rear box 3010 without removing it from the rear box 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to attach a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a set plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 that corresponds to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, effect display devices 1600 of different sizes can be attached to the back box 3010 by simply changing the set plate 1650. In other words, in conventional pachinko machines, the design of the back box 3010 is changed when the model changes, but in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common component even if the model changes. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when it is desired to change the position of the effect display device 1600 due to design changes, etc., this can be easily done by changing only the set plate 1650. This makes it possible to reduce costs associated with design changes and the like.

In the above embodiment, a transparent set plate 1650 is shown, but the set plate 1650 is not limited to this, and may be colored transparent, colored opaque, etc. If the set board 1650 is visible from the player's side, it is desirable to use an opaque color including black. This makes it possible to avoid the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unsightly due to players being able to see the inside of the island equipment or seeing light from behind. In this case, in particular, by making the set board 1650 black, even if the set board 1650 is visible from the player side, the set board 1650 can be made less conspicuous. 1600 and other decorations can be made more conspicuous, and it is possible to make it easier to fully exhibit the effect of displaying them.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, and a first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted in the first starting hole 2004. , and a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160, etc.).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 has a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and It has a discharge passageway that receives the game ball B that has been received by the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end, and then discharges it downward. There is.

[5-9c. Back front peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back and front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end inside the back box 3010. The back and front periphery decoration unit 3200 includes a back and front periphery decoration 3201 formed in an annular shape along the periphery of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5, and a back and front periphery decoration 3201 for making the back and front periphery decoration 3201 illuminated and decorated. It includes a back and front peripheral edge decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo ring. The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed to have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from the LED mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration board.

According to this back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can decorate the peripheral edge of the gaming area 5a in an annular shape, making it possible to improve the appearance of the gaming area 5a. Further, by decorating the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 with light emission, the peripheral edge of the gaming area 5a can be made to emit light in an annular shape, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the inside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can independently emit light from a plurality of parts divided in the circumferential direction using a plurality of LEDs on the back front peripheral edge decorative board, so that the light rotates in the circumferential direction. A light emitting performance can be shown to a player, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9d. Back top front production unit]
Next, the back top/front presentation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 143 and the like. The back top front presentation unit 3300 is provided at approximately the same position as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the front and back direction at the top inside the back box 3010. The back top and front presentation unit 3300 includes a back top and front decoration body 3310 that is rectangular in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and a back side that is provided behind the back top and front decoration body 3310 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It includes a top and front decorative substrate (not shown) and a back and front lifting unit (not shown) that lifts and lowers the back and top front decorations 3310.

The back upper front decorative body 3310 is arranged so that the ranks of sumo rankings such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and the respective rankings are displayed by the LEDs on the back upper front decorative board. can be decorated with light independently. The back top front decorative body 3310 is formed to have a length that extends in the left-right direction across the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is attached so as to be movable up and down, and can be raised and lowered by the back upper front lifting unit. The back upper front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a height range that is approximately the same as the height of the back upper front decorative body 3310. In a normal state, this back upper front decorative body 3310 is in a raised position, which is the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled to the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at approximately the same height as the top end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front, and is located at the top of the game area 5a. Most of the back and front decorations 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. can.

This back upper front decoration body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position state to the lowered position state by the back upper front lifting unit. When the back top front decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is located at approximately the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). In the lowered position, almost the entire back upper front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to this back top front presentation unit 3300, each of the rankings of the back top front decoration body 3310 can be decorated with light emission independently, so for example, after all the rankings have been decorated with variable light emission, only one ranking It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the light is decorated and the fluctuation stops. As a result, when a high-ranked player is decorated with light, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

Moreover, according to the back top and front decoration body 3310, the order of the rankings decorated with light emission also suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur. can do. As a result, when the fluctuating light-emitting decoration of a plurality of rankings of the back top and front decoration body 3310 is started, it is possible to make the player nervous and nervous depending on whether or not the fluctuation is stopped at the desired ranking. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back upper front lifting unit, the back upper front decoration body 3310 moves to the center side of the gaming area 5a and the front side of the effect display device 1600 is moved. Since the upper part is blocked, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back top front decorative body 3310, and the player's attention can be drawn to the back top front decorative body 3310. As a result, the light emitting effect using the back and front decorations 3310 as described above can be reliably shown to the players, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest. In addition, if the above-mentioned light-emitting effect is executed when the player is in the lowered position than when the light-emitting effect is in the raised position, it is possible to increase the sense of premium for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of anticipation for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

[5-9e. Ura-bottom-front production unit]
Next, the back and front presentation unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front presentation unit 3400 is provided at the lower part of the back box 3010 and behind the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200. The back lower front presentation unit 3400 includes a back lower front decorative body 3410 which is long in the left and right direction, and a back lower front decorative board (not shown) which is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (omitted)) and a back and front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back and front decoration body 3410.

The back lower front decorative body 3410 can be decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower front decorative board. In addition, the back lower front decoration body 3410 is provided so as to be movable up and down between a lowered position where it is lowered the most and a raised position where it is raised more by the back lower front elevating unit. The back lower front decoration body 3410 is formed in a length such that the left and right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back lower front decorative body 3410 includes a base decorative body 3411 that is long from side to side, a central decorative body 3412 provided at the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the horizontal direction, and a base decorative body 3411 that can cover the central decorative body 3412 from the front. A front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 are provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 156, etc.).

The base decoration body 3411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope, and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the characters ``goshu'' are formed in a relief shape. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatably provided around an axis extending in the front-back direction centering on the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to be movable in the left-right direction so as to move away from each other. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 each have translucency. The front left decorative body 3413 has the character "heaven" formed in a relief shape. The front right decorative body 3414 has the character "Sho" formed in a relief shape.

In a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in a closed position where they are close to each other and in contact with each other, and hide the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear from being visible from the front. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from a normal state to an open position where they are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear can be seen from the front through the space between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the normal state of the back and front presentation unit 3400, the back and front decoration body 3410 is located at the lowered position. Further, in a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is not visible from the front. In the normal state, when the back lower front decorative body 3410 is assembled on the game board 5, the vertical center is located at a height slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. It is located at approximately the same height as the warp entrance 2511, and its upper end is located at a height slightly below the warp entrance 2511. In this normal state, a part of the back and front decoration body 3410 is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is visible between the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through.

The back lower front decoration body 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the lower back front lifting unit. When the back lower front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located at a slightly lower height than the back upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the center of the back lower front decoration body 3410 in the up-down direction when in the raised position is located at approximately the same height as the first grand prize opening 2006. In addition, the back lower front decorative body 3410 can move the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be moved.

According to this back-lower-front effect unit 3400, when the back-lower-front decorative body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the gaming area 5a and blocks a part of the effect display device 1600. can strongly attract the attention of the user, and can draw attention to the back lower front decorative body 3410.

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear becomes visible (appears). ) Therefore, the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 can make the player think that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the back lower front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved to the open position to open the central decorative body. By rotating the central decorative body 3412 with the body 3412 appearing, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that something good will happen, further increasing the player's sense of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Furthermore, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether the central decorative body 3412 rotates or not. can be entertained.

In addition, the back/front front production unit 3400 can raise and lower the back/front decorative body 3410 as described above, the appearance of the center decorative body 3412 due to the movement of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412. By appropriately combining the above, it is possible to present a variety of movable effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable effect of the back and front decorative body 3410 as described above, the back and front display unit 3400 also enables light emitting effects using a plurality of LEDs on the back and front decorative board, allowing for more diverse effects. This can be shown to the players, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

[5-9f. Back top/back production unit]
Next, the back top/back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be explained. The back upper and rear effect unit 3500 is provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 and behind the back upper and front effect unit 3300. The back top and rear effect unit 3500 is provided with a back top and back decorative body 3510 (see FIG. 155, etc.) that is long in the left and right direction, and is provided behind the back top and back decorative body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back top and rear decoration board (not shown) and a back top and back lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back top and back decoration body 3510.

The back top and rear decoration body 3510 has translucency, and can be decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top and rear decoration substrates. Further, the back top and rear decoration body 3510 is provided so as to be movable up and down between a raised position where it is raised the most and a lowered position where it is lowered the most by the rear up and down rear lifting unit. Furthermore, the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 are provided at the rear of the back lower front decorative bodies 3410.

The back top and back decoration body 3510 is formed in a shape that imitates the top half of a championship cup, and has the character "Excellent" formed in relief in the center in the left and right direction. The back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 can form one large championship cup by abutting the lower ends of the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3610 (see FIG. 157, etc.). The back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 have approximately the same height as the back upper and front decorative bodies 3310.

In the normal state of the back top and rear effect unit 3500, the back top and back decoration body 3510 is located at the raised position. In this state, the back upper and rear decorative body 3510 is located behind the back upper and front decorative body 3310 in the raised position, and is not visible from the front.

In the back top and rear effect unit 3500, when the back top and back decoration 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back up and back lifting unit, the lower end of the back top and back decoration 3510 is at a height approximately at the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is located in the When the back upper and rear decoration body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back top and front decorations 3310 or the back and bottom front decorations 3410 have not moved in front of the back top and rear decorations 3510, the back top and back decorations 3510 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back top and rear effect unit 3500, by raising and lowering the back top and back decorations 3510, it can be made visible from the front, so the appearance of the back top and back decorations 3510 can not surprise the player. This makes it possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest. In addition, the back top and rear decorations 3510 can form one large decoration by making contact with the back and bottom back decorations 3610, which can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-9g. Ura/back production unit]
Next, the back lower post effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be explained. The back lower rear effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom rear effect unit 3600 is provided with a back bottom rear decorative body 3610 (see FIG. 155, etc.) which is long in the left and right direction, and is provided behind the back bottom rear decoration body 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back and lower back decoration board (not shown) and a back and back rear elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back and lower back decorative body 3610.

The lower back decoration body 3610 has translucency, and can be decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back decoration board. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be movable up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the rear lower rear lifting unit.

The lower back decorative body 3610 is formed in a shape that imitates the lower half of a championship cup, and has the word "Award" formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The back upper and rear decorative bodies 3610 can form one large championship cup by abutting the upper and lower back decorative bodies 3510 at the upper end (see FIG. 157, etc.). The back lower rear decorative body 3610 has approximately the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the normal state of the back lower back effect unit 3600, the back lower back decoration body 3610 is located at the lowered position. In this state, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is located behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 in the lowered position, and is not visible from the front.

When the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back-down rear lifting unit, the back-down rear performance unit 3600 is located at a height where the upper end of the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is approximately in contact with the lower end of the back-up rear decorative body 3510 in the raised position. When the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the performance display device 1600. In this state, if the back-up front decorative body 3310 or the back-down front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back-down rear decorative body 3610, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be seen through the frame of the center role piece 2500.

According to the back and rear effect unit 3600, by raising and lowering the back and rear decorations 3610, it can be made visible from the front, so the appearance of the back and rear decorations 3610 does not surprise the player. This makes it possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest. In addition, the back and lower rear decorations 3610 can form one large decoration by making contact with the back and upper and rear decorations 3510, which can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main performances on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front production unit and the back lower rear decoration body of the back lower front production unit in the back unit have respectively moved to the raised position. . In Fig. 155, the back lower front decoration of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the play area, and the back upper and rear decoration of the back upper and rear presentation unit has moved above the back lower front decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body. FIG. 156 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit have moved to the open position and the central decorative body has appeared in the state shown in FIG. 155. It is a front view of a game board.

In addition, FIG. 157 shows that the back top and back decoration of the back top and rear effect unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back top and back decoration of the back top and back effect unit has been raised and the back top and back decoration has been moved to the lower position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which it is in contact with the game board. FIG. 158 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit have moved to the open position and the central decorative body has appeared in the state shown in FIG. 157. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 159 shows that the back top front decoration of the back top and front presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration of the back top and rear presentation unit has moved to the rear of the back top and front decoration. Then, the back lower front decoration of the back lower front decoration unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and at the same time, the back lower rear decoration of the back lower rear direction unit rises to create the back lower front decoration. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear side of the game board is in contact with the upper and lower back decorations.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, the game panel can be viewed through them as shown in FIG. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind the back unit 1100, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back top front decoration body 3310 of the back top front presentation unit 3300, and the bottom back of the back bottom front presentation unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410, etc. can be clearly viewed, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is provided in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and cannot be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, center accessory 2500, etc. I can do it. The back top front decorative body 3310 of the back top front presentation unit 3300 is located above the top end of the presentation display device 1600 at a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is approximately at the same height as the top end of the inner rail 1002, Most of it can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

In addition, the back lower front decoration body 3410 of the back lower front presentation unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the lower end of the presentation display device 1600, with the center in the vertical direction being slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, A part of it can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the vicinity of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen within the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the square area between the back top and front decorations 3310 and the back and bottom front decorations 3410.

In addition, the back top and back decoration body 3510 of the back top and rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back top and front decoration body 3310, and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back lower rear decoration body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the back lower front decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 receives the back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, etc. perform predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects. Furthermore, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, the so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable effects as shown in FIGS. 154 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back lower front decoration body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 and the back lower rear decoration body 3610 of the back lower front effect unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the back and front decorations 3410, which are crossing the effect display device 1600, move upward so as to traverse the effect and display device 1600, thereby attracting the player's attention to the back and front decorations 3410. It can make people think that something good is going to happen.

By the way, in FIG. 154, when only the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the lower back rear decorative body 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. Since it is formed to form a pair with the rear decorative body 3510, if only the lower back decorative body 3610 is visible, it will look half-hearted and unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a will be poor. There is a fear. Furthermore, when the back and bottom rear decorations 3610 are visible, due to its incomplete shape, some players may think that it is merging with another decoration, and may be confused with the back and top and rear decorations 3510, which will be described later. When executing a movable performance, the impact on the player may be reduced and sufficient performance effects may not be obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the lower front decorative body 3410, the lower back decorative body 3610 can remain hidden. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from becoming unsightly, and to make it difficult for people to notice the existence of the back and lower back decorations 3610, and to make it possible to move jointly with the back and upper and rear decorations 3510, which will be described later. It is possible to fully demonstrate the effect of the performance.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, the back and front decoration body 3410 is moved to the center of the gaming area, as shown in FIG. 155. At this time, for the same reason as above, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved together with the lower back front decorative body 3410 so that the lower back front decorative body 3410 is located in front. In addition, the back upper and rear decorations 3510 are moved to a position between the back upper and front decorations 3310 and the back and lower front decorations 3410, and the back and lower back decorations 3610 are moved to the lower side of the back and lower front decorations 3410. let

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered by the back top and rear decorations 3510, the back bottom front decorations 3410, and the back bottom and rear decorations 3610, which creates a strong impact on the player. You can give something, and it can make you feel strongly that something good is going to happen. In this state, the back upper and rear decorations 3510 and the back lower and rear decorations 3610, which together form one decoration (here, a championship cup), are vertically separated from each other, but there is a space between them. Because the back and front decorations 3410 are located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the back and front decorations 3410, resulting in a poor appearance. can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position where they are close to each other to the open position where they are separated from each other. The center decoration 3412 is made to appear visibly between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414. As a result, a new center decoration 3412 appears in the back and front decorations 3410, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs. It is possible to make the player think strongly of the game, increase expectations for the advantageous gaming state, and suppress a decline in interest.

When moving the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 to the open position, they may be moved gradually or may be opened and closed repeatedly. Thereby, depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 open to reveal the central decorative body 3412, the player can be made nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the center decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, by rotating the central decorative body 3412, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to increase expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 155, and then as shown in FIG. 157. , the back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are respectively moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact (combined) with each other. As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the gaming area 5a, making it possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur in which the player is advantageous. , it is possible to increase expectations for advantageous gaming conditions and suppress a decline in interest.

Thereafter, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur, increasing expectations for an advantageous gaming state and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the center decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) has been confirmed to occur, thereby increasing expectations for an advantageous gaming state and increasing interest. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the first action is to move the back lower front decorative body 3410 (back lower rear decorative body 3610) to the raised position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the back top front decoration body 3310 is moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration body 3510 is moved together with the back top front decoration body 3310 to the back top front decoration body 3310. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decorative body 3310, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the rear of the back lower front decorative body 3410 together with the back lower front decorative body 3410. You may also move it to . Alternatively, the back lower front decoration 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the back lower back decoration 3610. These can also provide the same effects as above.

In this way, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described series of performances are performed by drawing the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is executed according to the lottery result and the second special symbol, and can entertain the players. In addition, the series of productions can proceed to the end or end midway depending on the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is multi-stage. This makes it difficult for players to get bored.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-described movable effects can be appropriately combined with light-emitting effects, and also with effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible to attract players with various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effects include the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, Although the execution is shown in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol, the execution is not limited to this, and it may be executed in response to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state), it is possible to enjoy the movable effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control section 1512 that controls the. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that includes a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a section on the game board 5. It is equipped with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware random number (described as "circuit") is built-in. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. After extracting all the values, extract one value within the predetermined numerical range again, and quickly extract the other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004, and a second starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. mouth sensor 2401, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B that passed through the gate 2002, game accepted in the first big winning hole 2006 The first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects the ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects the game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc. are sent to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port.

Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention, they are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are input to the main control board 1310 directly. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, each detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001, gate sensor 2601, first big winning hole sensor 2525, second big winning hole sensor 2561, magnetic sensor 1050, and vibration sensor connects the panel relay board. The signal is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit controls the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 and the first The respective drive signals are outputted to the big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit 1400. status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special reservation number display, round display, Each drive signal is directly output without going through another board. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is outputted to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2401, the variable winning hole sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning hole sensor 2525, the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the variable prize winning port 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor Detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 and the gate sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, the variable prize winning port sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the first big prize opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so the first big winning opening sensor Detection of game ball B by 2525 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first big prize opening sensor 2525 as well. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 frequently detects the game balls B. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used also for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of a proximity switch. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a push operation unit that releases the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball A ball extraction switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. , is equipped with.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the out of ball detection sensor 574, and the dispensing control I/O port are input. Detection signals from a detection sensor 591 and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power outage of the main control board 1310, A power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and an error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is established that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 195, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects that are referenced by this sound source IC. It is equipped with a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5 is sent to the game board decoration drive board. Drive signals are sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. It consists of door-side drive data for outputting the door-side drive data, and door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side driving light emission data to be displayed is sent from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is sent to the serial I/O port for the display control unit. In addition to sending data from the I/O port to the performance display control section 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, press detection sensor 373, elevation detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs sound information from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the production display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more clockwise the handle 195 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The downward speed of the ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It will circulate through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Near the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532, there is a first grand prize opening 2006 that is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2523 under normal conditions, and the second left guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2523 and flows down.

Game balls B that have circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 are released above the gate 2002, and are connected to the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521. 2002, and then pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal win", the variable winning slot The variable winning hole 2003, which is closed by the door 2521, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the variable winning hole 2003.

In this embodiment, since the variable prize opening 2003 is provided in a part close to the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is more expensive to circulate through the second left guide passage 2532 than through the first left guide passage 2531. It is accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 with probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of game balls B are delivered to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. will be paid out.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning hole 2003 normally becomes open after the variable time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 after the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and before the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the regular symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous regular symbol is finished. Further, the maximum number of holding lottery results for normal symbols is set to four, and any more than that are discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

At the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, or the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W allow the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 to enter the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability. .

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, there is a high probability that the first It is received into the starting port 2004.

When game balls B are received into the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) win", A lottery is held for "time saving (time saving) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable time saving win," "second jackpot," etc.). If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "lose", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variable time), the first starting When the game ball B is accepted into the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the drawing result of the symbol is put on hold. The maximum number of reserved first special symbol lottery results is up to four for each first starting port 2004, and for more than that, game balls B will not be accepted into the first starting port 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 It passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540 and is discharged into the space forming part 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first right guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open near the stopper 1006, and an entrance spaced leftward from the entrance of the first right guide passage 2541. and a second right guide passage 2542 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), it enters the first right guide passage 2541 and hits the ball B with such force that it does not contact the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the hit, there is a high probability that it will enter the second right guide path 2542. That is, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first right guide path 2541 or the second right guide path 2542 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game balls B that have passed through the first right guide passage 2541 are released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game balls B that have circulated through the second right guide passage 2542 are released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. The second guiding region 2712 of the nail group 2700 is discharged.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guide area 2710. As a result, the falling velocity of the game ball B is suppressed in the area of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 compared to the normal area.

In the first guidance area 2711 and the second guidance area 2712, the game ball B may come off from the guidance area 2710, and when it comes off the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2022 provided below have a high probability of being accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is ejected out of the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the second right guide passage 2542 is configured to be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a higher probability than the first right guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform a driving operation for the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the first right guide path 2541 when "hitting right". There is. In other words, to encourage a driving operation in which the handle 195 is largely rotated so that the game ball B is hit with such force that the game ball B comes into contact with the abutting portion 1006 when "hitting to the right". This makes it easier to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 through a relatively easy driving operation.

The game ball B that flows through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming part 2550) and is not received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567 and reaches the second attacker. Enter section 2560. In a normal state, the second big prize opening 2007 provided in the second attacker part 2560 is closed by the second big prize opening door 2562 so that it cannot accept the game ball B, so the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker The game ball B that passed between the right wall part 2567 flows down onto the second big winning opening door 2562, rolls to the left on the second big winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then moves to the right. It passes through the discharge passage 2565 and is discharged downward from the second attacker section 2560.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Slanted wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstruction nails N are installed between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565, the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received into the second starting port 2005 with a certain degree of probability. Further, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received into the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Then, the game balls B released downward from the right release passage 2565 and not received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 flow down onto the sloped wall portion 2418 and follow the slope of the sloped wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally downward and to the left along the line, is ejected to the left at a location below the first starting port 2004, and is received into the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("hit right"), the second starting port 2005 is the only opportunity to receive the game ball B. As a result, under normal conditions, the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 ( It is possible to give a premium feel to players (right-handed hitters).

When the game ball B hit into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received into the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one ball) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, the main control board 1310 displays a second special symbol (for example, "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot"). , ``Probability variable (probability change) win'', ``Time saving (time saving) win'', ``Probable variable time saving win'', ``Probable variable winning without time saving'', ``Second jackpot'', etc.). If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "lose", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn during the non-time saving state is a predetermined period of time longer than the fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time). is suggested to the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state, both the fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are shortened, and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn during the time saving state is shortened. is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 10 seconds) that is shorter than the variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. In this way, in the non-time saving state, the variation time of the first special symbol that is mainly displayed in a variable manner is a predetermined time shorter than the second special symbol, and in the time saving state, the variation time of the second special symbol that is mainly displayed in a variable manner is set to the first special symbol. The fluctuation time is shorter than the pattern.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special variable time), the second starting When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started, so the second special The start of suggesting the drawing result of the symbol is put on hold. The maximum number of reserved second special symbol lottery results is up to four for each second starting port 2005, and for more than that, game balls B will not be accepted into the second starting port 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 is the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004. It is set longer than the special variation time for lottery results. As a result, since the second special symbol lottery result takes longer to consume the reserved number, the number of game balls B accepted per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed using the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in a normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2005 will be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed less frequently. , the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As mentioned above, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, the first big prize is won based on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol. The opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 open and close in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and become ready to accept the game ball B.

In the case where the first grand prize opening 2006 can be accepted, since the first grand prize opening 2006 is provided in the second left guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, A driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532. Then, when the first big prize opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, when the game ball B that has entered the second left guide passage 2532 is accepted into the first big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 onto the upper tray 201 by the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, in the case where the second grand prize opening 2007 can be accepted, since the second grand prize opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, The driving operation can be performed so that the game balls B circulate. Then, when the second big prize opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B enters the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567. is accepted into the second big prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

In this way, by allowing the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B when the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, Since many game balls B can be put out, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", for example, the second big prize opening 2007 is opened for a short time to be able to accept the game ball B. It opens and closes in between (for example, small hit rush). At this time, even if you try to hit the game ball B aiming at the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second grand prize opening 2007 opens and can accept the game ball B, the second grand prize opening 2007 will open. Since a specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the falling speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to determine the timing to drive the game ball B. As a result, a level of difficulty is assigned to the driving operation of the game ball B, which makes the game more rewarding and enjoyable for the player, and prevents the player from losing interest. . In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "jackpot", after the second grand prize opening 2007 becomes open to accept the game ball B, When either a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 10 balls) have been received into the second grand prize opening 2007, the game balls B An opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the device into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, you can change the probability that the first special symbol or the second special symbol such as "Jackpot" will be drawn ("probable winning"), or change the lottery result of the first special symbol. There is also a "win" that changes the display time of a performance image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot", the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007, After making it possible to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, below the second big prize opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game balls B accepted in the second big prize opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and then enters the pseudo gaming area 2010. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is able to accept the game ball B. , the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, the game ball B is ejected through the front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 from the pseudo out hole 2404 without being returned to the gaming area 5a.

For example, when the second big winning hole 2007 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to a "jackpot" as described above, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 receives the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Becomes acceptable. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided to be larger and more conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B received in the second big winning hole 2007 are transferred to the pseudo big winning hole 2402. By being accepted, it is possible to entertain the player by making it difficult for the player to get bored during the "jackpot" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery results of the first special symbol and the lottery results of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). The function display unit 1400 indicates the special symbol lottery result by flashing a plurality of LEDs for a predetermined period of time by repeatedly turning them on and off, and then suggests the special symbol lottery result by the combination of lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the lottery results of special symbols as a performance image. The performance image that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a state where three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is varied. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol (the symbol row fluctuates) on the performance display device 1600. (The time it takes for the final image to be displayed) is different from the time taken for the final image to be displayed, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit in the door frame 3 It is possible to perform a player participation type performance in which the player operates the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in 300. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper and front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower and rear effect unit 3600, etc. Therefore, the players can be entertained by various performances, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

[8. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, showing the inside of the game area where game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the back on the game board of the second embodiment. be. Figure 163 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and ball guidance unit in the right half of the center accessory in Figure 162, seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. 164(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and FIG. 164(b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 165(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view taken along the saw line, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. 164. 166(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit shown in FIG. 164 seen from the front right, and FIG. 166(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit shown in FIG. 164 seen from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the configuration of a part of the table unit 2000. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general winning holes 2001 are provided. In addition, in the game board 5A, the second starting port 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 on the game board 5 is used as the normal winning port 2008 instead of the gate 2002, and the variable winning port 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning port 2008. A second starting port 2005 opens and closes according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the ball B. Furthermore, the game board 5A is provided with a ball guiding unit 2580 that can guide the game ball B instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the above-mentioned differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning hole sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting hole sensor, and the second starting hole sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting hole sensor. It has been replaced with the normal winning hole sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming part 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker part 2560, and is a ball that can guide the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540. It has a guiding unit 2580 and a flat center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker part 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guiding unit 2580. .

The space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating vertically in a long rectangular shape in a flange part 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall part 2501, and an opening 2553 below the opening 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b, through which the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 are provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape extending downward from the entrance, rightward, and then downward. A second lower right passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the first lower right passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located approximately at the vertical center of the gaming area 5a when assembled to the gaming board 5A.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the area.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward directly above the first sub-out port 2021. Thereby, the probability that the game ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is received by the first sub-out port 2021 is higher than from the lower right first passage 2550a. In this lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guiding unit 2580 flows, so it goes to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation to enter the game ball B into the first right guide path 2541. Therefore, when "hitting to the right", by hitting the ball harder, the game ball B will more easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustments. There is no need to worry, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have passed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guiding unit 2580 has a first guiding passage 2580a that guides the game ball B from the first right guiding passage 2541, and a second guiding passage 2580b that guides the gaming ball B from the second right guiding passage 2542. are doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b are capable of guiding the game ball B downward while swinging it in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an inlet opening toward the front near the upper end, and an outlet opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance opening toward the front at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guidance passage 2580a, and an exit opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end.

The ball guide unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 in which a first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right is provided, and a second guide that is attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and is open to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 in which a passage 2580b is provided, and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The sphere guiding unit 2580 is transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2581a extending longitudinally and vertically, and protrudes to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, and is inclined so that one side in the longitudinal direction is lower. It has a plurality of inclined parts 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined parts 2581b are provided vertically at intervals that allow the game balls B to flow therethrough, and are provided so that the lower sides of the upper and lower sides are alternately different. Further, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are configured such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction at an interval that allows the game ball B to flow than the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b. It is provided.

Further, the left passage member 2581 includes a standing wall portion 2581c extending from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b upwardly than the upper inclined portion 2581b, and a standing wall portion 2581c extending from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c upwardly than the upper inclined portion 2581b. It has a projecting ceiling wall portion 2581d.
The ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the slope portion 2581b above the slope portion 2581b on which the vertical wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to near the lower surface of the further upper sloped portion 2581b of the upper sloped portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the top wall portion 2581d and the further upper sloped portion 2581b. .

Furthermore, the left passage member 2581 includes a plurality of first protrusions 2581e that protrude to the right from a portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b on the side wall portion 2581a, and It has a plurality of first protruding pieces 2581f protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall 2581c. The first protruding part 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the center of the inclined part 2581b in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined part 2581b, and has a triangular shape with a tapered tip. It is formed. The first projecting piece portion 2581f extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and is inclined so that the upper end is lowered to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined part 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lower, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. . In addition, the lowermost inclined part 2581b is inclined so that its front end is lower, and is located further back than the front end of the upper inclined part 2581b, and forms the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2582a that closes a first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and a plurality of side walls that protrude leftward from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protrusion 2582b. When the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, two each of the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided in the front and rear direction on one inclined part 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e in between. The first protruding part 2582b has an upstream side of the first protruding part 2581e that protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and a downstream end of the first protruding part 2581e that has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to near the standing wall part 2581c. It has a trapezoidal shape and protrudes to the left.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 protrudes to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, and is provided at intervals in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c. The plurality of inclined parts 2582c are provided vertically at intervals that allow the game balls B to flow therethrough, and are provided so that the lower sides of the upper and lower sides are alternately different. Further, the plurality of inclined parts 2582c are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined part 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow than the lower end of the upper inclined part 2582c. It is provided.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 includes a standing wall portion 2582d extending from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c upwardly than the upper inclined portion 2582c, and a standing wall portion 2582d extending from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to above the upper inclined portion 2582c. It has a projecting ceiling wall portion 2582e.
The top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the slope portion 2582c above the slope portion 2582c on which the vertical wall portion 2582d rises. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to near the lower surface of the upper slope portion 2582c, and forms a gap with the upper slope portion 2582c. .

Furthermore, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second protrusions 2582f that protrude to the right from a portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c on the side wall portion 2582a, and It has a plurality of second protruding pieces 2582g that protrude rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall 2582d. The second projecting piece 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the center of the inclined part 2582c in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined part 2582c, and has a triangular shape with a tapered tip. is formed. The second projecting piece 2582g extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined part 2582c, and is inclined so that the upper end is lowered to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined part 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is lower, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined part 2582c is inclined so that its front end is lower, and is located further back than the front end of the upper inclined part 2582c, and forms the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a plurality of side walls that protrude leftward from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. When assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, the plurality of second protrusions 2583b are provided two at a time on one inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second protrusions 2582f in between in the front-rear direction. The second protruding part 2583b has an upstream side of the second protruding part 2582f protruding to the left in a triangular shape, and a downstream end of the second protruding part 2582f having an inclined upstream end and extending downstream to near the standing wall part 2582d. It has a trapezoidal shape and protrudes to the left.

In the ball guiding unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guiding passage 2580a through the right first guiding passage 2541 of the right guiding passage group 2540, it is directed backward by the inclined part 2581b of the left passage member 2581. roll towards. Above the slope 2581b, a first protrusion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protrusions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right in front and behind the first protrusion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, then to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e, and then guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined part 2581b onto the lower inclined part 2581b along the vertical wall part 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b is guided to the right by the first protrusion 2581f protruding to the right and flows down to the lower slope 2581b. do. Thereby, the game ball B does not flow down vertically from the upper slope part 2581b to the lower slope part 2581b.

The game ball B that has flown down to the lower slope portion 2581b rolls forward according to the slope of the slope portion 2581b. Above this inclined portion 2581b, a first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right in front and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first protruding piece 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first protruding part 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first protruding part 2581e. Then, it is guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction until it reaches the front end of the inclined part 2581b. Thereafter, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined part 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first projecting piece part 2581f on the front side and further flows down onto the lower inclined part 2581b, and the exit of the first guiding passage 2580a. The movement of the game ball B as described above will be repeated until.

In addition, in the ball guiding unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guiding passage 2580b through the right second guiding passage 2542 of the right guiding passage group 2540, it is directed backward by the inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll. Also in this second guide passage 2580b, the game ball B flows down while rocking in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, similarly to the above-described first guide passage 2580a. To be more specific, a second protruding part 2582f protrudes from the left above the inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and a second protruding part 2582f of the passage closing plate 2583 protrudes from the right in front and behind the second protruding part 2582f. Two protrusions 2583b protrude. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b, then to the right by the next second protrusion 2582f, and then guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined part 2582c onto the lower inclined part 2582c along the vertical wall part 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b is guided to the right by the second protrusion 2582g protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined part 2582c. do. Thereby, the game ball B does not flow down vertically from the upper inclined part 2582c to the lower inclined part 2582c.

The game ball B that has flown down to the lower slope part 2582c rolls forward according to the slope of the slope part 2582c. Also above this inclined portion 2582c, a second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right in front and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second protruding piece 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second protruding part 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second protruding part 2582f. Then, it is further guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction until it reaches the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. Thereafter, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined part 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second protruding piece part 2582g on the front side and further flows down onto the lower inclined part 2582c, and the exit of the second guiding passage 2580b. The movement of the game ball B as described above will be repeated until.

In this way, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide path group 2540 is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and then is released downward. Therefore, the residence time (flowing time) of the game ball B at the same height can be made longer than when the game ball B is allowed to flow down vertically or through a spiral path. I can do it. As a result, the circulation speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and a decline in interest can be suppressed. can.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is caused to flow down in a spiral path. Since the game ball B makes complicated movements, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball B that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the left side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B can be seen in the front and back direction in the ball guidance unit 2580. It is possible to visually recognize the meandering movement of the game ball B in good condition, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that the same effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be achieved. To be more specific, for example, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 (for example, " The second big prize opening 2007 of the second attacker section 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short period of time so as to be able to receive the game ball B (for example, , small hit rush), the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second big prize hole 2007 becomes ready for acceptance. I will do it. At this time, even if you try to hit the game ball B at that timing, a ball guiding unit 2580 is provided upstream of the second big prize opening 2007 that can delay the falling speed of the game ball B. It is possible to make it difficult to find the timing to hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to make the game more rewarding and entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, gaps are formed between the inclined part 2581b and the top wall part 2581d, and between the inclined part 2582c and the top wall part 2582e, so that the first guiding passage 2580a and the first guiding passage 2580a When ball clogging occurs inside the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be resolved by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form a first guiding passage 2580a and a second guiding passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. , compared to the case where a passage is formed using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed (deformation of the obstacle nail N) due to the circulation of the game ball B, and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and the center accessory 2500 covers the front area from near the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker section 2560. It is attached to the front end of the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in . The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming section 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower part, a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a that penetrate in the front and back and accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N, respectively, and It has a second accommodating part 2590b in which the head is accommodated, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating back and forth.

The panel board of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed is located between the first lower right passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560 in the first accommodating part 2590a and the second accommodating part 2590b. The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a has a constant width with respect to a circumferential line that surrounds and is in contact with the head of a plurality of (not shown, but in this embodiment, two or three) faulty nails N accommodated therein. It is provided in the shape of a long hole forming a gap. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. These first accommodating part 2590a and second accommodating part 2590b coincide with the respective obstacle nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560. located at the site.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N accommodated in the first accommodating part 2590a and the second accommodating part 2590b, so that the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstructing nail N due to external shocks, etc., and to reduce the possibility that the game ball B flows down in an unintended manner. The balls B can be circulated in a stable state, the movement of the game balls B can be enjoyed, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as described above, since deformation of the obstructing nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating part 2590a and the second accommodating part 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the obstructing nail N. It is possible to reduce the effort required for maintenance of the faulty nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided on an attachment boss for attaching the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the attachment hole of the attachment boss. When pasting a decorative or protective sticker on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, this peeling hole 2590c is used to insert a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker pasted. By pressing the seal forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member, a portion of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the seal can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the seal. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as reapplying the seal during manufacturing and sorting during disposal.

This peeling hole 2590c is provided at the mounting boss, so if an attempt is made to insert a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire through the peeling hole 2590c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the area where game balls B are distributed. However, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed with a mounting screw, which prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted and prevents fraudulent acts.

Note that if a sticker is pasted on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front by the sticker, suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c, and also making it possible for players to It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2590c.

Furthermore, if a sticker is pasted on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, when the game board 5 is assembled, the sticker affixed on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 will allow the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, it is impossible to touch the trouble nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a or the second accommodating portion 2590b from the front. Thereby, it is possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, if a sticker is pasted, if the trouble nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b is bent through the sticker, traces of the bending will remain on the sticker. It is possible to easily notice a problem with the faulty nail N.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The center right front plate 2555 of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the holding plate of the present invention, and the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 of this embodiment are the accommodating plate of the present invention. In addition, the front protrusion 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 in this embodiment corresponds to the protrusion of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball B enters a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a predetermined guidance area 2701 (first guidance area 2711 or the second guiding area 2712), the game ball B can be guided with a predetermined probability. This specific obstacle nail group 2700 is made up of at least a plurality of braided nail parts 2710 in which two obstacle nails N are set as a set of braided nail parts 2710, and there is no play between the plurality of braided nail parts 2710. Since the space is provided so that the ball B can pass through, one obstacle nail N of the set nail part 2710 forms a gap in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails N are adjacent to each other, through which the game ball B can pass. Therefore, the remaining obstacle nails N are responsible only for forming gaps in non-adjacent directions. That is, in the set nail part 2710, in one obstacle nail N, the direction responsible for forming a gap through which the game ball B can pass can be made a part of the direction. Therefore, even if one faulty nail N of the braided nail part 2710 bends, the number of gaps affected is compared to the number of gaps formed with the braided nail part 2710 that is paired with the braided nail part 2710. Since the flow of the game balls B is small, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game balls B from changing greatly, and it is possible to make it easier for the game balls B to flow in a stable state in a desired intended flow path.

At this time, the first storage section 2555a of the center right front plate 2555 stores the front end of each of the obstacle nails N of the multiple set nail parts 2710 that constitute the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 stores the front end of a single obstacle nail N that constitutes the specific obstacle nail group 2700. In the set nail part 2710, the front ends of two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are stored in one first storage section 2555a, and since two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are difficult to bend in the direction in which they approach each other, by surrounding the parts of them in the direction in which they are not close to each other as a set with the first storage section 2555a, it is possible to make the obstacle nails N difficult to bend in either direction. On the other hand, the front end of one obstacle nail N planted alone is stored in the second storage section 2555b, so that the second storage section 2555b makes it difficult for the obstacle nail N to bend. For this reason, the obstacle nails N of the multiple group nail sections 2710 that make up the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and individual obstacle nails N are accommodated in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555. Even if an impact is applied to the obstacle nail N due to contact with a game ball B or contact with a tool during maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail N abuts against the peripheral wall of the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b, preventing further movement and making it difficult for the (multiple) obstacle nails N to bend. As a result, the flow of the game ball B through the multiple obstacle nails N (specific obstacle nail group 2700) can be maintained in the intended original state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, the multiple first storage sections 2555a and second storage sections 2555b of the center right front panel 2555 make it difficult for the multiple obstacle nails N that make up the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to bend, allowing the game ball B to circulate in a stable and intended flow, and the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can continue to guide the game ball B with a predetermined probability, while ensuring that the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can achieve its intended effect, allowing the performance envisioned by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to be maintained for a long period of time.

In addition, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of a plurality of nail sets 2710 and a single obstacle nail N, the number of obstacle nails N installed can be relatively increased, and more The game ball B can be brought into contact with the obstacle nail N. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail N, it becomes possible to further suppress the distribution speed of the game balls B and change the distribution direction of the game balls B to various directions. The movement of the game ball B can be made more enjoyable, and a decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a plurality of ridges in front 2555d that protrude rearward, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the ridges in front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the game ball B Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the game balls B and change the distribution direction of the game balls B, it is possible to show the players a more diverse range of movements of the game balls B, and to entertain the players and increase their interest. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the front ridges 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 do not bend unlike the obstacle nails N, the flow of the game balls B can be stably maintained by the front ridges 2555d of the plurality of ridges, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to maintain the performance expected by the manufacturer for a long time.

In addition, since the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the protrusion front 2555d, the center right front plate 2555 has the protrusion front 2555d that prevents the game balls B from being obstructed by restricting the flow speed or changing the flow direction. Since the center right front plate 2555 is provided near the front end of the game area 5a, since the front end of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the accommodating part of the center right front plate 2555, it can perform a function similar to N. The center right front plate 2555 can be extended to a part in the game area 5a where it is difficult to install the obstacle nail N, and the front protrusion part 2555d can be provided in the part. As a result, in the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball can be played by providing the protrusion section front 2555d instead of the obstacle nail N in the area where the obstacle nail N cannot be planted or in the area outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since the ball B can be made to move in the same way as the obstacle nail N, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B over a wider range, and a decrease in player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, a second grand prize opening 2007 is provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol). Since the game ball B can be brought into contact with many obstacle nails N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is possible to delay the distribution of the game ball B. When guided by the group 2700, the game ball B can be delayed to reach the second grand prize opening 2007 provided downstream compared to the normal plurality of obstacle nails N. It is possible to make it difficult to time the driving of the game ball B aiming at the winning hole 2007, and it is possible to impart a desired level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B. At this time, as described above, since the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is made difficult to bend by the center right front plate 2555, the game ball B can be continued to be guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability. In addition, it is possible to reliably make the driving operation a desired level of difficulty, and it is possible to maintain the difficulty level of the driving operation for a long time as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to perform the driving operation, and it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and the game ball B is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007. This provides a sense of accomplishment and prevents players from losing interest. In addition, as described above, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can give a difficulty level to the driving operation, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second grand prize opening 2007, and the second By suppressing the opportunity to pay out game balls B by receiving them into the grand prize opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, the plurality of first accommodating parts 2555a and second accommodating parts 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have a gap between them and the front end of the faulty nail N accommodated in each, so that temperature and humidity are not affected. Even if the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts due to changes in the environment, the gap can absorb the change in the position of the first accommodating part 2555a, second accommodating part 2555b, and the obstructing nail N due to the expansion or contraction. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts, it is possible to avoid bending of the plurality of obstacle nails N or damage of the center right front panel 2555 due to resistance from the plurality of obstacle nails N. As a result, by increasing the size of the center right front plate 2555, even if the distance from one end to the other end changes greatly due to expansion and contraction, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. The board 2555 can be made larger, and the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a wide range in the game area 5a can be made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the downstream second grand prize opening 2007 with an intended predetermined probability, and enjoy the movement of the game ball B due to the intended flow of the game ball B. A decline in interest can be suppressed, and the flow of game balls B by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be maintained stably, and the performance envisioned by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time. For example, this large center right front plate 2555 has a height in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the gaming area 5a, and a left and right width of 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the gaming area 5a. I can list a range of things.

In addition, since there is a gap between the plurality of first accommodating parts 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the game board When assembling the pachinko machine, it is possible to easily insert the front ends of the plurality of installed obstacle nails N into the corresponding first accommodating part 2555a and second accommodating part 2555b. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center right front plate seal 2556 for closing the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is pasted on the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are viewed from the front. It is not possible to touch the obstacle nail N whose front end is housed in. Therefore, it is possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, in this case, if the fault nail N whose front end is accommodated in the first housing part 2555a or the second housing part 2555b via the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, its trace will remain on the center right front plate seal 2556. Therefore, it is possible to easily notice a problem with the faulty nail N.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower tray 202 through the ball extraction guide path 241c of the tray unit base 211, From the right side near the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c that opens to the front of the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 for supplying game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 from the rear. The game ball B enters into the storage passage 150e and rolls to the left side surface on the opposite side. A ball guide part 213 is provided on the left side surface opposite to the lower ball supply port 211c, and the ball guide part 213 is inclined so that the ball guide part 213 moves to the other side as it goes forward. B will roll along the ball guiding part 213, and it will be easier to roll along the periphery of the lower tray 202, which is a high part on the bottom surface of the lower tray 202, so the game ball B will be far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. It can be rolled to the other part in the left and right direction, and it is possible to prevent the supplied game ball B from immediately reaching the part of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. Because of this, the game ball B can be rolled so as to rotate toward the lowest ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202, so it can be rolled evenly in each direction around the lower disk ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B can be stored, and the game balls B can be made difficult to accumulate near the lower ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. In other words, it is possible to reduce clogging of the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (ball extraction guide path 241c) with game balls B at an early stage when there is room for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. , it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible in the lower tray 202 without the player having to level them. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game, etc., it is possible to reduce the frequent execution of the guidance prompting to discharge the game balls B in the lower tray 202 to a dollar box or the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the left side surface of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is tilted as a ball guide portion 213 so that the ball guide portion 213 moves to the other side as it goes forward, the lower tray ball of the storage passage 150e in the lower tray 202. Even if a plurality of game balls B accumulate in front of the supply port 211c, it is possible to form a gap between the pool of game balls B and the ball guiding part 213 through which the game balls B can flow. Through the gap, game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper tray 201 and are sent to the lower tray 202, game balls B from the ball extraction guide path 241c, etc. can be sent to the left part of the lower tray 202. As many game balls B as possible can be stored in the tray 202.

In addition, the center of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which opens toward the front of the storage passage 150e, is located to the right of the center of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202, and the storage passage 150e and the center of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a (see FIG. 50(b)). Since it is possible to widen the area, it is possible to increase the number of game balls B stored when the game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 until the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is blocked. . Therefore, in combination with the effect of the ball guide section 213 as described above, as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower tray 202 without the need for the player to level them, and as described above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can more easily produce its effects.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 50(b), even if there is enough room to store the game balls B in the lower tray 202, the lower tray ball supply port 211j gets clogged with the game balls B, and the lower tray 202 is clogged with game balls B. It becomes impossible to supply game balls B to the tray 202. As a result, even though there is still room in the lower tray 202, the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned on, and the payout of the game balls B is stopped. In this case, some players may feel distrustful due to the stoppage of payout even though there is plenty of room in the lower tray 202, and may lose interest in the game. Alternatively, even though there is plenty of room in the lower tray 202, if guidance such as opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and moving the game ball B to the dollar box is executed, it will feel troublesome and reduce the interest. There is a risk of it being stored away. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower tray 202 until it is nearly full without the player leveling them out. Therefore, when the player looks at the lower tray 202 when the payout is stopped, he can immediately recognize that there is no room in the lower tray 202 and it is full, and the lower tray 202 can be removed without causing any resistance to the player. It is possible to open the ball extraction hole 202a and transfer the balls to the dollar box, and it is also possible to make the player aware that many game balls B have been paid out, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest. .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is stuck in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 (when a so-called ball jam occurs), the tank rail 553 By touching the game ball B that is jammed from the outside through any of the plurality of openings 553d penetrating the bottom (main guide part 553a) of the game ball B, the game ball B is broken and the ball jam is cleared. I can do it. Therefore, since ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be easily resolved, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the discomfort caused to the player due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent players from losing interest in playing games.

In addition, since a ball rectifying member 556 that can swing vertically is provided at the top of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B circulate in this state, the heights of the game balls B stacked one above the other change, and the change in height causes the ball rectifying member 556 to swing in the vertical direction. As this ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B that is in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and it tries to move downstream faster than the lower game ball B. This can be prevented, and the game balls B can be moved downward so as to cut into the row of lower game balls B lined up in a row, thereby preventing the game balls B from meshing with each other. In addition, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, it hits the upper game ball B downward, so the upper game ball B can collapse and the game balls B stacked up and down can be broken. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball jamming of the game balls B, and also to reduce the interruption of the game due to the ball jamming as much as possible, and to suppress the decrease in interest due to the interruption of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, as the game balls B circulate in the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 can hit the game balls B from above to below, so that the hitting causes the balls to stick to the game balls B. This makes it possible to remove dirt, dust, etc., and also to vibrate the tank rail 553 to make it easier to discharge dirt, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 downward from the opening 553d. Therefore, the amount of dirt, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, making it difficult for bulbs to become clogged due to dirt, dust, etc., and achieving the same effects as described above. can.

In addition, since at least one of the plurality of openings 553d is provided below the part where the ball rectifying member 556 is provided, the part of the tank rail 553 below the ball rectifying member 556 that is caused by dirt, dust, etc. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make ball clogging less likely to occur and can more easily achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since a plurality of openings 553d having the above-mentioned effects are provided in the direction in which the game balls B are guided in the tank rail 553, even if balls become clogged in any part of the tank rail 553, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can eliminate ball clogging through the opening 553d located at the closest position, and that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the opening 553d is made to extend long in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, and the game ball rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553 can be It is possible to make it easier to discharge dirt, dust, etc. from B downward. Therefore, the amount of dirt, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

In addition, since the opening 553d is opened downward and backward, the opening is large enough to be accessible from the outside while preventing the game ball B from passing through and preventing it from interfering with rolling (circulation). 553d, and it is possible to easily realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the opening 553d is opened downward and toward the rear, the game ball B inside can be easily recognized through the opening 553d by simply looking from the rear without looking down. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, it is possible to easily identify the location where ball clogging has occurred, and the ball clogging can be easily resolved. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since at least one opening 553d is provided in the lower part of the ball rectifying member 556 in the tank rail 553, when the tank rail 553 is filled with a plurality of game balls B, it can be accessed from the outside. By touching the game ball B so as to press it upward through the opening 553d, the ball rectifying member 556 can be pressed upward via the plurality of game balls B. At this time, by checking the upward movement of the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to check whether the ball rectifying member 556 is in a swingable state. The effect of arranging the game balls B can be reliably exhibited and ball clogging can be suppressed. In addition, since the condition of the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily checked through the opening 553d, workability during maintenance can be improved, and the burden on the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed is reduced. can be done.

In addition, since a transparent protective cover 559 is provided that covers the upper part of the tank rail 553 while allowing the ball rectifying member 556 to swing in the vertical direction, the protective cover 559 allows dust and dirt to enter the tank rail 553 from above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent dust and the like from entering and can reliably achieve the effects described above.

Furthermore, since the protective cover 559 covering the ball flow regulating member 556 and the tank rail 553 is transparent, the state of the ball flow regulating member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, making it easy to check the state of the ball flow regulating member 556. can do. In addition, since the inside of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, when a clogged ball occurs, the location can be easily found. For this reason, the effort required for maintenance can be reduced, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, as described above, by hitting the game ball B from above to below with the ball rectifying member 556, it becomes possible to remove dirt and dust adhering to the game ball B, and the opening 553d allows the tank to be removed. Since dirt, dust, etc. inside the rail 553 can be discharged to the outside, game balls B with as little dirt, dust, etc. attached as possible can be supplied to the payout device 580, and dirt in the payout device 580 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of problems caused by dirt, dust, etc.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 of the main body frame 4, a plurality of game balls B are connected to the external terminal board 558558 to which the electric wire whose tip end sheathing has been removed is connected from the rear. A ball tank 552 in which the balls are stored is provided adjacent to the right side, and a tank rail 553 that aligns and guides the game balls B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 is located below and behind the external terminal board 558. A ball rectifying member 556 is provided which extends in the left-right direction at a portion of the tank rail 553 and which swings up and down and is capable of collapsing the game balls B stacked on top of the tank rail 553. Then, a top plate portion 559c that covers a part of the upper part of the tank rail 553 and the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, and a guide that can guide the game ball B outward to the left in front of and below the top plate portion 559c. The protective cover 559 includes a plate portion 559d. As a result, the guide plate part 559d of the protective cover 559 is provided at a lower position than the top plate part 559c between the top plate part 559c above the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558, so that the external terminal The electric wire connected to the plate 558 and hanging backward can be bridged between the external terminal plate 558 and the top plate part 559c, and the game ball B can be connected below the electric wire at the guide plate part 559d. It is possible to form a gap through which water can flow. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 from the rear hangs down to the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the game ball will By making it possible to secure a gap in the height direction through which B can flow, the guiding of the game ball B to the left by the guiding plate part 559d is not obstructed by the electric wire, and the guiding of the protective cover 559 is prevented. By the plate portion 559d, the game ball B near the external terminal board 558 can be guided outward in the left direction away from the external terminal board 558, and the game ball B can be reliably removed from the rear of the external terminal board 558. Game balls B can be prevented from staying near the external terminal board 558. Therefore, even if the wire connected to the external terminal board 558 comes out due to incomplete insertion of the wire into the external terminal board 558 or if the wire is pulled backward for some reason, the wire will not come out. Since the game ball B with which the tip of the electric wire comes into contact is not present near the external terminal board 558, the tip of the electric wire does not come into contact with the game ball B, and short circuits of the electric wire can be avoided. . By avoiding short circuits in the electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 553 is covered by the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 may be Even if the wire comes off from the terminal board 558, the top plate portion 559c can prevent the tip of the wire from coming into contact with the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and the wire can be prevented from coming into contact with the game ball B. It is possible to prevent short-circuiting and achieve the same effect as described above.

In addition, as mentioned above, since it is possible to avoid short circuits in the electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the necessary information is received by the hall controller due to short circuits in the electric wires, and to prevent errors in counting. , it is possible to avoid maintenance due to the occurrence of such errors, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 guides the game ball B outward to the left, even if the game ball B falls onto the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B It is possible to cause the game ball B to fall to the outside of the game machine in the left-right direction, and to prevent the game ball B from falling to the rear side of the game machine. Therefore, the game balls B will not come into contact with the electric wires hanging down on the rear side of this pachinko machine 1, so the game balls B will not get caught and stay on the electric wires hanging on the rear side, or the game balls B will not come into contact with the electric wires. There is no risk that the electric wire will come off from the external terminal board 558 due to contact, and there is no risk of the game balls B staying on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or the electric wire coming off from the external terminal board 558, etc. The occurrence of defects can be reduced.

By the way, on the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one row, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two rows to one row, the game balls B in the upper row are When trying to pass the game balls B in the lower row, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming due to ball jamming). On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the ball rectifying member 556 is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B circulate in this state, the heights of the game balls B stacked one above the other change, and the change in height causes the ball rectifying member 556 to swing in the vertical direction. As this ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B that is in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, preventing it from overtaking the lower game ball B. It is possible to avoid the game balls B from meshing with each other by moving the game balls B downward so as to get behind the lower game balls B that are lined up in a row. In addition, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, it hits the upper game ball B downward, so the upper game ball B can collapse and the game balls B stacked up and down can be broken. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging, and the game balls B stacked in the ball tank 552 can be aligned and supplied to the payout device by the tank rail 553 and the ball rectifying member 556. The payout device 580 allows the game balls B to be paid out without delay.

Since the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556 is covered by the top plate part 559c of the protective cover 559, the electric wire hanging from the external terminal board 558 comes into contact with the top plate part 559c of the protective cover 559, and the ball rectifying member 556 It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from being unable to swing in the vertical direction due to contact with the electric wire. Therefore, even if the electric wire hangs down from the external terminal board 558 above the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can swing vertically while being protected by the protective cover 559. The stacked game balls B can be surely collapsed by the movement, and ball jamming can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, since the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556 is covered by the top plate part 559c of the protective cover 559, even if the game ball B flows down toward the ball rectifying member 556 for some reason, the top plate part of the protective cover 559 559c, the game ball B can be guided in a direction away from the external terminal board 558 and removed before it comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the game balls B are placed on the ball rectifying member 556 and cannot swing in the vertical direction, and the ball rectifying member 556 causes the stacked game balls B to collapse and prevent ball clogging. Occurrence can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the tank rail 553 is extended in the left-right direction so as to pass behind the external terminal board 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased, and when combined with the ball tank 552, this pachinko machine The amount of game balls B stored for payout can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous gaming state such as a "jackpot" game in which many game balls B are paid out, there are no more game balls B to be paid out (so-called balls running out), which causes discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the game a loss, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a box-shaped back box having an opening 3010a penetrating back and forth is provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided in the front. 3000, and a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined performance image is removably attached directly to the back box 3010 when the size is the same as the opening 3010a, at the position of the opening 3010a of the back box 3000, When the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is removably attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650. An effect display device 1600 can be attached to the box 3010. To be more specific, in this embodiment, the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is sized so that a 19-inch production display device can be attached, and a 15-inch set plate 1650 corresponding to the opening 3010a is attached. After the effect display device 1600 is attached, the set plate 1650 is fitted into the opening 3010a and attached to the back box 3010. Thereby, the 15-inch effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650.

Therefore, when changing the size of the effect display device 1600 due to model change or design change, the effect display device 1600 can be attached using the set plate 1650 that matches the size of the effect display device 1600 without changing the back box 3010. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be used as is, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to provide the performance display device 1600 with a size different from that of the conventional one while suppressing an increase in the cost of the Pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily create a pachinko machine 1 with a different appearance to strongly attract players' interest, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the back box 3010 is box-shaped, and the strength and rigidity of the back box 3010 is high, even if a large (heavy) production display device 1600 is attached, it can be sufficiently supported, so that the production display device It is possible to make the opening 3010a to which the machine 1600 is attached as large as possible, and the largest (19 inch in this case) production display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 (pachinko machine). . In addition, due to model changes or design changes, various decorations and presentation devices may be installed in front of the production display device 1600, such as a back front periphery decoration unit 3200, a back top front production unit 3300, a back bottom front production unit 3400, and a back top and rear production unit. 3500 and the back and rear effect unit 3600, when the range that can be seen from the front is changed, the effect display device 1600 (15 inch in this case) of the optimal size for the range is installed on the set board 1650. It can be attached to the back box 3010 via. Therefore, by using the set board 1650, production display devices 1600 of various sizes can be attached, so it is possible to avoid installing an unnecessarily large production display device 1600 on the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 disposed in the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, the position of the effect display device 1600 with respect to the back box 3010 may be changed due to design changes or the like. When changing, the position of the production display device 1600 can be changed simply by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. The effect display device 1600 can be provided in a more effective position, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

Further, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, so that the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a are connected to each other. The gap can be closed by a set plate 1650. Therefore, in the island equipment of the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, dust, dirt, game balls B, etc. cannot enter into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions that cause interruptions in play, and it is also possible to prevent players from losing interest due to interruptions in play, thereby increasing the enjoyment of players. This can prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, since the set plate 1650 for attaching the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010 is transparent and flat, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a, it is possible to visually check from the front to the rear or from the back to the front. Therefore, it is possible to check the inside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside, or to check the inside of the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, which reduces the effort required for maintenance. By doing so, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the set plate 1650 is shaped like a flat plate, it is possible to reduce the space occupied by the set plate 1650 in the front and rear directions, so that decorations, presentation devices, etc. can be placed inside the relatively box-shaped back box 3010. A back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a back top front decoration unit 3300, a back bottom front decoration unit 3200, a back top front decoration unit 3300, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back top front decoration unit 3300, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back top front decoration unit 3300, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back front decoration unit 3200, a back top front decoration unit 3300, etc. It becomes possible to provide the performance unit 3400, the back top/back performance unit 3500, and the back/bottom back performance unit 3600, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the back box 3010 is provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 where the game area 5a is provided in the front, the performance display device attached to the back box 3010 through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. 1600 can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the performance images. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look similar to a conventional pachinko machine in which a production image can be seen within the gaming area 5a, the appearance provides a sense of security to players who are used to conventional pachinko machines. This allows the player to easily select the present Pachinko machine 1 as the Pachinko machine to play.

In addition, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, and the back lower rear effect unit 3600, which are arranged inside the back box 3010, can be used for pachinko machines. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the interest of players, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. In addition, due to the production by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, the back top and rear production unit 3500, and the back bottom and rear production unit 3600, which are arranged inside the back box 3010. , can entertain the players, and the effects of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, and the back lower rear effect unit 3600; By appropriately combining the performance images of the performance display device 1600, it is possible to show a variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is removably attached to the back box 3010, when the effect display device 1600 breaks down, the effect display device 1600 can be easily removed from the back box 3010, which saves maintenance. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, within the game area 5a of the game board 5A where the game is played using the game balls B, there are game balls provided in the left and right direction in the ball guiding unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500. Depending on the progress of the game (the lottery result of the special symbol drawn), there are a first guide passage 2580a and a second guide passage 2580b through which the ball B can flow, and a downstream side of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Since a second grand prize opening 2007 that can accept the game ball B is provided, when the second grand prize opening 2007 becomes ready to accept according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbol, the second grand prize opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. In order to have the game ball B accepted into the grand prize opening 2007, the player is asked to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B flows through the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b. It is possible to perform a driving operation (“right-handed hit”) of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a and the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b, and also to make the game ball B hit inside the game area 5a. Depending on whether or not the hit game ball B is guided through the desired first guide path 2580a that is easily accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007, the player can be made nervous and excited, increasing the player's sense of anticipation. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the level of interest. In addition, the player is instructed so that the game ball B that has passed through the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b reaches the second large prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second large prize hole 2007 becomes available for acceptance. The driving operation of the game ball B can be encouraged to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be made enjoyable and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, a plurality of balls are provided in the vertical direction with alternately different inclined sides so that one side in the front and back direction is lower in each. The inclined part 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or the inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and the standing wall part 2581c and the standing wall part 2582d extending upward from the lower end of each inclined part 2581b and inclined part 2582c, allow the game ball to be B is guided downward in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction, and the first protrusion 2581e, first protrusion 2582b, and second protrusion 2581e, 2582b, and The side wall portion 2581a is located between the second protruding portion 2582f and the second protruding portion 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583, the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. The game ball B is guided in a meandering manner in the left-right direction by the first protruding piece 2581f and the second protruding piece 2582g protruding from the side wall 2582a. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while swinging in the left-right and front-back directions in a visible state, allowing the player to experience the movement of the game ball B that has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and prevents the player from losing interest.

At this time, the game ball B moves from the inclined part 2581b and the inclined part 2582c to the left and right outer sides by the side wall parts 2581a, the side wall parts 2582a, and the side wall parts 2583a provided on both the left and right sides of the inclined part 2581b and the inclined part 2582c. At the same time, by the vertical wall portions 2581c and 2582d extending upward from the upper ends of the lower sloped portions 2581b and 2582c, the downward slope from the upper sloped portions 2581b and 2582c can be restricted. Guiding the game ball B along the plurality of slope parts 2581b and slope parts 2582c can prevent the game ball B moving to the part 2581b and the slope part 2582c from falling off to the outside in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have a plurality of inclined parts 2581b and a plurality of inclined parts 2582c which are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower. When looking at the game ball B being guided at 2582c from the front, the falling speed is slower than when it is flowing freely, and the position of the game ball B in the front and back direction appears unclear, so it is difficult for the player to see. This makes it possible to make it appear as if the game ball B is slowly flowing down against gravity, allowing the player to see the movement of the game ball B, which could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, and improving the game experience. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

In this way, since the game ball B can be guided downward while being swung in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, compared to the case where the game ball B is allowed to freely flow down. By doing so, the falling speed of the game ball B can be relatively slowed down (delayed). As a result, the staying time of the game ball B within the game area 5a can be extended, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a long time, making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, if the guide path is one that allows the game ball B to flow down in a spiral, the game ball B flowing down in a spiral will pass through the closest part of the spiral many times, so the speed of the game ball B flowing down will decrease. It is easy to find the right timing. Therefore, in the event of a "small hit", etc., it is possible to relatively easily accept the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2007 on the downstream side, so some players may There was a risk that the player would get bored quickly and lose interest. On the other hand, in the ball guiding unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guiding passage 2580a or the second guiding passage 2580b, the ball B is guided by the first guiding passage 2580a or the second guiding passage 2580b. As the game ball B swings in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the circulation speed is suppressed, so the game ball B is delayed to the second big prize opening 2007 on the downstream side compared to other areas in the game area 5a. This makes it difficult to time the hitting of the game ball B aiming at the second big prize opening 2007, and it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to perform the driving operation, and it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and this is achieved by receiving the game ball B into the second grand prize opening 2007. It is possible to give a sense of excitement to the players, and to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second grand prize opening 2007, the second guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b It is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B. As a result, since it is difficult to accept the game balls B into the second grand prize opening 2007 through the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be It is possible to reduce the chances of B being paid out, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, if the game balls B become clogged in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b (ball jam occurs), the inclined part 2581b and the top wall part 2581d of the left passage member 2581 as a communication part To easily clear the blockage by inserting a thin rod-shaped member from the outside through the gap between the slanted part 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the top wall part 2582e and poke the game ball B. I can do it. Therefore, even if a ball jam occurs in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b during a game, it can be resolved quickly, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. , it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b are provided in the left-right direction, the game ball B guided in each of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b cannot be shown to the player. This makes it possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player drives a game ball B into the game area 5a to play a game, it is hit by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a. , the game ball B flows down while making various movements, and the game ball B that has flown down to the downstream end within the game area 5a is discharged from the out port 1008. In this game area 5a, the progress of the game (the lottery results of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005) Since a second grand prize opening 2007 is provided that opens and closes according to , the game ball B will be detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2561 and then circulated in the pseudo game area 2010. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making various movements due to these obstacle nails N, and reaches the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that has flown down is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 adjacent to the out port 1008. This pseudo game area 2010 is provided with a pseudo big prize opening 2402 that has a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007, so that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 receives the game ball B as the game progresses. The game ball B which has become possible and has been accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561.

As a result, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in each of the game area 5a and the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making a complicated movement due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. The player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. In addition, since the out port 1008 of the gaming area 5a and the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo gaming area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player is given the illusion that the pseudo gaming area 2010 is a part of the gaming area 5a. can be done. Furthermore, since the second grand prize opening door 2562 of the second grand prize opening 2007 is designed to move in the front and back direction, the existence of the second grand prize opening door 2562 is not obvious when viewed from the front (player). It is possible to make the opening/closable pseudo big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) more attractive and making it stand out. Since the opening of this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is made larger than the second big winning hole 2007, it creates an illusion that the game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007 will circulate through the gaming area 5a again. At the same time, it is possible to create the illusion that the gaming area 5a is equipped with a huge prize opening, which has never been seen in previous pachinko machines. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players to the simulated game area 2010 regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball B in the simulated game area 2010, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players to the simulated game area 2010. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high performance.

In addition, because the opening of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger than the second large prize opening 2007, the player can instantly recognize that when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is in a state where it can accept game ball B, it can accept a large number of game balls B in a short period of time, which strongly attracts the player's attention to the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and increases the player's anticipation for the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to accept game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest, and also makes the player believe that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 located in the pseudo game area 2010 is a real large prize opening located in the game area 5a. In addition, when game ball B is received by pseudo large prize opening 2402, which is normally closed, the player is strongly made to believe that a certain privilege (e.g., payout of game ball B, occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage, etc.) will be granted to the player, which can heighten the player's expectations for the game.

For this reason, when the second grand prize opening 2007 and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 are opened according to the progress of the game and become ready to accept the game ball B, the second grand prize opening 2007 is opened to the player. It is possible to make the game ball B hit into the game area 5a aiming at the target, and the player can enjoy it. Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the open second grand prize opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B is flows down while making various movements, making it possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and also making the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. , it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is opened according to the progress of the game and it becomes possible to accept the game ball B, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived, and the pseudo big winning hole 2402 (the It is possible to make the player perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the two major winning holes 2007), and the player can be entertained by receiving many game balls B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the player in playing the game.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is larger than the second big winning hole 2007, the player is provided with a huge big winning hole that has never been seen before in a pachinko machine. This can give a strong impact to players and make them strongly interested in this pachinko machine 1, and also make it easier for them to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine they want to play. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. When the second big prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to a "jackpot," etc., and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 opens and closes, as described above, the second big winning opening opens and closes due to the arrival of a chance for the player. 2007 (pseudo big prize opening 2402), the player can be made to perform a driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest. At this time, since the game ball B circulating in the pseudo game area 2010 is one that has been accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 and finished the game (a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game), To suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, without giving the player a privilege such as the payout of the game ball B even if the game ball is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. I can do it. In addition, since a payout is made for all the game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007, a payout is made to the player by accepting the game balls B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402. It is possible to create the illusion that the game ball B is being received into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and to enjoy receiving the game ball B into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. Furthermore, since payout is performed for all game balls B accepted in the second big prize opening 2007, game balls B that are not accepted in the pseudo big prize opening 2402 on the downstream side of the second big prize opening 2007 are paid out. Since the payout is also made to , it is possible to make the players feel like they have won, and it is also possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed to accept the game ball B as a notice of a "big hit" or a gaming state advantageous to the player. As a result, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 opens and closes with a flicker, indicating to the player that a chance has arrived, increasing the player's expectations for the game, and suppressing a decline in interest. can. As this advance notice, for example, the opening/closing speed or the number of opening/closing times of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can indicate the level of expectation for an advantageous gaming state. Alternatively, by opening and closing the pseudo-big winning opening 2402 with a rhythm such as 337 beats or a rhythm of music that follows the concept of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to adjust the level of expectations and the gaming state after a "jackpot" (for example, , time saving state, variable probability state), etc. can also be suggested. In this way, by opening and closing the pseudo big prize opening 2402, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, in a normal state, the second big prize opening 2007 is closed and the game ball B cannot be accepted, so even if the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is open, the second big prize opening 2007 is closed and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is provided. Since it is not possible to distribute the game balls B in the game area 2010, a premium feeling can be given to the distribution of the game balls B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the second major prize opening can be created according to the progress of the game. It is possible to raise the expectations of the players so that 2007 can be accepted.

In addition, since the game ball B supplied from the second big prize opening 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 without returning to the game area 5a, the pseudo game area 2010 is To make players strongly desire to distribute game balls B within the pseudo gaming area 2010, since it is possible to make the players strongly think that this is a special area (premium area) independent of the area 5a. , and when the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is opened and closed according to the progress of the game, the game ball B is actively aimed at the second big prize opening 2007 in order to circulate the game ball B in the pseudo gaming area 2010. This makes it possible to have the player type in the characters, thereby making it possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, if the game ball B accepted into the second big prize opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 is not accepted into the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the pseudo out opening at the downstream end in the pseudo gaming area 2010 2404, the player can be made to think that the pseudo-out port 2404 is the same as the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the gaming area 5a, and the pseudo-big winning port Receiving the game ball B into the game ball B 2402 can be enjoyed without any sense of incongruity in the same way as the second grand prize opening 2007 that can be opened and closed provided in the game area 5a, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the pseudo out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted into the pseudo big winning port 2402 is provided adjacent to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the gaming area 5a, the It can be made to appear as if the game balls B supplied from the two major winning holes 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 and not accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402 are being ejected from the out opening 1008.

Furthermore, the pseudo game area 2010 is supplied with game balls B that have been detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2561 and have finished playing (so-called dead balls that no longer affect the game), so that the pseudo game In area 2010, game ball B, which no longer affects the game, is used for presentation. Therefore, for example, compared to a production device in which pseudo game balls similar to game balls B are enclosed, there is no need to provide a mechanism for circulating pseudo game balls for production, which increases the cost of the pachinko machine 1. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 can detect the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, by detecting the game ball B, a predetermined performance can be executed, and the player can be more It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 is made visible to the player, the game ball B that has finished playing (the so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010. Even if this is done, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole, so it is possible to make the game ball into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, which opens and closes as the game progresses. It is possible to make the player strongly desire to accept B, and it is possible to enjoy hitting the game ball B aiming at the second big winning hole 2007 (pseudo big winning hole 2402), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

[11. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 167 to 172. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 167, and FIG. 169 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, and error processing. Display processing will be explained.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, there are special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game or a small win game, and initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. , a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot game is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed in the first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game. A symbol random number for use in determining the jackpot symbol and small win symbol to be derived and displayed (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used in determining the initial value of this symbol random number are prepared. ing. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is used to determine whether or not to operate the variable winning hole door 2521 that can guide the game ball B to the variable winning hole 2003, and this normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

[11-2. Movement of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and quickly generates a random number in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the stored various information as numerical values is calculated as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the sum value does not match, the main control MPU 1310a uses its internal The ID code is retrieved from the non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining per symbol. The mechanism is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is used when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the ID code.A two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate 2002 at each predetermined interval, it is possible to operate the variable prize opening door 2521 and guide the game ball B to the variable prize opening 2003. cannot create a situation.

[11-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168. When this main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), and here, it completely erases information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. It operates as a RAM clear switch function. In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is to be cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated. Note that since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing of this routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not pressed. The person who does this will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where it can perform a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when the various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and turning it ON. This is performed based on the key being turned on and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and also switches the setting key on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting changes and confirmation display of the set values 1 to 6 at the time of the ON operation. The value is set to 1 when display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when changing settings or confirmation display is not permitted. Note that the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510. ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that no power outage warning signal is input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not the value 1, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1. , and determines whether the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined that various information is to be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). . This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After turning the pachinko machine 1 clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the push operation section of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, which returns to this routine. Main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-described step S14 that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 in the above-described step S16A. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on due to the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of step S25 described above. , and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and following the setting change processing of step S37, which will be described later, the step described below is performed. In the process of S38, by clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error"). ``How to cancel'').

An alternative method to this first RAM error release method is to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and leave the setting key cylinder at its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-described step S14 that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above-described step S16A. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is activated due to the setting key ON signal. 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Therefore, in the determination of step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the same as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are cleared except for a specific area, so that the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be continued. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error release method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power restoration information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, or by fraudulent means (for example, if a fraudulent This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is present, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined setting value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, a setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633. As mentioned above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, settings changeover button, and error release switch), and here, the settings changeover button is used to select and change the setting value. It operates as a function of Every time the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined If the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, a specific area will be deleted from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. and clear it (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area in which setting values are stored, an out port 1008, a first sub out port 2021, and a second sub out port provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. 2022, and a dedicated area for counting out balls, in which the result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected in step 2022 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out pitch counting area stores the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the The result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected through the second sub-out port 2022 is stored.

Note that the main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a controls the thumbnail when erasing various information because the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 has been operated is an instruction to clear the RAM. If the values do not match, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is retrieved, and the retrieved ID code is An initial value derivation process is performed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the above-mentioned initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28, or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to games, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game is latched in a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to be updated by hardware. At the same time, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the hardware random number circuit built in the main control. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power restoration) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs output to, for example, various displays of the function display unit 1400, the variable winning hole solenoid 2522, the first big winning hole solenoid 2524, the second big winning hole solenoid 2563, a special monitor, etc. The current drive signal is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and then executes the main control side power-on process again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM will be It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is subsequently restored, this main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the determination of step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when changing the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value is 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that if the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 will be in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, when the game hall is closed) , etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information mentioned above before the next business starts, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall must press the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation section. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information, including various information such as game information, from the main control's built-in RAM.As mentioned above, in addition to changing the setting values, the setting key can also be used to Because it is an important key that allows you to check the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, the setting value Even if no changes are made to the information, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, staff such as game hall clerks can erase (clear) game backup information from the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the clear switch, game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the island equipment of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the main control side is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 when the power is restored, the wait time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the charged charge is applied as +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer described later Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall, and the RAM is forcibly stored in the built-in RAM of the main control even if the staff such as the staff member at the game hall does not express their intention to clear the RAM. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information that is currently available must be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is being input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control board performs the main control side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is configured to be able to complete the process, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM by using the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 In S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is continued. If you do this repeatedly, you will not be able to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball count information output determination We have adopted a mechanism that can avoid updating various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The contents of the main controller built-in RAM (gaming information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, information indicating that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as sent information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on includes information that instructs the drive state of the variable winning hole solenoid 2522, information that instructs the drive state of the first big winning hole solenoid 2524, and information that instructs the driving state of the second big winning hole solenoid 2563. It mainly consists of information indicating the status. Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the drive state of the variable winning hole solenoid 2522, information instructing the driving state of the first big winning hole solenoid 2524, and information instructing the driving state of the second big winning hole solenoid. A problem occurs when the information instructing the driving state of the 2563 is not included, that is, a problem occurs when the main control return destination command at power-on does not reserve the command to be sent at power-on in step S50. Let me explain the points.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game screen (for example, a jackpot game production screen) in the display area of the production display device 1600, the main control board 1310 controls the second jackpot solenoid 2563. When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the second grand prize opening 2007 is being driven and opened by the opening/closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is moved to the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the settings, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is restored, and the second big prize opening solenoid 2563 is driven. Starting, the second big prize opening 2007 transitions from a state where it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state where it is opened.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game in the gaming state, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is not connected to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the received power-on state command and the screen can be returned, it will not be possible to return to any jackpot game. Round or not able to display at all. In other words, for example, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 2007, it is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and the big winning hole 1 count tells the number of game balls that entered the second big winning hole 2007. Even if the main control board 1310 sends the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 will display the second big winning slot 2007 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number of game balls played can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the second big prize opening solenoid 2563 and opens and closes the second big prize opening 2007 when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the member to transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the second grand prize opening 2007 between rounds) from the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game, it starts driving the second jackpot solenoid 2563 so that the second jackpot 2007 opens and closes the opening/closing member. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening opening 5th display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the second grand prize opening 2007). from there to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen informing the player that the gaming state is such that a game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, which is advantageous to the player (for example, the variable winning opening 2003 is opened by the variable winning opening door 2521), When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen that informs the player that the opening state is open in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 to open the variable winning opening. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs when the opening door 2521 is operated and the game ball B can be guided to the variable winning opening 2003, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs step S34. The variable prize opening is restored to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The solenoid 2522 starts to be driven and the variable winning opening door 2521 is operated in the opposite direction to move to a state where the variable winning opening 2003 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the variable prize opening 2003 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. When the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. A screen is displayed on the display area of the display device 1600 to inform the player that even if the player is able to return, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning hole 2003, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display this at all in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, players seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls can be accepted into the variable winning slot 2003 immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the player is in the gaming state when the power is restored. Regardless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the variable winning hole 2003) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can There was also the problem that if you played a game like this, you would no longer understand.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, can instantly When a power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 returns to a state where it starts driving the second grand prize opening solenoid 2563 and the second grand prize opening 2007 is closed by the opening/closing member. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition is to be made from the state to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game (in other words, the number of rounds). Although it is not possible to display the screen showing the screen) in the display area of the production display device 1600, it is a jackpot game and the second grand prize opening solenoid 2563 is started to be driven and the second grand prize opening 2007 is opened by the opening/closing member. (For example, a message saying, ``You have won the jackpot. The second grand prize opening has been opened. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second grand prize opening.'') A screen that tells the player) is displayed on the display area of the production display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball is placed into the second grand prize opening 2007 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state is such that the game balls can be accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. When the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 returns to start driving the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, operating the variable winning opening door 2521, and guiding the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003. A screen that informs the player of the status (for example, a screen that tells the player the message ``The variable winning hole is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the variable winning hole.'') The peripheral control board 1510 can be displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the variable winning hole 2003 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command is used when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is The above-mentioned low-level information is included in the information that instructs when clearing is to be performed, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be explained when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game occurs), the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) is such that a probability change occurs in a state in which the game is played.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the workers on the production line It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game will occur. In addition to the game specifications in which the state continues until the change occurs, the game specifications code is used to specify the game specifications in which the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (ST machine, etc.). Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work's copyright the main control board 1310 belongs to, as well as which model's copyright belongs to the same work. What type is it (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game version or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[11-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 167 and 168.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in FIG. 169 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, detects the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, detection signal from the variable winning hole sensor 2526, detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2524, detection signal from the second big winning hole sensor 2561, detection signal from the out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, and a detection signal from the second ball sensor 704, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the door frame release switch, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b. , a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switch button, and a payer ACK from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The signals are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting port winning command classified as others is sent as transmission information and is sent to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if no game ball entered or the input will be ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state in which inputs are being made to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which empty terminal processing has been performed) is performed from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor. The detection signal from the mouth sensor 2526, the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2524, the detection signal from the second big winning hole sensor 2561, the out sensor 664, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704. Detection signal, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from the door frame release switch, detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, signal from the setting key switch 1311a , it is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. can.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been performed among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining the initial value for jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol in step S56 in the power-on process on the main control side (main process on the main control side) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, the ball is ejected from the game board 5, and distributed through the out ball path 663. Game balls (that are driven into the gaming area 5a and accepted into winning holes such as general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, second big winning hole 2007, etc.) Game balls ejected from the game board 5 and after being hit into the game area 5a are accepted into any of the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 without being accepted into any winning opening. When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball (game ball ejected from the game board 5), an operation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the total collected ball counter, and the detection from the first ball sensor 703 is performed. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that is received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 and circulates through the first ball path 701 after the signal is input, the out port 1008 , performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of an out ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called out balls, collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, and A detection signal from the two-ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the gaming area 5a, and the general winning hole 2001, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the second big winning hole 2007, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that is received in a winning hole such as the above and circulates through the second ball path 702, the general winning hole 2001, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, and the second starting hole are detected. An operation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of a safe ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, accepted into the winning holes such as the opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2007. . In other words, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects the game that has been accepted into the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. The first ball sensor 703 detects both the ball and the game ball received in the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the second sub out port 2022, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the ball received in the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the second sub out port 2022. 2022 detects the game balls collected, and the second ball sensor 704 detects winning holes such as general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, second big winning hole 2007, etc. Detects game balls accepted by the player.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the value of the total recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, into the general winning hole 2001, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. The total number of game balls received in the mouth and game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 is stored in an area dedicated to counting the total recovered balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. , the value of the out ball counter is stored as the total number of out balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022 in the out ball counting area in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control, and the safe ball count is stored. The main control built-in RAM calculates the value of the counter as the total number of safe balls accepted into the winning holes such as general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, second big winning hole 2007, etc. The ball count is stored in an area dedicated to safe ball counting in a specific area. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total recovered ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls that have been hit, is calculated. , stores the calculation result in a base calculation area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a controls when the value of the total recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning hole 2001, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2007. , etc., each time the total number of game balls collected at the winning opening, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is created to notify that, and the sending information is sent. It is stored in the output information storage area as . Note that the main control MPU 1310a is configured to collect further balls when the calculated results of the recovered ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, the value is 65535). If you add (increment) the value of the counter, out ball counter, or safe ball counter by 1, the values of the recovered ball counter, out ball counter, or safe ball counter will overflow and become the value 0. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the second grand prize opening 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. has been reached, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, the variable winning hole 2003, When the game ball enters various winning holes (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5") such as the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2007, Based on this, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, it is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of pitches is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio waves have been emitted during the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display notifying that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnet counter is incremented by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is initialized. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet notification command classified into a notification display to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by using such a mechanism to reliably detect and notify magnet spots, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game hall clerks to discover magnet spots at an early stage. It has become.

In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and if the game is not a jackpot game, the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 or the second big winning hole sensor 2561 is detected. When an abnormal winning occurs in the big winning hole such as when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007, a winning abnormality that is classified as an abnormal state is displayed as a notification display. A display command is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting area is transmitted to the general winning hole sensor 3001, variable winning hole sensor 2526, The total number of game balls detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2401, the first big winning hole sensor 2525, and the second big winning hole sensor 2561, that is, the actual general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, If it differs from the total number of game balls accepted into the winning holes such as the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc., a notification is displayed as an abnormal state. A winning abnormality display command for classification is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation spot and/or the magnet spot are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection; When no fraud is detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Note that the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame release switch detects that the main body frame release switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 due to the input of the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the launch permission signal is set such that the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine is performed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). It is constituted by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set until the firing is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot The value of the counter that determines whether or not to generate a game (referred to as "special lottery") and updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the hit type determination values (determining the hit type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2401. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game occurs, various commands classified as jackpot related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, (1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, are sent to the second jackpot solenoid 2563 to open and close the opening/closing member. When the output of the drive signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the second big prize opening 2007 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the function display unit 1400 is set. The function display unit 1400 sets the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp to light the 2nd round indicator lamp of the round indicator, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information, or when there are 15 rounds. Set the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp of the round indicator lights up, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and light it in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. It also sets the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and used as the normal winning opening winning information built in the main control. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The second section and the third section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. The output of the lighting signal for the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to light up the hold indicator, and is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether or not to operate the variable prize opening door 2521. If it is decided to operate based on this determination, the variable winning opening door 2521 is operated to open the variable winning opening 2003, thereby entering a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. This creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization performance are created, and the transmission information described above is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output information is set to output a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. It is stored as information in the transmission information storage area, and also sets the output of a drive signal to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 to operate the variable winning opening door 2521, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination that has been taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is created based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. is determined, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created, and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. A lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the device, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information, the main control MPU 1310a sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. or when it is a jackpot game, a drive signal is sent to the first jackpot solenoid 2524 and the second jackpot solenoid 2563 that open and close the opening and closing members of the first jackpot 2006 and the second jackpot 2007. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 that operates the variable winning opening door 2521 for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, a 2 round jackpot information output signal , a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, a starting opening winning information output signal, and other various information (gaming information) signals regarding the game to the payout control board 633. or outputs a launch permission signal set to the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, or outputs a launch permission signal set to the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch disallowance logic) to the payout control board 633. A lighting signal for outputting a display signal to a special monitor that displays the percentage of the total number of balls, and for displaying on the setting display 1310g the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. or output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, when a game ball entering the second big winning hole 2007 is detected, the big winning hole 1 corresponding to the big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the second big winning hole sensor 2561) (count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display. Various commands classified into various commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into other categories (for example, the main control board 1310 generates prize balls based on the game balls that enter the various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal to that effect is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as main prize ball number information. main prize ball number information output command), and various commands classified into specific history (for example, general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, first big winning hole) 2006, the second big prize opening 2007, etc., a ball that informs you that every time the number of game balls collected at the winning opening, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls. Collection command, Setting change command that indicates that the setting value has been changed, Error display command that indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that it cannot be trusted), Main A setting key ON operation command, etc. that conveys confirmation of a setting value stored in a setting value exclusive area, which will be described later, in a specific area of the built-in control RAM is stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main serial transmission port built in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission as main serial data from the transmission shift register. It is now possible to do so. When powering on the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the transmission is made at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

In addition, the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, and the first sub-out. Every time the number of game balls collected at the port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 For each received ball collection command, the winning holes such as general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, first big winning hole 2006, second big winning hole 2007, etc. The number of game balls collected at the exit port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value) is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). (In other words, the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out The total number of game balls collected at the opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 (information that associates the updated date and time) is updated. In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after the game hall's business hours have ended without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the general winning hole 2001, the variable winning hole 2003) , the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc., and the winning openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022. Ball collection information that associates the total number of game balls (the total number of game balls) with the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 for operation. Ball recovery information is created again from the day it started, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on to instruct the drive state of the variable winning hole solenoid 2522, the first big winning hole solenoid 2524, and the second big winning hole solenoid 2563, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. The main control return destination command can be output to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, the main control board 1310 uses the main control internal RAM Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which constitute the main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and the power is restored afterwards, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage can be restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 can be kept in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST machine ) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[11-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a obtains the current installation values as shown in FIG. 170 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when taking out the setting value, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination in step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed, and in this embodiment, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed. It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, in the determination in step S204, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a When the MPU 1310a determines that the setting change permission lamp 1310z is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button is operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is being input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is being operated when a detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while determining that the setting switching button is not being operated when a detection signal from the setting switching button is not being input. It is determined that the

In the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222 ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (in other words, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting key switch is turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turning it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position). 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, When the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether the setting switching button is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, and performs the determination of step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. If it is determined that this is the case, the process returns to step S216, and each time the setting switch button is operated, the set value is updated by adding 1 until the enter key is operated, and the setting display 1310g is updated. , and if the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value that was updated when the setting switch button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage will be used for main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when determining in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the OK key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and by performing the OFF operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow changes to the settings (values set among settings 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permission is given to change settings. The value is set to 1, and the value is set to 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0, thereby disallowing the setting value to be changed from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU 1310a confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a settings change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. This is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination at step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[11-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. 171. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the value is 1, the setting Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not displayed for confirmation.

In the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, detects the detection from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move against the outer frame 2. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such setting value, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a immediately ends this routine, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and the current setting value is subsequently obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a checks the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ), this routine ends. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process that is this routine has started (that is, to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is a command to convey.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 reads the setting key ON operation history information (when the setting value was confirmed information that associates the date and time).

Further, upon receiving the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates the above-mentioned ball recovery history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. A predetermined condition for permitting display of specific history information is established, such as permitting display of specific history information such as . The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information to rotate the touch operation section 302 and press the press operation section 303 in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By doing this, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, if the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as is, but if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it does not display the setting value for confirmation. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , sets the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and ends this routine. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). This is a command that conveys.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the CPU enters a state in which the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 controls the CPU immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image that was displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt disallowance (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but since the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped once started, the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU 1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Furthermore, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[11-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 172 (step S400). As mentioned above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of launch permission logic, it is possible to communicate that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts the interrupt in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, so when the power is restored, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the main control MPU 1310a starts as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the process has started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and the prescribed output port is It is output from the output terminal to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via a main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting shown in FIG. Since interrupts are not permitted in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine is finished, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. 169 Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the specified output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial settings in step S406 are the same as the serial communication initial settings in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the serial communication initial settings in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board sending command sending process in step S410 is the same as the peripheral control board sending command sending process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This processing is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 171) and the process performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) to update.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a message in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In addition to controlling the display of a message image in white text, the system also adjusts the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff" by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed so that the volume is forcibly set to be the maximum without depending on the volume set, and is played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker of the body frame 4, etc.). The process of notifying the RAM error using the error display command is the process with the highest priority. Give top priority to error notification.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[12-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 173 to 175. . When this payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that it is not an instruction to clear the RAM. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands sent in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing time such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various judgment times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if you are unable to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when the power is restored. The values are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible can be outputted from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. and determine whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not by using the current fullness and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the out-of-ball judgment time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball judgment time is reached, check whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information informing that fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area mentioned above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding, etc. are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, in step S546 the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, in step S548 port output processing is performed, in step S550 port input processing is performed, and in step S552 performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 173 to 175.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibit and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 176 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 181. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority order of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") includes the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and Various I/O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 177. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 177. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing described later, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs commands related to control of game effects, which are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), it returns to step S1006 and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, The rotation (direction of rotation) and rotation of the contact operation section 302 is based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 373 and the elevation detection sensor 374 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various information obtained from the operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation The rotation direction of the touch operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the touch operation section 303 is set. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to set the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of LED used as direct light is changed, while the touch operation unit 302 is When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the touch operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. A staff member such as the above can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the touch operation section 302, a specified brightness value from a first brightness value to a 31st brightness value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that it has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th designated brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st designated brightness value to the 31st designated brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is set by the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can use the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as a direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 to reduce the brightness, the player can use the LED as a direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The lowest brightness that allows the light guide plate to visually recognize the state in which it emits light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without disturbing the relationship.

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This can prevent a delay in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames will occur, the sound data output processing, which will be described later, will prevent the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4. 622 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to prioritize presentations using production sounds such as music and sound effects that match various productions.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes the various commands issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extract it) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the production operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance specification value is used. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of decorative symbols on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. Command, whether it is a symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, or a grand prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the first grand prize opening 206 or the second grand prize opening 2007. The system analyzes the current state of the game and recognizes the current gaming state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. Sound effects are now played. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the volume adjustment switch, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. ing.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board during the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In fact, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified sound is serialized and converted into audio data. It is designed to be output as .

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3, The volumes flowing from the top side speaker and the bass body frame speaker of the body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually adjusted to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data. , it completely depends on the sound data of the notification sound built into the truck being used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the truck being used. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. This amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 may occur or a fraud against the pachinko machine 1 may occur. To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of an action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the performance sound is installed is forcibly set to mute, and the sound performance is set to mute. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is installed, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined, and this synthesis is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that becomes the volume flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it is not played from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is generated by the above-mentioned sound generation. progress according to schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the board volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch as a sub-volume value. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set again. The sound is set), and is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass body frame speaker on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass sound on the main body frame 4. Although the production sound is played from the main body frame speaker, the muted sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side. When the sound stops flowing from the main body frame speaker for bass in the main body frame 4, the performance sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but the sound generation schedule data continues until a predetermined period of time has passed after the notification sound starts playing. The flow will start again from the point where it progressed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the IC's sound source. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an employee such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or a fraudulent act by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeatedly performed until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this manner, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value 1, and in step S1010, 1ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 177 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value is 1, and the value is 1, and the peripheral control They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. Since the processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 1, the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 177. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control section steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 177. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 177. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before it is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, contact operation unit (Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is possible to obtain whether or not the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 has been operated from the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation section 301, the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, It is possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control section due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the performance by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the state of progress of the performance by the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer, and when the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the mode, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, it takes the value 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the status in the 2nd byte of the main serial data following the status which is the 1st byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the total (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 181, and checks whether the power outage warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving process. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the production display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal is inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 177 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[Game content]
Next, the content of the game using the game board 5 of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment.

In the game board 5 of the third embodiment, one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the left area of the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is used as the second starting opening 2005, and the first implementation The second starting opening 2005 provided in the right area of the center accessory 2500 of the form is the general winning opening 2001. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. is struck into the upper part of the gaming area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the gaming board 5, and the game with the gaming ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more clockwise the handle 195 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a, there are variable winning openings 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a second starting opening 2005 as ball entry openings into which game balls B can enter. A first prize opening 2006 is provided, and a second major prize opening 2007 is provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 as a ball entrance into which the game ball B can enter. Among these, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are always open at the top and can always accept the game ball B, whereas the variable winning opening 2003 and the first big winning opening 2006 , the second grand prize opening 2007 is normally closed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes open to accept the game ball B.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The speed of the ball B flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It will circulate through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Near the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532, there is a first grand prize opening 2006 that is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2523 under normal conditions, and the second left guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2523 and flows down.

Game balls B that have circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 are released above the gate 2002, and are connected to the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521. 2002, and then pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal win", the variable winning slot The variable winning hole 2003, which is closed by the door 2521, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the variable winning hole 2003. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 0/100, and in the other gaming states (high probability non-time saving state) The probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal win" in the normal lottery in the low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, and low probability time saving state C) is 100/100. That is, in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state, after some unique situations (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C Except for the situation in which a part of the operation of opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 by the opening door 2521 continues, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be extremely low, and the high probability time saving state is established. , in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state C, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is higher than in the low probability non time saving state and the high probability non time saving state. is set to .

In this embodiment, since the variable prize opening 2003 is provided in a part close to the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is more expensive to circulate through the second left guide passage 2532 than through the first left guide passage 2531. It is accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 with probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of game balls B are delivered to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. will be paid out.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 120 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning hole 2003 normally becomes open after the variable time has elapsed. In addition, in the time-saving state, the relatively short normal variable time is selected at a higher rate than in the non-time-saving state, and in the above-mentioned time-saving state, normal symbols are drawn after the start of the normal lottery than in the non-time-saving state. The time it takes to suggest a result (the time from when the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to display the variation until the lottery result is derived: normal variation time) is relatively shortened. It has become. (For example, in a non-time-saving state, the possibility that a normal variable time of 60 seconds will be selected is higher than in a time-saving state, and in a time-saving state, the possibility that a normal variable time of 0.01 seconds will be selected is higher than in a non-time-saving state.) ).

Furthermore, if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 after the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and before the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the regular symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous regular symbol is finished. Further, the maximum number of holding lottery results for normal symbols is set to four, and any more than that are discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

At the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, or the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W allow the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 to enter the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability. .

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, there is a high probability that the first It is received into the starting port 2004.

When the game balls B hit into the left side of the center accessory 2500 are received into the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls are sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, and the main control board 1310 draws the first special symbol (for example, "miss", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short win", etc.) will be held. If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "lost", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, in the time saving state, the relatively short special variation time is selected as the special variation time of the first special symbol at a higher rate than in the non-time saving state, and in the time saving state, the first special variation time is selected as the special variation time of the first special symbol at a higher rate than in the non-time saving state. The period until the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated is relatively shortened (for example, a special variation time of 60 seconds can be selected as the special variation time of the first special symbol in a non-time saving state. (e.g., the possibility that the special variable time of 0.01 seconds will be selected is higher in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state).

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001, the second starting opening 2005, the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 are both always open at the top, so that the game ball B can always be received. However, with respect to the first starting port 2004, the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a is accepted with a high probability, but with respect to the second starting port 2005, the game ball B released into the gaming area 5a is accepted with a high probability. There is no possibility that the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 into the game area 5a will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B hit into the left side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted into the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005.

When the game balls B hit into the left side of the center accessory 2500 are accepted into the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, , 1 game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, and at the same time, a second special symbol (for example, "miss", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit") is issued on the main control board 1310. , etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "lost", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, in the time-saving state, a relatively short special variation time is selected as the special variation time of the second special symbol at a higher rate than in the non-time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the second special symbol is selected at a higher rate than in the non-time-saving state. The period until the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated is relatively shortened (for example, a special variation time of 60 seconds can be selected as the special variation time of the second special symbol in a non-time saving state. (e.g., the possibility that the special variable time of 0.01 seconds will be selected is higher in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state).

In this embodiment, in the order of acceptance into the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, or the variable prize winning hole 2003, the first special symbol is drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting hole 2004, and the second special symbol is drawn. A second special symbol is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003. In other words, the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is suggested by receiving the game ball B into the second starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003. The results are suggested in the order of acceptance into the first starting port 2004, second starting port 2005, or variable winning port 2003.

The lottery results of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, or the variable prize winning hole 2003 are suggested. If the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 during the special variable time period, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol, so the special symbol that was previously drawn The start of suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special symbol to be reserved is up to four for the first starting port 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is not accepted in the first starting port 2004. The results of the lottery for the first special symbol were also discarded without withholding them. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

Similarly, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are drawn from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, or variable winning hole 2003. If the game ball B is accepted into the second starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003 until the result is suggested (special variable time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. , the start of suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol drawn earlier (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed. The number of reserved second special symbol lottery results is up to four for the second starting opening 2005 and the variable winning opening 2003, and for more than 4, the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening Even if the game ball B is accepted into the mouth 2003, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

Under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is no possibility that it will be accepted into the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, or the variable winning hole 2003, so the player Thus, it is possible to actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 It passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540 and is discharged into the space forming part 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first right guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open near the stop portion 1006, and an entrance spaced leftward from the entrance of the first right guide passage 2541. and a second right guide passage 2542 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first right guide passage 2541 and hits the ball B with such force that it does not contact the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the hitting force, it will enter the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first right guide path 2541 or the second right guide path 2542 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game balls B that have passed through the first right guide passage 2541 are released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game balls B that have circulated through the second right guide passage 2542 are released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. The second guiding region 2712 of the nail group 2700 is discharged.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guidance area 2710. As a result, the falling velocity of the game ball B is suppressed in the area of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 compared to the normal area.

In the first guidance area 2711 and the second guidance area 2712, the game ball B may come off from the guidance area 2710, and when it comes off the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2022 provided below have a high probability of being accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is ejected out of the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the second right guide passage 2542 is configured to be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a higher probability than the first right guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform a driving operation for the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the first right guide path 2541 when "hitting right". There is. In other words, to encourage a driving operation in which the handle 195 is largely rotated so that the game ball B is hit with such force that the game ball B comes into contact with the abutting portion 1006 when "hitting to the right". This makes it easier to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 through a relatively easy driving operation.

Game balls B that have passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming section 2550) and have not been accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 pass between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567 and reach the second attacker section. Enter 2560. In a normal state, the second big prize opening 2007 provided in the second attacker part 2560 is closed by the second big prize opening door 2562 so that it cannot accept the game ball B, so the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker The game ball B that passed between the right wall part 2567 flows down onto the second big winning opening door 2562, rolls to the left on the second big winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then moves to the right. It passes through the discharge passage 2565 and is discharged downward from the second attacker section 2560.

A general starting port 2001 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the general starting port 2001, and a sloped wall portion of the lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the general starting port 2001. 2418 are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstruction nails N are installed between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565, the general starting port 2001, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received into the general starting port 2001 with a certain degree of probability. Further, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received into the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than the general starting port 2001. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Then, the game balls B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and not received by the general starting port 2001 or the second sub-out port 2022 flow down onto the sloped wall portion 2418 and follow the slope of the sloped wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally downward and to the left, is ejected to the left at a location below the first starting port 2004, and is received into the out port 1008.

In other words, in a normal state, if you hit the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (“hit right”), there is an opportunity for it to be accepted into the first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, or variable winning hole 2003. There is no. As a result, under normal conditions, the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 ( It is possible to give a premium feeling to players (right-handed hitters).

As mentioned above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, the first special symbol lottery result or the second special symbol lottery result is determined by the first prize winning hole. 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 open and close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and become ready to receive the game ball B.

In the case where the first grand prize opening 2006 can be accepted, since the first grand prize opening 2006 is provided in the second left guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, A driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532. Then, when the first big prize opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, when the game ball B that has entered the second left guide passage 2532 is accepted into the first big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 onto the upper tray 201 by the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, in the case where the second grand prize opening 2007 can be accepted, since the second grand prize opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B circulates. Then, when the second big prize opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B enters the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567. is accepted into the second big prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

In this way, by allowing the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B when the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, Since many game balls B can be put out, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in this embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "jackpot", the second jackpot 2007 can accept the game ball B as a jackpot game. After entering the open state, either a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are received into the second grand prize opening 2007. When the conditions are satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball B into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "5R jackpot" is repeated for 5 rounds, and a "10R jackpot" is repeated for 10 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. At this time, even if you try to hit the game ball B aiming at the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second grand prize opening 2007 opens and can accept the game ball B, the second grand prize opening 2007 will open. Since a specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the falling speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to determine the timing to drive the game ball B. As a result, a level of difficulty is assigned to the driving operation of the game ball B, which makes the game more rewarding and enjoyable for the player, and prevents the player from losing interest. . In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol such as "Jackpot" being drawn is increased ("probability-variable winning"), or variable winning slots are changed. There is a "win" that is changed ("time-saving win") to make it easier to accept the game ball B into 2003. For example, when a regular lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result of a regular symbol will be a "normal win" is increased, or when the lottery result of a regular symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning slot door 2521 is closed. By increasing the time and number of times that the variable winning hole 2003 is open, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003.

In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", the first major prize opening 2006 will be able to accept the game ball B for a short time as a small win game. It opens and closes in between (for example, small hit rush).

In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is an "immediate short hit", the jackpot game or the small win game will not be executed, and the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big prize Although the mouth 2007 does not become open to accept the game ball B, the time-saving state is maintained as an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined specific number of fluctuations thereafter.

In this embodiment, below the second big prize opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game balls B accepted in the second big prize opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and then enters the pseudo gaming area 2010. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is able to accept the game ball B. , the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes through the front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 and is ejected from the pseudo out hole 2404 without being returned to the gaming area 5a.

For example, when the second big winning hole 2007 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to a "jackpot" as described above, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 receives the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Becomes acceptable. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided to be larger and more conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007 are accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player entertained while making it difficult for the player to get bored during the "jackpot" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery results of the first special symbol and the lottery results of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). The function display unit 1400 indicates the special symbol lottery result by flashing a plurality of LEDs for a predetermined period of time by repeatedly turning them on and off, and then suggests the special symbol lottery result by the combination of lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the lottery results of special symbols as a performance image. The performance image that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a state where three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is varied. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "lost", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, a "time saving" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery results of the special symbols drawn.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol (the symbol row fluctuates) on the performance display device 1600. (the time it takes for the final image to be displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit in the door frame 3 It is possible to perform a player participation type performance in which the player operates the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in 300. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper and front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower and rear effect unit 3600, etc. Therefore, the players can be entertained by various performances, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first starts the process using the first starting port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 183. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2004) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot control that controls the jackpot game is performed. The process (step S240) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "jackpot A", 10R A process for controlling opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2007 is executed in accordance with the jackpot game. In addition, when the mode suggests "Jackpot B", the process of controlling the opening and closing of the second jackpot 2007 according to the 5R jackpot game is executed, and when the mode becomes the mode suggesting "Jackpot C", , executes processing for controlling the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2007 according to the 10R jackpot game.

In the jackpot control process (step S240), after controlling the opening of the second jackpot 2007, each setting process of the high probability flag, time saving flag, and time saving number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used when ending the 10R jackpot game based on the result of the lottery process when the special symbol stops changing, indicating "Jackpot A". , is set when ending the 5R jackpot game based on the mode suggesting "Jackpot B". Then, the high probability flag is reset by special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, the next time a jackpot is achieved.

In addition, the time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time is shortened, and the 10R jackpot is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the special symbol stops changing is in a manner that suggests "jackpot A" or "jackpot C". It is set when the game is ended and a mode suggesting "immediate short wins A to C" is reached. Then, the time saving flag is reset by the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0".

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and suggests "jackpot A" or "jackpot C". When the 10R jackpot game is ended based on the mode that suggests "immediate short wins A to C", the number of times the time saving state continues is set. The time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches 0, but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches 0. Sometimes, it is reset by special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later (the counter value is returned to "0").

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S236), and the small hit execution flag is set. If set, a small win control process (step S239) is executed to control the small win game. In addition, in the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests a "small win", A process for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2006 according to the small winning game is executed.

In addition, if the small hit execution flag is not set, special symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is executed (step S238). In this example, when the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, and when the second special random number of the second special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, a common special symbol retention memory is used. It is configured to perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order in which they are stored in the area and stored in the special symbol retention storage area.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and stores this counter value. Based on this, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the counter value of the first special reservation number counter and the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The total value consisting of the values is stored in the special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the total value.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or instant short hit; if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot; if it is a small hit, it is the type of small hit; if it is an immediate short hit, it is the type of immediate short hit. , If there is no jackpot, small hit, or immediate short hit, advance determination information such as whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of mode (type of variation pattern) of the game effect to be executed. After performing a performance preliminary determination process to determine before starting the variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241 described above or the random number acquired in step S251 described later, specifically, the special random number (first By comparing the special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, and fluctuating random number, it is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot, small hit, immediate short hit, or not. If it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, if it is a small win, it is the type of small win, if it is an immediate short win, it is the type of immediate short win, if it is a jackpot, small hit, or not an immediate short win, the effect display device. Whether a reach effect is to be executed as the game effect to be executed in 1600, or the mode type (type of variation pattern) of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not it will be a jackpot, small hit, immediate short hit, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, if it will be a small hit, the type of small hit, if it will be an immediate short hit) The type of immediate short hit, jackpot, small hit, if it is not an immediate short hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (fluctuation pattern) etc.), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number, second special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the production advance judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passage process, the specified preliminary judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1), and a first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value of the special reservation number counter), and in the performance pre-judgment process regarding the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second starting opening passage process to be described later, A second special symbol preliminary determination command is set in accordance with the specified preliminary determination information, the acquisition of the second special random number, and the second pending storage number (value of the second special pending number counter) (step S262 ).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 where the starting prize has occurred In addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting winnings, whether or not the display result of the special symbol fluctuation display based on the starting winning that has occurred is a jackpot, small winning, or immediate short winning, and if it is a jackpot, whether or not it is a jackpot. type, if it is a small hit, the type of small win, if it is an immediate short hit, the type of immediate short hit, jackpot, small hit, or if it is not an immediate short hit, the game is executed on the effect display device 1600. Pre-determination information such as whether a reach effect is to be executed as an effect or the type of mode (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is loaded on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the starting prize. Peripheral control IC can be understood.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

In addition, the reserved storage area has 1 to 8 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories that is the sum of the number of first reserved storage areas and the number of second reserved storage areas, and the peripheral control IC The indicated preliminary determination information is stored in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 7) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 7) storage area. is stored, and upon receiving a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), it responds to the received variation pattern command. The preliminary determination information stored in the first storage area of the pending storage area is discarded, and the preliminary determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 8) storage area is replaced with the N-1st (N= 2 to 8) to the storage area (shifting the preliminary determination information stored in the reserved storage area). As a result, the advance determination information of the above-mentioned special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so that the order in which the start of variable display was suspended can be specified, and the advance determination information is discarded in order starting from the earliest. Become so.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2005, then as shown in FIG. In step S251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "4" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S255 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the counter value of the first special reservation number counter and the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The total value consisting of the values is stored in the special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the total value.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S251. Whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or instant short hit; if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot; if it is a small hit, it is the type of small hit; if it is an immediate short hit, it is the type of immediate short hit. , If there is no jackpot, small hit, or immediate short hit, advance determination information such as whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of mode (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed. After performing a performance preliminary determination process that determines before starting the variable display according to the starting prize (step S255), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory. At the same time, the command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the production display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 2005 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second pending memory number based on the ball being entered is set to "4". In addition, during the time saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the normal state, so the period in which the second pending storage number is at the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the first start Even if a game ball enters the opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain a jackpot lottery opportunity.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S238). In the special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned special symbol process flag.

1. The special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are read out, and based on the read out special random numbers, lottery processing regarding the display mode of the above-mentioned special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped is performed. Special symbol normal processing to be performed (step S280)
2. Special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S281) in which processing for determining the mode of display when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped.
3. Based on the fluctuating random number, the variation mode of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, and the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Variation pattern setting processing (step S282) in which a lottery process, etc. regarding the variation mode of the effect display to be executed correspondingly is performed.
4. Special symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. Regarding the display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped, the special symbol is set so that the display mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped is displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of symbols (step S284)

In addition, the said special symbol process flag is operated in the said main control side power-on process (refer FIG. 167) to indicate that the said special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. There is a variable display control of special symbols (first special symbol, second special random number) in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter and the counter value of the second special pending number counter. Make a judgment as to whether or not. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the special symbol in the pending state, then as a process of step S302, the special symbol stored in the special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is The first of the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, variable random number) A random number stored in the storage area is read from the RAM. Then, as processing in steps S303 and S304, if the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and if it is the second special random number, the above At the same time as counting down the second special reservation number counter, a random number (special random number ( A first special random number, a second special random number), a symbol random number (a first symbol random number, a second symbol random number), a reach random number, a variable random number) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the special symbol retention storage area has eight storage areas 1 to 8, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 7) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 7) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 8) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 8)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned special symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Then, as a process in step S305, if the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special random number is used, and if the read special random number is the second special random number, the second special random number is used. A winning determination process, which is a lottery process, is performed for the jackpot, the above-mentioned small hit, and the above-mentioned instant short hit. Thereafter, at the time when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the high probability state shown in FIG. 190(A). A lottery table is selected (step S312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S311), a lottery at low probability shown in FIG. 190(B) is performed. A table is selected (step S313), and the selected lottery table is compared with the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S314).

The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 190(A) and 190(B) are arranged for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time saving state (normal state)), A low probability lottery table is used when the game state is in a low probability time saving state), and a high probability lottery table is used when the gaming state is in a high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). We are prepared. In the low probability lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/309, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/319. The first special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/299 if the set value was 4, 1/279 if the set value was 5, and 1/269 if the set value was 6. An instant short hit determination indicating that the first special random number has won an immediate short hit with an immediate short hit probability of 1/319, which is the same for any of the setting values 1 to 6. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating that the other first special random numbers are outliers. In addition, in the low probability lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, if the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, if the setting value is 2, it is 1/309, and if the setting value is 3, it is 1/319. The second special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/299 when the set value was 4, 1/279 when the set value was 5, and 1/269 when the set value was 6. The second special random number is the same as the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with the small winning probability of 144/319, which is the same for any of the setting values 1 to 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other in such a manner that the other second special random numbers match the outlier determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are outliers. Further, the lottery table at high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased ten times as compared to the lottery table at low probability.

In the above, the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number does not have a small hit determination value, whereas the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number does not have a small hit determination value. A judgment value is provided. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, and in addition to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the variable winning hole 2003 is easily executed, the variable winning hole Since there is a possibility of winning a small prize by starting winning in 2003, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

In addition, the lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number has an immediate short hit judgment value, whereas the lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number has an immediate short hit judgment value. A hit determination value is not provided. As a result, in the non-time saving state, it is difficult to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, and the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning into the first starting opening 2004 has become mainstream. Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short-term win by starting winning into the first starting opening 2004, even if a disadvantageous game is being played in a non-time-saving state, you can play the game with anticipation. .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that, as a result of comparing the lottery table and the special random numbers (the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing), a jackpot, If it is determined that it is either a small hit or an immediate short hit (step S315), a hit flag (big hit flag, small hit flag, immediate short hit flag) is set (step S316), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is no jackpot, small hit, or instant short win, that is, if it is determined that the win is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S317).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating no reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table during the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table during the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is out of reach (step S318) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S317). A reach flag indicating that is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S319).

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first changes the special symbol as shown in FIG. The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the display is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag, small win flag, and immediate short win flag are set (step S321).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a uses the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process and the jackpot shown in FIG. 190(C). By comparing with the symbol determination table (step S322), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (stop symbol of the special symbol) is determined. (Step S323).

in particular,
1. The second grand prize opening 2007 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2007. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2007 (easily) in a 10R jackpot game. Jackpot A that controls to shorten the time
2. The second grand prize opening 2007 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2007. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2007 (easily) in a 5R jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the probability of winning the next jackpot is high. Jackpot B that controls to non-time saving state
3. The second grand prize opening 2007 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2007. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2007 (easily) in a 10R jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, special symbols (first special symbol, first special symbol, Jackpot C that controls to a low probability time saving state A where the time saving state is ended if a jackpot does not occur before the fluctuating display of 2 special symbols) is executed 100 times.
4. The second grand prize opening 2007 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2007. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2007 (easily) in a 10R jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, special symbols (first special symbol, first special symbol, Jackpot D that controls to a low probability time saving state A where the time saving state is ended if a jackpot does not occur until the fluctuating display of 2 special symbols) is executed 599 times.
One of the four types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, which is compared with the first symbol random number, determination values are allocated to jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D. Specifically, the judgment value is distributed in the ratio of "Jackpot A: Jackpot B: Jackpot C: Jackpot D = 25:25:49:1" to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number from 1 to 100). It is being On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, determination values are assigned to jackpot A and jackpot C, but no determination values are assigned to jackpot B and jackpot D. Specifically, the determination value is distributed to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number from 1 to 100) at a ratio of "Jackpot A: Jackpot C = 70:30". In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a jackpot A is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning in the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 was executed rather than the variable displaying of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting opening 2004. In some cases, the situation is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as a mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if the jackpot A is determined, the jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, if the jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. The jackpot C symbol is determined as the symbol, and when the jackpot D symbol is determined, the jackpot D symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In addition, if the immediate short hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing. The type of immediate short hit is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table for immediate short hit shown in FIG. 190(D) (step S322), and the special symbol changes corresponding to the determined type of immediate short hit. The mode at the time of control stop (stop symbol of special symbol) is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. Low probability that the time-saving state will end if the jackpot does not occur before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 100 times without controlling the jackpot game or small win game. Immediate short hit A that controls to short time state C
2. Low probability that the time-saving state will end if there is no jackpot before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 40 times without controlling the jackpot game or small win game. Immediate short hit B that controls to short time state C
3. Low probability that the time-saving state will end if the jackpot does not occur before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 20 times without controlling the jackpot game or small win game. Immediate short hit C that controls to short time state C
One of the three types of instant short wins is determined.

In addition, in the symbol determination table at the time of an immediate short hit that is compared with the first symbol random number, determination values are distributed to an immediate short hit A, an immediate short hit B, and an immediate short hit C. Specifically, the judgment value is determined at the ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10:20:70" for the first symbol random number (for example, a random number from 1 to 100). It is sorted. On the other hand, since there is no chance of winning an immediate short hit by lottery based on the second special random number, the symbol determination table for an immediate short win compared with the second symbol random number is an immediate short win A, an immediate short hit B, and an immediate short win. No judgment value is assigned to short hit C. However, the immediate short winning is won by lottery based on the second special random number, and the symbol determination table for the instant short winning that is compared with the second symbol random number is also changed to the instant short winning A, the immediate short winning B, and the instant short winning. The determination value may be distributed to the winnings C at a ratio of "immediate short winning A: immediate short winning B: immediate short winning C=10:20:70". In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after winning an immediate short hit by lottery based on special random numbers, the type of immediate short win is determined using the symbol determination table for the instant short win that is compared with the symbol random number. However, in the lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the special random numbers, the judgment value for immediate short win A, the judgment value for immediate short win B, and the judgment value for instant short hit C are set. , it may be determined that instant short win A, instant short win B, and instant short win C are won when the respective judgment values and special symbols match. In other words, the type of instant short win may be determined only by lottery based on special random numbers.

Moreover, when the type of immediate short hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of immediate short winning is determined as the mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit A symbol is determined as the immediate short hit symbol, and if it is determined to be an immediate short hit B, the immediate short hit B symbol is determined as the immediate short hit symbol. If it is determined to be an immediate short hit C, the immediate short hit C symbol is determined as an immediate short hit symbol.

In addition, if the small hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing and the symbol The type of small hit is determined by comparing it with the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in 190(E) (step S322), and the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of small hit is changed when the fluctuation control is stopped. The mode (stop symbols of special symbols) is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. The first big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed, and the opening/closing pattern is executed twice to control the small winning game in which the game ball can (easily) enter the first big prize opening 2006. Decide accordingly.

In addition, in the small hit pattern determination table that is compared with the second pattern random number, determination values are allocated to small wins. Specifically, a determination value is set at which one type of "small hit" is selected for all of the second symbol random numbers (for example, random numbers from 1 to 100). On the other hand, since a small hit is not won by lottery based on the first special random number, the determination value is not allocated to the small win in the symbol determination table for the small win, which is compared with the first symbol random number. However, the small winnings may be won by lottery based on the first special random number, and the determination value may be allocated to the small winnings in the symbol determination table at the time of the small winning, which is compared with the first symbol random number. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, only one type of small winning is set, but multiple types of small winnings with different opening times and opening times of the first big prize opening 2006 are set, and comparisons are made with the random numbers of symbols. Using the symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, one of a plurality of types of small wins may be determined.

Furthermore, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the symbol is determined to be a small hit.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a losing symbol when none of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, and immediate short hit flag are set (step S324). After the process of determining the stop symbols is thus performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned lottery results (type of jackpot, type of immediate short hit, small hit, reach) as the process of step S328. A judgment result notification command is set in accordance with each lottery result so that an instruction to indicate whether it is missed or not (it may also be an instruction to the mode of the stop symbol of the special symbol) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. (Step S328). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends at the time when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-described variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies the jackpot A from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the jackpot A If the pattern is determined to be a jackpot B (a combination in which the decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right are the same odd-numbered pattern among the symbols "0" to "9"), the jackpot B symbol (left, middle, If the combination in which the right decorative pattern is "579" is determined, and the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot C symbol (the combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9") is determined. If it is determined to be a jackpot D, it will be a jackpot D symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right will be the same even number symbols from "0" to "9"). combination). In addition, if jackpot C or jackpot D is determined, a common combination of even symbols can be displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed, it is not clearly shown to the player which one is the hit, and jackpot D is determined. It gives the player a sense of anticipation and encourages them to continue playing the game. In addition, if the immediate short hit is determined to be A, the immediate short hit is determined to be A symbol (a combination in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are "549" symbols), and if the immediate short hit is determined to be B. If the immediate short hit B symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "549" symbols) is determined, and the immediate short hit C is determined, then the immediate short hit C symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) is determined. A combination in which the decorative pattern is a pattern of "549" is determined. In addition, if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, an immediate short hit B, or an immediate short hit C, a common combination of "549" can be displayed, and at the stage when the symbol combination is displayed, it is difficult to tell which one is the hit. Without explicitly informing the player, the player is given a sense of expectation of a more advantageous immediate short-term win to encourage him or her to continue playing the game. Further, if it is determined to be a small hit, a small winning symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "135" symbols) is determined. In addition, if you identify an out-of-reach pattern, you can use out-of-reach symbols (combinations of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but with different middle decorative symbols). If the winning symbol is determined to be a missed symbol) and a miss is specified, a missed symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.However, an immediate short (excluding winning B symbols, immediate short winning C symbols, and small winning symbols), and when the variable time specified from the variable pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game production), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the production display device. The display is controlled to 1600. Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, even if it is determined to be an immediate short win A, an immediate short win B, or an immediate short win C, the gaming state at that time is a gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state. (High probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), executes the process of setting the time saving flag and time saving number counter corresponding to immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, and immediate short hit C. Therefore, in gaming states other than low probability non-time saving states, even if immediate short winning A, immediate short winning B, and immediate short winning C are determined, immediate short winning A to C symbols (left, middle, right decorative symbols) The above-mentioned "missing symbol without reach" is determined instead of determining the combination in which "549" is the symbol.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. (Step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot is selected according to the jackpot type and gaming state determined in step S323 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S341), selects a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit according to the type of small win and gaming state determined in Step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (Step S342), and immediately If the short hit flag is set (step S341), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of immediate short hit according to the type of immediate short hit and the gaming state determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process is created. Select (step S342). Also, if the reach flag is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S344), and all of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, immediate short flag, and reach flag are set. If not, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss without performing a reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a loss is selected (step S345).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S348), and the peripheral control board instructs the peripheral control board to start the determined variation pattern. The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display devices (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 are set by setting a variation pattern command to be notified to the function display unit 1510. ) is started to be displayed (step S349). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random number and the symbol random number with the fluctuation random number read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing. By acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the fluctuation random number with the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has higher jackpot expectations than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game increases.

As will be described in detail later, when the special symbol variable display reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) in a low probability state after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, a specific variable pattern table is selected when a specified condition is met, and when the specific variable pattern table is selected, a specific variable pattern (variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect described later) is determined. When the specific variable pattern is determined, the help mode L premonition effect is executed, which can only be executed when the special symbol variable display reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) in a low probability state.

Further, when the special symbol variable display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of continuations of the time saving state is set is "0". If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state control (time saving control) is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. The variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process moves to step S373. That is, in the processing of this step S373, this processing is ended at the time when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing (step S284).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag and also resets the time saving flag (step S384). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times according to various time-saving conditions such as 100 times, 40 times, 20 times, etc.), the time is reduced. The control (control in the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control (control in the normal state) is started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. A jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S388), and a waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (time for displaying a message indicating that the jackpot game is to be started) is set in an interval timer (step S389). ). In addition, in step S389, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process (step S240), and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. Control is performed to determine and terminate the jackpot game. Also, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset. is reset, and if the counter value of the time saving number counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0").

Note that the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, jackpot start commands (jackpot A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command, jackpot D start command) are set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). . Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, a common performance (the performance executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. is the same) is set as the performance of the jackpot game according to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command. ing. Also, if you want to use a common effect for the jackpot game according to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command, set the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command to the same command instead of making them different commands. You can leave it there.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is set when the jackpot game is finished, specifically in the jackpot control process (step S240), when the second jackpot opening 2007 is opened according to the type of jackpot. Opening/closing control (for example, after opening the second grand prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second grand prize opening 2007 It is reset when the opening/closing control (opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern sometimes closed 10 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S240) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first special symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the device and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the small hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small winning start command indicating to start a small winning game (step S387), and the small winning flag is set. A small win execution flag indicating that the game is being executed is set (step S388), and the waiting time until the start of the small win game (the time for displaying the start of the small win game, etc.) is set as an interval timer. Set (step S389). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S389, a small win start command is set according to the type of small win. Thereby, the effect of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set to the first flag according to the type of small winning in the small winning control process (step S241). It is reset when the opening/closing control of the big prize opening 2006 (for example, the opening/closing control that repeats twice the opening/closing pattern of opening the first big prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it) is reset. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S2341) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first special of the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the above-mentioned jackpot flag and above-mentioned small hit flag are not set, and the above-mentioned immediate short hit flag is set (step S390), the high probability flag and time saving flag are not set, and the low probability non-time saving flag is set. It is determined whether the state is the same (step S391). If it is a low probability non-time saving state, the time saving flag is set, and the number of continuations of the time saving state according to the type of immediate short winning is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state with special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). A time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of variable displays of special symbols is set (step S392). Specifically, if it is an immediate short hit A, set the time saving number counter to ``100'', if it is an immediate short hit B, set the time saving number counter to ``40'', and if it is an immediate short hit C. If so, set the time saving counter to "20". On the other hand, if the gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state is a high probability time saving state, a high probability non time saving state, or a low probability time saving state, the process of setting the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is not executed.

As mentioned above, in a low probability state, if an immediate short win occurs, the time reduction state is controlled based on the immediate short win, whereas in a high probability state, if an immediate short win occurs, the time reduction state is controlled immediately. It is not controlled to shorten the time based on short hits. In this way, the "immediate short win" is aimed at redressing disadvantageous games being played in a low probability state, and in the time saving state based on the immediate short win, the game ball is placed in the variable winning hole 2003. Since it is easy to accept B, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

In addition, in the time saving state, if an immediate short winning occurs, the already controlled time saving state is continued without being newly controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short winning. In this way, the "immediate short winning" is aimed at redressing disadvantageous games that are being played in a non-time saving state, and if the time saving state is already controlled, the "immediate short winning" is We are trying not to control to a time-saving state based on this. In addition, as another example, in the time saving state, when an instant short hit occurs, the already controlled time saving state may be ended, and the time saving state may be newly controlled to a time saving state based on the instant short winning. In addition, as another example, when an immediate shortcut occurs in a time saving state, the remaining number of time saving times for the time saving state that has already been controlled is compared with the number of time saving times for the time saving state based on the immediate time saving state. Control may be performed so that the number of time reductions is increased. As another example, if there is an immediate shortcut in the time saving state, the number of time reductions in the time saving state based on the immediate shortening is calculated against the remaining number of time saving times in the already controlled time saving state. It may also be controlled to add.

In addition, in the case of an immediate short hit in a low probability state, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and a time saving flag is set. It may be at the start or end of the fixed time, which is the time to be maintained. Among these, when the time saving flag is set at the start of the fixed time, the time saving state is controlled based on the immediate short winning, and the state where it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 is quickly set. can be granted. In addition, when setting the time saving flag at the end of the fixed time, it is possible to use the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short winning symbol to execute a production that notifies the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short winning, It is possible to specialize in winning and losing effects during the variable display of special symbols, which is before the immediate short winning symbols stop. When executing a production that notifies the start of a time-saving state based on an immediate short hit, the confirmation time after the immediate short hit symbol stops is set to a specific confirmation time (for example, 10 seconds) that is longer than the normal confirmation time (for example, 1 second). ), for example.

In addition, if the jackpot flag or small hit flag is not set, that is, if there is an immediate short hit or miss, the jackpot game or small hit game will not be executed, so there will be a wait until the next special symbol fluctuation display starts. The time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S392), and the process moves to step S393. In addition, in this embodiment, a common waiting time is set in the interval timer when an immediate short hit or miss occurs, but a special wait time that is longer when an immediate short hit occurs than when a miss occurs. A suitable waiting time may be set in the interval timer. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that it is not a miss but an immediate short win based on the difference in the length of the waiting time. Further, when a special waiting time is provided in this way, an effect may be performed during the special waiting time to make the player aware that it is not a loss but an immediate short hit.

When the processes from step S386 to step S393 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a rescue number counting process ( Step S394) is executed, and at the time when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S395), this process is ended.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned relief count counting process (step S394).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets to "0" the initial value of the rescue number counter that is added and counted according to the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clearing. Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S3941), the count value of the relief counter indicating the number of changes in the special symbol in a low probability state is reset to return to the initial value "0" (step S3942). ).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set, it is determined whether the high probability flag is not set and the state is low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S3943). . If it is a low probability state, +1 is added to the count value of the relief number counter (step S3944), and if the count value of the relief number counter reaches "600" (step S3945), a time saving flag is set. At the same time, a time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time saving state is set (step S3946). Specifically, when the count value of the relief number counter reaches "600", the time saving number counter is set to "700". Although not shown, +1 is not added to the count value of the relief counter in some of the low probability non-time saving states among the low probability states.

As mentioned above, the relief counter is set to count each time the special symbol changes in the low probability state, and when the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the time saving state is activated. It is supposed to be controlled. In addition, the rescue number counter counts the variable display of the special symbol in a low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state. In addition, in the main control board 1310, when transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510, the number of variations of the special symbol is counted up by the relief frequency counter. On the other hand, the rescue number counter does not count even if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a high probability state. In this way, the control of the time saving state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is aimed at relieving disadvantageous games being played in a low probability state. Since the game ball B can be easily accepted into the player 2003, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has. In addition, 700 times is set as the number of times to save time, and the probability that you will get the next "jackpot" before the fluctuating display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time-saving state is very high, so you can save time. In this state, you can play the game with anticipation. In addition, 700 times as a time saving number is considered to be a number that does not necessarily mean that the next "jackpot" will be obtained even if it is 1/269 of the setting value 6, and even if it is a long time saving state of 700 times. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension and allow him or her to continue playing the game. For this reason, the number of time savings granted by "control of the time saving state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of special symbols" using the relief number counter is likely to result in a "big hit" next time, but it is stressful. It is preferable to set the number of times to such an extent that the sense of winning does not disappear (the number of times that the probability of not winning the jackpot is at least 3% or more). In addition, the number of time reductions granted by "control of the time saving state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions regarding the number of fluctuations of special symbols" using the rescue number counter is the same as the limit value of the rescue number counter (the number of fluctuations practiced by the player). By setting the number of times to be equal to or greater than that, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that eliminates the sense of regret that he felt until the limit value of the relief number counter was reached.

Furthermore, when a jackpot occurs, the relief count counter is reset, whereas when a small hit or an immediate short hit occurs, the relief count counter is not reset. That is, unless a jackpot is achieved, counting of the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is continued. In this way, the control of the time-saving state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is aimed at relieving the situation where jackpot games are not being played, and in the time-saving state, the variable winning slot Since the game ball B can be easily accepted into the player 2003, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has. In addition, 700 times is set as the number of times to save time, and the probability that you will get the next "jackpot" before the fluctuating display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time-saving state is very high, so you can save time. In this state, you can play the game with anticipation.

Note that the rescue number counter is reset not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the power is turned on with RAM clearing. That is, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (all areas of the RAM). (excluding specific areas), the relief count counter is reset. In this way, the relief counter can be reset by the hall manager as appropriate. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM will not be cleared, so the count of the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state will be reset. After the power is turned on, counting is resumed from the count of the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state that was stored when the power was turned off.

In addition, in a variable display where the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times, if an immediate short hit occurs, the special symbol in the low probability state will be given priority over the time short state based on the immediate short hit. The time saving state is controlled based on the number of fluctuations reaching 600 times. This is because the time-saving state based on the instant short hit is a time-saving grant until the special symbol fluctuates 20 to 100 times, whereas in the low probability state the special symbol fluctuates 600 times. The time-saving state based on this is a time-saving grant until the number of times reaches 700, and priority is given to the time-saving grant that is advantageous to the player. However, in a variable display in which the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state, if an immediate short hit occurs, control may be performed to a time saving state based on an immediate short hit.

[Transition of gaming state]
FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of gaming states. As shown in FIG. 196, gaming states can be roughly divided into low probability states and high probability states, and non-time saving states and time saving states. Note that when the power is turned on, the gaming state is in a low probability non-time saving state.

In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to be higher than in the low probability state. Furthermore, the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is made possible when the special symbol lottery result becomes a "jackpot". Note that the jackpot probability can also be changed by changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the small winning probability and the immediate short winning probability do not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, and do not change even by switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

In the time saving state, it is set so that it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time saving state. For example, when a regular lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result of a regular symbol will be a "normal win" is increased, or when the lottery result of a regular symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning slot door 2521 is closed. By increasing the time and number of times that the variable winning hole 2003 is open, the game ball B is easily accepted into the variable winning hole 2003. As a result, in a non-time-saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable prize opening 2003, so the game in which the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 becomes mainstream. On the other hand, in the time saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time saving state, so the game in which the game ball B is entered into the variable winning hole 2003 has become mainstream. There is. In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

Furthermore, the transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state is made possible when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" or "immediate short hit". In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot", the game will move to the time saving state after executing the jackpot game, whereas if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Immediate Short Hit", It is different in that a jackpot game is not executed and the game shifts to a time saving state. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol does not result in a "big hit" or "immediate short hit," the state can shift from a non-time saving state to a time saving state if a predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is met. is made possible. In this example, after the power is turned on or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of changes in the special symbol in a low probability state is counted, and when the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the non-time saving state is entered. This makes it possible to transition from a state to a time-saving state.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot A", the high probability time saving state is controlled after the execution of the 10R jackpot game until the next "Jackpot". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot B", the game is controlled to a high probability non-time saving state until the next "Jackpot" after the execution of the 5R jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot C", the control is performed to a low probability time saving state A until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times after the execution of the 10R jackpot game. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the low probability time saving state A is ended at that point. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot D", the control is performed to a low probability time saving state A until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R jackpot game. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, the low probability time saving state A is ended at that point. In addition, after the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 599 times, although it is controlled to a low probability non-time saving state, when the special symbol fluctuation display stops for the 600th time, the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 600 times. , it is possible to transition from the non-time saving state to the time saving state (low probability time saving state B) again, and although there is a blank period where the 600th special symbol fluctuates and becomes the low probability non time saving state, a blank period will occur. , it is possible to proceed with the game from a low probability time saving state A to a low probability time saving state B in a substantially continuous manner. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B", the period until the next "Jackpot" is controlled as a high probability time saving state or a high probability non-time saving state. However, for such a period, for example, it is until the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed 10,000 times, and before the special symbol fluctuates and displays reaches 10,000 times, the next "jackpot" It may also be the number of times that the probability of obtaining is very high.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a "small win", after the small win game is executed, the game state is controlled to the state before the small win game. In other words, the game state does not change when the special symbol lottery result becomes a "small win". In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a "small win", the game state before the small win game may be continuously controlled even during the small win game. In this case as well, the game state does not change when the special symbol lottery result becomes a "small win".

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is an "immediate short hit", the jackpot game is not executed and the control is performed in a low probability time saving state C until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is 100 times when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit A", 40 times when it is "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". , 20 times is set. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state C is ended at that point.

In the above, in the low probability non-time saving state, control is performed to the low probability time saving state C only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short winning". On the other hand, as game states other than the low probability non-time saving state, in the high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, and low probability time saving state C, the special symbol lottery result is When an ``immediate short win'' occurs, control is not necessarily performed to a low probability time saving state C, and the game state before the lottery result of the special symbol becomes an ``immediate short win'' is maintained. In other words, game states other than the low probability non-time saving state are set as "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" which is not controlled to low probability time saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short winning". ing. In this way, the "immediate short win" is aimed at redressing disadvantageous games that are being played in a low probability non-time saving state, and is a low probability time saving triggered by an "immediate short win". In state C, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning hole 2003, so the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

In addition, in this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short winning", the control is set to the low probability time saving state C, but some of the low probability non-time saving states In this, the "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" is set in which the low probability time saving state C is not controlled when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short winning". Details will be described later.

In addition, in the above, in the low probability non-time saving state, the control is controlled to the low probability time saving state C only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", but at least in the low probability state, the special symbol It suffices to control to the low probability time saving state C only when the lottery result is an "immediate short win". In other words, not only in the low probability non-time saving state but also in the low probability time saving state A to C, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", the already controlled low probability time saving state A to C may be terminated and controlled to a low probability time saving state C. In addition, as another example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" in low probability time saving states A to C, the number of time saving times for the low probability time saving states A to C that are already controlled The remaining number of times may be compared with the number of times of time saving in a low probability time saving state C triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol being an "immediate short hit", and control may be made so that the number of time saving times is greater. In addition, as another example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" in low probability time saving states A to C, the number of time saving times for the low probability time saving states A to C that are already controlled The remaining number of times may be controlled to be added to the number of time-saving times in a low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the special symbol lottery result being an "immediate short hit."

In addition, in the above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that will be controlled to low probability time reduction state C) will be different depending on the type of immediate short win. However, the content of the low probability time saving state C may be different depending on the type of immediate short winning. Specifically, depending on the type of immediate short win, the opening time and number of openings of the variable prize opening 2003 that allows accepting the game ball B when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a "normal win" differs. Alternatively, both the opening time and the number of times the variable winning hole 2003 is opened and the number of time saving times may be different.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, a special instant short symbol that is different from other stop symbols is displayed as the special symbol's stop symbol. In addition to stop displaying the winning symbols (which may be different for the instant short winning A to C symbols), in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, a common instant short winning symbol (" 549" symbol combination) is displayed in a stopped state. However, gaming states other than the low probability non-time saving state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" In this case, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol, while the effect is In the variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol (the symbol combination of "549") is not displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and a symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the missing symbol) is not displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. (design) is displayed in a stopped state. In this way, game states other than the low probability non-time saving state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and "immediate short winning symbol invalid" In the "period", if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the stop symbol of the decorative design on the performance display device 1600 does not indicate that, so the "immediate short hit" is won. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, and to reduce the feeling of loss due to the invalidation of the "immediate short win".

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is not a "big hit" or "immediate short hit", if the predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is met, the jackpot game will not be executed and the special symbol will fluctuate. The low probability time saving state B is controlled until the display reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to 700 times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state B is ended at that point.

In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is added and counted from the initial value "0" using the above-mentioned relief number counter, When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, control is made to the low probability time saving state B. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, only the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of changes in the special symbol is counted. It is set as a "count suppression period" that does not occur. On the other hand, in a low probability state, the number of changes in the special symbol is counted regardless of whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state. Furthermore, when a jackpot game is executed when the special symbol lottery result becomes a "jackpot", the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, regarding the control of the low probability time saving state B based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol, it is possible to control the low probability time saving state B when a disadvantageous game is being played in the low probability state or a state where a jackpot game is not being played. The purpose is to provide relief for the problem that continues, and in the low probability time saving state B, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has. I can do it. In addition, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times, and the probability that the next "jackpot" will be obtained before the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 700 times in low probability time saving state B is extremely high. Therefore, in the low probability time saving state B, the player can play the game with anticipation.

In addition, in this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of a jackpot game, the number of changes in the special symbol in a low probability state (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate other than the jackpot) is counted. However, in some of the low probability non-time saving states among the low probability states, it is set as a "count suppression period" in which the number of changes in the special symbol is not counted. Details will be described later.

In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the control is set to the low probability time saving state B, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state does not reach the jackpot. The expected number of changes in the special symbol until a jackpot is calculated from the probability (for example, 319 times if the jackpot probability is 1/319) is set to be greater than the expected value. Therefore, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, there is a high probability that the next "jackpot" will be obtained before the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. It has become.

Furthermore, in this example, the count of the number of changes in special symbols in a low probability state is reset not only when executing a jackpot game but also when power is turned on with RAM clearing. That is, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (all areas of the RAM). (areas excluding specific areas), the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the relief counter can be reset by the hall manager as appropriate. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM will not be cleared, so the count of the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state will be reset. After the power is turned on, counting is restarted from the count of the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state that was stored when the power was turned off.

In addition, after turning on the power with RAM clearing or executing a jackpot game, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" in a variable display where the number of variations of the special symbol has reached 600 times in a low probability state, , after the jackpot game is executed, the game state corresponding to the type of jackpot (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state A) is controlled, and after the jackpot game is executed, the low probability It is assumed that the time saving state B is not controlled.

In addition, after turning on the power with RAM clearing or executing a jackpot game, if the special symbol lottery result becomes a "small hit" in a variable display where the number of variations of the special symbol has reached 600 times in a low probability state, It is assumed that the control is performed to the low probability time saving state B after the execution of the small winning game.

In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in a variable display where the number of variations of the special symbol has reached 600 times in a low probability state after powering on with RAM clear or after executing a jackpot game. In this case, control is performed to a low probability time saving state B. This is because the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the special symbol lottery result being an "immediate short hit" is a time-saving grant until the special symbol fluctuates between 20 and 100 times. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state B, which is based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol, is a time-saving grant until the number reaches 700, and priority is given to the time-saving grant that is advantageous to the player. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in a variable display where the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state after turning on the power with RAM clear or executing a jackpot game. In this case, the control may be controlled to a low probability non-time saving state C which is triggered by the special symbol lottery result becoming an "immediate short hit".

In addition, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 after turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM or executing a jackpot game, when controlling to the low probability time saving state B, the effect display device 1600 , to notify that low probability time saving state B is to be started. For example, it is sufficient to notify that the low probability time saving state B is to be started at the start of the low probability time saving state B or in a variable display when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times.

By the way, the time saving state is assumed to end when the end condition of the time saving state is met. In this example, during the control of the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C, the special symbol is displayed fluctuating a predetermined number of times (triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol becoming a "jackpot" or "immediate short hit"). When the predetermined number of times is reached, the state transitions to a low probability non-time saving state. In addition to this, for example, during the control of low probability time saving state B or low probability time saving state C, an end lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to end the time saving state each time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The end condition of the time saving state may be satisfied when the end of the time saving state is determined by the ending lottery or when the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes a "small hit" reaches a predetermined number of times.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the functional display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the gaming status and the lottery results of the normal symbols drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display device made up of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the gate 2002. In such a status indicator, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or "small win", at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol stops (when the jackpot symbol or small win symbol stops) The "status display LED corresponding to time saving" is not made to emit light, and the "state display LED corresponding to time saving" is made to emit light at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning game. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the "status display LED corresponding to time saving" will light up at the same time as the special symbol's fluctuating display stops (when the immediate short win symbol stops). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the outside party recognize that the winning is other than a jackpot or a small win.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "lost", the "status display LED corresponding to time saving" will not be emitted at the same time as the special symbol's variable display stops (when the losing symbol stops). . On the other hand, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in a low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) using the above-mentioned relief frequency counter. is added and counted from the initial value "0", and when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the low probability time saving state B is controlled. When performing a variable display of a special symbol in which the number of variations of the special symbol has reached 600 times in such a low probability state, at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol stops (when a missed symbol stops), the By emitting light from the corresponding status display LED, it is possible to easily make the outside aware that this is not a normal deviation.

[Example of performance related to time-saving control when the number of rescues is reached]
In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of changes in the special symbol in a low probability state (the number of changes other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted. When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the control is set to low probability time saving state B, but in the period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. is executing a predetermined performance for the 600th special symbol fluctuation display. Here, a specific example of performance until the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times will be described with reference to FIG. 197.

As shown in FIG. 197(A), when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the center of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1600a are displayed in a variable manner until the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern command elapses, and the display is stopped in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern. do. As the stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a, a pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when a variable pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variable display of the identification pattern 1600b, which is smaller and less conspicuous than the decorative pattern, is executed at the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, O and × are displayed in a variable manner as the identification symbol 1600b, and either O or × is displayed in a stopped state. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, a circle is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short win), and an x is displayed when the lottery result is a loss. In addition, apart from this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the identification pattern 1600b may be a stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot or small hit. 〇, if the lottery result is an immediate short win or a loss, an x may be stopped and displayed to make it difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short win from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, a first special symbol pending display 1600c (state where the first special symbol variable display is on standby), a second special symbol pending display 1600d (second special symbol (state in which variable display is on standby) is possible. Specifically, for the first special symbol reservation display 1600c, the number of reservations is displayed as a circle at the lower left of the effect display device 1600, and for the second special symbol reservation display 1600d, the number of reservations is displayed as a circle. The amount is displayed as □ at the lower right corner of the effect display device 1600. Then, when starting the variable display of the special symbols that are being displayed pending, the pending displays 1600c and 1600d for that start are erased. However, the special symbols pending display 1600c and 1600d may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol being displayed on hold until the variable display of that special symbol ends. .

Further, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a status display indicating the current gaming status is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and "normal" corresponding to the low probability non time saving state is displayed.

In addition, as a period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 500th variation display of the special symbol, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, At the upper part of the effect display device 1600, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state. In this example, it is the time when the special symbol fluctuation display stops for the 500th time, and a relief notice image A called "500 fluctuations" is displayed, which corresponds to the fact that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 times. . In this way, by executing the count effect, the player can play the game while looking forward to the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state approaching 600.

Specifically, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, a symbol confirmation command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby stopping the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the effect display device 1600. When the number of variations of the special symbol in the probability state reaches 500 times, when transmitting the symbol confirmation command, a relief count command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the symbol confirmation command. This relief count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is sent until the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command has been received, and is used to store the number of times the relief count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500. By recognizing this and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501. In this way, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is It is possible to determine how many times the special symbol has fluctuated in the low probability state, based on the determined number of fluctuations, when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol 1600a in the effect display device 1600 is stopped. It is possible to execute a count performance that notifies the user. In addition, the relief count command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but every time a symbol confirmation command is sent while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. A different command may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving the relief count command 1, and by receiving the relief count command 2, It is now possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state, such as recognizing that the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501, and the same counting performance as above. becomes possible.

As shown in FIGS. 197(B) and (C), as a period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 597th special symbol variation display, the decorative symbol 1600a ( Each time the variable display of the special symbol) is stopped, a stop symbol of a decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of times the special symbol has varied in a low probability state is stopped and displayed as a count performance. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 597th, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, "597" for relief notice is selected as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a. A symbol combination is selected and set, and a stop symbol is displayed instead of a normal missed stop symbol. This symbol combination for relief notice can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect is executed (out of reach), the above-mentioned reach effect can be displayed. Once the out-of-reach symbols (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols of "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; out-of-reach symbols) are displayed as a result of variable display. Although it is displayed, it is then changed to a symbol combination for relief notice such as "597". In addition, from the 597th special symbol fluctuation display, the upper part of the effect display device 1600 indicates that "help mode", which is executed when the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 600 times, is about to begin. ``Help is on the way!'' Relief preview image B is displayed.

In addition, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, a special symbol that will execute a variable display in which the lottery result is determined to be a loss as a variable display of the 600th special symbol. If there is a hold, a special symbol hold display 1600c indicating that the special symbol is on hold will be displayed as the first special symbol hold display 1600c (Fig. 197). (C) to (G) (shown at the bottom left of the face) are displayed. As a result, during the period before the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600, the special symbol variation display corresponding to the special symbol pending display is executed, and the system enters "help mode". The player can know in advance that there will be a rush.

As shown in FIGS. 197(D) and (E), when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 598th, the decorative symbol 1600a is A symbol combination for relief notice called "598" is selected and set as a stop symbol, and is displayed as a stop symbol instead of a normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197(F) and (G), when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, the decorative symbol 1600a is A symbol combination for relief notice called "599" is selected and set as a stop symbol, and is displayed as a stop symbol instead of a normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197(H) and (I), when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th, the decorative symbol 1600a is As the stop symbol, a symbol combination for relief notice called "600" is selected and set, and is displayed as a stop symbol in place of the normal stop symbol. Furthermore, when the 600th variation display of the special symbol is stopped, a relief suggestion image "CHANCE!" is displayed at the top of the effect display device 1600, indicating that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times. are doing.

In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot during the period from when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state exceeds the 500th time until it reaches the 600th time (while the counting effect is being executed), , the counting performance ends with the fluctuating display of the special symbol that became the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 197(J), when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, control is made to low probability time saving state B and a dedicated time saving state is provided. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, until the special symbol is displayed 700 times after that (the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1300). The period during which the control is controlled to low probability time saving state B (until reaching 700 times) is controlled to low probability time saving state B (fluctuating display of special symbols 700 times) is called "help mode L". It is called. In the production display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) stops for the 600th time, a relief message "Entering Help Mode L!!" is displayed to notify that entering "Help Mode L" is to be entered. The confirmed image is being displayed. In FIG. 197(J), the face holding displayed at the bottom left of FIGS. 197(C) to (G) is moved and displayed next to the text display "Entering Help Mode L!!" , clearly indicates that face hold was compatible with "Help Mode L".

As shown in FIG. 197(K), after entering the "help mode L", if there is no special symbol pending, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) does not start immediately, and the production display At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light intensity adjustment bar indicating the currently set light intensity level are displayed. In addition, the volume adjustment bar allows you to change the memory display by operating the volume button to change the volume level, and the light intensity adjustment bar allows you to change the light intensity level by operating the light intensity button. It is possible to change the memory display accordingly. Further, the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed while the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is being displayed in a variable manner or while the decorative pattern (special pattern) is being displayed in a non-variable manner. In this way, after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) has stopped, if the special pattern is not held and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the light intensity By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and light intensity level can be changed during the period.

In addition, after entering the "Help mode L", a "Help mode A rescue image called "L in progress" is displayed. In addition, in the low probability time saving state B, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning hole 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 It displays an arrow bar that says ``Left hit!'' that instructs you to aim. This relief image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, and are not hidden (or This is to prevent the player from accidentally leaving his/her seat despite being in the low-probability time-saving state B. Furthermore, the above-mentioned relief preview image B that says "Help is coming!" and the relief suggestion image that says "CHANCE!" will continue to be displayed if the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special symbol) is not executed. These images are also continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the volume adjustment bar and light intensity adjustment bar described above, and even though the low probability time saving state B is near, the player cannot This ensures that the person does not leave his/her seat by mistake.

As shown in Figure 197 (L), after entering the "Help Mode L", no special symbols are held and until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, entries into various winning slots are allowed. If there are no balls, a demonstration performance (demonstration) introducing the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the performance display device 1600. At the end of the demonstration performance, an "immersion prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescue image and arrow bar can continue to be displayed during the demonstration performance, and will continue to be displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the above-mentioned demonstration performance or "addiction prevention display". , the player is prevented from leaving his/her seat by mistake despite being in the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the relief preview image B that says "Help is on the way!" and the relief suggestion image that says "CHANCE!" can be displayed continuously during the demonstration performance, and these images can also be used during the demonstration performance or "Immersion." "Preventive display" continues to be displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) to prevent players from accidentally leaving their seats even though low probability time saving state B is approaching. .

As shown in FIG. 197(M), after entering the "help mode L", if a ball enters various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, a variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed. Ru. In addition, during the execution of the demonstration performance, if a ball enters any of the various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, only the demonstration performance will end at that point, and the rescue image and arrow bar will continue to be displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 197(N), when the 700th fluctuating display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is executed during the execution of the "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B ( When the total number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), the last decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) during execution of "help mode L" is displayed on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. A relief completion image that says "Last help!" is displayed to notify that the display is variable.

As shown in FIG. 197(O), after the execution of "Help mode L", that is, after the 700th variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special symbol) stops during the control of the low probability time saving state B (low probability state After the total number of changes of the special symbols is 1300th (after the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) stops), the low probability time saving state B is ended and the transition to the low probability non time saving state is performed, so the production display At the upper left of the device 1600, "Normal" is displayed to notify that the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state that has passed through "Help mode L". Further, in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image "Help L: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be recognized from the outside that "Help mode L" has been executed once. . In addition, during the execution of "Help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, before the 700th fluctuating display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special symbol) is executed, the lottery result is changed to "Jackpot". '', the low probability time saving state B is ended and the game state corresponding to the type of "jackpot" is entered, so the "help mode L" is ended at that point.

(Restrictions on counting effects when the ball enters the second starting gate)
As mentioned above, the period before the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of changes other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 600 is the 500th to 600th special symbol. Regarding the fluctuating display, each time the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (special symbols) is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated in the low probability state. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the second special symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed variably in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the entry. In addition, at the time when the second special symbol fluctuation display is stopped, the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the execution is performed so as not to increase the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count performance. . Restrictions on the count performance when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 will be described below.

In this example, in the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a, the ball entrances into which the game ball B can enter are variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, and second starting opening 2005. , a first grand prize opening 2006 is provided. Among these, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 are always open at the top, so it is possible for the ball to enter either of them in a low probability non-time saving state. However, with respect to the first starting port 2004, the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a is accepted with a high probability, but with respect to the second starting port 2005, the game ball B released into the gaming area 5a is accepted with a high probability. There is no possibility that the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 into the game area 5a will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will enter the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005. In addition, the second starting port 2005 has the same shape as the general prize winning port 2001 and is inconspicuous compared to the first starting port 2004, so in a low probability non-time saving state, the second starting port 2005 is There is no aiming for the ball to enter the second starting port 2005, and even if the ball enters the second starting port 2005, it is difficult to notice.

Furthermore, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, respectively. The variable display of the special symbols is executed in the order in which the balls enter the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005.

In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery of the first special symbol is a loss, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the effect display device 1600 displays the first special symbol. A variable display of decorative patterns is being executed. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is set to about 5 to 10 seconds (in the case of a miss without a reach). In other words, in a low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery of the first special symbol is a loss, the first special symbol (decoration) is drawn in a manner that makes it easy to recognize the entry. A variable display of symbols) is being executed.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is a miss or a small hit, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, but the effect display device 1600, the execution of the variable display of decorative patterns is restricted. Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to about 0.1 seconds (in the case of a miss without a reach), which is extremely shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Furthermore, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is output from the speaker, whereas during the variable display of the second special symbol, , the effect sound accompanying the fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600 is not output from the speaker. In other words, in a low probability non-time saving state, when a ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the second special symbol is entered in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the entry. A changing display of symbols is being executed. Thereby, in the low probability non-time saving state, it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005, and it can be made difficult to grasp how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state. In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 is not restricted. , similarly to the first special symbol, a fluctuation accompanied by a reach, and an output of a performance sound accompanying a fluctuation display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 are executed.

In this example, as described above, when the special symbols stop changing, the main control board 1310 sends a symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the symbol confirmation command, so that the production display device 1600 However, when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times, when the symbol confirmation command is sent, a message is sent from the main control board 1310 in addition to the symbol confirmation command. A rescue count command is being sent to the peripheral control board 1510. This rescue count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted until the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, by counting the number of times the relief count command is received, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is grasped, and the number of times the special symbol changes in the effect display device 1600 is determined. When the fluctuating display is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated in the low probability state.

Here, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating, but when the first special symbol stops fluctuating, the main relief count command is displayed. A relief count command A is sent from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the rescue number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command A has been received, thereby determining how many times the first special symbol has changed in the low probability state. When the variable display of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, but when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops, the main control is executed as a rescue count command. A relief count command B is sent from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the rescue number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command B is received, thereby determining how many times the second special symbol changes in the low probability state. However, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is compared with the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol. I'm trying to cause some misalignment. In other words, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 while the count performance is being executed, the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief counter on the main control board 1310 and the special symbol notified by the count performance on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of variations in the symbol does not match. In this way, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 while the counting performance is being executed, the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the counting performance is increased. Since this does not occur, it becomes difficult to notice that the ball enters the second starting port 2005, and it becomes difficult to grasp from the count performance how many times the special symbol actually changes.

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command B has been received, and for the number of times the rescue count command B has been received, the count performance is performed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count performance. It is executed to add to the number of changes in the special symbol that is notified. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol fluctuation display during the execution of the count performance, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count performance is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times as the predetermined timing. times, 596 times are set, and when these times are reached, the number of times relief count command B is received against the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect (difference accumulated without addition) It is executed to add . In other words, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520, the number of balls entering the second starting port 2005 during the display of the 500th to 520th special symbol fluctuation is the "relief count". This corresponds to the number of times command B was received (differences accumulated without addition), and the number of times is added to the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count performance. As a result, the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so the user can pay attention to the count effect with anticipation. Note that the number of times the relief count command B has been received may be calculated by calculating the difference, or a counter that separately counts only the number of times the relief count command B has been received may be provided, and the value can be calculated at predetermined timings. It may also be a method of referencing and clearing.

In the above, when the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is the predetermined number of times as a predetermined timing, the relief count command B is received for the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, predetermined timings include when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of times relief count command B is received reaches a predetermined number. This may be the case, for example, when it is determined by lottery to add up the number of times the relief count command B has been received, or when a predetermined error or notification is resolved.

FIG. 198 shows a specific example of a performance when a ball enters the second starting port 2005 during execution of a count performance.

As shown in FIG. 198(A), as a period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 500th variation display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) Every time the variable display is stopped, a count effect is executed at the top of the effect display device 1600 to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. In this example, it is the time when the special symbol variation display stops for the 505th time, and a relief preview image A called "505 variation" is displayed, which corresponds to the fact that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 505 times. . In addition, when a ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a), the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol (the second The second special symbol pending display 1600d is preferably displayed in a less conspicuous manner than the first special symbol pending display 1600c. . Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005 while the counting performance is being performed. Further, from the viewpoint of making it more difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during execution of the count performance, the second special symbol hold display 1600d may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

As shown in FIGS. 198(B) and (C), during the execution of the count performance, as the 506th special symbol fluctuation display, the second special symbol fluctuation display based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is displayed. When executing, the decorative pattern 1600a is not displayed in a variable manner until 0.1 second has elapsed as the variation time of the second special symbol, and the decorative pattern 1600a continues to display a stopped state. There is. However, regarding the identification pattern 1600b displayed on the upper right side of the effect display device 1600, the variable display is executed until 0.1 second passes as the variation time of the second special symbol. When such a variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, it is executed so as not to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count performance. In other words, although the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 506th (relief number counter = 506), the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect remains "505 variations" and does not change. A state is reached in which there is "1" unadded (difference) variation.

As shown in FIGS. 198(D) and (E), during the execution of the count performance, as the 507th special symbol variable display, the first special symbol is displayed variablely based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004. When executed, when the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops changing, it is executed so as to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count performance. That is, although the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 507th (relief frequency counter = 507), "506 variations" is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count performance. Here, too, a state in which "1" unadded (difference) variation exists is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 198(F), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 as the 521st variable display of the special symbol during the execution of the count effect, When the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops changing, it is added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In this example, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 521st (relief frequency counter = 521), "519 fluctuations" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified in the count effect. . In other words, here, there are "2" unadded (difference) fluctuations.

As shown in FIGS. 198(G) and (H), during the execution of the count effect, as the 522nd special symbol variable display, the first special symbol is displayed variablely based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004. When executed, an increase effect image "Increase chance!" is displayed at the top of the effect display device 1600, indicating that it is a chance to increase the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect. When the number of balls entering the second starting port 2005 is 2 during the special symbol fluctuation display where the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is the 500th to 520th time (not added). If there is a variation of "2" (difference), when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, +2 will be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count performance. In other words, while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 522nd (relief frequency counter = 522), the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect is displayed as "520 variations + 2 variations!" Therefore, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols will match, and the unadded (difference) fluctuation will be in a state of "0".

As shown in FIGS. 198 (I) and (J), during the execution of the count performance, as the 523rd special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol is displayed as a fluctuation display based on the ball entering the first starting hole 2004. When executed, when the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops changing, it is executed so as to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In other words, while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 523rd (relief frequency counter = 523), the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count performance is displayed as "523 variations". .

As mentioned above in detail, during the execution of the count performance, during the 597th to 600th variable display of the special symbol, each time the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, the count performance is performed in a low probability state. A stop symbol (relief notice image B) of a decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of times the special symbol has changed is displayed in a stopped state. During such a period, even when performing a variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed, and the variation of the special symbol in a low probability state is The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a indicating the number of times is not displayed. However, except when performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a (relief preview image B) indicating how many times the special symbol has actually fluctuated in the low probability state I am trying to stop the display at . For example, during the count production, among the 597th to 600th special symbol fluctuation display, only the 598th special symbol fluctuation display is the second special symbol fluctuation display, and the other special symbol fluctuation displays When is the variation display of the first special symbol, "597" → "599" is displayed as the stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state. ” → “600”, and the count performance is progressed with the exception of the 598th special symbol variable display (second special symbol variable display). Furthermore, if during the execution of the count performance, all of the 597th to 600th special symbol fluctuation displays are the second special symbol fluctuation displays, what is the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the low probability state? The stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating that the relief symbol 1600a is not displayed at all, and the relief confirmation image as shown in FIG. 197 (J) is displayed in the 600th special symbol fluctuation display. . In such a case, it is possible to give the player another surprise in which "help mode L" suddenly starts, and to avoid a decrease in interest even if the count effect is not executed. can.

In addition, as described above, while the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is being displayed in a variable manner or while the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is being displayed in a non-variable manner, the volume level can be changed by operating the volume button, or the light intensity button can be pressed. It is possible to change the light intensity level by operating it. In this regard, if there is no special symbol pending after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) has stopped, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is not being executed, and when the volume button or light intensity button is operated. Then, the operation sound is output from the speaker. On the other hand, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during execution of the count effect, even though the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed. First, when you operate the volume button or light intensity button, the operation sound is restricted from being output from the speaker. As a result, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the operation sound when operating the volume button or light intensity button is used to control the game. The sound produced inside is not obstructed. In addition, when the volume button or light intensity button is operated while the decorative pattern 1600a is being displayed non-variably, it is checked whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on whether the operation sound is output from the speaker or not. You can also.

In this example, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the variable display of each special symbol is executed in the order in which the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. Specifically, the second starting port 2005 is arranged so that a large number of balls enter the ball in a low probability non-time saving state. At this time, the ball enters the second starting port 2005 frequently, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is extremely long in the low probability non-time saving state. (for example, 180 seconds). In other words, since the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is not executed frequently in a low probability non-time saving state, the first starting port 2004 is The mainstream of the game is to execute a variable display of special symbols. In such a configuration, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the effect display device 1600 is restricted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. When the game is stopped, the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. In addition, the number of changes in the second special symbol that was not notified in the count performance is added to the number of changes in the special symbol that is notified in the count performance at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count performance. ing. Thereby, effects similar to those described above can be achieved. After a special jackpot game (a jackpot that is controlled to a non-time saving state after a jackpot game) or after the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 600 changes after turning on the power), the second starting port The variation time of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is shortened, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is frequently executed. As a result, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), it is possible to transition from the non-time saving state to the time saving state, but a special jackpot game (jackpot After the game (after a jackpot that is controlled to a non-time saving state) or after the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 600 fluctuations after turning on the power), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600 times. (Relief count counter = 600) can be easily approached, and the game can be continued with anticipation.

In addition, in the above, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 0/100, and in other gaming states (high probability time saving state) , low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, and low-probability time-saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of a normal symbol will be a "normal win" is set to 100/100. The probability that the lottery result of a normal symbol will be a "normal win" in a normal lottery in a low probability non-time saving state and a high probability non-time saving state is 1/100, and in other gaming states (high probability In the normal lottery in the time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, and low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal win" may be set to 100/100. . In this case, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the variable prize opening 2003 in the low probability non-time saving state increases slightly, and the frequency of sending the relief count command B increases (accompanied by the ball entering the second starting opening 2005). (Relief count command B is sent not only when the variable display of the second special symbol stops, but also when the variable display of the second special symbol stops due to the ball entering the variable winning hole 2003). , it is possible to further increase the range of addition in the performance in which the number of times the rescue count command B has been received is added at a predetermined timing, and the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, for games where there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the variable prize opening 2003 in a low probability non-time saving state, it is not necessarily necessary to provide the second starting opening 2005 whose upper part is always open, and An effect may be performed in which only the relief count command B caused by the ball entering the mouth 2003 is used and the number of times it is received is added at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, in the above, the gate 2002, the variable prize opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening 2005 are provided in the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a, but the gate 2002, The variable prize opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2005 may be provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that a shot ball or the like that the player accidentally hits to the right during normal times (low probability non-time saving state) may enter the variable prize opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2005. , the relief count command B is sent even when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol due to such ball entry stops, and as described above, the effect is added at a predetermined timing by the number of times the relief count command B is received. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the same gaming effect as described above.

In addition, in the above, when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, causing a discrepancy with the actual number of variations of the special symbol. , it is desirable to make the player aware of the discrepancy as much as possible. In view of this, it is desirable that the player be configured so that it is difficult for the player to see the general data display provided in the game hall when the player is seated in the normal posture in front of the pachinko machine 1. . For example, since a general data display installed in a game hall is located above the pachinko machine 1, the door frame top unit 450 of the pachinko machine 1 is decorated so that the upper side cannot be seen through, and the It is preferable to design the amount of protrusion toward the player side (front side) to such an extent that the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 blocks the player's line of sight looking up, making it difficult to see the data display. In addition, if the door frame top unit 450 is made to protrude to the extent that the data display becomes difficult to see, it may become difficult to operate the attendant call button provided on a general data display, so the present pachinko machine 1 It is desirable to provide an attendant call button on the door frame 3 and to be able to transmit its operation signal to the data display via the external terminal board 558.

(Modified example)
Next, a modified example that partially differs from the above-mentioned production example will be described below. In the modified example, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of changes of special symbols in a low probability state (the number of changes other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is calculated against the relief counter. When the number of changes of the special symbol in that low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), it is controlled to low probability time saving state B, but In contrast, it is possible to count not only when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but also when a special symbol is displayed in a non-variable manner.

In the modified example as well, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, a symbol confirmation command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby stopping the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, but in a low probability state. When the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500, a relief count command A is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol confirmation command when transmitting the symbol confirmation command. This rescue count command A is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, until the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command A has been received, and thereby stores the number of times the relief count command A has been received. In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, by counting the number of times the relief count command A is received, by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500. By recognizing that the special symbol has changed and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501. It is possible to grasp how many times the special symbol has changed, and based on this grasped number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count performance is increased when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 is stopped. It is considered to be executable.

In the modified example, when a specific condition such as a ball entering a winning hole (for example, the general winning hole 2001) that does not execute the variable display of special symbols is satisfied, the main control board 1310 does not execute the variable display of the special symbols. , the relief count counter is counted up. In other words, in the modified example, since the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also not executed, and only when the specific condition is met, the number of times the special symbol varies is counted by the relief counter. It makes it possible to upload. At this time, a symbol confirmation command is not transmitted, but a relief count command B is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. This relief count command B is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a specific condition is satisfied while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbol has changed using the rescue counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts up the number of times the rescue count command B has been received. We try to understand whether it is the number of changes, but when certain conditions are met, we do not increase the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect, causing a discrepancy with the actual number of changes of the special symbol. That's what I do. In other words, when a specific condition is met during the execution of the count performance, the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief counter on the main control board 1310 and the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count performance on the peripheral control board 1510 and will not match. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes in the special symbol is counted up by the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310, but the number of changes in the special symbol notified in the count effect is Since it does not increase, it becomes difficult to notice that the specific condition is satisfied, and from the count performance, it can be made difficult to grasp the number of times the special symbol has changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310.

In the above, the specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the winning hole that does not display the variable display of special symbols (for example, general winning hole 2001), but there are other conditions related to the ball entering the winning hole. Instead, the specific condition may be satisfied when it is determined by lottery to count up the relief counter.

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command B has been received, and for the number of times the rescue count command B has been received, the count performance is performed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count performance. It is executed to add to the number of changes in the special symbol that is notified. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol fluctuation display during the execution of the count performance, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count performance is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times as the predetermined timing. times, 596 times are set, and when these times are reached, the number of times relief count command B is received against the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect (difference accumulated without addition) It is executed to add . In other words, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520, the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol is "the number of times the relief count command B was received". minute (difference accumulated without addition)", and the number of times will be added to the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so the user can pay attention to the count effect with anticipation. Note that the number of times the relief count command B has been received may be calculated by calculating the difference, or a counter that separately counts only the number of times the relief count command B has been received may be provided, and the value can be calculated at predetermined timings. It may also be a method of referencing and clearing.

In the above, when the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number of times as a predetermined timing, the relief count command B is received for the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, predetermined timings include when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of times relief count command B is received reaches a predetermined number. This may be the case, for example, when it is determined by lottery to add up the number of times the relief count command B has been received, or when a predetermined error or notification is resolved.

When the special symbols and decorative symbols stop changing, the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310 counts up the number of variations of the special symbols, and the relief is sent to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 558. Information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol by the number counter is output. Similarly, when a specific condition is met, the number of changes in the special symbol is counted up by the rescue number counter on the main control board 1310, and the number of changes in the special symbol by the number of rescue counter is sent to the outside via the external terminal board 558. Information about the number of fluctuations is output. As a result, when a specific condition is met, the number of times the special symbol changes by the relief counter is counted up, but the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is executed so as not to increase. , From the count performance, it is not possible to know how many times the special symbol has changed due to the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310, but from the outside, it is possible to know how many times the special symbol has changed due to the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310. It is possible to grasp the number of times. In other words, by checking whether the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 has increased abnormally, the hall manager can check whether an act of fraudulently trying to establish a specific condition is being carried out. It is possible to monitor whether the

Furthermore, if a special abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, such as when a magnet or vibration is detected, the progress of the game is stopped. In other words, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, the special symbols and decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and the main control board 131 The information before a special abnormality occurs (the number of changes in the special symbol by the rescue counter in the main control board 1310) is retained without counting up the number of variations in the special symbol by the rescue counter in the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when a special abnormality occurs, even if the specific conditions are met, the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the number of changes before the special abnormality occurs. Information (the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310) is held. Thereby, when a special abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent an attempt to illegally count up the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310.

[Example of production related to immediate short hit]
In this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the lottery result is "immediate short winning", control is performed to the low probability time saving state C. Here, a specific example of performance until the lottery result becomes an "immediate short hit" will be described with reference to FIG. 199.

As shown in FIG. 199(A), when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the center of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1600a are displayed in a variable manner until the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern command elapses, and the display is stopped in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern. do. As the stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a, a pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when a variable pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variable display of the identification pattern 1600b, which is smaller and less conspicuous than the decorative pattern, is executed at the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, O and × are displayed in a variable manner as the identification symbol 1600b, and either O or × is displayed in a stopped manner. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, a circle is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short win), and an x is displayed when the lottery result is a loss. In addition, apart from this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the identification pattern 1600b may be a stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot or small hit. 〇, if the lottery result is an immediate short win or a loss, an x may be stopped and displayed to make it difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short win from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, a first special symbol pending display 1600c (state in which the first special symbol variable display is on standby), a second special symbol pending display 1600d (second special symbol (state in which variable display is on standby) is possible. Specifically, for the first special symbol reservation display 1600c, the number of reservations is displayed as a circle at the lower left of the effect display device 1600, and for the second special symbol reservation display 1600d, the number of reservations is displayed as ○. The amount is displayed as □ at the lower right corner of the effect display device 1600. Then, when starting the variable display of the special symbols that are being displayed pending, the pending displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are erased. However, the special symbols pending display 1600c and 1600d may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol that is being held pending until the variable display of that special symbol ends. .

Further, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a status display indicating the current gaming status is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and "normal" corresponding to the low probability non time saving state is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 199(B) and (C), during the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special symbol), a special symbol enters the first starting hole 2004 and the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit". If there is a reservation, a special symbol reservation display 1600c indicating that the lottery result is a special symbol with an "immediate short hit" is displayed (FIG. 199(B)) , (C). In addition, when a special symbol is on hold, a comment in a speech bubble saying ``Shall I help you?'' is displayed, making it easier to notice that the lottery result is a special symbol on hold that will result in an ``immediate short win.'' . As a result, the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending display of the special symbol is executed in the period before the variable display of the special symbol that causes the lottery result to be an "immediate short hit" is started. You can know in advance that you will enter "help mode". In addition, in this example, a special symbol suspension display (at the bottom left of FIGS. 197(C) to (G) 199 (displayed face pending) and a special symbol pending display (displayed at the bottom left of Figures 199 (B) and (C) A common "face hold" image is used, but depending on the presence or absence of the comment "Shall I help you?" in the speech bubble, I wonder if it is intended to be a "variable display of the 600th special symbol". It is now possible to distinguish whether it is intended as an "immediate short hit" or not. In addition, if it is possible to more reliably distinguish between the intended "600th special symbol fluctuation display" and the "immediate short hit", it would be possible to distinguish even if it is a reserved image of a common symbol. It is preferable that the color patterns are different or that the reserved images have different shapes.

In this example, as a specific example of displaying a special symbol reservation indicating that a special symbol that is an "immediate short hit" is reserved, when the ball enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, By transmitting a preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits preliminary judgment information (whether or not it will be a jackpot, small hit, immediate short hit, and if it will be a jackpot, it will be a jackpot. If it is a small hit, it is a small win type, if it is an immediate short hit, it is an immediate short hit type, if it is a jackpot, a small hit, or if it is not an immediate short hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. It specifies whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect, or the type of game effect to be executed (type of variation pattern, etc.). If it is specified as advance judgment information that there will be an immediate short hit, when displaying the hold display, a special symbol will be displayed with a special symbol that will make the lottery result an "immediate short hit". A look-ahead effect is being performed that suggests that the event is on hold. In addition, regarding the pending display of special symbols, the symbols may be different depending on the type of immediate short hit. In addition, regarding the pending display of special symbols, it is possible to display them as advance judgment information not only when it is specified that there will be an immediate short hit, but also when there will be no immediate short hit. It may also be possible to perform a fake effect that does not result in an immediate short hit even if a pending display of a symbol is displayed. In addition, when displaying a pending display of a special symbol after specifying that there will be an immediate short hit as preliminary judgment information, the pending display of a special symbol may be displayed immediately on the effect display device 1600. , After once displaying a normal pending image (such as the above-mentioned "○" pending image) on the effect display device 1600, a predetermined change effect accompanied by sound, vibration, character image, etc. is performed at a predetermined timing, and such a change effect is performed. After that, the normal reserved image may be changed to a reserved display of a special design. In addition, if it is not specified that there will be an immediate short hit as advance judgment information, a normal pending image (such as the above-mentioned “○” pending image) will be displayed, and then a sound, vibration, or character will be displayed at a predetermined timing. It is also possible to perform a predetermined change effect accompanied by an image, etc., and then perform a fake effect in which the normal hold image is maintained as it is (it is not changed to a hold display of a special pattern) after such change effect.

As mentioned above, if it is specified as advance judgment information that there will be an immediate short hit, when displaying the pending display, it will be indicated that the lottery result is a hold for a special symbol that will be an "immediate short hit". However, such look-ahead effects that suggest an "immediate short hit" are restricted from being executed during a certain period. Specifically, in a low-probability non-time saving state, if an immediate short hit occurs, the special symbol will be displayed fluctuating until it reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 20, 40, or 100 times). During this period, the control is controlled to a low probability time saving state C, but after the immediate short winning symbol corresponding to such an immediate short winning stops, the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests an "immediate short winning" is restricted. . Here, as gaming states other than the low probability non-time saving state, there is a high probability non-time saving state, a high probability time saving state, a low probability time saving state A, a low probability time saving state B, and a low probability time saving state C. In this case, it is set as an "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" which is not controlled to low probability time saving state C. In other words, in the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol corresponding to the immediate short winning is stopped, although there is a possibility that the lottery result will be an "immediate short winning", the lottery result will be an "immediate short winning". As a result, control to the low probability time saving state C is not performed again. In addition, if an instant short hit occurs during the instant short hit symbol invalid period, in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol, while the production In the variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 1600, the immediate short winning symbol is not stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol, but a symbol different from the immediate short winning symbol (in this example, the losing symbol) is stopped and displayed. There is. In this regard, in this example, even if it is specified as advance judgment information that an immediate short hit will occur after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, it suggests an "immediate short hit". By not executing the look-ahead performance, it is not known that the immediate short hit will be invalidated during the immediate short hit symbol invalidation period, and the feeling of loss due to the instant short hit being invalidated can be reduced.

In addition, game states other than the low probability non-time saving state set as the "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" which is not controlled by the low probability time saving state C (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state In the probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C), for the hold of the first starting opening 2004 which will be displayed in a variable manner after the final variable display, a look-ahead effect that suggests an "immediate short hit" is executed. It is restricted. For example, when controlled to a low probability time saving state C of 100 times in response to an immediate short hit A, four game balls are placed in the first starting port 2004 during the variable display of the special symbol in the final (100th) time. Even if there is a hold of a special symbol whose lottery result is an ``immediate short hit'' when the ball enters the ball, an ``immediate short hit'' will be applied to all holds that occur during the fluctuation display of the final round. I try not to perform any suggestive look-ahead effects. However, regarding the suspension of the first starting opening 2004, which will be displayed in a variable manner after the final variable display, the variable display will be performed after the "immediate short winning symbol invalidation period" ends. Although the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests an "immediate short hit" is restricted, if an immediate short hit occurs after the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" ends, the special symbol fluctuation display on the function display unit 1400 , the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol, and in the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the production display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol (a combination of "547" symbols) is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a. ) shall be stopped and displayed. As a result, during the "immediate short winning symbol invalidation period", look-ahead effects that suggest "immediate short winning" are not executed, but after the "immediate short winning symbol invalidation period" ends, normal gaming The player can be made aware of the occurrence of an immediate short win in the same way as when an immediate short win occurs.

In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state, if it becomes an immediate short hit, until the special symbol fluctuates display reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), Although the state is controlled to be in the low probability time saving state C, after the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the state is shifted to the low probability non time saving state. Then, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, and after the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times, if it is specified that there will be an immediate short hit as advance judgment information, "immediate short hit" is displayed. It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect that suggests a short hit. As a result, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, attention will be paid to whether or not a look-ahead effect that suggests an "immediate short hit" will be executed. can be done.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, when it is specified as advance judgment information that it will be an immediate short hit, when displaying the hold display 1600c, 1600d, the lottery result will be a hold of a special symbol that will be an "immediate short hit". In addition to executing a pre-reading effect that suggests a certain thing, if it is specified that there will be a jackpot as advance judgment information, a special symbol that will make the lottery result a "jackpot" when displaying the pending display 1600c, 1600d. A look-ahead effect is being performed that suggests that the event is on hold. After the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests an "immediate short hit" is restricted, while the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests a "jackpot" is restricted. I haven't. In this way, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, the entire look-ahead effect is not restricted, but only the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests an "immediate short hit" is restricted. , it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to whether or not the look-ahead effect will be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 199(D) and (E), when the lottery result is an "immediate short hit" and the decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, when it stops, the decorative symbol 1600a has a stop symbol of "547 ” symbol (a specific symbol among the missing symbols), and the symbol accompanying the number symbol is stopped and displayed so that it becomes the same symbol.

As shown in FIG. 199(F), when the lottery result is "immediate short win" in the low probability non-time saving state, control is made to the low probability time saving state C and time saving is granted. In this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit", the control is controlled to the low probability time saving state C until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, The period during which control is performed to such a low probability time saving state C is called "help mode S". In the effect display device 1600, when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) whose lottery result is an "immediate short hit" stops, the "help mode" is set to notify that the "help mode S" will be entered. S-entering!!'' is displayed as a relief confirmation image. The predetermined number of times is 100 times if the lottery result is "Immediate short win A", 40 times if the lottery result is "Immediate short win B", and 40 times if the lottery result is "Immediate short win C". is set to 20 times.

As shown in FIG. 199(G), after entering the "help mode S", if there is no special symbol pending, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) does not start immediately, and the production display At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light intensity adjustment bar indicating the currently set light intensity level are displayed. In addition, the volume adjustment bar allows you to change the memory display by operating the volume button to change the volume level, and the light intensity adjustment bar allows you to change the light intensity level by operating the light intensity button. It is possible to change the memory display accordingly. Further, while the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is being displayed in a variable manner or while the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is being displayed in a non-variable manner, the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed. In this way, after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) has stopped, if the special pattern is not held and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the light intensity By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and light intensity level can be changed during the period.

In addition, after entering the "Help mode S", the "Help mode A rescue image "S in progress" is displayed. In addition, in the low probability time saving state C, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning hole 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 It displays an arrow bar that says ``Left hit!'' that instructs you to shoot. This relief image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, and are not hidden (or (non-overlapping) display position to prevent the player from leaving his/her seat by mistake despite being in the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in Figure 199 (H), after entering the "Help Mode S", no special symbols are held and until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, entries into various winning slots are allowed. If there are no balls, a demonstration performance (demonstration) introducing the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the performance display device 1600. At the end of the demonstration performance, an "immersion prevention display (not shown)" is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescue image and arrow bar can continue to be displayed during the demonstration performance, and will continue to be displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the above-mentioned demonstration performance or "addiction prevention display". , the player is prevented from leaving his/her seat by mistake despite being in the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199(I), after entering the "help mode S", if a ball enters various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, a variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed. Ru. In addition, during the execution of the demonstration performance, if a ball enters any of the various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, only the demonstration performance will end at that point, and the rescue image and arrow bar will continue to be displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 199 (J), during the execution of "help mode S", that is, during the control of low probability time saving state C, when the predetermined number of times (for example, when the lottery result is "immediate short win A") When the 100th variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is executed, the last variation of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) during the execution of "help mode S" is displayed at the upper right of the effect display device 1600. A relief completion image that says ``Last help!'' is displayed to notify you that this is the display.

As shown in FIG. 199(K), after the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the predetermined number of times (for example, when the lottery result is "immediate short win A", 100 After the variable display of the decorative symbols (special symbols) stops, the low-probability time-saving state C ends and the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving state occurs. is displaying "Normal" to notify that it is in a low probability non-time saving state after passing through "Help Mode S". Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image "Help S: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be recognized from the outside that "Help mode S" has been executed once. . It should be noted that during the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the lottery result is " In the case of a "jackpot", the low probability time saving state C is terminated and the game state is shifted to the one corresponding to the type of "jackpot", so the "help mode S" is terminated at that point. .

[About count suppression period]
In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. When the number of times (repair counter=600) is reached, control is made to the low probability time saving state B. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, only the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of changes in the special symbol is not counted. It is set as a "count suppression period" that does not occur. On the other hand, if it is a low probability state, the number of changes in the special symbol is counted regardless of whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state, but some of the low probability non-time saving states is set as a "count suppression period" in which the number of changes in special symbols is not counted. The count suppression period set in some of the low probability non-time saving states among such low probability states will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a time chart showing the count suppression period.

First, during the count validity period, when a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of special symbols is executed in a low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up and updated so that the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to be in the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, during the count suppression period, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of special symbols is executed in a low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 Since the count is not counted up, the relief count counter is updated so as not to approach 600, which would result in control to the low probability time saving state B.

Furthermore, a plurality of types of count suppression periods are provided. Regarding the count suppression period A, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 The counter is maintained without counting up. In addition, regarding the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 in the low probability non-time saving state and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief on the main control board 1310 The number of times counter is counted down and updated so as to move away from the number of relief times counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. In other words, for count suppression period B, the count suppression period B moves away from the relief count counter = 600 that would result in control to the low probability time saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the relief count count = 600 after that, so It is also an unfavorable period.

Further, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period, the start condition for the count suppression period is satisfied, and the count suppression period is generated. In this example, when it is determined by a lottery to generate a count suppression period, the count suppression period is suddenly generated by not notifying the user to that effect. Therefore, at the start of the count suppression period, it is difficult to notice whether the count suppression period has started. However, when it is determined by lottery to generate a count suppression period, a notification to that effect may be provided. In addition, in this example, the start condition for the count suppression period is satisfied when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period in the low probability non-time saving state, but in addition to this, for example, In the probability non-time saving state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the start condition for the count suppression period may be satisfied.

Further, after the start of the count suppression period, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the count suppression period is satisfied, and the count suppression period is ended. However, in addition to this, for example, after the start of the count suppression period, when it is determined by lottery to end the count suppression period, the condition for ending the count suppression period may be satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 200, during the count validity period in the low probability non-time saving state, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of the special symbol is executed, the main control board 1310 The relief counter is incrementing. In this example, when executing the variable display A to C of the special symbols, the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter changes from 450 to 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count validity period in the low probability non-time saving state, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of special symbols is executed, a signal is sent to the pachinko machine via the external terminal section 558. Information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is outputted to the outside of 1. Specifically, a hall computer or an external information device provided in the island equipment of the game hall is connected via the external terminal section 558. The external display device is located at the top of the pachinko machine 1, and displays game history such as information regarding the number of changes in special symbols and information regarding the number of jackpots. In this example, when performing special symbol variation displays A to C, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device, and the number of special symbol variations displayed on the external display device is 450 → The number has changed from 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count validity period in the low probability non-time saving state, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 responds to the variable pattern. When executing the effect to be executed, the normal effect is being executed.

Next, in the count suppression period A that starts when the start conditions for the count suppression period A are met, the main ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is maintained without counting up. In this example, during the count suppression period A, when performing variable displays D, E, etc. of special symbols, the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310 is not incremented, but the relief frequency counter is maintained at 452. I have to.

In addition, during the count suppression period A, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is output to the external display device. are doing. In this example, during the count suppression period A, when performing special symbol fluctuation displays D, E, etc., information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the special symbol displayed on the external display device is The number of changes in the symbol changes from 453 to 454 (+1 per change).

In addition, during the count suppression period A, the effect display device 1600 displays a special symbol variable display D, which is the first variable display of the special symbol, a special symbol variable display E, which is the second and subsequent variable display of the special symbol, etc. , and performs different performances. Here, during the count suppression period A, during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display D, which is the first special symbol fluctuation display, when performing the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, the count effective period A common effect that is the same as the variable display of special symbols A to C in terms of the background image, etc. is executed. In this way, since there is no clear notification to that effect at the start of the count suppression period A, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count validity period or the count suppression period A. It is also possible to make it difficult for the user to notice that an unfavorable period has started.

On the other hand, during the count suppression period A, during execution of special symbol variation display E, which is the second and subsequent special symbol variation display, count suppression is performed when executing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern. Pinch effect 1 (specific effect) indicating that it is period A is being executed. Here, as pinch effect 1, a background image suggesting that the count suppression period A is in effect (a background image different from the special symbol fluctuation displays A to C during the count validity period), a mini character, or a count suppression period. It is performing effects such as outputting sounds and light emission that suggest that it is A. In this way, in the count suppression period A, it can be inferred that the count suppression period A is in effect, except for the first fluctuating display of the special symbol. In addition, by not performing pinch effect 1 only during the execution of the first variable display of special symbols during the count suppression period A, it is possible to prevent the start of the count suppression period A from being noticed too early. .

In addition, in the above, pinch effect 1 (specific effect) is not executed at the start of the count suppression period A (while the special symbol variable display D is being executed), but from the start of the count suppression period A, the pinch effect is Performance 1 may be executed.

Next, during the count validity period that starts when the end condition of the count suppression period A is satisfied, the main control is activated every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of the special symbol is executed. A relief counter on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when performing the variable display FH of the special symbol, the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter changes from 453 to 454 to 455.

In addition, during the count validity period, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, information regarding the number of variations in the special symbol is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, during the count validity period, when performing the special symbol fluctuation display F to H, information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the special symbol displayed on the external display device is The number of fluctuations changes from 463 to 464 to 465.

In addition, during the count validity period, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect corresponding to the variable pattern. , usually performs a performance.

Next, in count suppression period B, which is started when the start conditions for count suppression period B are met, the main ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. A relief counter on the control board 1310 is counting down. In this example, during the count suppression period B, when performing special symbol variation display I, etc., the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down, and the relief number counter increases from 454 to (-1 for each variation). It's changing.

In addition, during the count suppression period B, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of the special symbol is executed, information regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is output to the external display device. are doing. In this example, when performing the special symbol variation display I during the count suppression period B, information regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the variation of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is output to the external display device. The number of times changes from 466 to (+1 per change).

In addition, during the count suppression period B, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, an effect corresponding to the variable pattern is executed. When executing the effect corresponding to , a common effect is executed which is the same in terms of the background image and the like as the variable display of special symbols F to H during the count validity period. In this way, when the count suppression period B is executed, since there is no clear notification to that effect, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count validity period or the count suppression period B. It can also be made difficult to notice that an unfavorable period is being executed.

Next, during the count validity period that starts when the end condition of the count suppression period B is met, the main control is activated every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of the special symbol is executed. A relief counter on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when executing the variable display J of the special symbol, the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter has changed to 443.

In addition, during the count validity period, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, when executing the special symbol fluctuation display J during the count validity period, information regarding the number of special symbol fluctuations is output to the external display device, and the number of special symbol fluctuations displayed on the external display device is output. has changed to 476.

In addition, during the count validity period, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect corresponding to the variable pattern. , usually performs a performance.

As described above, information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external display device does not match the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 when count suppression period A or count suppression period B occurs. becomes. In other words, even if the information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external display device is visually recognized, the number of changes in the relief number counter is 600, which is the control to the low probability time saving state B. I can't figure out if it's there. Therefore, the information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external display device is only a guide for the relief number counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and it is difficult to know how many times the relief number counter has changed. You can have fun guessing.

In addition, during the count suppression period B, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down. , for the count suppression period B, during the control of the low probability non-time saving state after the rescue number counter reaches = 600, than during the control of the low probability non-time saving state before the rescue number counter = 600. The configuration is such that the execution rate is higher (the probability that the start condition is met is higher). Here, the relief number counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol during the count validity period in the low probability non-time saving state, and when the relief number counter reaches 600 in the low probability non time saving state, the low probability It is controlled to time saving state B. Then, in the low-probability time-saving state B, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 700 times without hitting a jackpot, control is again made to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the relief number counter can be counted up. In this regard, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after the rescue counter reaches 600 and control is made to the low-probability time-saving state B, since the control of the low-probability time-saving state B has already been acquired once, Obtaining the low-probability time-saving state B is said to be more difficult than the first time. In other words, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after the rescue count reaches 600 and control is made to the low-probability time-saving state B, by increasing the execution rate of the count suppression period B, the low-probability time-saving state B is lower than the first time. This makes it difficult to obtain relief, and excessive relief can be suppressed.

Further, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B can be forcibly terminated by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, if the power is turned off during the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B and then the power is turned on with RAM clear, the count is returned to the valid count period. As a result, if a player is avoiding playing due to the occurrence of count suppression period A or count suppression period B, the count suppression period A or count suppression period B can be ended by the operation of the hall manager. By returning the count to the valid period, it is possible to have the player participate in the game with anticipation.

[About the invalid period of immediate short winning symbols]
In this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when an immediate short winning occurs, control is performed to the low probability time saving state C. Here, as gaming states other than the low probability non-time saving state, there is a high probability non-time saving state, a high probability time saving state, a low probability time saving state A, a low probability time saving state B, and a low probability time saving state C. In this case, it is set as an "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" which is not controlled to low probability time saving state C. In addition, a part of the low probability non-time saving state is also set as an "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" which is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C when an immediate short winning occurs. The immediate short winning symbol invalidation period set as a part of such a low probability non-time saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a time chart showing the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period.

First, in the immediate short winning symbol validity period, when an immediate short winning occurs in a low probability non-time saving state, control is performed to a low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, in the instant short winning symbol invalid period, when an instant short winning occurs in the low probability non time saving state, the control is not changed to the low probability time saving state C, and the game state before the instant short winning is set as the low probability non time saving state. I try to keep my working hours short.

In addition, there are multiple types of immediate short winning symbol invalidation periods. The immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A has the same starting conditions and different ending conditions compared to the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B.

In addition, the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period is a low probability non-time saving state, when it is decided to generate the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period by lottery, the start conditions for the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period are met, and the instant A short winning symbol invalidation period is occurring. In this example, when it is determined by the lottery to generate an immediate short winning symbol invalidation period, the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period is suddenly generated by not notifying to that effect. Therefore, at the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period, it is difficult to notice whether the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period has started. However, when it is determined by the lottery to generate an immediate short winning symbol invalidation period, a notification to that effect may be provided. In addition, in this example, in a low probability non-time saving state, when it is decided to generate an immediate short winning symbol invalidating period by lottery, the start condition for the immediate short winning symbol invalidating period is satisfied, but other than this. Also, for example, in a low probability non-time saving state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the start condition for the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period may be satisfied.

In addition, during the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period, after the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A The termination condition is satisfied, and the short winning symbol invalidation period A is immediately terminated. On the other hand, after the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, the conditions for ending the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B are met, and the instant The short hit symbol invalid period B has ended.

In addition, in the case of an immediate short hit during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and the effect is In the variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 1600, an immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, if an immediate short hit occurs during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the immediate short hit symbol is In the variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 1600, the immediate short winning symbol is not stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol, but a symbol different from the immediate short winning symbol (in this example, the losing symbol) is stopped and displayed. There is. In this way, during the instant short hit symbol invalidation period, if there is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600 does not indicate that, so the immediate short hit is invalidated. It can reduce the feeling of loss.

As shown in FIG. 201, during the immediate short winning symbol valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, the special symbol fluctuation displays A to C are executed every time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005. ing. During such an immediate short winning symbol validity period, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short winning symbols can be outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal section 558. In other words, when an immediate short win occurs during the immediate short win symbol validity period, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short win symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas an immediate short win does not occur. In this case, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short winning symbols is not outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a hall computer and an external information device provided at the top of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via an external terminal section 558. The external display device displays information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol, information regarding the number of jackpots, information regarding the number of instant short hits, and the like. In this way, by outputting information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short hit symbol to the hall computer, the hall manager can know that an immediate short hit has occurred, and the immediate short hit symbol is displayed on the external display device. By outputting information regarding the stoppage of the game, the player can immediately know that a short hit has occurred.

In addition, during the immediate short winning symbol validity period in the low probability non-time saving state, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variable display A to C of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 , when executing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the immediate short winning symbol invalidating period A that starts when the start conditions for the immediate short winning symbol invalidating period A are satisfied, the special symbols change every time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005. Displays D, E, etc. are being executed. In such an instantaneous short winning symbol invalid period A, information regarding the stoppage of the instantaneous short winning symbol cannot be outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal section 558. That is, in the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, when an immediate short winning occurs, information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, even if there is an immediate short hit in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, so it becomes an immediate short hit. Since the hall manager cannot know this and does not output information regarding the stop of the instant short winning symbols to the external display device, the player cannot know that the instant short winning has occurred.

In addition, during the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, the effect display device 1600 displays a special symbol variable display D, which is the first variable display of the special symbol, and a special symbol variable display, which is the second and subsequent variable display of the special symbol. Display E, etc., are performing different effects. Here, during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display D during the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A, when performing the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, A common performance is executed which is the same in terms of the background image, etc., as the variable display of special symbols A to C during the immediate short winning symbol validity period. In this way, since there is no clear notification to that effect at the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the immediate short winning pattern valid period or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short winning symbol validity period has started.

On the other hand, during the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A, during execution of special symbol fluctuation display E etc. during the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuation display, when executing the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. , Pinch effect 2 (invalid response effect) indicating that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is in effect is executed. Here, as pinch effect 2, a background image suggesting that the immediate short winning symbol is invalid period A (a background image different from the special symbol fluctuation display A to C during the immediate short winning symbol valid period) and a mini character are displayed. The player performs an effect of outputting a sound or light emitting light indicating that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is in progress. In this way, it can be inferred that the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A is the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, since this is indicated except for the first special symbol fluctuation display. . In addition, by not executing pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display during the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A, the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A can be noticed early. can be prevented.

In addition, in the above, pinch effect 2 (invalid response performance) is not executed at the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A (while the special symbol variable display D is being executed), but the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period Pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of A.

In addition, the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A is such that when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A is satisfied, and the immediate short winning symbol is invalid. Although period A has ended, in the case of special symbol fluctuation display several times (for example, 4 fluctuations) before the end conditions of immediate short winning symbol invalid period A are met, the effect display device 1600 immediately A count display is displayed that shows the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays until the short winning symbol invalid period A ends. Thereby, the game can be continued with anticipation until the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A ends.

Next, in the immediate short winning symbol valid period that starts when the end conditions of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A are satisfied, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. Executing F to H. During such an immediate short winning symbol validity period, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short winning symbols can be outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal section 558. In other words, when an immediate short win occurs during the immediate short win symbol validity period, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short win symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas an immediate short win does not occur. In this case, information regarding the stoppage of immediate short winning symbols is not outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, during the immediate short winning symbol validity period, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variable display F to H of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the variable pattern. When executing the effect to be executed, the normal effect is being executed.

Next, in the immediate short winning symbol invalidating period B that starts when the start conditions for the immediate short winning symbol invalidating period B are satisfied, the special symbols change every time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005. Display I etc. is being executed. In such an instantaneous short winning symbol invalid period B, information regarding the stoppage of the instantaneous short winning symbol cannot be outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal section 558. That is, in the instant short winning symbol invalid period B, when an immediate short winning occurs, information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, even if there is an immediate short hit during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, so it becomes an immediate short hit. Since the hall manager cannot know this and does not output information regarding the stoppage of the instant short winning symbols to the external display device, the player cannot know that the instant short winning has occurred.

In addition, during the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, the effect display device 1600 displays a special symbol variable display I, which is the first variable display of the special symbol, and a special symbol variable display, which is the second and subsequent variable display of the special symbol. Different effects are performed between the display and the display. Here, during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display I during the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B, when executing the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, A common performance that is the same as the variable display FG of special symbols during the immediate short winning symbol validity period and the background image is executed. In this way, since there is no clear notification to that effect at the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the immediate short winning pattern valid period or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short winning symbol validity period has started.

On the other hand, during the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, during the execution of the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuation displays, when executing the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, the immediate Pinch performance 2 (invalid response performance) indicating that the short winning symbol is invalid period B is executed. Here, as pinch effect 2, a background image suggesting that the immediate short winning symbol is invalid period B (a background image different from the special symbol fluctuation display A to C during the immediate short winning symbol valid period) and a mini character are displayed. The player performs an effect such as outputting a sound or light emitting light indicating that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is in progress. In this way, it can be inferred that the instant short winning symbol invalid period B is the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, since it is suggested that this is the case, except for the first special symbol fluctuation display. . In addition, by not performing pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display during the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A, the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B can be noticed early. can be prevented. In addition, the pinch performance 2 that suggests that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is the same as the pinch performance 2 that suggests that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is present, but the content of the performance may be different. .

In addition, in the above, pinch effect 2 (invalid response performance) is not executed at the start of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B (during the execution of special symbol variation display I), but the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period Pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of B.

In addition, when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B, the conditions for ending the immediate short winning symbol invalidating period B are satisfied, and the immediate short winning symbol is invalid. Although period B is ended, before the end condition of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B is satisfied, the execution is executed in the effect display device 1600 before the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A ends. The current count display is not displayed. This is because the end condition for the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B is when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B, so the end timing of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B is set in advance. This is because it cannot be determined.

Next, in the immediate short winning symbol valid period that starts when the end conditions of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B are satisfied, when the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Executing J. During such an immediate short winning symbol validity period, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short winning symbols can be outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal section 558. In other words, when an immediate short win occurs during the immediate short win symbol validity period, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short win symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas an immediate short win does not occur. In this case, information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short winning symbols is not outputted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, during the immediate short winning symbol validity period, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variable display J of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect corresponding to the variable pattern. When executing, the normal performance is executed.

As mentioned above, the instant short winning symbol invalid period A is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the instant short winning symbol invalid period A is satisfied, and the instant short winning symbol invalid period A is established. The winning symbol invalid period A has ended, but if it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A before the end conditions of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A are met, then immediately The termination condition of the short winning symbol invalid period A may be satisfied, and the short winning symbol invalid period A may be forcibly ended immediately. In this example, in the special symbol variation display several times (for example, 4 variations) before the end condition of the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A is satisfied, the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period is displayed in the effect display device 1600. A count display is displayed that shows the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays until A ends, but if you want to forcibly end the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, do not wait for the end of the count display. , the count display is forcibly terminated even if it is in the middle.

Furthermore, the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A and the instantaneous short winning symbol invalidation period B can be forcibly terminated by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, if the power is turned off and the power is turned on with RAM clear during the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A or the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, the system returns to the immediate short winning symbol valid period. ing. As a result, if a player is avoiding playing due to the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period A or immediate short winning symbol invalidation period B, the immediate short winning symbol will be invalidated by the operation of the hall manager. It is only necessary to end the period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, and by returning to the immediate short winning symbol valid period, new players can be encouraged to participate in the game with anticipation.

As described above, some of the low probability non-time saving states among the low probability states are set as a "count suppression period" in which the number of changes in the special symbol is not counted. Of the count suppression periods, for count suppression period A, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 in a low probability non-time saving state and a variable display of special symbols is executed, the main The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is maintained without counting up. In such a count suppression period A, an "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" may be generated at the same time, in which the low probability time saving state C is not controlled even if an immediate short winning occurs. A case where such a count suppression period A and an immediate short hit symbol invalidation period are used together will be explained with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a time chart showing the combination of the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalidation period.

As shown in Figure 202, in the count validity period, the immediate short hit symbol validity period occurs at the same time, so if there is an immediate short hit in such a count validity period, it will be in a low probability time short state. It is controlled by C.

In addition, during the count suppression period A, an immediate short hit symbol invalidation period is generated at the same time. In other words, in the count suppression period A, if an immediate short win occurs, the control is not changed to the low probability time saving state C, but the low probability non time saving state is maintained as the gaming state before the immediate short win. There is. Here, during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display D, which is the first special symbol fluctuation display during the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period, the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is executed. When doing so, a common effect is executed that is the same in terms of the special symbol fluctuation displays A to C during the count validity period and the background image. On the other hand, during the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalidation period, during the execution of special symbol fluctuation display E etc. which is the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuation display, the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is displayed. At the time of execution, a count suppression period A and a pinch performance 2 (invalidity compatible performance) indicating that the immediate short hit symbol is invalid are executed.

On the other hand, in the count suppression period B, the immediate short hit symbol invalidation period is not generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period B, if an immediate short hit occurs, control is made to a low probability time shortening state C. Here, in the count suppression period B, each time a ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, an effect corresponding to the variable pattern is executed. When executing the effect corresponding to the pattern, a common effect is executed which is the same in terms of the background image and the like as the variable display F to H of the special symbols during the count validity period.

As described above, for the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 in the low probability non-time saving state and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the main control board 1310 The number-of-relief counter is counted down and updated so as to move away from the number-of-relief counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. In other words, for the count suppression period B, the count suppression period B moves away from the relief count counter = 600, which would result in control to the low probability time saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the relief count count = 600 after that. It is also an unfavorable period. If an immediate short hit symbol invalidation period occurs at the same time during the count suppression period B, not only will it be difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600, but even if an immediate short hit occurs, the number will be low. Control to the probability time saving state C is no longer performed, and the probability of obtaining the low probability time saving state (low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) becomes extremely low. In this regard, in this example, by not allowing the immediate short hit symbol invalidation period to occur at the same time during the count suppression period B, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous period from occurring.

[About prioritizing RTC production]
In this example, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and controls the peripherals. Current calendar information and current time information are set in the IC's RAM. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 uses such RTC (real-time clock) information to create a pattern variation effect (a production corresponding to the variation pattern) every time a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on. Apart from this, RTC production is also performed. In this RTC performance, a special performance different from the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed by the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output. Therefore, it is possible to provide a different enjoyment from the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern), and it can be expected that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 will be increased.

The RTC performance and the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) are both the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lighting of lamps, and the output of sound. The production elements used are duplicated (at least some of them are duplicated). Here, since the RTC effect is executed every predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) after the power is turned on, the execution timing of the RTC effect and the special The performance execution timings may overlap before and after the symbol fluctuation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). Similarly, the performance execution timings before and after the instantaneous short hit that is controlled to the low probability time saving state C may overlap. In such a case, priority will be given to the execution of RTC effects, and some effects will be limited, such as effects before and after the special symbol fluctuates and displays reach 600 times (relief counter = 600), and effects before and after an immediate short hit. I try to do that. Here, we will first explain the RTC effect and the effect before and after the special symbol's variable display reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), and then the effect when the special symbol's variable display reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600). A case will be described in which the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied before the RTC performance is reached, and the case where the RTC performance start condition is satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). After explaining the effects before and after an immediate short hit, if the RTC effect start conditions are met before an immediate short hit, and if the RTC effect start conditions are met after an immediate short hit. I will explain about it.

FIG. 203 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC performance. As shown in FIG. 203, before t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on and the RTC performance start condition is met, the RTC performance is not executed and the symbol variation performance ( The performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) is in a normal performance state where it can be executed. In the normal production state, when a symbol variation (for example, symbol variation A) is executed, a production corresponding to the variation pattern is executed as a symbol variation production. In the symbol variation performance, the performance contents such as the performance display on the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and sound emission are set to a variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310, Based on the variation pattern, performance contents such as performance display on the performance display device 1600, operation of the movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and sound emission are executed.

Note that the effect display device 1600 executes a variable display of decorative symbols as a pattern variation effect, and also executes an effect display that suggests a lottery result. Furthermore, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate at predetermined timings in conjunction with an effect display indicating the lottery result. Furthermore, in the lamp emission, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit light at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display indicating the lottery result. In addition, as for audio output, BGM is outputted from a speaker while an effect indicating the lottery result is being displayed.

Next, at t1, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on and the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, the RTC performance state is set to execute the RTC performance. When t1 arrives during the execution of symbol variation B, the execution of the symbol variation effect is restricted and the RTC effect is executed with priority. In the RTC performance, RTC performance content is executed with respect to performance content such as performance display on the performance display device 1600, movement of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and sound emission. Note that the RTC performance state continues to be executed from t1 when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied until t4 when the RTC performance end condition is satisfied after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed. , the RTC performance state is shifted to the normal performance state.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 first performs an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect from t1 to t2. The RTC countdown display starts at t1 without depending on symbol variations, and ends at t2 when 3 seconds have elapsed from t1 without depending on symbol variations. That is, the RTC countdown display is executed for 3 seconds from t1 to t2. Then, from t2 to tx, an RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC performance. Regarding the RTC start display, it starts at t2 without depending on the symbol variation, is executed at least until t3 when 5 seconds have passed from t2, and depends on the symbol variation and starts the symbol variation (symbol variation) after t3. D) is made to end at the time tx when it starts. That is, the RTC start display is executed for a variable time of 5 seconds + α from t2 to tx. Note that if a period in which symbol variation (symbol variation performance) is not started occurs after t3, the RTC start display is ended after waiting for symbol variation D to start after t3.

Then, the effect display device 1600 executes an RTC effect display that is not executed other than RTC effects from tx to t4 when the RTC effect termination condition is satisfied. Regarding the effect display for RTC, since it waits for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3, it tries to start the symbol variation D as soon as possible after t3. The player can be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are sequentially executed. On the other hand, during the RTC performance state from t1 to t4, except for the period t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and for the movable bodies A to C, the symbol variation performance (fluctuation The action specified by the pattern (direction corresponding to the pattern) is being executed.

In addition, in the lamp emission, during the period from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the RTC light emission pattern as the RTC effect is executed. . Furthermore, in the audio output, from t1 to t4, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker as the RTC effect is executed.

(Limitations on help mode L production)
FIG. 204 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). As shown in FIG. 204, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, when performing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state. At time t5, when the symbol fluctuation B stops, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. Also, before t5, the state is set to the help mode L precursor performance state, which executes the "help mode L precursor production" that indicates that "help mode L" is near, but from t5 , the state has shifted to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed. In addition, in this example, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the state changes to the low probability time saving state B. The period during which control is performed to such a low probability time saving state B is referred to as "help mode L." Then, in the help mode L production state, until the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 700 times in the low probability time saving state B, if the jackpot does not occur, the 700th symbol fluctuation X stops at the time t6 In the case of a jackpot, at time t6, which is the stop of the symbol fluctuation that results in the jackpot, the transition is made from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non-time saving state, and from the help mode L production state to the normal production state. It is expected to move to .

In the above example of production, when the variation display of the decorative symbol in the production display device 1600 is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. A count effect is executed to notify the user how many times the count has occurred, and such a count effect corresponds to a "help mode L precursor effect." In addition, after starting the control of the low probability time saving state B, the effect display device 1600 displays "Help mode L in progress" indicating that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled. This display corresponds to "Help Mode L Effect".

Specifically, before t5, the effect display device 1600 performs a countdown until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies you of the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state). ) is executing the effect display for the help mode L precursor. Then, after t5, an effect display for the help mode L is executed to indicate that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). Furthermore, even if a period (for example, between symbol variation C and symbol variation D) in which symbol variation (symbol variation production) does not start after t5 occurs, during that period, the production for help mode L The display continues to run.

In addition, regarding movable bodies A to C, movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode L precursor performance before t5 and the help mode L performance after t5, and the symbol variation performance (variation The action specified by the pattern (direction corresponding to the pattern) is being executed.

In addition, in the lamp emission, before t5, with the execution of the help mode L omen effect, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are illuminated in the light emission pattern for the help mode L omen. After t5, with the execution of the help mode L effect, the light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode L. In addition, in the audio output, BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode L precursor production before t5, and after t5, the help mode L precursor production is output from the speaker. With the execution of , BGM for help mode L is output from the speaker.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing the performance progress when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). In this example, at time t1 when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on and the RTC performance start condition is met, it is either in the help mode L precursor performance state or in the help mode L performance state. It is determined whether it is in a normal performance state that is not a help mode L precursor performance state or a help mode L performance state. The above describes the case where it is determined that the normal performance state is at the time t1, and below, the case where it is determined that the help mode L precursor performance state or the help mode L performance state is determined at the time t1. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 205, when t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is met, if the help mode L precursor performance state is present, the help mode L precursor performance state is shifted to the RTC performance state. There is. In addition, when executing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state after powering on with RAM clear or after executing a jackpot game, symbol variation B At time t5, which is the time of stopping, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B.

Specifically, at time t1, the effect display device 1600 is executing an effect display for a help mode L precursor that counts down until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state), and from t1 to t5, when the pattern change B stops and the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the effect display for the help mode L precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, control is made to the low probability time-saving state C, and thus the effect display for the help mode L is executed, which indicates that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled). In other words, between t1 and tx, the RTC countdown display and RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the RTC effect termination condition is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the effect display for the RTC that is not executed other than the RTC effect is displayed. is running. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the entire display area is used to perform an RTC effect display, and "help mode L in progress" indicating that low probability time saving state B is being controlled is displayed at the upper left of the display area. The effect display for help mode L is executed so as to display .

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C operate sequentially from t2 to t3 even though the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 to start the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C comes while the symbol variation B is being executed and the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). In this case, the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is ended, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of symbol variation B, reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) of the special symbol variation display in the low probability state, when t5 arrives. In this case, the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C that is currently being executed is continuously executed without ending. In addition, among the RTC performance states t1 to t4, for t2 to t3, the action specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , except for the period from t2 to t3, movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and movements specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) are performed for the movable bodies A to C. is running.

In addition, in the lamp emission, even though the RTC countdown display and RTC start display are not executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LEDs are set to emit light in the RTC light emission pattern, and continue to emit light in the RTC light emission pattern until t4. In other words, in the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L precursor and the effect display for the help mode L are being executed on the effect display device 1600, the game board 5 and the door The LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor or the light emission pattern for the help mode L. In addition, for audio output, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker even though the RTC countdown display and RTC start display are not executed on the production display device 1600 from t1 to t3, and Until then, RTC BGM continues to be output. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L precursor and the effect display for the help mode L are being executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is not displayed from the speaker. BGM for L omen and BGM for help mode L are not output.

As mentioned above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B stops, reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in the special symbol variation display in the low probability state. When it arrives, the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C that are being executed are continued without ending. As a result, although the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600 between t1 and t2, all of the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C can be executed without ending midway. , it is possible to notify the outside that the RTC performance is starting, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC performance from not being recognized.

In addition, the RTC performance and the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) are both the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lighting of lamps, and the output of sound. The production elements used in the production overlap (at least some of them overlap). At this time, when t1, when the RTC performance start condition is met, is in the help mode L precursor performance state, the performance display on the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L precursor performance will be as follows: However, the actions of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L precursor effect, lamp emission, and audio output are restricted from being executed. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L precursor performance is restricted. Similarly, after t1, if t5 comes, which is the time when symbol variation B stops, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the help mode L production However, while the performance display on the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L performance is executed, the operations of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L performance are Execution of lamp lighting and audio output is restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L performance is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the start conditions for RTC performance are met, the operations of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output can be used for RTC performance, so they can be used for external purposes. It is possible to notify that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from not being recognized.

On the other hand, from the time t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is met, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 is used in the help mode L precursor performance and the help mode L performance. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the center of the game board 5, it is the part that attracts the most attention from the player. Since Yao Help Mode L effect display is executed, you will not miss that the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. It is possible to prevent the start of control in the low probability time saving state B from not being recognized.

The movable bodies A to C mentioned above include movable bodies that can be contacted by the player and movable bodies that cannot be contacted by the player. Specifically, the movable body A is a back top/front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and the movable body B is a back/bottom front presentation unit 3400 attached to the game board 5. The body cannot be touched by the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is a performance operation part 301 of a performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, and can be contacted by the player. The movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, movable bodies A to C are monitored to see if they operate normally, but if an abnormality occurs in movable body C that prevents it from operating normally, the movable body There is a high possibility that C will not operate properly. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC performance, the player will be penalized for the help mode L omen performance and the performance elements used in the help mode L performance. We are extending the period during which the execution of some of these restrictions is restricted. In other words, even after reaching t4 when the RTC performance termination condition is satisfied, the state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the Help Mode L precursor performance and the Help Mode L performance will continue to be restricted. I have to. Furthermore, as a penalty to the player, in a state where the execution of some of the production elements used in the Help Mode L precursor production or the Help Mode L production is restricted, the degree of restriction may be strengthened. For example, during the execution of the RTC performance, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 that is not restricted from being executed as a help mode L precursor performance or a help mode L performance may also be restricted from being executed. . In this way, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC performance, a penalty will be given to the player to prevent the player from playing pranks on the movable body C. I can work on it.

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing the performance progress when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). As shown in FIG. 206, when the time t1, when the RTC performance start condition is met, is in the help mode L performance state, the help mode L performance state has transitioned to the RTC performance state. Furthermore, when t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, the control is already in the low probability time saving state B.

Specifically, at time t1, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display for help mode L indicating that help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). However, between t1 and t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, an RTC countdown display is executed that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect. Furthermore, from t2 to tx, an RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC performance. Then, between tx and tx, from tx to t4 when the RTC performance termination condition is met, in addition to the display for help mode L, there is a display that will not be executed except for the RTC performance. A presentation display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the entire display area is used to display the RTC countdown, RTC start, and RTC effects, and the upper left of the display area indicates that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled. The effect display for help mode L is executed so as to display "help mode L in progress" as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when the time t2 to start the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C comes during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), The operation specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is ended, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. In addition, among the RTC performance states t1 to t4, for t2 to t3, the action specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , except for the period from t2 to t3, movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and movements specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) are performed for the movable bodies A to C. is running.

In addition, in the lamp emission, during the period from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the RTC light emission pattern as the RTC effect is executed. . In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode L is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the effect displayed on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is The LED is not emitting light in the light emission pattern for Help Mode L. Furthermore, in the audio output, from t1 to t4, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker as the RTC effect is executed. That is, from t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode L is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the BGM for the help mode L is not output from the speaker.

As mentioned above, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both effects that execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output. , and the production elements used for production overlap (at least some of them overlap). At this time, when t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, if the help mode L performance state is reached, the performance display on the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L performance will not be executed. On the other hand, the operations of the movable bodies A to C used in the assistance mode L performance, lamp lighting, and audio output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L performance is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the start conditions for RTC performance are met, the operations of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output can be used for RTC performance, so they can be used for external purposes. It is possible to notify that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from not being recognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), from the time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is changed to the help mode L. It is used in performances. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the center of the game board 5, it is the part that attracts the most attention from the player, and for such a effect display device 1600, the help mode L effect display is Because it is executed, it is not overlooked that help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled), and help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). This can prevent the information from being recognized.

(Limitations on Help Mode S performance)
FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance before and after the immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 207, when executing symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, at time t5 when symbol variation B stops, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C. There is. Also, before t5, during the execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, help mode S executes a "help mode S precursor effect" that suggests entering "help mode S". In contrast to the foreshadow effect state, from t5 onwards, a transition is made to a help mode S effect state in which a ``help mode S effect'' indicating that the ``help mode S'' is being executed is executed. In addition, in this example, by becoming an immediate short hit, the control is controlled to a low probability time saving state C until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, and such a low probability time saving state C The period in which this is controlled is called "help mode S." And, the help mode S production state is until the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 20 to 100 times in the low probability time saving state C, and if the jackpot does not occur, when the symbol fluctuation X stops for the 20th to 100th time. At a certain time t6, if it becomes a jackpot, at the time t6, which is the time when the symbol fluctuation that becomes the jackpot stops, the low probability time saving state C shifts to the low probability non time saving state, and the help mode S production state It is designed to shift from to the normal performance state.

In the above production example, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols is executed as a symbol variation production (production corresponding to a variation pattern) that results in an immediate short hit, and a display that stops at a stop symbol that results in an immediate short hit is executed. , Such a symbol variation performance that results in an immediate short hit corresponds to a "help mode S precursor performance." In addition, after starting the control of the low probability time saving state C, the effect display device 1600 displays "help mode S in progress" indicating that the low probability time saving state C is under control. This display corresponds to "Help Mode S Effect".

Specifically, before t5, the performance display device 1600 executes the performance display for the help mode S precursor as the symbol variation performance during the execution of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit. After t5, an effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C being controlled) is executed. Furthermore, even if there is a period (for example, between symbol variation C and symbol variation D) in which symbol variation (symbol variation production) does not start after t5, during that period, the production for help mode S The display continues to run.

In addition, for movable bodies A to C, movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode S performance after t5, and the actions specified in the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) are executed. are doing.

In addition, in the lamp emission, before t5, with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The present LED is made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after t5, with the execution of the help mode S performance, it is made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S. In addition, in the audio output, before t5, BGM for the help mode S precursor will be output from the speaker in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S precursor production during the execution of symbol variation B that will result in an immediate short hit. Then, after t5, BGM for the help mode S is outputted from the speaker as the help mode S effect is executed.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied before the immediate short hit occurs. In this example, at time t1 when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on and the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, the system is either in the help mode S precursor performance state or in the help mode S performance state. It is determined whether it is in a normal performance state that is not a help mode S precursor performance state or a help mode S performance state. The above describes the case where it is determined that the normal performance state is at the time t1, and below, the case where it is determined that the help mode S precursor performance state or the help mode S performance state is determined at the time t1. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 208, when t1, when the RTC performance start condition is met, is in the help mode S precursor performance state, the help mode S precursor performance state is shifted to the RTC performance state. There is. Further, when executing the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C at the time t5 when the symbol variation B stops.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at the time t1, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is being executed as a symbol change effect, and from t1, when the effect display for the symbol change B that results in an immediate short hit is stopped. Until a certain time t5, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, since the control is set to the low probability time saving state C, an effect display for the help mode S is displayed to indicate that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C is under control). Running. That is, from t1 to tx, no RTC countdown display or RTC start display is performed as RTC effects.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the RTC effect termination condition is met, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, the effect display for the RTC that is not executed other than the RTC effect is displayed. is running. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the entire display area is used to display an RTC effect, and at the top left of the display area, "help mode S in progress" indicating that low probability time saving state C is being controlled is displayed. The effect display for help mode S is executed so as to display .

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C operate sequentially from t2 to t3 even though the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, during the execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, if t2 arrives to start the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C, the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is specified. Then, the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, comes while the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is being executed, the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C that is being executed is I want it to continue running without terminating. In addition, among the RTC performance states t1 to t4, for t2 to t3, the action specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , except for the period from t2 to t3, movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and movements specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) are performed for the movable bodies A to C. is running.

In addition, in the lamp emission, even though the RTC countdown display and RTC start display are not executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LEDs are set to emit light in the RTC light emission pattern, and continue to emit light in the RTC light emission pattern until t4. In other words, in the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are being executed on the effect display device 1600, the game board 5 and the door The LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor or the light emission pattern for the help mode S. In addition, for audio output, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker even though the RTC countdown display and RTC start display are not executed on the production display device 1600 from t1 to t3, and Until then, RTC BGM continues to be output. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are being executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is BGM for S precursor and BGM for help mode S are not output.

As mentioned above, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, comes while the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is being executed, the RTC of the movable bodies A to C that is being executed is The start operation continues to be executed without ending. As a result, although the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600 between t1 and t2, all of the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C can be executed without ending in the middle. , it is possible to notify the outside that the RTC performance is starting, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC performance from not being recognized.

In addition, the RTC performance and the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) are both the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output. The production elements used in the production overlap (at least some of them overlap). At this time, when t1, when the RTC performance start condition is met, is in the help mode S precursor performance state, the performance display on the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S precursor performance will be as follows: However, the actions of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S precursor effect, lamp emission, and audio output are restricted from being executed. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S precursor performance is restricted. Similarly, if t5, which is the time when symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit stops, arrives after t1, it is the timing to execute the help mode S effect, but it is the timing to execute the help mode S effect. While the performance display of the performance display device 1600 is executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the assistance mode S performance, lamp emission, and audio output are restricted from being executed. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S performance is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the start conditions for RTC performance are met, the operations of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output can be used for RTC performance, so they can be used for external purposes. It is possible to notify that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from not being recognized.

On the other hand, from the time t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 is used in the help mode S precursor performance and the help mode S performance. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the center of the game board 5, it is the part that attracts the most attention from the player. Since Yao Help Mode S effect display is executed, it is not possible to miss the fact that control is to be performed in low probability time saving state C due to an immediate short hit, and prevents the start of control in low probability time saving state C from not being recognized. be able to.

The movable bodies A to C mentioned above include movable bodies that can be contacted by the player and movable bodies that cannot be contacted by the player. Specifically, the movable body A is a back top/front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and the movable body B is a back/bottom front presentation unit 3400 attached to the game board 5. The body cannot be touched by the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is a performance operation part 301 of a performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, and can be contacted by the player. The movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, movable bodies A to C are monitored to see if they operate normally, but if an abnormality occurs in movable body C that prevents it from operating normally, the movable body There is a high possibility that C will not operate properly. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC performance, the player will be penalized for the help mode S precursor performance and the performance elements used in the help mode S performance. We are extending the period during which the execution of some of these restrictions is restricted. In other words, even after reaching t4, when the end condition for the RTC performance is met, the state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the Help Mode S precursor performance and the Help Mode S performance continues to be restricted. I have to. In addition, as a penalty to the player, if the execution of some of the performance elements used in the Help Mode S precursor performance or the Help Mode S performance is restricted, the degree of restriction may be strengthened. For example, during the execution of the RTC performance, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 that is not restricted from being executed as a help mode S precursor performance or a help mode S performance may also be restricted from being executed. . In this way, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC performance, a penalty will be given to the player, thereby preventing the player from causing mischief to the movable body C. I can work on it.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied after an immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 209, if the assist mode S effect state is reached at the time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is met, the help mode S effect state has transitioned to the RTC effect state. Further, when t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is met, the control is already in the low probability time saving state C.

Specifically, at time t1, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C is being controlled). However, between t1 and t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, an RTC countdown display is executed that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect. Furthermore, from t2 to tx, an RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC effect. Then, between tx and tx, from tx to t4 when the RTC performance termination condition is met, in addition to the display for help mode S, there is a display that will not be executed except for the RTC performance. A presentation display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the entire display area is used to display the RTC countdown, RTC start, and RTC effects, and the upper left of the display area indicates that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled. An effect display for help mode S is executed so as to display "help mode S in progress" as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 to start the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C comes while the symbol variation B is being executed during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low probability time saving state C), The operation specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is ended, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. In addition, among the RTC performance states t1 to t4, for t2 to t3, the action specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , except for the period from t2 to t3, movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and movements specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) are performed for the movable bodies A to C. is running.

In addition, in the lamp emission, during the period from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the RTC light emission pattern as the RTC effect is executed. . In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the effect displayed on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is The LED is not emitting light in the light emission pattern for Help Mode S. Furthermore, as for audio output, from t1 to t4, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker as the RTC effect is executed. That is, from t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode S is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the BGM for the help mode S is not output from the speaker.

As mentioned above, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both effects that execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output. , and the production elements used for production overlap (at least some of them overlap). At this time, when t1 arrives when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, if the help mode S performance state is reached, the performance display on the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S performance will not be executed. On the other hand, the operations of the movable bodies A to C used in the assistance mode S performance, lamp lighting, and audio output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S performance is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the start conditions for RTC performance are met, the operations of movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and audio output can be used for RTC performance, so they can be used for external purposes. It is possible to notify that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from not being recognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low probability time saving state C), from the time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is changed to the help mode S. It is used in performances. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the center of the game board 5, it is the part that attracts the most attention from the player. Since it is executed, it is not overlooked that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C), and the fact that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) is not overlooked. This can prevent the information from being recognized.

(Limitations on help mode L omen effects)
As explained in FIG. 204, when performing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) in a low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is executed. At time t5, when the symbol fluctuation B stops, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. Also, before t5, the state is set to the help mode L precursor performance state, which executes the "help mode L precursor production" that indicates that "help mode L" is near, whereas from t5 , the state has shifted to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed. In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the state changes to the low probability time saving state B until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 times. The period during which control is performed to such a low probability time saving state B is referred to as "help mode L."

In the above example of production, when the variation display of the decorative symbols in the production display device 1600 is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. A count effect is executed to notify the user how many times the count has occurred, and such a count effect corresponds to a "help mode L precursor effect." Regarding such a count effect, the main control board 1310 counts up the rescue number counter when the fluctuation of the special symbol in a low probability state stops, and sends information regarding the rescue number counter (relief count command) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. ), the peripheral control board 1510 knows how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state, and when the special symbol (decorative symbol) stops changing, A count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol changes in the state. In other words, the count performance is executed as a performance determined by the peripheral control board 1510, separately from the performance instructed by the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310.

In this example, when executing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the main control As the variation pattern determined by the board 1310, a variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. Here, when performing a symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol in a low probability state has not reached 600 times (relief number counter = 600), a normal variation is determined as a variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310. The pattern is determined, and the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L omen effect is not determined. When the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance is determined, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed only in symbol fluctuation B reaching 600 times (relief number counter = 600). By executing the help mode L precursor effect, it is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time saving state B will be executed.

In addition, as a "Help mode L precursor performance", when the above-mentioned count performance is not executed, when performing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state. When a fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance is determined, by executing the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (help mode L precursor performance), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. While it is possible to know in advance that "Help Mode L" will be executed, if the normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the fluctuation pattern for the Help Mode L precursor effect, the fluctuation pattern By executing the corresponding performance (performance that is not the help mode L precursor performance), it is not possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time saving state B will be executed. In addition, in this example, the above-mentioned count effect is not executed as the "help mode L omen effect," but the above count effect is executed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L omen effect is determined. You may also perform a performance. In addition, in this example, when performing symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. However, it is sufficient if the symbol changes before the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state. 500 to 600 times), it may be possible to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect.

In addition, in this example, when executing symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the variation pattern for help mode L precursor production (specific variation pattern ) is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the specific variation pattern execution button may be any operating unit provided in a location that cannot be operated or seen by the player, in addition to the power switch 630a that is used to turn on the power, such as a rotary switch type operating unit or a press-down button. Examples include a switch type operation section, or a type of operation section that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key owned by the administrator. Among these, if the operation part is of a type that requires the operator to insert a special tool (such as a thin stick) or key into the operator's possession, it is possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, when the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, when executing symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), The fluctuation pattern for the help mode L omen effect has been determined. On the other hand, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when executing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in the low probability state, The normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance. In other words, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), symbol variation B is executed. In addition, it is possible to select whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. In this way, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when executing symbol variation B, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). , Help mode L is not executed corresponding to the variation pattern for help mode L precursor production, and help mode L is being executed at the next symbol variation C (during low probability time saving state B control) Since the help mode L effect indicating that the game is in effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give a strong impact of saving time without being hit.

In addition, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), when executing the symbol variation, the variation pattern for the help mode L performance is determined by the main control board 1310. Determining the pattern. That is, after the start of the control in the low probability time saving state B, the variation pattern for the help mode L performance is determined for the symbol fluctuations until the special symbol variation display reaches 700 times in the low probability time saving state B. The variation pattern for this help mode L production is determined while help mode L is being executed (during low probability time saving state B control), regardless of whether or not the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. I try to do that. In other words, if you operate the specific fluctuation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, the transition to low probability time saving state B will occur before or after the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600). Before this, the help mode L precursor effect is executed, and after the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L effect is executed. On the other hand, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the transition to low probability time saving state B occurs before or after the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600). The help mode L precursor effect is not executed before the start, and the help mode L effect is executed after transitioning to the low probability time saving state B. In this way, if the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L precursor effect is not executed before transitioning to the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state Since the help mode L effect is suddenly executed after the transition to B, it is possible to give a strong impact of saving time without being hit.

Further, even if the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f at power-on, and the power is turned on with RAM clear, a specific fluctuation pattern different from that of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the power switch 630a is executed. If the button is not operated when the power is turned on, when executing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the variation for help mode L precursor effect will be displayed. No pattern is determined (determined normal fluctuation pattern). In other words, depending only on whether the hall manager turns on the power with RAM clear or not, when executing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state, Since the determination of whether or not to determine the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L omen effect does not change, the hall manager can operate the specific fluctuation pattern execution button when turning on the power as necessary to execute symbol fluctuation B. , it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L omen effect.

In the above example, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, symbol variation B is executed in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600). In this case, whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance is made different, but the following configuration may also be used. Specifically, if a jackpot (jackpot game) has already been obtained after the power is turned on, and then the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the 600 When the symbol variation B reaches the number of times (relief number counter=600), the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance is determined. On the other hand, if the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a state where no jackpot (jackpot game) has been obtained after the power is turned on, then the 600 times (relief number of times) When executing the symbol variation B that reaches the counter = 600), a normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance. In other words, depending on whether or not a jackpot (jackpot game) has already been obtained before the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), When executing symbol variation B reaching 600), whether or not to determine a variation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance is made different. In such a configuration, as compensation for the jackpot (jackpot game) that has already been obtained, it is possible to execute the help mode L precursor performance before shifting to the low probability time saving state B, and the You can enjoy the Mode L omen effect.

In addition, in the above, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), when symbol variation B is executed. Although the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect, the following configuration may also be used. Specifically, after the power is turned on, if the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. However, in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the The fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect has been determined. In other words, depending on whether or not you are in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after turning on the power, when you execute the symbol variation B before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, Whether or not to determine a variation pattern for mode L precursor production is made different. In such a configuration, it is known that it is already possible to transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B in the first low probability time saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on. , In the second and subsequent low probability time saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the production is improved by newly executing the help mode L precursor production before transitioning to the low probability time saving state B. This can prevent monotony.

[About resetting the relief counter]
In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state is added and counted from the initial value "0" using the relief number counter on the main control board 1310. When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Regarding such a relief number counter, the count of the number of changes in special symbols in a low probability state is reset when the power is turned on with RAM clearing or when a jackpot game is executed. However, the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is directly linked to whether or not to transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, so whether or not to reset the count of the relief number counter. It is preferable that the hall manager be able to select the option when power is turned on, regardless of whether the power is turned on with RAM clear or not. In this example, a configuration that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reset the count of the number of times of relief counter when the power is turned on will be described below.

In this example, a relief maintenance button (not shown), which is a special operation section for resetting the relief count counter when the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the relief maintenance button may be any operating part that is provided in a location that cannot be operated or seen by the player, in addition to the power switch 630a that is used to turn on the power, and may be a rotating switch type operating part or a push switch type. For example, an operation unit of the type that can be operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key owned by an administrator or the like may be used. Among these, if the operation part is of a type that requires the operator to insert a special tool (such as a thin stick) or key into the operator's possession, it is possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is reset. In other words, depending on whether or not the hole manager operates the relief maintenance button, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state. In this way, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is maintained, so the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B The number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the transition to 2 is reduced.However, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state will be reduced. Since the count of (relief number counter) is reset, it is necessary to display the special symbols in the low probability state many times until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. You can choose whether to reset or not depending on the environment.

FIG. 210 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating the operation at power-on to execute RAM clear. In this example, when the power is turned on (when the power switch 630a is operated), a RAM clear operation is performed by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a setting change operation is performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a (RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) is performed, execute RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and initialize the gaming state. (Set to low probability non-time saving state). In addition, the setting values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and when a setting change operation is performed, the setting values that have already been set (power off before power on) (time setting value) can be changed. In addition, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and the number of times the relief maintenance button is pressed when the power is turned on. The count can be maintained when operated.

As shown in FIG. 210, if the relief maintenance button is operated during RAM clear operation, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized. . Furthermore, since no backup was created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power was cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. Further, the setting value is not changed or confirmed, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is cut off before the power is turned on) is maintained. Further, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Furthermore, the initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are illuminated in blue from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period has elapsed. It is made to emit light, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``The gaming state has been cleared. The set value and number of rescues are maintained.'' Therefore, when operating the relief maintenance button during the RAM clear operation, the already set setting value is maintained, and the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is , the count starts from where it left off when the power was turned off.

In addition, since a backup is not created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned off, information regarding the performance being executed when the power is turned off will be lost, and the performance after the power is turned on will be lost. Regarding the state, it is executed in the initial state, and the performance state is restored after waiting for a command related to the performance to be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized. Furthermore, since no backup was created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power was cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. Further, the setting value is not changed or confirmed, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is cut off before the power is turned on) is maintained. Further, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. Furthermore, the initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are displayed in yellow from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is made to emit light, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``Game status and number of rescues have been cleared. Setting values are maintained.'' Therefore, when the RAM clear operation is performed, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, the already set setting value is maintained, and the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is , the count starts from the initial value "0".

On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized. Furthermore, since no backup was created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power was cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. In addition, it is possible to change the setting value, and when changing the setting value, operate the setting switch button 1311b while maintaining the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is cut off before the power is turned on). The value is increased by 1 each time the value is increased, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, making it possible to increase the value by 1 again. Further, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained. In addition, regarding the initialization of the gaming state, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and it is determined that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is input timing ) is running. Note that at the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has been completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated in green until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when it was determined that the setting change operation was completed. It is made to emit light, and the speaker outputs a voice that says, ``The setting value has been changed and the gaming state has been cleared. The number of relief attempts has been maintained.'' Therefore, when operating the relief maintenance button during setting change operation, the setting value can be changed, but the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is Counting starts from where it left off.

Furthermore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, a RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the gaming state. Furthermore, since no backup was created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power was cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. In addition, it is possible to change the setting value, and when changing the setting value, operate the setting switch button 1311b while maintaining the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is cut off before the power is turned on). The value is increased by 1 each time the value is increased, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, making it possible to increase the value by 1 again. Further, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. In addition, regarding the initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count, the timing when it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation is completed (when the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined) The signal is being executed at the input timing). Note that at the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has been completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated in white until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when it was determined that the setting change operation was completed. It is made to emit light, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``The setting values have been changed, and the game status and number of rescues have been cleared.'' Therefore, when changing the settings, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, while the setting value can be changed, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state will be changed to the initial value. The count starts from the value "0".

In addition, as detailed above, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. In this case, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are assumed to be abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. If such a RAM error occurs, turn on the specific error flag, turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1, and then change the settings when turning on the power again to correct the RAM error. You can now unlock it and proceed with the game. Specifically, if a setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation, In addition to initializing the gaming state, it is also possible to change the setting values. When changing the setting value, the initial value, which is the lowest setting value 1, is temporarily set, and each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated, the value increases by 1, and when it reaches the maximum value, which is the setting value 6, It is possible to return to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and increase the value by 1 again. Further, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. In addition, regarding the initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count, the timing when it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation is completed (when the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined) The signal is being executed at the input timing). Note that at the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has been completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the above, if a setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the probability of The count of the number of changes of special symbols in the state (relief number counter) is reset. This is because when a RAM error occurs, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, and there is also a possibility that there is an abnormality in the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state. Therefore, by resetting the count, it is possible to maintain the fairness of the game. Note that when the specific error flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the power is turned on without changing settings, the specific error flag will remain ON without canceling the RAM error. There is.

In this example, when operating the rescue maintenance button at power-on, if the rescue maintenance button is operated at the time of RAM clear operation, the setting value that has already been set is maintained, and the Regarding the number of changes in the special symbol (relief counter), the count starts from where it left off when the power was cut off, but if you are operating the relief maintenance button when changing the settings, the number of changes in the set value will continue. While making this possible, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state is started from the point where the power was cut off. In addition, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared, the special symbol in the low probability state will be displayed while maintaining the already set setting value. Regarding the count of the number of changes (relief number counter), it is counted from the initial value "0", but if the relief maintenance button is not operated when changing the settings, the setting value will be changed. While making this possible, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the initial value "0". In other words, when the power is turned on, depending on whether or not you want to change the settings, and whether or not you want to maintain the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the hall manager can set the specified value. All that is required is to operate the operating section, and the hall manager can selectively execute one of four patterns depending on the hall environment. For example, if you operate the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on when the hall starts operating, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state is maintained, so the To make players expect that the special symbols will change and be displayed in the low probability state B less frequently before shifting to the low probability time saving state B, and to shift to the low probability time saving state B as soon as the hall starts operating. I can do it. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on when the hall starts operating, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset, so the low probability non-time saving state It is necessary to display the special symbols in the low probability state many times before the transition to the low probability time saving state B, which prevents the hall from shifting to the low probability time saving state B too soon after the opening of the hall, and lowers the expectations of players. does not increase quickly.

Note that regardless of whether or not the rescue maintenance button is operated at power-on, normal power-on without RAM clear operation or setting change operation (operation of power switch 630a without turning on RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) only) is performed, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the gaming state is returned to the state at the time of power cutoff based on the backup created at the time of power cutoff. I'm bringing it back. Furthermore, since no backup was created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power was cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. Further, the setting value is not changed or confirmed, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is cut off before the power is turned on) is maintained. Further, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are illuminated in purple from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be OFF until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is made to emit light, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``The gaming state has been restored. The set value and number of relief attempts are maintained.'' Therefore, when the power is turned on normally, the set value that has already been set is maintained, and the count for the number of changes of special symbols (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted from where it left off when the power was turned off. However, the gaming state also returns to the state when the power was cut off. In addition, regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the setting value confirmation display will be displayed if a setting confirmation operation is performed that will display the setting value confirmation display. This is the same as when the power is turned on normally.

In addition, in this example, when the gaming state is initialized, the notification mode to be notified to the outside is different depending on whether the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. There is. As a result, even if, for example, the hall manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on and maintains the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state, the The notification mode allows the hall manager to notice the mistake and prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In the above, a configuration is provided in which a relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even in a configuration in which a relief maintenance button is not provided, the number of changes of special symbols (relief frequency counter) in a low probability state is counted when the power is turned on. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the hall manager can select whether to maintain or not depending on the hall environment. In such a configuration, for example, if a RAM clear operation is performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in a low probability state can be changed while maintaining the already set setting value. (Relief count counter) is counted from where it left off when the power was turned off, but if a setting change operation is being performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting value can be changed. Meanwhile, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, only when the hall administrator performs a RAM clear operation instead of a setting change operation, the count of the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in a low probability state can be maintained without being reset, and the hall administrator can be tailored to meet your needs.

In addition, even if the configuration does not include a relief maintenance button, if you want to maintain the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state when the power is turned on, the hall manager can use some operation It is preferable to have a configuration in which the controller operates. Specifically, the operation unit may be an ON operation of the setting key switch 1311a as a setting change operation. In such a configuration, when a setting change operation is performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a when the power is turned on, it is possible to change the settings of the setting value, and to change the special symbol in a low probability state. The count for the number of times (relief number counter) is counted from where it left off when the power was turned off, but if the RAM clear operation is performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the already set setting value is counted. While maintaining the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter), the count is started from the initial value "0". As a result, if the hall manager does not turn on the setting key switch 1311a when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the hall manager It is possible to prevent the count from being maintained unintentionally.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which a relief maintenance button is provided, the hall manager can select from four patterns depending on whether the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is operated, and whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated. On the other hand, in the case of a configuration without a relief maintenance button, the only option is whether to perform a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, and the hall manager has only two options. cannot be executed selectively. For this reason, if the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with a relief maintenance button, an operating section that can be operated on the hall side may be provided, so that the number of patterns that the hall manager can select may be increased.

In this example, in the variable display of the special symbols on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the variable display of the decorative symbols in the production display device 1600, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. I take it as a thing. The number of changes in the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbol is stopped. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, in the variable display of special symbols on the function display unit 1400, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and in the variable display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600, A jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol among the decorative symbols. After the jackpot symbol stops, the jackpot game is executed, but the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief counter) is reset when the jackpot symbol stops before the jackpot game starts. . In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of special symbols, and a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on afterwards, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Since the RAM is cleared to initialize the special symbol and the variable state is initialized (changed to a state where the variable display is not displayed), when the power is turned on, there is no return to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. In addition, if the power is cut off while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed based on the jackpot before the jackpot game is executed, and the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on afterwards, the main By executing a RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the control MPU 1310a and initializing the fluctuation state (to a state where no fluctuation is displayed), the system returns to the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the jackpot being executed. There is nothing to do, and the jackpot game that was scheduled after that is not executed.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during execution of the variable display of special symbols based on a jackpot, and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on afterwards, the gaming state is initialized. At this time, initialize the special symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot being executed, maintain the setting value that has already been set, and turn on the power supply to count the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state. In contrast to counting from where it left off when the power was turned off, if the relief maintenance button is operated when changing the settings when the power is turned on, the special symbol changes based on the jackpot being executed when the game state is initialized. While the display is initialized and the setting values can be changed, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is continued from the point where the power was cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off while the special symbol fluctuation display based on a jackpot is being executed, and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, when initializing the gaming state, Initializes the special symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot being executed, maintains the already set setting value, and sets the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state to the initial value. Counting starts from "0", but if the relief maintenance button is not operated when changing the settings when the power is turned on, the special symbol fluctuations based on the jackpot being executed will be displayed when initializing the gaming state. is initialized and the setting value can be changed, and the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the initial value "0". In other words, if the power is cut off while the special symbol fluctuation display based on a jackpot is being executed, and then when the power is turned on (at the time of RAM clear operation or setting change operation), the running state will be Although initializing the special symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot, it depends on whether you want to change the setting value or whether you want to maintain the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in a low probability state. The hall manager only has to operate a predetermined operation section, and the hall manager can selectively execute one of four patterns depending on the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in a low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. However, if a configuration is added that initializes all controls related to the progress of the game, such as the RAM clearing process of the conventional pachinko machine 1, a special If the RAM clearing process is performed while the symbols are displayed fluctuating, even the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state will be reset. There is a possibility that it may be difficult to confirm that the state shifts to the time saving state B. In this regard, in this example, even if a jackpot occurs and the special symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot is executed before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, When the game state is initialized by shutting off the power while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed, and then operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (when clearing RAM or changing settings), While initializing the special symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot in the middle, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in a low probability state can be counted from where it left off when the power was cut off, and Pachinko machine 1 In the manufacturing process, it becomes possible to display the special symbol in a variable manner again, and it is possible to easily confirm that the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, in the manufacturing process of Pachinko machine 1, if you want to check various effects when transitioning to low probability time saving state B, even if it is a miss, the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state will be 600 times. While the fluctuation is displayed or the fluctuation immediately before it is displayed, the power is cut off regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on afterwards (when the RAM is cleared or when the settings are changed). By doing this, while initializing the fluctuation display of the special symbol being executed, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state can be counted from where it left off when the power was cut off, and the pachinko machine In the manufacturing process of the machine 1, it becomes possible to perform the 600th special symbol variation display, etc., and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the performance in the process of transitioning to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, when initializing the variable display of the special symbol being executed, the stored information regarding various reservations (suspension of the lottery result of the first special symbol, reservation of the lottery result of the second special symbol) will also be initialized. By making it so that the worker can confirm the transition to low probability time saving state B or confirming the production of the process of transitioning to low probability time saving state B, the worker can check the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to select which of the symbols to perform and perform the variable display reaching the 600th time or the immediately preceding variable display at any timing, increasing the degree of freedom in confirmation work. Further, this work can be repeatedly executed by operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared, when the settings are changed), and the degree of freedom in the confirmation work can be increased in this respect as well.

In the above, the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even if the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is not provided, during the execution of the fluctuating display of the special symbol reaching 600 times or the fluctuating display of the special symbol based on the jackpot. When the power is turned off and the power is turned on again (when clearing the RAM or changing settings), the hall manager must determine whether or not to maintain the count of the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in a low probability state. It is preferable to adopt a configuration that allows selection depending on the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either a setting change operation or a RAM clear operation, while the current fluctuation display is erased, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in a low probability state (relief By maintaining the count without resetting it (number of times counter), it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In addition, in this example, if the power is cut off during control in the time saving state and the relief maintenance button is operated when clearing the RAM when the power is turned on again, when initializing the fluctuating display during execution, , while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in low probability states is counted from where it left off when the power was turned off, but the settings are changed when the power is turned on. If you are operating the relief maintenance button during operation, when initializing the running fluctuation display, it will be initialized from the time saving state to the low probability non-time saving state, making it possible to change the setting value, and reducing the low probability. The count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in the state is started from where it left off when the power was cut off. In addition, if the power is turned off during control in the time saving state and the rescue maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, when initializing the fluctuating display that is being executed, Initialize to a low probability non-time saving state and maintain the already set setting value, and count from the initial value "0" for the number of changes of special symbols (relief counter) in the low probability state. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when changing the settings when the power is turned on, when initializing the running fluctuation display, the time saving state is initialized to the low probability non-time saving state, and the set value is While making it possible to change the settings, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the initial value "0". In other words, when the power is turned off during control in the time saving state, and then when the power is turned on (during a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation), when initializing the fluctuating display that is being executed, the low probability Although initialized to the time-saving state, the hall manager can set the predetermined value depending on whether or not you want to change the setting value and whether you want to maintain the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief counter) in the low probability state. All that is required is to operate the operating section, and the hall manager can selectively execute one of four patterns depending on the hall environment.

In the above, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot symbol stops, and the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state is reset when the jackpot symbol stops. However, as a different example, only in the case of a jackpot, the number of changes (relief counter) of the special symbol in a low probability state is counted not when the jackpot symbol stops, but when the jackpot game It may be reset at the end of the round (for example, when an ending period set after the end of the final round has elapsed). In other words, in the case of a miss or a small hit, the number of changes of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbol stops; Regarding the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief frequency counter), the reset timing may be delayed until the end of the subsequent jackpot game instead of when the special symbol stops. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of a jackpot game and a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on afterwards, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is initialized. Since the game state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time-saving state) so as to erase the jackpot game and the jackpot game is cleared, there is no need to return to the jackpot game that is being executed.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off while a jackpot game is being executed and the relief maintenance button is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards, when initializing the game state, the While initializing the jackpot game and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in a low probability state is counted from the point where it left off when the power was cut off. If the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation at the time of input, when the game state is initialized, the jackpot game being executed is initialized and the setting value can be changed, while the low probability state The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) is started from where it left off when the power was cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off while a jackpot game is being executed, and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the jackpot game that is currently being executed will be While initializing and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0", but when the power is turned on. If the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation at the time, when the game state is initialized, the jackpot game being executed is initialized, and while the setting value can be changed, the low probability state The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) is started from an initial value of "0". In other words, the power is cut off while a jackpot game is being executed, and when the power is turned on afterwards (at the time of RAM clear operation, setting change operation), the jackpot game that is being executed is initialized when the game state is initialized. However, depending on whether you want to change the setting value or not, and whether you want to maintain the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state, if the hall manager operates the predetermined operation part. Often, a hall manager can selectively execute one of four patterns depending on the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in a low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. However, if a configuration is added that initializes all controls related to the progress of the game, such as the RAM clearing process of the conventional pachinko machine 1, it is possible to achieve a jackpot. When the RAM clear process is performed during the game, even the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief counter) in the low probability state will be reset, and in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, etc., the low probability time saving state B There is a risk that it will be difficult to confirm that the In this regard, if a jackpot occurs and a jackpot game occurs before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state, the power will be shut off during the execution of the jackpot game, and the power will be turned on after that. By operating the relief maintenance button at the time (RAM clear operation, setting change operation), when initializing the game state, you can initialize the jackpot game in progress, and change the special symbol in the low probability state. The count for the number of times (relief number counter) can be counted from where it left off when the power was cut off, and in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, it can be easily confirmed that the pachinko machine 1 will shift to the low probability time saving state B.

In the above, the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even in a configuration where the relief maintenance button is not provided, the power is cut off during the execution of a jackpot game, and when the power is turned on afterwards (at the time of RAM clear operation), When changing settings), the hall manager can select whether to maintain the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief counter) in a low probability state according to the hall environment. preferable. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either a setting change operation or a RAM clear operation, the jackpot game is erased and the number of changes of special symbols in a low probability state (relief number counter) is changed. By maintaining the count without resetting it, it can be adapted to the needs of the hall manager.

In addition, as described above in detail, in the effect display device 1600, the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed as a "help mode L precursor effect" until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. A count effect is executed to notify you of the number of changes in . Regarding the current count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief counter) in such a low probability state, whether or not the hall manager resets the count even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is other than 500 to 600. In order to make it possible for the hall manager to check whether the setting value is correct or not, it is also displayed during the period when the setting value is being changed or the display confirmation of the setting value is being performed. In the following, a history display that is displayed during a period when settings of setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed will be explained.

FIG. 211 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period when settings of setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed. This example shows a state in which the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, and the setting value is changed. When a setting change operation is performed, the setting value that has already been set (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) can be changed.

211(A) and 211(B) show the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting change of the setting value is being performed, and FIG. 211(A) shows the display screen of the effect display device 1600 when the setting change of the setting value is started. This is the display screen immediately after the display, and a message image "Settings changing" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a guide image for switching to the history display (operation image showing the production operation section 310) is displayed below it. Ru. FIG. 211(B) is a history display image that is switched from the display screen of FIG. 211(A) when the effect operation section 310 is operated.

In Fig. 211(B), the first history display part is displayed where you can check the history of the past 12 times line by line on one screen, and it displays "date and time information" based on RTC information, and the above-mentioned changes in special symbols. "Information regarding gaming status" that indicates whether the gaming status including display and jackpot games, etc. has been initialized, "Information regarding setting value" representing the current setting value, "Information regarding count value of relief number counter", Work information such as RAM clear operations and setting change operations is recorded in order from the left. This information is stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so that it will not be erased even if a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed. In other words, the displays in FIGS. 211(A) and 211(B) are caused by transmitting various information stored in the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed. This is an effect image generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in FIG. 211(B), the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display section is a display related to the current setting change operation, and " The information "Currently changing" is recorded in the section "Information related to setting values", and is updated when the setting values are finalized. Further, a guide image (operation image showing the effect operation section 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. 211(A) is displayed at the lower left of the first history display section, and at the lower right of the first history display section , the current "information regarding the count value of the relief number counter" is displayed in an emphasized manner.

Currently, there are two types of "information regarding the count value of the relief counter": "number of changes after RAM clear" and "number of changes after jackpot", and "number of changes after RAM clear" includes the relief maintenance button. When the count value of the rescue number counter is reset to the initial value due to a RAM clear operation or setting change operation without being operated, the total number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. In addition, in the "number of fluctuations after jackpot", if a jackpot game is executed during the game progress and the count value of the relief counter is reset to the initial value, the number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. be done. In other words, if a jackpot game is not executed during the progress of the game, zero will be displayed in the "number of changes after jackpot" and a numerical value will be recorded only in the "number of changes after RAM clear". In addition, the example of FIG. 211(B) shows a case where a jackpot game is executed during the progress of the game, and "412" is recorded in "Number of fluctuations after jackpot", and "412" is recorded in "Number of changes after RAM clear". Only ``2995'' is recorded in the ``number of fluctuations'', and the hall manager can recognize the count value of the rescue number counter from ``412'', which is the ``number of fluctuations after jackpot''.

In this example, since the setting change operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on, RAM clear is executed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting change operation is completed. The count value of the relief number counter will be reset to the initial value. In other words, before the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value, the hole manager can input the count value of the relief number counter (count value before initialization) by "412" which is the "number of changes after jackpot". ) can be recognized. After recognizing the count value of the relief count counter (the count value before initialization), if you want to maintain the count value of the relief count counter, you can do so without finishing the setting change operation (switch the setting key 1311a), and then operate the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on again to maintain the count value of the relief counter.

FIG. 211(C) shows the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting change operation has been completed, and the history display image is displayed continuously from the display screen of FIG. 211(B). Further, the display screen in FIG. 211(C) is displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting change operation is completed. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the history display screen is erased. In addition, in FIG. 211(C), in the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display section, "information regarding setting values" is Since the set value has been determined by the end of the operation, the determined value ("4" in this example) is updated and displayed. In addition, this example shows a case where the setting change operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on, and when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting change operation is completed, the RAM is cleared. is executed, and the count value of the relief counter is reset to the initial value, so the "number of changes after RAM clear" and "number of changes after jackpot" are updated to their initial values of zero. Is displayed. Note that the date and time information may also be updated and displayed when the setting change operation is completed.

In addition, if the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting change operation is completed, the count value of the rescue number counter is In order to maintain the ``Number of fluctuations after clearing RAM'' and ``Number of fluctuations after jackpot'', the values displayed during the setting change operation (``Number of fluctuations after clearing RAM'' is ``2995'', "412") is continuously displayed in the "number of changes after jackpot" without being updated.

As described above, during the period when the setting value is being changed or the display of the setting value is being checked, the hall manager can perform any operation to check the current count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter), and can decide whether or not to reset the count value of the rescue counter without inadvertently revealing to those around him. In other words, if the hall manager wants to reset the count value of the rescue counter, he can simply reset the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) without operating the rescue maintenance button when turning the power back on after cutting off the power, and if he does not want to reset the count value of the rescue counter, he can operate the rescue maintenance button when turning the power back on after cutting off the power, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) can be maintained.

In addition to the above, the second history display section also shows, for example, the number of times the special symbol changed in the low probability state reached 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and the number of times the control was performed in the low probability time saving state B. etc. may be displayed.

Further, during the period when the settings of the set values are being changed or the display of the set values is being checked, the ball launch device 540 is in a state where it is not possible to perform the launch control to launch the game ball B. This means that during the period when the setting value is changed or the setting value display is confirmed, the current count (when the setting value is changed or the setting value However, if the ball launcher 540 is enabled to launch the game ball B during such a period, the number of balls entering the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 is displayed. Sometimes, the number of times the special symbol changes (relief number counter) in a low probability state is counted up, causing a discrepancy with the count being displayed. In this regard, during the period when the settings of the setting values are being changed or the display of the setting values is being checked, the firing control for firing the game ball B from the ball firing device 540 cannot be performed. There is no discrepancy with the count, and the hall manager can accurately grasp the current count.

(About the handling of normal symbols when turning on the power)
In this example, in the time saving state, it is set so that it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time saving state. However, the state in which it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 may be executed over the timing of transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state, Immediately after that, there is a possibility that the state in which it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 continues. Similarly, even if the specification is such that only the time-saving state is initialized by administrator operation and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, immediately after returning to the low-probability non-time-saving state, the game ball B is inserted into the variable prize opening 2003. If the state where acceptance is easy continues, this state does not correspond to the gaming state and a feeling of discomfort occurs. For this reason, when the time-saving state is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state by administrator operation, it is preferable to simultaneously erase the state in which it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003. On the other hand, it is preferable to maintain the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state. In this way, the configuration that makes it possible to initialize the time-saving state and return to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low-probability state will be explained below. do.

In the time saving state, it is set so that it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time saving state. For example, when a regular lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result of a regular symbol will be a "normal win" is increased, or when the lottery result of a regular symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning slot door 2521 is closed. By increasing the time and number of times that the variable winning hole 2003 is open, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003. As a result, in the non-time saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable prize opening 2003, so the game in which the game ball B is entered into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 becomes mainstream. On the other hand, in the time saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time saving state, so the game in which the game ball B is entered into the variable winning hole 2003 has become mainstream. There is. In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and the number of times the special symbol changes in that low probability state is 600 times ( When the number of relief counters reaches 600), control is performed to a low probability time saving state B. Here, in a time-saving state (for example, low probability time-saving state A), it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in a non-time-saving state, so the special symbols are displayed more variably per unit time. This can be carried out, and the count for the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state can be advanced quickly. As a result, in the time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A), the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state can easily reach 600 times (relief number counter = 600), and control is made to the low probability time saving state B. The period of time can be shortened.

Specifically, when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of a normal symbol in a normal lottery in a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) will be a "normal hit" is 0/100, and In the normal lottery in the probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, and low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal win" is 100/100. However, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal win" may be set higher in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. For example, in a normal lottery in the non-time-saving state, the probability is 1/100. However, in a normal lottery in a time-saving state, it may be set to 99/100.

Further, when a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 executes a variable display of the normal symbols based on the lottery results of the normal symbols drawn, suggesting the lottery results of the normal symbols. Note that the variable display of the normal symbols may be executed not only in the function display unit 1400 but also in the effect display device 1600. In addition, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal win", when the fluctuating display of the normal symbol stops, the normal winning symbol corresponding to "normal win" will be stopped and displayed, and the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "lost". In this case, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is stopped, the normal losing symbols corresponding to "losing" are stopped and displayed. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbols is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state and 0.01 seconds in the time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variable display of normal symbols can be frequently executed.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed when the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, the variable winning opening 2003, which is closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 to 10 seconds). state, and the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning hole 2003. In this example, when the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state, the opening/closing pattern is executed once for 0.5 seconds as the time when the variable winning hole 2003 is in the open state, and the normal winning symbol is displayed in the time saving state. When the stop display is performed, the opening/closing pattern is executed twice for 1.5 seconds as the time during which the variable winning hole 2003 is in the open state. The opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 is determined depending on whether the gaming state at the time when the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed is a non-time saving state or a time saving state. For example, even if you are in a non-time saving state at the start of the fluctuating display of a normal symbol, if you transition from a non-time saving state to a time saving state during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol, and are in the time saving state when the normal winning symbol stops displaying, executes the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 in the time saving state, and even if it is in the time saving state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state during the variable display of the normal symbol, If it is in a non-time-saving state when the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 in the non-time-saving state is executed. As a result, regarding the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003, for example, a situation where the variable winning opening 2003 opens/closes in an advantageous opening/closing pattern (opening/closing pattern in the time saving state) even though it has transitioned to a non-time saving state is prevented as much as possible. The variable prize opening 2003 can be opened and closed in accordance with the gaming state without causing any discomfort.

In addition, if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 while the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it is not possible to start the variable display in the normal symbol. (until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol is completed). Further, the number of reservations for the normal symbol lottery is set at the upper limit of four, and for more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is not reserved and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

FIG. 212 is a time chart showing behavior related to normal symbols when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 212(A), after turning off the power switch 630a to shut off the power, normal power on without RAM clearing or setting change operation (do not turn on the RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) If only the power switch 630a is operated), the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the gaming state is changed to the power supply based on the backup created when the power was cut off. It has returned to the state it was in when it was shut off. In other words, if the power is cut off in a time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and then the normal power is turned on, the gaming state will It is designed to return to the time saving state when the power is cut off.

In addition, when the power is turned on normally after the power is cut off (power outage), RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the backup created at the time of the power cut is Based on this, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained at the time of power cutoff. In other words, when the power is turned on normally, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from where it left off when the power was turned off. For example, when the power is turned off, if the count of the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in a low probability state is 105, the count will be maintained when the power is turned on normally, and after the power is turned on normally. By stopping the variation display of the special symbol, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is incremented by 1 and updated to 106 times. In this example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), The control is assumed to be in the probability time saving state B, but for example, if the power is turned on normally when the hall starts operating, the gaming state is returned to the state when the power was cut off, and the control is set to the low probability state. Since the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) is maintained, the number of times the special symbol changes and is displayed in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B can be reduced. Therefore, the players can expect that the state will shift to the low probability time saving state B as soon as the hall starts operating.

In addition, if the normal symbol is being displayed while changing when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will not be executed when the power is turned on again. Based on the backup created at the time, the fluctuating display of normal symbols is resumed from where it left off when the power was cut off. In addition, if the opening/closing pattern of the variable prize opening 2003 is being executed when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a should not be executed when the power is turned on normally thereafter. Based on the backup created when the power was cut off, the opening/closing pattern of the variable prize opening 2003 is restarted from where it left off when the power was cut off. In addition, if there is a normal symbol on hold when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will not be executed when the power is turned on normally, so the design will be created when the power is turned off. Based on the backup that has been made, the number of normal symbols held at the time of power cut is restored. Therefore, when the power is turned on normally, the gaming state is returned to the state when the power was cut off, and the behavior related to the normal symbols is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the audio output from the speakers are controlled according to the game state. For example, during the period of controlling to low probability time saving states A to C, effect control corresponding to each time saving state is executed. Then, when the power is turned on normally after the power is cut off, the behavior related to the gaming state and normal symbols is restored from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be OFF until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A restart control is executed to notify that a count is maintained for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state. Specifically, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit purple light, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The gaming state has been restored." The system outputs an image saying, ``The number of rescue attempts is being maintained.'' and a voice that says ``The gaming state has been restored. The number of rescue attempts is being maintained.'' is output from the speaker.

FIG. 212(B) shows a case where the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on after the power switch 630a is turned OFF to shut off the power. 212(C), when the power is turned on after the power switch 630a is turned OFF to shut off the power, a RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. It explains the case where there is. As mentioned above in detail, when the RAM clear operation is performed, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is reset, whereas the RAM clear operation At times, when the relief maintenance button is operated, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. In other words, depending on whether or not the hole manager operates the relief maintenance button, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state. Note that the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is stored in a second specific area (a specific area different from the set value) of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a. The count can be maintained if the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation.

As shown in FIG. 212(B), after the power switch 630a is turned OFF to cut off the power, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, the A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM, and the gaming state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in a time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the gaming state will be It is designed to be initialized to a stochastic non-time saving state.

In addition, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off (power outage), the RAM (including the second specific area) built in the main control MPU 1310a will be initialized. The RAM is cleared, and the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. The initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. For example, if the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state is 105 at the time of power cut, by not operating the relief maintenance button during the subsequent RAM clear operation, the initial value By resetting the count to "0" and then stopping the special symbol fluctuation display, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is increased by 1, and counting starts from 1. That's what I do. In this example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), Although the control is assumed to be in the probability time saving state B, for example, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the hall starts operating, the gaming state is initialized and the state is changed to the low probability state. Since the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) is reset, it is necessary to display the variation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. , the transition to the low probability time saving state B does not occur immediately after the opening of the hall, and the expectations of the players do not rise too soon.

In addition, if the normal symbol is being displayed while changing when the power is turned off, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a during a subsequent RAM clear operation without operating the relief maintenance button. , the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off is erased, and the display is prevented from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if the opening/closing pattern of the variable prize opening 2003 is being executed when the power is cut off, the RAM that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a during the RAM clear operation without operating the relief maintenance button after that. Clearing is executed to erase the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 that was being executed when the power was cut off, and to prevent it from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if there is a hold on normal symbols when the power is turned off, during the subsequent RAM clear operation without operating the relief maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power is The number of pending normal symbols that were on hold at the time of power cut is erased to prevent the state from returning to the state before the power was cut off. Therefore, in the case of a RAM clear operation without operating the relief maintenance button, the game state is initialized, the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the count related to the normal symbol is reset. As for behavior, the state is erased when the power is turned off.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the audio output from the speakers are controlled according to the game state. For example, during the period of controlling to low probability time saving states A to C, effect control corresponding to each time saving state is executed. If a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after the power is turned off, the data related to the gaming state and normal symbols will be cleared from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period has elapsed. Erasure control 1 is executed to notify that the count for the number of changes (relief number counter) of the special symbol in the behavior and low probability state has been erased. Specifically, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message ``Complete the game status and number of rescues.'' The system outputs an image saying, ``The game status and number of relief attempts have been cleared.'' from the speaker.

As shown in FIG. 212(C), after the power switch 630a is turned OFF to shut off the power, if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in a time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the gaming state will be It is designed to be initialized to a stochastic non-time saving state. Note that the initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off (power outage), RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, but the RAM The second specific area is not initialized, and based on the backup created at the time of power cut, the count for the number of changes of special symbols (relief counter) in the low probability state is the count at power cut. is maintained. That is, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the point where the power was cut off. For example, when the power is cut off, if the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is 105, the count is maintained during the subsequent RAM clear operation when operating the relief maintenance button, By stopping the variation display of the special symbol after operating the RAM clear operation to operate the relief maintenance button, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in a low probability state is increased by 1 and updated to 106 times. . In this example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), Although the control is assumed to be in the probability time saving state B, for example, if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button when the hall starts operating, the gaming state will be initialized but the control will be in the low probability state. Since the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) is maintained, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B can be displayed is small. Therefore, it is possible to make the players expect to shift to the low probability time saving state B as soon as the hall starts operating.

In addition, if the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner when the power is turned off, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a during a subsequent RAM clear operation when operating the relief maintenance button. , the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off is erased, and the display is prevented from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if the opening/closing pattern of the variable prize opening 2003 is being executed when the power is cut off, the RAM that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a during the subsequent RAM clear operation that operates the relief maintenance button. Clearing is executed to erase the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 that was being executed when the power was cut off, and to prevent it from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if there is a hold on the normal symbols when the power is turned off, during the subsequent RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power is turned off. The number of pending normal symbols that were on hold at the time of power cut is erased to prevent the state from returning to the state before the power was cut off. Therefore, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state is initialized, and the state at the time of power cut-off is also erased for the behavior related to the normal symbols.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the audio output from the speakers are controlled according to the game state. For example, during the period of controlling to low probability time saving states A to C, effect control corresponding to each time saving state is executed. If the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is turned off, the game status and normal symbols will be Erasure control 2 is executed to notify that the behavior of the special symbol is erased and that a count is maintained for the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter). Specifically, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Game status has been cleared." The system outputs an image saying, ``The number of rescue attempts is being maintained.'' and a voice that says ``The gaming state has been cleared. The number of rescue attempts is being maintained.'' is output from the speaker.

In this example, when the power is turned on normally after the power is turned off, the gaming state is returned to the state at the time of the power cut, and the behavior related to normal symbols is also returned to the state at the time of the power cut. ing. On the other hand, after the power is turned off, regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated, if the RAM clear operation is being performed, the gaming state will be initialized and the behavior related to normal symbols will also be changed. The state is erased when the power is turned off. As a result, regarding the behavior related to normal symbols, even though the gaming state has been initialized and shifted to the non-time saving state, advantageous behavior (for example, the variable prize opening 2003 opens and closes in the opening/closing pattern of the time saving state) It is possible to prevent the situation from continuing, and it is possible to perform the behavior related to the normal symbols so that there is no sense of discomfort in accordance with the gaming state.

In addition, in this example, if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, when initializing the game state, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter) ) is maintained. On the other hand, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after the power is turned off, when initializing the game state, the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter) Resetting the count. In other words, when the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off, the behavior related to the normal symbol being executed is initialized when the gaming state is initialized, but there is a low probability whether or not you want to change the setting value. Depending on whether or not you want to maintain the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief counter) in the state, the hall manager can operate the designated operation section, and the hall manager can selectively perform the operation depending on the hall environment. can do.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clear operation is performed, when initializing the gaming state, it depends on whether the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. , the notification format to be notified to the outside is different. As a result, even if, for example, the hall manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on and maintains the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state, the The notification mode allows the hall manager to notice the mistake and prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In addition, in this example, after the power is turned off, regardless of whether the relief maintenance button is operated or not, if the RAM clear operation is performed, the gaming state is initialized and the behavior related to normal symbols is Also, the state at the time of power cut is erased, but after the power is cut off, regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated or not, if a setting change operation is performed, the gaming state is initialized. At the same time, the behavior related to normal symbols is also the same in that the state when the power is cut off is erased. However, the difference is that during the RAM clear operation, the already set setting values are maintained, whereas during the setting change operation, the setting values can be changed.

In addition, in this example, after the power is turned off, regardless of whether the relief maintenance button is operated or not, if the RAM clear operation is performed, the gaming state is initialized and the behavior related to normal symbols is Also, the state when the power is turned off is erased, but as mentioned above, when the game state is initialized, the special symbol fluctuation display and jackpot game that are being executed when the power is turned off are also erased. Therefore, there is no possibility of returning to the variable display of special symbols or the jackpot game that is being executed.

(RAM clear during low probability time saving state)
In this example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), It is assumed that control is performed in a stochastic time saving state B. For example, if preparations are made so that the number of changes in the special symbol in a low probability state (relief counter) is close to 600 (relief counter = 600) before the opening of the hall, then after the opening of the hall , the special symbols will need to be displayed less frequently in the low-probability state until the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the hall will shift to the low-probability time-saving state B as soon as the hall opens. It is possible to make players expect that. On the other hand, if preparations are made so that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is far from 600 (relief number counter = 600) before the opening of the hall, then after the opening of the hall , it is necessary to display the special symbols in the low probability state many times before shifting from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, and it is difficult to shift to the low probability time saving state B as soon as the hall starts operating. Therefore, the expectations of the players do not rise too quickly. However, before the opening of the hall, at the stage of preparing to count the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter), the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state C occurs. In this case, if the hall starts operating in the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state C, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state will proceed too favorably. Therefore, if the low probability non-time saving state shifts to low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state C before the opening of the hall, the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state will be counted. It is preferable to initialize the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state C to return to the low probability non-time saving state while maintaining the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state C. In this way, it is possible to initialize the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state C to return to the low probability non-time saving state while maintaining the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state. The configuration that makes this possible will be described below.

FIG. 213 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the RAM clear operation is performed during the time saving state. FIG. 213(A) describes a case where a RAM clearing operation is performed during a low probability time saving state C, and FIG. 213(B) shows a case where a RAM clearing operation is performed during a low probability time saving state A. In FIG. 213(C), a case where the RAM clear operation is performed during the low probability time saving state B is described. In this example, each time the special symbol is displayed in a low-probability state, the relief counter is incremented when the special symbol stops varying.

As shown in FIG. 213(A), in the symbol variation C where the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is the 353rd time (relief number counter = 353), when an immediate short hit occurs and the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The controller shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C, and after the immediate short winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. Also, during the control of low probability time saving state C, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the fluctuation display of the special symbol will be displayed until it reaches 700 times. During this period, control is performed to a low probability time saving state B. That is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, if the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), if the symbol variation Z is executed, the low probability time saving state C is changed to After shifting to the probability time saving state B, and after the symbol fluctuation Z is stopped and displayed, control is performed to the low probability time saving state B.

Further, as an external device, an external information device is provided above the pachinko machine 1 to convey game information to the player. Here, the external device displays the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot, but regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief frequency counter is counted up when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. Similarly, the count is counted up when the special symbols stop changing, and the count is reset using the jackpot as an opportunity to reset the count of the rescue number counter. Therefore, when controlling to a low-probability state triggered by a jackpot, the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device matches the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief counter) in the low-probability state. I will do it. In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600 (relief number counter = 600). ), and it can be determined whether or not the transition to the low probability time saving state B is reached.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, information regarding the game can be transmitted to external equipment such as a hall computer via the external output terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 in accordance with the progress of the game. The external device is, for example, a hall computer that controls the information of the game hall or an external information device installed above each pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and based on the information transmitted via the external output terminal 558a, It is possible to grasp the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, information about the pachinko machine 1, etc., monitor whether illegal games are being played, and provide players with information regarding the history of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, Information on the number of daily jackpots, information on the number of changes in symbols up to each jackpot, information on the number of prize balls at each jackpot, information on the number of times shortening changes continue, etc.) can be provided numerically or graphically. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when transitioning to special gaming states such as the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C that are controlled in the new manner described above, the , information regarding these special gaming conditions is appropriately transmitted to external equipment.

As will be described in detail later, the external output terminal 558ad outputs, for example, a symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol to an external device. The above-mentioned main control board 1310 transmits a symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, and also counts up the above-mentioned relief counter. The symbol confirmation signal outputted through the external control board 1510 is output every time the variation of the special symbol stops, including when the symbol confirmation command is not sent to the peripheral control board 1510 or when the relief counter described above is not counted up. Output to the device. The symbol confirmation signal is an electrical signal that is output for a shorter time than the shortest variation time of the special symbol, and in this embodiment, it is an electrical signal that is output for 0.128 seconds, for example. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the special symbols change continuously, the symbol confirmation signal can be reliably input to the external device, and the special symbols can be input at the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The number of fluctuations (so-called number of starts) can be appropriately managed.

Then, in the symbol variation D in the low probability time saving state C, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is the 354th time (relief number counter = 354), but after the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off. , If a RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after that, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is is initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state C and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state will be initialized to the low probability non time saving state. ing. Note that the initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is turned off, a RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specified RAM The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is cut off, the count for the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in low probability states is maintained at the time the power was cut off. There is. That is, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the point where the power was cut off. Here, in the symbol variation E' after initialization to a low probability non-time saving state, the number of relief counters at the time of power cut-off is 354, so the number-of-relief counter at the time of power cut-off is counted up, The variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state is made to be the 355th time (relief number counter = 355). In this way, if the power is cut off in the low probability time saving state C and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state will be While maintaining the count, the low probability time saving state C can be initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. Therefore, even if the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C occurs at the stage of preparing to count the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in the low probability state before the opening of the hall, By clearing the RAM while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is turned off, the low probability time saving state C can be initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. The count of the number of times counter) can be maintained without being reset, making it easier for the hall manager to operate it during the preparation stage.

In addition, during control in the low probability non-time saving state, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the fluctuation display of the special symbol will be displayed until it reaches 700 times. During this period, control is performed to a low probability time saving state B. That is, during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, if the symbol variation Z' is executed in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), from the low probability non-time saving state After shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B and stopping displaying the symbol fluctuation Z', control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, if the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the main control A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the MPU 1310a, and the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is cut off, 354 times is displayed as the number of changes in the special symbol on the external device, but if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button afterwards. , 0 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol on the external device. Therefore, if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device will be affected by the change in the special symbol in a low probability state. This does not match the count of the number of times (relief number counter). For example, when the symbol variation Z' is stopped and displayed when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state, 246 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol on the external device. In such a case, simply by visually checking the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will reach 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will reach the low probability time saving state. It is not possible to determine whether or not to move to B. Therefore, even though 246 times is displayed as the number of special symbol fluctuations on the external device, the symbol fluctuation Z' in which the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) After the stop display, it can be made to appear as if the low probability non-time saving state has suddenly shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, as described above in detail, until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (relief number counter = 500 to 600), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 is When stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state. Such a count performance is restricted from being executed due to symbol variations in the low probability time saving state C, and in the low probability time saving state C, the time saving performance corresponding to the low probability time saving state C is executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state C and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state C is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. However, in the symbol fluctuation in the low probability non-time saving state, it is possible to execute a count effect. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state, but the display of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state By executing the count effect until it reaches 500 to 600 times (relief number counter = 500 to 600), during the execution of the count effect, you can check how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state. You will be able to determine whether it is present.

As shown in FIG. 213(B), when the jackpot D occurs, control is performed to the low probability time saving state A after the jackpot D symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, during the control of the low probability time saving state A, if the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the special symbol will continue from the low probability time saving state A. It is assumed that control is performed in the low probability time saving state B until the number of fluctuation displays reaches 700 times. That is, during the control of the low probability time saving state A, if a symbol variation Z is executed in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), After shifting to the probability time saving state B, and after the symbol fluctuation Z is stopped and displayed, control is performed to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, regarding the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter), the count is reset when the jackpot is triggered, so when controlling to the low probability time saving state A triggered by the jackpot D, the external device The number of variations of the special symbol displayed in the figure matches the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state. In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief counter = 600). ), and it can be determined whether or not the transition to the low probability time saving state B is reached.

In the symbol variation D in the low probability time saving state A, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is the 354th time (relief number counter = 354), but after the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off. , If a RAM clear operation (operating the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after that, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is is initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state A and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state will be initialized to the low probability non time saving state. ing. Note that the initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is turned off, a RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specified RAM The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is cut off, the count for the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in low probability states is maintained at the time the power was cut off. There is. That is, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the point where the power was cut off. Here, in the symbol variation E' after initialization to a low probability non-time saving state, the number of relief counters at the time of power cut-off is 354, so the number-of-relief counter at the time of power cut-off is counted up, The variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state is made to be the 355th time (relief number counter = 355). In this way, if the power is cut off in the low probability time saving state A and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state will be While maintaining the count, the low probability time saving state A can be initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. Therefore, even if the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state A occurs at the stage of preparing to count the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state before the opening of the hall, By clearing the RAM while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is turned off, the low probability time saving state A can be initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state, and the number of changes of special symbols in the low probability state (relief The count of the number of times counter) can be maintained without being reset, making it easier for the hall manager to operate it during the preparation stage.

In addition, during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the fluctuation display of the special symbol will be displayed until it reaches 700 times. During this period, control is performed to a low probability time saving state B. That is, during control in the low probability non-time saving state, if the symbol variation Z' is executed in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the control from the low probability non-time saving state After shifting to the low probability time saving state B, and after the symbol fluctuation Z' is stopped and displayed, control is performed to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, if the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the main control A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the MPU 1310a, and the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is cut off, 354 times is displayed as the number of changes in the special symbol on the external device, but if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button afterwards. , 0 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol on the external device. Therefore, if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device will be affected by the change in the special symbol in a low probability state. This will not match the count of the number of times (relief number counter). For example, when the symbol variation Z' is stopped and displayed when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state, 246 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol on the external device. In such a case, simply by visually checking the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will reach 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will reach the low probability time saving state. It is not possible to determine whether or not to move to B. Therefore, even though 246 times is displayed as the number of special symbol fluctuations on the external device, the symbol fluctuation Z' in which the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) After the stop display, it can be made to appear as if the low probability non-time saving state has suddenly shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, as described above in detail, until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (relief number counter = 500 to 600), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is When stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state. Such a count performance is restricted from being executed due to symbol variations in the low probability time saving state A, and in the low probability time saving state A, the time saving performance corresponding to the low probability time saving state A is executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state A and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state A is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. However, in the symbol fluctuation in the low probability non-time saving state, it is possible to execute a count effect. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state, but the display of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state By executing the count effect until it reaches 500 to 600 times (relief number counter = 500 to 600), during the execution of the count effect, you can check how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state. You will be able to determine whether it is present.

As shown in FIG. 213(C), when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), control is made to the low probability time saving state B. Further, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, if the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the state is returned to the low probability non time saving state. That is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, if a symbol variation Z is executed in which the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 700, the symbol variation Z shifts from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non time saving state. After the stop display, the display is controlled to a low probability non-time saving state.

In addition, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is reset when the jackpot is triggered, so the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief number counter = 600). At the time the count is reached, the count has not been reset. Therefore, after the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), control is performed to the low probability time saving state B, but during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the Regarding the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the probability state (relief number counter), counting will continue from the already counted 600 times. Furthermore, the count is not reset for the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). Therefore, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device will match the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state. For example, during the control of probability time saving state B, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 700 when symbol variation Z is executed, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1400 (relief number counter = 1400). The number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device is 1400 times.

In the symbol variation D in the low probability time saving state B, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is the 900th time (relief number counter = 900), but after the symbol variation D has stopped being displayed, the power is cut off. , If a RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after that, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is is initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state will be initialized to the low probability non time saving state. ing. Note that the initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is turned off, a RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specified RAM The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is cut off, the count for the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in low probability states is maintained at the time the power was cut off. There is. That is, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the point where the power was cut off. Here, in the symbol variation E' after initialization to the low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter at the time of power cut-off is 900, so the count-up is performed against the relief count counter at the time of power cut-off, The variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state is made to be the 901st time (relief number counter = 901). In this way, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state will be While maintaining the count, the low probability time saving state B can be initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. Therefore, even if the hall is controlled to be in the low-probability time-saving state B before the hall starts operating, the low-probability time-saving state B can be initialized by clearing the RAM while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is turned off. The number of changes in the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state can be maintained without resetting, and the hole manager can It can be made easier to operate.

In addition, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, low probability time saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. However, since the count for the relief number counter starts from where it left off when the power was cut off, after transitioning from low probability time saving state B to low probability non-time saving state, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600. Even if it reaches the number of times, at that point, the count of the number of times of relief counter is 1500 times. In this way, when transitioning from low probability time saving state B to low probability non time saving state, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 during the control of the low probability non time saving state. , the relief count counter is not 600 and the relief count counter is 1500, so there is no transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. That is, during control of the low probability non-time saving state, even if the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600 symbol variations Z', the change from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B Even after the symbol variation Z' is stopped and displayed, the control continues to be in a low probability non-time saving state.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off in the low probability time saving state B, and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state B is initialized to the low probability non time saving state. Since the count for the relief number counter starts from where it left off when the power was cut off, after transitioning from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non-time saving state, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600. Even if the number of times reached, the relief count counter does not reach 600, and the low probability non-time saving state does not transition to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, low probability time saving state B is initialized and changed to low probability non time saving state. As for the count on the return and rescue number counter, the count is reset, so when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 after transitioning from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non time saving state. Then, the relief count counter=600, and the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. Therefore, if the power is cut off in the low probability time saving state B and the RAM clear operation is performed after that, the player will not know whether or not the relief maintenance button was operated at the time of the RAM clear operation. After the opening of the hall, when the number of variations of special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600, it can be made impossible to determine whether to shift to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, if the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the main control A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the MPU 1310a, and the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is turned off, 900 times is displayed as the number of changes in the special symbol on the external device, but if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button afterwards. , 0 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol on the external device. Therefore, if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device will be affected by the change in the special symbol in the low probability state. This does not match the count of the number of times (relief number counter). For example, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B, and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. After transitioning to the low probability non-time saving state, when the symbol variation Z' is stopped and displayed when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the rescue number counter = 1500, but the special symbol is not displayed on the external device. 600 times is displayed as the number of fluctuations. In such a case, since 600 times is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol on the external device, the symbol whose number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 after transitioning to the low probability non-time saving state After the stop display of the fluctuation Z', it appears as if the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, but in reality, the relief count counter = 1500 and the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B. Never. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability time saving state B only by visually recognizing the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device.

In addition, as described above in detail, until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (relief number counter = 500 to 600), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 is When stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state. Here, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. However, there is no subsequent transition to the low probability time saving state B, and the count performance is restricted not to be performed in the symbol variation in the low probability non time saving state. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. However, after that, there is a possibility of transitioning to the low probability time saving state B, and in the symbol fluctuation in the low probability non time saving state, it is possible to execute a count effect. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the count of the relief number counter cannot be determined, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the state changes to the low probability time saving state B. It is not possible to determine whether the transition will occur or not, but if the count effect is executed during control in the low probability non-time saving state, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the low probability It becomes possible to determine that the state will transition to the probability time saving state B.

In this example, the case is explained in which the power is cut off in any of the low probability time saving states A to C, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. When the button is not operated, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. In addition, if the power is cut off in any of the low probability time saving states A to C and a RAM clear operation is performed after that, at least the specified period from the RAM clear operation will be It is preferable that the initial performance display after the time (combination of decorative patterns, background image, etc. displayed on the performance display device 1600) and the light emission patterns of the various lamps be the same. As a result, after the opening of the hall, depending on the initial performance display, etc., it is possible to determine whether the hall manager has operated the relief maintenance button or not, that is, to count the number of changes in the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in a low probability state. The player cannot determine whether or not the reset has been performed.

In addition, since there are no players within a predetermined period of time after the RAM clear operation (before the start of business), the hall manager will receive a message according to the type of RAM clear operation (whether or not the relief maintenance button was operated). You may also make a notification. For example, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is turned off, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 will be displayed in yellow to notify the outside world. It is made to emit light, and an image saying "The gaming state and the number of rescues have been cleared" is output on the performance display device 1600, and a voice saying "The gaming state and the number of rescues have been cleared" is output from the speaker. There is. On the other hand, if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 will be displayed in blue to notify the outside. It emits light, outputs an image on the production display device 1600 that says "Game state has been cleared. The number of rescues is maintained.", and the speaker outputs "The game state has been cleared. The number of rescues is maintained." .” is output.

(Delay in the start time of low probability time saving state B due to RAM clear operation: When counting against the relief counter at the start of fluctuation)
In the above, each time the special symbol fluctuation display is executed in a low probability state, the relief count counter is counted up when the special symbol fluctuation stops, but as a modified example, the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state is It may be configured such that each time the display is executed, the relief number counter is counted up at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In such a configuration, at the start of a symbol variation in which the special symbol is displayed 600 times in a low probability state, the relief number counter is counted up until the relief number counter = 600, and after the symbol variation is stopped and displayed. In this case, control is performed to a low probability time saving state B. In other words, the timing at which the relief count counter is counted up to reach 600 and the timing at which the low probability time saving state B is entered are different. Then, if the power is cut off while the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the special symbol in the low probability state While maintaining the count of the number of symbol variations (relief counter), the symbol variation that was being executed when the power was cut off was deleted, but the special symbol variation display in the low probability state that will be executed after that is 601 In the symbol fluctuation reaching the number of times, the low probability time saving state B is not controlled, and the start timing of the low probability time saving state B is delayed. Such a configuration will be explained below.

Figure 214 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when a RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state. Figure 214 (A) describes the case where a RAM clear operation is not performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state, and the case where a RAM clear operation is performed, Figure 214 (B) describes the details of the case where a RAM clear operation is not performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state, and Figure 214 (C) describes the details of the case where a RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state. Note that, in this example, each time the special pattern display is executed in the low probability state, the rescue counter is counted up at the start of the special pattern display, and after the stop display of the pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) in the low probability state, the low probability time-saving state B is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 214(A), during control in the low probability non-time saving state, if the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief number counter = 600), the change in the special symbol It is assumed that the control is performed in the low probability time saving state B until the display reaches 700 times. In this example, during control in the low probability non-time saving state, at the start of symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the relief frequency counter is counted up and the relief frequency counter = 600. In this case, after the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(B), when starting symbol fluctuation D in which the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 600 during control in the low probability non-time saving state, At the start, the relief number counter is counted up and set to 600. Then, the symbol fluctuation D is stopped and displayed, and when the fixed time t (determined stop time) of the stopped symbol has elapsed, the relief number counter is referred to, and when the relief number counter = 600, the low probability time saving state B starts. When it is determined that the timing is right, the low probability time saving state B flag indicating that control is to be performed to the low probability time saving state B is turned on, and the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Then, if there is no hold when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation A1 under the control of the low probability time saving state B is started after waiting for a start winning. I try to do that. In addition, if there is a hold at the time when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the symbol variation A1 under the control of the low probability time saving state B is immediately changed after the fixed time t has elapsed. I'm trying to get started.

Further, as an external device, an external information device is provided above the pachinko machine 1 to convey game information to the player. Here, the external device displays the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot, but regarding the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief number counter is counted up when the special symbol begins to change. On the other hand, the count is counted up when the special symbol stops changing, and the count is reset using the jackpot as a trigger, just as the count of the relief counter is reset using the jackpot as a trigger. For this reason, when controlling to a low probability state using a jackpot as an opportunity, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device will be changed to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state ( This will match the count of the relief frequency counter). In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600 (relief number counter = 600). ), and it can be determined whether or not the transition to the low probability time saving state B is reached.

As shown in FIG. 214(A), at the start of symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, after counting up the relief number counter and reaching the relief number counter = 600, If the power is cut off during the execution of symbol variation D, and then a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a A RAM clear is executed to initialize the game, and the gaming state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). In this example, since the gaming state at the time of power cut-off is a low probability non-time saving state, there will be no change in the gaming state if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button afterwards. In addition, if the power is cut off while symbol variation D is being executed, and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, a RAM clear operation is performed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The symbol variation D that was being executed when the power was cut off is erased, and the state before the power cut is not restored. Note that the initialization of the gaming state and the erasure of symbol fluctuations are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is turned off, a RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specified RAM The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is cut off, the count for the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in low probability states is maintained at the time the power was cut off. There is. That is, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the relief maintenance button, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the point where the power was cut off. Here, at the start of symbol variation E after the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is 600, so the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is The special symbol is counted up for the 601st time (relief number counter = 601) in the low probability state. After the symbol variation E is stopped and displayed, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(C), when starting symbol fluctuation D in which the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 600 during control in the low probability non-time saving state, At the start, the relief number counter is counted up and set to 600. Then, if the power is cut off during the execution of symbol variation D, and then a RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in Since the RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM, the symbol variation D that was being executed when the power was cut off is erased, and the pending status is also not stored. However, regarding the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the number of rescue times counter at the time of power cutoff is maintained at 600. Then, after waiting for a starting prize, symbol variation E is started, and at the start, the relief number counter is counted up and set to 601. Then, the symbol fluctuation E is stopped and displayed, and when the fixed time t (determined stop time) of the stopped symbol has elapsed, the relief number counter is referred to, and even though the relief number counter = 601, it is in a low probability time saving state. If it is determined that the time saving state B is not being controlled, the low probability time saving state B flag indicating that the control is to be performed in the low probability time saving state B is set to ON, and the low probability time saving state B is controlled. In other words, originally, the end of the symbol fluctuation with the relief number counter = 600 is the start timing of the low probability time saving state B, and at the end of the symbol fluctuation with the relief number counter = 601, unless it is a hit, the low probability time saving state B is started. However, if it is determined that such low probability time saving state B is not being controlled, the low probability time saving state B flag indicating that control is to be performed in low probability time saving state B is set to ON, and the low probability time saving state B flag is set to ON. It is controlled to stochastic time saving state B. Then, if there is no hold when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the symbol variation E is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation A1 under the control of the low probability time saving state B is started after waiting for a start winning. I try to do that. In addition, if there is a hold at the time when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the stop display of the symbol variation E, the symbol variation A1 under the control of the low probability time saving state B is immediately changed after the fixed time t has elapsed. I'm trying to get started.

As mentioned above, if the power is not cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D in which the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600, after the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, the low probability time saving state B However, if the power is cut off while symbol variation D is being executed, and then a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, when the power is cut off, Since the symbol variation D that was being executed is deleted, the timing to shift to the low probability time saving state B is lost. Therefore, if the power is cut off during the execution of symbol variation D, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, at the start of the subsequent symbol variation E, special The symbol fluctuation display is made to be the 601st time (relief number counter = 601), and after the symbol fluctuation E is stopped and displayed, the low probability non-time saving state is transitioned to the low probability time saving state B. In other words, originally, after the stop display of the symbol variation D where the relief number counter = 600, the transition should be made to the low probability time saving state B, but the power is cut off while the symbol variation D is being executed, and then the relief maintenance button is pressed. If the RAM clear operation is performed while operating , the system will shift to the low probability time saving state B at a delayed timing after the stop display of the symbol variation E where the subsequent relief count counter = 601. .

By the way, before the opening of the hall, at the stage of preparing to count the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter), symbol variation D starts when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600. If this happens, after the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, the machine will shift to the low probability time saving state B, and the hall will start operating in a seemingly advantageous state in the low probability time saving state B. In this regard, in this example, the power is cut off during the execution of symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. It can be maintained in a low probability non-time saving state, does not shift to the low probability time saving state B, and does not appear to be an advantageous state at first glance. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state, although the count was maintained without being reset, it was delayed after the symbol variation E stopped displaying when the subsequent rescue number counter = 601. It is possible to shift to the low probability time saving state B at the appropriate timing. In this way, before the opening of the hall, the power is cut off during the execution of symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. By doing so, after the opening of the hall, it will not be an advantageous state at first glance in the low probability non-time saving state, but special symbols in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B This means that only a small number of times (one time) is required to display the change in the number of times, and the players can expect that the state will shift to the low probability time saving state B as soon as the hall starts operating.

In addition, regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, if the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the main control A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the MPU 1310a, and the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is turned off, 600 times is displayed as the number of changes in the special symbol on the external device, but if the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 1310f operation) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button afterwards. , 0 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol on the external device. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state (relief number counter) is counted regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device. will not match. For example, if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, 1 time will be displayed as the number of special symbol variations on the external device while symbol variation E is being executed where the subsequent rescue number counter = 601. has been done. In such a case, simply by visually checking the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, it is difficult to determine whether the transition to the low probability time saving state B will occur after the symbol fluctuation E stops displaying when the relief number counter = 601. It is not possible to determine which Therefore, even though 1 time is displayed as the number of special symbol variations on the external device, after the symbol variation E stops displaying when the relief number counter = 601, suddenly the low probability non-time saving state suddenly changes to the low probability non-time saving state. It can be made to appear as if the state has shifted to the time saving state B.

In addition, as described above in detail, until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (relief number counter = 500 to 600), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 is When stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state. Here, if the power is cut off during the execution of symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 in a low probability state, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, After the stop display of the symbol variation E in which the relief number counter = 601, the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B, but in the symbol variation E, the count performance is restricted not to be executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in low probability time saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, the low probability time saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non time saving state. However, after that, there is a possibility of transitioning to the low probability time saving state B, and in the symbol fluctuation in the low probability non time saving state, it is possible to execute a count effect. Therefore, depending on the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the count of the relief number counter cannot be determined, and after the symbol variation E is stopped and displayed when the relief number counter = 601, the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B. However, since the symbol variation E does not perform a count performance, it is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability time saving state B even by the count performance.

(Maintenance of the relief counter when a RAM error occurs (modified example))
In the above, if a RAM error has occurred, the specific error flag is turned on, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the setting change operation is performed to correct the RAM error. You can now unlock it and proceed with the game. When such a RAM error occurs, if you are performing a setting change operation, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state ( The count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state is reset as a modified example, depending on whether or not the rescue maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation. may be configured so that it can be maintained. Such a configuration will be explained below.

FIG. 215 is a modification of the RAM clear condition showing an operation at power-on to execute RAM clear. If you are operating the relief maintenance button when clearing the RAM, if you are not operating the relief maintenance button when you are clearing the RAM, if you are operating the relief maintenance button when changing settings, if you are pressing the relief maintenance button when changing settings. The case where no operation is performed is as described with reference to FIG. 210.

As mentioned above in detail, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. assumes that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and displays an error message to that effect. If such a RAM error occurs, turn on the specific error flag, turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1, and then change the settings when turning on the power again to correct the RAM error. You can now unlock it and proceed with the game. Specifically, if a setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation, In addition to initializing the gaming state, it is also possible to change the setting values. When changing the setting value, the initial value, which is the lowest setting value 1, is temporarily set, and each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated, the value increases by 1, and when it reaches the maximum value, which is the setting value 6, It is possible to return to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and increase the value by 1 again. In addition, when the specific error flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the power is turned on without changing settings, the specific error flag will continue to be ON without canceling the RAM error. There is.

Here, if the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) Regarding the count, the count is maintained. In addition, regarding the initialization of the gaming state, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and it is determined that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is input timing ) is running. Note that at the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has been completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated in orange until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when it was determined that the setting change operation was completed. It lights up, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``An abnormality was detected, so we changed the settings and cleared the gaming status.The number of rescue attempts is maintained.'' Therefore, if the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the special symbol in the low probability state can be used while allowing the setting value to be changed. The count for the number of fluctuations (relief number counter) is started from where it left off when the power was cut off.

On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted. is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but the count has been reset. In addition, regarding the initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count, the timing when it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation is completed (when the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined) The signal is being executed at the input timing). Note that at the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has been completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 will be illuminated in red until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when it was determined that the setting change operation was completed. The light is emitted, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``An abnormality was detected, so the setting value was changed and the gaming status was cleared.The number of rescue attempts was also cleared.'' Therefore, when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the relief maintenance button is not operated, the special symbol in the low probability state can be changed while the setting value is changed. The count for the number of fluctuations (relief number counter) is started from the initial value "0".

In this example, when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs) and the relief maintenance button is operated, the setting value can be changed and the settings can be changed in a low probability state. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) is started from where it left off when the power was cut off. In other words, when a RAM error occurs, if you want to maintain the count of the number of changes in special symbols (relief counter) in a low probability state, the hole manager must It is only necessary to operate a predetermined operation section (relief maintenance button), and it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager. For example, if the relief maintenance button is operated during a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted. , the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state before transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B can be reduced, and the low probability can be changed as soon as the RAM error is cleared. It is possible to make the player expect the transition to the time saving state B.

In addition, in this example, when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs) and the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the setting value can be changed while the probability is low. Regarding the count of the number of changes in the special symbol in the state (relief counter), it is counted from the point where the power was cut off, but if the relief maintenance button is not operated, the setting value can be changed while , The count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the initial value "0". In other words, when a RAM error is canceled (when a setting change operation is performed), depending on whether or not the hall manager wants to maintain the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief counter) in a low probability state, (maintain button), and the hall manager can selectively execute one of two patterns depending on the hall environment. For example, when changing the settings when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the relief maintenance button is not operated, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted. , it is necessary to display the special symbols in the low probability state many times before changing from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state is changed immediately after the RAM error is cleared. There is no transition to B, and the player's expectations do not rise too quickly.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM error is canceled, the notification mode to be notified to the outside is different depending on whether the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. . As a result, for example, if a hall manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when canceling a RAM error (when changing settings), the count of the number of changes in special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state may be maintained. Even in such a case, the mistake can be noticed by the notification mode that is notified to the outside, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which a relief maintenance button is provided, the hall manager can selectively execute one of two patterns depending on whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated when a RAM error is canceled (when changing settings). On the other hand, if the configuration does not include a relief maintenance button, the setting change operation is only performed when the RAM error is cleared, and the hall manager can only execute one pattern. . For this reason, if the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with a relief maintenance button, an operating section that can be operated on the hall side may be provided, so that the number of patterns that the hall manager can select may be increased.

[About resetting the relief counter in the event of an unauthorized power outage]
In this example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), The configuration is such that control is performed in a stochastic time saving state B. However, in such a configuration, there is a risk that the relief counter may be tampered with. An example of a fraudulent method is to connect a fraudulent board (a so-called hanging board) to the main control board 1310 that is capable of fraudulently incrementing the rescue counter, and set the rescue counter to an incorrect value (for example, contrary to the original game). It is conceivable to store an invalid value (close to 600). Furthermore, there is a possibility that such a fraudulent board may be connected to the main control board 1310 using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the connector. It is conceivable to connect the unauthorized board to the main control board 1310 by relaying the unauthorized board to the wiring.

In addition, in this example, in order to prevent such fraud, the ON/OFF operation status of the power switch 630a and the connection status of all wiring or a specific wiring among the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 with connectors are The count value of the relief counter is initialized when an abnormality (insertion/removal) occurs in the connection status of these wirings when the power switch 630a is on.

As a specific configuration, for example, a power supply path from a power supply to a storage area (RAM) in which the count value of a rescue counter on the main control board 1310 is stored is connected to a plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310. Even though the power switch 630a is not turned OFF (OFF operation is not performed), the power switch 630a is not turned OFF. When a decrease in power is detected when at least a portion of the power supply path is cut off, it is determined that at least a portion of the power supply path has been illegally cut off, and the recovery counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is activated. The count value is initialized. As a result, even if an unauthorized board (a so-called hanging board) that is capable of fraudulently incrementing the rescue number counter is connected to the main control board 1310, even if the count value of the rescue number counter is rewritten to an incorrect value, The value can be forcibly cleared, and damage to the hall side caused by fraudulent activities can be prevented. In addition, in this example, the timing to initialize the count value of the rescue frequency counter is when the unauthorized interruption of the power supply route is resolved, that is, when the reconnection of the wiring targeted for monitoring is confirmed. It allows the act to be completed and evidence of the wrongdoing to be left behind.

Furthermore, if it is possible to monitor the connection and disconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 while the power switch 630a is turned on (while not being turned off) as in this example, it is possible to monitor the power supply It is not necessary to configure it to play a part of the supply route, and as another example, at least all the wires or a specific wire of the plurality of wires connected to the main control board 1310 with the connector connected while the power switch 630a is kept ON. The connection status (connected or unconnected) is monitored to determine if these wires are being inserted or removed illegally, and the count value of the rescue counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is initialized. You may also do so. Even in such a case, the same anti-fraud effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, it is preferable that such fraudulent acts be discovered by the hall as soon as possible, and a configuration that can appropriately discover such fraudulent acts and further enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts will be described. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the power supply route from the power supply to the storage area (RAM) in which the count value of the rescue counter of the main control board 1310 is stored will be explained using multiple wiring lines connected to the main control board 1310. At least one of the power supply paths is routed through the connector part or circuit pattern of the wiring to be monitored (all wiring or specific wiring), and even if the power switch 630a is not turned off, at least one of the power supply paths is When detecting a decrease in power when the power supply route is cut off, it is determined that at least a part of the power supply route has been cut off illegally, and the count value of the rescue counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is initialized. The following will mainly describe the implementation configuration "to do", including its detailed aspects.

FIG. 216 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the power supply is restored after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off. In FIG. 216(A), after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, the power supply is restored in a normal manner by turning on the power normally (turning on the power switch 630a). The case of recovery will be explained, and in FIG. 216(B), the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, and then the wiring is reconnected (the power switch 630a remains on). The following describes a case where power supply is restored in an abnormal manner due to no change in power supply.

In this example, the main control board 1310 is supplied with power from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and the wiring used for the power supply is targeted for monitoring as described above as the "specific wiring." In addition, the main control board 1310 monitors the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 630a, and turns the power switch 630a OFF when a power drop (voltage drop, etc.) to the main control board 1310 is detected. Either the power to the main control board 1310 has decreased (power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off), or the power to the main control board 1310 has decreased without turning off the power switch 630a (the power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off). This makes it possible to determine whether the power has been cut off. Specifically, in this example, when the power switch 630a is not turned off, specific wiring connected between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 is disconnected, so that the main control board 1310 is turned off. The power to the main control board 1310 is cut off, and then the power to the main control board 1310 is restored by reconnecting a specific wiring. occurs). Regarding such wiring insertion/removal, after the specific wiring mentioned above is removed, an unauthorized board (a so-called hanging board) that can illegally count up the relief counter through that specific wiring is connected to the main control board 1310. There is a possibility that this is a fraudulent act in which the player is connected and stores (rewrites) an incorrect value (for example, an incorrect value close to 600) in the relief counter, contrary to the original game.

As shown in FIG. 216(A), if the power switch 630a is turned OFF to normally cut off the power to the main control board 1310 during control in a low probability non-time saving state, no wiring will be disconnected. At that point, the unauthorized power supply flag, which will be described later, is not turned on (it is kept turned off). Then, when the power is restored by normal power-on that does not include a RAM clear operation (only the power switch 630a is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f or setting key switch 1311a), the state of the illegal power supply flag is determined. , if the unauthorized power supply flag is OFF, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the game state at the time of the power cut is determined based on the backup created at the time of the power cut. (RAM information is retained by a predetermined backup power supply). In addition, the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is also stored in a second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and is created when the power is cut off. Based on the backup, the count at power-off is maintained. Here, in the symbol variation that starts after the normal power is turned on, the counter for the number of rescues at the time of power cut is held at 105 times, so the counter is counted up against the number of rescues at the time of power cut. However, the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state is made to be the 106th time (relief number counter = 106). In this way, when the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is changed by turning on the power normally thereafter. The count is maintained, and it is possible to continue counting the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter). Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 216(A), when the power switch 630a is turned OFF to normally cut off the power to the main control board 1310, the administrator notification described below is sent by turning on the power normally thereafter. Not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 216(B), when the power to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a during control in a low probability non-time saving state (the power to the main control board 1310 is If a power drop occurs), at that point, an incorrect power supply flag (when the power switch 630a is turned off) is set as a flag to remember that the wiring connected between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 has been disconnected. The flag (which stores the fact that power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off) is turned ON. Then, when the power is restored, such as when the wiring between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 is reconnected, the state of the illegal power supply flag is determined, and if the illegal power supply flag is ON, it is created when the power is turned off. While maintaining the gaming state at the time of power cutoff based on the backup, the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is initialized. In other words, although the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state is held in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a by a predetermined backup power supply, in this example In this case, only the count for the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) held in the second specific area of the RAM is initialized (reset) in a process different from normal RAM clearing. In addition, the reset of the rescue count is executed immediately based on the fact that the unauthorized power supply flag is ON when power is restored, regardless of whether or not the rescue maintenance button is operated at the time power is restored. We are planning to perform a reset immediately. In this way, after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, the power supply is abnormally interrupted by reconnecting the wiring (the power switch 630a remains on and unchanged). In the case of recovery in this manner, when the power is restored, the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is started from the initial value "0".

As described above, in this example, the main control board 1310 manages the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state, and the power supply to such main control board 1310 is If the power is cut off without turning off the switch 630a, it is determined that the power was cut off illegally, and when the power is restored afterwards, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted. I am trying to reset the count. In addition, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of power restoration. As a result, if it is detected that the power has been illegally cut off to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, after the power is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of relief The count on the main control board 1310 does not progress from an incorrect count, and it is possible to exert a deterrent effect against fraud on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in this example, when the power is restored and the unauthorized power flag is ON, the administrator is notified that the power has been illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a. That's what I do. In addition, as a method of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 flash in red from the time the power is restored until a specific administrator operation is performed. Then, the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``An abnormality related to the power supply was detected, and the number of rescue attempts has been cleared.'' Here, regarding the manager notification, as a specific manager operation, for example, a part located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall manager (a part that cannot be operated by the player) It is possible to terminate it by operating . As a result, the person who illegally shuts off the power cannot easily terminate the notification to the manager, and the notification to the hall manager can be ensured. In addition, although the unauthorized power flag is turned ON when a specific administrator operation is performed, it may continue to be ON even after a specific administrator operation, and the power switch 630a may be turned ON. It may also be possible to record as a history that the power was illegally cut off without turning it off.

In addition, in this example, if the illegal power supply flag is ON when the power is restored, the gaming state is maintained, whereas the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is However, as another example, if the illegal power supply flag is ON when power is restored, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition to counting the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter), the gaming state may also be initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). As a result, if it is detected that power has been illegally cut off to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, after the power is restored, the player can play the game in an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to exert a deterrent effect against unauthorized access to the main control board 1310.

Note that in the explanation of FIG. 216(A), when the power switch 630a is turned OFF to cut off the power to the main control board 1310, the administrator notification described later is not executed when the power is turned on normally thereafter. However, instead of this, even if the power is turned on normally, the administrator will be notified that the power has been turned on normally, and the hall manager will be able to First, the administrator notification may be terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In such a case, for example, when the power is turned on normally, the game board 5 and the door frame 3 will be notified to the outside from the time when the power is restored until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game were made to emit purple light, and the speaker outputted a voice saying "The gaming state has been restored. The number of rescues is maintained." The power was cut off illegally. It is preferable to be able to differentiate it from other cases.

In addition, in this example, the reset of the rescue number count is immediately executed based on the fact that the illegal power supply flag is ON at the timing when the power is restored, but as another example, the count value of the rescue number counter The timing for initialization is a predetermined clearing operation by the hall administrator after the unauthorized interruption of the power supply route has been resolved (e.g., an administrator switch installed on the back of the gaming machine that cannot be touched by players or cheaters). This may also be the case when an operation) is performed.

[About initializing setting values and resetting the rescue counter when inputting an incorrect setting key]
In this example, the setting value can be confirmed by performing a setting confirmation operation in which the power switch 630a is turned on while the setting key switch 1311a is kept in the ON operation when the power is turned on. Specifically, the power switch 630a is turned OFF, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation of the setting key cylinder. When the power switch 630a is turned on, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control board 1310, making it possible to confirm the set value. However, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that unauthorized confirmation of the set value may be carried out by leaving the power switch 630a turned on without turning it off. An example of a fraudulent method is to connect a fraudulent board to the main control board 1310 as in the example described above, cut off/restore power to the main control board 1310 when connecting the fraudulent board, and use the fraudulent board to There is a possibility that a setting confirmation operation may be performed fraudulently by inputting a setting key ON signal to the main control board 1310 in an unauthorized manner. In addition, in these cases of fraud, there is a possibility that the value of the above-mentioned rescue counter may be rewritten to a false value while checking the set value. Separately, the main control board 1300 may be caused to malfunction by emitting unauthorized radio waves or the like without using the setting key, cutting off/restoring power to the main control board 1310, and changing the setting key ON signal to the main control board 1300. There is also a possibility that the setting confirmation operation may be executed fraudulently by entering the information into the control board 1310 in an unauthorized manner.

In order to prevent such fraud, in this example, the power switch 630a is turned on/off when power is cut off to the main control board 1310, as explained in the above section [About resetting the rescue counter in the event of an unauthorized power cut]. OFF is monitored to prevent unauthorized confirmation of setting values. In other words, a case where the setting values can be confirmed without any operation related to turning the power switch 630a on or off is considered to be a fraudulent act. The setting value stored in the first specific area of the RAM is forcibly initialized and changed to the most disadvantageous setting value, and the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is The count value stored in is also initialized. Note that it is preferable that such fraudulent acts be discovered on the hall side, and a configuration that can appropriately discover such fraudulent acts and further enhance deterrence against fraud will be described below. Note that some of the configurations to be described below include configurations similar to those in the embodiment described above [Regarding resetting of the relief count counter at the time of unauthorized power outage], and therefore, some explanations will be omitted.

In this example, similar to the embodiment described above [About resetting the rescue counter in the event of an unauthorized power outage], the main control board 1310 is supplied with power from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The wiring used for supply is the specific wiring that is to be monitored as described above. In addition, the main control board 1310 monitors the ON/OFF state of the power switch 630a, and when a decrease in the power to the main control board 1310 is detected, the power switch 630a is turned OFF, thereby reducing the power to the main control board 1310. has occurred (has the power to the main control board 1310 been cut off), or has the power to the main control board 1310 decreased without turning off the power switch 630a (has the power to the main control board 1310 been cut off)? It makes it possible to judge. Specifically, when the power switch 630a is not turned off, the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by disconnecting a specific wire connected between the power board 630 and the main control board 1310. Thereafter, power to the main control board 1310 is restored by reconnecting the specific wiring (power is cut off and restored to the main control board 1310 by connecting/disconnecting the specific wiring). Regarding the insertion and removal of such specific wiring, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned set value is fraudulently confirmed, or there is a possibility that it is a fraudulent act in which an incorrect value is stored in the relief counter.

In addition, in this example, even if the insertion and removal of specific wiring is not detected, there is a possibility that the power supply may be manipulated abnormally by emitting unauthorized radio waves, etc., so in addition to monitoring the insertion and removal of specific wiring as described above. , a special circuit configuration is provided that can detect a power drop (voltage drop) for the main control board 1310, and in conjunction with monitoring the ON/OFF of the power switch 630a, the power supply can be switched off regardless of the insertion or removal of specific wires. Either the power to the main control board 1310 was reduced by turning off the switch 630a (power to the main control board 1310 was cut off), or the power to the main control board 1310 was reduced without turning off the power switch 630a. It is also possible to determine whether the power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off. Specifically, if the power to the main control board 1310 falls below a predetermined value while the power switch 630a is not turned off, the power necessary to start the main control board 1310 is cut off, and then the main control board 1310 is turned off. When the power to the board 1310 exceeds a predetermined value, the power necessary for starting the main control board 1310 is restored. If the power to the main control board 1310 falls below the predetermined value in such a situation where the power switch 630a is not turned off, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned set value was fraudulently confirmed or an invalid value is stored in the rescue counter. This may be a fraudulent act.

Figure 217 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the power supply is restored, and a setting key ON signal is input. Figure 217 (A) illustrates a normal state in which the power supply to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, and then the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored by turning the power switch 630a ON. Figure 217 (B) illustrates an abnormal state in which the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, and then the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored due to illegal radio waves or reconnection of a specific wiring (the power switch 630a remains ON and unchanged).

As shown in FIG. 217(A), if the power switch 630a is turned OFF and the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off during control in a low probability non-time saving state, there is no possibility of any abnormality. Therefore, at that point, the unauthorized power supply flag, which will be described later, is not turned on (it is kept off). Then, when the power is restored by the normal setting confirmation operation of turning on the power switch 630a while turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the state of the unauthorized power supply flag is determined, and if the unauthorized power supply flag is OFF, the state of the unauthorized power supply flag is already set. The set values that have been set are displayed on the display section on the main control board 1310, allowing the administrator to confirm the set values.

In addition, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored, When the setting key ON signal is input and the unauthorized power supply flag is OFF, the count at power cutoff can be maintained. The gaming status is stored in the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but if the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored and the unauthorized power flag is OFF, The gaming state is maintained when the power is turned off. In other words, since processing such as clearing the RAM is not performed during the setting confirmation operation, the rescue count counter at the time of power cut is 105 times, and in the symbol variation that starts after the setting confirmation operation is performed, The relief number counter is counted up so that the special symbol is displayed in a low probability state for the 106th time (relief number counter=106). In this way, when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, when the power is restored after the setting confirmation operation, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief (number of times counter) can be maintained. In addition, if the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, and then a normal setting confirmation operation is performed by turning on the power normally, special A count of the number of symbol changes (relief counter) is maintained, and the default setting value can be confirmed by the administrator. Note that the period during which the setting values can be confirmed ends by turning off the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, in this example, when the power to the main control board 1310 is restored, the setting key ON signal is input, and if the unauthorized power flag is OFF, the setting value can be confirmed as administrator notification 1. We are trying to inform the outside that it is a period. In addition, as a notification mode to inform the outside, from the time when the power is restored until the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting confirmation operation is completed, the notification is carried out on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LEDs in the settings are turned off, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, "Checking the settings." Then, during the period from when it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been completed until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as described above, various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 are used to notify the outside. The installed LED is made to emit green light, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``Setting values have been confirmed. The number of rescue attempts is being maintained.''

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 217(B), when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off without turning off the power switch 630a during control in a low probability non-time saving state (power reduction to the main control board 1310 occurs), at that point, for example, an unauthorized power supply flag (main control board 1310 A flag that stores the history of illegal irradiation of radio waves to the board 1310 or removal of wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is set to ON. Even if you try to confirm the settings by inputting the setting key ON signal when the power is restored, if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, the main control MPU 1310a A RAM clear is executed to initialize the built-in RAM, and the gaming state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state).

Further, even if the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored, if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, the initial value is forcibly initialized to the lowest setting value 1. Further, in such a case, unlike the normal setting change operation, it is impossible to change the setting from the initial value, which is the lowest setting value 1.

In addition, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored, When the setting key ON signal is input and the illegal power supply flag is ON, the count at power cutoff is reset. Specifically, the count at power cutoff is reset regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned relief maintenance button is operated when power is restored. Note that the count is reset at the timing when RAM clearing is executed. Here, if the power is restored while the setting key switch 1311a is ON, the count for the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state will be set to the initial value after the end of the game stop state. It is designed to count from a certain "0".

In addition, regarding the initialization of the gaming state mentioned above, the forced change to the lowest setting value 1, and the reset of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the unauthorized power supply flag will be set at the timing when the power is restored. It is immediately executed based on the fact that it is ON.

In addition, when the power is restored, input the setting key ON signal, and if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, at that point, the forced game stop flag is set to control the game to a game stop state where it is impossible to play. It is set to ON, causing a game stop state. In such a game stop state, even if a ball enters the starting hole, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the prize ball is not paid out. When the game is stopped, for example, a part located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall manager (a part that cannot be operated by the player) can be operated as a specific administrator operation. By operating it, it is possible to turn off the forced game stop flag and end the game. In other words, after the gaming stop state occurs, unless a specific administrator operation is performed, the person who illegally shuts off the power (the person who illegally inputs the setting key ON signal) will not be able to use the special It is possible to create a state in which it is impossible to advance the count of the number of symbol changes (relief number counter).

In this example, the setting values are managed by the main control board 1310 (setting change board 1311). In the above, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are separate boards, but the main control board 1310 may have the functions of the setting change board 1311 such as the setting key switch 1311a and the display section. good. If power is cut off to such a main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, it will be determined that the power has been cut off illegally, and when the power is restored, a setting key ON signal will be sent. If you enter , it is determined that you have attempted to check the setting value illegally, and the setting value is forcibly initialized to the initial value, the lowest setting value 1. In addition, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of power restoration. As a result, after illegally cutting off power to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, if it is detected that a setting key ON signal has been input when the power is restored, After the power is restored, the set value will not be confirmed, and the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state will not proceed from an advantageous count, and the main control board 1310 This can serve as a deterrent against fraud.

In addition, in this example, when the power is restored, the setting key ON signal is input, and if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. , the gaming state is also initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). As a result, after illegally cutting off power to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, if it is detected that a setting key ON signal has been input when the power is restored, After the power is restored, the game does not proceed in an advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to exert a deterrent force against fraud against the main control board 1310.

In addition, if the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored and the unauthorized power flag is ON, administrator notification 2 will be issued that the power has been illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a. The system notifies external parties that there is a possibility that an attempt has been made to illegally check the setting values. Additionally, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 flash strongly in red from the time the power is restored until a specific administrator operation is performed. Then, the speaker outputs a voice saying, ``An abnormality related to the power supply and setting values was detected, so the gaming status and setting values were cleared.The number of rescues was also cleared.'' Here, regarding the administrator notification 2, as a specific administrator operation, for example, a part located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall manager (a part that cannot be operated by the player) ) can be used to terminate it. As a result, a person who attempts to illegally shut off the power supply and illegally check the setting values cannot easily terminate administrator notification 2, and ensures that notification to the hall administrator is made. I can do it. Furthermore, although the unauthorized power supply flag is turned ON when a specific administrator operation is performed, it may continue to be ON even after a specific administrator operation, and the power switch 630a may be turned ON. It may also be possible to record as a history that the power was illegally cut off without turning it off.

In addition, in this example, the above-mentioned initialization of the gaming state, forced change to the lowest setting value 1, and reset of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state are performed at the timing when the power is restored. We decided to execute it immediately based on the fact that the illegal power supply flag is ON, but other examples include the above-mentioned initialization of the gaming state, forced change of the lowest value to set value 1, and variation of special symbols in low probability states. The timing for resetting the number of times (relief number counter) may be when a specific administrator operation is performed to eliminate the above-mentioned game stop state.

[About returning after the game has been stopped]
In this example, when an immediate short hit occurs, a symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit is executed, and after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed, control is made to a low probability time saving state C. In addition, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), After the symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed when the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. If any abnormality is detected during the execution of a symbol variation that results in such an instantaneous short hit, or during execution of a symbol variation in which the number of variations of the special symbol in a low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the game In the event that a gaming stoppage occurs, the hall manager must first shut off the power and then turn it back on.After the power is turned on, the game can be restarted. However, after the power is turned on, whether or not to return to the symbol fluctuation that is being executed when the game stop state occurs depends on the type of the game stop state. Such a configuration will be explained below.

First, the main control board 1310 detects whether an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. When detecting the abnormality, it is necessary to determine whether it is a minor abnormality or a severe abnormality. Deciding. Then, if a slight abnormality is detected, a weak game stop flag is turned ON to control the weak game stop state in which it is impossible to play the game and it is possible to return to the game that is being executed when the abnormality occurs. This causes a weak game stop state. On the other hand, if a severe abnormality is detected, a strong game stop flag is turned on to control the game to a weak game stop state in which it is impossible to play the game and it is impossible to return to the game that is being executed when the abnormality occurs. This causes a strong game stop state.

In this example, when magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, or when the pachinko machine 1 is If vibrations are detected by a vibration sensor that detects vibrations applied to the computer, there is a possibility that fraud is being carried out using magnetism or vibrations. If weak magnetism or weak vibrations are detected, there is a possibility that the detection is just magnetism or vibrations that are not related to fraudulent activity, and it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and weak gaming is suspended. The flag is set to ON. In addition, if opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected, there is a possibility that the main body frame 4 was simply opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during work by the hall manager, but the back side of the pachinko machine 1 There is a possibility that an attempt is made to commit fraud on the main control board 1310 etc. provided in the game, and it is determined that a slight abnormality has occurred, and the weak game stop flag is set to ON. On the other hand, if strong magnetism or strong vibrations are detected, there is a high possibility that magnetism or vibrations related to fraudulent activity have been detected, so it is determined that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the game is forcibly suspended. The flag is set to ON. Additionally, if ON/OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is detected even though power is being supplied, there is a possibility that the user is attempting to perform fraudulent activities such as changing or checking the setting values. Since the value is high, it is determined that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the strong game stop flag is set to ON.

(Regarding the case where a game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol change that results in an immediate short hit)
FIG. 218 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance in the case where the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 218, when executing symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, at time tx when symbol variation B stops, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C. There is. Also, before tx, during the execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, a "help mode S precursor effect" that suggests entering "help mode S" is executed, From tx, a "help mode S effect" indicating that "help mode S" is being executed is executed. In addition, in this example, by becoming an immediate short hit, the control is controlled to a low probability time saving state C until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, and such a low probability time saving state C The period in which this is controlled is called "help mode S." Then, in the help mode S performance, until the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 20 to 100 times in the low probability time saving state C, if the jackpot does not occur, when the symbol fluctuation stops from the 20th to 100th time, the low probability A transition is made from the probability time saving state C to a low probability non-time saving state, and the help mode S performance is returned to the normal performance.

In the above production example, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols is executed as a symbol variation production (production corresponding to a variation pattern) that results in an immediate short hit, and a display that stops at a stop symbol that results in an immediate short hit is executed. , Such a symbol variation performance that results in an immediate short hit corresponds to a "help mode S precursor performance." In addition, after starting the control of the low probability time saving state C, the effect display device 1600 displays "help mode S in progress" indicating that the low probability time saving state C is under control. This display corresponds to "Help Mode S Effect".

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 executes the performance display for the help mode S precursor as the symbol variation performance during the execution of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit before tx. After tx, an effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C being controlled) is executed. Furthermore, even if there is a period (for example, between symbol variation C and symbol variation D) in which symbol variation (symbol variation production) does not start after tx, the production for help mode S will not start during that period. The display continues to run.

In addition, regarding movable bodies (for example, movable bodies A to C mentioned above), movable bodies are not used in the help mode S precursor performance before tx and in the help mode S performance after tx, The action specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is being executed.

In addition, in the lamp emission, before the tx, with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LEDs are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after tx, with the execution of the help mode S performance, the LEDs are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S. In addition, in the audio output, before tx, BGM for the help mode S precursor will be output from the speaker when the help mode S precursor effect is executed during the execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit. Then, after tx, BGM for help mode S is output from the speaker as the help mode S effect is executed.

FIG. 219 is a time chart showing the performance progress when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit. In this example, a case will be explained in which it is determined that a slight abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310 and the weak game stop flag is turned ON at time t1 during execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit. There is.

As shown in FIG. 219, if it is determined that the weak game stop flag is turned ON at time t1 during the execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, the state changes from the low probability non-time saving state to the weak game stop state. is moving to. In this weak game stop state, it is impossible to play a game, and a game stop notification 1 is executed to notify the outside that the weak game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, at the time of t1, if symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit is being executed, from t1 to t2 when the power is cut off, the immediate short hit that is being executed at the time of t1 The symbol variation B is interrupted. In addition to the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, at the time of t1, there is a variable winning opening 2003 with variable display of special symbols, suspension of special symbols, fluctuation display of normal symbols, suspension of normal symbols, and variable winning openings 2003 due to normal winning symbols. When the opening/closing pattern is being executed and the payout of game balls B is being executed, from t1 to t2, the special symbol being executed at t1 is displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol is held on hold, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, The suspension of normal symbols, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 according to normal winning symbols, and the payout of game balls B are all interrupted. As a result, it is impossible to proceed with the game in the weak game stop state between t1 and t2.

In addition, in the performance display device 1600, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, a performance display for game stop notification 1 is executed instead of a performance display for the help mode S precursor. ing. In such game stop notification 1, for example, a display saying "Please wait for confirmation from the staff member" is executed.

In addition, regarding the movable body, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the action specified by the symbol fluctuation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern), the game stop notification 1 (For example, an operation that is never executed other than game stop notification 1) is being executed. In addition, in the lamp emission, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3. The LED that is displayed is set to emit light in the light emission pattern for game stop notification 1 (for example, blinking weakly in red), and the audio output is set so that a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. Accordingly, instead of the BGM for the help mode S precursor, a sound for game stop notification 1 (for example, a sound saying "Please wait for confirmation from the staff member") is output from the speaker.

After the weak game stop state occurs, it is necessary for the hall manager to turn off the power at time t2, perform confirmation work, and then turn on the power again at time t3. The weak game stop flag is turned off at time t3 when the power is turned on again, and the weak game stop state is returned to the low probability non-time saving state. In this example, after the weak game stop state occurs, when the power is turned on again at time t3, symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit is returned to the state at the time of the weak game stop state. However, the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output are not returned to the state at the time of the weak game stop state, and are maintained until the stop display of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit. It is controlled to a unique state when returning from a weak game stop state.

Specifically, at time t3 when the power is turned on again, symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit and has been interrupted at time t1, is restarted. Further, after restarting the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C at the time tx when the symbol variation B stops. In addition, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the variable winning hole 2003 due to the special symbol that was suspended at t1, the special symbol on hold, the normal symbol on the fluctuating display, the normal symbol on hold, and the normal winning symbol. The opening/closing pattern and the payout of game balls B are also restarted.

As mentioned above, if a slight abnormality is detected during the execution of symbol variation B, which results in an immediate short hit, and a weak game stop state occurs, the hole management will temporarily shut off the power and then turn it on again. Although this requires the work of a person, after the power is turned on, symbol fluctuation B, which immediately results in a short hit, is restarted. In this way, for minor abnormalities, although cheating is suspected, there is a high possibility that it is not cheating, so after the weak game stop state is resolved, the symbol fluctuation that was being executed at the time of the weak game stop state will be returned to. The system allows the player to resume playing without being penalized.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 executes the warning display 1 at time t3 when the power is turned on again. The warning display 1 is, for example, a message that says, "Please stop any activity that is suspected of being fraudulent." In addition, since Warning Display 1 was a minor abnormality, it was set to end after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and specific management by the hall manager was performed as in Warning Display 2, which will be described later. The program is designed to terminate without requiring any user interaction. After the warning display 1 is executed, an apology effect display is executed. In such an apology effect display, for example, a message such as "Please wait for a while until the help mode S. Please enjoy a rare action as an apology." is executed. In this example, when a weak game stop state occurs, if a symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit is being executed, or if a symbol fluctuation is being executed with a pending state that results in an immediate short hit, , as an apology for interrupting the performance regarding these symbol changes, an apology performance that would not otherwise be performed is performed. In such an apology production, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during a game) is performed using a movable body or a lamp.

In addition, the movable body is made to stand by until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since t3 when the power was turned on again and the apology effect display is started on the effect display device 1600, and the apologies effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed. After the game has started, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during the game) is performed as an apology action. In addition, the lamp light emission is made to wait until a predetermined period has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again and the apology effect display starts on the effect display device 1600. After the game has started, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during the game) is performed as an apology action. In addition, the apology action is set to end when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, and at the time the apology action is ended, tx, which is the stop time of symbol fluctuation B that results in an immediate short hit, has arrived. If not, the operation of the movable body and the lamp light emission are on standby until tx arrives. On the other hand, if tx, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, has arrived at the time when the apology action is completed, there is no need to wait for the movement of the movable body or the light emission of the lamp.

In addition, regarding the audio output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until tx, which is the time when the symbol fluctuation B that results in an immediate short hit, comes to a standby, the audio for the apology effect is not output and is on standby. There is. In this way, while the apology action is performed for the movable object or the lamp light emission, by not performing the apology action for the voice output, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the surroundings, and the player who is playing the game can This can be done as an apology for.

Then, after restarting symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, after tx, which is the stop time of symbol fluctuation B, a weak game stop state does not occur during the execution of symbol fluctuation B that results in an immediate short hit. The production is progressing as usual. That is, after tx, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (under control of the low probability time saving state C). Furthermore, regarding the movable body, the movable body is not used in the assistance mode S performance after tx, and the operation specified in the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. Further, in the lamp emission, after tx, the lamp is emitted in a light emission pattern for the help mode S as the help mode S effect is executed. Furthermore, in audio output, after tx, BGM for help mode S is output from the speaker as the help mode S effect is executed.

FIG. 220 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation that results in an immediate short hit. In this example, a case will be explained in which a severe abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310 at time t1 during execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, and it is determined that the strong game stop flag is turned ON. There is.

As shown in FIG. 220, if it is determined that the strong game stop flag is turned ON at time t1 when symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit is being executed, the state changes from the low probability non-time saving state to the strong game stop state. is moving to. In this strong game stop state, it is impossible to play a game, and a game stop notification 2 is executed to notify the outside that the strong game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, at the time of t1, if symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit is being executed, from t1 to t2 when the power is cut off, the immediate short hit that is being executed at the time of t1 The symbol variation B is interrupted. In addition to the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, at the time of t1, there is a variable winning opening 2003 with variable display of special symbols, suspension of special symbols, fluctuation display of normal symbols, suspension of normal symbols, and normal winning symbols. When the opening/closing pattern is being executed and the payout of the game ball B is being executed, from t1 to t2, the special symbol being executed at t1 is displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol is held on hold, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, The suspension of the normal symbols, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 according to the normal winning symbols, and the payout of the game balls B are all interrupted. As a result, in the strong game stop state from t1 to t2, it is impossible to proceed with the game.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display for game stop notification 2 in place of the performance display for the help mode S precursor as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. ing. In such game stop notification 2, for example, a display saying "This is a malicious abnormality. Please reset the game." is executed.

In addition, regarding the movable body, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the game stop notification 2 (for example, an operation that is never executed other than game stop notification 2). In addition, in the lamp emission, as a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3. The LED that is displayed is made to emit light in a light emitting pattern for game stop notification 2 (for example, blinking strongly in red). In addition, in audio output, as a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the BGM for the help mode S precursor, the sound for game stop notification 2 (for example, "Malicious This is an abnormality.Please reset the game.'' is output.

After the strong game stop state occurs, the hall manager turns off the power at time t2, and when turning the power on again at time t3, a RAM clear operation by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f or a setting key is performed. A setting change operation of turning on the switch 1311a (or a setting change operation of turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) is required. The strong game stop flag is not turned off at time t3 when the power is turned on again, but continues in the strong game stop state until a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4. ing. In other words, from t3 to t4, the game is in a strong game stop state, so it is impossible to play a game, and after t4, it returns to a state where it is possible to play a game.

In this example, after the strong gaming stop state has occurred, when the power is turned on again at time t3, the RAM clearing operation and setting change operation are performed, so that the strong gaming stop state flag is cleared except for the ON state. , executes RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and initializes the gaming state (sets it to a low probability non-time saving state). In addition, the setting values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and when a setting change operation is performed, the setting values that have already been set (power off before power on) (time setting value) can be changed. In addition, the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but the occurrence of the strong game stop state Later, when the power is turned on again at time t3 and a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, the count is reset.

In the above, the initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4 after the RAM clear operation and setting change operation. In addition, when initializing the gaming state, the state at the time of occurrence of the strong game stop state is erased, so the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the sound Regarding the output, it will not return to the state at the time of occurrence of the strong game stop state. In addition, from t3 to t4 when the strong game stop state is resolved, the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output are controlled to the states specific to when the strong game stop state occurs. There is.

Specifically, at time t3 when the power was turned on again, symbol variation B, which was an immediate short hit that had been interrupted at time t1, was not restarted, but was made non-variable, and a specific administrator operation was performed. At the time of t4, the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit that was suspended at the time of t1 is deleted, and after t4, when there is a new starting winning at the time of t5, a new symbol variation is started. It makes it possible. In addition, at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the special symbol that is suspended at the time of t1 is displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol is suspended, the normal symbol is fluctuated, the normal symbol is suspended, and the normal symbol is variable. The opening/closing pattern of the prize opening 2003 and the payout of the game ball B are also erased.

As mentioned above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the execution of symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit, and a strong game stop state occurs, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, Although the hole manager's work is required to clear the RAM and change the settings, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation B that results in an immediate short hit is erased. In this way, for severe abnormalities, there is a high possibility that they are fraudulent acts, so although it is possible to restart the game after the strong game stop state is resolved, the symbol being executed when the weak game stop state occurs There is no return to the fluctuation, and a penalty is given to the player.

Further, the effect display device 1600 executes warning display 2 at time t3 when the power is turned on again. In such a warning display 2, for example, a message such as "This has been fraudulent, we will reset everything." is executed. In addition, regarding warning display 2, since it was a severe abnormality, it was made to continue to be displayed until a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4, and to end at time t4. There is. Here, the specific manager operation includes, for example, operating a part located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall manager (a part that cannot be operated by the player). It has become necessary. As a result, for fraudsters, even if they turn off the power and then turn it on again after a forced gaming stoppage occurs, they cannot easily end Warning Display 2, and the hall administrator is not notified. can be ensured. In addition, when the above-mentioned weak game stop state occurs, an apology effect is executed after the warning display 1 is executed, but after the execution of the warning display 2 in this example, a serious abnormality is detected. , has not carried out such an apology performance.

Furthermore, the movable body is kept on standby from t3 when the power is turned on again until a new starting prize is received at time t5. Regarding the lamp emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit warning light until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again. is set to emit light in a warning light pattern (for example, blinking strongly in red).Please note that the warning light does not end at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and the power is turned off again. Even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3 when the warning is turned on, the warning light continues to emit light until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. As a result, for fraudsters, even if a specific administrator operation is performed quickly after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning light will not be able to end, and the notification to the hall administrator will be ensured. can be made into something.

Similarly, regarding audio output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a warning sound will be output from the speaker as a warning sound (for example, "Due to fraud, reset everything. ”) is output. Note that the warning sound does not end at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning sound does not end at the specified administrator operation. The warning sound is made to continue until a period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. As a result, for fraudsters, even if a specific administrator operation is performed quickly after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning sound cannot be terminated, and the notification to the hall administrator is ensured. can be made into something.

Then, at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the strong gaming stop state is returned to the low probability non-time saving state, and after t4, when a new starting prize is received at time t5, a new Although it is possible to start symbol fluctuations, normal performance is executed during control of such a low probability non-time saving state. That is, regarding the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output, the normal effect corresponding to the low probability non-time saving state is executed while the symbol variation is being executed.

In this example, if a slight abnormality is detected on the main control board 1310 during the execution of a symbol change that results in an immediate short hit, the state shifts from a low probability non-time saving state to a weak game stop state; In the game stop state, if a severe abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310, the weak game stop state is shifted to the strong game stop state. In other words, when a severe abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310 in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop flag is turned OFF, the strong game stop flag is turned ON, and the strong game stop state is generated with priority. ing. As a result, if there is a fraudulent act that causes a severe abnormality to be detected after a weak gaming suspension state has occurred, the weak gaming suspension state will transition to a strong gaming suspension state, so such fraudulent activity will be prevented. Never miss a thing. In addition, in the case of transitioning from a weak game stop state to a strong game stop state, the game can be resumed after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the pattern fluctuation that was being executed when the weak game stop state occurred will return. A penalty can be given to the player.

(Regarding the case where a game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol variation in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times in a low probability state)
FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600) in the low probability state. As shown in FIG. 221, when performing symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state, at the time tx when symbol variation B stops. , the state is transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. Also, before tx, it is suggested that during the execution of symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), it will enter "help mode L" In contrast, from tx, a "help mode L effect" indicating that "help mode L" is being executed is executed. In addition, in this example, when the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is entered until the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 700 times. The period during which control is performed to such a low probability time saving state B is referred to as "help mode L." Then, in the help mode L performance, if the special symbol does not hit the jackpot until the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 700 times in the low probability time saving state B, when the symbol fluctuation stops for the 700th time, the low probability time saving state B At the same time, the help mode L performance returns to the normal performance.

In the above example of production, when the variation display of the decorative symbol in the production display device 1600 is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. A count effect is executed to notify the user how many times the count has occurred, and such a count effect corresponds to a "help mode L precursor effect." In addition, after starting the control of the low probability time saving state B, the effect display device 1600 displays "Help mode L in progress" indicating that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled. The display corresponds to "Help Mode L Effect".

Specifically, before tx, the effect display device 1600 performs a countdown until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies you of the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state). ) is executing the effect display for the help mode L precursor. Then, after tx, an effect display for help mode L is executed to indicate that help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). In addition, even if there is a period (for example, between symbol fluctuation C and symbol fluctuation D) in which symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation production) does not start after tx, the production for help mode L will be performed during that period. The display continues to run.

In addition, regarding the movable bodies (for example, the above-mentioned movable bodies A to C), movable bodies are not used in the help mode L precursor performance before tx and in the help mode L performance after tx, The action specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is being executed.

In addition, in the lamp emission, prior to tx, with the execution of the help mode L precursor effect, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 display the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor. After tx, with the execution of the help mode L effect, the light is emitted in the light emission pattern for help mode L. In addition, for audio output, BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode L precursor production before tx, and after tx, the help mode L precursor production is output from the speaker. With the execution of , BGM for help mode L is output from the speaker.

FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the performance progress when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in the low probability state. In this example, at time t1 when symbol variation B is being executed, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the main control board 1310 detects a slight abnormality, A case where it is determined that the weak game stop flag is turned on is explained.

As shown in FIG. 222, at time t1 when symbol variation B is being executed, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), and the weak game stop flag is turned ON. If it is determined, the state has shifted from the low probability non-time saving state to the weak game stop state. In this weak game stop state, it is impossible to play a game, and a game stop notification 1 is executed to notify the outside that the weak game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, at the time of t1, if symbol variation B is being executed, in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the power is cut off from t1. Until t2, symbol variation B being executed at t1 is interrupted. In addition to symbol variation B, at the time of t1, the variable display of special symbols, the suspension of special symbols, the variable display of ordinary symbols, the suspension of ordinary symbols, the execution of the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 by the ordinary winning symbol, When the payout of game balls B is in progress, from t1 to t2, the special symbols being executed at t1 are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are on hold, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the normal symbols are on hold, Both the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 and the payout of the game balls B based on the normal winning symbols are interrupted. As a result, it is impossible to proceed with the game in the weak game stop state between t1 and t2.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display for game stop notification 1 in place of the performance display for the help mode L precursor as the weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. ing. In such game stop notification 1, for example, a message such as "Please wait for confirmation from the staff member" is displayed.

In addition, regarding the movable body, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the action specified by the symbol fluctuation performance (performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern), the game stop notification 1 (For example, an operation that is never executed other than game stop notification 1) is being executed. In addition, in the lamp emission, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3. The LED that is displayed is set to emit light in the light emission pattern for game stop notification 1 (for example, blinking weakly in red), and the audio output is set so that a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. Accordingly, instead of the BGM for the help mode L precursor, a sound for game stop notification 1 (for example, a sound saying "Please wait for confirmation from the staff member") is output from the speaker.

After the weak game stop state occurs, it is necessary for the hall manager to turn off the power at time t2, perform confirmation work, and turn on the power again at time t3. The weak game stop flag is turned off at time t3 when the power is turned on again, and the weak game stop state is returned to the low probability non-time saving state. In this example, after the occurrence of the weak game stop state, when the power is turned on again at time t3, regarding symbol variation B, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). is restored to the state at the time of the occurrence of the weak game stop state, but the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output are not returned to the state at the time of the occurrence of the weak game stop state, Until the symbol variation B is stopped and displayed, control is performed from the weak game stop state to the unique state at the time of return.

Specifically, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the symbol variation B that has been suspended at the time t1 (the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600)) ). Further, after the symbol variation B is restarted, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B at the time tx when the symbol variation B stops. In addition, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the variable display of the special symbol that was suspended at the time t1, the suspension of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol, the suspension of the ordinary symbol, and the variable winning hole 2003 due to the ordinary winning symbol are displayed. The opening/closing pattern and the payout of game balls B are also restarted.

As mentioned above, when a slight abnormality is detected and a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), This requires the hall manager to turn off the power and then turn it on again, but after the power is turned on, symbol fluctuation B is restarted. In this way, for minor abnormalities, although cheating is suspected, there is a high possibility that it is not cheating, so after the weak game stop state is resolved, the symbol fluctuation that was being executed at the time of the weak game stop state will be returned to. The system allows the player to resume playing without being penalized.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 executes the warning display 1 at time t3 when the power is turned on again. The warning display 1 is, for example, a message that says, "Please stop any activity that is suspected of being fraudulent." In addition, since Warning Display 1 was a minor abnormality, it was set to end after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and specific management by the hall manager was performed as in Warning Display 2, which will be described later. The program is designed to terminate without requiring any user intervention. After the warning display 1 is executed, an apology effect display is executed. In such an apology effect display, for example, a message such as "Please wait for a while until the help mode L is activated. Please enjoy a rare action as an apology." is executed. In this example, when the weak game stop state occurs, the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state is in progress reaching 600 times (relief counter = 600), or the special symbol in the low probability state is in progress. If a symbol variation is being executed with a pending symbol variation display reaching 600 times (relief counter = 600), as an apology for interrupting the performance related to those symbol variations, otherwise I am trying to perform an apology performance that I would never have performed. In such an apology production, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during a game) is performed using a movable body or a lamp.

In addition, the movable body is made to stand by until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since t3 when the power was turned on again and the apology effect display is started on the effect display device 1600, and the apologies effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed. After the game has started, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during the game) is performed as an apology action. In addition, the lamp light emission is made to wait until a predetermined period has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again and the apology effect display starts on the effect display device 1600. After the game has started, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during the game) is performed as an apology action. The apology action is set to end when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, and when the apology action is ended, the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state will be displayed 600 times (relief number counter = 600). ), when tx, which is the time when the symbol fluctuation B stops, has not arrived, the operation of the movable body and the lamp light emission are on standby until tx arrives. On the other hand, if tx, which is the time when the symbol variation B stops, has arrived at the time when the apology operation is finished, there is no need to wait for the movement of the movable body or the light emission of the lamp.

In addition, regarding the audio output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until tx arrives, which is the time when symbol variation B stops, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). During this time, the system waits without outputting any apologetic audio. In this way, while the apology action is performed for the movable object or the lamp light emission, by not performing the apology action for the voice output, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the surroundings, and the player who is playing the game can This can be done as an apology for.

Then, after symbol variation B is restarted when the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) in a low probability state, symbol variation B is executed after tx, which is the time when symbol variation B stops. The performance is progressing in the same way as when the weak game stop state has not occurred. That is, after tx, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display for help mode L indicating that help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). Furthermore, regarding the movable body, the movable body is not used in the assistance mode L performance after tx, and the operation specified in the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. Further, in the lamp emission, after tx, light is emitted in a light emission pattern for help mode L as the help mode L effect is executed. In addition, in audio output, after tx, BGM for help mode L is output from the speaker as the help mode L effect is executed.

FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the performance progress when a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). In this example, the main control board 1310 detects a severe abnormality at time t1 during execution of symbol variation B when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). A case is described in which it is determined that the strong game stop flag is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 223, when the strong game stop flag is turned ON at time t1 when symbol variation B is being executed, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). If it is determined, the state has shifted from the low probability non-time saving state to the strong gaming stop state. In this strong game stop state, it is impossible to play a game, and a game stop notification 2 is executed to notify the outside that the strong game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, at the time of t1, if symbol variation B is being executed, in which the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the power is cut off from t1. Until t2, symbol variation B being executed at t1 is interrupted. In addition to symbol fluctuation B, at the time of t1, the variable display of special symbols, the suspension of special symbols, the fluctuation display of ordinary symbols, the suspension of ordinary symbols, the execution of the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 by the ordinary winning symbol, When the payout of game balls B is in progress, from t1 to t2, the special symbols being executed at t1 are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are on hold, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the normal symbols are on hold, Both the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 and the payout of the game balls B based on the normal winning symbols are interrupted. As a result, in the strong game stop state from t1 to t2, it is impossible to proceed with the game.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display for game stop notification 2 in place of the performance display for the help mode L precursor as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. ing. In such game stop notification 2, for example, a display saying "This is a malicious abnormality. Please reset the game." is executed.

In addition, regarding the movable body, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the game stop notification 2 (For example, an operation that is never executed other than game stop notification 2) is being executed. In addition, in the lamp emission, as a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3. The LED that is displayed is made to emit light in a light emitting pattern for game stop notification 2 (for example, blinking strongly in red). In addition, in the audio output, as a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the BGM for help mode L precursor, the speaker outputs the sound for game stop notification 2 (for example, "Malicious This is an abnormality.Please reset the game.'' is output.

After the strong game stop state occurs, the hall manager turns off the power at time t2, and when turning the power on again at time t3, a RAM clear operation by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f or a setting key is performed. A setting change operation of turning on the switch 1311a (or a setting change operation of turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) is required. The strong game stop flag is not turned off at time t3 when the power is turned on again, but continues in the strong game stop state until a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4. ing. In other words, from t3 to t4, the game is in a strong game stop state, so it is impossible to play a game, and after t4, the state returns to a state where it is possible to play a game.

In this example, after the strong game stop state has occurred, when the power is turned on again at time t3, the RAM clear operation and setting change operation are performed, so that the strong game stop state flag is cleared except for the ON state. , executes RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and initializes the gaming state (sets it to a low probability non-time saving state). In addition, the setting values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and when a setting change operation is performed, the setting values that have already been set (power-off before power-on) (time setting value) can be changed. In addition, the count of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but the occurrence of the strong game stop state Later, when the power is turned on again at time t3 and a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, the count is reset.

In the above, the initialization of the gaming state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4 after the RAM clear operation and setting change operation. In addition, when initializing the gaming state, the state at the time of occurrence of the strong game stop state is erased, so the symbol fluctuation in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). B. The effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output will not return to the state at the time of occurrence of the strong game stop state. In addition, from t3 to t4 when the strong game stop state is resolved, the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output are controlled to the states specific to when the strong game stop state occurs. There is.

Specifically, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the symbol variation B that has been suspended at the time t1 (the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600)) ) will not be restarted and will not fluctuate, and at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the symbol fluctuation B that was interrupted at the time of t1 will be erased, and after t4, the symbol fluctuation B will be changed at the time of t5. When there is a starting prize, it is possible to start a new symbol variation. In addition, at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the special symbol that is suspended at the time of t1 is displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol is suspended, the normal symbol is fluctuated, the normal symbol is suspended, and the normal symbol is variable. The opening/closing pattern of the prize opening 2003 and the payout of the game ball B are also erased.

As mentioned above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the execution of pattern change B, in which the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), and a strong game stop state occurs, the power is cut off and then turned back on, requiring the hall manager to perform operations such as clearing the RAM and changing settings, but after the power is turned on, pattern change B is erased. As such, since a severe abnormality is highly likely to be fraudulent behavior, play can be resumed after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the pattern change that was in progress when the strong game stop state occurred is not restored, and a penalty is imposed on the player.

Further, the effect display device 1600 executes warning display 2 at time t3 when the power is turned on again. In such a warning display 2, for example, a message such as "This has been fraudulent, we will reset everything." is executed. In addition, regarding warning display 2, since it was a severe abnormality, it was made to continue to be displayed until a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4, and to end at time t4. There is. Here, the specific manager operation includes, for example, operating a part located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall manager (a part that cannot be operated by the player). It has become necessary. As a result, for fraudsters, even if they turn off the power and then turn it on again after a forced gaming stoppage occurs, they cannot easily end Warning Display 2, and the hall administrator is not notified. can be ensured. In addition, when the above-mentioned weak game stop state occurs, an apology effect is executed after the warning display 1 is executed, but after the execution of the warning display 2 in this example, a serious abnormality is detected. , has not carried out such an apology performance.

Furthermore, the movable body is kept on standby from t3 when the power is turned on again until a new starting prize is received at time t5. Regarding the lamp emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit warning light until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again. is designed to emit light in a warning light pattern (for example, blinking strongly in red). Note that the warning light does not end at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and the power is turned off again. Even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3 when the warning light is turned on, the warning light continues to emit light until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. As a result, for fraudsters, even if a specific administrator operation is performed quickly after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning light cannot be terminated, and the notification to the hall administrator can be ensured. can be made into something.

Similarly, regarding audio output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a warning sound will be output from the speaker (for example, "Due to fraud, reset everything. ”) is output. Note that the warning sound does not end at t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning sound does not end at the specified administrator operation. The warning sound is made to continue until a period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. As a result, for fraudsters, even if a specific administrator operation is performed quickly after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning sound cannot be terminated, and the notification to the hall administrator is ensured. can be made into something.

Then, at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the strong gaming stop state is returned to the low probability non-time saving state, and after t4, when a new starting prize is received at time t5, a new Although it is possible to start symbol fluctuations, the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in a low probability state is reset at time t4, so the initial value is " 0'', and during control of such a low probability non-time saving state, a normal performance is executed. That is, regarding the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the audio output, the normal effect corresponding to the low probability non-time saving state is executed while the symbol variation is being executed.

In this example, if the main control board 1310 detects a slight abnormality during the execution of symbol fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), if a slight abnormality is detected in the low probability state, Although the time saving state has shifted to the weak game stop state, if a severe abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310 in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop state is shifted to the strong game stop state. ing. In other words, when a severe abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310 in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop flag is turned OFF, the strong game stop flag is turned ON, and the strong game stop state is generated with priority. ing. As a result, if there is a fraudulent act that causes a severe abnormality to be detected after a weak gaming suspension state has occurred, the weak gaming suspension state will transition to a strong gaming suspension state, so such fraudulent activity will be prevented. Never miss a thing. In addition, in the case of transitioning from a weak game stop state to a strong game stop state, the game can be resumed after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the pattern fluctuation that was being executed when the weak game stop state occurred will return. A penalty can be given to the player.

[About the return of time-saving effects during a power outage]
In the above, low probability time saving states A to C are set as low probability time saving states. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot C", the control is performed in the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R jackpot game until the next "Jackpot". In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief counter). If you do not hit the jackpot until the number of times counter = 600) and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the lottery result of the special symbol will not be a hit. Nevertheless, until the number of subsequent changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example), control is maintained in the low probability time saving state B. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the jackpot game is not executed, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 to 100 times) after the immediate short winning symbol stops. ) is controlled to the low probability time saving state C.

Furthermore, during the period of control to the low probability time saving states A to C, effects corresponding to the respective time saving states are executed. Specifically, as a performance corresponding to the low probability time saving state A, a “time saving performance” indicating that the low probability time saving state A is being controlled is executed, and for example, the upper left corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed. ``Time-saving game in progress'' is displayed. In addition, as a performance corresponding to the low probability time saving state B, a "help mode L performance" indicating that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled) is executed, and for example, the above As shown in the above example of effect, “Help mode L in progress” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, as a performance corresponding to the low probability time saving state C, a "help mode S performance" indicating that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C being controlled) is executed, and for example, the above As shown in the above example of effect, "help mode S in progress" is displayed at the upper left of the display area of effect display device 1600. In addition to this, "Time-saving production", "Help mode L production", and "Help mode S production" can display background images and mini characters unique to each production, and output sounds and light emissions. making it possible.

In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (at the time of a power outage), the type of low probability time saving state being executed is stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when the power is turned on again, the A command corresponding to the type of low probability state being executed is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, after the power is turned on again, the performance corresponding to the time-saving state that was running before the power outage will be restored, and even after the power is turned on again, any of the low probability time-saving states A to C will be restored. It is possible to know whether the system is being controlled. Specifically, if a "time-saving effect" is being executed as a performance corresponding to low probability time-saving state A during a power outage, when the power is turned on again, a command corresponding to low-probability time-saving state A is executed. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "time saving effect" is returned to. In addition, if the "help mode L effect" is being executed as a performance corresponding to low probability time saving state B during a power outage, when the power is turned on again, a command corresponding to low probability time saving state B will be issued. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "help mode L effect" is returned to. In addition, if the "help mode S effect" is being executed as a performance corresponding to low probability time saving state C during a power outage, when the power is turned on again, a command corresponding to low probability time saving state C will be issued. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "help mode S effect" is returned to.

In addition, during a power outage, if "help mode S performance" is being executed as a performance corresponding to low probability time saving state C among low probability time saving states A to C, after turning on the power again, It is executed so as to return to "Help Mode S Effect", but when "Help Mode S Effect" returns, some effects of "Help Mode S Effect" are executed so as not to return. ing. For example, while the "Help mode S effect" is being executed, "Help mode S in progress" is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the effect display device 1600, as shown in the above example of effect. When returning to "Help Mode S Effect", the "Help Mode S In progress" is restricted from being displayed, but background images and mini characters specific to the effect are displayed, and sounds and light emission are output. I'm running out of things to do to get back on track. This means that during the period of control in the low probability time saving state C, the number of changes of the special symbol during the control of the time saving state is small, 20 to 100 times, and compared to the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B, the game A game is being played that is disadvantageous to the player. In this regard, when returning to the "Help mode S effect", by restricting the effect display device 1600 from displaying "Help mode S in progress", it is possible to return to the low probability time saving state C control. It becomes difficult to grasp the situation, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of dissatisfaction with disadvantageous games in the low probability time saving state C.

In addition, after the power is turned on again, the execution is performed to return to the performance corresponding to the time-saving state that was running before the power cut, but before returning to the performance corresponding to the time-saving state, The effect display device 1600 temporarily displays a common return image (in this example, an arrow bar displaying "Left-handed hit!" and a message displaying "We will return in less time") for a predetermined period of time. There is. In other words, a common return image is temporarily displayed when returning to any of the "time saving effects", "help mode L effects", and "help mode S effects" as effects corresponding to the time saving state. Therefore, at that point, it is not possible to know which production he will return to. In this way, at the time when the common return image is temporarily displayed, it is determined whether the low probability time saving state A is being controlled, the low probability time saving state B is being controlled, or the low probability time saving state C is being controlled. Since this cannot be determined, the game should be started early in order to return to either "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", or "help mode S effect" to find out which time saving state is in effect. It can generate motivation. In addition, the timing to return to either "Time saving effect", "Help mode L effect", or "Help mode S effect" is after displaying the common return image, and then the variable display of the next special symbol will start. It is preferable that the timing is the same. Note that this common recovery image is not displayed after the power is turned off and turned on in a state other than the time saving state.

Also, as detailed above, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. In this case, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is assumed to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. At the time of power outage, if the performance corresponding to the time saving state is being executed and such a RAM error occurs after the power is turned on again, the time saving effect that was being executed before the power outage will be executed. It is executed in such a way that it does not return to the performance corresponding to the state. This is because a RAM error may have occurred when the power was turned on due to an unauthorized transition to the gaming state before the power was cut off. By not allowing players to return to the performance corresponding to the current time-saving state and not informing them of which time-saving state they are in, we encourage them not to commit fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the gaming state. I can do it.

[About the handling of immediate short hits during time short control]
In the above, when an immediate short hit occurs in the time saving state, the already controlled time saving state is continued without being controlled to a new time saving state based on the immediate short winning. However, as a modification example, , In the time saving state, if an immediate short hit occurs, the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in the already controlled time saving state and the new time saving state based on the immediate short winning state. The number of variable displays of special symbols may be compared, and the subsequent game progress mode may be determined in accordance with the comparison result. Specifically, the number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in a new time-saving state based on an immediate short hit is higher than the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be performed in a time-saving state that has already been controlled. If there are many cases, an example of control may be switching from the already controlled time saving state to a new time saving state based on the immediate short hit. Such a modification will be explained below.

FIG. 224 shows a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modified example. As shown in FIG. 224(A), the lottery table at the time of low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, is provided with an immediate short hit determination value, which is similar to FIG. 190(A). is different from the judgment other than the immediate short hit judgment value in the low probability lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number or the low probability lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. The values (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as in FIG. 190(A). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 224(B), the lottery table at the time of high probability that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value. Unlike B), the instant short winning judgment value in the low-probability lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the low-probability lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. The other determination values (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as those in FIG. 190(B). As a result, in the time saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, and in addition to making it easy to execute the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the variable winning hole 2003, the variable winning hole Since there is a possibility of immediately winning a short winning prize by starting winning in 2003, even if an advantageous game is being played in a time saving state, the player can play the game with more anticipation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(D), in the symbol determination table at the time of an immediate short hit that is compared with the second symbol random number, judgment values are allocated to immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, and immediate short hit C. This differs from FIG. 190(D) in that the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit, which is compared with the first symbol random number, is the same as FIG. 190(D). In other words, after winning an immediate short hit by lottery based on the second special random number, the type of immediate short win (immediate short hit A, instant short hit A, Either an immediate short hit B or an immediate short hit C) is determined. Note that the symbol determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 224(C) and the symbol determination table for small hit shown in FIG. 224(E) are similar to the symbol determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 190(C), It is the same as the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in 190(E). In addition, the symbol determination table for an immediate short hit that is compared with the second symbol random number includes a second symbol random number (for example, from 1 to 100), as well as the symbol determination table for an immediate short hit that is compared with the first symbol random number. Random numbers), the judgment values are distributed at a ratio of "immediate short hit A: instant short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10:20:70". Also, the ratio of the judgment value distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of an immediate short hit, which is compared with the first symbol random number, and the ratio of the determination value distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of an immediate short hit, which is compared with the second symbol random number. and may be made to be different.

In this example, low probability time saving states A to C are set as low probability time saving states. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot C", after the execution of the 10R jackpot game, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100, the control is performed in the low probability time saving state A. There is. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is ``jackpot D'', the control is performed to a low probability time saving state A until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 599 after the execution of the 10R jackpot game. In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is executed, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief counter). If the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) without hitting the jackpot before reaching the number of times counter = 600), even if the jackpot game is not executed. , until the number of subsequent changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 700 times), the control is performed in the low probability time saving state B. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", even though the jackpot game is not executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the immediate short winning symbol stops is the predetermined number of times (in this example, the instant short hit) Until the number of winnings (20, 40, 100, depending on the type of winning symbol) is reached, the low probability time saving state C is controlled. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a low probability time saving state C based on an immediate short hit is 100 times in the case of "immediate short win A" and 40 times in the case of "immediate short win B". times, and in the case of "immediate short hit C", 20 times is set.

FIG. 225 is a time chart showing instantaneous short hits during control of low probability time saving state B. First, during the control of low probability time saving state B, if an immediate short hit occurs, the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be performed in low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving based on the immediate short winning. The number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in state C is compared. Then, when the number of times the special symbol can be displayed fluctuated in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater than the remaining number of times the special symbol can be fluctuated in the low probability time saving state B. is controlled to switch from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol stops (switching to low probability time saving state C is enabled). In addition, when switching from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C, the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in low probability time saving state B will be discarded and executed in low probability time saving state C. Control is performed to newly count the number of possible variable displays of special symbols (20 times, 40 times, 100 times depending on the type of immediate short winning symbol). In other words, when switching from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C, control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state that is lower than the number of variable displays of special symbols that were supposed to be executed in low-probability time-saving state B. The period is to be extended. On the other hand, if the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in low probability time saving state B is greater than the number of special symbol fluctuation display that can be performed in low probability time saving state C based on immediate short hits. maintains low-probability time-saving state B without switching to low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol stops, and only the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in low-probability time-saving state B. The low probability time saving state B is controlled to continue (switching to the low probability time saving state C is disabled). In this way, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state with the greater number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol is selected and executed. It is possible to maintain an advantageous state for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and it is possible to continue playing the game with anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 225, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, if the Nth special symbol fluctuation display becomes "immediate short hit A", "700-N<100" (N= When the switching condition (the number of variable displays of special symbols that have already been executed in low probability time saving state B) is satisfied, switch from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol stops. It is controlled as follows. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit A" during the execution of the 601st to 700th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, after the immediate short winning A symbol stops, the low probability time saving state B will be changed. Control is performed to switch to low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit A" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state B is activated after the immediate short winning A symbol stops. controlled to maintain it. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, there is a period during which switching to low probability time saving state C will be invalidated if "immediate short hit A" occurs. On the other hand, during the execution of the 601st to 700th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, when it becomes "immediate short hit A", the switch to low probability time saving state C is set. It is set as a valid period.

Also, during the control of low probability time saving state B, if the Nth special symbol fluctuation display becomes "immediate short hit B", "700 - N < 40" (N = low probability time saving state B When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol has been changed and displayed already executed) is satisfied, the controller is controlled to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit B symbol stops. There is. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit B" during the execution of the 661st to 700th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, after the immediate short winning B symbol stops, the low probability time saving state B will be changed. Control is performed to switch to low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit B" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 660th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state B will be activated after the immediate short winning B symbol stops. controlled to maintain it. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 660th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, there is a period during which the switch to low probability time saving state C will be invalidated if "immediate short hit B" occurs. On the other hand, during the execution of the 661st to 700th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, when it becomes "immediate short hit B", the switch to low probability time saving state C is set. It is set as a valid period.

Also, during the control of low probability time saving state B, if the Nth special symbol fluctuation display becomes "immediate short hit C", "700 - N < 20" (N = low probability time saving state B When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol has been fluctuated) that has already been executed in There is. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit C" during the execution of the 681st to 700th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, after the immediate short winning C symbol stops, the low probability time saving state B will be changed. Control is performed to switch to low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit C" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 680th variable display of special symbols in low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state B is activated after the immediate short winning C symbol stops. controlled to maintain it. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 680th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, there is a period during which the switch to low probability time saving state C is invalidated if "immediate short hit C" occurs. On the other hand, during the execution of the 681st to 700th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B, if it becomes "immediate short hit C", the switch to low probability time saving state C is set. It is set as a valid period.

Next, the progress of the performance before and after the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state B will be explained. In this example, among the 601st to 700th special symbol fluctuation displays during low probability time saving state B control, the Nth special symbol fluctuation display (symbol fluctuation Z) becomes "immediate short hit A", A case will be described in which control is performed to switch from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C after the stop of the immediate short hit A symbol.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol fluctuation display during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when it becomes "immediate short hit A", the switch to the low probability time saving state C is executed. It is set as an invalid period. Then, during the period when switching to the low probability time saving state C is disabled, the remaining number of times the special symbol is displayed while controlling the low probability time saving state B is maintained in the case of "immediate short hit A", Since the period for controlling the low-probability time-saving state is not extended, it is set as a period in which the extended acquisition effect described later cannot be performed. In addition, during the period when switching to low probability time saving state C is disabled, a "help mode L effect" indicating that "help mode L" is being executed (under control of low probability time saving state B) is displayed. Running.

In addition, during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display after the 681st time while controlling the low probability time saving state B, the period during which the switch to the low probability time saving state C will be effective when it becomes "immediate short hit A". is set as . Then, during the period in which switching to low probability time saving state C is effective, control is performed to switch from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C when "immediate time saving hit A" is reached, and low probability time saving state B is controlled to switch to low probability time saving state C. Since the period during which the state is controlled is extended, it is set as the executable period for the extended acquisition effect described later. In addition, during the period when switching to low probability time saving state C is effective, "help mode L effect" indicating that "help mode L" is being executed (under control of low probability time saving state B) is displayed. In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 executes an "extension chance display" indicating that the period for controlling the low probability time saving state is an extendable period. Here, the "extension chance display" can be an example of a performance display in which a message image regarding extension (a message image saying "If character X appears, the time may be shortened and extended...") is displayed on the performance display device 1600. (Illustration omitted). As a result, while the "extended chance display" is being executed, the user can pay attention to whether or not to execute an extended acquisition effect, which will be described later, and can enjoy whether or not the period for controlling the low probability time saving state will be extended.

Also, among the 681st and subsequent special symbol fluctuation displays during low probability time saving state B control, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuation Z, which is the Nth special symbol fluctuation display, , an ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed, and after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped, the low probability time saving state B is controlled to be switched to the low probability time saving state C, and the period of controlling to the low probability state is extended. Here, the "extended acquisition effect" displays a success pattern in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (low probability time saving (a production that succeeds in extending the period of control to the state) and a failure pattern in which the character ) (not shown). In addition, while symbol variation Z is being executed, it is set as the executable period for extended acquisition performance, and an "extended acquisition performance" is executed to notify whether or not the period for controlling the low probability time saving state will be extended. In the "extended acquisition performance" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, a performance that succeeds in extending the period of control to a low probability time saving state (extension acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is executed. Thereby, during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to whether or not the period of controlling to the low probability time saving state will be extended.

In addition, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the control is changed to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol stops, but regarding the "extended acquisition performance", the low probability This is a performance that will not be executed if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the stochastic non-time saving state. Thereby, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, it is possible to enjoy a different effect from that in the low probability non time saving state.

In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol from the 681st time onwards during the control of the low probability time saving state B, it is set as the executable period of the extended acquisition performance, and even if it does not become an immediate short hit, the low probability It is possible to execute an ``extension acquisition effect'' that notifies whether the period for controlling the time saving state will be extended or not. In this example, during the execution of symbol variation X, which is the N-2nd special symbol variation display during the control of low probability time saving state B, an "extended acquisition effect" is executed although it does not result in an immediate short hit. In the "extended acquisition performance" that is executed when the winning result is not achieved, a fake performance (extended acquisition performance with a failure pattern) that fails because the period of controlling to a low probability time saving state is extended is executed. While such symbol variation X is being executed, an "extended acquisition performance" is being executed, but since there is no immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to the new low probability time saving state C becomes effective if an "immediate short hit" occurs. . In such a case, the remaining number of special symbol variable displays that can be executed in the low probability time saving state C and the number of special symbol variable displays that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit are determined. If the number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the low probability will be displayed after the immediate short winning symbol stops. Control is performed to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. In other words, when the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the period of control to the low probability time saving state is extended. Furthermore, the period during which switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C is valid is set as a period during which extended acquisition performance can be performed.

In addition, when switching from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, "help mode S" corresponding to low probability time saving state C is being executed. It has not switched to the "Help mode S performance" which indicates that this is the case, but continues to execute the "Help mode L performance" that was being executed in the low probability time saving state B. In this way, before and after switching from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C, there is no change in that the "help mode L performance" is executed, so the control of low-probability time-saving state B continues (extension). ) can be made to appear as if it were done. In addition, after switching from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to the new low probability time saving state C becomes effective if an "immediate short winning" occurs. Since then, the "extension chance display" has been continuously executed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 226 is a time chart showing an instantaneous short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state A started 100 times with the jackpot C as an opportunity. First, during control of low probability time saving state A, if an immediate short hit occurs, the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving based on the immediate short winning. The number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in state C is compared. Then, when the number of times the special symbol can be displayed fluctuated in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater than the remaining number of times the special symbol can be fluctuated in the low probability time saving state A. is controlled to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol stops (switching to the low probability time saving state C is enabled). Also, when switching from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C, the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in low probability time saving state A will be discarded and executed in low probability time saving state C. Control is performed to newly count the number of possible variable displays of special symbols (20 times, 40 times, 100 times depending on the type of immediate short winning symbol). In other words, when switching from low-probability time-saving state A to low-probability time-saving state C, control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state that is lower than the number of variable displays of special symbols that were supposed to be executed in low-probability time-saving state A. The period is to be extended. On the other hand, if the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in low probability time saving state A is greater than the number of special symbol fluctuation display that can be performed in low probability time saving state C based on immediate short hits. maintains the low-probability time-saving state A without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol stops, and only the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be performed in the low-probability time-saving state A. The low probability time saving state A is controlled to continue (switching to the low probability time saving state C is disabled). In this way, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state with the greater number of times the special symbol is displayed is selected and executed. It is possible to maintain an advantageous state for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and it is possible to continue playing the game with anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 226, during the control of the low probability time saving state A, if the Nth special symbol fluctuation display becomes "immediate short hit A", "100-N<100" (N= When the switching condition (the number of variable displays of special symbols that have already been executed in low probability time saving state B) is satisfied, switch from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol stops. It is controlled as follows. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit A" during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, after the immediate short winning A symbol stops, the low probability time saving state A will change. Control is performed to switch to low probability time saving state C. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, there is a period during which the switch to low probability time saving state C is valid when the "immediate short hit A" occurs. is set as .

Also, during the control of low probability time saving state A, if the Nth special symbol fluctuation display becomes "immediate short hit B", "100 - N < 40" (N = low probability time saving state B When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the low-probability time-saving state A that has already been executed in It is controlled to switch. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit B" during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, after the immediate short winning B symbol stops, the low probability time saving state A is changed. Control is performed to switch to low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit B" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 60th variable display of special symbols in low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state A is changed after the immediate short winning B symbol stops. controlled to maintain it. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 60th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, there is a period during which the switch to low probability time saving state C will be invalidated if "immediate short hit B" occurs. On the other hand, during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, if it becomes "immediate short hit B", the switch to low probability time saving state C is set. It is set as a valid period.

In addition, during the control of low probability time saving state A, if the Nth special symbol fluctuation display becomes "immediate short hit C", "100 - N < 20" (N = low probability time saving state B When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the low-probability time-saving state A that has already been executed in It is controlled to switch. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit C" during the execution of the 81st to 100th variable display of special symbols in low probability time saving state A, after the immediate short winning C symbol stops, the low probability time saving state A will change. Control is performed to switch to low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit C" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 80th variable display of special symbols in low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state A is changed after the immediate short winning C symbol stops. controlled to maintain it. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 80th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, there is a period during which switching to low probability time saving state C will be invalidated if "immediate short hit C" occurs. On the other hand, during the execution of the 81st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display in low probability time saving state A, if it becomes "immediate short hit C", the switch to low probability time saving state C is set. It is set as a valid period.

Next, the progress of the performance before and after the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state A will be explained. In this example, among the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation displays during the control of the low probability time saving state A, at the Nth special symbol fluctuation display (symbol fluctuation Z), it becomes "immediate short hit A", A case will be described in which control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol stops.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A, the switch to the low probability time saving state C will not be possible if an "immediate short hit A" occurs. It is set as a valid period. Then, during the period in which switching to low probability time saving state C is effective, control is performed to switch from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C when "immediate shortening hit A" is reached, and low probability time saving state C is controlled to switch to low probability time saving state C. Since the period for controlling the state is extended, it is set as the executable period for the extended acquisition effect. In addition, during the period when switching to the low probability time saving state C is effective, in addition to executing a "pullback mode effect" indicating that the low probability time saving state A is being controlled, the effect display device 1600 displays a low An "extension chance display" is being executed to indicate that the period for controlling the stochastic time reduction state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified by a performance display in which a message image regarding extension (a message image saying "If character X appears, the time may be shortened and extended...") is displayed on the performance display device 1600. (Illustration omitted). As a result, while the "extended chance display" is being executed, the user can pay attention to whether or not to execute the extended acquisition effect, and can enjoy whether or not the period for controlling the low probability time saving state will be extended.

Also, among the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation displays during low probability time saving state A control, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuation Z, which is the Nth special symbol fluctuation display. Executes an "extended acquisition performance" and controls to switch from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol stops, and extends the period of control to the low probability state. . Here, the "extended acquisition effect" displays a success pattern in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (low probability time saving (a production that succeeds in extending the period of control to the state) and a failure pattern in which the character ) (not shown). In addition, while symbol variation Z is being executed, it is set as the executable period for extended acquisition performance, and an "extended acquisition performance" is executed to notify whether or not the period for controlling the low probability time saving state will be extended. In the "extended acquisition performance" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, a performance that succeeds in extending the period of control to a low probability time saving state (extension acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is executed. Thereby, during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to whether or not the period of controlling to the low probability time saving state will be extended.

In addition, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the control is changed to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning symbol stops, but regarding the "extended acquisition performance", the low probability This is a performance that will not be executed if an immediate short hit occurs during control of the stochastic non-time saving state. Thereby, during the control of the low probability time saving state A, it is possible to enjoy a different effect from that in the low probability non time saving state.

In addition, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A, it is set as the period during which the extended acquisition performance can be performed, and even if it does not result in an immediate short hit, the low probability An ``extension acquisition performance'' that notifies whether or not the period for controlling the stochastic time reduction state will be extended is enabled. In this example, during the execution of symbol variation X, which is the N-2nd special symbol variation display during the control of low probability time saving state A, an "extended acquisition effect" is executed although it does not result in an immediate short hit. In the "extended acquisition performance" that is executed when the winning result is not achieved, a fake performance (extended acquisition performance with a failure pattern) that fails because the period of controlling to a low probability time saving state is extended is executed. While such symbol variation X is being executed, an "extended acquisition performance" is being executed, but since there is no immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to the new low probability time saving state C becomes effective if an "immediate short hit" occurs. . In such a case, the remaining number of special symbol variable displays that can be executed in the low probability time saving state C and the number of special symbol variable displays that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit. If the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the low probability will be displayed after the immediate short winning symbol stops. Control is performed to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. That is, when the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the period of control to the low probability time saving state is extended. Further, the period during which switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C is valid is set as the period during which the extended acquisition effect can be executed.

In addition, when switching from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C, "help mode S" corresponding to low probability time saving state C is being executed while the low probability time saving state C is being controlled. It has not switched to the "Help mode S performance" which indicates that this is the case, but continues to perform the "Return mode performance" that was being executed in the low probability time saving state A. In this way, before and after switching from low-probability time-saving state A to low-probability time-saving state C, the control of low-probability time-saving state A continued (extended) because there was no change in that the "pullback mode performance" was executed. It can be made to look like. In addition, after switching from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to the new low probability time saving state C becomes effective if an "immediate short winning" occurs. Since then, the "extension chance display" has been continuously executed on the effect display device 1600.

In the above, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuation Z, which is the Nth special symbol fluctuation display during control of low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B, the immediate short hit At the time of the symbol fluctuation Z, an "extended acquisition performance" (extended acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is executed to notify that the period of control to the low probability time saving state will be extended, but the "extended acquisition performance" ” may be executed at the following timings. In other words, after not executing the "extended acquisition performance" at the time of the symbol variation Z that resulted in an immediate short hit, and switching to the low probability time saving state C, the low probability time saving state that was set before the instant short winning occurred. An "extended acquisition performance" (extended acquisition performance of a successful pattern) may be executed at the timing when the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in A or low probability time saving state B expires. For example, the number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A is set to 100, and the symbol fluctuation Z is the 80th special symbol fluctuation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A. During execution, if an immediate short hit occurs, after switching to low probability time saving state C, a special symbol that can be executed in low probability time saving state A that is set before becoming an instant short winning. An ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed at the timing when the number of variable displays reaches 100, and the remaining number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in a low probability time saving state C at that time is notified. As a result, until the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, the player does not notice that he or she has immediately won a short time, and it is possible to make it appear as if the period for controlling the low probability time saving state has suddenly been extended.

In addition, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuation Z, which is the Nth special symbol fluctuation display during control of low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B, the instant short winning At the time of symbol fluctuation Z, an "extended acquisition performance" (extended acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is executed to notify that the period of control to the low probability time saving state will be extended, but the "extended acquisition performance" If a power outage occurs during the execution of the ``extension acquisition effect'', after the power is turned on again, the recovery process for the execution of the ``extension acquisition performance'' is performed. In this way, even if a power outage occurs while the "extended acquisition performance" is being executed, the "extended acquisition performance" can be executed after the power is turned on again to control the system to a low probability time saving state. It is possible to recognize that the period will be extended, and it is possible to prevent the user from becoming unable to grasp how long the period in which the low probability time saving state is controlled will continue.

Next, the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time short state A that started 599 times with the jackpot D as an opportunity will be explained. In order to avoid confusion with the "100 low probability time saving states A that started with the jackpot C" explained earlier, below, for convenience of explanation, the 599 low probability time saving states that started with the jackpot D. State A is described as "low probability time saving state A2".

If an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability time saving state A2, regardless of the remaining number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A2, after the immediate short winning symbol stops. The low probability time saving state A2 is maintained without switching to the low probability time saving state C, and the low probability time saving state A2 continues for the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A2. (disables switching to low probability time saving state C). That is, during the control of the low probability time saving state A2, the above-mentioned "immediate short winning symbol invalid period (period in which control is not performed to the low probability time saving state C triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol becoming "immediate short winning")" ” The same control is performed. As mentioned above, the low-probability time-saving state A2 continuously continues to the low-probability time-saving state B after 599 special symbol fluctuation displays, and in the middle of such low-probability time-saving state A2, the low-probability time-saving state C However, in this example, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantageous situation for the player. In addition, for example, if the special symbol changes after the 501st time and switches to the low-probability time-saving state C for 100 times, the disadvantageous situation described above will not occur, but it will become a low-probability time-saving state C with no benefit. Therefore, there is a concern that the original fun of the low probability time saving state C may be diminished, but in this example, such concerns can be avoided for players.

In the above, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state C, the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C are set to have the same time saving performance. In other words, in low probability time saving states A to C, when a normal lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result of a normal symbol will be a "normal hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of a normal symbol is a "normal hit", By increasing the time and number of times that the variable winning hole 2003, which is closed by the variable winning hole door 2521, is open, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003. It is assumed that the probability that the lottery result of the symbol is a "normal win" and the time and number of times that the variable winning hole 2003 is in the open state are the same. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C may be configured to have different time-saving performances. In such a configuration, the higher the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a "normal win", and the longer the time and number of times that the variable winning hole 2003 is open, the more the game ball will enter the variable winning hole 2003. It is said that the acceptance of B is easier and the time-saving performance is high.

Specifically, the first time saving control in the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B and the second time saving control in the low probability time saving state C are set, and for example, the first time saving control is set higher than the first time saving control. If the time saving performance of the second time saving control is higher, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state will be activated after the immediate short winning symbol stops. Control is performed to switch from A or the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if the first time-saving control has higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, if an immediate shortcut occurs during control in low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B, immediate shortening is performed. After the winning symbols stop, the control is performed so that the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B are maintained without switching to the low probability time saving state C. As a result, while controlling the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the player can enjoy seeing whether it can be switched to the low probability time saving state C, which has time saving performance advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the above, if the time saving performance of the first time saving control is higher than that of the second time saving control, if an immediate time saving hit occurs during control of low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B, , it is controlled to maintain the low probability time saving state A and low probability time saving state B after the immediate short winning symbol stops, but in addition to this, when the instant short winning occurs, the low probability time saving state A and low probability time saving state A are controlled. The remaining number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state B is compared with the number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit, If the number of fluctuation displays of special symbols that can be executed in low probability time saving state C based on immediate short winning is greater, after the immediate short winning symbol stops, low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B will be displayed. Control may be performed to switch to the stochastic time saving state C. As a result, when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be performed in low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B is small, the period of control to the low probability time saving state is extended. You can enjoy seeing if you can switch to C.

In addition, in the above, the case where an instant short win occurs in a low probability non-time saving state and the case where an immediate short win occurs in a low probability time saving state A or low probability time saving state B are the same period and the same. The low-probability time-saving state C was controlled with the time-saving performance of You may also do so. For example, if an immediate short hit A occurs in 100 low probability non-time saving states A triggered by a jackpot C, then the low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short winning A results in 100 low probability non-time saving states A as described above. While controlling the switch to probability time saving state C, if an immediate short hit A occurs in low probability non-time saving state B, low probability time saving state C is performed 120 times as low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short win A. It may be possible to control switching to state C. For example, if an immediate short win A occurs in 100 low probability non-time saving states A triggered by a jackpot C, then the above-mentioned first low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short win A While switching control is performed to a low probability time saving state C with time saving control, if an immediate short hit A occurs in the low probability non time saving state B, the low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short win A is set. The switching control may be performed to the low probability time saving state C accompanied by the time saving control in step 2.

In addition, as another example, if an immediate short hit A occurs in 100 low probability non-time saving states A triggered by a jackpot C, then the above-mentioned low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short winning A is assumed. While controlling the switching to the low probability time saving state C 100 times as described above, if the instantaneous short winning A again occurs in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short winning A, this second instant short winning The low probability time saving state C based on A may be switched to the low probability time saving state C 120 times. Also, for example, if an immediate short hit A occurs in 100 low probability non-time saving states A triggered by a jackpot C, the above-mentioned second low probability time saving state C based on this instant short winning A becomes While controlling to switch to the low probability time saving state C with time saving control, if the instantaneous short winning A again occurs in the low probability time saving state C based on this instant short winning A, this second instant short winning The low-probability time-saving state C based on A may be switched to a low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by a third time-saving control (time-saving control with higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control).

In this way, by making the period and time saving performance of the low probability time saving state C different depending on the gaming state when the instant short winning occurs, the gameplay using the instant short winning can be made even more diverse. You can improve your interest.

[Detailed explanation regarding external terminal board 558]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, information regarding the game can be transmitted to external equipment such as a hall computer via the external output terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 as the game progresses. The external device is, for example, a hall computer that controls the information of the game hall or an external information device installed above each pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and based on the information transmitted via the external output terminal 558a, It is possible to grasp the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, information about the pachinko machine 1, etc., monitor whether illegal games are being played, and provide players with information regarding the history of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, Information on the number of daily jackpots, information on the number of changes in symbols up to each jackpot, information on the number of prize balls at each jackpot, information on the number of continuous time-saving changes, etc.) can be provided numerically or graphically. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when transitioning to special gaming states such as the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C that are controlled in the new manner described above, the , information regarding these special gaming conditions is appropriately communicated to the external device, and even in cases where the player has such special gaming characteristics, the situation that is advantageous to the player is appropriately communicated to the external device, The gaming parlor where the gaming machine is installed can properly manage the gaming machine and provide a gaming machine that is easy to operate at the gaming parlor. This point will be explained below.

First, the external terminal board 558 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing the connection between the pachinko machine 1 and external equipment. As shown in FIG. 227, the external terminal board 558 of this embodiment is connected to the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, and various signals input to the external terminal board 558 (related to the payout of game balls) are connected to the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310. external signals, signals related to the opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4, signals related to symbol confirmation, signals related to entering the ball into each starting port, signals related to various hits, signals related to special conditions, signals related to security, etc.) Outputs various signals to equipment. In this embodiment, the various signals output from the external terminal board 558 are input to each of the hall computer and the external information device, but the various signals output from the external terminal board 558 are, for example, The input may be input to the hall computer and input from the hall computer to an external information device, or conversely, the input may be input to an external information device and input from the external information device to the hall computer. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are mounted on the external terminal board 558. In this embodiment, the ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are, from the left in the figure, external output terminal 558ab, external output terminal 558ac, external output terminal 558ad, external output terminal 558ae, external output terminal 558af, external output terminal 558ag, external The output terminal 558ah, the external output terminal 558ai, the external output terminal 558aj, and the external output terminal 558ak are arranged horizontally in this order, and each can transmit different information to an external device. Note that the configuration of the external terminal board 558 is not limited to this, and the 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak may be arranged in a different order from this embodiment, or the number of external output terminals 558ab to 558ak may be greater than 10, or It may be configured with a smaller number of external output terminals.

The ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are each colored in a different color. Specifically, external output terminal 558ab is white, external output terminal 558ac is green, external output terminal 558ad is gray, external output terminal 558ae is yellow, external output terminal 558af is black, external output terminal 558ag is pink, external output terminal 558ah is colored blue, external output terminal 558ai is colored red, external output terminal 558aj is colored orange, and external output terminal 558ak is colored light blue. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are colored in different colors, so that the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak can be easily distinguished by visual inspection, and the external terminal board 558 can be easily distinguished by visual inspection. When connecting the pachinko machine 1 and an external device via the pachinko machine 1, connection errors between each of the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak and each of the input terminals of the external device are suppressed, and malfunction of the external device can be suppressed.

The types of information transmitted via the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak will be described below. As described above, the external terminal board 558 of this embodiment is connected to the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, and under the control of the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the external terminal board 558 various signals (signals related to the payout of game balls, signals related to the opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4, signals related to symbol confirmation, signals related to the entry of balls into each starting hole, signals related to various hits, signals related to special conditions) signals, security-related signals, etc.) to external devices.

Note that electrical signals are always output from the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, but the electrical signals are switched depending on the progress of the game. In this example, it is possible to switch between an electric signal having a predetermined first voltage (an electric signal in an ON state) and an electric signal having a predetermined second voltage (an electric signal in an OFF state). The named signals (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.) refer to electrical signals having a predetermined first voltage (ON state electrical signals). Hereinafter, outputting an electrical signal having a predetermined first voltage will simply be referred to as "outputting signals with various names (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, gaming state signal, etc.)", and outputting an electrical signal having a predetermined second voltage Outputting electrical signals with voltage is simply "do not output signals with various names (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, gaming state signal, etc.)" or "signals with various names (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, etc.)" signal, gaming status signal, etc.).

First, the external output terminal 558ab outputs, for example, a prize ball number information output signal corresponding to the actual number of prize balls to an external device. Specifically, in the port output process of the payout control board 633 described above, when the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds 10 (that is, the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is 10). When the ball has reached the ball), a prize ball number information output signal is output from the payout board 633 to the external terminal board 558, and a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external device via the external output terminal 558ab of the external terminal board 558. be done. The prize ball number information output signal is an electrical signal that is output for a short time within the range that can be received by the external device when the number of game balls actually put out reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, For example, it is an electrical signal output for 0.106 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably input the prize ball number information output signal to the external device, and even when the prize ball number information output signal is transmitted multiple times in succession, The transmission of the ball count information output signal can be completed in a short time, and the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, when the number of game balls actually paid out reaches 10 balls consecutively, the prize ball number information output signal is outputted from the external terminal board 558 at intervals of, for example, 0.106 seconds or more. It is desirable to prevent the number of prize balls from being erroneously counted due to continuous input of the prize ball number information output signal to the external device, and to prevent the number of prize balls from being erroneously counted when the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be managed more appropriately on the hall side.

The external output terminal 558ac outputs, for example, a detection signal corresponding to the opening of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 to an external device. Specifically, the detection signal from the door frame release switch when the door frame 3 is released and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch when the main body frame 4 is released are transmitted via the payout control board 633. When each detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 outputs the detection signal to an external device from the external output terminal 558ac of the external terminal board 558. The detection signal is an electric signal that is output while the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is released and the detection signal from the door frame release switch or the main body frame release switch is input, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The state of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side.

The external output terminal 558ad outputs, for example, a symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol to an external device. The above-mentioned main control board 1310 transmits a symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the variation of the special symbol has stopped, and also counts up the above-mentioned relief counter. The symbol confirmation signal outputted through the external control board 1510 is output every time the variation of the special symbol stops, including when the symbol confirmation command is not sent to the peripheral control board 1510 or when the relief counter described above is not counted up. Output to the device. The symbol confirmation signal is an electrical signal that is output for a shorter time than the shortest variation time of the special symbol, and in this embodiment, it is an electrical signal that is output for 0.128 seconds, for example. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the special symbols change continuously, the symbol confirmation signal can be reliably input to the external device, and the special symbols can be input at the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The number of fluctuations (so-called number of starts) can be appropriately managed.

The external output terminal 558ae outputs, for example, a winning signal to an external device in response to the game ball entering each starting port. Specifically, the main control board 1310 reads the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401, and transmits the corresponding starting port winning command classified into other categories. It is stored as information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. When there is a signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the winning signal corresponding to this transmission information is output from the external output terminal 558ae of the external terminal board 558. Output to external device. The winning signal is an electrical signal that is output for a short period of time within a range that can be received by the external device when the game ball enters each starting port. It's a signal. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning signal can be reliably input to the external device, and even if the winning signal is transmitted multiple times in a row, the transmission of the winning signal can be completed in a short time. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, when the game ball enters each starting port consecutively, it is desirable that the winning signal is output from the external output terminal 558ae of the external terminal board 558 with an interval of 0.128 seconds or more, for example. By continuously outputting the winning signal input to the external device to the external device, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings from being erroneously counted. Can be managed appropriately.

For example, the external output terminal 558af outputs an advantageous condition start signal to an external device when a condition advantageous to the player starts. In response to this advantageous condition start signal, the external device can count the number of times an advantageous condition for the player has started (the number of special prizes). In addition, in this embodiment, the signal output from the external output terminal 558af is triggered not only when the lottery result of the conventional special symbol becomes a jackpot, but also when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a miss. It is set up as an opportunity. Note that the signal output from the external output terminal 558af is triggered by the following:
(a) When the jackpot game is controlled based on the stop result of the special symbol,
(b) When controlled to the low probability time saving state B based on the count value of the relief number counter mentioned above,
(c) When the special symbol is controlled to be in a low probability time saving state C based on the instantaneous short winning symbol being stopped and displayed,
Either of these triggers an advantageous state start signal to be output to the external device. This advantageous state start signal is outputted using the external output terminal 558af in triggers (a) to (c) in order to avoid adding an external output terminal, and the external device side recognizes it as one signal. I will do it. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to output the advantageous state start signal at different times depending on each trigger, and it is also possible to distinguish and recognize on the external device side which trigger the input is related to depending on the time. There is. In the present embodiment, in the case of trigger (a), the period (such as until all openings of the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 are completed) while being controlled by the jackpot game ( The advantageous state start signal is continuously output during the jackpot period (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot period), and the output of the advantageous state start signal stops when the jackpot game ends. The advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the probability time saving state B (for example, after the determination of the variable symbol whose count value of the relief number counter reaches 600), and 0.128 seconds have elapsed. In the case of trigger (c), the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped, and in the case of trigger (c), when the low probability time saving state C starts (for example, the stop display of the immediate short winning symbols (immediate short winning symbols A to C) The advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the time), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped after 0.256 seconds have elapsed. In general gaming machines, including machine 1, the jackpot period in opportunity (a) is controlled by the jackpot game (such as until the first jackpot 2006 or the second jackpot 2007 are all opened). ) is a long period of 0.256 seconds or more, so the advantageous state start signal output when controlled by the jackpot game may be mistakenly recognized as the low probability time saving states B and C. There is no such thing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output time of the advantageous state start signal output at the triggers (b) and (c) is shorter than the advantageous state start signal outputted when the jackpot game is controlled. It is set as follows. In addition to the above-mentioned purpose of allowing the external device to distinguish and recognize which occasion the input is related to, the purpose of this is also to increase the reliability of counting the number of special prizes. In other words, in this embodiment, the output time is set longer for items with higher importance for counting the number of special prizes. The level of importance and the length of the advantageous state start time are set so that the relationship is ``game>low probability state C>low probability state B''. By setting the output time to be longer for items with higher importance, for example, if the advantageous state start signal that is output when being controlled by a jackpot game is interrupted midway due to some noise etc. Even if the special prize is lost, depending on the timing of the cutoff, it is possible to count the number of special prizes on the external device side by considering it as a substitute for the advantageous state start signal outputted at the triggers (b) and (c). In other words, the possibility that information will be discarded due to insufficient time input on the external device side can be reduced in the order of "Jackpot game > Low probability state C > Low probability state B", and the information on the external device side This prevents a decline in the credibility of the company.

Also, regarding whether or not to recognize information by distinguishing between opportunities (a) to (c), needs may differ depending on the hole, so for example, it is desirable to recognize information by distinguishing between opportunities (a) to (c). (For example, if you want to recognize a jackpot game, low probability time saving states B and C as separate numbers of special prizes A, B, and C, or if you do not want to recognize some of the number of special prizes), the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal The output time (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds) is judged on the external device side, and the external device side determines the number of special prizes etc. to be counted according to the result. On the other hand, if you want to recognize information without distinguishing between opportunities (a) to (c) (for example, if you want to recognize jackpot games, low probability time-saving states B and C as the same number of special prizes) Regardless of the output time of the above-mentioned advantageous condition start signal (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds), the special prize is awarded on the external device side upon receiving the output of the advantageous condition start signal. It may be set to count the number of times, etc. In addition, if you want to recognize information by distinguishing between opportunity (a) and opportunity (b) and (c) without distinguishing between opportunities (b) and (c) (for example, when you want to recognize information by distinguishing between opportunity (a) and opportunity (b) and (c), For example, if you want to recognize the total number of winnings and distinguish them from the special prize number B of the jackpot game, for example, set the external device so that inputs of advantageous state start signals of 0.256 seconds or less are considered to be the same input. Just leave it there. In addition to the triggers (a) to (c), the external output terminal 558af may also be used when a small winning game is executed, and in this case, the output time of the advantageous state start signal is 0. An example is to set an output time (for example, 0.100 seconds) that is different from any of the jackpot periods longer than 128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, or 0.256 seconds so that the information can be recognized as a separate trigger.

The external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah are used, for example, to control the number of symbol changes (so-called start number) displayed on an external device (in particular, an external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1) at turning points in the game. Outputs a variable reset signal that triggers a reset to an external device. In this embodiment, the variable reset signal 1 is output from the external output terminal 558ag, and the variable reset signal 2 is output from the external output terminal 558ah, and the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are output at partially different timings. It is something that The fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are provided separately from the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal, and can be used for the main purpose of resetting the number of symbol fluctuations, etc., in addition to the number of special prizes. Furthermore, regarding the variable reset signals 1 and 2, the output trigger is not only when the lottery result of the conventional special symbol becomes a jackpot, but also when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss. It is set as follows.

First, the variable reset signal 1 will be explained. The trigger for outputting the variable reset signal 1 of this embodiment is the same as the triggers (a) and (b) explained in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also the same as the trigger explained in the advantageous state start signal. The output mode is the same as in (a) and (b) (two patterns with jackpot periods longer than 0.128 seconds and 0.256 seconds). In other words, the output of the variable reset signal 1 is started based on the occurrence of a jackpot game or the low probability time saving state B, and in response to this variable reset signal 1, the external device (in particular, the external information installed above the pachinko machine 1) starts outputting the variable reset signal 1. It becomes possible to reset the number of symbol fluctuations, etc. in the device (device), and the player can recognize the number of symbol fluctuations from the initial value in a new gaming state. Regarding the variable reset signal 1, as for whether or not to recognize the information by distinguishing between triggers (a) and (b), the needs may differ depending on the hole. ) (for example, if you do not want to reset the number of fluctuations in either a jackpot game or low probability time saving state B), the output time of fluctuation reset signal 1 (0.128 seconds, 0.256 The jackpot period (longer than seconds) should be determined on the external device side, and depending on the result, the external device should select whether to reset or not, and conversely, without distinguishing between triggers (a) and (b). (For example, if you want to reset the number of fluctuations in each of the jackpot game and low probability time saving state B), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 1 (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds) Regardless of the long jackpot period), the external device may be set to reset the number of fluctuations upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1.

Next, the variable reset signal 2 will be explained. The trigger for outputting the variable reset signal 2 of this embodiment is the same as the triggers (a) and (c) explained in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also the same as the trigger explained in the advantageous state start signal. The output mode is the same as in (a) and (c) (two patterns of 0.256 seconds and a time longer than 0.256 seconds). In other words, the variable reset signal 2 is output based on the occurrence of a jackpot game or a low probability time saving state C, and in response to this variable reset signal 2, the external device (especially the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1) ), it becomes possible to reset the number of symbol variations, etc., and the player can recognize the number of symbol variations from the initial value in a new gaming state. Regarding the variable reset signal 2, as for whether or not to recognize the information by distinguishing between triggers (a) and (c), the needs may differ depending on the hole. ) (for example, if you do not want to reset the number of fluctuations in either a jackpot game or low probability time saving state C), the output time of fluctuation reset signal 2 (0.256 seconds, 0.256 It is sufficient to have the external device determine the jackpot period (longer than seconds), and select whether or not to reset on the external device depending on the result; conversely, without distinguishing between triggers (a) and (c). If you want to reset the number of fluctuations (for example, if you want to reset the number of fluctuations in each of the jackpot game and low probability time saving state C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 2 (0.256 seconds, from 0.256 seconds). Regardless of the long jackpot period), the external device may be set to reset the number of fluctuations upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2.

Furthermore, the variable reset signals 1 and 2 have in common that they both use the trigger (a) as an output trigger, and if both the external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah are connected to the external device side, With the arrival of trigger (a), variable reset signals 1 and 2 are output from the respective terminals. Regarding this, at first glance, there is a concern that the number of fluctuations may be reset multiple times on the external device side. However, in this embodiment, even if the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are output from the respective terminals due to the arrival of the trigger (a), all of the output periods of the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are completely overlapped. In this way, even if each of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is output, the number of fluctuations is reset only once on the external device side.

Note that, apart from this embodiment, the external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah are not separated, but are made into one external output terminal ax, and the variable reset signal X is configured to be output from the triggers (a) to (c). You can. For example, the trigger for outputting the variable reset signal An example of this is to use the same output mode as the start signal. Regarding the variable reset signal If you want to recognize the information separately (for example, if you do not want to reset the number of fluctuations due to a jackpot game or some of the low probability time saving states B and C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal X (0.128 seconds, 0 .256 seconds, jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds) is determined on the external device side, and depending on the result, the external device side selects whether to reset or not. If you want to reset the number of fluctuations without distinguishing between (c) (for example, if you want to reset the number of fluctuations for each of jackpot games and low probability time saving states B and C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal X (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, or a jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds), the external device may be set to reset the number of fluctuations upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal X.

For example, the external output terminal 558ai outputs a gaming state signal to an external device while the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player. This game status signal allows the external device to understand that a status advantageous to the player continues, and in this example, it is controlled to either a time saving status, a high probability status, or a jackpot game. It is now output when the Specifically, the triggers for outputting a signal from the external output terminal 558ai include the same triggers as the triggers (a) to (c) described above, and these triggers are used to start outputting the gaming state signal to the external device. This game status signal is outputted using the external output terminal 558ai at the triggers (a) to (c) in order to avoid adding an external output terminal. Also, for example, when the jackpot game is controlled to shift to the low probability time saving state A after the jackpot game ends, or when the control is performed to shift to the low probability time saving state C during the low probability time saving state A. When controlled, when controlled to shift to low probability time saving state C during low probability time saving state B, or when a jackpot game or small winning game is started during low probability time saving state A, B, C or when controlled to shift to low probability time saving state B during low probability time saving state C, or when shifting from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state B which continues for 559 fluctuations. When the game is controlled by the player, the game state signal is continuously outputted without stopping the output of the game state signal. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a series of advantageous states can be continuously recognized on the external device side, and an external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 can display the advantageous states to the outside. Continuous notification is possible.

The external output terminal 558aj outputs, for example, a planned prize ball signal corresponding to the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out to an external device. Specifically, in the above-described prize ball control process, the main control board 1310 determines whether the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the input information read from the input information storage area. In addition, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter, and the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter is determined by reading input information from the input information storage area described above. Based on the input information of the lever, that is, various winning holes (such as general winning hole 2001, variable winning hole 2003, first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, second big winning hole 2007, etc.) provided on the game board 5 are selected. (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5"). Based on the game balls that have entered the game board, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and the main control is built-in. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM. In the prize ball control process, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is used. , reads the input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, adds the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, and if the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value 10. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that fact, and the output information is stored as transmission information. At the same time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM's prize ball schedule information storage area as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter.

Further, the main control board 1310 outputs the transmission information stored in the output information storage area to an external device via the external output terminal 558aj of the external terminal board 558 as a scheduled prize ball signal. This scheduled prize ball signal is an electrical signal that is output for a short time within a range that can be received by the external device when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. This is an electrical signal that is output for 0.128 seconds, for example. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably input the transmission information to the external device, and even in the case where the main control board 1310 transmits the scheduled prize ball signal multiple times in a row, the transmission information The transmission can be completed in a short time, and the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Note that when the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10 balls in a row, the scheduled prize ball signal is outputted from the external output terminal 558aj of the external terminal board 558 at intervals of, for example, 0.128 seconds or more. It is desirable that the expected number of prize balls be output, and by continuously outputting the expected prize ball signal input to the external device to the external device, it is possible to prevent the expected number of prize balls from being counted incorrectly. The pachinko machine 1 can be managed more appropriately on the pachinko hall side.

The external output terminal 558ak outputs, for example, a security signal related to security to an external device. In detail, the main control board 1310 receives various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001, a first start Detection signal from the opening sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, detection signal from the variable winning opening sensor 2526, detection signal from the first winning opening sensor 2524, detection signal from the second opening opening sensor 2561. Detection signal, detection signal from out sensor 664, detection signal from first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, detection signal from vibration sensor, detection signal from safe switch, RAM Informs that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the operation signal from the clear switch (RAM clear signal), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process. Based on the payout control board 633 (payer ACK signal), abnormality (for example, magnetic abnormality related to the magnetic sensor, vibration abnormality related to the vibration sensor, normal electric role when a game ball wins a normal electric role) Abnormality in prize winning, abnormality in winning the big prize opening when there is a prize in the big winning opening in normal times, safe switch abnormality regarding the safe switch, abnormality in passing through the variable probability area when the game ball passes through the variable probability area in normal times, when clearing the RAM, If it is determined that there is a designated symbol route abnormality, RAM error, etc., a security signal is output from the external output terminal 558ak of the external terminal board 558 to the external device.

The security signal of this embodiment is an electrical signal that is output for a period of time that can be reliably received on the external device side, for example, an electrical signal that is output for 30,000 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the security signal can be reliably input to the external device, and the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, the security signal may indicate an abnormality during its output (for example, a magnetic abnormality related to a magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to a vibration sensor, an abnormality in winning a normal electric accessory when a game ball is won in a normal electric accessory during normal times, Occasionally, there is a big winning opening abnormality when a prize is won in the big winning opening, a safe switch abnormality regarding the safe switch, an abnormality when the game ball passes through the certain variable area during normal times, an abnormality when clearing the RAM, a designated symbol route abnormality, When it is determined again that there is a RAM error, etc., a security signal is further output from that point onwards. Specifically, after it is determined that there is an abnormality and a security signal is output, for example, if it is determined that there is an abnormality again 15 seconds later, the security signal is output for an additional 30,000 seconds from that point. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229, a symbol confirmation signal is output from the external output terminal ad each time a special symbol stops during the game progress, and an external output signal is output when a state advantageous to the player starts. The advantageous state start signal outputted from the terminal 558af and the gaming state signal outputted from the external output terminal 558ai while the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player will be explained in detail. FIG. 228 shows the situation when the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C via the low probability time saving state B, and FIG. This figure shows the situation when transitioning from a non-time-saving state to a low-probability time-saving state C, and further transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state C to a new low-probability time-saving state C.

As shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the symbol confirmation signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is a special symbol regardless of the gaming state of low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state B, and low probability time saving state C. It is an electrical signal that is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device every time the fluctuation of the symbol stops (every time the special symbol finalization time starts). In this embodiment, the symbol is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device. Each time the confirmation signal is output, the display of the number of fluctuations of the external device is incremented by one. In addition, the symbol confirmation signal outputted from the external output terminal 558ad is output for 0.128 seconds at one time, and after 0.128 seconds have elapsed (after the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped), a predetermined output is output. A new symbol confirmation signal is not output until the prohibition period A (0.15 seconds) has elapsed. The output period of the symbol confirmation signal and the output prohibition period A are set to a time shorter than the shortest special variation time (2 seconds in this example) of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1, so that the variation of the special symbol is Even if the display is performed continuously, the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the variable display of each special symbol can be reliably transmitted to the external device side.

Next, FIG. 228 will be explained. In FIG. 228, the advantageous state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B based on the count value of the rescue number counter (count value of the rescue number counter = 600). (t1 in FIG. 228) and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short winning symbol and transitions from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C (t2 in FIG. 228). t1 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of trigger (b) described above, and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state B. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the advantageous state start signal when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, and displays "1" on the display of the number of special prizes. to add. Further, t2 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of trigger (c) described above, and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the advantageous state start signal even when transitioning from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C, and displays "1" on the display of the number of special prizes. Add.

Further, these advantageous state start signals are output after the low probability time saving states B and C are started, regardless of whether or not the variable display of special symbols is started. For example, the advantageous state start signal indicates that there is no special symbol pending at the start of low probability time saving states B and C (the number of pending lottery results for the first and second special symbols is zero), and the symbols are being displayed non-variably. It will also be output when it is in a standby state. As a result, even for players who are unaware of the existence of low-probability time-saving states B and C, the player can be made aware that an advantageous situation has occurred due to the behavior of the external device. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking C and leaving his/her seat.

In addition, for any advantageous state start signal, after each output time has elapsed (after the output of the advantageous state start signal has been stopped), the output is disabled until a predetermined output prohibition period B (0.15 seconds) has elapsed. , a new advantageous state start signal is not output redundantly. The output period of the advantageous state start signal and the output prohibition period B are similar to the relationship between the output period of the symbol confirmation signal and the output prohibition period A, and the shortest special fluctuation time of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 (in this example, 2 seconds). ), and as a result, for example, the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice in a row, and the low probability time saving states B and C occur consecutively due to the variable display of each special symbol. In case (immediately after low-probability time-saving state B starts, the special symbol fluctuates and the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped and displayed and shifts to low-probability time-saving state C, or immediately after low-probability time-saving state C starts) When the relief number counter reaches 600 times in the variable display of the special symbol and moves to the low probability time saving state B, or in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the low probability time saving state C starts, a new immediate short winning symbol is displayed. Even if the display is stopped and a new transition is made to the low probability time saving state C, etc.), advantageous state start signals corresponding to each state can be reliably transmitted to the external device side without duplication.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228, the variable reset signal 1 output from the external output terminal 558ag and the variable reset signal 2 output from the external output terminal 558ah are generated based on the count value of the relief counter. When the state transitions from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state B (t1 in Fig. 228), and when the special symbol stops displaying as an immediate short winning symbol and transitions from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C (see Fig. 228). t2) respectively. t1 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of trigger (b) described above, and the variable reset signal 1 is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state B. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0 upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1 when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. , the current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be reported from an external information device to players and the like. Further, t2 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of trigger (c) described above, and the variable reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0 upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2 even when transitioning from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C. However, the current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be reported to the outside, such as players, from the external information device.

Further, these variable reset signals 1 and 2, like the advantageous state start signal, are output after the low probability time saving states B and C are started, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is started. For example, the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 indicate that there is no special symbol pending at the start of the low probability time saving states B and C (the number of pending lottery results for the first and second special symbols is zero), and the symbol is displayed non-variably. It will also be output when the system enters a standby state. As a result, even for players who are unaware of the existence of low-probability time-saving states B and C, the player can be made aware that an advantageous situation has occurred due to the behavior of the external device. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking C and leaving his/her seat. In addition, for any of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, after the respective output times have elapsed (after the output of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is stopped), a predetermined output prohibition period C (0.15 seconds) is set. New fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not output until the time period has elapsed. The output period of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 and the output prohibition period C are similar to the relationship between the output period of the symbol confirmation signal and the output prohibition period A, and the shortest special fluctuation time of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 (in this example, 2 seconds), and as a result, for example, the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice in a row, and the low probability time saving states B and C are consecutively performed by the variable display of each special symbol. In cases where this occurs (such as when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol fluctuation display immediately after low probability time saving state B has started and the state shifts to low probability time saving state C, or when low probability time saving state C has started) When the relief number counter reaches 600 times in the special symbol fluctuation display immediately after and shifts to low probability time saving state B, or when the special symbol fluctuation display immediately after low probability time saving state C starts, a new immediate short hit occurs. Even when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is newly shifted to the low probability time saving state C, etc., the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 corresponding to each state can be reliably transmitted to the external device side.

In addition, the gaming state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai is transmitted when a transition is made from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B (the above-mentioned trigger (b)) based on the count value of the relief counter. The output is set to be triggered when the symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short winning symbol and transitions from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)), but in Fig. 228, Although output is started at the preceding trigger (b), no new output is started at the subsequent trigger (c). Specifically, regarding the "N variation" in "Special symbol variation/stop" in FIG. 228, when the trigger (c) arrives, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a gaming state signal is output. , If the game state signal is not being output, it starts outputting a new game state signal, and if it is outputting the game state signal, it continues to output the game state signal without stopping. controlled as follows. In this way, by continuously outputting the gaming state signal from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C without stopping the output of the gaming state signal midway, a series of advantageous states can be continued as described above. so that it can be recognized by external devices.

In addition, regarding "N variation" in "Special symbol variation/stop" in Figure 228, those related to the 700th variation display in low probability time saving state B (special symbol lottery result is an immediate short hit) are targeted. In this case, output is started at the preceding trigger (b), but new output is not started at the subsequent trigger (c). In other words, as shown at t3 in FIG. 228, the output stop timing of the gaming state signal is the determined time after the final fluctuation of the special symbols in the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C (for example, 0.128 seconds). is set at a predetermined timing after the elapse of (timing when a specific surplus period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed after the fixed time elapses), and after the end of low probability time saving state B or low probability time saving state C. Also, the output of the game status signal continues for a while. For this reason, even if the instantaneous short hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in low probability time saving state B and the transition to low probability time saving state C is made, the low probability time saving state may occur within the specific surplus period. Once state C is started, the output of the gaming state signal is handled in the same manner as when the transition to low probability time saving state C is performed during low probability time saving state B (when trigger (c) has arrived). Processing is performed by assuming that a game status signal is being output, and if there is a slight error, it is assumed that a series of advantageous conditions are continuing, and the processing is performed during low probability time saving states B to C. Similarly, it can be recognized by external devices.

In addition, "N fluctuation" in "Special symbol fluctuation/stop" in Figure 228 applies to those in the relationship of the 700th and subsequent fluctuation display in low probability time saving state B (special symbol lottery results are immediate short hits) In this case, even if it is controlled to shift to the low probability time saving state C after the end of the low probability time saving state B, the output of the gaming state signal will be newly started. Regarding this point, as another example, if the specific surplus period is set to be relatively long (for example, 10 seconds in which the special symbol can be performed multiple times in a low probability non-time saving state), the immediate short winning symbol If the timing at which is stopped and displayed is within the specific surplus period, the output of the gaming state signal is handled in the same way as when the control is made to shift to the low probability time saving state C in the middle of the low probability time saving state B ( The process may be performed by assuming that the game status signal is being output when the trigger (c) arrives. In this way, errors in the number fluctuations of special symbols can be recognized by the external device as if a series of advantageous states are continuing, in the same way as during low probability time saving states B to C. . In addition, in this embodiment, a low probability time saving state A (low probability time saving state A that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 559 times) due to the above-mentioned jackpot D is also set. For this reason, for example, when reaching opportunity (b) after passing through this low probability time saving state A (559 special symbol fluctuation displays) (600th special symbol fluctuation display) and transitioning to low probability time saving state B. If you set a time longer than "the combined time of the special fluctuation time and confirmation time of the 600th special symbol" as the specific surplus period, the low probability time saving state A due to the jackpot D can be changed to the low probability time saving state A. The gaming state signal can be continuously output until state B, and the external equipment side can recognize the series of advantageous states as continuing in the same way as described above.

Next, FIG. 229 will be explained. In FIG. 229, the free state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af is generated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short winning symbol and transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C (t1 in FIG. 229). ) and are output when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short winning symbol and the low probability time saving state C transitions to a new low probability time saving state C (t2 in FIG. 229). t1 and t2 in FIG. 229 both correspond to the case of trigger (c) described above, and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the advantageous state start signal when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C, and displays "1" on the display of the number of special prizes. When the low-probability time-saving state C changes to a new low-probability time-saving state C, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes in response to the output of the advantageous state start signal.

Further, the fluctuation reset signal 2 outputted from the external output terminal 558ah is generated when the special symbol stops displaying as an instantaneous short winning symbol and transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C (t1 in Fig. 229). , when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and the low probability time saving state C changes to a new low probability time saving state C (t2 in FIG. 229), respectively. t1 and t2 in FIG. 229 both correspond to the case of trigger (c) described above, and the variable reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0 upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2 when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C. , the current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be reported to outsiders such as players from an external information device. Also, when transitioning from a low probability time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C, the display of the number of fluctuations is reset to 0 in response to the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2, and the external information device Current information about the pachinko machine 1 can be reported to the outside. Note that FIG. 229 does not show the above-mentioned trigger (b) for transitioning to the low probability time saving state B based on the count value of the relief number counter, so the fluctuation reset signal 1 is not output from the external output terminal 558ag. do not have.

In addition, the game status signal output from the external output terminal 558ai is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short winning symbol and transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)). , and when the special symbol stops displaying as an instantaneous short hit symbol and transitions from low probability time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)) is set as the trigger for output, respectively. , in FIG. 229, the output starts when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C, but when the subsequent transition from the low probability time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C, the new output starts. I try not to start it. Specifically, regarding "N fluctuation" in "Special symbol fluctuation/stop" in Figure 229, it targets those related to fluctuation display in low probability time saving state C (special symbol lottery result is immediate short hit). , which represents a time when control is performed to shift to a new low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state C. Regarding such a gaming state signal in FIG. 229, when the trigger (c) arrives as described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the gaming state signal is output, and outputs the gaming state signal. If not, it starts outputting a new gaming status signal, and if it is outputting a gaming status signal, it is controlled to continue outputting the gaming status signal without stopping. In this way, by continuously outputting the gaming state signal from the low probability time saving state C to the new low probability time saving state C without stopping the output of the gaming state signal midway, a series of advantageous states can be achieved as described above. continues to be recognized by external devices.

In addition, regarding the "N fluctuation" in "Fluctuation/Stop of special symbols" in Figure 229, when the target is a fluctuation display in a low probability time saving state C (the special symbol lottery result is an immediate short hit). In this case, the output starts when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C in the preceding trigger (c), but the output is started from the low probability time saving state C to the new low probability time saving state in the subsequent trigger (c). When transitioning to state C, new output is not started. In other words, as shown at t3 in FIG. 229, the output stop timing of the gaming state signal is the elapsed fixed time (for example, 0.128 seconds) after the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C, as described above. This is set at a later predetermined timing (timing when a specific surplus period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed after the fixed time elapses), and even after the end of the low probability time saving state C, the output of the gaming state signal may be slightly It is set to continue. Therefore, even if the instantaneous short hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C and the transition to the low probability time saving state C is made, the low probability time saving state C may be reached within the specific surplus period. Once state C is started, the output of the game state signal will be processed in the same manner as when the control is made to newly transition to low probability time saving state C in the middle of low probability time saving state C. , a slight error is regarded as a continuation of a series of advantageous conditions and can be recognized by the external device.

Although illustrations in FIGS. 228 and 229 are omitted, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output when a "specific error state" occurs. The related controls are controlled in a unique manner. This point will be explained below.

The "specific error state" in this embodiment is a state in which a specific abnormality has occurred that triggers the output of a security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to the external device. Here, the trigger for outputting the security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to the external device is, for example, a magnetic abnormality related to a magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to a vibration sensor, or a normal electric motor when a game ball wins a normal electric accessory. Anomalous winnings of accessories, abnormal winnings in the big winning opening when there is a prize in the big winning opening during normal times, safe switch abnormalities related to the safe switch, abnormalities in passing through the variable probability area when the game ball passes through the variable variable area during normal times, when RAM is cleared , a designated symbol route abnormality, a RAM error, etc. are determined, and the state in which these determinations are made is defined as a "state in which a specific abnormality has occurred." In this "state in which a specific abnormality has occurred," it is highly likely that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or that an illegal game is being played, and there is a possibility that the game is not progressing normally. It is important to communicate this situation to external devices through security signals. However, if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to the external device for some reason, there is a possibility that information cannot be transmitted to the external device through the security signal. Regarding this point, in this embodiment, if a specific abnormality occurs in a state where all the outputs of the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped, or when the advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signal If a specific abnormality occurs while either signal 1 or 2 is being output, the situation will be different from when the game is progressing normally (when no specific error condition has occurred). In addition to the security signal, the external device is also notified that the game is not proceeding normally.

First, a case will be described in which a specific abnormality occurs in a state where all outputs of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped. In this embodiment, all outputs of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped until the above-mentioned triggers (b) and (c) occur in the low probability non-time saving state. If a specific abnormality occurs in this state, a security signal will be output from the external output terminal 558ak to the external device, but in addition, the above-mentioned trigger ( b) Even if (c) occurs, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are all controlled so as not to be outputted and to maintain the stopped state.

In other words, under normal conditions, when triggers (b) and (c) occur, the output of the gaming state signal is started, and the advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output. Under conditions where a specific abnormality occurs, even if triggers (b) and (c) occur, only the output of the gaming state signal will start, but the advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 will not be output. The output is limited so that, from the external equipment side, a unique input situation occurs in which the advantageous state start signal and the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are not input, but only the gaming state signal is input. As mentioned above, if the external output terminal 558ak is connected to an external device, a specific abnormality can be detected on the external device side through the security signal, but if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to the external device, the abnormality can be detected by the external device. For example, since the security signal is not input to the external device, the external device cannot detect it. Regarding this, in this embodiment, under a situation where a specific abnormality occurs, when triggers (b) and (c) occur in a low probability non-time saving state, a unique input situation that would not occur under normal conditions (a situation in which the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not input, and only the gaming state signal is input), and this unique input situation may occur, and if the security signal is sent to the external device. Even if no input is made, it is possible for the external device to detect that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or that an illegal game has been played.

Next, a case will be described in which a specific abnormality occurs in a state where either the advantageous state start signal or the fluctuation reset signal 1 or 2 is output. In this embodiment, when the triggers (b) and (c) described above occur during normal operation, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output for a predetermined output period, respectively, and the output is stopped after the output period has elapsed. It is something that will be done. However, if a specific abnormality occurs during the output period of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, in this embodiment, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal are Although the output of both the reset signals 1 and 2 should be stopped, the output of both the advantageous state start signal and the variable reset signals 1 and 2 is continued even after the respective output periods have elapsed, and they are It is controlled to maintain the output state.

In other words, under normal conditions, when triggers (b) and (c) occur, the advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output for a predetermined output period; If a specific abnormality occurs within the period, both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 do not stop outputting indefinitely even after each output period has elapsed, and the trigger ( A unique input situation is created in which input continues even beyond the maximum value of the jackpot period, which is the output period of a). As mentioned above, if the external output terminal 558ak is connected to an external device, a specific abnormality can be detected by the external device through the security signal, but if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to the external device, the security signal will be detected. The signal is not input to the external device and cannot be detected by the external device. Regarding this, in this embodiment, if a specific abnormality occurs while the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are being output, a unique input situation (advantageous state A situation in which the input period of the start signal and variable reset signals 1 and 2 continues beyond the maximum value of the jackpot period, which is the output period of trigger (a), occurs, and due to this unique input situation, the security Even if a signal is not input to the external device, the external device can sense that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or that an illegal game has been played.

In this embodiment, each of the above-mentioned unique input situations is canceled by resolving a specific abnormality, but if the condition for resolving the specific abnormality is to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 again, the power may be turned off again. It is preferable that the unique input situation continues until input.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a unique input situation is generated using both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, which are output at the same time during normal operation. Even if only one of the reset signals 1 and 2 is used, it is possible to generate a situation equivalent to the unique input situation described above. However, by generating a unique input situation using both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, in the unlikely event that one of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is input to the external device. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not playing properly, the input from the other device allows the external device to detect that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or that an illegal game has been played, and the information can be transmitted to the external device. At this time, the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the "specific error state" includes all specific abnormalities that trigger the output of the security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to the external device. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to target some specific abnormalities that trigger the output of the security signal. In this case, in order to detect that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or that an illegal game is being played, a specific abnormality may be selected from among the abnormalities that trigger the output of a security signal. The game machine designer should be able to set the corresponding conditions, or the hall should be able to arbitrarily set the conditions that should correspond to a specific abnormality among the abnormalities that trigger the output of a security signal. can be exemplified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the low probability time saving state B transitions to the low probability time saving state C and the low probability time saving state is continued, and when the low probability time saving state C transitions from the low probability time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. Although a detailed description has been given of the case where the low probability time saving state A is continued after the transition is made, the present invention is not limited thereto. The same applies even if the low-probability time-saving state is continued after transitioning to time-saving states B and C, or when the low-probability time-saving state C is transitioned to low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state is continued. , an advantageous state start signal, variable reset signals 1 and 2, and a gaming state signal. Among these, the gaming state signal starts being output at the earliest opportunity such as the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then continues to be output until the timing to stop the output comes. As a result, the external device can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in an advantageous state for the player, and for example, the notification from the external information device is never stopped and the The installed external information device can continuously notify the outside of the player etc. that the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player, so that the player does not misunderstand the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. can be suppressed.

Note that the external terminal board 558 of this embodiment is provided with ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, but the external terminal board 558 is provided with a variable reset signal At least one external output terminal may be further provided. This external output terminal ax may be arranged on the game board 5, for example, and more specifically, it may be arranged on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5. Therefore, when adding the external output terminal ax, by providing the game board 5 (main control board 1310) according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 as to whether the external output terminal ax is necessary or not, the external terminal board 558 and the main body The external output terminal ax can be added without replacing the frame 4, the cost for adding the external output terminal ax can be suppressed, and design changes can be facilitated.

Further, among the ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, all or at least the external output terminal 558af, external output terminal 558ag, external output terminal 558ah, and external output terminal 558ai used for a unique gaming machine like this embodiment. A part of it may be arranged, for example, on the game board 5, and more specifically, it may be arranged on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5. The external output terminal 558af, external output terminal 558ag, external output terminal 558ah, and external output terminal 558ai used in such a unique gaming machine are for each gaming board 5 (main control board 1310) according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. By making changes to the external output terminals, external output terminals can be added as needed without replacing the external terminal board 558 and, by extension, the main body frame 4, thereby facilitating design changes.

Also, if you win an immediate short hit that triggers the start of low probability time saving state C with the special symbol fluctuation display that triggers the start of low probability time saving state B, that is, the 600th fluctuating display of the special symbol in the low probability state, , an external signal corresponding to the low probability time saving state B (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 1) and an external signal corresponding to the low probability time saving state C (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 2). ), only one signal is output without outputting both signals. Specifically, when an immediate short hit is won with a special symbol fluctuation display that triggers the start of low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state C is prioritized over low probability time saving state B. outputs an external signal corresponding to the low probability time saving state C (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 2), and by displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol that triggers the start of the low probability time saving state B, you can immediately win a short hit. In this case, if the low probability time saving state B is controlled with priority over the low probability time saving state C, the external signals corresponding to the low probability time saving state B (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 1) are Output the corresponding external signal. In addition, when you win an instant short hit with the variable display of the special symbol that triggers the start of the low probability time saving state B, it is determined by the gameplay whether to prioritize the low probability time saving state B or the low probability time saving state C. It may be set as appropriate depending on the situation.

[LED light emission mode of function display unit 1400]
FIG. 230 is a front view showing the function display unit 1400. The LED light emission mode of the function display unit 1400 described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 230 and the like. As shown in FIG. 230, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol consisting of eight LEDs 1400aa to 1400ah that display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004. A display 1400a, a first special reservation number display 1400b consisting of two LEDs 1400ba and 1400bb that display the number of reservations related to acceptance of game balls B to the first starting port 2004, and a first special reservation number display 1400b for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of game balls B to the first starting port 2005. A second special symbol display 1400c consisting of eight LEDs 1400ca to 1400ch displays the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of ball B, and the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2005. A second special reserved number display 1400d consisting of two LEDs 1400da and 1400db to display, and a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs 1400ea and 1400eb to display the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the gate 2002. A normal holding display 1400f consisting of two LEDs 1400fa and 1400fb for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls B to the gate 2002. The first special symbol display 1400a, the second special symbol display 1400c, and the normal symbol display 1400e indicate that each symbol is being drawn by blinking the LEDs 1400aa to 1400ah, 1400ca to 1400ch, 1400ea, and 1400eb, for example. is displayed, and the lottery result of each symbol is displayed by the lighting and extinguishing pattern of each LED 1400aa to 1400ah, 1400ca to 1400ch, 1400ea, and 1400eb. By checking the function display unit 1400, the player can You can confirm that the lottery is in progress or check the lottery results for each symbol.

In addition, the first special reservation number display 1400b, the second special reservation number display 1400d, and the normal reservation display 1400f are, for example, the turning off, lighting, and blinking of each LED 1400ba, 1400bb, 1400da, 1400db, 1400fa, and 1400fb. Each number of reservations is displayed according to the pattern, and the player can check the number of reservations corresponding to each symbol by checking the function display unit 1400. Specifically, in the case of the first special reservation number display 1400b, when each LED 1400ba and 1400bb are off, the number of reservations is 0, and when LED 1400ba is on and LED 1400bb is off, the number of reservations is 1. When each LED 1400ba and 1400bb are lit, it indicates that the number of pending items is 2. When LED 1400ba and LED 1400bb are lit, it indicates that the number of pending items is 3. When each LED 1400ba and 1400bb is blinking, indicates that the number of reservations is 4.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1400g consisting of two LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb that display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 1, and two LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb that indicate that the pachinko machine 1 is in a right-handed playing status. When the right-handed display 1400h and the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol are "hit", etc., the number of repetitions of the opening/closing pattern of the first major prize opening 2006 and the second major prize opening 2007 ( A round indicator 1400i consisting of four LEDs 1400ia to 1400id that displays the number of rounds). The right-handed player indicator 1400h displays, for example, a right-handed player state in which a right player is required at the time of a jackpot or each short time by turning on or off the respective LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb. By checking, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is currently playing right-handed. Specifically, when each of the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb is lit, it indicates that the player is playing right-handed, and when each of the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb is turned off, it indicates that the player is not playing right-handed.

In addition, the round indicator 1400i indicates, for example, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of each grand prize opening when the lottery result of each special symbol is a "win", etc., by the lighting and extinguishing pattern of each LED 1400ia to 1400id. The player can check the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening by checking the function display unit 1400 when the lottery result of each special symbol is a "win" or the like. Specifically, when the LED 1400ia is on and each LED 1400ib to 1400id is off, it indicates that the number of repetitions (round number) is two, and when each LED 1400ia and 1400ic is on and each LED 1400ib and 1400id is off, it indicates the number of repetitions (round number). When each LED 1400ia to 1400ic is lit and LED 1400id is off, it indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 3, and when each LED 1400ia to 1400id is lit, it indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 5. Indicates that the number of rounds) is 10 times.

In addition, the status indicator 1400g indicates that the pachinko machine 1 is in the above-mentioned low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state (each low probability time saving state A, B, C), high probability time saving state, etc. The player can confirm the gaming status of the pachinko machine 1 by checking the function display unit 1400, which indicates that the pachinko machine 1 is in either a probability time saving state or a high probability non-time saving state. Specifically, when each of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb is turned off, it indicates a low probability non-time saving state, and when the LED 1400ga is turned off and the LED 1400gb is lit, it is a low probability time saving state (low probability time saving states A, B, and C). When the LED 1400ga is on and the LED 1400gb is off, it indicates a high probability non-time saving state, and when each of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb is on, it indicates a high probability time saving state.

[LED light emission mode of function display unit 1400 when time saving state continues]
Next, the light emission mode of the status indicator 1400g when the time saving status continues will be explained in detail. In the conventional pachinko machine, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be lit every time a time saving state occurs. In other words, if you win a jackpot during the time-saving state and control the time-saving state again after playing a jackpot game (when the time-saving state occurs continuously), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is temporarily turned off. After the control is completed, the light is turned on again. However, unlike the conventional control through jackpots, this embodiment has a unique control that directly continues the time-saving state, and in a gaming machine having such a gameplay, it is possible to If the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to turn off/on every time a time saving state occurs, the following problems may occur. That is, even though the time-saving state occurs directly and continuously without a jackpot, by controlling the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 to be turned off, the player is informed that the time-saving state ends. This may give a misunderstanding and reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when time-saving states occur directly and consecutively without a jackpot, the light emitting state of the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 does not mislead the player. This will be explained in detail below. FIG. 231 shows the situation when the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state A via a jackpot, and further transitions to the low probability time saving state C during the low probability time saving state A. It is something.

As shown in FIG. 231, when controlling to the low probability time saving state B, a gaming state signal is sent to the external device from the external output terminal 558af, and each time the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (the fixed time of the special symbol A symbol confirmation signal is output every time the symbol is started. Furthermore, since the low probability time saving state B is a time saving state, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be in a lighting state. In addition, in FIG. 231, the LED 1400ga of the status indicator 1400g remains in the off state because the pachinko machine 1 has not transitioned to the high probability state.

As mentioned above, the game state signal is output when the game is controlled to be one of the time-saving state, high-probability state, and jackpot game. While the game is being controlled, the output continues. In other words, in FIG. 231, although the output of the game state signal is started when controlled to the low probability time saving state B which is the preceding trigger, the output of the game state signal is controlled to the jackpot game based on the stopping result of the special symbol which is the subsequent trigger. (t1 in FIG. 231) or when transitioning from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231), new output is not started. That is, when each opportunity to output a gaming status signal arrives, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the gaming status signal is output, and if the gaming status signal is not output, a new gaming status is set. When the output of the signal is started and the gaming state signal is being output, the gaming state signal is controlled to be continuously outputted without being stopped. This allows the external equipment (particularly the hall computer) to recognize that a series of advantageous conditions are continuing.

In addition, the symbol confirmation signal is transmitted every time the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, regardless of the gaming state of low probability non-time saving state, each low probability time saving state A, B, C, high probability time saving state, and high probability non time saving state. A symbol confirmation signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to an external device (every time the special symbol confirmation time starts), and the external device (especially the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1) In this case, when the symbol confirmation signal outputted from the external output terminal 558ad is input, the display of the number of fluctuations is incremented by one.

In addition, when the jackpot game is controlled based on the stop result of the special symbol (t1 in Fig. 231), or when the special symbol is immediately stopped and displayed as a short-hit symbol, the low-probability time-saving state A changes to the low-probability time-saving state C. At that time (t3 in FIG. 231), an advantageous state start signal is output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device. t1 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of trigger (a) described above, and is controlled by the jackpot game (until all openings of the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 are completed). The advantageous state start signal is continuously output during the jackpot period (e.g., during the jackpot game), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped when the jackpot game ends. Further, t3 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of trigger (c) described above, and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. Even if it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C after that, it will not be output. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when an advantageous state start signal is input based on the control from the low probability time saving state B to a jackpot game, in other words, the advantageous state start signal is input during the jackpot period. If the number of special prizes has been input, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes, and if an advantageous state start signal is input based on the transition from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C, In other words, when the advantageous state start signal is input for only 0.256 seconds, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes. On the other hand, in the hall computer, when the advantageous state start signal is input based on the control from the low probability time saving state B to the jackpot game, in other words, the advantageous state start signal is input for more than 0.256 seconds. In this case, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes, but if an advantageous state start signal is input based on the transition from low probability time saving state A to low probability time saving state C, in other words, advantageous state start If the signal is input over the jackpot period, "1" is not added to the display of the number of special prizes, and the number of special prizes is maintained. In this way, the hall computer accurately displays the number of jackpot games controlled, whereas the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 displays not only the number of jackpot games controlled, but also the number of jackpot games controlled with low probability. The total number of times the time saving state B has been controlled is displayed. Therefore, for the players, the number of jackpot games controlled is displayed to be higher than the actual number, which can stimulate the player's desire to play, and for the hall manager, the jackpot games are controlled by the display on the hall computer. It will be possible to accurately determine the number of times the

Also, when the jackpot game is controlled based on the stop result of the special symbol (t1 in FIG. 231), in addition to the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal and game state signal, a variable reset signal 1 and a variable reset signal 2 are sent. and are output to the external device from the external output terminal 558ah. t1 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of trigger (a) described above, and the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are continuously outputted over the jackpot period, and upon the end of the jackpot game, the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are output. 2 output is stopped. In addition, in the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are input over the jackpot period based on the control from the low probability time saving state B to the jackpot game. , the display of the number of changes is reset to 0.

Further, in this example, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be off during the jackpot period so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player. In other words, the jackpot game involves controlling the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2007 multiple times, and a large amount of game balls (prize balls) are won by entering the game balls into the second big winning opening 2007. This has a great impact on the profits of the players, so if the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is lit, it is possible to misunderstand that a time-saving state has occurred, and the game ball may be There is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on the jackpot game, including the firing mode. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be turned off while the jackpot game is being controlled, regardless of whether or not the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, while controlling the jackpot game (jackpot period), attention is suppressed from being directed to the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400, so that the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. This makes it possible to avoid putting players at a disadvantage.

Further, when transitioning to the low probability time saving state A after the end of the jackpot game, the output of the advantageous state start signal, the fluctuation reset signal 1, and the fluctuation reset signal 2 is stopped (t2 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, even when the game state signal transitions to the low probability time saving state A, the output is not stopped and continues to be output. In addition, when transitioning to the low probability time saving state A, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400, which was controlled to be turned off when the jackpot game was started, is controlled to be turned on again to control the time saving state. It is designed to notify you of what is happening.

Further, t3 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of trigger (c) described above, and the variable reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. . In addition, in this example, when the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 transits from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C, it receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2 and displays the number of fluctuations. is reset to 0.

In addition, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be lit when the jackpot game transitions to the low probability time saving state A (t2 in Fig. 231), but during the low probability time saving state A, the special symbol is immediately shortened. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed and the low probability time saving state A changes to the low probability time saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231), the lighted state is maintained without being changed to the off state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when transitioning to the low probability time saving state C without executing a jackpot game, if the time saving state control is already being executed, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned off. The lighting state is maintained without changing. As mentioned above, when being controlled by a jackpot game, there is a risk of putting the player at a disadvantage, so even if the control is set to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the status is displayed while being controlled by a jackpot game. The LED 1400gb of the device 1400g is controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, when the special symbol immediately stops displaying as a short winning symbol and transitions to the low probability time saving state C, the jackpot game is not executed, so there is no risk of putting the player at a disadvantage, and the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g Once the light is turned off, it may confuse players, or cause players to feel uneasy or distrustful, as they are aware that the instantaneous short winning symbol is stopped and displayed, leading to a transition to low probability time saving state C. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, when transitioning to the low probability time saving state C without executing a jackpot game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is kept lit without being turned off, so as not to confuse the player. At the same time, we try to avoid causing anxiety or distrust.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 231, a mode was explained in which the lighting and extinguishing states of the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g transition from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state A through the jackpot game. The same applies even if it is a mode of transitioning from a low probability time saving state A to a new low probability time saving state A via a jackpot game, or a mode of transitioning from a low probability time saving state C to a low probability time saving state A via a jackpot game. During the jackpot game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be turned off contrary to the game status signal output from the external output terminal 558ai. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game without drawing attention to the light emission of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb of the status display 1400g, thereby avoiding any disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, in the mode of transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state A via the jackpot game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is output from the external output terminal 558ai between the low probability non time saving state and the jackpot game. Since the light is turned off contrary to the game status signal, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game without drawing attention to the light emission of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb of the status display 1400g.

Furthermore, in the mode of transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C via the low probability time saving state B shown in FIG. The LED 1400gb of is controlled to be off, and each time the special symbol fluctuation stops (every time the special symbol confirmation time starts), a symbol confirmation signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device, and the external device (especially In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the symbol confirmation signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is input, the display of the number of fluctuations is incremented by 1. Note that in FIG. 228, the LED 1400ga of the status indicator 1400g is maintained in the off state because the pachinko machine 1 has not transitioned to the high probability state.

In addition, when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B based on the count value of the above-mentioned relief number counter (t1 in FIG. 228), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be in a lighting state, An advantageous state start signal and a variable reset signal 1 are outputted to the external device from the external output terminal 558af for 0.128 seconds, and a gaming state signal is further outputted from the external output terminal 558af to the external device. The lighting state of the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained at least during the low probability time saving state B (t1 to t2 in FIG. 228), and the gaming state signal is maintained at least during the low probability time saving state B (t1 to t2 in FIG. 228). is maintained. When the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, it receives the output of the advantageous state start signal and displays "1" on the display of the number of special prizes. The display of the number of fluctuations is reset to zero upon receiving the output of fluctuation reset signal 1.

As described above, the display of the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 is also reset when the jackpot game is ended or when the immediate short winning symbols are stopped and displayed. In other words, in this example, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after the immediate short winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the count value of the relief counter. The number of variable displays of special symbols executed after the number reaches "600" is notified. In addition, the display of the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device only when a jackpot game is played is reset, and when a jackpot game is not played (when an immediate short hit occurs or the count value of the relief counter is "600") ), the display of the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device may not be reset. In addition, the rescue number counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state and does not count the number of variations of the special symbol in the high probability state, but the number of variations displayed on the external information device is displayed in the low probability state. Not only the number of times the special symbol changes, but also the number of times the special symbol changes in a high probability state is displayed.

Also, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from low probability time saving state B to low probability time saving state C (t2 in Fig. 228), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is not changed to the off state. It maintains the lighting state, outputs an advantageous state start signal and a fluctuation reset signal 2 to the external device from the external output terminal 558af for 0.256 seconds, and further continues to send the gaming state signal to the external device from the external output terminal 558af. and output it.

When controlling to a low probability time saving state B, an immediate short winning symbol is stopped and displayed and when transitioning to a low probability time saving state C, a jackpot game is not executed and the game state does not change from the low probability time saving state. Therefore, when transitioning from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C, there is no risk of putting the player at a disadvantage even if the player is not notified, and when ending low-probability time-saving state B, the state indicator When the LED 1400gb of the 1400g was once turned off and the low probability time saving state C was started, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g was turned on again, which caused confusion for the player, and the immediate short winning symbol was stopped and displayed. This may make players who are aware of the transition to the low probability time saving state C feel anxious or distrustful. Therefore, when controlling to the low probability time saving state B, the immediate short winning symbol is stopped and displayed and transitioning to the low probability time saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned on without changing to the off state. By maintaining this, players are not confused, and they are not made to feel anxious or distrustful.

Furthermore, when the low probability time saving state C ends and the transition is made from the low probability time saving state C to the low probability non time saving state (t3 in FIG. 228), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled from the on state to the off state. , the output of the gaming state signal is stopped when the specified surplus engine has elapsed. In this way, in this example, when controlling the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g from the off state to the on state, the output of the gaming state signal also starts at the same time, but when controlling the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g from the on state to the off state, The timing at which the output of the gaming state signal is stopped is delayed. As a result, even if the instantaneous short winning symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in low probability time saving states A, B, and C and the transition to low probability time saving state C is made, even if the special symbol in low probability time saving state A, B, and C moves to low probability time saving state C, within the specific surplus period. If the low probability time saving state C is started, the output of the gaming state signal will be handled in the same way as when it is controlled to shift to the low probability time saving state C in the middle of the low probability time saving states A, B, and C. Processing is performed, and a slight error is regarded as a continuation of a series of advantageous states, so that it can be recognized on the external device side in the same way as during the low probability time saving states C to C. This makes it possible to make the duration of the advantageous state appear longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when the final variation of the special symbol in low probability time saving states A, B, and C stops and the immediate short winning symbol is stopped and displayed and the state shifts to low probability time saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned off. It is controlled to maintain the lighting state without changing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, and it is also possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious or distrustful as to whether or not the player will be transitioned to the low probability time saving state C.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 229 described above, when transitioning from the low probability time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained in the lit state without being changed to the off state, The advantageous state start signal and the variable reset signal 2 are outputted to the external device from the external output terminal 558af for 0.256 seconds, and the gaming state signal is continuously outputted from the external output terminal 558af to the external device.

When controlling to the low probability time saving state C, the immediate short winning symbol stops displaying and transitioning to a new low probability time saving state C, and when controlling to the above low probability time saving state B, the instant short winning symbol stops displaying. Similarly to when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed and the state changes to the low probability time saving state C, the jackpot game is not executed and the gaming state does not change from the low probability time saving state. Therefore, when transitioning from low-probability time-saving state C to low-probability time-saving state C, that is, when controlling continuously to low-probability time-saving state C, there is no risk of putting the player at a disadvantage even if the notification is not made. , When ending the low probability time saving state C under control, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned off, and when starting a new low probability time saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned on again. This may confuse the player, or cause the player, who is aware that the low probability time saving state C will continue due to the stop display of the immediate short winning symbol, to feel anxious or distrustful. Therefore, when controlling to the low-probability time-saving state C, the immediate short winning symbol stops displaying and transitioning to a new low-probability time-saving state C, without changing the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g to the off state. By maintaining the lighting state, the player is not confused, and the player is not made to feel anxious or distrustful.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231 described above, during the jackpot game (t1 to t2 in FIG. 231), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be turned off. When controlling the small winning game during the small winning game, by keeping the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g lit during the small winning game, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g will turn off due to a small winning game that rarely occurs. It may also be possible to prevent the players from becoming anxious or distrustful. Specifically, during the above-mentioned low probability non-time saving state (LED 1400gb turned off), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained in the turned off state while a small hit is made and a small winning game is played. The LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to remain lit during the low probability time saving states A to C (the LED 1400gb is lit) while the small winning game is played. Ru. As a result, even if a small winning game, which has a lower profit level than a jackpot game and ends in a shorter period of time, occurs during the game progress in the time saving state, the player will not be misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-time saving state. It is possible to continuously notify that the game is in a time saving state, and it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, although the above example shows that the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g remains lit even during the small winning game, as another example, it is possible to maintain the lighting state of the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g during the small winning game, but as another example, it is possible to A jackpot may occur during a jackpot game that ends in a short period of time, or if a predetermined condition is met during a jackpot game (for example, if the jackpot ends early without a game ball entering the so-called V winning hole). If a specific light emitting condition is met during a game, it is assumed that the problem of the player misperceiving the game status of the pachinko machine 1 does not have a large effect, and the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned on during the jackpot game. The state may be maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state occurs directly and consecutively without going through a jackpot, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is kept in the emitting state, thereby misleading the player. However, in addition to this, the lighting/extinguishing state of the right-handed indicator 1400h, which is composed of two LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb, which indicates that the pachinko machine 1 is in the right-handed mode, should also be determined through the jackpot. It may be maintained when the time-saving state occurs directly and continuously. Specifically, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, it is recommended to hit the right hand with the aim of winning the second jackpot 2007, so the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled to be lit. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable winning hole 2003 that opens and closes in the time saving state is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and when aiming to win the variable winning hole 2003, left-handed hitting is recommended, so in the time saving state , LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled to be turned off. For this reason, for example, when controlling to the low probability time saving state B and transitioning to the low probability time saving state A via a jackpot game, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb, which are in the off state, are turned on based on the start of the jackpot game. After that, the light is turned off based on the time saving state. On the other hand, when controlling to the low probability time saving state B, when the immediate short winning symbol stops displaying and transitioning to the low probability time saving state C, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb, which are in the off state, display the immediate short winning symbol immediately. Control is performed to maintain the light off state both before and after the stop display is displayed. In this way, when the immediate short winning symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to a new low probability time saving state, by maintaining the light emitting/lighting out state of the right hit indicator 1400h without changing, It is possible to continuously notify the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state without making the player misunderstand that the pachinko machine 1 is in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to suppress the player from misrecognizing the game state of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the right-handed player indicator 1400h is not limited to the same configuration as this embodiment; for example, in a state where right-handed player is recommended, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled to be lit in red, and left-handed player is recommended. In the state, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled in a blue lighting state, and a control similar to the above (when the immediate short winning symbol stops displaying and transitions to a new low probability time saving state, the blue lighting state is controlled) (maintaining). Alternatively, in a state in which right-handed hitting is recommended, only LED 1400ha is controlled in a lit state, and in a state in which left-handed hitting is recommended, only LED 1400hb is controlled in a lit state, and similar control to the above (immediate short winning symbol When changing to a new low-probability time-saving state with a stop display, only the LED 1400hb may be kept lit.

[Help mode L entry number notification effect]
Next, a modification that partially differs from the above-mentioned help mode L performance will be described below. In the modified example of help mode L production, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of changes other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) It is the same in that it is controlled to low probability time saving state B when the variable display of the special symbol stops, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is set to a predetermined specific number of notifications (low probability time saving state B). The number of changes in the special symbol that is scheduled to be controlled to transition from a low probability non-time saving state to a low probability time saving state B (execution of "Help mode L") when reaching the number of times (less than 600 times which is the start trigger) The difference is that the peripheral control board 1510 executes the "help mode L entry number notification effect" that notifies the remaining number of fluctuations up to 600 times. Note that both of the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor performance" and the "Help mode L entry number notification performance" described below may be executed, or only one of them may be executed. .

In this example, the "Help mode L entry number notification effect" is used when the power is turned on, regardless of the value (count value) stored (maintained) in the rescue number counter when the power is turned on. This is a performance that is performed when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a low probability state without any jackpot games occurring reaches a predetermined specific number of notifications (200 times in this example). . The specific number of notifications for which the “help mode L entry number notification performance” is performed is determined using a notification-dedicated counter provided on the peripheral control board 1510, not the rescue number counter provided on the main control board 1310. The peripheral control board 1510 counts based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 every time the special symbol is displayed in a low probability state after the power is turned on. This suppresses the burden placed on the substrate 1310 side. The value of the notification-only counter is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off or turned on, and the value is not stored (maintained) like the rescue counter. Hereinafter, the presentation progress of the "help mode L entry number notification presentation" will be explained using a time chart.

FIG. 232(a) is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when 350 is set (maintained) in the relief counter at power-on (that is, when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 350). It is. As shown in FIG. 232(a), in the low probability state after the power is turned on, if the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 200 times after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring (relief number counter = 550, notification Dedicated number of times counter = 200), at the 200th special symbol fluctuation display (Z fluctuation), transition control from low probability non-time saving state to low probability time saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is scheduled. A ``help mode L entry number notification effect'' is executed to notify the remaining number of changes ("50 times" in this example) up to 600 times of the special symbol being changed. In the "Number of entering help mode L performance", for example, a display such as "50 times remaining until help mode L" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the player is informed of the remaining fluctuations until help mode L starts. It is designed to notify that the number of times is 50. Note that the counting (updating) of the notification-only counter is stopped with the execution of the "help mode L entry number notification effect", and from then on, it is not counted even if the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, an external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall and displaying the game history can display information about the number of changes in special symbols, and specifically, the number of changes in special symbols executed during the day. Information, in other words, information about the number of changes in special symbols executed during a business day from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the start of business at the game hall until the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business ends is displayed. It is customary for players to understand and confirm the current gaming situation by referring to the change frequency information on an external information device. Furthermore, when a new business day arrives, the change frequency information displayed on the external information device is generally reset to "0".

In other words, if the gaming state after the power is turned on is a low probability state, and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed for the 200th time without hitting the jackpot after the power is turned on, the value of the relief counter will be maintained when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether it has been executed or not, "200 times" will be displayed on the external information device as information on the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the day (there may be slight differences depending on the settings of the external information device). Here, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the value of the rescue counter has been maintained when the power is turned on, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the actual timing of transition to the low probability time saving state B. be. However, the execution timing of the "help mode L entry number notification effect" is when the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the 200th time without hitting the jackpot after the power is turned on, so it is necessary to visually check the external information device. If so, the player can easily understand it. As a result, even for players who are worried because they do not know the actual timing of transition to low-probability time-saving state B, the number of changes of special symbols scheduled to be changed to low-probability time-saving state B will be up to 600 times. It is possible to guide the player to continue playing the game until the timing for notifying the remaining number of fluctuations (execution timing of ``help mode L entry number notification performance''), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate. In addition, the "help mode L entry number notification effect" will be executed to inform the player that there are only a few variations left until the number of variations of the special symbol 600, which is scheduled to be controlled to transition to low probability time saving state B. If the player is made aware of this, the player's desire to continue playing the game can be increased. Note that the contents of the game history displayed on the external information device can be changed by the player's operation on the external information device (for example, from displaying the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the day as information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol, to It is also possible to switch to a state that displays the last number of fluctuations from the previous day, etc.), and if you take these game history into account, you can switch to the low probability time saving state B with the expectation that the value of the rescue number counter will be maintained when the power is turned on. In addition to the player's desire to play the game, ``aiming to transition to ``, it is possible to give the player a new desire to play the game, ``aiming to execute the presentation indicating the number of times the player enters the help mode L''.

In addition, as another aspect, for example, the rescue number counter when the power is turned on is "0" (the rescue number counter has been initialized), and a jackpot game does not occur in a low probability state after the power is turned on. If the special symbol is displayed 200 times after the power is turned on (relief counter = 200, notification-only counter = 200), a low-probability time saving is performed by executing the "help mode L entry number notification effect". The player will be able to understand that the number of variations remaining until the number of variations of the special symbol scheduled to be changed to state B is 600 is large. Even in such a case, in this example, the execution timing of the "Number of Entering Help Mode L Notification Production" is set to the variable display of the special symbol "200 times", and the "Number of Entering Help Mode L The transition timing from the execution timing of "notification performance" to the low probability time saving state B is set to 1/3 of the 600 times of special symbol fluctuations for which the transition control to the low probability time saving state B is scheduled. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game by giving the player the right to choose whether to end or continue playing the game without losing the player's desire to continue the game due to the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. In addition, it is desirable to set the execution timing of the "Number of Entering Help Mode L Notification Effects" to a value that maintains the desire to continue playing. It is preferable that the number of fluctuations be within 1/2 to 1/3 of 600 fluctuations.

Furthermore, in the above description, as an example of the "notification production of the number of times entering help mode L", a mode is exemplified in which the start time of the low probability time saving state B is clearly indicated, such as displaying "XX times remaining until help mode L". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the low probability time saving state B may be notified in an abstract manner. For example, a mode according to the remaining number of variations up to 600 variations of a special symbol scheduled to be controlled to transition from a low probability non-time saving state to a low probability time saving state B (for example, if the remaining number of variations is 1 to 100 ☆ is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if the remaining number of variations is 101 to 200, ◎ is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and if the remaining number of variations is 201 to 300, 〇 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, If the remaining number of fluctuations is 301 to 599, a △ may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate a state in which it is difficult to determine the accurate remaining number of fluctuations. Even after the "help mode L entry number notification performance" is executed, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension regarding the start timing of the low probability time saving state B, and to proceed with the game. In addition, in this case, the remaining number of changes up to 600 times of the special symbol for which transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B is scheduled is notified with a predetermined range. Since it is difficult to accurately determine the number of remaining fluctuations, it is now possible to continue playing not only when the number of remaining fluctuations is small, but also when the number of remaining fluctuations is large, preventing a decline in the operating rate. be able to.

In addition, in the above description, the display on the effect display device 1600 is used as an example of the execution mode of the "help mode L entry number notification effect", but the display is not limited to this. The "notification effect" may be performed by a light emission effect using LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, or a sound effect using sound output from a speaker. In addition, when attempting to execute the "help mode L entry notification effect" using a light emission effect or sound effect, the LED light emission or sound output may be activated depending on other effects or game conditions (such as some kind of error). may be used for another purpose (the timing of use of LED lighting and sound output may overlap), but even in such cases, it is possible to enter "Help Mode L" by lighting effects and sound effects. The priority of "number of times notification performance" may be set lower than other uses. In this way, even if the execution time for the "Help mode L entry number notification performance" arrives, the "Help mode L entry number notification performance" will be executed depending on other effects or game conditions (such as some kind of error). This will not be executed, and players who are looking forward to the ``Help mode L entry notification display'' will be able to proceed with the game by giving them a sense of tension by having them pay close attention to the usage trends of LED lighting and sound output when this is executed. be able to.

In addition, before executing the "Help mode L entry number notification performance", there is a "Help mode L entry number notification precursor performance" (different from the Help mode L precursor performance), which is similar to the help mode L precursor performance described above. It may be possible in a manner that it is possible, or it may be in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the help mode L precursor performance) to indicate that the "help mode L entry number notification performance" is imminent. In this case, the number of fluctuations remaining until the help mode L entry number notification performance may be notified as a "help mode L entry number notification precursor performance", or the help mode L entry number notification performance may be used. It may be possible to make it difficult to grasp the accurate remaining number of fluctuations by displaying an aspect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (a manner in which it is difficult to determine the accurate remaining number of fluctuations). In addition, in the "Help mode L entry number notification warning sign effect", the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern for the help mode L entry number notification warning sign effect. Alternatively, BGM may be outputted from the speaker to inform the user of the number of times the help mode L has been entered. Thereby, the player can be made aware of the fact that the number-of-entering-help-mode-L entry notification precursor effect is being executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced by sound and light.

In addition, in the above example, information regarding the number of changes in special symbols is displayed on the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall, but information on the number of changes in the special symbol is displayed separately from the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall, or In addition to the external information device provided in the island equipment of the game hall, the game history including information regarding the number of changes in special symbols may be displayed on a display device provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the performance display device 1600). In this case, a separate counter is newly provided on the peripheral control board 1510 side to control the counting and display of information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol, and the count value of the relief number counter is linked when the power is cut off or turned on. What is necessary is to enable independent initialization (reset) without having to do so. As a result, the game is guided to continue until the timing to notify the remaining number of variations up to 600 variations of the special symbol scheduled to be controlled to transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate. In this case, the game history is displayed based on the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 when a specific condition such as the variable display of special symbols is not being executed. Alternatively, the game history may be displayed all the time (may be excepted in special situations such as when an abnormality occurs). In addition, the contents of the game history displayed on the display provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be switched by operating the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, information regarding the number of changes of special symbols can be changed during the day). For example, the state may be changed from a state in which the number of changes in the special symbol is displayed to a state in which the number of changes in the special symbol after the jackpot game state is displayed.

Next, a case where the transition timing to the low probability time saving state B arrives before the execution timing of the "help mode L entry number notification effect" will be described. FIG. 232(b) is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when 450 is set (maintained) in the relief counter at power-on (that is, when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 450). It is. In this example, in a low probability state after the power is turned on, if the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 150 times after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring (relief number counter = 600, notification-only number of times counter = 150) , when the 150th special symbol variable display is stopped, transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B is scheduled. In other words, if the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 150 times after the power is turned on, the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state will reach 600 times, and before the special symbol fluctuation display is executed for the 200th time after the power is turned on, the special symbol fluctuation display will reach 600 times. The transition from the probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled (execution of "help mode L"). Note that the counting (updating) of the notification-only counter is stopped with the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and after that, even if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is not counted.

As shown in FIG. 232(b), in the case where the count value of the number of changes of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state is maintained when the power is turned on, the 200th time after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring. If the transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B (execution of "Help mode L") is scheduled before executing the variable display of the special symbol, the above "Help mode ``Help Mode L'' is activated when the 600th variation display of the special symbol is scheduled to be controlled to change from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B without executing "L entry number notification production". ” will suddenly notify you that the system is about to enter.

In addition, in this example, when the power is turned on, the count value of the number of changes of special symbols in a low probability state (relief number counter) is maintained, and the special symbol changes for the 200th time after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring. If the transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B (execution of "Help mode L") is scheduled before the display is executed, the above "Help mode L precursor production", All of the "help mode L entry number notification precursor performance" and the "help mode L entry number notification performance" are not executed. In other words, the player visually checks the information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall or the display device installed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the performance display device 1600), and after turning on the power. The remaining number of variations until the 200th special symbol variation display is executed can be grasped, but before the 200th special symbol variation display after the power is turned on, the player's It is now possible to be notified that the vehicle will suddenly enter "Help Mode L" at a timing earlier than expected and without any prior warning. Therefore, the transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "Help Mode L") can be suddenly executed without going through a jackpot, giving a strong impact. In addition to giving surprise and surprise to the players who were aware that the "Mode L entry number notification effect" will be executed, the game is also controlled to shift to an advantageous state, that is, time is saved, thereby increasing the interest in the game. be able to.

Next, a case where the transition timing to the low probability time saving state C arrives before the execution timing of the "help mode L entry number notification effect" will be described. FIG. 232(c) is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when 350 is set (maintained) in the relief counter at power-on (that is, when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 350). It is. In this example, in a low probability state after the power is turned on, if the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 250 times after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring (relief number counter = 600, notification-only number of times counter = 250) When the 250th special symbol fluctuation display stopped, the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability state reached 600 times, and the transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B was planned, In the low probability state after the power was turned on, because the special symbol fluctuation display was executed 155 times after the power was turned on without any jackpot games occurring (relief number counter = 505, notification only number of times counter = 155), the 155th When you win "Immediate short hit A" in the special symbol fluctuating display and the 155th special symbol fluctuating display stops, you will be notified that you will enter "help mode S", and the low probability non-time saving state will be changed to low probability. The transition to the stochastic time saving state C is controlled. In this case, the counting (updating) of the notification-only counter will not be stopped when the transition to the low probability time saving state C occurs, and the counting will continue until the transition to the low probability time saving state B due to the variable display of the special symbol. It is designed to continue.

As mentioned above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the instant short win is determined to be "immediate short hit A", the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times. During this period, control is performed to a low probability time saving state C (“help mode S”). In other words, in Figure 232(c), when the 155th special symbol fluctuation display stops after the power is turned on, the transition to the low probability time saving state C is controlled, so when the 255th special symbol fluctuation display after the power is turned on is stopped, It is planned to end the low probability time saving state C and control the transition to a low probability non time saving state.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 250 times after the power is turned on, the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and the condition for transition to the low probability time saving state B is satisfied. That is, before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C reaches 100, in other words, before the end condition of the low probability time saving state C is satisfied, the condition for transition to the low probability time saving state B is satisfied.

In this example, if the transition condition to low probability time saving state B is satisfied before the end condition for low probability time saving state C is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol stops for the 600th time in the low probability state, The system notifies you that the system will enter "Help Mode L", ends the low probability time saving state C ("Help Mode S"), and controls the transition to the low probability time saving state B ("Help Mode L"). There is. Note that, as described above, the low probability time saving state B continues until the special symbol is displayed 700 times. On the other hand, the low probability time saving state C continues until the special symbol is displayed 20 to 100 times. In other words, in the low probability time saving state C, time saving is granted until the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed 20 to 100 times, whereas in the low probability time saver state B, the time is granted until the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed 700 times. The low-probability time-saving state B is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability time-saving state C. In this way, if the conditions for transition to the low probability time saving state B are satisfied during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the low probability time saving state B is controlled with priority, thereby providing advantageous time saving to the player. It is designed to do this.

In addition, in this example, before the 200th special symbol fluctuation display is executed after the power is turned on, the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C ("help mode S") is controlled, and the low probability time saving state C During the control, the variable display of the special symbol for which the above-mentioned "help mode L entry number notification effect" is scheduled to be executed will be reached for the 200th time. However, since the player is already in the low-probability time-saving state C, the player is not aware of the low-probability time-saving state C. (to make the player forget the existence of the low probability time saving state B). Similarly, when controlled to the low probability time saving state C, the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor effect" and "Help mode L entry number notification precursor effect" are not executed. As a result, while concentrating the player's consciousness on the low-probability time-saving state C, the player is given a surprise when the control from the low-probability time-saving state C is continuously controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B. You will be able to increase your interest.

In the above, the "help mode L entry number notification performance" is executed when the special symbol changes for the 200th time after the power is turned on. However, the "help mode L entry number notification performance" is not required and the low Since there are a certain number of players who always want to maintain a sense of anticipation and tension regarding the start timing of probability time saving state B, the number of times help mode L has been entered is displayed on the performance display device 1600 for these players. A ``Help Mode L Hidden Effect'' may be added that allows the player to arbitrarily make part or all of the effect difficult or impossible to recognize.

Specifically, when a predetermined operating means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated as the "Help mode L secret performance", the "Help mode L secret performance" is displayed. '', the upper layer of the display regarding the remaining number of fluctuations until this help mode L starts, which is displayed on the effect display device 1600, is separate from the display regarding the remaining number of fluctuations until this help mode L starts. Display a confidential image (for example, a special still image with the bulletin hidden from view by filling it with white) and cover up at least part of the display regarding the remaining number of changes until Help Mode L is started. It may be made visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not need the "help mode L entry notification effect" and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that after the concealment image is displayed on the performance display device 1600 by operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, the performance operation section of the performance operation unit 300 is further displayed. The aspect of the concealment image may be changed by operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as 301, for example, the mode of the concealment image is provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300. By operating a predetermined operation means, the secret image is displayed in the first display mode displayed across the first display area on the production display device 1600, and the production is performed again with the concealment image being displayed. By operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the performance operation section 301 of the operation unit 300, the second display mode is displayed over a second display range wider than the first display area. The confidential image may be displayed, or the confidential image may be displayed in a third display mode in which it is displayed over a third display range that is narrower than the first display area. With this configuration, the player can decide for himself/herself the range in which the display of the remaining number of fluctuations until the start of the help mode L displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden, and the player's It is possible to hide only the information that one does not want to know, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, by operating a predetermined operating means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, a concealed image can be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or a state in which the concealed image is displayed. After displaying the concealed image in the second display mode or the third display mode by operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 again, the concealment image is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). If a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 is not operated for a period of 2 seconds), When a specific operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped (it may be when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, or immediately before the variable display of the special symbol is stopped (for example, 1 The display of the concealment image on the effect display device 1600 may be ended at the end of the second period). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the result of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, as a mode to meet the needs of players who do not need the "Help mode L entry number notification effect", the following may be used instead of adding the above-mentioned "Help mode L concealment effect". . For example, by operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, while the decorative symbols (special symbols) are non-variably displayed, the "help mode L entry number notification performance" can be activated. It may be possible to select and set whether to execute or not, and in this case as well, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not need the "help mode L entry notification display", and to prevent a decline in gaming interest. can.

In addition, in the above description, a case has been described in which the control is not yet controlled to the low probability time saving state B when the special symbol fluctuation display is executed for the 200th time after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring, but in addition to that, When performing the 200th special symbol fluctuation display after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring, the low probability time saving state B has already ended and the transition to the low probability time saving state B is controlled thereafter. If there is no one, you can do as follows.

In other words, when the count value of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief frequency counter) in a low probability state is maintained when the power is turned on, the 200th special symbol fluctuation display is executed after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring. When low-probability time-saving state B has already ended (for example, the notification-only count counter = 200, but the relief count counter exceeds 600, and low-probability time-saving state B has ended and low probability (If the state has returned to the non-time saving state), do not execute all of the above "Help mode L precursor display", "Help mode L entry number notification precursor display", and "Help mode L entry number notification display" That's what I do. In other words, the player visually checks the information regarding the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall or the display device installed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the performance display device 1600), and after turning on the power. The remaining number of fluctuations until the 200th special symbol fluctuation display is executed is to be grasped, but by the time the 200th special symbol fluctuation display is executed after the power is turned on, it is already in the low probability time saving state B. has ended, the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor display", "Help mode L entry number notification warning display", and "Help mode L entry number notification display" are performed to prevent false information from being given to the player. Since this may give rise to expectations, such practices are restricted to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable due to false performances. In addition, in the above example, the counting (updating) of the notification-only counter was stopped with the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and after that, it was set not to be counted even if the special symbols were displayed in a variable manner. If the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor display", "Help mode L entry count notification preview display", and "Help mode L entry count notification display" are activated. (In order to limit the execution of `` after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is able to recognize that the 200th special symbol fluctuation display has been reached while the low probability time saving state B has already ended. Therefore, it is sufficient to count (update) the notification-only counter. In addition, instead of the notification-only counter, a separate count is provided so that the pachinko machine 1 can notify when the special symbol has been displayed for the 200th time after the power is turned on and the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended. It may be made so that it can be recognized.

In addition, in such a case, instead of executing all of the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor display", "Help mode L entry number notification precursor display", and "Help mode L entry number notification display", the power is turned on. When the 200th special symbol fluctuation display is executed later, or at a predetermined time before the 200th special symbol fluctuation display after the power is turned on (for example, the notification-only counter = 50, 100, 150) ``Help mode L completion effect'' indicating that the low probability time saving state B has already ended may be performed at multiple timings of , all periods after the notification-only counter = 150, etc.) . An example of a mode of the "Help mode L completed effect" is displaying a message such as "Help mode L has already ended" on the effect display device 1600, thereby providing assistance to the player. By notifying the player that Mode L has been completed and making the player aware of the current gaming situation, it is possible to avoid raising excessive expectations.

In addition, in the above, an example was explained in which the "help mode L entry number notification effect" is not executed, but there is also a case where the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state is maintained when the power is turned on. If the low probability time saving state B has already ended when the special symbol fluctuation display is executed for the 200th time after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring (for example, the notification-only number of times counter = 200, Even when the rescue count counter exceeds 600 times and the low probability time saving state B has ended and the state has returned to the low probability non time saving state), the "help mode L entry number notification performance" is executed. As the mode of the "Help mode L entry number notification performance", a mode corresponding to the fact that the low probability time saving state B has already ended is set, and the "Help mode L entry number notification performance" is performed. You may also do so. In this case, normally, a mode is set in which the message "○○ times remaining until help mode L" is displayed as the mode of "notifying the number of times entering help mode L" to clearly indicate the start time of low probability time saving state B. However, if low probability time saving state B has already ended, a message will be displayed saying "Help mode L has already ended" like the "Help mode L completed effect" mentioned above. Even in such a case, the player is notified that the help mode L has been completed, and the player is made aware of the current gaming situation. By doing so, you can avoid raising excessive expectations.

[Modified example of opening/closing mode of variable prize opening]
Next, a modified example of the opening/closing manner of the variable prize opening 2003 that can accept game balls according to the lottery results of the normal symbols will be described. In the above example, the same time-saving performance is set as the low-probability time-saving state C that is controlled when the instant short hit A, the instant short hit B, and the instant short hit C occur. However, the time-saving performance may be made different depending on the case where the immediate short hit is A, the instant short hit B, and the instant short hit C. In addition, the "time-saving performance" here is the performance mainly related to the frequency of winnings to the variable winning hole 2003, and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003 can be mainly exemplified. Below, the difference in time-saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning hole 2003 will be explained.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the instant short hit A occurs, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed to 100 without controlling to the jackpot game or small win game. If the jackpot is not hit before the game is executed, the time saving state is terminated with a low probability time saving state C1, and when the instant short winning B occurs, the special symbol is not controlled to the jackpot game or the small winning game. If the fluctuating display of (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed 40 times, the time-saving state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C2 in which the time-saving state ends, and becomes an immediate short-hit C. In this case, if the jackpot game or small win game is not controlled and the jackpot does not occur before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 20 times, the time saving state will end. control to a low probability time saving state C3.

Also, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port from the input information read from the input information storage area in the normal winning opening winning process, that is, when the game ball passes through the gate 2002 , Extract the value of the counter that updates the normal symbol random number used to determine the winning normal symbol (lighting mode of the two LEDs) to be derived and displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and enter the above-mentioned normal winning opening. The information is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal win", one of the normal winning symbol A, the normal winning symbol B, and the normal winning symbol C is determined based on the normal symbol random number. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of a normal symbol is "normal win", the type of normal win (type of normal win symbol) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal win" and the gaming state is the low probability non-time saving state or the high probability non-time saving state, In other words, when the time saving state control is not executed, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening/closing pattern 1 (opening/closing P1) regardless of the type of normal winning (type of normal winning symbol). , When the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit", if the gaming state is one of the high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, and low probability time saving state B, in other words, the time saving state is triggered by a jackpot. (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A), and when executing time-saving state control triggered by the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaching 600 times. In (low probability time saving state B), the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening/closing pattern 2 (opening/closing P2) regardless of the type of normal winning (type of normal winning symbol).

In addition, if the gaming state is low probability time saving state C1 when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal win", that is, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short win" and the type of the immediate short win. When the time-saving state control is executed based on the determination of "immediate short win A", the variable winning hole door of the variable winning hole 2003 is activated regardless of the type of normal winning (type of normal winning symbol). 2521 is controlled to open and close using opening and closing pattern 3 (opening and closing P2). On the other hand, if the gaming state is low probability time saving state C2 when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal win", that is, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short win" and the type of the instant short win. When the time-saving state control is executed based on the "immediate short win B", if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal win A", the variable winning hole 2003 is executed. The opening and closing of the opening door 2521 is controlled by the opening/closing pattern 2 (opening/closing P2), and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal win B" or "normal win C", the opening/closing pattern 3 of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled. (Opening/closing P3) is used to control the opening and closing, and when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal win" and the gaming state is in the low probability time saving state C3, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short win". If the time saving state control is executed based on the fact that the type of the immediate short hit is "Immediate short hit C", the lottery result of the normal symbol is "Normal hit A" or "Normal hit B". ”, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close using the opening/closing pattern 2 (opening/closing P2), and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is “normal win C”, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened/closed. 2521 is controlled to open and close using opening and closing pattern 3 (opening and closing P3).

In other words, in a low probability non-time saving state and a high probability non-time saving state (when time saving state control is not executed), the opening and closing pattern is the same regardless of the type of normal hit or whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state. (Opening/closing pattern 1) controls the opening/closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003, and determines whether the high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A and low probability time saving state B are normal winning types or low probability states. The opening/closing control of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is performed in the same opening/closing pattern (opening/closing pattern 2) regardless of whether it is a high probability state or the type of time saving state. On the other hand, in the low probability time saving state C1, the low probability time saving state C2, and the low probability time saving state C3, the opening/closing pattern for controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 depends on the type of normal winning and the type of the time saving state. , the ratios determined for opening/closing pattern 2 and opening/closing pattern 3 are made different.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 233(b), opening/closing pattern 1 (opening/closing P1) is such that the operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the variable winning opening 2003 for 0.5 seconds is performed only once. Yes, the opening/closing pattern 2 (opening/closing P2) is to perform the operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the variable winning opening 2003 for one second twice, and the opening/closing pattern 3 (opening/closing P3) is to open the variable winning opening 2003 for one second. The operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the door 2003 for 1.5 seconds is performed twice. Moreover, the opening/closing pattern 1 is the opening/closing mode that is most disadvantageous to the player among the opening/closing patterns 1 to 3, and is more difficult to enter the game ball into the variable winning hole 2003 than the opening/closing patterns 2 and 3. The opening/closing pattern 2 is an opening/closing mode that is more advantageous to the player than the opening/closing pattern 1, but it is an opening/closing mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the opening/closing pattern 3. It is easier to enter the game ball into the variable winning hole 2003 compared to the opening/closing pattern 1, which is difficult to throw (or the number of balls entering the variable winning hole 2003 is smaller than in the opening/closing pattern 3). The opening/closing pattern 3 is the most advantageous opening/closing mode for the player among the opening/closing patterns 1 to 3, and is easier to enter the game ball into the variable prize opening 2003 than the opening/closing patterns 1 and 2.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, depending on the type of the time saving state, the time saving performance related to the frequency of winnings to the variable winning hole 2003 (game control mode during the time saving state including at least the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning hole 2003) ) can be made different. In addition, the high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C1, low probability time saving state C2 and low probability time saving state C3 in which the time saving state control is executed are the time saving state. The variable winning opening door of the variable winning opening 2003 has an opening/closing pattern that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a "normal win" compared to the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state where control is not executed. 2521 is designed to open and close. In addition, the high probability time saving state, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state C1, the low probability time saving state C2 and the low probability time saving state C3 are all states in which time saving state control is executed. However, the low-probability time-saving state C1, low-probability time-saving state C2, and low-probability time-saving state C3 that are controlled in the case of an instant short winning are the high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, and low-probability time-saving state Compared to B, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a "normal win", the probability of opening and closing the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is increased in an opening/closing pattern that is advantageous to the player. (configured so that the probability that opening/closing pattern 3 will be executed is high). In other words, the low-probability time-saving state C1, low-probability time-saving state C2, and low-probability time-saving state C3 that are controlled in the case of an instant short win are the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, and the low-probability time-saving state B. Compared to the above, the time-saving performance related to the frequency of winnings to the variable winning hole 2003 is configured to be high.

Furthermore, the low probability time saving states C1 to C3 are all controlled when there is an instant short winning, but the low probability time saving state C1 which is controlled when the instant short winning is A is the instant short winning state C1. When the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" compared to the low probability time saving state C2 which is controlled when the result is a hit B and the low probability time saving state C3 which is controlled when the result is an immediate short hit C. The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is configured to have a high probability of being controlled in the opening/closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player, and the low probability time saving state is controlled when an immediate short winning B occurs. C2 is a variable prize winning pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when the lottery result of a normal symbol becomes a "normal win" compared to the low probability time saving state C1 which is controlled when an immediate short win A is achieved. Although the probability of opening and closing the variable winning opening door 2521 of the opening 2003 is configured to be low, the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal" compared to the low probability time saving state C3 which is controlled in the case of an immediate short winning C. The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is configured to have a high probability of being controlled to open and close using the opening/closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when the game player wins. The low-probability time-saving state C3, which is controlled when an immediate short hit A, is compared to the low probability time-saving state C1, which is controlled when an immediate short hit A, and the low probability time saving state C2, which is controlled when an immediate short hit B, is a normal symbol. It is configured such that when the lottery result is a "normal win", the probability of controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 using the opening/closing pattern 3 most advantageous to the player is low.

In this way, the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 have higher time-saving performance related to the winning frequency in the variable prize opening 2003 than the high-probability time-saving states, the low-probability time-saving states A, and the low-probability time-saving states B. It is composed of Specifically, the time saving performance related to the winning frequency in the variable winning opening 2003 is as follows: "Low probability time saving state C1 (immediate short winning A)>Low probability time saving state C2 (immediate short winning)" among the low probability time saving states C1 to C3 B) > Low probability time saving state C3 (immediate short hit C)", and more specifically, if the instant short hit A occurs, the high time saving performance is always set. If the instant short hit is B, the probability that it will be set to a higher time saving performance than when the immediate short hit is A is low, but it will be set to a higher time saving performance than when the immediate short hit is C. It is configured so that the probability that the short hit is high, and when the instant short hit C is achieved, the time saving performance is set to be higher than when the instant short hit B is set. Although the probability is low, the high probability time saving state and the low probability time saving state are set. A and the low probability time saving state B are configured to have a higher probability of being set to a higher time saving performance. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ratio of determining the opening/closing pattern, in other words, the ratio of setting high time-saving performance, differs depending on the type of low-probability time-saving state that is controlled when an immediate short hit occurs. , it becomes possible to vary the advantage of the player depending on the type of immediate short win.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 233(a), in this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal win", the winning normal symbol A is determined at a rate of 100/200, and the winning normal symbol A is determined at a rate of 50/200. It is configured such that the winning normal symbol B is determined at a ratio of 50/200, and the winning normal symbol C is determined at a ratio of 50/200.By configuring this way, the opening/closing pattern 3 is determined in the low probability time saving state C1. In the low probability time saving state C2, the percentage determined to open/close pattern 3 is 50%, the percentage determined to open/close pattern 2 is 50%, and in the low probability time saving state C3, the percentage determined to open/close pattern 3 is 50%. The percentage determined by opening/closing pattern 2 is 25%, and the percentage determined by opening/closing pattern 2 is 75%, and the number of balls held becomes less likely to decrease in the order of low probability time saving state C1 > low probability time saving state C2 > low probability time saving state C3. Therefore, the degree of advantage of each of the low probability time saving states C1 to C3 can be changed in stages.

In this way, by varying the period of the low probability time saving state C and the time saving performance related to the winning frequency in the variable winning hole 2003 depending on the type of the immediate short winning, it is possible to improve the gaming experience using the immediate short winning. It is possible to make the game even more diverse and increase interest. Note that the symbol determination table at the time of a common symbol hit shown in FIG. 233(a) is an example, and the selection ratio of opening/closing patterns and the opening/closing pattern are not limited to the ratios shown in the symbol determination table at the time of a common symbol winning. For example, it may be configured such that opening/closing pattern 2 is determined even when a normal win occurs in the low probability time saving state C1, and in this case, the proportion of opening/closing pattern 3 being determined in the low probability time saving state C1 is set. The ratio may be set to be higher than the ratio determined for opening/closing pattern 3 in the low probability time saving states C2 and C3. In addition, the relationship between the number of changes in special symbols that can be executed before ending the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 and the time saving performance is not limited to that described above, and for example, the ratio of settings to high time saving performance. If the low probability time saving state C is high, the number of changes in the special symbol that can be executed before ending the low probability time saving state C is reduced (for example, when the immediate short hit A is achieved, the transition to the low probability time saving state C3 is controlled), and the high time saving state is achieved. If the ratio set in the performance is low, increase the number of changes in the special symbol that can be executed before ending the low probability time saving state C (for example, if it becomes an immediate short hit C, move to the low probability time saving state C1 control). In this case, even if the number of changes in the special symbol that can be executed before ending the low probability time saving state C is small, the proportion of the special symbols set to high time saving performance can be increased, and the player's advantage level can be increased. It is possible to increase the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, if the number of changes in the special symbol that can be executed before ending the low probability time saving state C is large, the rate of setting high time saving performance is low, but the control is performed in the low probability time saving state for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when controlling to any of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, before the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the instant short win is determined to be one of "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C" ends the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control, and shifts to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 according to the type of "immediate short hit" according to the special symbol lottery results and determination results. Alternatively, the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control may be continued without ending. By continuing the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control without terminating, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to switching to a low-probability time-saving state in which a time-saving performance that is disadvantageous to the player is likely to be executed. (Details will be explained later). Regarding this point, for example, when controlling to one of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, the special symbol is displayed in fluctuation a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times). Before the special symbol is reached, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" and the type of the instant short win is either "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B" or "immediate short hit C". If the determined result corresponds to a low probability time saving state C (C1, C2, C3) which has higher time saving performance than the low probability time saving state C (C1, C2, C3) under control. (low probability time saving state C3 → low probability time saving state C2, low probability time saving state C3 → low probability time saving state C1, low probability time saving state C2 → low probability time saving state C1, etc.), to low probability time saving state C with high time saving performance. , and if the decision result corresponds to a low probability time saving state C (C1, C2, C3) that has a lower time saving performance than the low probability time saving state C (C1, C2, C3) under control. (low probability time saving state C1 → low probability time saving state C3, low probability time saving state C1 → low probability time saving state C2, low probability time saving state C2 → low probability time saving state C3, etc.), to low probability time saving state C with low time saving performance. It may also be possible to restrict changes to the . By doing this, if the low probability time saving state C3 or the low probability time saving state C2 is being controlled, it is possible to determine whether or not it can be switched to the low probability time saving state C1, which has a high probability of executing time saving performance advantageous to the player. You can enjoy it.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, not only is it controlled to a low probability time saving state after a jackpot game as in the conventional case, but the special symbol is immediately changed to a short winning symbol without executing a jackpot game, and the short winning symbol is stopped. By being displayed, it has a special game progress control that immediately shifts to a low probability time saving state (a low probability time saving state with different time saving performance depending on the immediate short winning symbol) according to the immediate short winning symbol. When such a special game progress control is provided, the following problems may occur.

Conventionally, the first special symbol corresponds to the ball entering the fixed starting port (a symbol that is mainly fluctuated in the non-time saving state), and the second special symbol corresponds to the ball entering the variable starting port (time saving state). The second special symbol (symbols that are mainly displayed in a fluctuating manner in a time-saving state) is configured to provide a larger gaming profit to the player than the first special symbol. However, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent fraudulent play and to prevent game behavior that is not intended by the designer, the ball entering the variable starting port is suppressed in the non-time saving state. It is common to perform controls related to normal symbols, such as: Controls related to normal symbols include, for example, the normal fluctuation time (from the start of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol until the end (when the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived) determined based on the result of the normal lottery described above. By setting the time (up to ) to be longer in the non-time-saving state (for example, 120 seconds) than in the time-saving state, the frequency of drawing regular symbols in the non-time-saving state is reduced, and the non-time-saving state It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the variable starting port in this state. It is known that the normal fluctuation time in the non-time saving state is kept long regardless of whether the normal lottery result (normal symbol lottery result) is a hit or a loss.

In this regard, special game progress control as in this example (the special symbol is instantly controlled to the low probability time saving state C by stopping and displaying the short winning symbol immediately without executing the jackpot game) is provided. In this case, by using the same control as the previous stage and setting the normal fluctuation time to be longer in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the variable starting port in the non-time saving state. However, if the immediate short winning symbols are stopped and displayed, there is a possibility that the smooth progress of the game in the time saving state may be hindered. To explain this point in relation to this example, for example, during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that started in the low probability non-time saving state of this example, the fluctuating display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed with an immediate short winning symbol. When controlled by the low probability time saving state C, the fluctuating display of normal symbols that started in the low probability non-time saving state continues even during the low probability time saving state C, spanning the stop display period of the special symbol due to the immediate short winning symbol. There are cases. In this case, during the fluctuation display of normal symbols based on the long normal fluctuation time set in the low probability non-time saving state, from a relatively unfavorable gaming state (low probability non-time saving state) to a relatively advantageous gaming state (low probability The transition will be to time-saving state C), but since the normal fluctuation time is a long time set in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the long-term normal fluctuation time will end even after the transition to low-probability time-saving state C. Until then, the variable starting port (variable winning port 2003 having the variable winning port door 2521) will not be opened quickly. In the event that the low probability time saving state C ends early due to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol before the long normal fluctuation time elapses (for example, the relatively short low probability time saving state (If the end condition is met 20 times with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the variable time shortened in C3), even though the transition to low probability time saving state C has been made, the low probability time saving will occur. In state C, there is a possibility that the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 will never operate and return to the low probability non-time saving state. In such a case, not only will the player not be able to experience the fun of the low-probability time-saving state C that suddenly starts, or the time-saving performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3, but it will also cause irritation to the player. This may impede the smooth progress of the game in the low probability time saving state C and may lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

Regarding this point, the present example has the following unique aspect, which prevents the smooth progress of the game in the low-probability time-saving state C and prevents a decrease in the interest in the game. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the following special time is set as the normal variation time from when the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner until they are stopped. That is, although the normal variation time set in the low probability non-time saving state in the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a plurality of times, in any of them, the "special symbol variation in the low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3" The minimum time until the display reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100, 40, or 20 times) and ends (in this example, the minimum time required for low probability time saving state C3 is 20 seconds). A time limited to be short (in this example, the maximum time of the normal fluctuation time set in the low probability non-time saving state is 19 seconds) is set. Also, from this "minimum time until the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 40 times, or 20 times) and ends" The normal variable time limited to be short is selected not only in the low probability non-time saving state but also in all game states.

As a result, after the normal symbol fluctuating display starts based on the normal fluctuating time set in the low probability non-time saving state, the special symbol immediately stops short winning symbols during the fluctuating display of the regular symbol. Even if the state shifts to any of the probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 will be terminated before the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends. can. In addition, the variable winning opening door 2521 is reliably opened and closed at least once with the time-saving performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 described above, and smooth game progress in the low-probability time-saving state C is inhibited. It is possible to prevent this and also to suppress a decline in interest in gaming. In addition, such a normal fluctuation time is assumed to be based on the instantaneous short hit, in addition to the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, when the special symbol is displayed several times (for example, the number of times smaller than the number of reservations of the special symbol). This is particularly effective when controlling to a low-probability time-saving state CX that ends with "CX", etc. Even in such a case, the variable prize opening door 2521 can be reliably controlled to open and close, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed. .

Further, in this example, the following control is added to prevent smooth game progress in the low probability time saving state C from being hindered. That is, in this example, after the variable display of the normal symbols starts on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, if the gaming state is controlled to transition before the variable display of the normal symbols stops, The gaming state when the normal symbols shown in A) are stopped is determined, and the opening/closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled in accordance with the opening/closing pattern set in the symbol determination table according to the gaming state. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 234(A), during the control of the low probability time saving state C3, the fluctuating display of normal symbols is started, and during the control of the low probability time saving state C3, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 displays " When the winning normal symbol A is derived, the opening/closing control of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled using the opening/closing pattern 2 with reference to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low probability time saving state C3 in FIG. 234(A). On the other hand, although the variable display of normal symbols is started during the control of the low probability time saving state C3, the "hit normal symbol A" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low probability time saving state C3. If the "hit normal symbol A" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after controlling the transition to the low probability time saving state C1 without The opening/closing control of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled in opening/closing pattern 3 with reference to the symbol determination table.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(B), during the control of the low probability time saving state C1, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started, and during the control of the low probability time saving state C1, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 displays " When the winning normal symbol B is derived, the opening/closing control of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled using the opening/closing pattern 3 with reference to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low probability time saving state C1 in FIG. 234(A). On the other hand, although the variable display of normal symbols is started during the control of the low probability time saving state C1, the "hit normal symbol B" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low probability time saving state C1. If the "hit normal symbol B" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after controlling the transition to the low probability time saving state B without The opening/closing control of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is performed using the opening/closing pattern 2 with reference to the symbol determination table.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(C), during the control of the low probability time saving state C2, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started, and during the control of the low probability time saving state C2, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 displays " When the winning normal symbol C" is derived, the opening/closing control of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled using the opening/closing pattern 3 with reference to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low probability time saving state C2 of FIG. 234(A). On the other hand, although the variable display of normal symbols is started during the control of the low probability time saving state C2, the "hit normal symbol C" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low probability time saving state C2. If the "normal hit symbol C" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the jackpot gaming state without With reference to , the opening and closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled in opening/closing pattern 1. In this example, the jackpot game state is a state in which a large amount of game balls (prize balls) can be won by entering the game balls into the first big prize hole 2006 and the second big prize hole 2007, and the variable prize hole 2003 Even if the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close, it will not give any advantage to the player, so the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close using the opening/closing pattern 1 that is most disadvantageous to the player. ing. In addition, during the jackpot game state, the control may be made to a low probability non-time saving state, and in this case, it is possible to match the actual game state and the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003. can.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in an opening/closing pattern according to the gaming state when the normal symbols stop, rather than the gaming state when the normal symbols start changing. It is supposed to be done. As a result, as described above, after the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is started based on the normal fluctuating time set in the low probability non-time saving state, during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol, the low probability time saving state C1, C2 , C3, the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 are terminated before the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends. The variable prize opening door 2521 is reliably opened and closed at least once with the time saving performance corresponding to the probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, and the smooth game progress in the low probability time saving state C is prevented from being hindered. Moreover, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming. Moreover, the gaming state and the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 can be made to match, and it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust.

Note that the effect display device 1600 may also display the normal symbol variation results, and in this case, only information related to wins and losses (for example, ○×) is displayed in the normal variation area at the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and The type of hit (type of normal hit symbol) may not be displayed. Specifically, when starting the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, a variable display of alternately displaying "〇" and "x" is started in the normal variation area of the production display device 1600. However, when stopping the fluctuating display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the production display device 1600 stops with "〇" displayed in the normal variation area, If the lottery result of a normal symbol is a "miss", the production display device 1600 is stopped with an "x" displayed in the normal fluctuation area, and if the lottery result of a regular symbol is a "normal win", the process is stopped. Regardless of the type of normal winning (type of normal winning pattern), the type of normal winning (type of normal winning pattern) may be made difficult to distinguish by displaying "O" in the normal variation area of the performance display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine the type of normal hit (type of normal winning pattern) based on the stopping mode of the normal symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, which attracts the most attention of the player. It is possible to draw attention to the type, that is, the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003, and it is possible to prevent the control of the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 of the pachinko machine 1 from becoming complicated, thereby increasing reliability. It is possible to improve performance and prevent errors from occurring.

Although illustration is omitted, in this example, for example, during the control of the low probability time saving state C1, the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal win", and the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is started in response to the lottery result. During the control of the low probability time saving state C1, the low probability time saving state C1 ends without deriving "normal winning symbol A" or "normal winning symbol B" on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The variable display may continue even during control of a low probability non-time saving state. In that case, depending on the fluctuation display result of the special symbol during control of the low probability non-time saving state, the low probability non-time saving state may be further shifted to the low probability time saving states C2 and C3, or a new low probability time saving state C1 may be created. It is also possible to move to In such a case, if an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the normal fluctuation time, the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that started during the control of the low probability time saving state C1 will be changed to the low probability time saving state. C1 and the low-probability non-time-saving state, the transition to the low-probability time-saving states C2 and C3, and the control to the new low-probability time-saving state C1 will continue, and the above-mentioned gaming state when the normal symbols stop. If the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in an opening/closing pattern according to There is a possibility that the desired gameplay cannot be achieved.

Therefore, in this example, for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" during the control in the low probability time saving state C1, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is started in response to the lottery result, but the low probability time saving state C1 During the control, the low probability time saving state C1 ends without deriving "normal winning symbol A" or "normal winning symbol B" on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbol changes to low probability non-probability. In the case where it is continued even during the control of the time saving state, the variable display of the normal symbols is restricted so as not to continue over further changes in the gaming state thereafter. Specifically, if the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that was started during the control of the low probability time saving state C1 is continued during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, In addition to setting the normal variation time to a specific normal variation time that is less than a specific time (for example, less than 5 seconds), at least the lottery result of the first special symbol after being controlled to a low probability non-time saving state is an immediate short hit. In such a case, the special variation time is set to a limited special variation time that is longer than the specific normal variation time (for example, 5 seconds or more). As a result, if the fluctuating display of normal symbols that started during the control of the low probability time saving state C1 is continued during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols will change to the low probability non time saving state. It can be made sure to end while being controlled, and for example, after controlling the transition to a low probability non-time saving state, "normal winning symbol A" and "normal winning symbol B" are displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In this case, it can be foreseen that the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 will be controlled to open and close in the opening/closing pattern 1 by referring to the symbol determination table. As a result, it becomes easier to design a game that takes into consideration the opening and closing timing of the variable winning opening door 2521, and it becomes easier to realize a gaming experience that reflects the designer's intention.

[Transition of gaming state in modified example of opening/closing mode of variable winning opening]
Next, a description will be given of the transition of the gaming state in a modification of the opening/closing manner of the variable winning opening described above. FIG. 235 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in a modified example of the opening/closing manner of the variable winning opening. Note that the gaming state transition shown in FIG. 235 is partially different from the gaming state transition shown in FIG. 196, so only the different parts from the gaming state transition shown in FIG. Avoid redundant explanations of parts that are common to state transitions.

Even in the modified example of the opening/closing mode of the variable winning opening, it is possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" or "immediate short win", and the special symbol When the lottery result is a "big hit", the time saving state is entered after the jackpot game is executed, whereas when the lottery result for a special symbol is an "immediate short win" or a predetermined condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol. If this is established (in this example, if the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 without changing the gaming state from a low probability state to a high probability state), a jackpot game is executed. It is now possible to shift to the time saving state without having to do so.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the instant short win is determined to be "immediate short hit A", the special symbol will change without executing the jackpot game. Until the display reaches 100 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C1, and if the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit B", the special symbol changes without executing the jackpot game. Until the display reaches 40 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C2, and if the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit C", the special symbol changes without executing the jackpot game. Until the display reaches 20 times, control is performed to the low probability time saving state C3. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" before the special symbol fluctuates and displays reaches the predetermined number of times, or if a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is met (in this example, a low probability state (When the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times), the low probability time saving state C is ended at that point.

In addition, when controlling to any of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, before the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the instant short win is determined to be one of "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C" is a low-probability time-saving state C1, C2 in which the rate of execution of a higher time-saving performance (higher advantage for the player) than in the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, C3 under which the determined type of immediate short winning is executed is high. , C3, the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 being controlled are terminated on the condition that it is an immediate short winning that causes the control to be controlled to C3, and the low probability time saving state C1 is changed according to the determined type of immediate short winning. , C2, and C3, there is a high rate of execution of time-saving performance (lower advantage for the player) in which the type of immediate short hit determined is lower than the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 being controlled. If it is an immediate short hit, the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control are continued without ending.

For example, as shown in FIG. 235, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short win" when the control is in the low probability time saving state C3, the type of the instant short win is "immediate short win A". Or, if it is determined to be "immediate short hit B", the low probability time saving state C3 is terminated and the transition control is performed to the low probability time saving state C1 or the low probability time saving state C2, and the control is being controlled to the low probability time saving state C2. When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", if the type of the instant short win is determined to be "immediate short hit A", the low probability time saving state C2 is ended and the low probability time saving is started. While controlling to transition to state C1, when controlling to low probability time saving state C1, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", the type of the immediate short win is "immediate short hit B" Or, if it is determined to be an "immediate short hit C", the low probability time saving state C1 continues without ending, and if it is controlled to a low probability time saving state C2, the special symbol lottery result is "immediate short winning". When this happens, if the type of instant short win is determined to be "immediate short win C", the low probability time saving state C2 is continued without ending. Therefore, when controlling to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3, higher time-saving performance (higher advantage to the player) is executed than in the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control. The player can now play the game with anticipation as to whether or not the transition control will be made to the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 with a high percentage.

Additionally, in this case, a promotion acquisition performance may be executed to notify whether or not to be promoted to a low probability time saving state C, which has a higher probability of achieving higher time saving performance than the low probability time saving state C under control. It is possible to improve the game's interest when the promotion acquisition effect is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", the time saving performance (player's advantage level It is also possible to execute the promotion acquisition performance even when it is not determined to be an immediate short hit, which causes control to the low probability time shortening states C1, C2, and C3 where the execution rate is high.In this case, When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the time saving performance (higher advantage for the player ) is determined to be an immediate short hit that causes control to be performed in the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 with a high probability of being executed. A success pattern in which the character Y appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 by displaying a display to encourage whether or not it will appear (a low probability time saving state in which a higher rate of time saving performance is executed than in the controlled low probability time saving state C) When the special symbol lottery result becomes "immediate short hit", the low probability time saving state C1, C2, C3 that is being controlled as the type of immediate short hit is executed. Also, if it is not determined to be an immediate short hit that causes high time saving performance (high advantage for the player) to be controlled to low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 with a high probability of being executed, at a predetermined rate. A failure pattern in which character Y does not appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (time-saving performance higher than low probability time-saving state C under control) is displayed to encourage character Y to appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to perform an effect in which the promotion to the low-probability time-saving state C fails, which has a high probability of being executed. As a result, when the promotion acquisition performance is executed, it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to whether or not the promotion will be promoted to the low probability time saving state C, which has a higher probability of achieving a higher time saving performance than the low probability time saving state C currently being controlled. become.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", the same low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3 as the low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3 being controlled as the type of the instant short winning. When it is determined to be an immediate short hit that causes the execution of When the type of the immediate short win is determined to be the instant short win B, and when the type of the instant short win is determined to be the immediate short hit C during the control of the low probability time saving state C3, the low probability time saving state C1, The controllable period of C2 and C3 may be extended. For example, when the special symbol lottery result becomes "immediate short hit" in the 20th special symbol fluctuation display after being controlled by the low probability time saving state C1, the type of the instant short win is "immediate short hit A". ”, the number of changes of the special symbol after the transition control to the low probability time saving state C1 is reset (set to 0 times), and when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “immediate short hit” Then, in the low probability time saving state C1 after the stop of the variation display which is determined to be "immediate short hit A" as the type of instant short win, the number of changes of the special symbol is counted again from 0 times and the number of changes of the special symbol is 100. When the number of times reached is reached, the low probability time saving state C1 may be continued, and in this case, the control is controlled to the low probability time saving state C1 until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 120 times, which is 20 times more than usual. You will be able to do this. Further, in this case, the successful pattern of the above-mentioned extended acquisition performance may be executed, and when the extended acquisition performance is executed, the game interest can be improved. In addition, even if you do not win instant short win A, instant short win B, and instant short win C during the control of low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, the failure pattern of the above extension acquisition performance will be applied at a predetermined rate. It may also be executed. This makes it possible to draw attention with anticipation to whether or not the period of control to the low probability time saving state will be extended when the extension acquisition effect is executed.

In addition, when controlling to any of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, before the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), Even if the predetermined condition regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is satisfied (in this example, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600), the control of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 is terminated. It may be possible to continue without doing so. In this case, when the special symbol fluctuation display in the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), the low probability time saving state C1, It is also possible to control the transition to the low probability non-time saving state B after ending C2 and C3. In this case, the low-probability time-saving state C1 is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C2 or the low-probability time-saving state C3, in which there is a high probability that time-saving performance disadvantageous to the player will be performed before the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in gaming due to being played by players. In addition, if the configuration is configured to control the transition to low probability time saving state B after the end of low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" or it will change to low probability time saving state B. The low probability time saving state B may be ended when the number of changes of the special symbol after the transition control reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example), or the lottery result of the special symbol is a "jackpot". or after the predetermined condition regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is satisfied (in this example, the number of variations of the special symbol in a low probability state reaches 600 times), the number of variations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (in this example, the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times). 700 times), the low probability time saving state B may be terminated. The number of variations of the special symbol is counted as the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the low probability time saving state B).

In addition, in the above example, the percentage of the judgment value is distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit, which is compared with the first symbol random number, and the percentage of the judgment value is distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit, which is compared with the second symbol random number. Although the percentage of the judgment value and the percentage of the judgment value are set to be the same, these percentages may be made to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. In the table, the highest rate is determined for immediate shortcut C, which causes control, to low probability time saving state C3, where high time saving performance is performed at a low rate, and low probability time saving state, where high time saving performance is performed, is high. While minimizing the percentage determined to be an immediate short hit A that causes control to state C1, the symbol determination table at the time of an immediate short win compared with the second symbol random number has a high rate of high time saving performance. Maximize the rate determined by the immediate short hit A that causes control to the low probability time saving state C1, and increase the immediate short hit C that causes the control to the low probability time short state C3 where the high time saving performance is executed at a low rate. Alternatively, the ratio determined by With this configuration, although there is a possibility of instantaneous short winning in both the normal time (non-time saving state) and the time saving state, in the time saving state, the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state. Since the probability of being controlled can be increased and the degree of advantage of the time-saving state can be improved, the game interest in the time-saving state can be improved.

In addition, in the lottery table at low probability and the lottery table at high probability, the probability of winning an instant short hit based on the instant short hit judgment value that is compared with the second special random number, and the first special random number The probability of winning an immediate short win may be set to be different from the probability of winning an immediate short win based on the instant short win determination value compared to and the high-probability lottery table, the probability of winning an instant short win is determined based on the instant short hit determination value that is compared with the second special random number, and the instant short hit determination value that is compared with the first special random number. The probability may be set to be higher than the probability of winning the instant short hit based on the value. In this case, although there is a possibility of immediate short winning in both normal (non-time saving state) and time saving state, in time saving state, the probability of immediate short winning is higher than in normal time, and the time saving state increases. Continuous generation can be achieved, and when the time saving state is reached, transition control to a more advantageous time saving state can be expected. Note that the probability of winning an immediate short hit may be made different between the lottery table at low probability and the lottery table at high probability shown in FIG. 224(B).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 236(D), the judgment value is distributed between the symbol determination table for instant short hit, which is compared with the first symbol random number, and the symbol determination table for instant short hit, which is compared with the second symbol random number. In addition to making the ratios different, as shown in FIG. 236(A), it is determined that the lottery table that is compared with the first special random number and the lottery table that is compared with the second special random number will win the instant short hit. It is also possible to make the probabilities different, and when configured in this way, the degree of advantage of the time-saving state is further increased, and it is possible to improve the game interest in the time-saving state.

In addition, the symbol determination table at the time of an immediate short hit may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, as shown in FIGS. 237(A) and (B), when an immediate short hit occurs, the symbol determination table is (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), the execution rate of the opening/closing pattern (opening/closing P1 in this example) that is advantageous to the player is low (time-saving performance is low), which causes control to be performed in the low-probability time-saving state C3. If it is determined to be an immediate short hit C, and the time saving state is (low probability time saving states A, B, C1 to C3 and high probability time saving state), the execution rate of the opening/closing pattern advantageous to the player (opening/closing P1 in this example) is high. It may be determined that the immediate short hit A causes control to the low probability time save state C1 (which has high time saving performance) or the immediate short hit B causes the control to the low probability time save state C2. With this configuration, in the non-time saving state, if there is an immediate short hit, the transition to the low probability time saving state C3, which is less advantageous, is controlled, but when the transition to the low probability time saving state C3 is controlled, the instant short winning occurs. By winning, it is possible to control the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C1 or the low-probability time-saving state C2, which is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving state C3, so the degree of advantage can be changed stepwise.

In addition, when controlling to a high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state), control to low probability time saving state C is not triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol becoming "immediate short hit". It may be set as "immediate short winning symbol invalid period". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to a fall from a high probability state to a low probability state. In addition, only when the control is in the low probability time saving state, the control may be controlled to the low probability time saving state C using the lottery result of the special symbol as an "immediate short hit" as an opportunity. The degree of advantage of the state can be improved.

[Variation of game play using low probability time saving state C]
Next, a modified example that differs from the above-described embodiment in some aspects of the game will be described below. In the embodiment described above, when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) in which the lottery result of the first special pattern is an "immediate short hit" stops, the effect display device 1600 says "Enter help mode S!!" A rescue confirmation image is displayed to notify the player that the player will enter "help mode S," and after entering "help mode S," the current gaming state is displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600. The system is configured to display a relief image "in help mode S" which indicates that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled, but the system has shifted to the low probability time saving state C. Controlling (relief confirmation image of "entering help mode S!!") and controlling low probability time saving state C (rescue image of "help mode S in progress") are shown in "immediate short hit". Depending on the type, notification may not be made, and a new game feature may be created in which the low probability time saving state C is kept secret and the game progresses. Hereinafter, examples of new game variations will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 238(A) and (B), in this example, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as an opportunity to control to the low probability time saving state C, in addition to the above-mentioned immediate short hit, " A special instant short win is set, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not you will win this specific instant short win. In this example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific instant short hit, the mode when the special symbol stops (stop symbol of the special symbol) is determined to be a specific instant short hit symbol, and the specific instant short hit symbol is When they are derived and displayed, they are configured to be controlled to a time-saving state in the same way as when the immediate short hit A symbol, the instant short hit B symbol, and the instant short hit C symbol are derived and displayed. In addition, when a specific immediate short winning symbol is derived and displayed, unlike the low probability time saving states C1 to C3 mentioned above, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice. The control is set to a low-probability time-saving state C4 that can be continued until the time is reached. The lottery table and symbol determination table shown in FIG. 238 are partially different from the lottery table and symbol determination table shown in FIG. 224, so only the different parts from FIG. 224 will be explained, and the common parts will be explained This is omitted for the sake of explanation. Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 238(A) and 238(B), the lottery for determining whether or not to win the instant short-term win and the lottery for determining whether or not to win the specific instant short-term win are configured separately; It is also possible to not conduct a lottery to determine whether or not you will win (that is, to control the transition to the low probability time saving state C (relief confirmation image of "entering help mode S!!") or to perform the low probability time saving state C. It is also possible not to provide an instant short win that notifies you that the system is under control (relief image in "help mode S"), and a lottery and specific instant win to determine whether or not you will win the instant short win. A lottery to determine whether or not to win an immediate short win is executed together (for example, if a lottery result to determine whether or not to win an immediate short win is obtained, an immediate short win symbol is drawn). The type may be determined from the following: immediate short hit A symbol, immediate short hit B symbol, immediate short hit C symbol, and specific immediate short hit symbol. In this case, the specific immediate short hit symbol The ratio to be determined is much higher than other types (for example, immediate short hit A symbol: immediate short hit B symbol: immediate short hit C symbol: specific immediate short hit symbol = 1:2:7:90, etc.) ).

In the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 238(A) and 238(B), in the lottery table at low probability and the lottery table at high probability, which are referred to for comparison with the first special random number, at any of the setting values 1 to 6, The first special random number matches the instant short win judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the instant short win with the specified instant short win probability of 10/319, which is also the same, and the other first special random numbers are out of the above range. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating that the first special random number is the same as the outlier determination value. On the other hand, the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number does not have a specific immediate short hit determination value. As a result, in the non-time-saving state where variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting prize in the first starting hole 2004 is the mainstream, specific immediate short hits can occur more frequently than in the time-saving state. It becomes like this.

In this way, in this example, the specific immediate short winning probability does not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, and is configured so that it does not change even when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched. In addition, the specific immediate short hit probability is considered to be a much higher probability than the jackpot probability and the immediate short hit probability, so that specific immediate short hits can occur frequently before reaching the jackpot or immediate short hit. It has become.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table in the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 238(C), in the jackpot symbol determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first symbol random number, the judgment value is distributed to jackpot C and jackpot D. Judgment values are not distributed to jackpot A and jackpot B, and the judgment values are distributed at the ratio of "Jackpot C: Jackpot D = 99:1" to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number between 1 and 100). It is being In addition, the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number is similar to the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, and the judgment value is distributed only to jackpot C and jackpot D, and jackpot A and jackpot B. Although the judgment value is not distributed, the judgment value is distributed in the ratio of "Jackpot C: Jackpot D = 80:20" to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number from 1 to 100), and the first It is configured such that the probability of a jackpot with a higher degree of advantage (in this case, jackpot D) is determined to be higher than when a jackpot is achieved with a random number of symbols, and the first special is based on the starting prize in the first starting opening 2004. The situation is more advantageous for the player when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the second starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003 than the variable displaying of the symbol.

On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table in the time saving state shown in FIG. Judgment values are assigned to all, and judged at the ratio of "Jackpot A: Jackpot B: Jackpot C: Jackpot D = 25:25:49:1" for the first symbol random number (for example, a random number between 1 and 100). values are distributed. In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, the judgment value is distributed only to jackpot A and jackpot C and not to jackpot B and jackpot D, but the second symbol random number (e.g. Random numbers from 1 to 100), the judgment value is distributed in the ratio of "Jackpot A: Jackpot D = 80:20", and the jackpot is more advantageous than if it was a jackpot with the first random number. (In this case, jackpot A) is configured so that the percentage determined to be higher is the second starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting hole 2004. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in 2003, the player will be in an advantageous state.

In addition, the jackpot symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 238(C) and (D) determine jackpots that are more advantageous in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, for example, jackpot A and jackpot B that control the high probability state until the next jackpot. The system is configured such that the percentage determined to be a jackpot A and jackpot D to which a long-term time-saving state is given is high. In other words, in the time saving state, if the result of the special lottery based on the game ball being accepted into the second starting hole 2005 or the variable prize winning hole 2003 becomes a jackpot, in the non-time saving state, the second starting hole 2005 Alternatively, it is configured so that the degree of advantage is higher than when the result of a special lottery based on the acceptance of game balls into the variable winning hole 2003 is a jackpot. Therefore, in the time saving state, if the result of the special lottery based on the game ball being accepted into the second starting hole 2005 or the variable prize winning hole 2003 becomes a jackpot, in the non-time saving state, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, then in the non-time saving state, To generate a jackpot that is more advantageous than when a jackpot is the result of a special lottery based on a game ball being accepted into a variable winning hole 2003, and to increase the degree of advantage of a time-saving state and improve the interest in the game. I can do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 239(A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal win", if the gaming state is the low probability time saving state C4, that is, the specific instant When controlling the time saving state based on a short hit, the opening/closing pattern 4 of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is applied regardless of the type of normal winning (type of normal winning symbol). (Opening/closing P4) controls opening/closing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 239(B), opening/closing pattern 4 (opening/closing P4) is such that the operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the variable winning opening 2003 for 0.51 seconds is performed only once. Yes, and the opening/closing operation is performed in the same manner as opening/closing pattern 1 (opening/closing P1) executed when the gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state and a high probability non-time saving state, that is, when control of the time saving state is not executed. It looks like this. In the low probability non-time saving state C4 where the transition is controlled based on a specific immediate short hit as described above, the time saving state control is not executed when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes a "normal hit". The opening and closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled in the same manner as in the case, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to the low probability time saving state C4. It is difficult to determine whether there are any.

As mentioned above, the low probability time saving state C4 is a state that can continue until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice. In state C4, except when a jackpot game is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed twice, or the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed twice. This is a state that continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed one time at a time. In other words, the opening/closing pattern 4 (opening/closing P4) described above does not significantly increase the possibility of the ball entering the variable winning hole 2003 like the opening/closing patterns 2 and 3 (opening/closing P2, 3), so the low probability time saving state C4 , the variable display of the second special symbol is not necessarily guaranteed, and the possibility that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice is greater than the possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed twice and ends. There is a higher possibility that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and then the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed once and then terminated.

In addition, in this example, if an immediate short hit occurs during a time saving state, the instant short win is controlled to be in a low probability time saving state in a more advantageous manner than when an instant short win occurs during a non-time saving state. The type (immediate short winning symbol) is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 239(C) and (D), the lottery result of the first special symbol was an immediate short hit in the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). In this case, the opening/closing pattern and control period of the variable winning opening door 2521 are determined at a high rate for the immediate short winning C (immediate short winning C symbol) which causes the control to be in a relatively disadvantageous low probability time saving state C3. It is composed of In addition, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an instant short hit in a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state), an immediate short winning that causes the control to be in a low probability time saving state C2. Although it is possible to determine the winning B (immediate short winning B symbol), the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning opening door 2521 and the control period cause the control to be in the relatively disadvantageous low probability time saving state C3. It is configured to be determined at a high rate for the short hit (C symbol).

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state (low probability time saving state A to C), it is configured so that it will not be determined as an immediate short hit C (immediate short winning C symbol). The opening/closing pattern of the variable winning opening door 2521 and the control period are controlled to the immediate short winning A (immediate short winning A symbol) which causes the control to be in the relatively advantageous low probability time saving state C1, and the low probability time saving state C2. It is configured to be determined at a high rate based on the immediate short hit B (immediate short hit B symbol) which is the cause. In addition, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state (low probability time saving state A to C), it is configured so that it will not be determined as an immediate short hit C (immediate short winning C symbol). The opening/closing pattern of the variable winning opening door 2521 and the control period are controlled to the immediate short winning A (immediate short winning A symbol) which causes the control to be in the relatively advantageous low probability time saving state C1, and the low probability time saving state C2. It is configured to be determined at a high rate based on the immediate short hit B (immediate short hit B symbol) which is the cause. In addition, in the time saving state, if the second special symbol results in an immediate short hit, the instant short hit symbol is determined in a more advantageous manner than if the first special symbol results in an immediate short hit. There is. By configuring in this way, in the non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, the transition to the low probability time saving state C3 with a low degree of advantage is controlled at a high rate, but while being controlled to the low probability time saving state C3, If you win the instant short win, you can control the transition to low probability time saving state C1 or low probability time saving state C2, which is more advantageous than low probability time saving state C3, so the degree of advantage can be changed step by step. .

In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in a non-time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), immediate short winning A, immediate short winning B, and immediate short winning C It is configured such that the period (time saving number) that can be controlled in a low probability time saving state is determined to be the shortest immediate short winning C, and the second special symbol is displayed in a non-time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). If the lottery result is an instant short win, among instant short win A, instant short win B, and instant short win C, the instant short win has the longest controllable period (time shortening number) in a low probability time saving state. Although it is decided to be instant short hit B and instant short hit C other than A, among instant short hit A, instant short hit B, and immediate short hit C, the immediate short hit has the shortest controllable period (time saving number) to a low probability time saving state. It is configured so that the ratio of short hits determined to be C is the highest.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time saving state, there is a period ( In addition, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time shortening state, the instant short win A and the instant short hit A are determined. Among B and instant short win C, the period (time saving number) that can be controlled to a low probability time saving state is configured not to be determined as immediate short win C, which is the shortest. By configuring in this way, in the non-time saving state, when there is an immediate shortcut, the control is performed to shift to the low probability time saving state C3 with the shortest controllable period (time saving number) at a high rate. If you win the instant short winning after controlling the transition to the low probability time saving state C3, the low probability time saving state C1 or low probability where the controllable period (time saving number) to the low probability time saving state is longer than the low probability time saving state C3. Since the transition to the time saving state C2 can be controlled, the degree of advantage can be changed in stages.

In addition, in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the second special symbol results in an immediate short hit, it will be determined as an immediate short hit, which is more advantageous than if the first special symbol results in an immediate short hit. ing. That is, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the non-time saving state, the execution rate of the opening/closing pattern that is advantageous to the player (opening/closing P1 in this example) is low probability time saving state C1, low probability. While it is determined only by the immediate short hit C that causes control to the lowest low probability time saving state C3 among the time saving state C2 and the low probability time saving state C3, the second special symbol is drawn in the non-time saving state. If the result is an immediate short win, the execution rate of the opening/closing pattern (opening/closing P1 in this example) that is advantageous to the player is among the low probability time saving state C1, the low probability time saving state C2, and the low probability time saving state C3. It is configured such that it can also be determined as an immediate short hit B that causes control to be in a low probability time saving state C2 different from the lowest low probability time saving state C3. In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in a non-time saving state, there will be a period that can be controlled to a low probability time saving state among the immediate short winning A, immediate short winning B, and immediate short winning C. (time saving number) is determined only to the shortest immediate short hit C, whereas in the non-time saving state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit, the instant short hit A and the instant short hit A are determined. Immediate short winning with a longer period (number of working hours) that can be controlled into a low probability time saving state than instant short winning C, which has the shortest period (number of working hours) that can be controlled into a low probability time saving state among winning B and instant short winning C It is configured such that it can also be determined by B.

In addition, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state, it is more advantageous for the player than when the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state. An immediate shortcut that causes the execution rate of the opening/closing pattern (in this example, opening/closing P1) to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C1, which is the highest among the low probability time saving state C1, the low probability time saving state C2, and the low probability time saving state C3. The configuration is such that the proportion determined to be A is high. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state, compared to the case where the first special symbol lottery result becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state, the immediate short winning A. It is configured such that among the instant short winnings B and the instant short winnings C, the ratio of instant short winnings A having the longest controllable period (time saving number) to a low probability time saving state is determined to be high. In this way, in addition to making the degree of advantage in the case of an immediate short hit different in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, the lottery result of the second special symbol that is mainly displayed fluctuating in the time saving state is different from the instant short winning state. By making the degree of advantage (opening/closing pattern, number of time savings) different between the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is mainly displayed fluctuatingly in the non-time saving state, becomes an immediate short hit, the advantage in the time saving state. It is possible to improve the character and the interest in the game.

Next, the transition of the game state using the "specific instant short hit" will be explained. FIG. 240(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state when a specific immediate short hit has not been won in the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the case of winning an immediate short hit.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in a low probability non-time saving state, when a game ball passes through the gate 2002 during a game that mainly displays a variable display of the first special symbol, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery results of the normal symbols are derived after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the normal fluctuation time (the time from the start of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols to the end (until the lottery result of the normal symbols is derived)) is longer than the time-saving state (for example, 120 seconds, etc.). Then, when any of the "normal winning symbol A", "normal winning symbol B", and "normal winning symbol C" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the low probability shown in FIG. 239(A) Referring to the table of opening/closing patterns during normal winnings according to the non-time saving state, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is set to opening/closing pattern 1, that is, the variable winning opening 2003 is set to 0 as shown in FIG. 239(B). The opening/closing control of the variable prize opening door 2521 is controlled so that it is opened only once for 5 seconds.

Further, when the variable winning a prize hole sensor 2526 detects a game ball accepted into the variable winning a prize hole 2003, the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, FIG. 240(a) illustrates a case where an "immediate short win" is won during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, and the type of the instant short win is determined to be immediate short win C. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at “D” in Figure 240(a) as an immediate short hit C (immediate short hit C symbol), an immediate short hit occurs when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol that becomes the lottery result stops. A relief confirmation image that displays a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are "549" as a symbol combination corresponding to the C symbol, and also notifies the effect display device 1600 that the "help mode S" will be entered. (In this example, "Victory! Help mode entered!") is displayed (help mode S entry notification), and after entering "help mode S", "E" to "H" in Fig. 240(a) are displayed. As shown in , a rescue image indicating that the low probability time saving state C3 is under control is displayed (effect display for help mode S) to actively notify the player that the low probability time saving state C is in progress. It is designed to notify the public.

In this example, when the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 or when the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to be open, a predetermined percentage (when the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner) It may be something that is always executed, or it may be something that is executed only when the lottery result of the normal symbol is an immediate short hit, or when the lottery result of the normal symbol is an immediate short hit but it is not an immediate short hit. (may be executed at a higher rate) than the area in which the decorative symbols of the effect display device 1600 are displayed. ), an opening suggestion image (in this example, ``Aim for the open/closed winning hole!'') is displayed to notify that the variable winning hole 2003 is in an open state.

Further, as described above, when a game ball enters the variable winning hole 2003 and the variable winning hole sensor 2526 detects the game ball accepted into the variable winning hole 2003, the main control board 1310 initiates the start of the starting hole winning effect. A starting entrance prize command for instructing is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The starting hole winning command is provided corresponding to each of the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and the variable winning hole sensor 2526, and is executed when a game ball accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is detected. Based on the various random numbers obtained, the preliminary lottery results for special symbols (results of the preliminary lottery to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot, small hit, or immediate short hit), the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the case if it is a small win. In the case of an immediate short hit, the type of immediate short hit is executed, and when it is not a jackpot, a small hit, or an immediate short hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, it includes advance determination information such as the type of game performance to be executed (type of variation pattern).

In this example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sends a starting winning command (first starting opening sensor 3002 and Any one of the second starting hole sensor 2401 and the variable winning hole sensor 2526 (for example, the variable winning hole sensor 2526) or any combination (all of them), or the sensor related to the second special symbol (the second starting hole sensor 2401 and variable winning opening sensor 2526), etc.), a predetermined ratio (this may be executed whenever a starting opening winning command is received, or when the preliminary lottery result is an immediate short win). (or may be executed at a higher rate when the preliminary lottery result is an immediate short win than when it is not an immediate short win) in a specific effect area of the effect display device 1600. A mini-character battle performance is executed in which character Z fights an enemy character. In the mini-character battle performance of this example, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning hole 2003. In this case, the process is executed from before starting the variable display of the second special symbol to during the variable display of the second special symbol, and displays an effect mode according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in a low probability non-time saving state (in this example, the display result of the second special symbol is "immediate short hit B symbol" or "immediate short hit C"). 240 (a "C"), when deriving and displaying the display result of the second special symbol, displays the mode in which the mini character Z wins the middle boss as an enemy character, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol stops, the effect display device 1600 A relief confirmation image (in this example, "Victory! Entering help mode!") is displayed to notify that the "help mode S" will be entered ("D" in FIG. 240(a)). . On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not an immediate short hit in a low probability non-time saving state but becomes a loss (in this example, when a "miss" is derived and displayed as the display result of the second special symbol), that is, If it does not result in an immediate short hit, when the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, a mode in which the mini character Z is defeated by the mid-boss as an enemy character is displayed, and an effect is displayed when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol stops. Notify the device 1600 that entry into "help mode S" has failed. As a result, it is possible to actively notify and make the player aware that there is a possibility of entering "help mode S" and that the player will be in "help mode S", and this is executed by the effect display device 1600. It is possible to draw attention to the changing display of effects and decorative patterns.

In addition, if an immediate short hit does not occur in a low probability non-time saving state, if the lottery result of the special symbol (one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) does not result in either a jackpot or a small win. By executing the mini character battle performance only, after displaying the defeat of the mini character Z to the medium boss or large boss as an enemy character in the mini character battle performance, it is possible to prevent the jackpot or small win and improve the lottery results of special symbols. The mini character battle performance may be performed in association with the display result of the mini character battle performance so as not to confuse the player, or the mini character battle performance may be performed at a predetermined rate even if there is no immediate short hit. By executing the mini character battle performance at a predetermined rate when a specific lottery result (for example, jackpot A, etc.) occurs even when there is not an immediate short hit, mini character Z can be played in the mini character battle performance. After discouraging the player by displaying a state in which the player is defeated by a medium boss or a large boss as an enemy character, a lottery result advantageous to the player may be derived and displayed to double the player's pleasure.

In this way, in a low probability non-time saving state, the special symbol lottery result is an immediate short hit (in this example, the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "immediate short hit B symbol" or "immediate short hit C symbol"). ”), a mini-character battle effect is executed in a specific effect area of the effect display device 1600 to suggest an immediate short hit, and a rescue confirmation image is displayed to indicate “O It actively notifies that it will enter the "help mode S", that is, it will control the transition to the low probability time saving state C2 or the low probability time saving state C3, and furthermore, during the control of the low probability time saving state C2 and the low probability time saving state C3, The background display for help mode S (in this example, "help mode S effect") is executed as the background display (background of scenery etc. displayed in the lower layer of the decorative pattern) of the effect display device 1600. It is designed to actively notify that "Mode S" is being executed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 240(b), the game is progressed in a more advantageous manner than in FIG. 240(a) by using a specific immediate short hit and a low probability time saving state C4. Specifically, in FIG. 240(b), in a low probability non-time saving state, the result of the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a specific immediate short hit in the course of a game that mainly displays the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. In this method, the mini character battle effect is not executed in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600 to hide the fact that it will be a specific instant short hit, and when the variable display of decorative symbols stops, the symbol corresponding to the specific immediate short hit symbol is displayed. As a combination, a combination of decorative patterns different from the immediate short hit pattern, such as a combination where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns become the same "378" pattern as when they come off, is displayed, and even if the decorative patterns stop, there is no relief. By not displaying the confirmed image, the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 is kept secret, and even during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C4, the same background display as in normal times (non-time-saving state) is displayed (with some differences). ), thereby concealing the fact that the control is in the low-probability time-saving state C4.

In other words, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific immediate short hit in a low probability non-time saving state, the mini character battle performance is not executed in the specific performance area of the performance display device 1600, and the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is At the time of stoppage, a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "378" is displayed as a symbol combination corresponding to a specific immediate short hit symbol to prevent the user from recalling a specific immediate short hit, and the decorative symbols are changed. By not displaying the rescue confirmation image even if the display stops, the transition control to the low probability time saving state C4 is hidden ("B" in FIG. 240(b)), and furthermore, during the control of the low probability time saving state C4, By displaying the background in the normal state (non-time saving state) on the effect display device 1600, the fact that the control is being performed in the low probability time saving state C4 is concealed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in order to hide from the player that the control is in the low-probability time-saving state C4, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability time-saving state C4 are displayed in a variable manner. It is also desirable to make the time (special variation time) very similar to the special variation time of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the low probability non-time saving state. In other words, it is made difficult to recognize that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low probability time saving state C4 are being controlled to the low probability time saving state C4 from the special variation time of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and parallel to these special variation times. By performing the above-mentioned mini character battle effect, it is possible to conceal the fact that the transition to the low probability time saving state C4 is being controlled.

In addition, when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, a variation display of the identification pattern 1600b, which is smaller and less conspicuous than the decorative pattern, is executed at the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Ru. In this variable display of the identification pattern 1600b, "O" and "x" are alternately displayed as the identification pattern 1600b, and when the decorative pattern stops, it stops with either "O" or "x" being displayed. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), "〇" is displayed as the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b, and if the lottery result is a loss. In some cases, the identification symbol 1600b is stopped with an "x" displayed as a display result (stop symbol) of the variable display. In this example, when the special symbol lottery result is a specific immediate short hit, the same "x" as when the special symbol lottery result is a loss is displayed as the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b. It is designed to stop in the displayed state. In this way, in this example, it is difficult to determine that an instantaneous short hit has occurred from the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b, and as a result, the transition control to the low probability time saving state C4 is performed. I keep what I do secret.

In addition, the low probability time saving state C4, which is transition controlled in the case of a specific immediate short hit, ends when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice, and the transition is controlled. This is to control the transition to a stochastic non-time saving state. In other words, when a specific immediate short hit occurs, it does not indicate that it will be a specific immediate short hit, it does not notify that it will enter the help mode S, and it does not notify that it is controlled to a low probability time saving state C. Not only that, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C4 only for a short period of time until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal". Even when a win occurs, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening/closing pattern 4 that is very similar to the normal time (non-time saving state) (see Figure 239), so the time saving state control is executed. Even if it is, it is substantially similar to the low probability non-time saving state, so it is difficult for the player to notice that it is being controlled to the low probability time saving state C4. In other words, in this example, the time-saving performance of the low-probability time-saving state C4 is a time-saving performance that closely resembles the game progress in the low-probability non-time-saving state. It is made difficult to distinguish between state C4 and the low probability non-time saving state. In addition, in this example, when controlling to the low probability time saving state C4, the time until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived is configured to be shorter than in the normal time (in the non-time saving state), By setting the time until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived as the same time as in the non-time saving state (for example, 119 seconds), depending on the time until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived, a low probability time saving state C4 can be achieved. It may be difficult to determine whether or not the control is being performed.

In addition, in the low probability time saving state C4, the control to make it easier to enter the game ball into the variable winning hole 2003 is not performed, and the variable winning hole 2003 is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern 4 that is very similar to the normal time (non-time saving state). The gate door 2521 is controlled to open and close, but as shown in the symbol determination table for immediate short hit in the non-time saving state and the symbol determination table for immediate short hit in the time saving state of FIGS. 239(C) and (D), In the time saving state, it is determined to be an immediate short hit which has a higher degree of advantage compared to the non-time saving state, and if it becomes an immediate short hit while controlling the low probability time saving state C4, it becomes an immediate short hit in the non time saving state. This is a state more advantageous than the normal state (non-time saving state). In this way, when controlling the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C4, which is more advantageous than the normal state (non-time-saving state), it is hidden that the transition is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4 or that it is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4. By doing so, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state C4 without being recognized by the player, and advantageous gaming profits such as instant short winning A that are not determined in the non-time-saving state are granted, surprising the player and improving gaming interest. You will be able to do so. In other words, in the case of a specific instantaneous short hit, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the control is set to the low-probability time-saving state C4 or that the control is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4. By controlling the transition to the probability time saving state C4 and ending the low probability time saving state C4 without noticing, when the variable prize opening door 2521 is opened, this opening will be a lottery of normal symbols in the normal lottery in the non-time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the result is a ``normal win'' or whether the lottery result of a normal symbol in a normal lottery in a time-saving state is a ``normal win.'' Therefore, for players who are not aware that they have been controlled to shift to the low probability time saving state C4, they may receive a jackpot that can only be won in the time saving state (in this example, jackpot A, jackpot B) or an immediate short win (in this example, an immediate short win). When winning A), the player can be surprised, and the game can be progressed by giving a sense of expectation that the game is actually controlled to the low probability time saving state C4.

In addition, in this example, after controlling the transition to the low probability time saving state C4, during the control of the low probability time saving state C4, the CPU of the peripheral control IC connects the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the variable prize winning port sensor. 2526 (any one of the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526 (for example, the variable winning opening sensor 2526) or Even if any combination (all or all sensors related to the second special symbol (second starting opening sensor 2401 and variable winning opening sensor 2526), etc.) is received, a predetermined percentage (starting opening winning command) is received. It may be executed whenever the lottery result is received, or it may be executed only when the lottery result is an immediate short win, or when the lottery result is an immediate short win, it is better than when the lottery result is not an immediate short win. A mini-character battle performance in which a mini-character Z fights an enemy character is executed in a specific performance area of the performance display device 1600 (the performance may be performed at a high rate).

Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the low probability time saving state C4 (in this example, the display result of the second special symbol is "immediate short hit A symbol" or "immediate short hit B"). 240 (b "C"), when deriving and displaying the display result of the second special symbol, displays the mode in which the mini character Z wins the big boss as an enemy character, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol stops, the production display device 1600 A relief confirmation image (in this example, "Victory! Entering help mode!") is displayed to notify that the "help mode S" will be entered ("D" in FIG. 240(b)). . On the other hand, in the low probability time saving state C4, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not an immediate short hit but a miss (in this example, when "miss" is derived and displayed as the display result of the second special symbol), that is, If it does not result in an immediate short hit, when the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, a state in which the mini character Z is defeated by the big boss as an enemy character is displayed, and an effect is displayed when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol stops. Notify the device 1600 that entry into "help mode S" has failed. In this way, when controlling the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C4, which executes almost the same control as the normal state (non-time-saving state), control is performed so that it is difficult for the player to notice the gaming state, and the normal state (non-time-saving state) When controlling the transition to low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3, which are controlled to be more advantageous than the state), the effect or decorative pattern is executed by the effect display device 1600 by actively notifying the player so that he/she can recognize it. It is possible to draw attention to the fluctuating display of .

Furthermore, in this example, when performing a mini-character battle effect, the enemy character is made to differ depending on the preliminary determination information included in the starting entrance winning command. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the type of the instant short win is "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". If the lowest advantage "Immediate short hit C" is decided, a medium boss will appear as an enemy character (Fig. 240 (a)), while when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "Immediate short hit" , if the type of instant short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit A", which is the most advantageous among "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C", the enemy A large boss, which is higher in rank than the middle boss, appears as a character (FIG. 240(b)). In this way, since the degree of advantage at the time of winning differs depending on the type of enemy character to compete with in the mini-character battle performance, it is possible to have expectations for the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of immediate short win depending on the type of enemy character. In addition, it is not limited to the type of enemy character that changes depending on the lottery result of special symbols or the type of immediate short hit, but it also depends on whether the game state is a non-time saving state (in this case, including a low probability non-time saving state C4) ), the type of enemy character may be different depending on whether it is in a time saving state, or the starting entrance winning command corresponds to the first starting opening sensor 3002 or the one corresponding to the second starting opening sensor 2401. The type of enemy character may be made to differ depending on whether the command is a starting opening winning command or a starting opening winning command corresponding to the variable winning opening sensor 2526.

In addition, in the above example, it is decided whether or not to perform the mini character battle effect depending on whether there is an immediate short hit or not, but the mini character battle effect is determined not only when there is an immediate short hit but also on whether there is a jackpot or not. It may be determined whether or not to perform a battle performance, or it may be determined whether or not to perform a mini character battle performance depending on whether or not there is a small win, or it may be an immediate short win. It may be determined whether or not to execute the mini character battle performance by combining one or more (or all of them may be used) of whether or not it is a big hit or not, and whether or not it is a small win. That is, as long as the mini-character battle effect is not executed in the case of a specific instant short win, the lottery type that causes the execution of the mini-character battle effect may be arbitrarily set. In this case, the type of enemy character that appears in the mini character battle performance is made different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit) to indicate the degree of advantage. Good too.

In addition, when controlling to the low probability time saving state C4, a time saving potential suggestion image (for example, "High boss appearance rate!!" etc.) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined rate over a predetermined period of time. However, during the period in which the time saving latency suggestion image is displayed, the time saving state C4 is controlled with a low probability, that is, if an immediate short winning occurs, there is a high probability that the winning will be advantageous to the player. The player may be made aware of this to increase expectations for an instant hit. Furthermore, even when the control is in a low-probability non-time-saving state, a time-saving potential suggestion image (for example, "Big boss appearance rate is high!!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined rate over a predetermined period of time. In this case, if the control is in the low-probability time-saving state C4, the time-saving potential suggestion image ( For example, "Big boss appearance rate is high!!" etc.) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time. Thereby, it is possible to change the monotonous game when the game is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state or the low probability time saving state C4, so that the player does not get bored with the game.

[Start of low probability time saving state B during variable display of the first special symbol (modified example)]
In the above, when the ball enters the first starting hole 2004, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 and the variable winning hole 2003, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed. However, the variable display of each special symbol is executed in the order in which the balls enter the first starting hole 2004, second starting hole 2005, and variable winning hole 2003, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second 2. The variable display of special symbols is sequentially executed. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed simultaneously. In such a configuration, when symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief number counter = 600), if the transition is made from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600 times (relief number counter = 600). During the fluctuating display of the first special symbol reaching the target, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol may start as the 601st symbol fluctuation, and even though the 601st symbol fluctuation has started, there is a low probability time saving state. There may be a feeling of discomfort that the transition to B has not been made. For this reason, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time, at the start of the symbol variation, the variation of the special symbol in a low probability state Count the number of times (relief number counter), and at the start of the symbol variation when the number of variations of the special symbol in that low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B It is preferable to move to Such a configuration will be explained below.

FIG. 241 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. In FIG. 241(A), a case where the second special symbol is not displayed while the first special symbol is fluctuating is explained, and in FIG. 241(B), the second special symbol is not displayed while the first special symbol is fluctuating. This section explains how to start displaying fluctuations in .

In this example, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is incremented at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B; Regarding the transition timing to state B, it is the start of symbol variation (fluctuation display of the first special symbol and second special symbol) when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). There is.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), when performing the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol during control in the low probability non-time saving state, the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are started. At the same time, the number of changes in special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state is counted. Then, when executing the symbol variation A1 of the first special symbol as the next symbol variation, at the start of the symbol variation A1 of the first special symbol, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief frequency counter) When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief number counter = 600), at the start of symbol variation A1 of the first special symbol, the low probability is changed from the low probability non-time saving state. Transitioning to time saving state B.

Further, as an external device, an external information device is provided above the pachinko machine 1 to convey game information to the player. Here, the external device displays the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot, but regarding the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief number counter is counted up when the special symbol begins to change. Similarly, the count is counted up when the special symbol starts changing, and the count is reset when the jackpot is triggered, just as the count of the relief counter is reset when the jackpot is triggered. For this reason, when controlling to a low probability state triggered by a jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is determined by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state ( This will match the count of the relief frequency counter). In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600 (relief number counter = 600). ), and it can be determined whether or not the transition to the low probability time saving state B is reached.

In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so the mainstream game is to enter the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005. Among these, the percentage of game balls B entering the first starting port 2004 is high, and games in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed are mainstream. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, lamp emission, and audio output, a symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) on the first special symbol side is executed. On the other hand, after transitioning to the low probability time saving state B, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time saving state, so the game in which the game ball B enters the variable winning hole 2003 is easier. The mainstream is a game in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the performance display device 1600, lamp emission, and audio output, a symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) on the second special symbol side is executed.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, before the symbol variation A1 in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), when the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are executed. At this time, a help mode L precursor performance is executed to count down the time until the start of the help mode L performance (for example, a count performance that notifies how many times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state). Then, at the start of symbol variation A1 in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the help mode indicating the start of help mode L (start of low probability time saving state B) After executing the L start effect and executing the help mode L start effect, execute the help mode L effect indicating that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). There is. In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the period until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed 700 times (total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state) (until reaching 1300 times), it is controlled to low probability time saving state B, and the period of controlling to such low probability time saving state B (fluctuating display of special symbols 700 times) is set to "Help mode L". ” is called.

Similarly, in the lamp emission and audio output, the first special symbol's symbol variations A to D are displayed before the symbol variation A1 in which the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). At the time of execution, a help mode L precursor effect is executed that counts down the time until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies you of the number of times a special symbol has changed in a low probability state). . Then, at the start of symbol variation A1 in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the help mode indicating the start of help mode L (start of low probability time saving state B) After executing the L start effect and executing the help mode L start effect, execute the help mode L effect indicating that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). There is.

In addition, the help mode L start effect is executed from the start of symbol variation A1 when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) until a predetermined time elapses. It is said that It is preferable that the predetermined time be set to the extent of the variation time in one symbol variation. However, as a modified example, after the start of the help mode L start performance, the timing at which the symbol fluctuation stops displaying (for example, the symbol fluctuation when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in a low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) The help mode L start effect may be switched to the help mode L effect at the timing when A1 is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 241(B), when performing the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol during control in the low probability non-time saving state, the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are started. At the same time, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state is counted. When the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is started while the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is being executed, the special symbol in the low probability state is Count the number of variations (relief number counter), and when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), at the start of symbol variation X of the second special symbol, The state is transitioning from a low probability non-time saving state to a low probability time saving state B.

As described above, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the second special symbol is displayed while the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is being executed. When the symbol variation X of the special symbol starts and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), while the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is being executed. Nevertheless, at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. In this way, when the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is started as the 600th symbol variation while the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is being executed, the 600th symbol variation has started. Nevertheless, a situation in which the player has not transitioned to the low probability time saving state B does not occur, and the game can be played without any discomfort. For example, after the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), after the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B When the symbol variation X is being executed, the first special symbol variation A1 is started as the 601st symbol variation. Regardless, a sense of discomfort will arise that the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B has not occurred.

In addition, the external device displays the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot, but the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device is determined by counting up the relief number counter when the special symbol starts changing. Similarly, the count is counted up when the special symbols start changing, and the count is reset using the jackpot as an opportunity to reset the count of the relief number counter. For this reason, when controlling to a low probability state triggered by a jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is determined by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state ( This will match the count of the relief count counter). In such a case, at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the special symbol displayed on the external device Since the number of changes is 600 and the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the low probability time saving state B, the game can be played without any discomfort.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, the start point of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), that is, the transition to the low probability time saving state B At this point, the help mode L start effect has started. Similarly, in the lamp emission and audio output, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the start point of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol, that is, the low probability time saving state B. At the time of transition, the help mode L start effect is started. In this way, while the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is being executed, the help mode L precursor production is being executed, but during the execution of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol, the help mode L precursor production is being performed. By suddenly switching from to the assistance mode L start effect, it can be made to appear as if the low probability time saving state B has suddenly been entered.

In this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the second special symbol is displayed while the symbol variation of the first special symbol is being executed. When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol, the low probability non- The state is transitioning from the time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. First, a specific example of performance in the case where there is no variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 241(A) shows a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuatingly while the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed. This shows a specific example of how this would work.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), when the first variation pattern command (command to notify the start of variation display of the first special symbol) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 In the upper area, the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is displayed in a variable manner. Similarly, when the second variable pattern command (command to notify the start of variable display of the second special symbol) is transmitted, the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 is executed in the lower area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the first decorative pattern 1600a1 and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in a variable manner until the variable time corresponding to the first variable pattern command and the second variable pattern command elapses, The display stops in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern. As the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second decorative symbol 1600a2, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. Further, in this example, it is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time. That is, it is possible to start the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 while the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is being executed, and the first decorative pattern 1600a1 can be started while the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is being executed. This makes it possible to start displaying fluctuations.

Furthermore, when the first variable pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a first identification pattern 1600b1 that is smaller and less conspicuous than the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is displayed at the upper right of the upper area of the effect display device 1600. A variable display of is executed. Similarly, when the second variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a second identification pattern smaller and less conspicuous than the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is displayed at the upper right of the lower area of the effect display device 1600. A variable display of 1600b2 is executed. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the first variation pattern command and the second variation pattern command elapses, 〇 and × are displayed in a variable manner as the first identification pattern 1600b1 and the second identification pattern 1600b2, 〇, Stop and display with either ×. The stop symbols of the first identification pattern 1600b1 and the second identification pattern 1600b2 are 〇 when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), and × when the lottery result is a loss. Ru. In addition, apart from this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the first identification symbol 1600b1 or the second identification symbol 1600b2 may be the lottery result. If the lottery result is a jackpot or small hit, an ○ will be displayed, and if the lottery result is an immediate short hit or a loss, an × will be displayed, and from the stop symbols of the first identification symbol 1600b1 and the second identification symbol 1600b2, an immediate short hit will be displayed. It may be made so that it is difficult to recognize that it is.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, a first special symbol pending display 1600c (state in which the first special symbol variable display is on standby), a second special symbol pending display 1600d (second special symbol (state in which variable display is on standby) is possible. Specifically, for the first special symbol reservation display 1600c, the number of reservations is displayed as a circle at the lower left of the effect display device 1600, and for the second special symbol reservation display 1600d, the number of reservations is displayed as ○. The amount is displayed as □ at the lower right corner of the effect display device 1600. Then, when starting the variable display of the special symbols that are being displayed pending, the pending displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are erased. However, the special symbols pending display 1600c and 1600d may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol that is being held pending until the variable display of that special symbol ends. .

Further, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a status display indicating the current gaming status is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and "normal" corresponding to the low probability non time saving state is displayed.

In addition, as a period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 500th variation display of the special symbol, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol Every time the fluctuating display of 1600a2 (second special symbol) is stopped (or may be started), the central part of the effect display device 1600 checks how many times the special symbol fluctuates in a low probability state. A count performance that notifies you is executed. In this example, it is the time when the special symbol fluctuation display stops for the 500th time, and a relief notice image A called "500 fluctuations" is displayed, which corresponds to the fact that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 times. . In this way, by executing the count effect, the player can play the game while looking forward to the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state approaching 600.

Specifically, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol stop changing, a symbol confirmation command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby changing the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second special symbol in the effect display device 1600. Although the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 has been stopped, when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times, when transmitting the symbol confirmation command, the main control board 1310 A rescue count command is sent from the peripheral control board 1510. This relief count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is sent until the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command has been received, and is used to store the number of times the relief count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500. By recognizing this and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501. In this way, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is It is possible to grasp how many times the variation has occurred, and based on the grasped number of variations, when the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 in the performance display device 1600 is stopped, the special symbol in the low probability state is It is possible to perform a count performance that notifies you of the number of fluctuations. In addition, the relief count command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but every time a symbol confirmation command is sent while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. A different command may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving the relief count command 1, and by receiving the relief count command 2, It is now possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol has changed in a low probability state, such as recognizing that the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501, and the same counting performance as above. becomes possible.

As shown in FIGS. 242(B) and (C), as a period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 597th variation display of the special symbol, the first decorative symbol Every time the fluctuating display of 1600a1 (first special symbol) or second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is stopped, a count effect is displayed that indicates how many times the special symbol has fluctuated in a low probability state. It is stopped and displayed with the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 and the second decorative pattern a2. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 597th, "597" is selected as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 on the condition that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss. A symbol combination for relief notice is selected and displayed as a stop symbol instead of a normal stop symbol. This symbol combination for relief notice can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect is executed (out of reach), the above-mentioned reach effect can be displayed. Once the out-of-reach symbols (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols of "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; out-of-reach symbols) are displayed as a result of variable display. Although it is displayed, it is then changed to a symbol combination for relief notice such as "597". In addition, from the 597th special symbol fluctuation display, in the central part of the effect display device 1600, the "help mode" that is executed when the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 600 times is about to start. A relief notice image B is displayed that indicates that "help is near!".

In addition, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, a special symbol that will execute a variable display in which the lottery result is determined to be a loss as a variable display of the 600th special symbol. If there is a hold, the first special symbol hold display 1600c is a special symbol hold display (Fig. 242 (C) to (G) (faces held at the bottom left) are displayed. As a result, during the period before the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600, the special symbol variation display corresponding to the special symbol pending display is executed, and the system enters "help mode". The player can know in advance that there will be a rush.

As shown in FIGS. 242(D) and (E), at the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol), the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is counted. When it is counted up and it is determined that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 598th, it is used as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, provided that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss. A symbol combination "598" for relief notice is selected and displayed in place of the normal stop symbols for failure.

As shown in FIGS. 242(F) and (G), at the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol), the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief frequency counter) in the low probability state is counted. When it is counted up and it is determined that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, it is used as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, provided that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss. The symbol combination "599" for relief notice is selected and displayed in place of the normal stop symbol for failure. Furthermore, when the 599th variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped, the central part of the production display device 1600 enters "help mode L" with the variable display of the next special symbol. A relief suggestion image "CHANCE!" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 242(H), at the start of the fluctuation display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief frequency counter) is counted up, If it is determined that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th, at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state. It has moved to state B. Then, at the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, the effect display device 1600 uses lamp light emission and audio output to The start performance is starting.

Specifically, with the start of the help mode L start effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image that says ``Enter help mode L!!'' to notify that ``help mode L'' will be entered. it's shown. In FIG. 242(H), the face holding displayed at the bottom left of FIGS. 242(C) to (G) is moved and displayed next to the text display "Entering Help Mode L!!" , clearly indicates that face hold was compatible with "Help Mode L". In addition, while the help mode L start effect is being executed, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the upper area of the effect display device 1600, The variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed is displayed in a small size at the lower right portion of the lower area of the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 242(I), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, regarding the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed, the lottery result of the first special pattern is incorrect. On the condition that the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is a stop pattern, a normal winning stop pattern "854" is displayed as the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the help mode L start effect, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L start effect is ended.

As shown in FIG. 242(J), after the help mode L start effect ends, the help mode L effect is started. Specifically, while the help mode L effect is being executed, the upper left part of the effect display device 1600 displays an “O A rescue image "In help mode L" is displayed. In addition, in the low probability time saving state B, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning hole 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 It displays an arrow bar that says ``Left hit!'' that instructs you to aim.

In addition, during the execution of the help mode L production, if neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is reserved, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol The variable display of 1600a2 (second special symbol) does not start, and the volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level or the light intensity adjustment bar indicating the currently set light intensity level does not start at the bottom of the effect display device 1600. it's shown. In addition, the volume adjustment bar allows you to change the memory display by operating the volume button to change the volume level, and the light intensity adjustment bar allows you to change the light intensity level by operating the light intensity button. It is possible to change the memory display accordingly. Further, while the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) are being displayed in a variable manner or in a non-variable manner, the volume level and the light amount level can be changed. In this way, after the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) has stopped, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not suspended, and the second If the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is not executed, the volume level and the light amount adjustment bar can be displayed to adjust the volume level and You can know that this is the period during which the light intensity level can be changed. In addition, the above-mentioned rescue image and arrow bar continue to be displayed even when the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is not executed. It is possible that the bar will continue to be displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the volume adjustment bar and light intensity adjustment bar mentioned above, and the player may accidentally leave the seat even though the player is in the low probability time saving state B. I try not to let it happen. In addition, regarding the display of the relief preview image B that says "Help is coming!" and the relief suggestion image that says "CHANCE!", the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second It is possible to continue displaying the variable display of special symbols (special symbols) when it is not being executed, and these images are also continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the volume adjustment bar and light intensity adjustment bar mentioned above. , the player is prevented from leaving his/her seat by mistake even though the low probability time saving state B is coming soon.

In addition, while the Help Mode L performance is being executed, until neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is suspended, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, various winning holes If there is no ball entered, a demonstration performance (demonstration) introducing the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the performance display device 1600. At the end of the demonstration performance, an "immersion prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescue image and arrow bar can continue to be displayed during the demonstration performance, and will continue to be displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the above-mentioned demonstration performance or "addiction prevention display". , the player is prevented from accidentally leaving his/her seat despite being in the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the relief preview image B that says "Help is on the way!" and the relief suggestion image that says "CHANCE!" can be displayed continuously during the demonstration performance, and these images can also be used during the demonstration performance or "Immersion." "Preventive display" continues to be displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) to prevent players from accidentally leaving their seats even though low probability time saving state B is approaching. . In addition, if a ball enters various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003 while the demo performance is being executed, only the demo performance will end at that point and the rescue image and arrow bar will continue to be displayed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 242(K), during the execution of the help mode L performance, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the 700th first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 When the variable display of (second special symbol) is executed (when the total number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), “Help mode L The relief end image "Help last!" is displayed to notify that the last first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) and second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) are displayed in a fluctuating manner during the execution of "Help Last!" it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 242(L), the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 ( After the variable display of the second special symbol) stops (after the variable display of the special symbol stops when the total number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 1300), the low probability time saving state B is ended and the low probability non- Since the transition to the time-saving state occurs, "Normal" is displayed at the upper left of the effect display device 1600 to notify that the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time-saving state that has passed through "help mode L." . Further, in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image "Help L: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be recognized from the outside that "Help mode L" has been executed once. . In addition, during the execution of the help mode L production, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the 700th variation of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) If the lottery result becomes a "jackpot" before the display is executed, the low probability time saving state B is ended and the game state corresponding to the type of "jackpot" is entered, so at that point This will end the Help Mode L performance.

Next, a specific example of performance in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 241(B) shows a time chart showing a change in the gaming state when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol, but in FIG. 243, the time chart is It shows a specific example of the performance when the game progresses. Note that FIGS. 243(A) to (F) are the same as FIGS. 242(A) to (F), and FIGS. 243(K) to (M) are the same as FIGS. 242(J) to (L). Since they are the same, the explanation is omitted and only the different parts are explained.

As shown in FIG. 243(F), during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, at the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol), the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief After counting up the count of the special symbol (number of times counter) and determining that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, as shown in FIG. 243(G), the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) When starting the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) during execution of the variable display, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief frequency counter) is counted up, It is determined that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, at the start of the fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol), the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state. It has moved to state B.

Also, while the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, at the time when the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is started, that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B. , the help mode L start effect is started using the effect display device 1600, lamp light emission, and audio output. In this example, the stop symbol of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is used to execute a count performance (help mode L precursor performance) that counts down until the start of the help mode L performance, but the count performance continues until the end. Even though it is not being executed, the help mode L start effect is suddenly started during the execution of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol), and the low probability time saving state B is started. It can be made to appear as if the transition occurred suddenly.

Specifically, with the start of the help mode L start effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image that says ``Enter help mode L!!'' to notify that ``help mode L'' will be entered. it's shown. In addition, while the help mode L start effect is being executed, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the upper area of the effect display device 1600, The variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed is displayed in a small size at the lower right portion of the lower area of the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 243(H), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, regarding the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed, the lottery result of the first special pattern is incorrect. On the condition that the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is a stop symbol, a normal stop symbol "599" is displayed as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 243(I), if the first special symbol is on hold after the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is stopped and displayed, a new first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is changed. Start displaying. In addition, as shown in FIG. 243(J), regarding the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed, the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is A normal missed stop symbol "219" is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a2. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the help mode L start effect, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L start effect is ended.

In addition, in this example, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is displayed in a variable manner, and in the lower area of the effect display device 1600, the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is displayed in a variable manner. , During the control of the low probability non-time saving state, since the mainstream is a game in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is executed in a visible manner in the effect display device 1600. However, the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 may be performed so as to be difficult or impossible to see. In such a case, while the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) is being executed, it is not known whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has started, and the variable display of the second special symbol is When the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 due to the start of , the help mode L start effect will suddenly start, as if suddenly shifting to the low probability time saving state B. I can show you.

In the above, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, at the time of starting the variable display of the second special symbol (the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B) , the help mode L start effect has started. However, during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is used to execute a count performance (help mode L precursor performance) that counts down until the start of the help mode L performance. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the help mode L start performance is started, the count performance will not be executed to the end. Therefore, for example, the effect display device 1600 may wait for the count effect to be executed to the end before starting the help mode L start effect. Such a configuration will be explained below.

FIG. 244 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed. In FIG. 241(B), a case is explained in which the help mode L start effect is started at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (at the time of transition to low probability time saving state B), but in FIG. , only the different parts are explained.

As shown in FIG. 244, when transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, a help mode L start effect is executed using the effect display device 1600, lamp emission and audio output. . Among these, in the effect display device 1600, the start point of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), that is, to the low probability time saving state B. At the time of transition, the help mode L start effect has not started, and after the stop display of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol, which was being executed at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol, the help mode L start effect is displayed. Mode L start effect has started. Here, before the symbol variation X of the second special symbol in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the first special symbol is changed as the 599th symbol variation. The symbol variation D has started, and when the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is executed, the countdown until the start of the help mode L effect is counted down (for example, how many times the special symbol changes in a low probability state? A help mode L precursor effect is being executed (a count effect to notify you if there is one). In this regard, the help mode L start effect is not started until the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the help mode L precursor effect is continuously executed. The countdown to the start does not end suddenly, and the game can be played without any discomfort. However, regarding the effect display device 1600, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, a cut-in image etc. is displayed while the help mode L precursor effect is being executed, and it is displayed that the transition to the low probability time saving state B has been made. You may make them notice it.

On the other hand, with lamp lighting and audio output, the start point of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), that is, the transition to the low probability time saving state B. At the time of transition, the assistance mode L start effect is started. That is, regarding lamp emission and audio output, the help mode L start effect is started prior to the effect display device 1600. In this way, the effect display device 1600 does not start the help mode L start effect at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, whereas the lamp light emission and audio output indicate that the transition to the low probability time saving state B is performed. At the time of transition, since the help mode L start effect has started, the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is 600 times (relief number counter = 600) while the first special symbol symbol variation D is being executed. Even if the state is reached, the user can be made aware that the state has shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

Next, a specific example of the effect when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed will be described with reference to FIG. 245. Although FIG. 244 shows a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed, FIG. 245 shows a specific example of the effect when the time chart progresses. ing. Note that FIGS. 243(A) to (F) are the same as FIGS. 242(A) to (F), and FIGS. 243(M) to (O) are the same as FIGS. 242(J) to (L). Since they are the same, the explanation is omitted and only the different parts are explained.

As shown in FIG. 245(F), during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, at the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol), the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief After counting up the count of the special symbol (number of times counter) and determining that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, as shown in FIG. 245(G), the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) When starting the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) during the execution of the variable display, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief frequency counter) is counted up, It is determined that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th. When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, at the start of the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol), the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state. It has moved to state B.

Although not shown, at the start of the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, help mode L is started using lamp emission and audio output. The performance has begun. On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 does not start the help mode L start effect at the time of starting the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 245(H), after the transition to the low probability time saving state B, regarding the fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed, the lottery result of the first special symbol is incorrect. On the condition that this is the case, a symbol combination "599" for relief notice is selected and set as the stop symbol of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, and is displayed as a stop symbol instead of the normal stop symbol for losing. Furthermore, when the 599th variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped, the central part of the production display device 1600 enters "help mode L" with the variable display of the next special symbol. A relief suggestion image "CHANCE!" is displayed. In this example, the stop symbol of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is used to execute a count effect (help mode L precursor effect) that counts down until the start of the help mode L effect. By delaying the start of the help mode L start performance, the count performance is executed to the end. In this way, until the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped and displayed for the 599th time, the help mode L start effect is not started and the count effect (help mode L precursor effect) is started. By continuing to execute the game, the countdown until the start of the help mode L performance does not end suddenly, and the game can be played without any discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 245(I), after the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped, the variable display of a new first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is started. However, after the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped, the effect display device 1600 is used to start the help mode L start effect. In addition, the effect display device 1600 executes the help mode L start effect until the variable display of the new first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, with the start of the help mode L start effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image that says ``Enter help mode L!!'' to notify that ``help mode L'' will be entered. it's shown. In addition, while the help mode L start effect is being executed, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the upper area of the effect display device 1600, The variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed is displayed in a small size at the lower right portion of the lower area of the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 245(J), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, regarding the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed, the lottery result of the second special pattern is incorrect. On the condition that the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is a stop symbol, a normal missed stop symbol "513" is displayed as the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 1600a2. As shown in FIG. 245(K), after the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) has been stopped, the variable display of the new second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is stopped. It has started.

As shown in FIG. 245(L), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, regarding the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed, the lottery result of the first special pattern is incorrect. On the condition that the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is a stop pattern, a normal winning stop pattern "854" is displayed as the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the help mode L start effect, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L start effect is ended.

As in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously, while the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the variation of the second special symbol is After the display starts, a second special symbol may be stopped and displayed before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, unlike this example, at the start of symbol variation, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief number counter). = 600), if the transition is made from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state will be 600 times (relief number counter = 600) Even though the second special symbol started to be displayed while the first special symbol was fluctuating and displayed, and the second special symbol was stopped and displayed (visually, the 600th symbol fluctuation was stopped and displayed). , the first special symbol whose relief count counter = 600 has not yet been stopped and displayed, and the user may feel strange that the state has not yet transitioned to the low probability time saving state B. However, in this example, at the start of symbol variation, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief number counter = 600 ) At the start of the symbol variation that reaches ), the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B, so even though the second special symbol as described above is stopped and displayed (visually the 600th symbol variation is stopped and displayed). There is no possibility that the user will feel uncomfortable that the state has not shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

In this example, the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is counted up at the start of variation of the special symbol, in the same way as the relief counter is counted up at the start of variation of the special symbol. In other words, at the start of a symbol variation in which the number of variations of the special symbol in a low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), 600 times is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, It is possible to determine that the state will transition to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, as another example, the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the external device may be counted up when the variation of the special symbol stops. In such a case, at the start of the symbol variation in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B, and when the symbol variation stops, 600 times will be displayed as the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, but since the transition to low probability time saving state B occurs before 600 times is displayed on the external device, the game There is no impression that the person has been put at a disadvantage. In addition, as described above, during the variable display of the first special symbol when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the variable display of the second special symbol is started. , if the second special symbol is stopped and displayed before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, at the time the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device is 600 times will be displayed. However, in this example, the player is at a disadvantage because the transition to the low probability time saving state B occurs at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is before the 600th display on the external device. I never get the impression that I have been exposed to something.

[Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match]
(About ID code)
In this embodiment, a game board 5 that allows a game area 5a to be viewed from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, and is attached to the upper front surface of a door frame base unit 100 with respect to the door frame 3. A production operation unit 300 (operation device) that is attached to the front of the door frame top unit 450 (decoration member), the plate decoration unit 250, and the plate base unit 210 and can be operated by the player is attached. As shown in FIG. 246, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and production operation unit 300 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall. It is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and performance operation unit 300 as a set in one group for each model series. In other words, when changing to a new model series, with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and door frame top unit 450 corresponding to the model series before the change, After removing the production operation unit 300, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and production operation unit 300 corresponding to a new model series are attached. By adopting such a configuration, when changing the model, if you want to renew not only the gameplay but also the appearance of the game machine, the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) can be suppressed, increasing efficiency. The gameplay and appearance of the gaming machine can be completely renewed.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 via the door frame top relay board. It is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. This is for relaying the connection between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. be. Thereby, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322, for example, via the operation unit relay board 332.

As shown in FIG. 247, the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the operation part relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300 have a unique code for identifying the model series. A unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world), is stored in advance. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten even with an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can extract and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332. Further, the RAM built into the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to ID codes attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 whose model series matches the game board 5. The ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300 corresponds to each of the ID codes.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 matches the ID code stored in the reference table with the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. and whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300 for a predetermined judgment period. Judging within. Here, if a door frame top unit 450 whose model series matches (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the game board 5. The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the top unit 450 matches, but on the other hand, the door frame top unit 450 whose model series does not match with the game board 5 (there is no regular relationship) If they are attached, their ID codes will never match. Similarly, if a performance operation unit 300 whose model series matches (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the performance operation unit 300 are attached to the game board 5. The ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the game board 300 matches, but on the other hand, the production operation unit 300 whose model series does not match (there is no regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5. If so, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300 will not match.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. Error notification pattern 1 (for example, display of "Please check the type of door frame top unit") is executed. In addition, if only the ID code of the production operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the production display device 1600 is used to display that the production operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is installed. Error notification pattern 2 (for example, display of "Please check the type of production operation unit") is executed. In addition, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 do not match for the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to confirm the model series. Error notification pattern 3 that notifies that a door frame top unit 450 that does not match and a production operation unit 300 whose model series do not match are installed (for example, "Please check the types of the door frame top unit and production operation unit. "Please do so" is displayed).

On the other hand, if the door frame top unit 450 or the production operation unit 300 is not attached to the door frame 3, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay. It is not possible to take out the ID code from the board 332 and refer to it. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 uses the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. , and whether the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300 match. When doing so, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the peripheral control board 1510 is not connected if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board 332 after a predetermined determination period. It is determined that the state is

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be confirmed (unobtained) with respect to the game board 5, an error message is sent using the effect display device 1600 to notify that the effect operation unit 300 is not attached. Medium notification pattern 4 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit") is executed. In addition, if only the ID code of the production operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (unobtained) for the game board 5, the production display device 1600 is used to notify that the production operation unit 300 is not installed. Execute notification pattern 5 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the production operation unit"). In addition, if both the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the production operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (unobtained) for the game board 5, the door frame An error notification pattern 6 (for example, display of "Please check the connection between the door frame top unit and the production operation unit") is executed to notify that the top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300 are not attached.

Here, regarding the game board 5, the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300 match. Regardless of whether the game board 5 is present or not, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light during the execution of normal performances (fluctuation performances and non-fluctuation performances). Similarly, regarding the game board 5, even if there is a part of the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 whose ID code cannot be confirmed, the normal performance (such as a fluctuating performance or a non-fluctuation performance) ), it is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5.

Further, regarding the door frame top unit 450, if the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, normally When executing the effects (effects that are changing or effects that are not changing), for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right It is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the decorative board 457, but if they do not match, the light emission of the door frame top unit 450 whose model series do not match (there is no regular relationship) The various LEDs mounted on the board are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. Furthermore, if the door frame top unit 450 is not installed and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 may be controlled to emit light. There is no.

Similarly, regarding the production operation unit 300, if the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300 match, the normal For example, to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322 via the operation unit relay board 332 when performing a performance (a performance that is changing or a performance that is not changing). On the other hand, if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 300 whose model series do not match (there is no regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light. The various LEDs are turned off. Further, when the effect operation unit 300 is not attached and the operation part relay board 332 cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light.

In addition, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is used as a member located around the game board 5. Light emission control is performed by the various mounted LEDs and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 300 in cooperation with each other. Thereby, an integrated light emitting effect can be performed using not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300. However, for parts of the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300 whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, it is not possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts that do not match. Because there is no light, it is not possible to participate in the light-emitting production. Similarly, for parts of the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300 that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes cannot be confirmed, the parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes cannot be confirmed are mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts whose ID codes cannot be confirmed. Since there is no light emission control for the various LEDs, it is not possible to participate in the light emission production.

In this example, the game board 5 can be attached to and removed from the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 can be installed in a predetermined main body frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the plate left decorative board 273 provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 via the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3, Plate right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top center decorative board 455, It is connected to a door frame top left decorative board 456 and a door frame top right decorative board 457. Thereby, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the door window 101a in the door frame 3 via the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. The plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, which are provided around the . The various LEDs mounted on the lower decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 can be controlled to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 247, the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 has a unique ID, which is special information attached with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the model series. The code is pre-stored. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten even with an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the interface board 635 and refer to it. Additionally, a RAM built into the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referencing the ID code attached to the interface board 635. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 with the same model series.

Then, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 checks whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The judgment was made within the judgment period. Here, if the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the same model series (in a regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table and the main body frame 4 If the ID code of the interface board 635 matches, but the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 where the model series does not match (there is no regular relationship), the game board 5 is stored in the reference table. The ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 never matches. If the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 do not match, the model series do not match (there is no regular relationship). However, since the game board 5 is attached, it is not possible to perform firing control to fire the game ball B from the ball firing device 540, and the game is stopped.

As mentioned above, when the predetermined execution conditions are satisfied, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the door frame top unit is used as a member located around the game board 5. The various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of 450 and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the production operation unit 300 work together to control the light emission. Light emission control can also be performed cooperatively for the various LEDs. Thereby, an integrated light emitting effect can be performed using not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300, but also the door frame 3.

(About the setting suggestion)
In this embodiment, while the patterns are changing or not changing, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. are used to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests the currently set setting value. The currently set setting value is stored in the RAM on the main control board 1310 side, and by sending a command related to the currently set setting value to the peripheral control board 1510 side at a predetermined timing (when the setting value change is completed, when the patterns start to change, etc.), the currently set setting value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In the setting suggestion performance, one of suggestion performances A to D is executed as a performance according to the currently set setting value. Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) is made to determine which of the suggestion effects A to D is to be executed. Suggestion effect A that suggests a setting value of 6 by obtaining ) is likely to be a high possibility, or suggestion effect D is to suggest that an odd setting value (1, 3, 5) is likely to be a high possibility. Determined according to random value X.

Here, if the currently set setting value is set value 1, the suggestion effect D will be performed with a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0:1:1:8 ) The effect is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested effect distribution table 1 determined by. In addition, if the currently set setting value is set value 2, the probability of suggesting effect C is high (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0:1:8:1) A performance is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested performance distribution table 2 determined by. In addition, if the currently set setting value is set value 3, there is a high probability that suggestion effect D will occur (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0:1:1:8) A performance is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested performance distribution table 3 determined by. In addition, if the currently set setting value is 4, suggestion effect B or suggestion effect C will be performed with a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0:5: The effect is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested effect distribution table 4 determined by 4:1). In addition, if the currently set setting value is set value 5, suggestion effect B or suggestion effect D will be performed with high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0:5: The effect is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested effect distribution table 5 determined by 1:4). In addition, when the currently set setting value is setting value 6, suggestion effects A to D include suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, which would not be decided if the setting value is 1 to 5. is determined with a predetermined probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 3:4:2:1). The effect is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggestion effect distribution table 6. will be held. In other words, suggestion effects A to D may be output regardless of the current setting value, so the setting value is not fixed, but when suggestion effect A is executed, the current setting value may be output. It is confirmed that the set value currently set is set value 6. In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed, the user can have expectations corresponding to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestion effect.

When executing the suggestion effect, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 and the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 use the effect data to emit light in a predetermined color for each type of suggestion effect. It controls the light emission of the various LEDs mounted, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 300, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. Specifically, suggestion effect A that suggests a setting value of 6 is lit in a rainbow lighting mode (rainbow color), and suggestion effect B suggests that a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6) is likely. , it flashes in red and suggests that even numbered setting values (setting values 2, 4, 6) are likely. As for suggestion effect C, it flashes in blue and indicates that odd numbered setting values (1, 3, 6) are likely. As suggestion effect D that suggests that 5) is highly likely, light emission is controlled so that it blinks in green.

As shown in FIGS. 248 and 249, various LEDs are mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs are mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and various LEDs are mounted on the light emitting board of the performance operation unit 300. The various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3 can be divided into a plurality of groups and the light emission can be controlled for each group, and each group can be caused to emit light in a predetermined color. is possible.

First, as described above in detail, the back front periphery decoration unit 3200 attached to the game board 5 is a back front periphery decoration unit formed in an annular shape along the periphery of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5. 3201, and a back front periphery decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the back front periphery decoration 3201 with light emission. The plurality of LEDs on the peripheral decoration board enable each of the parts divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction to be decorated with light emission independently. As shown in FIG. 248, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decorative board as a light emitting board of the game board 5 are mounted on the back front peripheral edge for illuminating the upper left part of the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201. LED1 is a plurality of LEDs mounted on a decorative board; LED2 is a plurality of LEDs mounted on a back-front peripheral decorative board for decorating the lower left corner with light; and LED2 is a back-front peripheral decorative board for decorating the lower right corner. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back and front peripheral decorative board for decorating the upper right corner are divided into LED3 and LED4, and each group of LEDs 1 to 4 emit light. It is possible to control the LEDs in the same group to emit light in the same color.

As shown in FIG. 249, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 are LED5 mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456, LED5 mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, etc. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame are divided into LED6, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame are divided into LED7.The LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group of LEDs5 to 7, and the LEDs in the same group are of the same color. It is now possible to control the light emission.

In addition, among the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 300, among the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 are LED8, and the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear decoration board 322. The plurality of LEDs are divided into LEDs 9, . . . , and the LEDs in the same group can be controlled to emit light in the same color by controlling the LEDs for each group of LEDs 8 to 9.

Moreover, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3 are LED10, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame of the left side unit 420 of the door frame are the LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame left side unit 420. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the frame are LED11, a left dish decorative board 273 provided on the back side of the dish left decorative lens 272, and a dish right decorative board provided on the back side of the dish right decorative lens 277. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side unit 430 are LED12, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 are LED13, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side unit 430 are the door frame right side upper decorative board. A plurality of LEDs mounted in 432 are divided into LEDs 14, and by controlling the LEDs to emit light for each group of LEDs 11 to 14, it is possible to control the LEDs in the same group to emit light in the same color.

In addition to the above-mentioned back and front periphery decorative substrates, the light-emitting substrates of the game board 5 include a variable winning opening decoration board (not shown) for illuminating the variable winning opening 2003, and a variable winning opening decoration substrate (not shown) for illuminating the first starting opening 2004. A first starting port decoration board (not shown) for decorating the second starting port 2005 and a second starting port decorative board (not shown) for decorating the second starting port 2005 with light emission are provided. In this example, among the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decoration board are LED 15, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first starting opening decoration board are LED 16. , the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second starting port decorative board are divided into LEDs 17, and by controlling the LEDs to emit light for each group of LEDs 15 to 17, it is possible to control the LEDs in the same group to emit light in the same color. It has become.

Figure 250 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect executed as an effect while the symbols are changing. Here, we will explain a case where, when the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5, and a light-emitting effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light pattern is executed as suggestive effect A, which suggests the set value 6, while the symbols are changing.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. A variable performance such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started on the performance display device 1600, and in conjunction with the display on the performance display device 1600, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 are activated. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the door frame 3 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (timing t0). Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, "effect ``Press the operation button!'') Executes a button operation promotion effect.

Then, at timing t1, the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) passes without the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. Then, LEDs 1 and 2 on the game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door. LED8 of frame 3 is "green", LED9 of door frame 3 and LED10 of door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 of door frame 3 are "yellow", LEDs 13-14 of door frame 3 are "white". , to emit light. In other words, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in different colors for each of the two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). An LED that emits "red" light is "purple", an LED that emits "purple" is "blue", an LED that emits "blue" is "green", and an LED that emits "green" An LED that emits "orange" is "orange", an LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", an LED that emits "yellow" is "white", an LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LEDs for each two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until timing t10 is reached. Such regular changes are repeated (for example, for 5 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 emit light in a short unit time. By controlling the LEDs to sequentially switch between multiple emitting colors, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light mode, creating an impactful light emitted light. Able to perform a performance. In addition, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emitting color in a short time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, seven colors appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs as the rainbow light emission mode, and each light emission color is regularly switched. However, the number of colors does not have to be seven, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

On the other hand, when executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode as a suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 on the door frame 3 and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 are not involved. Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, during the execution period of the suggestive effect A, the light emitting effect is continued in accordance with the variable pattern, regardless of the emitted light colors that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode.

In addition, during the execution period of the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode as the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and each of the plurality of display areas is different. A rainbow-like effect image displayed in display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-like effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) from red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white. →red" in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds). Note that the target for displaying the rainbow-like effect image may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, the background image, or the target may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, or the target may be a background image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The target may be an effect image displayed in the section, for example, an effect image of a character, an item, or the like.

In addition, as described above in detail, the back top and front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top and front decoration body 3310 that is rectangular in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and a rear top and front decoration body 3310 that is located behind the back top and front decoration body 3310. A back top front decorative board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310. There is. The back upper front decorative body 3310 is arranged so that the ranks of the seven rankings of sumo such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and the LEDs on the back upper front decorative board Accordingly, each of the seven rankings can be decorated with light emission independently. In this example, as a suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6, during the execution period of the light emission effect in which the light emission effect lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in a rainbow light emission mode in which they emit light in different colors. In such a rainbow light emitting display, the emitted light color for each of the seven rankings is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red." Such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds).

As explained above, when executing the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6 while the symbols are changing, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, but when executing suggestion effects B to D, LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved. and performs a light-emitting effect. In other words, when executing suggestion effect B that suggests that a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6) is likely, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect LEDs 8 to 9 on the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved to execute a flashing red light emission effect, suggesting that even number setting values (setting values 2, 4, and 6) are likely. When executing suggestion effect C, a light emission effect involving LEDs 1 to 14 that blinks in blue is executed, suggesting that an odd set value (1, 3, 5) is likely. When effect D is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly involved to execute a light emission effect that flashes in green.

Specifically, when executing suggestion performance B that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6), the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is activated by the player at timing t1. When a button is pressed or the effective period of the button (for example, 5 seconds) passes without any press operation on the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 4 on the door frame top unit 450 are activated. 7. Light up the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 so that they flash in red. Furthermore, when executing the suggestion effect C that suggests that the even-numbered setting values (setting values 2, 4, and 6) are highly likely, the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly caused to emit light in a "blue" blinking manner. Furthermore, when executing the suggestion effect D that suggests that the probability of an odd set value (1, 3, 5) is high, the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly caused to flash in "green". In other words, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 will flash in the same color for each group. to emit light.

(Regarding restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match)
In the above description, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match for the game board 5 when the power is turned on. If one or both of the ID codes of the display operation unit 300 and the display operation unit 300 do not match, at least a part of the light emission effects in the light emission colors corresponding to the suggestion effects A to D will be restricted when executing the suggestion effects. ing. Similarly, if either or both of the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300 are not connected to the door frame 3, when executing the suggestion production, the suggestion production corresponding to suggestion production A to D is performed. At least a part of the light emitting effect in the light emitting color is restricted.

In this example, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 can be controlled to emit light; If they do not match, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Similarly, if the ID code of the production operation unit 300 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 can be controlled to emit light; If not, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 8 to 9 are turned off. In other words, for parts of the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300 whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, it is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts that do not match. Instead, the LED is turned off while the symbol is changing or not changing.

FIG. 251 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a suggestion performance executed as a performance during symbol fluctuation when there is a component whose ID code does not match on the game board 5. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 among the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 does not match with the game board 5, and while the symbols are changing, the set value 6 A case will be described below in which it has been decided to execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode as a suggestive effect A that suggests . In addition, if the ID code of the production operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, or if the ID code of both the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5. Similar control is also performed during the execution period of the suggestive effect.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. A variable performance such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started on the performance display device 1600, and LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LED 10 on the door frame 3 are activated in conjunction with the display on the performance display device 1600. -14 are controlled to emit light (timing t0). At this time, for the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Become. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a display (for example, A button operation promotion performance is executed (“Press the performance operation button!”) (timing tA).

Then, when the button operation promotion effect is started at timing tA, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, Not only LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, but also LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5, and the game board 5 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are also turned off. In other words, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the performance operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. Thus, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are turned off.

Then, at timing t1, the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) passes without the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. Then, as a suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, although it is the timing to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the light emission that lights up in that rainbow light emission mode until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). There is no execution of the performance. Specifically, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the ID code is assigned to the game board 5. Not only LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID codes do not match, but also LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 whose ID codes match the game board 5. The LED will turn off. In other words, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the performance operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. As shown, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are turned off.

On the other hand, from timing t1 to timing t10, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300 are turned off. , the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in red. In other words, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, Instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and the lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode, the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved is to be lit in red.

As mentioned above, if there is no part with an ID code that does not match on the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, , to execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. On the other hand, if there is a component whose ID code does not match for the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, a rainbow light emission mode is emitted using the LEDs 1 to 14. The execution of the light emitting effect that lights up is suppressed. Here, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, it is not possible to control the light emission of the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450. When attempting to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, one of the emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emitting mode This results in an incomplete state in which parts are missing, and light is emitted in a manner in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established. Therefore, if there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the ID code for the game board 5 is By suppressing the execution of a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode including matching parts, it is possible to prevent light emission in a manner that does not establish the rainbow light emission mode, and to prevent the execution of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether the person is present or not.

In addition, as described above, if there is no part with the ID code that does not match on the game board 5 (all parts match), at timing t1 when executing the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, the change While the execution of the effect according to the variation pattern specified from the pattern command is stopped, if there is a component whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6 is executed. At timing tA, which is before timing t1 for executing , execution of the effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command is stopped, and LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, The LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 are kept in an extinguished state. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, It is possible to notify in advance that a light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emitting manner cannot be performed.

In addition, as described above, if there is no part with the ID code that does not match on the game board 5 (all parts match), the execution period of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6 (timing t1 to t10) ), the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 emit light in a manner that changes in some of the emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emitting mode, but there are parts whose ID codes do not match with the game board 5. In this case, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in red without changing the emitted light color. There is. Here, in the case where there are no parts whose ID codes do not match for the game board 5 (all parts match), there is a suggestion effect B that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6). When performing this, the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are made to flash in red. In other words, if there is a component whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode as the suggestive effect A, the suggestive effect B is used. A light-emitting effect that lights up in red similar to that is being performed. As a result, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is not executed, so although it is not possible to notify that the setting value is 6, By executing a light emitting effect that lights up in red using LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, it is possible to notify that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6), and it does not give any expectations. The situation can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, if there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion effect B, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6). ), instead of the light emitting effect that blinks in red, involving LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. , the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emitting effect in which they light up in red. In addition, if there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution period (timing At t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 participate in a light emission effect that flashes in blue. Instead, the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emitting effect in which they light up in blue. In addition, if there are no parts whose ID codes do not match for the game board 5 (all parts match), there is a suggestion effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of an odd set value (1, 3, 5). During the execution period of D (timings t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved. Instead of the light emitting effect that flashes in green, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in green.

In this example, if there is no part whose ID code does not match for the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 participate to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue to emit light according to the variable pattern, regardless of the emitted light colors that make up the rainbow light emitting mode. On the other hand, even if there are parts whose ID codes do not match with the game board 5, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 In this case, the LEDs do not turn off like LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the light emission performance continues according to the fluctuation pattern. That's what I do. As a result, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, although the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 will be activated according to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the light emitting effect according to the variation pattern, it is possible to maintain a situation where expectations are high for the light emitting effect according to the variation pattern.

Of the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, the multiple LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decorative board are divided into LED15, the multiple LEDs mounted on the first starting opening decorative board are divided into LED16, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the second starting opening decorative board are divided into LED17. The LED mounting surfaces of these decorative boards are coated with white solder resist (protective material) to increase the reflection efficiency. Therefore, even if multiple full-color LEDs are made to emit a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and produce vivid colors, and the variable winning opening 2003 can be decorated with LED15, the first starting opening 2004 with LED16, and the second starting opening 2005 with LED17, all of which can be decorated with brighter and more vivid (clear) illumination, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Additionally, LEDs 15-17 may be LEDs that emit only a single color (e.g., red). Even when such LEDs are used, LED 15 can be used to decorate the variable winning opening 2003, LED 16 can be used to decorate the first starting opening 2004, and LED 17 can be used to decorate the second starting opening 2005 with brighter and more vivid (clear) illumination, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this example, if there are parts whose ID codes do not match for the game board 5, the same as when there are no parts whose ID codes do not match for the game board 5 (all parts match), A rainbow mode in which the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas and each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6. The performance image is displayed. In other words, if there is a component whose ID code does not match for the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame, etc. While LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the effect display device 1600 does not perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. A presentation image of the mode is displayed. As a result, as long as one pays attention to the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (light emission from LEDs 1 to 14), it is not possible to determine whether or not the suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6 is being executed; By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the setting value 6 is suggested by the rainbow-like effect image.

In addition, in this example, if there are parts whose ID codes do not match for the game board 5, the same as when there are no parts whose ID codes do not match for the game board 5 (all parts match), During the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6, each of the seven ranking display bodies in the back top and front decoration body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode in which they emit light in different colors. In other words, if there is a component whose ID code does not match for the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame, etc. The LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas the back top and front decoration body 3310 , each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode in which each of the seven numbered display bodies emit light in a different color. As a result, as long as one pays attention to the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (light emission from LEDs 1 to 14), it is not possible to determine whether or not the suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6 is being executed; By paying attention to the back top and front decorations 3310 over the top of the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the setting value 6 is suggested by the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode.

In addition, in this example, if there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5, at a timing tA before the timing t1 at which the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6 is executed, from the fluctuation pattern command. The execution of the performance according to the specified fluctuation pattern is stopped, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are turned off. However, it is sufficient that the stage is at least before the timing t1 at which the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6 is executed. The LEDs 1 to 4 on the panel 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300 may be turned off. In such a configuration, from the time when the symbols start changing to when the suggestive effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit, etc. Even when controlling the light emission of LEDs 5 to 7 on the 450 and LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, such advance notice effects are no longer executed, and players' expectations for a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode are reduced. can be prevented from holding. Also, from the variable display of the symbol before the variable display of the symbol that will execute the suggestive effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300 The light may be turned off. In such a configuration, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the top of the door frame are used as a pre-reading effect to anticipate a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner before the fluctuating display of symbols that will execute the suggestive effect. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such pre-read effects are no longer executed, and the expectation of a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is reduced. It is possible to prevent people from embracing this.

In addition, in this example, if there is a component whose ID code does not match for the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, the LEDs 1 to 1 of the game board 5 4. LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are set to be off, but the execution period of suggestion performance A that suggests setting value 6 (timings t1 to t10) Even after the end of the process, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 may continue to be turned off. In such a configuration, after the completion of the suggestion effect, for example, when the fluctuation of the symbols stops and the symbol becomes a winning symbol, a light-emitting effect that lights up again in a rainbow luminous manner is executed, or after the symbol becomes a winning symbol. Even when performing a light emitting effect that lights up again in a rainbow light emitting mode during a winning game, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. By making this state, it is possible to collectively prevent the light emitting effects that are lit in the rainbow light emission mode from emitting light in a manner in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established.

Furthermore, in this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5; Even when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not connected, the same process as when there is a component with an inconsistent ID code on the game board 5 is performed. In other words, when the power is turned on, if the door frame top unit 450 or the production operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5, the same applies as if there are parts with inconsistent ID codes to the game board 5. , during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame. The execution of a light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode is suppressed.

Regarding the above, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including determining whether or not they are connected). Since it is not determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the game cannot be played after the power is turned on. When the door frame top unit 450 or the production operation unit 300 is removed from the board 5, the removal cannot be detected. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the LEDs of parts removed from the game board 5 will be turned off, but the LEDs of other parts will be subject to the execution of suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6. During the period (timings t1 to t10), the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is to be executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established. In other words, when the power is turned on, if the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5 (including the case where they are not connected), the setting value 6 is suggested. During the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A, the execution of the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is restricted, but after the power is turned on, the door frame top unit 450 In the case where the effect operation unit 300 is removed (including the case where it is not connected), the rainbow light emission mode is not established during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6. It will emit light. As a result, if the door frame top unit 450 or production operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including the case where it is not connected), the trace will be notified to the outside. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that a problem has occurred with respect to the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300.

In addition, after the power is turned on and the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5, parts whose ID code matches the game board 5 are connected to the removed parts. Even if a component with a matching ID code is connected, it cannot be detected that the component with the matching ID code is connected. Therefore, for the parts connected to the game board 5 whose ID codes match, the LEDs will be turned off, but for the LEDs of other parts, the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6 will be executed. During the period (timings t1 to t10), the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is to be executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established. On the other hand, after the power is turned on and the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5, parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5 are connected to the removed parts. In this case, it cannot be detected that a component whose ID code does not match is connected. Therefore, for parts connected to the game board 5 whose ID codes do not match, the LEDs will be turned off, but for the LEDs of other parts, suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6 will be executed. During the period (timings t1 to t10), the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is to be executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established. As a result, if the door frame top unit 450 or the production operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including the case where they are not connected), the game board 5 will be Regardless of whether a component with a matching ID code or a component with an unmatched ID code is connected, there will be no trace outside that the door frame top unit 450 or production operation unit 300 has been removed from the game board 5. It is possible to inform the outside that it is necessary to take measures to prevent problems with the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300 from occurring again.

In addition, in this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including determining whether or not they are connected). ) However, after the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and performance operation unit 300 is input to the game board 5, and the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and performance operation unit 300 is input to the game board 5. It may be determined whether the ID codes of the operation units 300 match (including determining whether or not they are connected). In addition, an operation switch for determining whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including determining whether or not they are connected) is installed in the pachinko machine. It is provided on the back side of the machine 1, and when the operation switch is operated after the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (if connected). ). According to such a configuration, when the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the removal can be performed by operating the operation switch afterwards. It is possible to detect that In other words, if the door frame top unit 450 or the production operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5 at the time of operating the operation switch, if there are parts with the ID code that do not match with the game board 5. Similarly, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion effect A that suggests setting value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300 , the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are suppressed from performing a light emission effect in which they are lit in a rainbow light emission mode.

In addition, in this example, when executing the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 3 on the door frame 3, Although the LEDs 10 to 14 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, such a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode may be performed in a direction other than the suggestive effect, for example, While the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it may be performed with a high expectation performance that suggests that there is a high probability of winning. Even in such a configuration, if there is no part with the ID code that does not match for the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period of the high expectation performance, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, While LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, If there are parts whose ID codes do not match, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is suppressed from being executed during the execution period of the high expectation level effect.

Further, in this example, when changing the model, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 can be changed, but other aspects may be used. For example, for the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100), not only the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300, but also other decorative units may be changed when changing the model. , an upper decoration unit located above the door window 101a provided in the door frame 3 (similar to the door frame top unit 450 of the above embodiment), a right decoration unit located to the right of the door window 101a, and a left side of the door window 101a. Even if at least four decorative units, such as the left decorative unit located at the front and the lower decorative unit located below the door window 101a (similar to the production operation unit 300 of the above embodiment), can be changed when changing the model, good. As a result, changes in the appearance of the game machine due to model changes can be made even greater, and the game can be given even more freshness to the players. In addition, by providing a plurality of LEDs in each of these four decorative units and setting an ID code for each, the matching/mismatching/non-installation determination can be made in the same manner as described above. It becomes possible to perform the same processing as described above regarding the light emission effect such as the rainbow light emission mode, and it is possible to achieve the same game effect as described above.

[Win/lose button effect when performing rainbow effect]
In this embodiment, a rainbow effect (a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner) is executed as a high-expectation effect that suggests that there is a high probability of winning while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Although it is not possible to determine whether or not it will be a win just by executing the rainbow effect, it is possible to determine whether or not it will be a win by operating a predetermined operation section during the execution of the rainbow effect. A player operation performance (button performance) that is possible is being performed.

In this example, as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute a rainbow performance as a high expectation performance during the fluctuation display of the symbol, and a rainbow performance at the time of a hit where a hit is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol, Although the rainbow effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the symbols, a rainbow effect at the time of a miss is set in which a miss is derived as a result of the fluctuating display of the symbol. In other words, when it is a win, it is possible to determine a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when the game is won, and when it is a loss, it is possible to determine a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when it is a loss. Then, when a miss occurs, by lowering the rate of determining the variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect when a miss occurs than the variation pattern that executes another effect when a miss occurs, the rainbow effect when a miss occurs is lower than the variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect when a miss occurs. The frequency of performance execution is reduced. As a result, when executing a rainbow effect, although it is not possible to determine whether it is a rainbow effect when it is a hit or a rainbow effect when it is a miss, there is a high percentage of execution of a rainbow effect when it is a win, and there is a high possibility that it will be a hit. It is starting to suggest that.

In addition, in this example, while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is possible to execute the effect that suggests the setting value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A, and the rainbow effect as a highly anticipated effect is the light emission that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. They are the same in terms of executing the performance. In other words, when executing the rainbow effect as a highly anticipated effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5 and the LEDs 5 to 4 on the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display on the effect display device 1600, similar to when the suggestion effect A is executed. 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing (a timing different from the execution timing of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6), the timing t1), LEDs 1 and 2 on the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 on the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 on the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 on the door frame 3 is "green", LED 9 on the door frame 3 and LED 10 on the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are "yellow", LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are "white". ”, to emit light. In other words, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in different colors for each of the two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). An LED that emits "red" light is "purple", an LED that emits "purple" is "blue", an LED that emits "blue" is "green", and an LED that emits "green" An LED that emits "orange" is "orange", an LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", an LED that emits "yellow" is "white", an LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LEDs for each two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until timing t10 is reached. Such regular changes are repeated (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 emit light in a short unit time. By controlling the LEDs to sequentially switch between multiple emitting colors, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light mode, creating an impactful light emitted light. Able to perform a performance. In addition, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emitting color in a short time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, seven colors appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs as the rainbow light emission mode, and each light emission color is regularly switched. However, the number of colors does not have to be seven, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-like effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-like effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) from red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white. →red" in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds). Note that the target for displaying the rainbow-like effect image may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, the background image, or the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 may be the target, or the target may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The target may be an effect image displayed in the section, for example, an effect image of a character, an item, or the like.

In this example, in order to further enhance the interest of the rainbow effect and further improve the game's interest, it is determined whether or not there will be a win when a predetermined operation section is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. A button effect that is possible is executed, and one of button effects A to C is executed. Here, cases in which a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C are executed will be described below.

(Rainbow effect with button effect A)
First, the dish unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. The LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 include LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs on the door frame 3. Regarding the LEDs 10 to 14, the light amount can be adjusted in stages by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of light intensity of the LED from 1 (lowest light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 upward, the larger the level becomes. , the light intensity of the LED increases, and as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward and the step becomes smaller, the light intensity of the LED decreases. In addition, regarding the LED of the light-emitting decoration, the amount of light can be adjusted both when the pattern is changing and when it is not changing.

In button effect A, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during execution of the rainbow effect, at least one of the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is activated. (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) It is possible to determine whether In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, and it is possible to know that there is a win. If the invoice effect at the time of a miss is being executed, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the light amount cannot be adjusted and it can be recognized that the invoice is a miss.

FIG. 252 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect A during execution of rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. A variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started on the effect display device 1600. Then, if a variation pattern at the time of a win that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a win is determined, or a variation pattern at the time of a loss that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a miss is determined, a variation display of the symbol is displayed. When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 8 on the performance operation unit 300 are activated. 9. Start a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and light up in the rainbow light emitting mode until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). continues.

Additionally, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that displays a display prompting an operation on the light intensity adjustment button 228 (for example, "Press the light intensity adjustment button!"). At the same time, a display explaining that it is a success when the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 and a failure when the light intensity cannot be adjusted (for example, ``If the light intensity can be adjusted, it is a success! If you can't adjust it, it's off!'').

When the variation pattern at the time of winning that executes the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Set to a possible light intensity adjustment period. During this light amount adjustment period, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode (game The light intensity of LEDs 1 to 4 on the board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 will change. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the light intensity can be adjusted, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed will be a hit, and whether or not it will be a hit. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228.

On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern at the time of failure that executes the rainbow effect when the effect is off has been determined, the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the effect is off. Set during the period when the light amount cannot be adjusted. During this period when the light amount cannot be adjusted, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least one of the LEDs of the light emitting decorative body provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, which constitutes the rainbow light emitting mode ( The light amounts of LEDs 1 to 4 on the panel 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 do not change. As a result, if the light intensity cannot be adjusted during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), it is possible to understand that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed will be out of order, and to judge whether or not it will be a hit. In order to know this, the user may be encouraged to actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228.

In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, The light intensity of LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 can be adjusted, whereas the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) , making it impossible to adjust the amount of light so that it always emits light at a constant amount. As a result, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), if the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning, the LED whose light amount remains unchanged (configuring the rainbow light emission mode) The light intensity of LEDs whose light intensity can be changed (LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode) changes relative to the LEDs that do not change the light intensity (LEDs that do not), but the light intensity does not change if the rainbow effect is being executed when the light is off. The light amount of an LED whose light amount can be changed (an LED that forms a rainbow light emitting form) changes relative to a certain LED (an LED that does not form a rainbow light emitting form). Therefore, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the light intensity has been adjusted, and the fluctuating display of the symbols during execution can be easily recognized. You can clearly see if it's a hit or not.

In addition, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the effect is off, the effect display device At 1600, a specific image is displayed that does not allow the user to recognize that the fluctuating display of symbols being executed is a win. Specifically, on the performance display device 1600, a display notifying that the symbol being executed is incorrect and the result is disappointing (for example, "Unfortunate!"), or when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. Sometimes, a display (for example, "You can now adjust the light amount!") is displayed to notify you that the state where the light amount could not be adjusted has been returned to the state where the light amount can be adjusted. As a result, even if it is not possible to recognize whether or not the light amount has been adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), the display will be displayed after the rainbow effect is executed. By using the specific image, it is possible to clearly understand that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is out of order.

In this example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), if a rainbow effect is executed at the time of a miss, the rainbow effect at the time of a miss is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect is finished. During this period, a variation pattern at the time of a miss is not determined for executing the rainbow effect when the player misses, and the rainbow effect is restricted from being performed again when the player misses. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed after the rainbow effect at the time of winning ends. Regarding the rainbow effect of time, there are no restrictions on its execution. As a result, in a short period of time such as a specific period, the rainbow effect will not repeat when it misses, and people will lose trust in the rainbow effect, which is performed as a highly anticipated effect that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning. You can now look forward to the next rainbow performance.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. However, if a rainbow effect is being performed when the screen is off, the system recognizes that the light intensity cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 even before the predetermined time has elapsed. At the time when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated (when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated), the rainbow effect when the light amount is off may be ended. As a result, after recognizing that the light intensity could not be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the rainbow effect does not continue, and the rainbow effect does not continue even though the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is off. The discomfort of being carried out can be alleviated.

In addition, in this example, a button operation promotion effect in which a display prompting an operation on the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "Press the light amount adjustment button!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation on the light amount adjustment button 228 may be performed while the operation on the light amount adjustment button 228 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). A button operation promotion effect that displays a prompting display (for example, "Press the light amount adjustment button!") may not be executed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), and for players who normally actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228, For players who do not normally actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228, the winning result (described later as a winning event) will be shown as a result of the fluctuating symbol display after the rainbow effect is executed. It may be a warning message or a warning message in case of a miss.) By drawing attention to whether or not it is displayed, you can thoroughly enjoy watching whether you hit or not.

In addition, in this example, if the light intensity cannot be adjusted even though the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the error occurs, after the execution of the rainbow effect when the error occurs. In the effect display device 1600, a specific image is displayed that does not make it possible to recognize that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a hit. ), when the volume control button 227 provided near the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the specific image may be displayed in the same way as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. As a result, even if the player accidentally operates the volume adjustment button 227 instead of the light amount adjustment button 228 during the limited execution period (timings t1 to t10), the player's intention to operate the light amount adjustment button 228 will be suppressed. It is possible to proceed with the performance while assuming that the light amount is present, and it is possible to produce the same performance effect as when operating the light amount adjustment button 228. In this case, if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated instead of the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED (game board 5 The light intensity of LEDs 1 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 will not change, but in such a case, the light intensity adjustment button 228 It is preferable to issue a special notification (for example, "That's not a light amount adjustment!") that is not performed when the button is operated, so as to prompt that the operation is an error.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A is executed as an effect while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A rainbow effect accompanied by effect A may be performed. In this case, depending on the status of the rainbow effect (whether the light intensity is adjusted or not) by button effect A, the player can decide whether some kind of gaming profit (probability change, time saving, etc.) will be awarded after the winning game in progress. All you have to do is make it recognized.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A is executed as an effect during the display of changing symbols due to starting winnings, but the button effect A is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if a situation where starting winnings do not occur for a long time continues, players will feel disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time passes without starting winnings, the symbol An example of this is to start a dummy effect that imitates the fluctuating display of , and to execute a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A within that effect. In this case, the rainbow effect is executed as a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A, and during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the light intensity is adjusted. The player may be made aware that he or she will not win as a result of the dummy effect.

(Rainbow effect with button effect B)
In button effect B, when the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow light emitting mode is selected from among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Whether to continue the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3). You can execute the performance and determine whether it is a hit or not. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the rainbow effect does not end and continues until a predetermined time elapses, On the other hand, if the rainbow effect is in progress at the time of a miss, when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is ended and the rainbow effect is recognized as a miss. can do.

FIG. 253 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. A variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started on the effect display device 1600. Then, if a variation pattern at the time of a win that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a win is determined, or a variation pattern at the time of a loss that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a miss is determined, a variation display of the symbol is displayed. When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 8 on the production operation unit 300 are activated. 9. Start a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode, and until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds), a light emitting effect in which the lights are lit in the rainbow light emitting mode. continues.

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that displays a display (for example, "Press the effect operation button!") that prompts an operation on the effect operation section 301. At the same time, a display is displayed explaining that it is a win when the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation section 301, and that it is a loss when the rainbow effect that is being executed when the effect operation section 301 is operated ends. (For example, "If the rainbow continues, you win! If the rainbow does not continue, you win!").

If the variation pattern at the time of winning that executes the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the door will not be activated. Among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs on the production operation unit 300) The rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 continues without ending. Thereby, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the rainbow effect that is being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the symbol that is being executed will be a hit. The player can be encouraged to actively operate the performance operation section 301 in order to know whether or not he or she will win.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern at the time of a miss that executes a rainbow effect when the result is missed is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the result is a miss. , among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the production operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) have been completed, and the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode change from emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode to not emitting light, or emitting light in a single color. I'm trying to switch to . As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), it is possible to know that when the rainbow effect that is being executed at the time of operation of the effect operation section 301 ends, the fluctuating display of the symbol that is being executed will be removed. It is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the performance operation section 301 in order to know whether the player can win or not.

In this example, during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 10 on the door frame 3. 14 participates in executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 respond to a fluctuating pattern, regardless of the emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emitting mode. A light-emitting effect is being performed. Then, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of a miss, when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 on the door frame top unit 450, which constitute the rainbow light emission mode) Regarding LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the rainbow light emission mode is switched from light emission to non-light emission or monochrome light emission. The LEDs that are not configured (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) continue to emit light in a predetermined manner by executing a light emitting effect according to a fluctuation pattern. As a result, when the effect operation section 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure, for example, all of the LEDs of the light-emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 are displayed. On the other hand, if you switch from emitting light in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-emitting light, all of the LEDs may turn off, giving a false impression that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Such misperceptions can be prevented by continuing to emit light in a predetermined manner by performing a light emitting effect according to a variation pattern for at least some of the LEDs of the light emitting decoration.

In this example, it is assumed that during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), by operating the effect operation section 301, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the rainbow effect in progress. In addition to the performance operation unit 301, a plurality of performance operation units that can be operated by the player may be provided, and all of them may be operated by the button performance B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the fun of button performance B due to erroneously operating anything other than the performance operation section 301 during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance. In addition, as the operation parts for multiple effects, for example, a light amount adjustment button 228 that allows the player to adjust the light amount by operating it, and a light amount adjustment button 228 that allows the player to adjust the volume by operating it. A volume control button 227 may also be included, and by operating these buttons, it may be possible to confirm whether or not to continue the rainbow effect being executed.

In addition, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A, if the light intensity cannot be adjusted despite operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, after executing the rainbow effect when the button effect is off, the effect display device 1600 In , a specific image is displayed that does not make it possible to recognize that the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed is a hit, but when the rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B is executed, similarly, the effect operation section 301 is operated to perform the rainbow effect. When the process is completed, a specific image may be displayed to prevent the user from recognizing that the variable display of the symbols being executed is a win. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 may display a message (for example, "Unfortunate!") to notify that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a failure and the result is disappointing. As a result, in the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), if the effect operation section 301 is operated near the end of the execution period, and it is not possible to recognize whether or not the rainbow effect has ended due to the operation of the effect operation section 301. Even so, it is possible to clearly understand that the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed is out of order by the specific image displayed after the rainbow effect is executed.

In addition, in this example, a button operation promotion effect in which a display prompting an operation on the effect operation section 301 (for example, "Press the effect operation button!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is not limited to this. Even though the effect on the effect operation section 301 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the operation on the effect operation section 301 is not performed. A button operation promotion performance that displays a prompting display (for example, "Press the performance operation button!") may not be executed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), and for players who normally actively operate the effect operation section 301, For players who do not normally actively operate the performance operation unit 301, the winning result (described later as a winning event) will be displayed as a result of fluctuating symbols after the rainbow performance is executed. It may be a warning message or a warning message in case of a miss.) is displayed, and the player can enjoy watching carefully whether or not he or she will win.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B is executed as an effect while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A rainbow effect accompanied by effect B may be performed. In this case, depending on the status of the rainbow effect by button effect B (whether it ends midway or not), the player will be aware of whether some kind of gaming profit (probability change, time saving, etc.) will be given after the winning game in progress. All you have to do is let it happen.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B is executed as an effect during the display of fluctuating symbols due to a starting prize winning, but the button effect B is not limited to this. A rainbow effect may also be performed. Specifically, if a situation where starting winnings do not occur for a long time continues, players will feel disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time passes without starting winnings, the symbol For example, a dummy effect imitating the fluctuating display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B is executed during the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect is executed as a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B, and during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is executed. The game may end so that the player is made aware that he or she will not win as a result of the dummy performance.

(Rainbow effect with button effect C)
First, the pan unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. As for the sounds output from various speakers (body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted in stages by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume levels output from various speakers from 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume) by operating the volume adjustment button 227 upward. As the level increases, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the level decreases by operating the volume control button 227 in a downward direction, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. In this example, the lowest level (1) has a volume of zero, and all of the performance sounds are inaudible. Furthermore, the volume of the sounds output from the various speakers can be adjusted both when the symbols are changing and when they are not changing.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C, the volume is forcibly set to the lowest level (1) regardless of the volume adjustment button 227 by the player, and with the start of the current rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is Any sound performance, including sound performance such as BGM corresponding to the game, is forcibly changed to an inaudible state that the player cannot recognize. The details will be described later, but in button effect C of this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated upward in such an inaudible state to increase the volume level, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is emitted. It is possible to determine whether or not the game will be a hit by performing an effect to determine whether or not the game changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. In this example, when the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, This allows you to know when you have won, but if the rainbow effect is in progress when you miss, even if you operate the volume control button 227, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect will not be heard. The inaudible state is maintained, thereby letting you know that it is off.

Further, in this example, in addition to the above, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume level, a specific sound (for example, beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, but button production C is also included. In the rainbow effect, whether or not an operation confirmation sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated is also used to determine whether or not there will be a win. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of a win is being executed, even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is not output from the various speakers, and this causes the win to occur. On the other hand, when the invo effect is being performed when the user is out of the game, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep beep) is output from various speakers, and this It is possible to know that the result is out of line.

In other words, in this example, when the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. However, in this case, in response to the operation of the volume control button 227, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as an operation confirmation sound is not output. On the other hand, when the rainbow effect is in progress, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect remains inaudible even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. In response to the operation of the volume control button 227, only a specific sound (for example, beep) that is an operation confirmation sound is output. The details of these performances will be explained below.

FIG. 254 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. A variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started on the effect display device 1600. Then, if a variation pattern at the time of a win that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a win is determined, or a variation pattern at the time of a loss that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a miss is determined, a variation display of the symbol is displayed. When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 8 on the production operation unit 300 are activated. 9. Start a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode, and until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds), a light emitting effect in which the lights are lit in the rainbow light emitting mode. continues.

Additionally, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that displays a display prompting an operation on the volume control button 227 (for example, "Press the volume control button!"). At the same time, when the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state by operating the volume control button 227, it is a success, and even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the rainbow effect A display explaining that you have won if the production sound such as BGM that corresponds to the production remains inaudible (does not change to an audible state) (for example, ``If it changes to an audible state, you win! If the state does not change, you are out!”).

If the variation pattern at the time of winning that executes the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the rainbow effect will be displayed. Performance sounds such as BGM corresponding to the performance are changed from an inaudible state to an audible state. In other words, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to check whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. Note that a specific sound (for example, beep beep) as an operation confirmation sound is not output when the volume control button 227 is operated. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated and the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, the execution is performed. The user can understand that the fluctuating display of the symbols inside will be a win, and can be encouraged to actively operate the volume control button 227 in order to know whether or not it will be a win.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern at the time of a miss that executes a rainbow effect when the result is off has been determined, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the result is a miss. , effect sounds such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect are maintained in an inaudible state (do not change to an audible state). In other words, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to check whether the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance remains inaudible (does not change to an audible state). Furthermore, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), by operating the volume control button 227, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained in an inaudible state (changes to an audible state). When a specific sound (for example, beep-pi-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound, you can know that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed will be out of order. It is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the volume control button 227.

As described above, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the rainbow effect is off, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect remains inaudible ( In addition to outputting a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, if no sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10), it is not possible to confirm whether or not the operation has been accepted. However, such confirmation can be appropriately performed by outputting a specific sound (for example, beep beep) as the operation confirmation sound.

In this example, the rainbow effect is ended when a predetermined time elapses, regardless of whether or not the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. However, if a rainbow effect is being performed when the game is off, even before the predetermined time has elapsed, you can operate the volume control button 227 to turn on BGM, etc. that corresponds to the rainbow effect. The rainbow effect may be ended when the user recognizes that the sound remains inaudible (does not change to audible state) (when the volume control button 227 is operated). . As a result, after operating the volume control button 227 and recognizing that the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance will remain inaudible (do not change to an audible state), the rainbow performance will continue. Therefore, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort caused by the rainbow effect being executed even though the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is out of order.

In this example, as button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect, whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. When the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow production does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state, a specific sound (for example, beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. However, the operation is not limited to this, and the operation confirmation is performed when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated without executing the effect to determine whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. It may be configured such that only the effect of whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, beep beep) is executed. With such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep beep) is not output as an operation confirmation sound, and the win is confirmed. On the other hand, if the invo effect at the time of a miss is in progress, a specific sound (for example, beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. , it is possible to understand that it is out of place. In addition to this, to control whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, beep beep) as an operation confirmation sound, not only the volume adjustment button 227 is used, but also multiple operation parts including the volume adjustment button 227 ( It may also be configured to use the effect operation section 301, light amount adjustment button 228, and volume adjustment button 227). In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, no matter how many operation parts (the effect operation part 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) are operated, the operation confirmation is not performed. A specific sound (for example, beep beep) is not output as a sound, and it is possible to know that the hit has been won. However, when the invo effect is in progress at the time of a miss, multiple operation parts (beep beep) are not output. When any one of the operation unit 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, so that it is possible to understand that the operation is off. .

In the above configuration, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, no matter which of the plurality of operation parts (the effect operation part 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, various I am trying not to output a specific sound (for example beep beep) from the speaker. Similarly, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure, specific sounds are output from various speakers among the plurality of operation units (the effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227). With the exception of the different operation sections, specific sounds (for example, beeps) are not output from the various speakers even if any of them is operated. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, when each of the plurality of operation sections (the effect operation section 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a display corresponding to the operation (for example, "button "I operated it"). As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when any of the multiple operation units (effect operation unit 301, light intensity adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated, no sound is output. If not, it will not be possible to confirm whether the operation has been accepted, but such confirmation can be made appropriately by displaying a display corresponding to the operation.

In addition, in this example, a button operation promotion effect in which a display prompting an operation on the volume control button 227 (for example, "Press the volume control button!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation on the volume adjustment button 227 may be performed while the operation on the volume adjustment button 227 is enabled on the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. A button operation promotion effect that displays a prompting display (for example, "Press the volume control button!") may not be executed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), and for players who normally actively operate the volume control button 227, For players who do not normally actively operate the volume control button 227, the winning result (described later) will be shown as a result of the fluctuating symbol display after the rainbow effect is executed. It may be a warning message or a warning message in case of a miss.) is displayed, and the player can enjoy watching carefully whether or not he or she will win.

In addition, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A, if the light intensity cannot be adjusted despite operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, after executing the rainbow effect when the button effect is off, the effect display device 1600 In , a specific image is displayed that does not make it possible to recognize that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a hit, but similarly when the rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C is executed, even though the volume control button 227 is operated. If the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state, after the rainbow effect is executed at the time of a miss, the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed will become a win. A specific image that is not recognized may be displayed. Specifically, on the performance display device 1600, a display notifying that the symbol being executed is incorrect and the result is disappointing (for example, "Unfortunate!"), or when the volume control button 227 is operated. Sometimes, a display may be performed to notify that the state where the volume could not be adjusted has been returned to the state where the volume can be adjusted (for example, "You can now adjust the volume!"). As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the volume control button 227 is operated, it is possible to determine whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. Even if the rainbow effect cannot be recognized, it can be clearly understood from the specific image displayed after the rainbow effect is executed that the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed is out of order.

In the above configuration, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the rainbow effect is missed, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from inaudible to audible even though the volume control button 227 is operated. If the state does not change, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of a miss, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not make it possible to recognize that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a win. In addition, when the light amount adjustment button 228 provided near the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when it is off, the volume adjustment button 227 is also operated. A specific image may be displayed as in the case. As a result, even if the player accidentally operates the light intensity adjustment button 228 instead of the volume adjustment button 227 during the limited execution period (timings t1 to t10), the player's intention to operate the volume adjustment button 227 will be confirmed. It is possible to proceed with the performance while assuming that the volume control button 227 exists, and it is possible to produce the same performance effect as when operating the volume control button 227. In this case, if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated instead of the volume adjustment button 227 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect will be There is no change from an inaudible state to an audible state, but in such a case, a special notification (for example, "That's not a volume adjustment!") that is not performed when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated is executed. It is preferable to prompt the user to confirm that the operation is an error.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C is executed as an effect while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A rainbow effect accompanied by effect C may be performed. In this case, the status of the audio output by button effect C (whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, or a specific sound (e.g. beep beep) as an operation confirmation sound) The player may be made to recognize whether some kind of gaming profit (probability fluctuation, time saving, etc.) will be awarded after the winning game is executed, depending on whether the winning game is output (or not).

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C is executed as an effect during the display of changing symbols due to starting winnings, but this is not limited to this, and button effect C is performed as an effect without accompanying starting winnings. It is also possible to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if a situation where starting winnings do not occur for a long time continues, players will feel disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time has passed without starting winnings, the symbol An example of this is to start a dummy effect that imitates the fluctuating display of , and to execute a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C within that effect. In this case, the rainbow effect is executed as a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C, and during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, even though the volume control button 227 is operated, the rainbow effect is It is possible to prevent the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the performance from changing from an inaudible state to an audible state, or to output a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as an operation confirmation sound when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. The player may be made aware that he or she will not win as a result of the dummy presentation.

Furthermore, in the above, the rainbow effect with button effect A, the rainbow effect with button effect B, and the rainbow effect with button effect C are each executed as individual effects, but a rainbow effect that combines these button effects is executed. You can do it like this. For example, a rainbow effect with a composite button effect D that has elements of button effects A and B, a rainbow effect with a composite button effect E that has elements of button effects A and C, button effects B and a button effect. A rainbow effect accompanied by a composite button effect F including elements of button effect C, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a complex button effect G including elements of button effect A, button effect B, and button effect C may be made executable. To explain more specifically, for example, in a rainbow effect accompanied by a composite button effect G, the light intensity is adjusted depending on the object operated by the player among the plurality of operation sections (light intensity adjustment button 228, effect operation section 301, volume adjustment button 227). Effects on whether or not to change (element of button effect A using the light amount adjustment button 228), effect on whether to continue the rainbow effect (element of button effect B using the effect operation section 301), BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect The effect changes whether or not the effect sound changes from an inaudible state to an audible state (an element of button effect C using the volume adjustment button 227). The process ends when one of the sections (light amount adjustment button 228, presentation operation section 301, volume adjustment button 227) is operated, and the result of the presentation corresponding to the operation is derived. The other composite button performances are those in which some performance elements are missing from the composite button performance G, and the objects that the player can operate are more limited than in the composite button performance G. In other words, only when some of the multiple operating units (light amount adjustment button 228, production operating unit 301, volume adjustment button 227) are operated, the result of the production corresponding to that operation is derived. becomes. In such a composite button effect, the player is given room to choose which button effect to perform for the rainbow effect (which button effect is used to advance the rainbow effect), so the player can freely choose which button effect to perform. You can now select the progress mode of the rainbow effect. Therefore, it is possible not only to obtain the same effect as the various button effects described above, but also to further enhance the interest of the rainbow effect.

(Specific warning message after button production)
As described above in detail, in button performance B among button performances A to C, when the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow performance, the buttons provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 are pressed. Among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorative body, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, LED 10 on the door frame 3) -14) It is possible to execute the effect to determine whether or not to continue the rainbow effect, and to determine whether or not it will be a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the rainbow effect does not end and continues until a predetermined time elapses, On the other hand, if the rainbow effect is in progress at the time of a miss, when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is ended and the rainbow effect is recognized as a miss. can do.

FIG. 255 is a timing chart showing an example when the effect operation section 301 is not operated in button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. In the above, if the variation pattern at the time of winning that executes the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the display operation While the rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 continues without ending, even when the effect operation section 301 is not operated, the rainbow effect at the time of a win is The rainbow effect is ended after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) has elapsed. In addition, if a variation pattern at the time of a miss that executes a rainbow effect when the result is missed is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the result is a miss. , among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the production operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14), when you want to operate the effect operation section 301, the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10) ) has elapsed before the rainbow effect ends. In other words, if the effect operation section 301 is not operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow effect will be executed after waiting for the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10) to elapse. Therefore, at the end of the rainbow effect, it is not possible to recognize whether the rainbow effect was a hit or a miss.

In this regard, in this example, the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the user misses the game without operating the effect operation section 301 during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the user misses the performance. After that, the effect display device 1600 notifies you that the rainbow effect that was being executed is a rainbow effect when you miss, and also displays a message to alert you when you miss that corresponds to the rainbow effect when you miss (for example, ``This rainbow is fake, so don't complain to the store clerk.''). In this way, without operating the effect operation unit 301, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of a miss has elapsed, it is possible to confirm that the rainbow effect that was being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of a miss. By notifying the user, there is no chance of misunderstanding that it is a rainbow effect at the time of winning. In addition, since the rainbow effect is performed as a highly anticipated effect that indicates a high probability of winning, simply notifying players that it is a rainbow effect when they miss will cause dissatisfaction among players. However, by notifying a warning message in the event of a loss, it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from being directed toward the outside (the hall clerk).

As described above, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect that was being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the rainbow effect is lost. In addition to notifying you that the rainbow effect is a rainbow effect, a message is displayed to alert you when the rainbow effect is off (for example, ``This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the store staff.'') However, such a warning message in the event of a failure is composed of fewer colors than the number of colors (seven colors in this example) that make up the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs, the desire to play is increased by the number of colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode, but after the execution of the rainbow effect when the miss occurs, the rainbow light emission mode is configured. By displaying the number of colors smaller than the number of colors (in this example, seven colors), the increased desire to play can be reduced, and the display of a warning message etc. in case of a mistake can be effectively notified. be able to. Note that during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-like effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. After the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, the rainbow effect image is erased.

In addition, in this example, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect that was being executed is canceled on the effect display device 1600. In addition to notifying you that it is a rainbow effect at the time, it also displays a message to alert you when the rainbow effect is off (for example, ``This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the store staff.''). However, when the performance operation section 301 is operated while the warning message, etc. when the game is off is being displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message, etc. when the game is off. As a result, the player's desire to play will continue to decrease while a warning message is being displayed when a player loses, but by operating the production operation section 301 according to the player's will, such a situation can be prevented. The state can be terminated. In addition, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while a message calling attention to the case of a failure is being displayed, the display of the message calling attention to the case of a failure is erased, but if the effect operation unit 301 is operated. When this occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display object (a display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation section 301) on the front side of the display such as a message calling attention to the case of a failure, and a message calling attention to the case of a failure is displayed on the front side. By hiding at least a part of the display such as the above, it may be configured such that the display such as the warning message in the event of a miss is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Even with such a configuration, by operating the production operation unit 301 according to the player's will, the display such as a warning message when a player misses is made difficult or impossible for the player to see, which reduces the player's desire to play. You can end the state you are in.

On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning has elapsed, executes a display (``This rainbow is a hit!'') to notify that the fluctuating display of symbols being executed will be a hit. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a warning message corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of a win is displayed to prevent people from getting too addicted to the game (for example, ``This rainbow is a win, so don't get addicted to it.'') ). As a result, the rainbow effect is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high probability of winning, and by notifying the player that the rainbow effect is a rainbow effect at the time of winning, This may result in a situation where the desire to play is excessively increased, but after the rainbow effect is executed at the time of winning, the winning pattern may be displayed after the display notifying that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a winning result. By notifying the player with a warning message at the time, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

As described above, after the rainbow effect is executed when the player misses, the effect display device 1600 displays a message to alert the user when the user misses, whereas after the rainbow effect is executed when the player wins, The effect display device 1600 executes a display that notifies you of a warning message in the event of a win. However, immediately after the rainbow effect when a miss is executed, a message is displayed to alert you when the miss occurs, whereas after the rainbow effect when a win is executed, the display of the symbol being executed is After executing a display notifying that the fluctuating display is a hit, a display notifying a warning message in the event of a win is executed. As a result, if a display alerting you to the winning effect is displayed immediately after the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, you will not be able to enjoy the lingering feeling that the rainbow effect was a rainbow effect at the time of winning. , After a predetermined period of time has elapsed (after executing a display notifying that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a hit), by executing a display notifying a warning message at the time of a hit, such a situation can be prevented. It is possible to prevent interference with the enjoyment of the aftertaste.

In addition, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the alert message, etc. at the time of winning is being displayed, a predetermined display object is displayed on the effect display device 1600 on the front side of the display of the alert message, etc. at the time of winning. (a display that corresponds to the operation of the production operation unit 301), and by hiding at least a part of the display such as the warning message at the time of winning, the display of the warning message, etc. at the time of winning is made clear to the player. It may be configured to be difficult or impossible to see. With such a configuration, the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively increased while a warning message, etc. is being displayed in the event of a win is terminated, but the player's desire to control the effect operation section 301 is terminated. By operating the player, it is possible to make the display of a warning message or the like at the time of a win difficult or impossible for the player to see, so that such a state does not continue for too long.

In addition, in this example, a case has been described in which button effect B is executed during execution of a rainbow effect, but similarly when button effect A or button effect C is executed, the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timing t1 ~ t10), after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 responds to the rainbow effect at the time of failure. It may also be configured to display a warning message in the event of a disconnection.

In addition, in this example, regardless of whether or not the effect operation section 301 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning After the period has passed, a display is displayed to notify that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a hit, and then a display is executed to notify a warning message at the time of a win corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of a win. However, it is preferable that the execution period of the display notifying the attention-calling message at the time of a miss is longer than the execution period of the display notifying the attention-calling message at the time of the hit. As a result, without operating the production operation unit 301, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow production at the time of a miss has elapsed, by notifying a warning message at the time of a miss, the rainbow production that was being performed Although it is possible to recognize that the effect is a rainbow effect when the effect is off, such recognition can be ensured by lengthening the execution period of the display notifying the alert message when the effect is off. In addition, the execution period of the display that notifies you of a warning message in the event of a hit, and the execution period of the display that notifies you of a warning message in the event of a miss, is the execution period of the rainbow effect that is executed before that (timing t1 to t10). It is preferable to configure it so that it is shorter than . As a result, the motivation to play will continue to decrease while the warning message when a hit or miss is displayed, but the period during which these warning messages are displayed will be shortened. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a state in which the desire to play is excessively reduced from continuing.

[Mock rainbow performance]
There are many effects performed during the display of fluctuating symbols (such as the rainbow effect mentioned above) that players rarely encounter or experience. There were times when the operation of the system decreased. Therefore, in this embodiment, a "performance introduction period" is generated during a standby state in which symbols are displayed non-variably, as a specific period during which the player can recognize such a production. During the production introduction period of this embodiment, in addition to introducing the model such as the specs of the pachinko machine 1, a rainbow light emitting mode that imitates the rainbow production at the time of winning is displayed even though the symbols are not changing. A simulated rainbow effect that lights up is executed. This performance introduction period starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the fluctuating display of the symbols ends, and a mock rainbow performance is performed at a predetermined time within that period. That's what I do.

In this example, while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is possible to perform the effect that suggests the setting value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A, and the rainbow effect or simulated rainbow effect at the time of a win is a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. They are the same in that they execute In other words, when executing the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5 and the LED 5 on the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display on the effect display device 1600, similarly to when the suggestion effect A is executed. ~7. A light emitting effect is performed in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the game starts. LEDs 1 and 2 of the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame 3. LED8 is "green", LED9 of door frame 3 and LED10 of door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 of door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13-14 of door frame 3 are "white". I try to let them do it. In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. "Red", LEDs 3 and 4 on the game board 5 are "Purple", LEDs 5 and 6 on the door frame top unit 450 are "Blue", LED 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 on the door frame 3 are "Green", and the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange", the LEDs 11 and 12 in the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and the LEDs 13 and 14 in the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white". In other words, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in different colors for each of the two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , an LED that emits "red" light is "purple", an LED that emits "purple" light is "blue", an LED that emits "blue" light is "green", and an LED that emits "green" light. An LED that emits "orange" is "orange", an LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", an LED that emits "yellow" is "white", an LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LEDs for each two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until timing t10 is reached. Such regular changes are repeated (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 emit light in a short unit time. By controlling the LEDs to sequentially switch between multiple emitting colors, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light mode, creating an impactful light emitted light. Able to perform a performance. In addition, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emitting color in a short time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, seven colors appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs as the rainbow light emission mode, and each light emission color is regularly switched. However, the number of colors does not have to be seven, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be different between when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed and when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when a rainbow effect at the time of a win is executed, the symbols are displayed in parallel, but when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, the symbols may not be displayed in parallel. Thereby, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, there is no possibility of misunderstanding that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning. Note that the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, a display such as "simulating" may be executed.

In addition, the rainbow effect and simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning are performed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. Although they are the same in that they execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, it is preferable to provide a control program for a different effect rather than a control program for the same effect, and to execute these control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program for either one can be executed normally, and the error occurs. It is possible to minimize the occurrence of non-execution of the performance at the time.

In this way, by executing a simulated rainbow effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting manner that imitates the rainbow effect that occurs when the player wins, even during the standby state where the symbols are displayed non-changingly, the player rarely encounters To enable a player to experience a rainbow performance that cannot be experienced during a standby state in which symbols are not fluctuating, and to make the player aware that a rainbow performance at the time of winning can be executed while symbols are fluctuating. I can do it.

(Regarding the display of a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" after the mock rainbow performance ends)
In addition, when a mock rainbow effect is performed during the introduction period as described above, the player's desire to play may be excessively increased by going beyond the introduction of the effect, such as "Let's play until we encounter that effect." There is a risk that players will become "absorbed" in the game. Therefore, in this example, in order to prevent the simulated rainbow performance from causing "absorption" in the game, the following special processing is performed.

FIG. 256 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the immersion prevention display is executed after the simulated rainbow effect is executed. In this example, a rainbow effect at the time of a hit is executed as a hit confirmation effect during the fluctuating display of symbols, but as a rainbow effect at the time of a win, any of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of a win is executed. or are running. Also, during the execution of the performance introduction period during which symbols are displayed non-variably, a simulated rainbow performance is executed, and as the simulated rainbow performance, any one of the simulated rainbow performances A to C is executed. Then, for each of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning and each of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, It is the same in that it executes a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner using LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but the back and front decorations 3310 are moved from the initial position to the appearance position. They are different in terms of whether or not they are operated and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies on the back top and front decoration bodies 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode in which each of the seven numbered display bodies emit light in a different light emission color. As described above in detail, the back top front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 which is rectangular in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and a back top front decoration body 3310 located behind the back top front decoration body 3310. A back top front decorative board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the back top and front decorations 3310 are moved from the initial position to the appearance position, making it possible for the back top and front decorations 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. .

Specifically, in the rainbow effect A at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the back and front decorations 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position, and The upper and lower back decorations 3310 are kept in the same position, and each of the seven numbered indicators is used to prevent them from lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. In addition, in the rainbow performance B and the simulated rainbow performance B at the time of winning, the back top front decoration body 3310 is assumed to move from the initial position to the appearance position during the rainbow performance execution period (timing t1 to t10), and the back top front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. Regarding the body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. In addition, in the rainbow effect C and the simulated rainbow effect C at the time of winning, the back and front decorative bodies 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). The upper and lower back decorations 3310 are illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting manner using each of the seven numbered indicators.

In this example, after the end of the fluctuating display of the symbols, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the fluctuating display of the symbols, the performance introduction period is started. During the performance introduction period, the performance display device 1600 is used to display a display (movie) introducing the model of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end of the period, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. There is. At this time, while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door The LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Note that while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, a rainbow-like effect image is displayed for the logo display of the model title. That is, the logo display of the model title is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-like effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-style effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) from "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white". →red" in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds).

Next, when the display of the machine title logo is finished, any of the simulated rainbow effects A to C that are being executed is finished, and after the display of the machine title logo is finished, the maker that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" will be displayed to prevent people from becoming excessively addicted to the game (for example, "Pachinko is to be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to become addicted to it"). is running. Then, the performance introduction period ends by displaying a warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction.'' Here, when executing the simulated rainbow performances A to C, since the same performances as the rainbow performances A to C at the time of a win, which are executed as a winning confirmation performance in which a win is confirmed, are executed, the player's desire to play is However, after executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, a warning message regarding ``preventing addiction'' may be displayed after displaying the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured Pachinko machine 1. By executing the display, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

As described above, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the back top and front decorations 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position and are maintained at the initial position. As for the back top and front decorative bodies 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. For this reason, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, there is no need to perform an operation to return the back top and front decorations 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of getting stuck in" is started. is short. That is, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, the execution period for displaying the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is short, and the timing to start displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is early.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the back top and front decorations 3310 move from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back top and front decorations 3310 are as follows. Each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. Here, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, it is necessary to perform an operation to return the back top and front decorations 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and this operation must be performed before the warning message regarding "prevention of getting stuck in" is displayed. During the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title, an operation is performed to return the back and front decorations 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow performance B is executed, it takes a long time until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" starts. That is, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, the execution period for displaying the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is delayed.

In addition, in the simulated rainbow performance C, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performance C, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position. Regarding the upper front decoration body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting manner. Here, the simulated rainbow effect C is the same as the simulated rainbow effect B in that it lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using each of the seven rank indicators in the back top and front decorative bodies 3310, so the simulated rainbow effect When performance C is executed, the back top front decorative body 3310 is maintained at the initial position, but attention is paid to whether the back top front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. From this, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect C, there is a possibility that people are paying attention to the back top and front decorations 3310, and if a warning message regarding "prevention of getting hooked" is displayed at an early timing, ” may be missed. In this regard, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect C, there is no need to perform an operation to return the back and front decorations 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position during the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title; As with the case after execution, it takes a long time until the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" starts to be displayed. In other words, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect C, the execution period of displaying the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is delayed. It is possible to prevent overlooking warning messages regarding "preventing addiction."

In this example, in the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect operation A light emitting effect in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode is performed. In addition, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, each of the seven ranking display bodies in the back top and front decoration bodies 3310 is not lit in a rainbow light emitting mode. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow performances B and C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performances B and C, each of the seven ranking display bodies in the back top and front decoration bodies 3310 is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. I try to do that. In other words, the simulated rainbow effects B and C are configured so that the number of members (light emitting areas) involved in the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is larger than that in the simulated rainbow effect A. The simulated rainbow performances B and C are configured so that the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is later than that of the simulated rainbow performance A. In this way, when the simulated rainbow effects B and C are executed, the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" that will be executed afterwards is delayed, so that the effect of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is delayed. A state in which the player's desire to play is high due to the large number of active members (light-emitting areas) can be moderately entertained until a warning message is displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the simulated rainbow performance B, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performance B, but the appearance position is the back side. The distance that the upper front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position can be changed in multiple stages. For this reason, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, since the distance the back and front decorations 3310 must be moved to return from the appearance position to the initial position will be different, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of getting stuck in" will be started. The period (the period during which the logo of the model title is displayed) is made variable depending on the distance traveled. For example, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of simulated rainbow effect B, if the distance traveled by the back top and front decorations 3310 as the appearance position from the initial position is long, after the execution of simulated rainbow effect B, the The period until the warning message regarding "Prevention" begins to be displayed is lengthened. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the back top and front decorative bodies 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position and are maintained at the initial position. Therefore, after performing the simulated rainbow effect A, there is no need to perform an operation to return the back top and front decorations 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of getting stuck in" is started. period (execution period for displaying the model title logo) is fixed.

In addition, in this example, the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A and the simulated rainbow effect B is the same, and the period of execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is the same. Since the front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, the execution period may be longer than that of the simulated rainbow effect A. Furthermore, as described above, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, a warning message regarding "prevention of getting stuck in" is displayed depending on the distance that the back and front decorations 3310 are moved to return from the appearance position to the initial position. The period until the start (execution period of displaying the model title logo) is made variable. As a result, even if the execution period of simulated rainbow effect B becomes longer, the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" (execution period of displaying the model title logo) can be made variable. , it is possible to make the completion timing of the series of performance introduction periods as early as possible by ending the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of getting hooked", and to prevent the execution period of the series of performance introduction periods from becoming unnecessarily long. It can be prevented.

In addition, in this example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is started to be displayed, but the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning Even after the execution of the above, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" starts to be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, when rainbow effects A to C are executed at the time of winning, since they are executed as a guaranteed win effect, the player's desire to play may be excessively increased. By displaying a warning message regarding ``prevention of getting addicted'' after performing rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning, it is possible to prevent a player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

In the above, after executing the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning, a warning message regarding "prevention of getting addicted" is displayed. It is preferable that the execution period for displaying the attention-calling message regarding "preventing addiction" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is longer than the execution period for displaying the attention-calling message. As a result, when executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's desire to play may be excessively increased even though the effect is not a guaranteed win effect. By doing so, it is possible to reliably reduce such an excessively increased desire to play. Furthermore, it is preferable that the execution period for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is configured to be shorter than the execution period (timings t1 to t10) for the rainbow effect that is executed before it. As a result, while the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is being displayed, the excessive increase in the desire to play will be reduced, but by shortening the execution period for displaying the warning message, It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing excessively.

(About deleting the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the end of mock rainbow performance A)
In this example, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 8 on the effect operation unit 300 9. The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, but the back top and front decoration bodies 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position and are maintained at the initial position. As for the back top and front decorative bodies 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. During the execution of such a simulated rainbow effect A, compared to the simulated rainbow effects B and C, the player's desire to play did not increase excessively, and after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A. , I don't feel the need to display a warning message regarding "preventing addiction." Therefore, in this example, only after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated while a caution message regarding "prevention of addiction" is being displayed, the display of the caution message regarding "prevention of addiction" is deleted. making it possible to do so.

FIG. 257 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the addictive prevention display after the simulated rainbow effect is executed. As mentioned above, after the simulated rainbow production A is executed, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed. When the user operates 301, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding the "prevention of addiction". As a result, while the simulated rainbow effect A is being executed, the player's desire to play is improved by executing the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, but after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, there is a warning regarding "prevention of getting hooked". By displaying the alerting message, the increased desire to play can be reduced, and the display of the alerting message regarding "preventing addiction" can be effectively notified. Furthermore, while the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is being displayed, the display of the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" can be erased by operating the performance operation section 301 according to the player's will. It is possible to prevent a state in which the desire to play has decreased from continuing.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, It is assumed that not only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to produce a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner, but also that the back top front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back top front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. Regarding 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, there are more members (areas that emit light) involved in the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode than in the simulated rainbow effect A, and the desire to play is excessively increased. It has become. Therefore, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed. Even if you operate it, it is impossible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "preventing addiction." As a result, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, so that excessive It is possible to reliably reduce the state in which the desire to play has been increased, and it is possible to effectively notify the display of a warning message regarding "preventing addiction".

In addition, in this example, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated while a caution message regarding "preventing addiction" is being displayed, the display of the caution message regarding "preventing addiction" is erased. However, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the effect operation unit 301 must be operated during the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" starts (the period during which the model title logo is displayed). Even when users do so, it is possible to erase (not execute) the display of the warning message regarding the "prevention of addiction". As a result, by operating the production operation section 301 at the player's will before starting to display the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be hidden. Therefore, it is possible to prevent in advance a situation in which the player's desire to play decreases by displaying a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" from occurring. Similarly, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the display of the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" may be erased (not executed) after the effect of the simulated rainbow effect A is executed. is made possible. Even with such a configuration, by operating the production operation unit 301 according to the player's will before starting to display the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be displayed. can be hidden, and it is possible to prevent in advance a situation in which the player's desire to play decreases due to the display of a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" from occurring.

(Regarding restrictions on the execution of simulated rainbow effects)
In this example, during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-fluctuation manner, a light emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow lighting mode is executed as the simulated rainbow effects A to C, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. Later, a warning message regarding ``preventing addiction'' will be displayed. During the execution of such simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's desire to play increases, so for players who are easily absorbed in the game, the light emitting light that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is There was a danger in carrying out the performance. Therefore, in this example, a predetermined operation section that can be operated by the player is newly provided in addition to the production operation section 301, and when a specific action is detected on the predetermined operation section, the simulated rainbow production A By restricting the execution of steps C to C, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from increasing.

FIG. 258 is a timing chart showing an example of restricting execution of the simulated rainbow effect. First, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided an "addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by a player. The anti-slip switch uses a knock type that is configured so that the first time it is pushed all the way down, it stays in the depressed position, and the second time it is pushed all the way down, it returns to the initial position. If specific act A is detected by operating the anti-absorption switch to keep it in the depressed position, when the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. First, do not perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. It is restricted as follows. In addition, if specific act A is not detected, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" will be displayed after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, but if specific act A is detected, The company also restricts the display of warning messages related to "preventing addiction" from being executed. In addition, when the specific act A is detected, a state in which the game cannot be played, for example, a state in which the game ball B is not ejected from the ball launcher 540 even if the handle 195 is operated, or a state in which the game ball B is first started Even if the ball enters various ball entry ports such as the mouth 2004, the display is controlled so that the variable display of symbols does not start.

The addictive prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and although it can be operated by the player, it is assumed that the player's family or someone involved in the hall will operate it. If the player's family or hall personnel determine that the player is addicted to the game, the player's family or hall personnel must operate the addiction prevention switch to stop the player from playing. Bye. Here, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are being executed, the player's desire to play is improved by the execution of the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, but the player's family and hall personnel are By operating the addictive prevention switch, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. In addition, when a player's family or hall personnel operate the addictive prevention switch, since the purpose is to stop the game in the first place, not only will the simulated rainbow effects A to C not be executed, but the simulated rainbow effects A to C will not be executed. It is also assumed that the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after execution of step C will not be executed.

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the "addiction prevention switch", there is provided an "addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player. The anti-slip switch is a knock-type switch that, like the anti-slip switch, is configured so that the first time you push it all the way down, it stays in the depressed position, and the second time you push it all the way down, it returns to the initial position. It has been adopted. Then, when specific act B is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to keep it in the depressed position, the same thing as when specific act A is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to keep it in the depressed position. When the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LED 8 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned on. ~9. The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are restricted from performing a light emitting effect in which they are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode. However, when specific act B is detected by operating the addictive prevention switch to keep it in the depressed position, this is different from when specific act A is detected by operating the addictive prevention switch to keep it in the depressed position. , a warning message regarding ``preventing addiction'' will be displayed.

The addictive prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and is intended to be operated by a player. If the player is concerned about becoming addicted to the game, he or she can operate the addiction prevention switch so as to prevent the player from getting addicted to the game. Here, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are being executed, the player's desire to play is increased by the execution of the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, but the player himself/herself should turn on the addictive prevention switch. By operating the player, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game without executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C. In addition, while not performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, by displaying the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" after performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" may be displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game due to a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced due to the display.

In this example, a ``strong addiction prevention switch'' and a ``weak addiction prevention switch'' are provided as the ``absorption prevention switch'' that restricts the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C. Regarding the switch to prevent strong penetration, when it is pressed all the way the first time, it remains in the pressed position, and when it is restricted from performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, when it is pressed all the way a second time, it returns to the initial position. Even if it is restored, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed will not be canceled and will continue unless the power is turned on again. As a result, even if the player operates the addictive prevention switch after the player's family or hall personnel operate the addictive prevention switch, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed and the game can be played. Since the state in which the player is unable to play continues, the game can be reliably stopped. On the other hand, regarding the weak immersion prevention switch, when it is pressed all the way the first time, it remains in the pressed position and is restricted from performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, and when it is pressed all the way the second time, it can be initialized. When it is returned to its position, the state in which it is restricted from performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C can be released.

In addition, the addictive prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated not only by the player's family or parlor personnel, but also by the player. It is preferable that a person involved in the hall prepare a remote control or the like so that the specific act A can be detected by operating the remote control or the like from a distance from the pachinko machine 1. As a result, even if the player is seated at the pachinko machine 1, specific act A can be detected by the player's family or hall personnel operating the remote control etc. from a distance from the pachinko machine 1. can be done. In addition, if the anti-addiction switch is not provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but the anti-addiction switch is provided on the remote control, etc., the player will not be able to operate the anti-addiction switch without permission. The player cannot release the state in which the players are restricted from playing A to C, and the game can be stopped.

In addition, in this example, the "weakly addicted prevention switch" and the "addicted to prevent switch" are kept in the pressed position when pressed all the way the first time, and are restricted so that they do not execute the simulated rainbow effects A to C. , when the button is returned to the initial position by pressing it all the way down for the second time, the restricted state is not released immediately, but is released after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. I take it as a thing. That is, until a predetermined period of time elapses after the button is returned to the initial position by pressing it all the way down for the second time, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being performed continues. As a result, even if the player returns to the initial position by pressing the button all the way a second time just before the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the simulated rainbow effects A to C will not be executed, and the player can continue playing the game. This can effectively prevent you from becoming addicted to it.

In addition, while the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated (not released), the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 , LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are restricted from performing a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Instead of the light-emitting effect that lights up, at least some of the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in a single color. It may be configured to notify the outside that the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated. In addition, for each type of "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch", LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LED 10 on the door frame 3. .about.14 may be configured to emit light in different colors. This makes it easy to understand from the outside that the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed while the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated. .

[About checking rainbow light emission]
In this embodiment, a rainbow effect at the time of a win (a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode) is executed as a win confirmation effect to confirm a hit while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. If the performance is not executed appropriately, there is a risk that it will cause a decrease in interest in the game. In particular, since the appearance rate of the rainbow effect upon winning is extremely low, it has been difficult to confirm whether or not the light-emitting effect of lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally even in halls, factories, and the like. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to check the rainbow light emission mode at a different timing from the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Specifically, during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are displayed non-variably, a light emitting effect that lights up in the same rainbow light emitting mode as the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed as a simulated rainbow effect, and the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. This makes it easy to check in halls, factories, etc. whether the lighting effect that lights up can be executed normally. The performance introduction period is a performance that starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the fluctuating display of symbols has ended, and is a performance that introduces the model of pachinko machine 1. In addition to the above, a simulated rainbow effect will be performed. In this example, regarding the simulated rainbow effect, compared to the rainbow effect at the time of winning, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, but the timing of regularly switching the light emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode has been changed earlier. The difference is whether it is slow or slow.

In this example, while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is possible to perform the effect that suggests the setting value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A, and the rainbow effect or simulated rainbow effect at the time of a win is a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. They are the same in that they execute. In other words, when executing the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5 and the LED 5 on the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display on the effect display device 1600, similarly to when the suggestion effect A is executed. ~7. A light emitting effect is performed in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the game starts. LEDs 1 and 2 of the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame 3. LED8 is "green", LED9 of door frame 3 and LED10 of door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 of door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13-14 of door frame 3 are "white". I try to let them do it. In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. "Red", LEDs 3 and 4 on the game board 5 are "Purple", LEDs 5 and 6 on the door frame top unit 450 are "Blue", LED 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 on the door frame 3 are "Green", and the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange", the LEDs 11 and 12 in the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and the LEDs 13 and 14 in the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white". In other words, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in different colors for each of the two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). An LED that emits "red" light is "purple", an LED that emits "purple" is "blue", an LED that emits "blue" is "green", and an LED that emits "green" An LED that emits "orange" is "orange", an LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", an LED that emits "yellow" is "white", an LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LEDs for each two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until timing t10 is reached. Such regular changes are repeated (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this example, in addition to performing the rainbow effect at the time of a win while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the rainbow effect at the time of the win is also performed as a simulated rainbow effect during the performance introduction period when the symbol is being displayed in a non-variable manner. It is also performing a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. In this way, when performing the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are used. It is possible to check whether the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode can be executed normally. In addition, when performing a simulated rainbow effect, the state in which the LED light emission color is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" can be observed at any time. , it is possible to check whether each of LEDs 1 to 14 can emit light normally in each of the emission colors that make up the rainbow emission mode, and it is easy to discover whether any abnormality has occurred in the emission of light from any of the LEDs. can do.

In addition, in the rainbow effect at the time of winning, any one of LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 will emit light. If no abnormality has occurred in the LEDs, by controlling each light emitting color to switch sequentially to multiple light emitting colors in a short unit light emitting time, these LEDs work together to visually emit light in a rainbow light mode. It is now possible to visually recognize the lighting as if it were being made, and it is possible to perform an impactful lighting effect. In addition, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the emitted light color in a short time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, seven colors appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs as the rainbow light emission mode, and each light emission color is regularly switched. However, the number of colors does not have to be seven, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be different between when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed and when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when a rainbow effect at the time of a win is executed, symbols are displayed in parallel, but when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, the symbols may not be displayed in parallel. Thereby, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, there is no possibility of misunderstanding that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning. Note that the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, a display such as "simulating" may be executed.

In addition, the rainbow effect and simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning are performed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. Although they are the same in that they execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, it is preferable to provide a control program for a different effect rather than a control program for the same effect, and to execute these control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program for either one can be executed normally, and the error occurs. It is possible to minimize the occurrence of non-execution of the performance at the time.

FIG. 259 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where LED light emission is confirmed during execution of a simulated rainbow effect. In this example, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are divided into two groups at predetermined intervals. The emitting color of the LED is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red", but when executing the rainbow effect at the time of a win, it changes at the normal speed (e.g. 0.1 seconds), whereas when performing a simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow light emission mode is set so that the LED light emission colors are switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second). The light-emitting effect that lights up has started. That is, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a light emission effect is started in which the LED lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode so that the interval at which the LED light emission color is switched is longer than the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Then, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, the light emitting colors of the LEDs are switched, and after all of the light emitting colors constituting at least the rainbow light emitting mode have appeared for each of LEDs 1 to 14, the rainbow color at the time of winning is changed. Similar to the performance, a light emission performance is performed in which the LED lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode so that the light emission color of the LED is switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds). In this way, at the start of the simulated rainbow effect, since the interval between the LED emission colors being switched is long, it is difficult to determine whether each of LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors that make up the rainbow emission mode. This allows you to slowly check whether there is any abnormality in the light emission of any of the LEDs. In addition, after the simulated rainbow effect has started, by returning the interval at which the LED light emission color is switched to the normal speed, the LED light emission color will be changed at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) like the rainbow effect at the time of winning. It can also be confirmed that it is possible to switch.

In addition, as mentioned above in detail, the production introduction period starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the fluctuating display of symbols after the end of the fluctuating display of the symbols (may be after the power is turned on). are doing. During the performance introduction period, the performance display device 1600 is used to display a display (movie) introducing the model of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end of the period, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. There is. At this time, while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, the simulated rainbow effect is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, A light emitting effect is executed in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. As a result, when executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, by visually checking whether or not the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, the rainbow effect that is being executed can be changed to a simulated rainbow effect. It is possible to understand whether or not it is a performance, and furthermore, it is possible to understand that it is a performance for checking whether an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect image (for example, background image) displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 or a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 A rainbow-like effect image is displayed for the effect image (for example, a effect image of characters, items, etc.) displayed on the screen. On the other hand, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 is configured not to display rainbow-like effect images for the model title logo display, background image, characters, items, etc. . As a result, when executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the effect display device 1600 visually checks whether or not a rainbow mode effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby simulating the rainbow effect that is being executed. It is possible to easily understand whether or not it is a rainbow effect, and furthermore, it is possible to easily understand that this is a effect for checking whether an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the back top front decoration body 3310 is allowed to move from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back top front decoration body 3310 has seven rankings. Each of the display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. On the other hand, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the back top and front decorations 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position and are maintained at the initial position, and the back top and front decorations 3310 have seven Each of the numbered indicators is used in a rainbow light-emitting manner so that they do not light up. As described above in detail, the back top front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 which is rectangular in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and a back top front decoration body 3310 located behind the back top front decoration body 3310. A back top front decorative board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the back top and front decorations 3310 are moved from the initial position to the appearance position, making it possible for the back top and front decorations 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. . As a result, when performing a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, it is possible to determine whether or not to move the back top front decoration body 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, and to control each of the seven ranking display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310. By visually checking whether or not the lights are turned on in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different colors, it is possible to easily understand whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect, and even if there is an abnormality in the LED light emission. It is easy to understand that this is a performance to confirm whether or not it has occurred.

In this way, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs on the door frame 3 It is the same in that it executes a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14, but it is possible to determine whether or not to display a rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600, and to initialize the back and front decorations 3310. They are different in terms of whether or not they are moved from the position to the appearance position and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies on the back top and front decoration bodies 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode in which they emit light in different colors. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect is performed with incomplete effect so that part of the effect that would be executed in the rainbow effect at the time of winning is omitted. As a result, when executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, it is easy to check whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect by visually checking whether the effect is being executed with incomplete effect content. In addition, it can be easily understood that this is a performance to confirm whether an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED. In addition, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, rainbow light is emitted using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. As a display related to the light emitting display that lights up in a different manner, the operation of the back top and front decoration body 3310 and the lighting of the back top and front decoration body 3310 in a rainbow light emission mode are added, and an integrated display that increases the number of related components is added. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the performance more interesting than the simulated rainbow performance, and to make it a performance that attracts the attention of the players.

In the above, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, It may be configured such that some of the LEDs (LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not light up. In such a configuration, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the emitted light that makes up the rainbow light emitting mode becomes incomplete, with some of the emitted light colors missing, and the light is emitted in a manner that does not establish the rainbow light emitting mode, resulting in visual problems. The difference becomes clear, and it is possible to easily understand whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect.

Furthermore, as described above in detail, the dish unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. The LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 include LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs on the door frame 3. Regarding the LEDs 10 to 14, the light amount can be adjusted in stages by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of light intensity of the LED from 1 (lowest light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 upward, the larger the level becomes. , the light intensity of the LED increases, and as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward and the step becomes smaller, the light intensity of the LED decreases. In addition, regarding the LED of the light-emitting decoration, the amount of light can be adjusted both when the pattern is changing and when it is not changing.

Regarding the above, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the rainbow will appear among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. It is possible to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that make up the light emission mode. I have to. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow is displayed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. It is possible not only to check whether the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode can be executed normally, but also to check whether the light amount of each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can be adjusted normally.

In this example, at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Regarding LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), the light intensity can be adjusted, whereas the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (game Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17) on panel 5, adjustment of the light intensity is disabled, and the LEDs 15 to 17) are always maintained in a constant state of emitting light. In other words, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the light amount of the LED whose light amount is constant (LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode) is compared to the LED whose light amount can be changed (the rainbow light emitting mode). The amount of light of the LEDs constituting the LED will change relatively. Thereby, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, it is possible to easily check whether the light amount can be adjusted normally for the LEDs forming the rainbow light emission mode when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. Furthermore, for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), the light intensity cannot be adjusted and not only is the light intensity always maintained at a constant level, but also the color of the light emitted is maintained. It is preferable. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, there is no need to pay attention to the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow emission mode, and the emission color of each LED can be switched normally for the LEDs that constitute the rainbow emission mode. You can draw attention to see if it is.

On the other hand, even during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Regarding LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), the light intensity can be adjusted, whereas the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (game Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17) on panel 5, the light intensity cannot be adjusted, and when they emit light, they always emit light at a constant light intensity, but it is not necessary to always maintain the light emitting state, for example, they may be in a blinking state, To prevent the decorativeness from being lost during the variable display of symbols. In addition, as with the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), the light intensity cannot be adjusted, and when they are emitted, they are always emitted at a constant light intensity. It is also preferable to maintain the color of the emitted light. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of a win, there is no need to pay attention to the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is performed for the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode. It can draw attention to what is being done.

Furthermore, in this example, while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, it is checked whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally. When you operate , it is possible to end the simulated rainbow effect. Specifically, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are activated. Finish the rainbow effect using (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3), and display the rainbow light emission mode. The constituent LEDs are switched from emitting light in a rainbow light mode to non-emitting light or emitting light in a single color. As a result, during manufacturing confirmation at the factory, after executing the simulated rainbow effect and confirming whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow lighting mode can be executed normally, you can By operating the production operation section 301 at the appropriate timing, the simulated rainbow production can be ended at any timing, and unnecessary execution of the rainbow production after confirmation can be prevented from affecting other manufacturing confirmations, etc. can be prevented. In addition, after the simulated rainbow effect ends, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode will be switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode to not emitting light, or to emitting light in a single color to clearly indicate that the simulated rainbow effect has ended. I can let you know.

On the other hand, while the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, even if the effect operation section 301 is operated, the rainbow effect at the time of winning does not end. Thereby, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of a win, the rainbow performance at the time of the win does not end midway, and it is possible to reliably notify that the confirmed performance in which the win is determined is being executed.

In addition, as a modified example, at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 , LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), the light emission of the LEDs changes depending on the light emission color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode. The LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are configured so that the LEDs do not emit light, or the LEDs emit light without changing the emitted color (do not blink). Good too. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, there is no need to pay attention to the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow emission mode, and the emission color of each LED can be switched normally for the LEDs that constitute the rainbow emission mode. You can draw attention to whether or not it is.

Regarding the above modification, when the effect operation section 301 is operated at least while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, the simulated rainbow effect is ended and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from emitting light in a rainbow light mode to non-emitting light or emitting light in a single color. . On the other hand, for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), when the effect operation section 301 is operated, the LEDs do not emit light, or the LEDs emit light without changing the emitted light color. I try to maintain the status (not blinking). As a result, when the effect operation section 301 is operated while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, only the light emission status of the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode changes, and it is clearly notified that the simulated rainbow effect has ended. I can do it.

On the other hand, as a modified example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LED 1 of the game board 5 ~4. Regarding LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3), the light emission of the LEDs changes depending on the light emission color that makes up the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) may be configured so that the LEDs can blink or the LED light emission color can change. . As a result, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the decorativeness during the fluctuating display of symbols is not lost even for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the fluctuating display of symbols is started due to the ball entering the various starting ports (the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005), the simulated rainbow effect is terminated. (ends the production introduction period), while the simulated rainbow production is running, even if the ball does not enter the various starting ports (first starting port 2004 and second starting port 2005), the production When the operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to end the simulated rainbow effect. As a result, if you want to end the rainbow effect in progress during manufacturing confirmation at the factory, you only need to operate the effect operation section 301 without having to insert the ball into any of the starting ports. In addition, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the performance operation unit 301, there are a plurality of operation units such as a light amount adjustment button 228 and a volume adjustment button 227. Only when the operation unit 301 is operated can the rainbow effect in progress be ended. As a result, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, for example, the simulated rainbow effect that is being executed does not end, and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 4 on the door frame top unit 450) that make up the rainbow light emission mode are It is possible to sufficiently check whether each of the LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 can adjust the light amount normally.

In addition, in this example, during the performance introduction period that starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without changing the symbols, a simulated rainbow performance is executed and the lights are lit in a rainbow lighting mode. We are trying to check whether the light emitting effect can be executed normally, but after turning on the power, we have to install the simulated start operation section, which is a special operation section for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect, on the back of the pachinko machine 1. When a simulation start operation section is operated after the power is turned on, a simulated rainbow effect is started, and it is possible to check whether the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally. In addition, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after operating the simulation start operation unit after the power is turned on, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the simulated rainbow effect is started. That's what I do. This makes it possible, for example, to start a simulated rainbow effect at any time by operating the simulation start operation section at any time after turning on the power, for example during manufacturing confirmation during line work at a factory. This eliminates problems caused by the time difference (confirmation mistakes, omissions, etc.) between the process of turning on the power and operating the simulation start operation section and the process of confirming that the lights are on, and now lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of checking whether or not the performance can be executed normally. In addition, during the period from when the simulated start operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated until a predetermined period of time has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the front side of the pachinko machine 1 On the side, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that lights up in a lighting mode other than the rainbow lighting mode (for example, a single color lighting mode, a lighting mode with multiple colors that is less than the rainbow lighting mode, etc.), and depending on the line work mode. These confirmations may be made possible using the above-mentioned time difference. This not only prevents mistakes and omissions in checking the light-emitting effect that is lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also makes it possible to further improve the efficiency of the checking work. In addition, the simulation start operation section may be any operation section provided in a place that cannot be operated or seen by the player, in addition to the power switch 630a for turning on the power, such as a rotary switch type operation section or a press-down switch. Examples include a type operating unit, or an operating unit operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin stick) or a key owned by an administrator. Among these, if the operation part is of the type that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or key owned by the manager, the effect of the simulated start operation part can be operated only in the factory, and in the hall. It is also possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operations.

In the above, the simulation start operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow performance is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the performance operation unit 301 for ending the simulated rainbow performance is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. is provided on the front side of the As a result, in order to operate the production operation unit 301 after operating the simulation start operation unit after turning on the power and starting the simulated rainbow production, it is necessary to go around to the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and to check the manufacturing process at the factory. In this case, do not forget to check whether the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode that is executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed normally, and operate the effect operation section 301 to create a simulated rainbow effect. can be prevented from terminating.

(Relationship with confirmation other than rainbow emission)
As described above, in this embodiment, during the fluctuating display of symbols, in addition to executing a rainbow effect (a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) at the time of a win as a win confirmation effect that confirms a win, A simulated rainbow effect is executed at a different timing from the rainbow effect shown in the figure, making it possible to confirm the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode. In other words, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, Regarding the LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to check whether they light up normally during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, but the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (game board Regarding LEDs 15 to 17), it is possible to check whether they are lighting up normally at a different timing from the simulated rainbow effect. Also, regarding contact with the handle 195, it is possible to check whether or not it is normally detected at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect.

FIG. 268 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. In this example, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are turned off. I try to keep it lit. Furthermore, the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) are designed to emit light in a single color (for example, red or blue). As a result, after the power is turned on, by visually checking whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are lit, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs. can be confirmed.

Furthermore, after the power is turned on, the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted, so that they are always emitted at a constant light intensity. That is, after the power is turned on, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode will not change. As a result, after the power is turned on, the light intensity of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) does not become too dark, and it is confirmed whether any abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs. be able to. Furthermore, for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), the light intensity cannot be adjusted and not only is the light intensity always maintained at a constant level, but also the color of the light emitted is maintained. It is preferable. Thereby, after the power is turned on, attention can be focused only on checking whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally.

In addition, after the power was turned on, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs that did not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) were turned on. However, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LED 10 on the door frame 3) Regarding items 14) to 14), the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is restricted from being performed. Specifically, among the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode, , at least some of the LEDs, for example, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, are turned on. In addition, regarding the emission colors of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode, , LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode by emitting light in a single color (for example, green or yellow) that is a different color from the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5). ~17) It is notified that it is a confirmation period to see if there is any abnormality in the light emission. In this way, during the period of checking whether there is any abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LED1 of the game board 5) ~4. LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Instead of paying attention to the switching of light emission, attention can be focused on checking whether each LED (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode lights up normally. In addition, the amount of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode can be adjusted. Even if the button 228 is operated, the amount of light does not change, and this prevents the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) from affecting whether or not they are lit normally. ing.

In this example, after the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In other words, after the power is turned on, there is a period for checking whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 side detects whether or not the player is in contact with the handle 195 using the handle touch sensor 192. By operating the handle rotation detection sensor 189 on the main control board 1310 side, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 (launch the game ball B from the ball launcher 540). I have to. In other words, even if the player contacts the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is not detected normally, the game ball B cannot be hit. For this reason, after the power is turned on, by providing a period of confirmation to see if contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, the hall manager etc. will be able to contact the handle 195, and the contact with the handle 195 will be detected. You can check whether it is detected correctly.

In addition, during the confirmation period to see if contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, when a hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is detected normally; , to inform the outside that it has been detected normally. Specifically, in addition to the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, an LED is provided to notify that contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. There is. Further, when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, if the touch to the handle 195 is normally detected, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker. Thereby, after the power is turned on, when a hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether the touch to the handle 195 is detected normally.

In addition, as described above, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, The LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted so as not to perform a light emission effect in which they are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. In other words, after the power is turned on, during the confirmation period whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 4 on the door frame top unit 450) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted from performing a light emission effect in which they are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. In this way, during the confirmation period whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, Since the LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 do not perform a lighting effect in which they light up in a rainbow lighting mode, the user can move to the handle 195 without drawing attention to the switching of light emission in the rainbow lighting mode. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the contact is detected normally.

As mentioned above in detail, in this example, a simulation start operation section, which is a special operation section for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect after the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the simulated rainbow effect is started after the power is turned on. When the start operation section is operated, a simulated rainbow effect is started, and it is possible to check whether the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally. In addition, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after operating the simulation start operation unit after the power is turned on, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the simulated rainbow effect is started. That's what I do. As a result, after turning on the power, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), and to detect that contact with the handle 195 is normal. After confirming whether or not the simulation will be performed, the simulated rainbow performance can be started at any timing by operating the simulation start operation section at any timing during the confirmation period. In addition, since the simulated rainbow effect starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the user operated the simulated start operation unit, for example, during production confirmation during line work at a factory, etc., the work of operating the simulated start operation unit We have solved the problem caused by the time difference between the process and the work process of checking the lighting (confirmation mistakes, omissions, etc.), and we have fixed the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 on the door frame top unit 450) that make up the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to improve the efficiency of checking whether the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode can be executed normally in the LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3.

In the above, during the period from when the simulation start operation section is operated until a predetermined period of time has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the check performed before operating the simulation start operation section. The period is continued, and when the predetermined period has elapsed (at the time when the simulated rainbow effect is started), the confirmation period that is executed before operating the simulation start operation section is ended. In other words, until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after operating the simulated start operation section (while waiting for the simulated rainbow effect to start), the simulated rainbow effect has not started and the lights are turned on in a rainbow lighting mode. Since the light emitting effect is not being executed, it is necessary to check whether the LEDs that do not make up the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are lit normally, and to check whether the handles It is possible to draw attention to checking whether contact with 195 is normally detected.

Specifically, during the period from when the simulation start operation section is operated until a predetermined period of time has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the door is closed in the same way as before operating the simulation start operation section. Among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are kept lit. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed (when a simulated rainbow effect is started), the state in which all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) not forming the rainbow light emission mode are turned on is ended. As a result, by utilizing the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulation start operation part and the work process of checking the lighting, abnormality is caused in the light emission of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5). You can check whether this has occurred. Also, for example, if it is not confirmed whether or not a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light mode can be executed normally before operating the simulation start operation section, the rainbow light emission mode may be changed after operating the simulation start operation section. Since it is possible to confirm whether the light emitting effect of lighting can be executed normally, it is possible to prevent confirmation errors, omissions, etc. from occurring. However, regarding the light emission mode of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), the light emission mode that is different from the light emission mode that is executed before operating the simulation start operation section (for example, a different light emission mode) The lights are designed to emit light in different colors (for example, in a flashing state rather than in a constantly lit state). Thereby, it is possible to clearly understand whether or not the simulation start operation unit has been operated by the light emission mode of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode.

Similarly, after operating the simulation start operation section until a predetermined period of time has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), as before operating the simulation start operation section, press the handle 195. A confirmation period is continued to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, and when the predetermined period has elapsed (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. The verification period for In other words, when a hall manager or the like touches the handle 195 until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after operating the simulation start operation part (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the handle If the contact to 195 is detected normally, this is notified to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by utilizing the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulation start operation section and the work process of checking the lighting. Furthermore, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the touch to the handle 195 is normally detected before operating the simulation start operation part, if the touch to the handle 195 is detected after operating the simulation start operation part, Since it is possible to check whether or not the information is detected normally, it is possible to prevent confirmation errors, omissions, etc. from occurring.

If the simulation start operation section is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period that is being executed after the power is turned on will end when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the power was turned on. I have to. In other words, if the simulation start operation section is not operated after the power is turned on, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the power is turned on, the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (the LED 15 of the game board 5) to 17) are turned on normally, and the period of checking whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally is ended. The predetermined period to end the confirmation period that is executed after the power is turned on includes checking whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow lighting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are lit normally, and checking whether the A sufficient period is provided to confirm whether contact is detected normally. In this way, if the simulated start operation section is not operated after the power is turned on, the simulated rainbow effect will not start immediately after the confirmation period that is executed after the power is turned on. Since this is to be executed during the performance introduction period that starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without changing the display, the light emission that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode during such execution. You can check whether the performance can be executed normally.

Further, even after the simulated rainbow performance has started, it may be possible to check whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by touching the handle 195. Specifically, if the simulation start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period that is being executed after the power is turned on is checked when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the power was turned on. However, after the end of the confirmation period, an extended confirmation period may be generated, and it may be possible to confirm whether or not a touch to the handle 195 is normally detected by touching the handle 195 within the extended confirmation period. In addition, when providing an extension confirmation period, there is a possibility that the conditions for executing the simulated rainbow effect are satisfied within the extension confirmation period, and the extension confirmation period and the simulated rainbow effect are executed in parallel. In such a case, if the handle 195 is touched within the extension confirmation period, the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be Finished the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode. However, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode may be switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode to not emitting light or emitting light in a single color.

Note that the main purpose of terminating the simulated rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 is to terminate unnecessary simulated rainbow effects, while terminating the simulated rainbow effect by touching the handle 195 is unnecessary. The main purpose is not to end the necessary simulated rainbow effect, but to confirm whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In addition, in order to make these differences clear, when operating the production operation section 301 and when touching the handle 195, some different processing is performed at control points different from light emission (for example, sound control, etc.). It is preferable to leave it there. For example, a unique performance end sound may be output only when the simulated rainbow performance is ended by operating the performance operation unit 301, so that the simulated rainbow performance can be performed by operating the performance operation unit 301 and touching the handle 195. Even though they have the same point of ending the rainbow effect, the presence or absence of the effect end sound makes it possible for the operator to reliably recognize whether or not the unnecessary simulated rainbow effect has ended.

In addition, in the above example, since a confirmation sound (different sound from the performance end sound) is emitted when the handle 195 is touched, this confirmation sound is output when the handle 195 is touched within the extended confirmation period. By doing so, the operator can reliably recognize whether or not the confirmation is to confirm whether or not contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, based on the difference between the performance end sound and the confirmation sound. Further, as the confirmation sound, a confirmation sound A when the handle 195 is touched within the extension confirmation period, and a confirmation sound B when the handle 195 is touched during the confirmation period preceding the extension confirmation period are provided. Depending on the difference between the confirmation sounds A and B, it is possible to determine whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected or not, as well as whether the confirmation is within an extended confirmation period. It is possible to make sure that the person recognizes the information.

In addition, in this example, if the power is turned off while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or in a situation where a pending state where the symbol is not yet being displayed is stored, such information will not be stored. After the power is turned on, such information is restored and the variable display of symbols is resumed. After turning on the power, there is a period of time to check whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) light up normally, and whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. We do not set a confirmation period for As a result, if the power is turned off while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, or in a situation where a pending state where the symbol has not yet been displayed is stored, the fluctuating symbol will be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to restart the game, and it is possible to prevent it from affecting the restart of the game.

In addition, in this example, a vibration sensor that detects vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 can detect vibrations, or when a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1. If the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 detects magnetism, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out due to vibrations or magnetism, and such an abnormality may be detected. We are trying to notify the outside that this has occurred. After the power is turned on, there is a period for checking whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) light up normally, and a period for checking whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. If an abnormality occurs due to the detection of vibration or magnetism, such a confirmation period will be forcibly terminated. As a result, during the period of checking whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) are lit normally, and the period of checking whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, A hall manager or the like is conducting confirmation work, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out by vibration or magnetism during such confirmation work.

In addition, after the power is turned on, in order to check whether the back top front decoration body 3310 operates normally, the back top front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the effect display device 1600 is moved. An initial operation is performed in which the back upper front decorative body 3310 appears on the front side. In such a case, after the back upper front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, return control is performed to return it from the appearance position to the initial position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position. If not, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. After the power is turned on, there is a period for checking whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are lit normally, and whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Although confirmation periods are provided, if these confirmation periods are made to run parallel to the initial operation of the back top front decoration 3310, attention will be paid to the initial movement of the back top front decoration 3310, and the confirmation period will be delayed. There is a possibility that confirmation during the period may be neglected. Therefore, regarding the initial operation of the back top and front decoration body 3310, there is a period to check whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) are lit normally, and whether contact with the handle 195 is normal. It is preferable to execute this after the confirmation period has ended to see if the detection is detected. This allows the operator to reliably perform both the confirmation during the confirmation period and the confirmation during the initial operation of the back and front decorative bodies 3310.

(Regarding the single rainbow decoration part for checking rainbow light emission)
As described above, in this embodiment, during the fluctuating display of symbols, in addition to executing a rainbow effect (a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) at the time of a win as a win confirmation effect that confirms a win, It is possible to check the rainbow light emission at a different timing from the rainbow effect. Specifically, during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are displayed non-variably, a light emitting effect that lights up in the same rainbow light emitting mode as the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed as a simulated rainbow effect, and the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. This makes it possible to check in halls, factories, etc. whether the lighting effect that lights up can be executed normally. The performance introduction period is a performance that starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the fluctuating display of symbols has ended, and is a performance that introduces the model of pachinko machine 1. In addition to the above, a simulated rainbow effect will be performed. However, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, if the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow emission mode is successfully executed, it is possible to know that it is the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect, but the light emission that lights up in the rainbow emission mode If the effect cannot be executed normally, it is not possible to determine whether the timing for executing the simulated rainbow effect has arrived. Therefore, in this example, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are used. In addition to performing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, a rainbow independent decoration part 1700 that can be attached separately from these multiple members is provided, and the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is used to perform rainbow light emission. In order to notify that a simulated rainbow effect is being executed by executing a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow mode, and to check in halls, factories, etc. whether the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow mode can be executed normally. We make it clear that the timing is right.

FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a single rainbow decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5. The rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is provided so that it can be attached to the game board 5 from the front side. Specifically, in the lower right area of the game board 5 (game area 5a), a connection terminal for connecting the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is exposed, and the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is connected to the connection terminal. The peripheral control board 1510 makes it possible to control the light emission of the LEDs provided in the rainbow independent decoration section 1700.

In this example, since the rainbow individual decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side, even if the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rainbow individual decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side. The portion 1700 can be easily attached and detached. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow light emission mode is performed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. However, in order to know when to execute the simulated rainbow effect, only when checking in a hall or factory whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow mode can be executed normally. A single rainbow decoration part 1700 may be attached to the game board 5. Furthermore, even when the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 is not attached to the game board 5 and is removed, the decoration on the front side of the game board 5 is maintained.

In addition, as described later, the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is equipped with a board on which a total of 21 LEDs, 3 each in the vertical direction and 7 each in the horizontal direction, are mounted, but in front of the LEDs. is equipped with a transparent cover body (not shown) to reduce direct light from the LED. When removing the single rainbow decoration part 1700 from the game board 5, it is possible to remove the entire board on which the LEDs are mounted, but only the cover body can be removed without removing the board on which the LEDs are mounted. It also makes it possible. As a result, for example, in cases where it is difficult to see the light emitted from the LEDs in the single rainbow decoration section 1700, it is only necessary to remove the cover body, and it is possible to easily understand that the simulated rainbow effect is being performed.

Further, the rainbow single decoration section 1700 is provided within the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 can be easily seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the door window 101a. In addition, when performing a simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are used to emit light in a rainbow mode. A light-emitting effect that lights up is executed, but among these, the light-emitting decorations on which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are installed are located behind the area where the game ball B flows down, while the rainbow The individual decorative portion 1700 is located in front of the area where the game ball B flows down. In other words, the light emitting decoration body provided with the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 allows the game ball B to flow down the front side, whereas the rainbow single decoration part 1700 prevents the game ball B from flowing down the front side. It is composed of As a result, when the LED of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is lit in a rainbow light emission mode, visibility is not obstructed by the falling game ball B, and it is possible to easily understand that a simulated rainbow effect is being executed. can.

FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram showing a single rainbow decoration part 1700. The single rainbow decoration part 1700 includes a board on which a total of 21 LEDs are mounted, three in each vertical direction and seven in each horizontal direction. When the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a notification effect is executed in which the LEDs of the rainbow-only decoration section 1700 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. That is, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow light emission mode is performed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. In synchronization with the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting up, a notification effect of lighting up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow single decoration section 1700 is executed. Specifically, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 The three LEDs in row A are made to emit red, purple, and blue, respectively. In other words, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow single decoration section 1700 are made to emit light so that three predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Regarding the LEDs of the rainbow single decoration part 1700, each LED is displayed in the order of A row → B row → C row → D row → E row → F row → G row every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). The three LEDs in the column are switched to emit light. In addition, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 emit light in "red, purple, and blue," and the three LEDs in row B emit light in "purple, blue, and green," and the three LEDs in row C emit light in "red, purple, and blue." The three LEDs in row D emit light in "blue, green, and orange," the three LEDs in row D emit light in "green, orange, and yellow," and the three LEDs in row E emit light in "blue, green, and orange." The three LEDs in the F row emit light in "yellow, white, and red," and the three LEDs in the G row emit light in "white, red, and purple." I take it as a thing. In this way, for the LED of the rainbow single decoration part 1700, one of the three colors is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), so that the emitting color that appears at the same time can be switched. By controlling these LEDs, it is possible to visually make it appear as if the LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light emission mode. During execution of the simulated rainbow effect, such regular switching of the emitted light colors (switching of the rows in which the three LEDs emit light) is repeated.

FIG. 262 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a simulated rainbow effect is executed when the single rainbow decoration part 1700 is attached. In this example, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow is displayed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. In synchronization with executing the light emitting effect of lighting in a light emitting mode, a notification effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration section 1700. In this way, since the rainbow single decoration section 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode as well as the simulated rainbow effect (the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode), it is easy to know that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. This can be used as a guideline for checking in halls, factories, etc., whether or not a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally. In addition, when the simulated rainbow performance is executed, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, LED 10 on the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode are -14) If an abnormality occurs in which the LED does not light up in a part, the light emitting mode will be incomplete with a part of the emitted light color that makes up the rainbow light emission mode being missing, and the rainbow light emission mode will not be established. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not a simulated rainbow effect is being executed. I am trying to execute a notification effect that lights up. As a result, when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs forming the rainbow light emission mode do not light up, a visual difference from the single rainbow decoration part 1700 will occur. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not being executed normally even though the simulated rainbow effect is being executed.

In addition, regarding the rainbow single decoration section 1700, not only the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect during the execution of the effect introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, but also the execution timing of the rainbow effect at the time of a hit while the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, it may be attached to the game board 5. In other words, the rainbow single decoration part 1700 may always be attached to the game board 5. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 In synchronization with executing the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LED, a notification effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is executed. In this way, since the rainbow single decoration part 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emission mode in the same way as the rainbow effect (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) at the time of winning, it is possible to indicate that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning. This can be used as an indication that a winning performance in which a winning is confirmed is being executed. In addition, when performing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 If an abnormality occurs in which the LEDs do not light up in some of the LEDs 10 to 14), a part of the emitted light color that makes up the rainbow light emission mode is missing, resulting in an incomplete mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is not established. However, regardless of whether such an abnormality occurs, the rainbow single decoration part 1700 , a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow lighting mode is executed. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode do not light up when performing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the rainbow light emission mode in the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is By visually confirming the light emission, it is possible to know that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning, and it is possible to prevent the player from missing information useful to the player.

Further, as described above in detail, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, after confirming whether or not the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally, by operating the effect operation section 301, the simulated rainbow effect can be displayed. It is now possible to end the performance. As a result, during manufacturing confirmation at the factory, after running the simulated rainbow effect and confirming whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow lighting mode can be executed normally, you can By operating the production operation unit 301 at the appropriate timing, the simulated rainbow production can be ended at any timing, and unnecessary execution of the rainbow production after confirmation can be prevented from affecting other manufacturing confirmations, etc. can be prevented. In addition, when the effect operation section 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs of the door frame 3 Not only does the light emitting effect of lighting up in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 10 to 14 end, but also the notification effect of lighting up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LED of a rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is ended. Specifically, the LED of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is switched from emitting light in a rainbow light emitting mode to non-emitting light. In this manner, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LED of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-emitting light, thereby ending the simulated rainbow effect. This can be clearly communicated.

Even when the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is not attached to the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510 does not determine that an abnormality has occurred, and when a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect is executed upon a win, the light-emitting effect is executed as usual, lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3. This allows the rainbow single decorative part 1700 to be attached to the game board 5 only when checking in a hall or factory whether the light-emitting effect lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally, in order to know the timing of the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, and allows the rainbow single decorative part 1700 to be removed at other times. Furthermore, even if the notification effect in which the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is lit in a rainbow light emission mode cannot be executed normally, for example, when some of the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 do not light up while the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is attached to the game board 5, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. In other words, when executing a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect at the time of a win, a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is executed as usual using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and it is possible to prevent any influence on the execution of the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of a win. Furthermore, even if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) are not lit, the peripheral control board 1510 does not determine that an abnormality has occurred, and when a rainbow performance or simulated rainbow performance is performed upon a win, the LEDs are illuminated in an incomplete manner (a manner in which the rainbow light emission pattern is not established) with some of the light colors that make up the rainbow light emission pattern missing.

Note that the single rainbow decoration part 1700 can be lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner as a single member without using a plurality of members, but the back top and front decoration body 3310 can also be lit without using a plurality of members. As a single member, each of the seven numbered indicators can be used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the back top and front decorations 3310 do not move from the initial position to the appearance position and are maintained at the initial position, and the back top and front decorations 3310 are divided into seven rankings. Each of the display bodies is used to prevent lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. For this reason, although it is possible for the back top and front decorations 3310 to be lit in a rainbow light emission mode, it is not possible to know that a simulated rainbow effect is being executed, and the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is not possible. It is not possible to use this timing as a guideline for checking in halls, factories, etc. whether or not the process can be executed normally. In addition, since the back top front decoration body 3310 is attached to the back side of the game board 5, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back top front decoration body 3310 is attached to the game board 5. 3310 cannot be attached or detached. In other words, the back top and front decorations 3310 cannot be easily attached to and removed from the front side of the game board 5 like the rainbow single decoration part 1700, and can normally perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. It is difficult to attach the back and front decorations 3310 to the game board 5 only when checking whether the game board 5 is the same or not in a hall or factory. In addition, when the back upper front decorative body 3310 is removed from the game board 5, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 cannot be maintained. Therefore, it is not suitable as a member for checking the execution timing of a simulated rainbow effect.

As described above, the single rainbow decoration section 1700 includes a substrate on which 21 LEDs are mounted. Specifically, a top view type LED is mounted on the front surface of the board of the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 (the surface facing the front facing the player). The top view type LED is capable of emitting light toward the front (player side) of the rainbow independent decoration section 1700. For this reason, when executing a simulated rainbow effect, when executing a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow single decoration section 1700, each of the light emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is brightly visible. I can do it.

Further, as the substrate for the rainbow single decoration section 1700, a white substrate is used, in which at least the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) is painted white. When a white substrate is used as the substrate on which the LED is mounted on the front surface, it reflects light with a higher reflectance than when a substrate other than a white substrate (for example, a black substrate or a green substrate) is used. is possible. For this reason, when executing a simulated rainbow effect, when executing a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow single decoration section 1700, each of the light emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is brightly visible. I can do it.

In addition, on the front surface of the board of the rainbow single decoration section 1700 (the surface facing the front facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, a light emitting color of the same color as that constituting the rainbow light emission mode is provided. A coating film made of solder resist is formed. In other words, each of the 21 LEDs mounted on the front surface of the board of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 has a luminous color of "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow" that constitutes the rainbow luminous mode. , white", and the coating film made of solder resist is made to emit light in the same color as the LED. Specifically, a coating film made of a "red" solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "red" light among the luminescent colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and an LED that emits "purple" light is formed around the LED that emits "red" light. A covering film made of "purple" solder resist is formed around the LED, and a covering film made of "blue" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits "blue" light. A coating film made of "green" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light, and a coating film made of "orange" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits "orange" color. A coating film made of "yellow" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits "yellow" light, and a coating film made of "white" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits "white" light. A coating film is formed. Here, when the same color as the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminescent mode is used as the coating film made of solder resist, the reflectance is higher than when a different color from the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminescent mode is used. It is possible to reflect the luminescent colors that make up the rainbow luminescent mode. For this reason, when executing a simulated rainbow effect, when executing a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow single decoration section 1700, each of the luminescent colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is clearly visible. be able to.

Further, regarding the coating film made of the solder resist described above, a white solder resist is used as a base, and a solder resist of the same color as the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminous mode is added. When a white solder resist is used as the coating film made of solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a non-white solder resist is used. For this reason, when executing a simulated rainbow effect, when executing a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow single decoration section 1700, each of the emitted light colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is brightly visible. I can do it. In addition, as a coating film made of solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance as the proportion of the base white solder resist increases. It is preferable to increase the proportion of the white solder resist serving as the base rather than the solder resist having the same color as the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminescent mode.

In addition, in this example, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 When performing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of → White, but like the LED of the rainbow single decoration part 1700, each LED emits light in the order of "red, purple, blue, green, orange" that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode. The light may be emitted in any one of the following colors: yellow, white, yellow, or white. In other words, for LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, each LED is not a full color LED, but a rainbow light. A monochrome LED may be used like the decoration part 1700. Then, like the rainbow single decoration part 1700, for example, by making three predetermined colors appear at the same time and regularly switching between the three colors, a rainbow light emission mode can be realized. In such a case, the LED substrate involved in the rainbow light emission mode is a white substrate whose at least the front surface (the surface facing the front facing the player) is painted white, similar to the rainbow single decoration section 1700. It is used. In addition, on the front surface of the board of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode (the surface facing the front facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, like the rainbow single decoration part 1700, a rainbow light emission pattern is provided. A coating film made of a solder resist of the same color as the luminescent color constituting the embodiment is formed. Further, regarding the coating film made of solder resist, a white solder resist is used as a base, and a solder resist of the same color as the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminescent mode is added. As a result, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of a win or a simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 10 on the door frame 3 14 to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the single rainbow decoration part 1700. In addition, on the front surface of the board of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode (the surface facing the front facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, the same color as the light emitting color that makes up the rainbow light emission mode is A coating film made of colored solder resist is formed, so if the color of the LED emitted light does not match the color of the solder resist, it is possible to know that the LED is not installed in the correct position. can.

In the above, a white board whose at least the front surface (the surface facing the front facing the player) is painted white is used as the substrate of the LED involved in the rainbow light emission mode. As the substrate for the non-participating LED, a substrate is used that is painted in a color (for example, black or green) that is different from the emission color that constitutes the rainbow emission mode. As a result, LEDs that participate in the rainbow emission mode can reflect light with a high reflectance, whereas LEDs that do not participate in the rainbow emission mode can reflect light with a high reflectance. Since this becomes difficult, a difference occurs in the visibility of the light, and when performing a rainbow performance at the time of winning or a simulated rainbow performance, it is possible to make the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode stand out.

Note that the rainbow single decoration section 1700 has an LED mounted on the front surface of its board (the surface facing the front facing the player), and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the direct light from the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a light guide section that guides light from the LED may be provided so that the player can visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide section. Such another example will be explained with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a single rainbow decoration part 1700. Another example of the single rainbow decoration part 1700 includes a board on which seven LEDs are mounted side by side, and the board is provided in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5. The seven LEDs mounted on the front surface of the board of the separate rainbow decoration part 1700 each have a luminous color of "red, purple, blue, green, orange" that constitutes the rainbow luminous mode. It is designed to emit light in either yellow or white color. In such a case, for example, a rainbow light emission mode can be realized by making three predetermined colors appear at the same time and regularly switching between the three colors. In addition, a light guide is provided close to the seven LEDs, and by irradiating the light from the LEDs from the side of the light guide, the light guide can be made to emit light in the color of the LED light. . The front side of the board on which the seven LEDs are mounted (the front side facing the player) is covered with a cover so that the player does not see the direct light from the LEDs. In this way, by providing a light guide section that guides the light from the LED and configuring the player to visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide section, the direct view light of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode can be reduced. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where visual recognition becomes a strain on the eyes.

Furthermore, although the separate rainbow decoration part 1700 can be easily attached to and removed from the game board 5, it is also possible to remove only the light guide part without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. making it possible. Here, if only the light guide section is removed, the light guide section no longer guides the light from the LED, and the light emission (emission color) of the LED cannot be recognized. Therefore, in order to know when to execute the simulated rainbow effect, the light guide section is installed only during the confirmation period in halls, factories, etc. to confirm whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow mode can be executed normally. During other periods, the light guiding section can be removed and used. Further, even if the light guide part is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 can be maintained, so in the separate example of the rainbow single decoration part 1700, the separate example of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 includes the board on which the LED is mounted. It is preferable to remove only the light guide portion without removing the entire decorative portion 1700.

[Regarding restrictions on rainbow light emission when an abnormality is detected]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute at least a rainbow effect at the time of a win (a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. If this is not carried out, there is a risk that it will become a factor that reduces interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, if any malfunction or abnormality occurs, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 will The LEDs 8 to 9 of the door frame 3 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to restrict the execution of a light emitting effect in which they are lit in a rainbow light emission mode.

In this example, it is sufficient that at least a rainbow effect can be executed at the time of winning while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. As explained above, it is possible to execute the rainbow effect when the symbol misses while the symbol is fluctuating, to execute the effect that suggests the setting value 6 as suggestion effect A while the symbol is fluctuating, or to perform the effect that suggests the setting value 6 as the suggestion effect A while the symbol is fluctuating, or when the symbol is not fluctuating. It may also be possible to perform a simulated rainbow effect. Such a rainbow effect is the same in that it executes a light emission effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. In other words, when performing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LED 10 on the door frame 3 are linked to the display on the effect display device 1600. -14 is used to perform a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. Specifically, when performing a rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the game board 5 is LEDs 1 and 2 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are " LED 9 on door frame 3 and LED 10 on door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange" color, LEDs 11 and 12 on door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and LEDs 13 and 14 on door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white" color. ing. In other words, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in different colors for each of the two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). An LED that emits "red" light is "purple", an LED that emits "purple" is "blue", an LED that emits "blue" is "green", and an LED that emits "green" An LED that emits "orange" is "orange", an LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", an LED that emits "yellow" is "white", an LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LEDs for each two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until timing t10 is reached. Such regular changes are repeated (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 emit light in a short unit light time. By controlling the LEDs to sequentially switch between multiple emitting colors, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow mode, creating an impactful light emission. Able to perform a performance. In addition, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the emitted light color in a short time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, seven colors appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs as the rainbow light emission mode, and each light emission color is regularly switched. However, the number of colors does not have to be seven, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-like effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-style effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) from "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white". →red" in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds). Note that the target for displaying the rainbow-like effect image may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, the background image, or the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 may be the target, or the target may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The target may be an effect image displayed in the section, for example, an effect image of a character, an item, or the like.

(When an abnormality is detected on the back top and front decoration body (movable body))
As described above in detail, the back top front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 is provided with a back top front decoration body 3310 which is rectangular in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and a back top front decoration body 3310 provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310. It is equipped with a back upper front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back upper front decorative body 3310, When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the back top and front decorations 3310 are moved from the initial position to the appearance position, allowing the back top and front decorations 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, after the back top and front decorations 3310 are moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the performance, when a predetermined performance end condition is met, return control is performed to return the appearance position to the initial position. ing. In such return control, a detection sensor is used to detect whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 has returned to the initial position, and if the back upper front decorative body 3310 has not returned to the initial position, It is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If it is determined that an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decorative object 3310, the back top front decorative object 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position even if a predetermined performance condition is satisfied thereafter. This restricts the ability to control the movement of the vehicle. In addition, if it is determined that an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration 3310, return control is performed multiple times to return the back top front decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. When the back top front decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position, the determination that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side is resolved.

In the above, when a predetermined effect condition is established during a variable display or a non-variable display of a symbol, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved to the front side of the effect display device 1600. In addition to this, for example, when the power is turned on, in order to check whether the back upper front decorative body 3310 operates normally, the front decorative body 3310 can be displayed. The decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, allowing the back and front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Even in such a case, after the back top front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, return control is performed to return it from the appearance position to the initial position, and similarly, the back top front decoration body 3310 If it has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

FIG. 264 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when there is an error in the initial position of the back top and front decorative bodies 3310. In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are The LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, but in addition to this, when performing a rainbow effect, seven numbered display bodies on the back and front decoration bodies 3310 are used. A light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is being performed. Here, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the ranks of the seven rankings of sumo such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are lined up from the left, and are arranged on the back upper front decorative board. Each of the seven rankings can be decorated with light independently using LEDs. When performing the rainbow effect, each of the seven ranking display bodies is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode in which each of the seven ranking display bodies emit light in a different color. In such a rainbow light emitting display, the emitted light color for each of the seven rankings is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red." Such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds).

If no initial position error has occurred with respect to the back top front decoration body 3310, when performing a rainbow effect, the seven numbered display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310 are used to display a rainbow light emitting mode. If an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decorative body 3310 when performing a light emitting effect that lights up, the seven numbered numbers on the back top front decorative body 3310 will be changed when the rainbow effect is executed. The seven numbered display bodies on the back and front decoration body 3310 are kept in an extinguished state without performing a light emitting effect in which the display bodies are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. In other words, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration body 3310, when performing a rainbow effect, the seven numbered display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310 are used to display a rainbow light emitting mode. The execution of lighting effects is restricted. For example, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration 3310, if you execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using seven numbered indicators on the back top front decoration 3310, Since the light emitting effect lit in the rainbow light emitting mode stands out, it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back top and front decoration body 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back top front decoration body 3310, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using seven numbered display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310. By not performing this, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back top and front decoration body 3310.

In addition, if an initial position error has not occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation When an initial position error occurs for the back top and front decoration body 3310 while executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. When the rainbow effect is executed, a rainbow light emission mode is created using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. A state where LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are turned off without executing the light emission effect that lights up. It is said that In other words, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration body 3310, when performing a rainbow effect, the seven numbered display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310 are used to display a rainbow light emitting mode. In addition to restricting the execution of the light emitting effect that lights up, it also uses LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. Execution of a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted. For example, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, If only the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 in frame 3 is executed, the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the seven numbered display bodies on the back top and front decoration body 3310 will not be executed. This creates a sense of discomfort and makes it easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back and front decorations 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the performance operation unit 300 ~9. By not performing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it becomes easier to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the above, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are , LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off, but as another example, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the production operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 in the door frame 3 are involved, and instead of lighting in a rainbow lighting mode, LEDs 10 to 14 in the door frame 3 are involved and are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue). It is also possible to perform a light emitting effect. As a result, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, the LED 10 to Regarding No. 14, by performing a light emitting effect that lights up in a single color (for example, red or blue), it is possible to maintain a situation where expectations are high for the light emitting effect.

In addition, in the above, when executing the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is displayed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. Apart from the light emitting effect that lights up in a light emitting mode, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode is performed using seven numbered indicators on the back top and front decoration body 3310. The light emitting effects may not be performed separately, but may be performed integrally. In other words, when performing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, LEDs 10 to 14 on the back top and front decoration body 3310 may be integrated to emit light in a rainbow light emitting manner. In such a configuration, for example, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit If you only perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 8 to 9 on the 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, it will become an incomplete mode in which some of the luminous colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode are missing, resulting in rainbow light emission. Light is emitted in a manner that does not hold true. Therefore, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 By not performing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent light emission in a manner that does not establish a rainbow light emitting mode, and to check whether the rainbow effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to make a determination.

In this example, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, when performing a rainbow effect, rainbow light is emitted using seven numbered display bodies on the back top and front decoration body 3310. However, if an initial position error occurs for the back top and front decoration body 3310 after a predetermined period of time, such as several hours, has passed since the power was turned on, the subsequent At the time of execution of the rainbow effect, a light emitting effect is performed in which seven numbered display bodies on the back top and front decoration bodies 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, when performing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are used. A light-emitting effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner is also executed. For example, if you continue playing the game even though you are running a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode until a predetermined period of time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the power was turned on, If the user suddenly decides not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode after that, the user will feel uncomfortable that the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is not executed. However, in this example, if an initial position error occurs for the back top and front decoration body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the power was turned on, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. This can prevent such discomfort from occurring.

In addition, in this example, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration body 3310, when performing the rainbow effect, the seven numbered display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310 are used. Although we are trying not to execute a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, after a predetermined period of time such as several hours has elapsed after such an initial position error occurs, the back side will not be displayed when performing a subsequent rainbow effect. A light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting manner is performed using seven numbered display bodies in the upper front decoration body 3310. In such a case, when performing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are used. A light-emitting effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner is also executed. In such a case, no work is performed to resolve the initial position error until a predetermined period of time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the initial position error occurred for the back and front decorative body 3310. become. In this regard, in this example, after a predetermined period of time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the initial position error occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, the light emitted in the rainbow light emission mode is turned on when performing the rainbow effect. By executing the effect, the back top front decorative body 3310 stands out, making it easier to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decorative body 3310, and an operation to eliminate the initial position error is performed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which this is not being carried out from continuing.

In addition, in this example, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration body 3310, when performing the rainbow effect, the seven numbered display bodies on the back top front decoration body 3310 are used. In addition to the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow effect is created using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. Although the light emitting effect that lights up in the light emitting mode is not executed, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emitting mode (back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect) The LEDs 8 to 9 on the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) are used for effects other than the rainbow effect. If an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, a variation pattern for performing a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect when winning or a rainbow effect when missing) is determined and the rainbow effect is performed. During the variable display of the symbols to be executed, the LED constituting the rainbow light emission mode is not lit when performing a performance other than the rainbow performance. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that does not execute a rainbow effect is determined and a symbol that does not execute a rainbow effect is displayed in a variable manner, when an effect other than a rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode are lit. I have to. In such a configuration, for example, as a preview effect to anticipate a rainbow effect, the back and front decorations 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a preview performance is no longer executed, and the player has expectations for a rainbow performance. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect when winning or a rainbow effect when missing), the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 , LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are involved in a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Regardless of the emitted light colors that make up the aspect, the light emitting effect continues according to the fluctuating pattern. On the other hand, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 will be The LEDs do not turn off like LEDs 1 to 4 on panel 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on door frame 3, and respond to the fluctuation pattern. We are trying to continue the light-emitting effect. As a result, if an initial position error has occurred with respect to the upper and lower back decorations 3310, the LEDs 15 to 15 of the game board 5 will not perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light mode when a rainbow effect is executed. Regarding No. 17, by continuing the light emission performance according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to maintain a situation where expectations are high for the light emission performance according to the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back top and front decoration body 3310, the effect display device The 1600 display area is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-like effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In other words, if an initial position error has occurred for the back top and front decoration body 3310, the back top and front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 The LEDs 5 to 7 of the production operation unit 300, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not involved to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. I'm trying to display a staged image. As a result, as long as one pays attention to the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (the light emitted by the back and front decorations 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14), it is not possible to determine whether or not a rainbow effect is being executed. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it is possible to understand that a rainbow effect is being performed using a rainbow-style effect image.

(When a situation arises in which the rainbow-like effect image cannot be visually recognized)
As described above, when performing a rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. As for the rainbow effect image, if another image is displayed in front of it, the player will not be able to visually recognize it. In this way, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, The LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to restrict the execution of the light emission effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light intensity adjustment operation using the light intensity adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227 occurs. One example is time. The dish unit 200 of this example is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. The LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 include LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs on the door frame 3. Regarding the LEDs 10 to 14, the light amount can be adjusted in stages by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of light intensity of the LED from 1 (lowest light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 upward, the larger the level becomes. , the light intensity of the LED increases, and as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward and the step becomes smaller, the light intensity of the LED decreases. The dish unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. As for the sounds output from various speakers (body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted in stages by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume levels output from various speakers from 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume) by operating the volume adjustment button 227 upward. As the level increases, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the level decreases by operating the volume control button 227 in a downward direction, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. Note that the light intensity and volume can be adjusted both when the symbols are changing and when they are not changing.

When the light amount is adjusted using the light amount adjustment button 228, a light amount adjustment image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to notify the level of the light amount of the LED, and the volume is adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. During operation, a volume adjustment image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to notify the level of volume output from various speakers. These light amount adjustment images and volume adjustment images are displayed on the front side of the rainbow-style effect image on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, when performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 or a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227, at least a portion of the rainbow-like effect image can be visually recognized by the light amount adjustment image and the volume adjustment image. Therefore, it is determined that a situation has occurred in which the rainbow effect image cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. In addition, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed due to the end of the light intensity adjustment operation using the light intensity adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment image and the volume By deleting the adjusted image and returning to a situation where the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized, the determination that a situation has occurred where the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side is resolved. I try to do that.

In addition, a situation may occur in which the rainbow-like effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, in which case the back top and front decorative bodies 3310 abnormally stop while being moved to the appearance position on the front side of the effect display device 1600. There are cases where The back top front decorative body 3310 of this example moves from the initial position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is established, allowing the back top front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. ing. Furthermore, after the back top and front decorations 3310 are moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the performance, when a predetermined performance end condition is met, return control is performed to return the appearance position to the initial position. However, in such return control, there are cases where the back top front decoration body 3310 abnormally stops while being moved to the appearance position, and the back top front decoration body 3310 does not return to the initial position. In such a case, due to the abnormal stop of the back and front decoration body 3310, at least a part of the rainbow-like effect image becomes invisible, so the rainbow-like effect image is not displayed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It has been determined that a situation has occurred where the vehicle cannot be visually recognized. Further, when it is determined that the back top front decoration body 3310 has abnormally stopped at the appearance position, return control is performed multiple times to return the back top front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, When the back top and front decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position, the situation returns to a state where the rainbow-like effect image can be visually recognized, so a situation arises in which the rainbow-like effect image cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. I am trying to eliminate the judgment that I am doing.

FIG. 265 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which the effect image in the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized in the effect display device 1600. In this example, if there is no situation in which the rainbow effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back and front decorations 3310 and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 , the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas the effect display device 1600 If a situation occurs in which the rainbow effect image cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 ~7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not involved in executing a light emission performance in which they are lit in a rainbow light emission mode, and are kept in a state where they are turned off. In other words, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (back top, front Execution of a light emitting effect in which the decorative body 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14 are lit in a rainbow light emitting manner is restricted. For example, if a situation occurs in which a rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, if only a light emitting effect is executed in which the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode. , a sense of discomfort arises when the rainbow-like effect image cannot be visually recognized. However, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the effect image in the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emitted in the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. By not performing the performance, it is possible to prevent such a sense of discomfort from occurring.

In addition, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow performance is executed, the back top and front decorations 3310, the LED 1 of the game board 5 ~4. LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to prevent the light emission effect from lighting up in a rainbow light emission mode. Even if the state is restored to a state in which a rainbow-style performance image can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the situation is continued in which the light-emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light-emission mode is not executed during the remaining time. For example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to a situation where the rainbow-like effect image can be visually recognized is too short, the back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow effect will not be executed. It may not be possible to determine whether the Therefore, in this example, even if the situation returns to a state in which the rainbow effect image can be seen during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode will not be executed for the remaining time. By continuing, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed.

In addition, in the above, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7 of the production operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off, but as another example, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450. , instead of the light emitting effect in which LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and are lit in a single color (for example, red or A light emitting effect that lights up in blue) may be performed. As a result, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the door frame Regarding the LEDs 10 to 14 in No. 3, by performing a light emitting effect in which they are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue), it is possible to maintain a situation in which expectations can be given to the light emitting effect.

In addition, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect when winning or a rainbow effect when missing), the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 , LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are involved in a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Regardless of the emitted light colors that make up the aspect, the light emitting effect continues according to the fluctuating pattern. On the other hand, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow effect image on the effect display device 1600 is not visible, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 will be The LEDs do not turn off like the body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, but fluctuate. The lighting effect continues according to the pattern. As a result, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the game board Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17 of No. 5, by continuing the light emission performance according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to maintain a situation where expectations can be given to the light emission performance according to the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this example, in a situation where the rainbow-like effect image on the effect display device 1600 is visible, balls are jammed (for example, many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580, and the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B). Even if an abnormality occurs such as a full state), when performing a rainbow effect, the back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit The LEDs 8 to 9 of the door frame 3 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emitting effect in which they are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. For example, in a situation where a rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 is visible, if the light emitting effect in which the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is lit in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, the rainbow light emission mode is displayed. It feels strange that the light emitting effect that lights up is not executed. However, in this example, such a sense of discomfort can be prevented by executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode in a situation where a rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 is visible. .

(When an abnormality is detected in a pachinko machine)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame The LEDs 10 to 14 of 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, but if any abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs 10 to 14 are used in conjunction with the display on the effect display device 1600. Execution of a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 is restricted. ing. Furthermore, depending on the type of abnormality in the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs (back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 5 to 7 of the production operation unit 300, Execution of light emission other than LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is also restricted.

Specifically, the abnormalities for the pachinko machine 1 include a first abnormality in which there is a low possibility that fraudulent activity is occurring, a second abnormality in which there is a medium possibility that fraudulent activity is occurring, and fraudulent activity. There is a third abnormality in which there is a high possibility that an act has been committed. The first abnormality is that many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B, and the game balls B are transferred to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. There are conditions in which it is no longer possible to emit. In such a state, many game balls B are simply put out from the payout device 580, and it is determined that the first abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. In addition, when the balls are removed from the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 and the state is returned to where the game balls B can be released to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202, the first We are trying to eliminate the judgment that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, a second abnormality includes a state in which the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. In such a state, there is a possibility that the hall clerk simply opened the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and it is determined that a second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the determination that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is resolved.

In addition, the third abnormality is that the vibration sensor that detects the vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the machine 1 is detecting vibrations, or that the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a magnet. There is a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050, which detects the magnetism that is applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing it close. In such a state, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out due to vibration or magnetism, and a third abnormality may occur on the main control board 1310 side while the detection signal from the vibration sensor or magnetic sensor is being input. It is determined that this is occurring. In addition, even if the state is returned to a state where no vibration or magnetism is detected, the determination that a third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is not resolved, and the power is turned on again. By doing so, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is resolved.

FIG. 266 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. In this example, if the first to third abnormalities do not occur, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back and front decorations 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, if the first abnormality occurs, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 light up in a single color (for example, red or blue) when the rainbow effect is executed. As for the remaining back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the production operation unit 300, a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is created. Running. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which expectations are high for the light-emitting effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode.

In addition, if the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the upper and lower back decorations 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not involved to execute a light emission production that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14), an error notification effect is performed in which they light up in a single color (for example, red or blue). In other words, if the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs before the rainbow effect is executed, the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (back upper front decoration 3310, LED1 - 14) The execution of the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted. As a result, a situation arises in which it is impossible to know that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to make the player aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, if the first to third abnormalities do not occur, the back and front decorations 3310, the game board 5, , LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue to emit light according to the variable pattern, regardless of the emitted light colors that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode. On the other hand, if the first abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 will be in a state where the LEDs have notified an error like LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. Instead, the light emitting effect continues according to the fluctuating pattern. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern when performing the rainbow effect, expectations for the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. It is possible to maintain a favorable situation.

Similarly, when the second abnormality has occurred, when executing the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 are the LEDs (back top and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14), the LED does not go into a state where an error notification is given, and continues to produce light emission according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, when the second abnormality occurs, the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 will be activated according to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the light emitting effect, it is possible to maintain a situation where expectations are high for the light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern, while notifying the pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred. .

On the other hand, when the third abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are ), the LED is turned on in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify an error, and the light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality has occurred, not only will the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light mode be not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but also the fluctuation pattern of the LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 will be changed. To make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of fraudulent act is being carried out by eliminating a situation in which expectations are raised for a light emission effect according to a variation pattern by not executing a light emission effect according to a variation pattern. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, if the first to third abnormalities occur, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of abnormality. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if an image notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow-like effect image remains visible, whereas the second abnormality or a third abnormality has occurred, when the image notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow-like effect image will not be visible, and depending on the rainbow-like effect image, the rainbow-like effect may be displayed. It is made so that it is impossible to know that the performance is being performed.

FIG. 267 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the first to third abnormalities occur during execution of the rainbow effect. In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LED 10 of the door frame 3 ~14 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner. If the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 light up in a single color (for example, red or blue), and the remaining The back and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are configured to continue the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. ing. Thereby, it is possible to make the player aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which expectations are high for the light emitting effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, The light emitting effect in which LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is stopped, and the LEDs (back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) that make up the rainbow light emission mode are ), an error notification effect is performed that lights up in a single color (for example, red or blue). That is, if the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emitting area (back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600 Execution of a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted. As a result, a situation arises in which it is impossible to know that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to make the player aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning and rainbow effect at the time of miss), the back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect While LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 participate in a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 perform a rainbow light emission mode. Regardless of the constituent emitted light colors, the light emitting effect continues according to the fluctuating pattern. On the other hand, if the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 will not be in a state where the LEDs have notified an error like LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. First, the light emitting effect is continued according to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, if the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern, expectations can be raised for the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern. able to maintain the situation.

Similarly, if the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (back top and front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) The LED does not go into an error notification state as shown in the figure, but continues to emit light in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. As a result, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is canceled, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 will emit light according to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the performance, it is possible to maintain a situation where expectations are high for the light emission performance according to the fluctuation pattern, even while notifying the pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, if the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 (back top and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode will In this way, the LED is lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify an error, and the light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, if the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, not only will the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light mode be canceled, but the LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 will also be changed according to the fluctuation pattern. By discontinuing the light emitting effect, it is possible to eliminate a situation where expectations are high for a light emitting effect that corresponds to the fluctuating pattern, and to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. .

Furthermore, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, if the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution period of the rainbow effect, an image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if an image notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow-like effect image remains visible, whereas the second abnormality or the second abnormality If the abnormality described in 3 occurs, when an image notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow effect image may not be visible, and depending on the rainbow effect image, the rainbow effect may be in progress. I am trying to make it impossible for me to understand that this is the case.

In addition, in this example, when the second abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back and front decorations 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 , the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to prevent the execution of a light emission effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. Similarly, if the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 The LEDs 8 to 9 of the door frame 3 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light emission mode. Under such circumstances, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode will not be executed for the remaining time. . For example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to a situation where the rainbow-like effect image can be visually recognized is too short, the back and front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow effect will not be executed. It may not be possible to determine whether there is a Therefore, in this example, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, during the remaining time, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, so that the rainbow effect is not performed. It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which it is impossible to determine whether or not the performance is being executed.

[Rainbow effect with increasing and decreasing rainbow emitting LEDs]
In the above, the rainbow effect is executed as a highly anticipated effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and when the rainbow effect is executed, it is linked to the display on the effect display device 1600. Then, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is executed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. However, in this example, a ring-shaped decoration part 1710 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring is provided as a light-emitting decoration involved in the rainbow light emission mode, and when performing a rainbow effect, the LEDs of the ring-shaped decoration part 1710 are A case where a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed using this will be described below. Such an annular decoration part 1710 allows the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode to be increased or decreased, making it possible to change the impact on the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

FIG. 269 is an explanatory diagram showing the annular decorative portion 1710. The annular decoration part 1710 includes a first annular decoration part 1710A in which seven LEDs are arranged in an annular manner on the inside, and 14 LEDs having a larger number of LEDs than the first annular decoration part 1710A on the outside. A second annular decorative portion 1710B in which LEDs are arranged is provided. The annular decoration part 1710 allows each of the first annular decoration part 1710A and the second annular decoration part 1710B to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. Note that the annular decorative portion 1710 is provided as one of the light-emitting decorations provided within the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5.

In this example, during the execution period of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs of the first annular decoration part 1710A are involved and light up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow light emission mode is used in which each of the LEDs of the first annular decoration part 1710A emits light in a different color. Turn it on. In the first annular decoration part 1710A having such a rainbow light emitting mode, the emission color emitted by each of the LEDs of the first annular decoration part 1710A is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → ``red'' in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated.

In addition, during the execution period of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs of the second annular decoration part 1710B are involved and light up in a rainbow light emission mode, two adjacent LEDs in the second annular decoration part 1710B are treated as one group, and the two LEDs are Each of the groups is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode in which each group emits light in a different color. In the second annular decoration part 1710B having such a rainbow light emitting mode, the emitted light color emitted by each of the two groups of LEDs is predetermined as "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red". I try to make changes in a fixed order and repeat these regular changes.

In this way, the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B can be controlled so that their respective emitted light colors are sequentially switched to a plurality of emitted colors in a short unit light emitting time. It becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light mode, and it is possible to perform an impactful light emission effect. In addition, regarding the LEDs of the first annular decoration part 1710A, the seven LEDs are controlled in conjunction with each other to cause the seven LEDs to emit light in a plurality of colors so that they emit light in different colors, and also to emit light in a short time. By switching the colors, you can create a more impactful lighting effect than usual. Similarly, regarding the LEDs of the second annular decoration part 1710B, the 14 LEDs are controlled in conjunction with each other so that each of the two groups of LEDs emit light in a plurality of colors, and further shortened. By switching the emitting color over time, it is possible to create a more impactful lighting effect than usual.

In this example, seven colors appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs as the rainbow light emission mode, and each light emission color is regularly switched. However, the number of colors does not have to be seven, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

In this example, as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute a rainbow performance as a high expectation performance during the fluctuation display of the symbol, and a rainbow performance at the time of a hit where a hit is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol, Although the rainbow effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the symbols, a rainbow effect at the time of a miss is set in which a miss is derived as a result of the fluctuating display of the symbols. In other words, when it is a win, it is possible to determine a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when the game is won, and when it is a loss, it is possible to determine a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when it is a loss. Then, when a miss occurs, by making the ratio of determining the variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect when a miss is lower than the variation pattern that executes another effect when a miss occurs, the rainbow effect when a miss occurs is lower than the variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect when a miss occurs. The frequency of performance execution is reduced. As a result, when performing a rainbow effect, although it is not possible to determine whether the rainbow effect is a hit or a miss, there is a high probability that the rainbow effect will be executed when a win occurs, and the probability of a win is high. It is starting to suggest that.

FIG. 270 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using the annular decoration part 1710. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. A variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started on the effect display device 1600. Then, if a variation pattern at the time of a win that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a win is determined, or a variation pattern at the time of a loss that executes a rainbow effect at the time of a miss is determined, a variation display of the symbol is displayed. When the elapsed time from the start of the process reaches a predetermined timing, the first annular decoration part 1710A of the annular decoration parts 1710 is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode (rainbow effect). Start.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect using the first annular decoration part 1710A, when the subsequent rainbow effect (the rainbow effect using the second annular decoration part 1710B) is executed in the effect display device 1600, If it is a hit and the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration part 1710B) is not executed, a display explaining that it is a loss (for example, "Rainbow light emission using the second annular decoration part 1710B") If you do, you win! If the second annular decoration part 1710B does not emit rainbow light, you win!'') is executed.

When the variation pattern at the time of winning is determined to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting the light emitting effect in which the first annular decoration part 1710A lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, at a predetermined timing, In addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is performed. In other words, both the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B perform a light emission effect in which they light up in a rainbow light emission mode. As a result, after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, when the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed, It is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a win, and in order to know whether it is a win or not, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting manner using the second annular decoration part 1710B is executed. It is possible to draw attention to whether the

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, at a predetermined timing, a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is started. When a light emitting effect is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that makes it clear that the fluctuating display of symbols being executed is a win. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "Congratulations!") to notify that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a win and the result is a happy result. As a result, a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decoration part 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B has been executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly understand that the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed is a win by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, at a predetermined timing, a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is started. When a light emitting effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-like effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. . In such a rainbow-like effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) from red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white. →red" in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated. Note that the target for displaying the rainbow-like effect image may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, the background image, or the target may be the effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, or the target may be a background image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The target may be an effect image displayed in the section, for example, an effect image of a character, an item, or the like. As a result, a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decoration part 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B has been executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly understand that the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed is a win by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern at the time of failure in which a rainbow effect is executed when the failure occurs is determined, after starting the light emission effect in which the first annular decoration part 1710A lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the second The light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the annular decorative portion 1710B is not performed. In other words, even if a predetermined timing is reached after the first annular decoration part 1710A is used to start the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the second annular decoration part 1710B is used to turn on the light in a rainbow light emission mode. No light emitting effect is performed, the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B remains off, and only the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A continues to be lit in a rainbow light emission mode. . As a result, when the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is not executed after the start of the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, In order to be able to grasp that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed will be a miss, and to know whether or not it will be a hit, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner using the second annular decoration part 1710B is executed. You can draw attention to whether or not it will be done.

In addition, as a rainbow effect when it comes off, after starting a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B. If this is not executed, a specific image is displayed on the performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing to prevent the user from recognizing that the fluctuating display of symbols being executed is a win. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "Unfortunate!") to notify that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is a failure and the result is disappointing. As a result, a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decoration part 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is not to be executed. Even if the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to clearly understand that the fluctuating display of the symbol being executed is out of order.

In addition, as a rainbow effect when it comes off, after starting a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B. If this is not executed, the effect image in the rainbow mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing.

In this example, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, the second annular decoration part 1710B is used at a predetermined timing. In contrast to adding and executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, when performing an off-color rainbow effect, after starting a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, At a predetermined timing, the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is continued without performing the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B. I have to. In other words, when performing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, not only the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A but also the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B will be lit in the rainbow light emission mode, and will participate in the rainbow light emission mode. The number of LEDs used is increasing. Thereby, it is possible to easily understand whether or not the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed will be a hit, depending on whether the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode increases or not. Further, by increasing the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed becomes a win, and the player's desire to play can be excessively increased.

In addition, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B are configured to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. However, the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B may be configured to be integrated and illuminated in a rainbow light emission mode. Furthermore, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, in addition to the state in which the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. However, from the state where the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A is turned off, and the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B is turned off. It may be configured to switch to a state where the light is lit in a rainbow light emission mode. Even in such a configuration, since the second annular decoration part 1710B has a larger number of LEDs than the first annular decoration part 1710A, when performing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode are The number will increase.

As a rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, after the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B are illuminated in a rainbow illumination mode, the winning result (winning pattern) is notified as a result of the display of the changing patterns. However, during the notification of the winning result, only the illumination effect using the first annular decorative part 1710A is executed without executing the illumination effect using the second annular decorative part 1710B in a rainbow illumination mode. In other words, when the rainbow effect occurs when a winning combination occurs, both the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B are illuminated, whereas during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B is turned off, and only the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A is illuminated in a rainbow illumination mode. In such a case, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. Here, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, a state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased is generated because a light emission performance that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed, but during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, only the light emission performance that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is executed, thereby reducing the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, during the notification of the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is executed, and in the rainbow effect at the time of a miss. Although the same effect as the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is executed, it does not have to be the same effect, and the rainbow effect is more Any structure may be used as long as the impact on the light emission mode is reduced. In addition, during the notification of the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow lighting mode is reduced compared to when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning. However, any structure may be used as long as the impact on the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of winning. For example, when executing a rainbow effect at the time of a win, when executing a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the light emitting color of the LED is switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), whereas the rainbow effect at the time of a win is While notifying the winning result after executing the effect, when executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, the LED light emitting color is configured to be switched at a slower speed (for example, 1 second) than the normal speed. You may. In other words, during the notification of the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of a win, the LED lights up in a rainbow light emission mode so that the interval at which the emitted light color of the LED is switched is longer than when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of a win. You may also perform a light emitting effect. Even in such a configuration, the interval at which the LED light emitting color is switched becomes longer during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, so the player's desire to play increases excessively. By reducing the situation, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

Also, for example, when executing a rainbow effect at the time of a win, the light intensity of the LED is increased when executing a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas the winning result is notified after the rainbow effect is executed at the time of a win. In some cases, the light intensity of the LEDs may be lowered when performing a light emitting effect in which the lights are turned on in a rainbow light emission mode. In other words, during the notification of the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is performed so that the light intensity of the LED is lower than when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning. You may. Even in such a configuration, the light intensity of the LED decreases during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, so that the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively increased is reduced; In subsequent games, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game.

In addition, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, not only the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, but also the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. In the effect display device 1600, the effect image in a rainbow mode is displayed, but during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A is displayed in the rainbow light emitting mode. The LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B does not light up in the rainbow light emission mode, and the effect display device 1600 does not display the effect image in the rainbow mode. Even in such a configuration, since the effect image in the rainbow mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the player's desire to play may be excessively increased. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

As mentioned above in detail, it is possible to attach the rainbow individual decoration part 1700 to the game board 5, and during the execution of a rainbow effect such as a simulated rainbow effect or a rainbow effect at the time of winning, the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decoration section 1700 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. As a result, during execution of the rainbow effect, even if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode do not light up, the rainbow single decoration section 1700 will continue to emit light in the rainbow light emission mode. By visually checking , it is possible to know that the rainbow effect is being executed. In this regard, in this example, when performing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, the first annular decoration part 1710A and the second annular decoration part 1710B are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. , the LED of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is used to execute a notification effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, while the first annular decoration part 1710A is used to notify the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning. is used to perform a light emitting effect in which the LEDs are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode, but the notification effect in which the LEDs in the rainbow single decoration section 1700 are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode is not executed. Regarding this, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, it is important to make the player aware that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed so that the player does not miss any useful information. Even if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs of the annular decoration part 1710A and the second annular decoration part 1710B do not light up, the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode in the rainbow single decoration part 1700 can be visually confirmed. In this way, it is possible to know that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of winning. On the other hand, while notifying the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the first annular decorative part 1710A is used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, but this is beneficial for the player. This is not information that should necessarily be conveyed to the player, so regardless of whether an abnormality has occurred in which some of the LEDs of the first annular decoration part 1710A do not light up, the information of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is The configuration is such that the LED does not light up in a rainbow light emission mode.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect when missing is executed, the rainbow effect when missing is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed after the rainbow effect when missing is finished. The time fluctuation pattern is not determined, and the rainbow effect is restricted from being performed again when the time is off. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed after the rainbow effect at the time of winning ends. Regarding the rainbow effect of time, there are no restrictions on its execution. As a result, in a short period of time such as a specific period, the rainbow effect will not repeat when it misses, and people will lose trust in the rainbow effect, which is performed as a highly anticipated effect that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning. You can now look forward to the next rainbow performance. In addition, if a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is started as a rainbow effect before a specific period of time has elapsed after the rainbow effect at the time of failure has ended, The rainbow effect is not a rainbow effect at the time of a miss, and instead of waiting for the addition and execution of a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B, the rainbow effect at the time of a win is performed. It is possible to know that the process is being executed.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of a hit, rainbow effect at the time of a miss) is executed as an effect while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, but this is not limited to this. During a specific period such as during a game, after performing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative section 1710A, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative section 1710B is executed. A rainbow effect may be performed to determine whether or not to do so. In this case, after the first annular decoration part 1710A is used to perform the light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whether to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B. The player may be made aware of whether some kind of gaming profit (probability fluctuation, time saving, etc.) will be given after the winning game is executed, depending on the situation of the rainbow performance. Furthermore, after performing the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, since information useful to the player has been obtained, the second annular decorative portion 1710B is Instead of performing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, it is only necessary to perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the excessive increase in the player's desire to play, and prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

Also, as mentioned above in detail, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect when winning, rainbow effect when missing), it is possible to determine whether or not it will be a hit when operating a predetermined operation section. As the button effects, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C may be performed. Additionally, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect when winning, rainbow effect when missing), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (for example, "Press the light intensity adjustment button!") that prompts you to operate a predetermined operation section. It may also be configured such that the button operation promotion performance is not executed, and the button performances A to C function as a "hidden performance" during the execution of the rainbow performance (rainbow performance at the time of a hit, rainbow performance at the time of a miss). . For example, as button effect A, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, At least the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode changes. On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the rainbow light emission mode of the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is activated. The amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the will not change. In other words, after starting a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A as a rainbow effect, when the light amount can be adjusted, it is determined that the rainbow effect is a rainbow effect when the rainbow effect is off. Therefore, it is possible to know that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed without waiting for the addition and execution of the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B. . As a result, players who normally actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 can quickly grasp whether or not they will win, and players who do not usually actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 can By drawing attention to whether or not to perform an additional light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting manner using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, the user can thoroughly enjoy whether or not he or she will win.

In addition, in this example, when a rainbow effect is executed at the time of winning, a light emitting effect is executed in which the first annular decoration part 1710A and the second annular decoration part 1710B are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. While notifying the winning result after executing the rainbow effect, only the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is executed. During the notification of the winning result, the execution period of the light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is configured to be longer than when the rainbow effect is performed at the time of winning. Here, during the notification of the winning result after executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, so the rainbow light emission Although it is difficult to recognize whether the light is lit in the rainbow mode or not, by making the execution period of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode longer than the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the rainbow light emission mode is turned on. It is possible to reliably recognize whether the light is on or not.

Regarding the rainbow production of the present invention, various rainbow productions are individually explained as necessary, but it is also possible to execute only one of these rainbow productions, or to execute them in parallel by combining these rainbow productions. It may be something that is executed. For example, as a rainbow effect, a rainbow effect when winning, a rainbow effect when missing, and a simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. In addition, in the rainbow effect of the present invention, not only LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, but also LEDs of components other than the game board 5 (LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, The LEDs 10 to 14) shown in Figure 3 are used to perform a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but it is sufficient to use multiple LEDs to realize the rainbow light-emitting mode; for example, only the LEDs on the game board 5 can be used. It may be configured to perform a light emitting effect in which the light is lit in a rainbow light emitting manner using the light source.

[First embodiment regarding transmission cutoff situation]
In this example, the setting value can be confirmed by performing a setting confirmation operation in which the power switch 630a is turned on while the setting key switch 1311a is kept in the ON operation when the power is turned on. Specifically, the power switch 630a is turned OFF, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned ON with the setting key ON. When the power switch 630a is turned on, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control board 1310, and the state shifts to a setting confirmation state in which setting values can be confirmed. In addition, in this example, a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 is used to detect magnetism, and a configuration in which the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit can be used to detect the magnetic field. A configuration that detects vibrations using a vibration sensor that detects vibrations applied to the machine 1, a configuration that detects the opening and closing of the door frame 3, a configuration that detects the connection status of various wiring, and an external device via the external terminal board 558. It has a configuration that outputs information regarding the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer (hall computer), and these configurations make it possible to detect and notify whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, thereby preventing fraud. We are monitoring whether there is any activity. However, in the settings confirmation state, many of the above-mentioned monitoring functions are not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience during regular work, and in such configurations, the "Settings confirmation There is a risk that ``fraud that takes advantage of the situation'' may be committed. This point will be explained below.

First, as a conventional method of fraud, for example, a fraudulent board (a so-called hanging board) is connected to the main control board 1310, and a ball entered into the main control board 1310 is inputted to the main control board 1310 when a player starts winning, contrary to the original game. Examples include illegally inputting a signal, illegally stopping the changing display of special symbols at a jackpot symbol, and illegally causing a jackpot game.If such fraudulent boards are discovered late, the game hall will lose a large amount of money. You will suffer significant damage. In order to carry out such fraud (installation of unauthorized circuit boards), it is necessary to open and close the door frame 3, connect and disconnect various wiring, and also to avoid various monitoring such as vibrations associated with fraudulent activities and magnetism generated from unauthorized equipment. Traditionally, many fraudulent acts were committed outside of the game hall's business hours. However, in recent years, gaming machines (pachinko) that have the above-mentioned setting confirmation state (a state in which the various monitoring functions described above are not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience during regular work) have become popular. There is a concern that the above-mentioned fraud (installation of unauthorized boards) may be carried out even during business hours of the gaming hall by exploiting this setting confirmation state. For example, it is conceivable to illegally generate a setting confirmation state by some method, use the period of the setting confirmation state to attach an unauthorized board, and end the setting confirmation state in a short period of time. A plurality of wirings are connected to the main control board 1310 using a connector, but there is a possibility that such a fraudulent board is connected using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310. For example, the wires used for connection with the peripheral control board 1510 may be removed from the main control board 1310 and the incorrect board may be relayed to the wiring, or the incorrect board may be connected to an empty connector due to the removal, and the main control board may be removed. 1310 and gain unauthorized access to the main control board 1310 side.

Note that the wiring used to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is a command line that transmits command signals from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side. This command line is connected to the main control board 1310 with a connector and also to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command line, a plurality of wirings are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and one of the wirings is a power line to which power is supplied from the power supply board 630. Regarding such a peripheral control board 1510, as long as the power line is connected, the peripheral control MPU can operate even if the command line is disconnected, and the peripheral control board 1510 can issue operation instructions. The components include the effect display device 1600, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 (lamp A: frame lamp), and LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (lamp B: board lamp). ), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, etc. can be operated. In this example, we will discuss a method to prevent ``fraud by abusing the configuration confirmation status'' by performing special operations when such a command line is interrupted (transmission interruption situation) or when it is reconnected. , explained below.

(Control when transmission cutoff situation does not occur during setting confirmation state)
FIG. 271 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the connection of the command line (the wiring used to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510) is maintained during the setting confirmation state. Here, in a normal situation where the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is maintained (in a situation where no fraud has occurred), the setting confirmation state is A case is described in which the setting confirmation notification that is being executed during the state is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 271, first, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at timing ts, a transition is made to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Specifically, at timing ts, when a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a changes the specific area of the built-in RAM. The current setting value (the value set among setting value 1 to setting value 6) stored in is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Further, in the setting confirmation state, even if the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the setting value is not changed in response to this pressing operation. After confirming the current setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing tx, thereby ending the setting confirmation state and transitioning to the normal state. Specifically, at timing tx, when a setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a changes the setting value to the setting display 1310g. It is designed to switch from displaying to hiding.

Further, the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx is a period in which it is impossible to start a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. That is, in the setting confirmation state, even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of special symbols will not be started, and the starting winning will not be suspended. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, there is a period in which a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the setting confirmation state is finished, when there is a starting winning, the variable display of the special symbol can start, and when the variable display of the special symbol stops displaying at the winning symbol, It is possible to play a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

Further, at timing ts, when a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 performs a setting confirmation to notify the start of the setting confirmation state. A start command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Furthermore, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing tx, the main control board 1310 performs a setting confirmation to notify the end of the setting confirmation state. A termination command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether to start the setting confirmation state or whether to end the setting confirmation state and transition to the normal state.

Additionally, the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate include the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5. There are LEDs (board lamps), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and door frame 3, etc. For these components, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a setting confirmation start command at timing ts. Based on the reception, an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed. In this way, when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the hall manager checks the setting values on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, at least the peripheral control on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. By executing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state by the member instructed by the board 1510, the system notifies the outside that it is in the setting confirmation state and understands that it is a state in which caution should be taken to prevent fraudulent acts. can be done. Regarding the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, not all of the multiple LEDs but a specific LED performs the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and the other LEDs perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. It may be configured to perform normal operation (normal light emission). In addition, LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are used to indicate when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state described later is continuing or when the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification described later is executed. ), a specific LED may perform that operation, and the other LEDs may perform normal operation (normal light emission).

Specifically, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, "Setting confirmation in progress" on the screen as a setting confirmation display different from the normal display. In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are in a lighting state for setting confirmation, which is different from the normal lighting, for example, in a single color and with strong intensity. I am trying to turn it on depending on the brightness. In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are in a lighting state for setting confirmation, which is different from the normal lighting, for example, in a single color and with strong intensity. I am trying to turn it on depending on the brightness. However, the light emitting state for setting confirmation may be a specific light emitting state different from normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and may be a state in which all or part of the LED is turned off. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be made different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 light up in a single color with strong brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 By turning off the LEDs, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 will stand out, allowing you to understand that they are in a specific light emission state that is different from normal light emission. can be done. In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the speaker outputs, for example, a notification sound "Setting confirmation in progress" as a notification sound for setting confirmation that is different from the normal display.

After the setting confirmation state is completed at timing tx, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting confirmation end command, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate performs the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. , and resume normal operation. Here, in normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start (for example, a state of waiting for a customer). When the member to which the movement is instructed is operated and the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is to instruct the movement is to perform the variation display based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command. (a performance based on a fluctuation pattern). For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variable display of decorative patterns, and displays the effect on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the game board 5 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. Thus, the speaker outputs audio in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are in a stopped state. After the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the initial operation of the movable body based on receiving the setting confirmation end command. Here, in the initial movement of the movable body, it is confirmed whether the movable body operates normally between the initial position and the appearance position, and accurate positioning is performed so that the movable body waits at the initial position. It is supposed to be done. After the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the movable body starts its normal operation. For example, the movable body is allowed to operate during a demonstration in which the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, or during execution of a variable performance that is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. However, if an error occurs during the initial movement of the movable body and the movable body cannot operate normally, the movable body will not operate even if the timing at which it should operate has come after the initial movement of the movable body. It is designed not to. In addition, during the initial operation of the movable body, after the setting confirmation state has ended at timing tx, it is possible to already start the variable display of the special symbol, but during the variable display of the special symbol that has started. Even when the timing for the movable body to move is reached, the initial movement of the movable body is given priority and the movable body does not move as a variable performance executed during the fluctuation performance.

By the way, the main control board 1310 makes it possible to output information regarding the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558. Specifically, the external terminal board 558 is activated when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (determined), when a prize is entered into various starting slots, when a jackpot is hit, when the time is shortened, when a prize ball is paid out, when magnetism or vibration is detected, etc. Outputs a signal to an external device (hall computer) using the corresponding terminal among the multiple terminals provided on the hall computer, allowing the external device (hall computer) to grasp various information. . In this example, a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 is used to detect magnetism, and a structure in which the pachinko machine 1 is detected by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 is used. The device is configured to detect vibrations using a vibration sensor that detects vibrations applied to the device, but when magnetism or vibrations are detected, a security signal is output using a predetermined terminal of the external terminal board 558. ing. As a result, the external device (hall computer) can also determine whether magnetism or vibration has been detected, and can monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state A in which the security signal is continuously output and other outputs are disabled. In this way, in the setting confirmation state, the same security signal as that output when magnetism or vibration is detected is output. However, when magnetism or vibration is detected, a security signal is output for a short time, whereas in a setting confirmation state, a security signal is output for a long time until the setting confirmation state ends. This allows the external device (hall computer) to know whether magnetism or vibration has been detected or whether the settings are being checked, and if the settings are being checked, it can be used to prevent fraudulent activities. It can help them understand that it is a period when they should be cautious. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, signals other than security signals (for example, signals when special symbols stop changing (confirmed), when winning in various starting openings, when hitting a jackpot, when shortening time, and when paying out prize balls) Although output is disabled, no problem arises because the period is set such that it is impossible to start a game.

After the setting confirmation state is completed at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and other outputs are also possible. The state B is set to enable output. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, the security signal that has been output in the setting confirmation state is continued to be output. As a result, even if the settings confirmation state ends in a short time, the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time, making it possible to reliably know that the settings confirmation state has occurred. It is possible to check whether a confirmation state has occurred. In addition, when magnetism or vibration is detected in output enabled state B, the output of the security signal based on the detection of magnetism or vibration ends or is output for a predetermined period without interrupting the security signal being output. The output of the security signal is terminated at the timing when the output of the security signal in the middle is terminated, whichever is longer. In addition, after the setting confirmation state ends, it is a period in which it is possible to start playing, so signals other than security signals (for example, when the fluctuation of special symbols stops (when confirmed), winnings at various starting openings) It is possible to output signals (signals when a jackpot is hit, when a time is shortened, when a prize ball is paid out).

Then, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enabled state C in which all outputs are enabled after the output of the security signal has ended for a predetermined period. In other words, in output enabled state C, a security signal is output when magnetism or a signal is detected, and a signal other than the security signal (for example, when a special symbol stops changing (when confirmed), when a prize is won in various starting openings) It is also possible to output signals (signals when a jackpot is hit, when the time is shortened, and when a prize ball is paid out).

(Control A when a transmission cutoff situation occurs during the setting confirmation state)
Figure 272 shows an abnormal situation (a situation in which fraud may have occurred) in which the command line (the wiring used to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510) is disconnected during the settings confirmation state. , is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when winnings in various starting ports are detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the settings confirmation state, and the command line is disconnected after the settings confirmation state is completed. This section describes the case where, after the connection has been reconnected and the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, the detection section B detects winnings at various starting ports without the detection section A detecting any abnormality such as magnetism or vibration. . In addition, in such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that an illegal act is being performed, such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned illegal board to the main control board 1310.

As described above in detail, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at timing ts, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed is entered. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx, the setting confirmation state is ended and a transition is made to the normal state. In this example, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, at timing t1, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the timing After the setting confirmation state ends at tx, the command line is reconnected at timing t2, and the transmission interruption situation is resolved. In other words, at the timing ts when the setting confirmation state starts, the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is connected, but at the time tx when the setting confirmation state ends, the command line A transmission interruption situation occurs in which the connection is interrupted.

Further, the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx is a period in which it is impossible to start a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, even if a transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off occurs at timing tx, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game ) is the period in which it is possible to start.

Further, at timing ts, when a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 performs a setting confirmation to notify the start of the setting confirmation state. A start command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Then, at timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting confirmation start command for the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation. It has become. However, even if the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after that, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at timing tx. In this case, the main control board 1310 cannot output a setting confirmation end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the end of the setting confirmation state, and the peripheral control board 1510 It is not possible to know whether to exit and return to normal state. Therefore, if a transmission cut-off situation occurs at timing tx, even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate will be affected from timing ts to The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state being executed in tx continues. In this way, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing tx, even after the setting confirmation state ends, at least the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. By continuing to do so, you can be made aware of situations in which you should be on guard against fraudulent activity, such as command line connections being cut off. Furthermore, even if the hall manager accidentally disconnects the command line while checking the setting values in a regular setting confirmation work, at least the peripheral control board 1510 will be disconnected after the setting confirmation state is finished. If the member that instructs the operation continues to perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to notice such a mistake in the regular setting confirmation work.

Specifically, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at timing tx when the settings confirmation state ends, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the settings confirmation end command. Even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the setting confirmation display. Further, even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue to emit light for setting confirmation. Similarly, even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to emit light for setting confirmation. Furthermore, even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation.

Then, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at timing t1, and after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, at timing t2. When the command line is reconnected, the transmission cutoff situation is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive commands output from the main control board 1310. Conventionally, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting confirmation end command at the timing when this transmission cutoff situation is resolved, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation. , the normal operation will be executed, but in this example, even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation will be executed from timing ts to t2. The operation corresponding to the current setting confirmation state is further continued. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, so that the command line It is possible to leave a trace that the connection has been interrupted, and it is possible to make it possible to know that there is a situation in which it is necessary to be on guard against fraudulent activities. In other words, even if the command line is quickly connected to and removed from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned fraudulent board to the main control board 1310, traces of the command line connection being interrupted will remain, resulting in fraudulent activity. can exert a deterrent force against

Specifically, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the setting confirmation display after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. However, even after the transmission interruption situation is resolved at timing t2, the display for setting confirmation continues. In addition, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue to emit light for setting confirmation, but at timing t2 Even after the shutdown situation is resolved, the light continues to emit light for setting confirmation. Similarly, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to emit light for setting confirmation, but at timing t2. Even after the transmission interruption situation is resolved, the light continues to emit light for setting confirmation. In addition, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation, but even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation. Sound output continues.

In addition, in the above, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed from timing ts to t2 is continued. However, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, an operation related to the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation related notification) may be executed. For example, the main control board 1310 monitors whether the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is connected normally, and when the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the command line A command to notify that an abnormality has occurred is output to the peripheral control board 1510, and at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 shifts from a setting confirmation display to a setting confirmation related notification display. ``An error may have occurred in the command line while checking the settings.'' may be displayed on the screen.

Then, after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, at timing t3, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting winnings in various starting ports is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the input is made to the command line, the main control board 1310 controls whether a fluctuation start command to notify the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol or a fluctuation pattern command to instruct a fluctuation performance (a performance based on a fluctuation pattern) is input to the command line. The signal is used and output toward the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but at timing t3, Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 completes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, except for some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 commands the operation, and returns to the normal state. I'm trying to carry out the action. Here, when the ball entering sensor (detection unit B) detects winning in each starting hole, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but regarding the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, With the exception of some of them, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation corresponding to a variation performance (performance based on a variation pattern) as a normal operation. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the production display device 1600 displays a production including a variation display of decorative patterns, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600. The speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

Specifically, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation pattern command, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, the effect display device 1600 and the game board 5 Regarding the LEDs (panel lamps) and speakers mounted on various decorative boards, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state has been completed and the normal operation is being performed, whereas the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 The mounted LED (frame lamp) does not perform normal operation, but continues to operate corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at timings ts to t3. In this way, even if winnings to various starting ports are detected at timing t3 after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the peripheral control board 1510 can control the operation of the members. For some parts, by continuing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to leave traces that the command line connection has been interrupted, and it is a state in which you should be on guard to see if any fraudulent activity is occurring. can be made to understand. In other words, even if a prize is intentionally entered into the starting slot after the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, there will still be traces of the command line connection being interrupted, which can act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation pattern command at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 The mounted LEDs (frame lamps) continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but are not limited to the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, as well as peripheral control boards. One or more members among the members whose operation is instructed by 1510 may continue to perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Furthermore, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation pattern command at timing t3, all of the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate are activated. , the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be ended, and the normal operation may be executed. Then, after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, if winnings in various starting ports are detected, some or all of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, in this example, as will be described later, if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state has not been completed for the member for which the operation is instructed. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved by intentionally placing prizes in various starting ports while the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. can do.

In addition, even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during a period when the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continues to perform an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state The corresponding action never ends. On the other hand, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at timing t3 after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 may receive the fluctuation start command or fluctuation pattern command at timing t3. Regarding the LED (frame lamp), the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state continues, but a specific operation part is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates a specific operation part. Alternatively, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be ended and the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players may not be able to erase the traces that the command line connection has been cut off, and only the hall administrator can erase the traces that the command line connection has been cut off, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. The hall manager can surely check whether there is any such problem.

In addition, a command line for transmitting command signals from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310 with a connector, and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 with a connector. A protection member is provided on the back side of the connector to protect the command line so as to make it difficult to separate the command line from the connector portion. In addition, the protective member is constructed with transparency so that it can be confirmed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 whether the command line is properly connected to the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. has been done. Therefore, the hall manager can easily check whether the command line connection has been interrupted.

In addition, during the transmission cut-off situation from timing tx to t2 (before the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2), the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection part B) for detecting the winning of each starting hole is the main signal. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts changing display of the special symbol, but cannot output a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not complete the operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state and do not perform normal operations. In this way, even if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 will be in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, traces of the command line connection being interrupted cannot be erased, and it is possible to make the user aware of the situation in which they should be on guard against fraudulent activity. In other words, even if a prize is entered into the starting slot while transmission is blocked after the settings confirmation state has ended, there will still be traces of the command line connection being cut off, so this will not act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity. can.

In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are in a stopped state, but at timing tx, the transmission is interrupted by cutting off the connection of the command line. If such a situation occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the setting confirmation end command and maintains the stopped state without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Furthermore, if the command line is reconnected at timing t2, the transmission cutoff situation is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 becomes able to receive commands output from the main control board 1310. The movable body remains in a stopped state without starting its initial motion. Then, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation of the movable body is executed. In this way, from timing ts to t3, at least the members whose movements are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but the initial movement of the movable body is not performed during this period. This makes it difficult for the user to misunderstand that a variable performance is being executed, and it is possible to clearly understand that the user should be on guard against fraudulent activity.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state A in which the security signal is continuously output and other outputs are disabled. Furthermore, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and other outputs are also possible. The state B is set to enable output. Then, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enabled state C in which all outputs are enabled after the output of the security signal has ended for a predetermined period. However, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), but at timing tx, If a transmission interruption situation occurs in which the command line connection is interrupted, it may be possible to extend the period during which the security signal is output. Thereby, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp the possibility that a transmission cutoff situation has occurred, depending on whether the period during which the security signal is output is extended. Note that the above applies to the case where the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is connected normally, and a person who attempts to fraudulently cause a setting confirmation state should not do so. By disconnecting the wiring, it is possible to prevent the external device (hall computer) from receiving the security signal and prevent the hall manager from knowing that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when attempting to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff situation), or if it is reconnected, special operations are performed, and the "Settings" It is possible to prevent fraud that exploits the confirmation status.

Also, although not shown, as members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions, members that execute and continue operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress. This makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light intensity even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and for components that are performing normal operation, the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 cannot be operated. This allows you to adjust the volume and light intensity. Specifically, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, adjustment of the volume and light intensity is disabled, but at timing tx, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off. After that, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 not only continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but also maintain a state in which the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, if the command line is reconnected at timing t2, the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved, but the components to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. Not only that, but the volume and light intensity remain unadjustable. Then, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, The member for which operation is instructed has finished the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and is performing normal operation, but the volume and light intensity of such a member can be adjusted. On the other hand, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 not only continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but also remain in a state in which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted. (Although the volume and light amount are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, they are not reflected in the volume and light amount that are being executed.)

(Control B when a transmission cutoff situation occurs during the setting confirmation state)
FIG. 273 shows the behavior of Pachinko machine 1 when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state is finished in a situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a chart. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the settings confirmation state, and the command line is disconnected after the settings confirmation state is completed. This section explains the case where, after the connection has been reconnected and the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, the detection section A detects an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration before the detection section B detects winnings at the various starting ports. ing. In addition, in such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned fraudulent board to the main control board 1310. In this example, even after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 has been instructed to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but abnormalities such as magnetism and vibration have occurred. By deliberately causing this, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts may be carried out that attempt to disguise such behavior (actions corresponding to the settings confirmation state), and methods to prevent such fraud are explained below. .

In this example, the setting confirmation state occurs from timing ts to tx, and during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, at timing t1, a command is sent between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. A transmission cutoff situation in which the line connection is cut off occurs, and after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the command line is reconnected at timing t2 and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved. Even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx or after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate, the setting confirmation state executed at timings ts to tx continues. Since this is the same as FIG. 272 in that the operation corresponding to is continued, a description of these points will be omitted.

First, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at timing t3, the signals from the magnetic sensor (detection section A) for detecting magnetism and the vibration sensor (detection section A) for detecting vibration are detected. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 has detected an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and an abnormality notification command to notify execution of abnormality notification based on the occurrence of the abnormality is issued. , are output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but at timing t3, Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the abnormality notification command, the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, except for some of the members whose operation is instructed, and starts the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. I'm trying to execute it. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, except for the effect display device 1600, emit light in a single color for abnormality. The LEDs are made to light up or blink with strong brightness, and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in a single color with strong brightness as abnormal light emission. Then, the speaker outputs a notification sound such as "A magnetic error has occurred" or "A vibration error has occurred" as an abnormal sound. In addition, in this example, by making the operation in response to an abnormality notification different, for example by changing the LED light emitting color or notification sound, depending on whether magnetism is detected or vibration is detected, magnetism and vibration can be detected. It is possible to determine which of the following has been detected.

Specifically, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate. (frame lamps), LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, and speakers have finished their operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state and are performing operations corresponding to abnormality notification. In this way, except for some of the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed with priority over the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, thereby preventing the occurrence of an abnormality. Never miss a thing. On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed from timing ts to t3 without executing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. In this way, even if an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected at timing t3 after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the peripheral control board 1510 can control the operation of the member that is instructed to operate. In some cases, by continuing the operation corresponding to the configuration confirmation state, it is possible to leave traces that the command line connection has been interrupted, indicating that it is a state in which you should be on guard for fraudulent activity. You can make them understand. In other words, even if an abnormality is intentionally caused after the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, traces of the command line connection being interrupted remain, which can serve as a deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 will not respond to the setting confirmation state. However, not only the effect display device 1600 but also one or more of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 may continue to perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. . In addition, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at timing t3, all the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions are in the setting confirmation state. The operation corresponding to the abnormality notification may be completed, and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification may be executed. If an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, some or all of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 perform an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In contrast, in this example, as described later, if the detection unit A detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state has not been completed for the member whose operation is instructed by 1510. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved by intentionally causing an abnormality during a period when the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate corresponding to the setting confirmation state. I can do it.

In addition, even if the operating section (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during a period when the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continues to perform an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state The corresponding action never ends. On the other hand, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 continues to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. However, a specific operation section is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates the specific operation section, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is terminated, and the normal operation is stopped. may also be executed. As a result, some players may not be able to erase the traces that the command line connection has been cut off, and only the hall administrator can erase the traces that the command line connection has been cut off, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. The hall manager can surely check whether there is any such problem.

In addition, during the transmission cutoff situation from timing tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2), a magnetic sensor (detection section A) for detecting magnetism and a vibration sensor (detection part A) for detecting vibration are used. When the signal from the detection unit B) is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 has detected an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and outputs an abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510. Can not do it. At this time, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate do not complete the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and do not perform the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. In this way, even if an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions correspond to the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the operation, traces of the command line connection being interrupted cannot be erased, and the user can be made aware of the situation in which they should be on guard against fraudulent activity. In other words, even if an abnormality is intentionally caused during a transmission cutoff state after the configuration confirmation state has ended, traces of the command line connection being cut off will remain, which will act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity. I can do it.

Then, at timing t3, the operations corresponding to the abnormality notification are being executed, except for some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. The process is configured to end at timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3. Furthermore, at timing t4, after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, various parts of the door frame 3 are removed from among the members excluding some of the members (effect display device 1600) whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. The LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the decorative board have resumed operation corresponding to the confirmation display state, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the speakers , the normal operation is being performed. Here, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start (for example, a state of waiting for a customer) as a normal operation. The member to be instructed to operate is activated. In this way, even if the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification ends at timing t4, at least some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 resume the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to leave a trace that the command line connection has been interrupted, and it is possible to know that there is a situation in which it is necessary to be on guard against fraudulent activities. In other words, even if an abnormality is intentionally caused after the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, traces of the command line connection being interrupted remain, which can serve as a deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 will not respond to the setting confirmation state. However, at timing t4, even after the other components finish the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, the effect display device 1600 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. There is.

Then, at timing t4, after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, at timing t5, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting winnings in various starting holes is transmitted to the main control board. When the input is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 sends a variation start command to notify the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and a variation pattern command to instruct the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern). is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 continues to operate corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but at timing t5, the peripheral control board 1510 starts to fluctuate. Based on receiving the command or the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and executes the normal operation. Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at timing t5, the LEDs (board lamps) and speakers mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are already in the normal state. performing an action. Here, when the ball entering sensor (detection unit B) detects winning in each starting hole, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but regarding the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, With the exception of some of them, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation corresponding to a variation performance (performance based on a variation pattern) as a normal operation. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the production display device 1600 displays a production including a variation display of decorative patterns, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600. The speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

Specifically, after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification at timing t4, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at timing t5, the peripheral control board 1510 Among the members that the controller instructs to operate, the effect display device 1600, LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, and speakers perform normal operations, but the door frame Regarding the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of No. 3, they continue to operate corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at timings t4 to t5 without performing normal operations. In this way, even if winnings in various starting ports are detected after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at timing t4, at least some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions By continuing the operation corresponding to the configuration confirmation state, it is possible to leave traces that the command line connection has been interrupted, and to make it possible to understand that it is a state in which it is necessary to be on guard for fraudulent activities. I can do it. In other words, even if a prize is intentionally entered into the starting slot after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, traces of the command line connection being interrupted will remain, which will act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities. .

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at timing t5 after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification at timing t4, the door frame 3 The LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but this is limited to the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3. First, one or more of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 may continue to perform an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t5 after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification at the timing t4, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation. All the members may complete the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and perform the normal operation. Then, at timing t4 when the transmission cut-off situation has already been resolved, after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, if winnings in various starting ports are detected, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the member to operate. In contrast, in this example, as described later, before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is completed in some or all of the If a winning is detected, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state has not been completed for the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved by intentionally placing prizes in various starting ports while the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. can do.

In addition, even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during a period when the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continues to perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state The corresponding action never ends. On the other hand, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation pattern command at timing t5 after completing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification at timing t4, various decorative boards of the door frame 3 The LED (frame lamp) installed in the pachinko machine 1 continues to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but a specific operation section is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall manager can perform specific operations. When the unit is operated, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be terminated and the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players may not be able to erase the traces that the command line connection has been cut off, and only the hall administrator can erase the traces that the command line connection has been cut off, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. The hall manager can surely check whether there is any such problem.

In addition, during the transmission cut-off situation from timing tx to t2 (before the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2), the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection part B) for detecting the winning of each starting hole is the main signal. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts displaying the special symbol in a variable manner, but cannot output a variation start command or a variation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not complete the operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state and do not perform normal operations. In this way, even if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are kept in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, traces of the command line connection being interrupted cannot be erased, and it is possible to make the user aware of the situation in which they should be on guard for fraudulent activity. In other words, even if a prize is entered into the starting slot while transmission is blocked after the settings confirmation state has ended, there will still be traces of the command line connection being cut off, so this will not act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity. can.

In addition, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification from timing t3 to t4 (before the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification ends at timing t4), a ball entering sensor ( When the signal from the detection unit B) is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts changing display of the special symbol, but does not send the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. It is not possible to output to the target. At this time, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not complete the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification that is being executed, and do not perform normal operations. In other words, for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification being executed is continued with priority over the normal operation. In this way, even if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification ends at timing t4, at least the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction will be detected as abnormal. By not finishing the operation in response to the notification, traces of magnetic and vibration abnormalities cannot be erased, and it is difficult to ensure that the system is in a state where it is necessary to be on the lookout for fraudulent activity. can. In other words, even if a prize is entered into the starting slot during the execution of the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, traces of the magnetic or vibrational abnormality will remain, which can act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities.

In addition, in this example, at timing t3, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed except for some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the operation corresponding to such abnormality notification is performed. , the operation is set to end at timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3, but the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is not ended within the predetermined period but continues indefinitely. Good too. In such a case, in this example, even if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is finished, at least the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation , since the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification does not end, the power must be turned on again.

In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are in a stopped state, but at timing tx, the transmission is interrupted by cutting off the connection of the command line. If such a situation occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the setting confirmation end command and maintains the stopped state without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Furthermore, if the command line is reconnected at timing t2, the transmission cutoff situation is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 becomes able to receive commands output from the main control board 1310. The movable body maintains a stopped state without starting its initial motion. Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at timing t3, the movable body does not start the initial operation and maintains the stopped state. Then, at timing t5, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation of the movable body is executed. In this way, from timing ts to t5, at least some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but during this period, the initial operation of the movable body By not performing this, it is difficult to misunderstand that a variable performance is being performed, and it is possible to clearly understand that the user should be on guard against fraudulent activity.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state A in which the security signal is continuously output and other outputs are disabled. Furthermore, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and other outputs are also possible. The state B is set to enable output. Then, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enabled state C in which all outputs are enabled after the output of the security signal has ended for a predetermined period. However, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), but at timing tx, If a transmission interruption situation occurs in which the command line connection is interrupted, it may be possible to extend the period during which the security signal is output. Thereby, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp the possibility that a transmission cutoff situation has occurred, depending on whether the period during which the security signal is output is extended. Note that the above applies to the case where the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is connected normally, and a person who attempts to fraudulently cause a setting confirmation state should not do so. By disconnecting the wiring, it is possible to prevent the external device (hall computer) from receiving the security signal and prevent the hall manager from knowing that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when attempting to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff situation), or if it is reconnected, special operations are performed, and the "Settings" It is possible to prevent fraud that exploits the confirmation status.

Also, although not shown, as members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions, members that execute and continue operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress. This makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light intensity even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and for components that are performing normal operation, the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 cannot be operated. This allows you to adjust the volume and light intensity. Furthermore, for the members that are performing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the volume or light amount cannot be adjusted. Specifically, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, adjustment of the volume and light intensity is disabled, but at timing tx, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off. After that, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 not only continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but also maintain a state in which the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, if the command line is reconnected at timing t2, the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved, but the components to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. Not only that, but the volume and light intensity remain unadjustable. When the abnormality notification command is received at timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification except for some of the members to which the operation is instructed. It is also impossible to adjust the volume or light intensity of the components that perform operations corresponding to notifications. Note that in this example, operations on the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 are not accepted for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, but operations on the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 are Although the volume and light intensity are adjusted upon acceptance, the configuration may be such that the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the current volume and light intensity. After the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted for the parts that are performing normal operation, and for the parts that are performing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. remains in a state in which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted (although the volume and light intensity are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228, the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the current volume and light intensity). ).

[Second embodiment regarding transmission cutoff situation]
(Control when a transmission cutoff situation does not occur during the settings change state or settings confirmation state)
FIG. 274 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line connection is maintained during the setting confirmation state. Here, in a normal situation where the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is maintained, the settings check performed during the settings check state will be explained. A case is described in which notification is ended and setting confirmation completion notification is executed for a predetermined period of time. The difference from FIG. 271 is that after the setting confirmation state ends, a setting confirmation completion notification is executed for a predetermined period of time.

In this example, the case where the setting confirmation state is entered at timings ts to tx is described, but the same applies to the case where the setting change state is entered in which the setting value can be changed. Regarding the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on at timing ts, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, regarding the setting change state, when the power is turned on at timing ts, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the push operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is supposed to be migrated in case. Specifically, at timing ts, when a RAM clear signal and a setting key ON signal are input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a The current setting value (the set value from setting value 1 to setting value 6) stored in the specific area of the RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, in the setting change state, each time the press operation part of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the value is increased by 1 from the current setting value, and when the maximum value, 6, is reached, the initial value is set. You can change it back to 1. After changing the setting value, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx, the setting value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the setting change state is ended and the normal is moving into the state. Specifically, at timing tx, when a setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a changes the setting value to the setting display 1310g. It is designed to switch from displaying to hiding.

As described above in detail, in this example, a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 is used to detect magnetism, and the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. By doing so, a vibration sensor detects vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1, a configuration that detects vibrations, a configuration that detects the opening and closing of the door frame 3, a configuration that detects the connection status of various wirings, and an external terminal board 558. It has a configuration that outputs information regarding the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (hall computer) via the pachinko machine 1, and with these configurations, it is possible to detect and notify whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. The company monitors for fraudulent activities. However, in the settings change state or settings confirmation state, the various monitoring functions described above are often not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience in regular work, and in such a configuration, , there is a risk that ``fraud by exploiting the setting change state or setting confirmation state'' may be carried out. This point will be explained below.

First, as a conventional method of fraud, for example, a fraudulent board (a so-called hanging board) is connected to the main control board 1310, and a ball entered into the main control board 1310 is inputted to the main control board 1310 when a player starts winning, contrary to the original game. Examples include illegally inputting a signal, illegally stopping the changing display of special symbols at a jackpot symbol, and illegally causing a jackpot game.If such fraudulent boards are discovered late, the game hall will lose a large amount of money. You will suffer significant damage. In order to carry out such fraud (installation of unauthorized circuit boards), it is necessary to open and close the door frame 3, connect and disconnect various wiring, and also to avoid various monitoring such as vibrations associated with fraudulent activities and magnetism generated from unauthorized equipment. Conventionally, most fraudulent acts were committed outside of the game hall's business hours. However, in recent years, the above-mentioned settings change state and settings confirmation state (a state in which the various monitoring functions described above are not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience in regular work) With the increase in the number of gaming machines (pachinko machines), there are concerns that the above-mentioned fraud (installation of unauthorized boards) may be carried out even during the business hours of the gaming hall by abusing the setting change and setting confirmation states. . For example, by illegally causing a settings change state or settings confirmation state by some method, and then using the period of the settings change state or settings confirmation state to install an unauthorized board and ending the settings change state or settings confirmation state in a short period of time. etc. are possible. A plurality of wirings are connected to the main control board 1310 using a connector, but there is a possibility that such a fraudulent board is connected using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310. For example, the wires used for connection with the peripheral control board 1510 may be removed from the main control board 1310 and the incorrect board may be relayed to the wiring, or the incorrect board may be connected to an empty connector due to the removal, and the main control board may be removed. 1310 and gain unauthorized access to the main control board 1310 side.

Note that the wiring used to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is a command line that transmits command signals from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side. This command line is connected to the main control board 1310 with a connector and also to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 executes operations of various members connected to the peripheral control board 1510 based on command signals transmitted from the main control board 1310 using command lines. The components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate include the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the elements mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5. There are LEDs (board lamps), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, etc. In this example, we will perform a special operation when such a command line is interrupted (transmission interruption situation) or reconnected, thereby preventing ``fraud that exploits the settings change state or settings confirmation state.'' The method for this will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 274, first, when the power is turned on at timing ts, if the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state, a transition is made to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Specifically, at timing ts, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a stores the data in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The current set values (set values among set values 1 to 6) are displayed on the setting display 1310g. Further, in the setting confirmation state, even if the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the setting value is not changed in response to this pressing operation. After confirming the current setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing tx, thereby ending the setting confirmation state and transitioning to the normal state.

Furthermore, the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx is a period in which it is impossible to start a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. That is, in the setting confirmation state, even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbol will not be started, and the starting winning will not be suspended. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, there is a period in which a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the setting confirmation state is finished, when there is a starting winning, the variable display of the special symbol can start, and when the variable display of the special symbol stops displaying at the winning symbol, It is possible to play a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

Further, at timing ts, when a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 performs a setting confirmation to notify the start of the setting confirmation state. A start command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Furthermore, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing tx, the main control board 1310 performs a setting confirmation to notify the end of the setting confirmation state. A termination command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether to start the setting confirmation state or whether to end the setting confirmation state and transition to the normal state. Similarly, at timing ts, when the RAM clear signal and the setting key ON signal are input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts the setting change state. A setting change start command to transmit the command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Further, at timing tx, when a setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 changes the settings to notify the end of the setting change state. A termination command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether to start the setting change state or whether to end the setting change state and transition to the normal state.

Additionally, the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate include the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the various decorative boards of the game board 5. There are LEDs (board lamps), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and door frame 3, etc. For these components, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a setting confirmation start command at timing ts. Based on the reception, an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed. In this way, when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the hall manager checks the setting values on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, at least the peripheral control on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. When the members instructed by the board 1510 perform operations corresponding to the settings confirmation state, the system notifies the outside that the settings are confirmed and understands that it is a state in which precautions should be taken to prevent fraudulent acts. can be done. Regarding the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, not all of the multiple LEDs but a specific LED executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and the other LEDs perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. It may be configured to perform normal operation (normal light emission). In addition, when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state described later is continuing, or when the operation corresponding to the completion of setting confirmation described later is executed, the LEDs (board Among the lamps), a specific LED may perform the operation, and other LEDs may perform normal operation (normal light emission).

Specifically, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, "Settings are being confirmed" on the screen as a setting confirmation display different from the normal display. . In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are in a lighting state for setting confirmation, which is different from the normal lighting, for example, in a single color and with strong intensity. I am trying to turn it on depending on the brightness. In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are in a lighting state for setting confirmation, which is different from the normal lighting, for example, in a single color and with strong intensity. I am trying to turn it on depending on the brightness. However, the light emitting state for setting confirmation may be a specific light emitting state different from normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and may be a state in which all or part of the LED is turned off. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be made different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 light up in a single color with strong brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 By turning off the LEDs, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 will stand out, allowing you to understand that they are in a specific light emission state that is different from normal light emission. can be done. Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the speaker outputs a notification sound for setting confirmation that is different from the normal sound, for example, "Settings are being confirmed."

After the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting confirmation end command, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation of the members, except for some of them. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is ended, and the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). As a result, even if the settings confirmation state ends in a short time, by executing the operation corresponding to the end of the settings confirmation for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to reliably understand that the settings confirmation state has occurred, and It is possible to check whether or not a setting confirmation state has occurred by performing the above operations.

Specifically, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation from timing tx to ty, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are in a light emitting state for the end of setting confirmation. For example, it is made to blink in a single color with strong brightness. Furthermore, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation from timing tx to ty, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are in a light emitting state for the end of setting confirmation, for example. It is a single color and blinks with strong brightness. However, the light emitting state for terminating the setting confirmation may be a specific light emitting state different from normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and may be a state in which all or part of the LEDs are turned off. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be made different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 flash in a single color with strong brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 By turning off the LEDs, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 will stand out, allowing you to understand that they are in a specific light emission state that is different from normal light emission. can be done. Furthermore, the light emitting state for terminating the setting confirmation is different from the light emitting state for setting confirmation, such as turning on or blinking an LED, or emitting light of a different color, but it may be the same light emitting state. Additionally, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the completion of setting confirmation from timing tx to ty, the speaker outputs a notification sound for the completion of setting confirmation, which is different from the normal sound, for example, "Settings have been confirmed" ( When ending the setting change state, a notification sound "RAM has been cleared due to setting change" is output.

Note that after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the effect display device 1600, as a part of the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, finishes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and responds to the end of the setting confirmation. The normal operation is executed without executing the operation to be performed.

At timing tx, the operations corresponding to the end of setting confirmation are being executed except for some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions. is configured to end at timing ty when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tx. Further, at timing ty, after the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation is completed, the normal operation is performed for the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation. Of the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, the effect display device 1600 continues to perform normal operations after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. Here, in normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start (for example, a state of waiting for a customer). When the member to which the movement is instructed is operated and the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is to instruct the movement is to perform the variation display based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command. (a performance based on a fluctuation pattern). For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variable display of decorative patterns, and displays the effect on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the game board 5 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. Thus, the speaker outputs audio in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

Note that at timing tx, the operations corresponding to the end of setting confirmation are being executed except for some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions; During execution, it is after the setting confirmation state has ended at timing tx, and it is already possible to start the game, so it is possible to start the variable display of special symbols when you start winning. It has become. However, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation, it is assumed that the timing at which the peripheral control board 1510 should operate the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate is reached as a variable effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol due to the start winning. Also, priority is given to the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation being executed, and the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate are not operated as a variation effect. As a result, even if a player intentionally enters the starting slot to win a prize after the setting confirmation state has ended, traces of the occurrence of the setting confirmation state remain, so it is possible to exert a deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. However, during such a period, the effect display device 1600 does not perform the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation, so the effect display including the variable display of decorative symbols as a variable effect (for example, reach effect) etc. can be executed.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are in a stopped state. After the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the initial operation of the movable body based on receiving the setting confirmation end command. Here, in the initial movement of the movable body, it is confirmed whether the movable body operates normally between the initial position and the appearance position, and accurate positioning is performed so that the movable body waits at the initial position. It is supposed to be done. After the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the movable body starts its normal operation. For example, the movable body is allowed to operate during a demonstration in which the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, or during execution of a variable performance that is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. However, if an error occurs during the initial movement of the movable body and the movable body cannot operate normally, the movable body will not operate even if the timing at which it should operate has come after the initial movement of the movable body. It is designed not to. In addition, during the initial operation of the movable body, after the setting confirmation state has ended at timing tx, it is possible to already start the variable display of the special symbol, but during the variable display of the special symbol that has started. Even when the timing for the movable body to move is reached, the initial movement of the movable body is given priority and the movable body does not move as a variable performance executed during the fluctuation performance.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state A in which the security signal is continuously output and other outputs are disabled. In this way, in the setting confirmation state, the same security signal as that output when magnetism or vibration is detected is output. However, when magnetism or vibration is detected, a security signal is output for a short time, whereas in a setting confirmation state, a security signal is output for a long time until the setting confirmation state ends. This allows the external device (hall computer) to know whether magnetism or vibration has been detected or whether the settings are being checked, and if the settings are being checked, it can be used to prevent fraudulent activities. It can help them understand that it is a period when they should be cautious. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, signals other than security signals (for example, signals when special symbols stop changing (confirmed), when winning in various starting openings, when hitting a jackpot, when shortening time, and when paying out prize balls) Although output is disabled, no problem arises because the period is set such that it is impossible to start a game.

After the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) with respect to the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The state B is set to enable output. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, the security signal that has been output in the setting confirmation state is continued to be output. As a result, even if the settings confirmation state ends in a short time, the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time, making it possible to reliably know that the settings confirmation state has occurred. It is possible to check whether a confirmation state has occurred. In addition, when magnetism or vibration is detected in output enabled state B, the output of the security signal based on the detection of magnetism or vibration ends or is output for a predetermined period without interrupting the security signal being output. The output of the security signal is terminated at the timing when the output of the security signal in the middle is terminated, whichever is longer. In addition, after the setting confirmation state ends, it is a period in which it is possible to start playing, so signals other than security signals (for example, when the fluctuation of special symbols stops (when confirmed), winnings at various starting openings) It is possible to output signals (signals when a jackpot is hit, when a time is shortened, when a prize ball is paid out).

(Control when a transmission cutoff situation occurs at the end of the settings change state or settings confirmation state)
FIG. 275 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a situation where the connection of the command line is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and when winnings to various starting ports are detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends. It is a time chart showing. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the settings confirmation state, and the command line is disconnected after the settings confirmation state is completed. This section describes the case where, after the connection has been reconnected and the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, the detection section B detects winnings at various starting ports without the detection section A detecting any abnormality such as magnetism or vibration. . In addition, in such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that an illegal act is being performed, such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned illegal board to the main control board 1310. Further, in this example, the case where the setting confirmation state is entered from timing ts to tx is described, but the same applies to the case where the setting change state is entered from timing ts to tx.

As described above in detail, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at timing ts, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed is entered. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx, the setting confirmation state is ended and a transition is made to the normal state. In this example, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, at timing t1, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the timing After the setting confirmation state ends at tx, the command line is reconnected at timing t2, and the transmission interruption situation is resolved. In other words, at the timing ts when the setting confirmation state starts, the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is connected, but at the time tx when the setting confirmation state ends, the command line A transmission interruption situation occurs in which the connection is interrupted.

Furthermore, the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx is a period in which it is impossible to start a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, even if a transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off occurs at timing tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side ) is the period in which it is possible to start.

Further, at timing ts, when a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 performs a setting confirmation to notify the start of the setting confirmation state. A start command is output to peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Then, at timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting confirmation start command for the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation. It has become. However, even if the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after that, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at timing tx. In this case, the main control board 1310 cannot output a setting confirmation end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the end of the setting confirmation state, and the peripheral control board 1510 It is not possible to know whether to exit and return to normal state. Therefore, if a transmission cut-off situation occurs at timing tx, even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate will be affected from timing ts to The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state being executed in tx is continued. In this way, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing tx, even after the setting confirmation state ends, at least the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. By continuing to do so, you can be made aware of situations in which you should be on guard against fraudulent activity, such as command line connections being cut off. Furthermore, even if the hall manager accidentally disconnects the command line while checking the setting values in the regular setting confirmation work, at least the peripheral control board 1510 will be disconnected after the setting confirmation state is finished. If the member that instructs the operation continues to perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to notice such a mistake in the regular setting confirmation work.

Then, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at timing t1, and after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, at timing t2. When the command line is reconnected, the transmission cutoff situation is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive commands output from the main control board 1310. Conventionally, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting confirmation end command at the timing when this transmission cutoff situation is resolved, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation. , the normal operation will be executed, but in this example, even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation will be executed from timing ts to t2. The operation corresponding to the current setting confirmation state is further continued. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, so that the command line It is possible to leave a trace that the connection has been interrupted, and it is possible to make it possible to know that there is a situation in which it is necessary to be on guard against fraudulent activities. In other words, even if the command line is quickly connected to and removed from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned fraudulent board to the main control board 1310, traces of the command line connection being interrupted will remain, resulting in fraudulent activity. can exert a deterrent force against

Specifically, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the setting confirmation display after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. However, even after the transmission interruption situation is resolved at timing t2, the display for setting confirmation continues. In addition, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue to emit light for setting confirmation, but at timing t2 Even after the shutdown situation is resolved, the light continues to emit light for setting confirmation. Similarly, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to emit light for setting confirmation, but at timing t2. Even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the light continues to emit light for setting confirmation. In addition, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation, but even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation. Sound output continues.

In addition, in the above, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed from timing ts to t2 is continued. However, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, an operation related to the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation related notification) may be executed. For example, the main control board 1310 monitors whether the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is properly connected, and when the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the command line A command to notify that an abnormality has occurred is output to the peripheral control board 1510, and at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 shifts from a setting confirmation display to a setting confirmation related notification display. ``An error may have occurred in the command line while checking the settings.'' may be displayed on the screen.

Then, after the transmission interruption state is resolved at timing t2, when the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting winnings at various starting ports is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing t3, the main control board 1310 outputs a change start command for informing the start of the change display of the special pattern and a change pattern command for instructing the change performance (performance based on the change pattern) to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission interruption state is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate the components that it instructs to operate, but at timing t3, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the change start command and the change pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state for the components that it instructs to operate, and executes normal operations. Here, when the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) detects the entry of a ball into each of the starting holes, the special symbol is displayed, but the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the components to operate, and based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation corresponding to the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) as a normal operation. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display (for example, a reach performance) including the variation display of the decorative symbol, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600.

As described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the member for which the operation is instructed. , the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is finished, and the normal operation is executed. On the other hand, in this example, as will be described later, if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the The operation corresponding to the confirmation state has not been completed. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the transmission cut-off situation has been resolved by intentionally placing prizes in various starting ports while the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. can do.

Further, as described above in detail, if the command line connection is not cut off during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 will issue an operation instruction when the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. For the parts that do, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at timings ts to tx is finished, but after the operation corresponding to such a setting confirmation state is finished, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation end is completed. I'm trying to carry out the action. On the other hand, if a transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off occurs during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, and then the start port is opened at timing t3. Regarding the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate when a winning is detected, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed from timing ts to t3 has been completed, but such a setting confirmation state After the operation corresponding to is completed, the operation corresponding to the completion of setting confirmation is restricted not to be executed. In this example, during the period when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state continues, there is a possibility that the player enters the starting hole to check whether the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, but the transmission interruption situation If the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status is completed and the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation completion is executed even though the pachinko machine 1 has been inspected by the hall manager, , there is a possibility that subsequent games may not be started promptly. However, in this example, during the period when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, if the hall manager enters the starting hole after resolving the transmission interruption situation, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state ends. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by restricting the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation after the setting confirmation has been completed.

In addition, during the transmission cut-off situation from timing tx to t2 (before the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2), the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection part B) for detecting the winning of each starting hole is the main signal. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts changing display of the special symbol, but cannot output a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not complete the operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state and do not perform normal operations. In this way, even if winnings in various starting ports are detected before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 will be in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, traces of the command line connection being interrupted cannot be erased, and it is possible to make the user aware of the situation in which they should be on guard against fraudulent activity. In other words, even if a prize is entered into the starting slot while transmission is blocked after the settings confirmation state has ended, there will still be traces of the command line connection being cut off, so this will not act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity. can.

In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are in a stopped state, but at timing tx, the transmission is interrupted by cutting off the connection of the command line. If such a situation occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the setting confirmation end command and maintains the stopped state without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Furthermore, if the command line is reconnected at timing t2, the transmission cutoff situation is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 becomes able to receive commands output from the main control board 1310. The movable body remains in a stopped state without starting its initial motion. Then, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation of the movable body is executed. In this way, from timing ts to t3, at least the members whose movements are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but the initial movement of the movable body is not performed during this period. This makes it difficult for the user to misunderstand that a variable performance is being executed, and it is possible to clearly understand that the user should be on guard against fraudulent activity.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state A in which the security signal is continuously output and other outputs are disabled. Furthermore, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and other outputs are also possible. The state B is set to enable output. Then, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enabled state C in which all outputs are enabled after the output of the security signal has ended for a predetermined period. However, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), but at timing tx, If a transmission interruption situation occurs in which the command line connection is interrupted, it may be possible to extend the period during which the security signal is output. Thereby, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp the possibility that a transmission cutoff situation has occurred, depending on whether the period during which the security signal is output is extended. . Note that the above applies to the case where the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is connected normally, and anyone who attempts to illegally cause the setting change state or setting confirmation state is prohibited. By removing such wiring, it is possible to prevent the external device (hall computer) from receiving the security signal and prevent the hall manager from knowing the occurrence of a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when attempting to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff situation), or if it is reconnected, special operations are performed, and the "Settings" It is possible to prevent "fraud that exploits the change status or setting confirmation status."

Also, although not shown, as members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions, members that execute and continue operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress. This makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light intensity even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and for components that are performing normal operation, the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 cannot be operated. This allows you to adjust the volume and light intensity. Specifically, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, adjustment of the volume and light intensity is disabled, but at timing tx, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off. After that, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 not only continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but also maintain a state in which the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, if the command line is reconnected at timing t2, the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved, but the components to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. Not only that, but the volume and light intensity remain unadjustable. Then, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 finishes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and returns to normal operation. However, for such components, the volume and amount of light can be adjusted.

(Control when transmission interruption occurs before setting change state or setting confirmation state starts)
FIG. 276 shows the behavior of pachinko machine 1 when the command line is disconnected at the start of the settings confirmation state and the settings confirmation state is ended after the command line is reconnected during the settings confirmation state. This is a time chart. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at the start of the settings confirmation state, and the command line is disconnected during the settings confirmation state. The following describes a case where the setting confirmation state is ended after the line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved. In addition, in such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned fraudulent board to the main control board 1310. Further, in this example, the case where the setting confirmation state is entered from timing ts to tx is described, but the same applies to the case where the setting change state is entered from timing ts to tx.

As described above in detail, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at timing ts, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed is entered. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx, the setting confirmation state is ended and a transition is made to the normal state. In this example, when the power is turned on at timing ts, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the settings are confirmed at timings ts to tx. At timing t1, the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved. In other words, at the timing ts when the setting confirmation state is started, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, but the setting confirmation state is terminated. At timing tx, the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved.

Further, the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx is a period in which it is impossible to start a game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, even if a transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off occurs at timing tx, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game ) is the period in which it is possible to start.

Furthermore, even if the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing ts, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off. In this case, the main control board 1310 cannot output a setting confirmation end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the end of the setting confirmation state, and the peripheral control board 1510 shifts to the setting confirmation state. I can't figure out whether or not. Therefore, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing tx, the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate cannot perform the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. It is designed to perform standby operations. Here, in the standby operation, the peripheral control board 1510 operates the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate so as to indicate that the peripheral control board 1510 is in a standby state for receiving a command.

Specifically, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, "Standby" on the screen as a standby display different from the normal display. However, the display for waiting may be the same display as the normal display displayed while waiting for the variable display of special symbols to start (for example, in a state of waiting for a customer). In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are in a standby light emission state different from normal light emission, for example, in a single color and with low brightness. I'm trying to make it light up. In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are in a standby light emission state different from the normal light emission, for example, in a single color and with low brightness. I'm trying to make it light up. However, the standby light emitting state may be a specific light emitting state different from normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and may be a state in which all or part of the LED is turned off. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be made different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 light up in a single color with low brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 By turning off the LEDs, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 will stand out, allowing you to understand that they are in a specific light emission state that is different from normal light emission. can be done. In addition, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the speaker outputs a notification sound for standby, which is different from the normal display, for example, a notification sound saying "On standby." However, the standby notification sound also includes a silent state.

After the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting confirmation end command, the standby operation of the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate is ended. , the normal operation is executed. Here, in normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start (for example, a state of waiting for a customer). When the member to which the movement is instructed is operated and the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is to instruct the movement is to perform the variation display based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command. (a performance based on a fluctuation pattern). For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variable display of decorative patterns, and displays the effect on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the game board 5 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 light up or blink in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. Thus, the speaker outputs audio in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

As described above in detail, if the command line connection is not cut off when the power is turned on at timing ts, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, An action corresponding to the settings confirmation status is being executed. On the other hand, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line is cut off when the power is turned on at timing ts, the settings at timings ts to tx for the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate During the confirmation state, the standby operation is executed without executing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. As a result, when the power is turned on at timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the member to which the operation is instructed executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the operation during standby, thereby determining the transmission cutoff status. You can check whether or not this is occurring.

In addition, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t1, although the setting confirmation state is still in progress, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation are in the setting confirmation state. The standby operation is continued until the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx without executing the corresponding operation. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved during the setting confirmation state, at least the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions will respond to the setting confirmation state even though the setting confirmation state is in progress. If the command line is not being executed, traces of the command line connection being interrupted cannot be erased, and this can act as a deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Further, as described above in detail, if the command line connection is not cut off during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction when the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. For the parts that are configured, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at timings ts to tx has been completed, but after the operation corresponding to such a setting confirmation state is completed, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is completed. I'm trying to carry out the action. On the other hand, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off when the power is turned on at timing ts, and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved during the setting confirmation state from timings ts to tx, the settings at timing tx When the confirmation state is ended, for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation, the standby operation that is being executed at timings ts to tx is completed; Afterwards, it is restricted so that the operation corresponding to the completion of setting confirmation is not executed. In this example, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs when the power is turned on at timing ts, the hall manager notices the occurrence of the transmission cutoff situation and uses the command line to resolve the transmission cutoff situation during the setting confirmation state. The pachinko machine may have been reconnected, but even though the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, if the hall manager performs the operation corresponding to the end of setting confirmation after the standby operation has ended, the pachinko machine Even though the first inspection has been completed, there is a possibility that subsequent games may not be started promptly. However, in this example, in a situation where a transmission cutoff situation occurs when the power is turned on at timing ts, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved during the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation ends after the standby operation ends. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by restricting the execution of the corresponding action.

In addition, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are in a stopped state (standby state), but the transmission cutoff situation is resolved during the setting confirmation state. If so, the initial operation of the movable body is executed based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting confirmation end command at timing tx. After the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the movable body starts its normal operation. For example, the movable body is allowed to operate during a demonstration in which the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, or during execution of a variable performance that is executed during the variable display of the special symbols.

Further, in the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state A in which the security signal is continuously output and other outputs are disabled. Furthermore, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the security signal is continuously output from the external terminal board 558 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and other outputs are also possible. The state B is set to enable output. Then, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enabled state C in which all outputs are enabled after the output of the security signal has ended for a predetermined period. Note that the above applies to the case where the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is connected normally, and anyone who attempts to illegally cause the setting change state or setting confirmation state is prohibited. By removing such wiring, it is possible to prevent the external device (hall computer) from receiving the security signal and prevent the hall manager from knowing the occurrence of a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when attempting to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff situation), or if it is reconnected, a special operation is performed, and the "Settings" It is possible to prevent "fraud that exploits the change status or setting confirmation status."

Furthermore, although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the component that performs the standby operation, even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. For components whose light intensity cannot be adjusted and whose normal operation is performed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228. Specifically, if a transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off occurs at timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx. Components that are currently in use are performing standby operations, but the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted for such components. Note that in this example, the components performing the standby operation do not accept operations on the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, but they do accept operations on the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. Although the volume and light intensity are adjusted, the configuration may be such that the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the current volume and light intensity. Then, during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, if the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction after the setting confirmation state ends. Although the components perform their normal operations, the volume and light intensity of such components can be adjusted.

[Third embodiment regarding transmission cutoff situation]
(Concerning the case where the history is displayed during the setting confirmation notification that continues after the setting confirmation state ends)
FIG. 277 shows the behavior of Pachinko machine 1 when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends in a situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a chart. Here, a case will be described in which the effect display device 1600 is enabled to display a history, which is a history of settings changes and settings confirmations, during the settings confirmation state. Also, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the settings confirmation state, and the command line is disconnected after the settings confirmation state ends. After the connection has been reconnected and the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, a case will be explained in which the detection part A detects an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration before the detection part B detects winnings in various starting ports. There is.

In this example, among the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays a history display when operating the effect operation section 310 as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, If the detection unit A detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 displays the history and also displays information for abnormality in magnetism or vibration. Since this is the same as FIG. 273 except that the display (operation corresponding to the abnormality notification) is executed, description of the same points will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 273, if the detection unit A detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 activates the member to which the operation is instructed. Of these, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the speakers perform operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the setting confirmation state that has been executed from timing ts without executing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. It continues to operate.

FIG. 278 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period when settings of setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed. This example shows a state in which a setting confirmation operation is performed when the power is turned on, and setting confirmation of setting values is being performed. When the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value that has already been set (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is only checked, and cannot be changed.

278(A) and (B) show the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting confirmation of the setting value is being performed, and FIG. This is the display screen immediately after the display, and a message image "Confirming settings" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a guide image for switching to history display (operation image showing the production operation section 310) is displayed below it. Ru. FIG. 278(B) is a history display screen that is switched from the display screen of FIG. 278(A) when the effect operation unit 310 is operated.

In FIG. 278(B), the first history display part is displayed where you can check the history of the past 12 times line by line on one screen, and it displays "date and time information" based on RTC information, and the above-mentioned changes in special symbols. "Information about the gaming state", which shows whether the gaming state including display and jackpot games, etc., has been initialized, "Information about the setting value", which shows the current setting value, "Information about the count value of the relief counter", " Work information such as RAM clear operations and setting change operations is recorded in order from the left. This information is stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so that it will not be erased even if a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed. In other words, the displays in FIGS. 278(A) and 278(B) are caused by transmitting various information stored in the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when setting values are being changed or display confirmation of setting values is being performed. This is an effect image generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in FIG. 278(B), the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display section is a display related to the current setting confirmation operation, and " The current setting value “2” is displayed in the “Information regarding setting value” section. Further, a guide image (operation image showing the effect operation section 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. 278(A) is displayed at the lower left of the first history display section, and a , the current "information regarding the count value of the relief number counter" is displayed in an emphasized manner.

In addition, if a setting change operation is being performed when the power is turned on, the history display screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is erased when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting change operation is completed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 277, when the setting confirmation state occurs between timings ts and tx, the effect display device 1600 executes a setting confirmation display as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. During such a setting confirmation state, it is possible to display a history display by operating the effect operation section 310. Further, during the setting confirmation state, detection of magnetism and vibration is not enabled, and the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform operations corresponding to abnormality notification. Therefore, when the history display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 during the setting confirmation state, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the performance display device 1600 will not display the abnormality. Maintains history display. In addition, during the setting confirmation state, when the history display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the display for setting confirmation is executed, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the effect display device 1600 does not display the abnormality display. The display for setting confirmation is maintained without executing the display. In other words, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the abnormal display on the performance display device 1600 will not interfere with the confirmation that the settings are currently being checked, and this will serve as a deterrent against fraudulent activities. can demonstrate.

During the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction even after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. For the members that are currently in operation, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at timings ts to tx is continued. Further, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the effect display device 1600 executes a display for setting confirmation as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but when such setting confirmation state ends. Even later, by operating the performance operation section 310, it is possible to display the history display. In addition, after the setting confirmation state is completed, although magnetism and vibration detection is enabled, the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to receive abnormality notification commands related to magnetism and vibration because a transmission cutoff situation has occurred. First, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. Therefore, when the history display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the setting confirmation state is finished, as long as the transmission cutoff situation occurs, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the effect will not be displayed. No abnormality display is performed on the device 1600.

If the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2 after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 operates even after the transmission cutoff state is cleared at timing t2. Regarding the designated member, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state that has been executed since timing ts is continued. Furthermore, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 executes a display for setting confirmation as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but such a setting confirmation state ends. Even after the transmission interruption situation is resolved later, it is possible to display the history display by operating the effect operation section 310.

Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, at timing t3, the signals from the magnetic sensor (detection section A) for detecting magnetism and the vibration sensor (detection section A) for detecting vibration are detected. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 has detected an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and an abnormality notification command is output to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, after the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state, but at timing t3, Based on the fact that the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has given an operation instruction can perform the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification.

Specifically, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate. (frame lamps), LEDs (board lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, and speakers have finished their operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state and are performing operations corresponding to abnormality notification. On the other hand, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, the effect display device 1600 performs the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification as well as the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. I'm trying to execute it. Further, when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected at timing t3, the effect display device 1600 executes a setting confirmation display as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Even after detecting an abnormality, it is possible to display the history display by operating the performance operation section 310. For this reason, after the transmission interruption situation is resolved after the setting confirmation state ends, when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected, a history display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is performed. , an error display is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 278(C), if a magnetic abnormality is detected while displaying the history display on the effect display device 1600 under such a situation, the screen of the effect display device 1600 In the upper right corner, a message ``Magnetic error has occurred'' is added as an error message.

In the above, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at timing t3, it is possible to display the history display on the effect display device 1600 and to execute the abnormality display. Therefore, even if you are paying attention to the screen while the history display is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected, an abnormality display is added, so that Never miss the occurrence of vibration-related abnormalities. Furthermore, even in a configuration in which a lamp or the like other than the effect display device 1600 is not provided as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation, an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected while the history display is being displayed on the effect display device 1600. By sometimes adding an abnormality display, you will not miss the occurrence of abnormalities related to magnetism or vibration.

Then, at timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command, it is possible to display the history display on the effect display device 1600 and to execute the display for the abnormality. The display for such an abnormality is ended at timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3. In other words, after the abnormality display ends at timing t4, the effect display device 1600 displays only the history display. Then, at timing t4, after ending the display for abnormality, at timing t5, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting winnings in various starting ports is output to the main control board 1310. When input to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board 1310 outputs the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the performance display device 1600 is able to display the history display, but at timing t5, the peripheral control board 1510 starts to fluctuate. Based on receiving the command or the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 ends the history display and executes the normal operation.

[Fourth embodiment regarding transmission cutoff situation]
(About the relationship between frame decoration disconnection notification and frame opening/closing notification when the command line between the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off)
In this example, a game board 5 whose game area 5a can be seen from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, and a door is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 to the door frame 3. A production operation unit 300 (operation device) is attached to the front of the frame top unit 450 (decoration member), the plate decoration unit 250, and the plate base unit 210 and can be operated by the player. FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing a door frame top unit 450 and a production operation unit 300 that are detachable from the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. 246, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and production operation unit 300 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall. It is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and production operation unit 300 as a set in one group for each model series. In other words, when changing to a new model series, the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall, and the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and presentation corresponding to the model series before the change are installed. After removing the operation unit 300, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and performance operation unit 300 corresponding to a new model series are attached. By adopting such a configuration, when changing the model, if you want to renew not only the gameplay but also the appearance of the game machine, the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) can be suppressed, increasing efficiency. The gameplay and appearance of the gaming machine can be completely renewed. In addition, regarding the installation and removal of the door frame top unit 450 and production operation unit 300, which are replaced in accordance with the game board 5, a mounting structure using a tool-less locking part is used in order to ease the installation work for the hall manager. We are planning to adopt the following. As a tool-less locking part, for example, a hand screw with a hand knob on the head, a well-known snap lock (not shown) that can be attached and detached with one-touch operation of moving the lever up or down, or a rotation of the lever. An example is the well-known crescent lock that can be attached and detached.

The peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can connect various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 via the door frame top relay board. The light emission can be controlled.

Similarly, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board 332 attached to the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), an outer button decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. This is for relaying the connection between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. be. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322, for example, via the operation unit relay board 332.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the production operation unit 300 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 300. In this example, each of the frame decoration members is connected to the main body frame 4 and door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 using a drawer connector. If the electrical connection by the drawer connector is cut off, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or displaced, and the peripheral control board 1510 indicates that the frame decoration member is not connected. We judge that it is. Note that, unlike this example, a detection switch is provided to detect whether each of the frame decoration members is located at a normal position, and when the detection switch connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring is OFF. In this case, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or displaced, and the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that the frame decoration member is not connected.

By the way, as a fraudulent method, by fraudulently removing the frame decoration member from the pachinko machine 1 or causing its position to shift, a gap leading from the front side to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is created, or a thin wall is created. It is possible to access from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to the back side by drilling holes in the places where the It is possible to connect the For example, a fraudulent board (a so-called hanging board) may be connected to the main control board 1310 and, contrary to the original game, fraudulently input a ball entry signal that is input to the main control board 1310 when a winning is started, or It is possible to illegally stop the variable display of special symbols at a jackpot symbol, or illegally cause a jackpot game to occur. Furthermore, although a plurality of wirings are connected to the main control board 1310 using a connector, there is a possibility that such a fraudulent board is connected using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by a connector. For example, it is conceivable to disconnect a predetermined wiring from the main control board 1310 and connect a fraudulent board to the wiring by connecting it to the main control board 1310. Similarly, a plurality of wires are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 using a connector, but such a fraudulent board may be connected by using one of the plurality of wires that are erroneously connected to the peripheral control board 1510. For example, the wires connected to the production operation unit 300 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 300 may be separated from the peripheral control board 1510, and a fraudulent board may be relayed to the wiring to connect to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible that In other words, if such a frame decoration member becomes unconnected, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, such as the above-mentioned fraudulent board being connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In this example, a method for preventing such fraud when the frame decoration member becomes unconnected will be described below.

FIG. 279 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is disconnected. Here, in a normal situation where the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is maintained, the wiring between the frame decoration member and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, etc. A case will be described in which a frame decoration disconnection notification is executed when a decoration member is disconnected.

As shown in FIG. 279, after the power is turned on at timing ts, it is controlled to the normal state, and the period is set such that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when there is a starting prize, the fluctuating display of the special symbol can be started, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops displaying at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started. You can play normal games.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of frame decoration members such as the performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit 300, and the performance operation unit 300 (LEDs inside the frame decoration). ), LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as members that are not frame decoration members (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 as members that are not frame decoration members (frame decoration There are an external LED 2), a speaker, etc., and these components are configured to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at timing ts. Here, in normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start (for example, a state of waiting for a customer). When the member to which the movement is instructed is operated and the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is to instruct the movement is to perform the variation display based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command. (a performance based on a fluctuation pattern). For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variable display of decorative patterns, and displays the effect on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member. (LED inside the frame decoration), LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), LED mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) Now, the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the speaker outputs audio in conjunction with the performance display performed by the performance display device 1600. ing.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 periodically (including in real time) after power is turned on determines whether or not the production operation unit 300 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 300 are electrically connected. ing. Then, after turning on the power at timing ts, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 removes the normal The operation is ended, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is executed. For example, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LEDs inside the frame decoration) or the various decorative boards of the game board 5 Except for the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) installed in the frame decoration, the effect display device 1600 displays "Frame decoration member disconnection error" on the screen as a display when the frame decoration is not connected. , the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 (LEDs outside the frame decoration 2) are lit or blinking in a single color with strong brightness as light emission when the frame decoration is not connected, and the LEDs are set to light up or blink with strong brightness from the speaker. As the notification sound for unconnected frame decoration, a notification sound saying "An error in disconnection of frame decoration member has occurred" is output.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 periodically (including in real time) after power is turned on determines whether or not it is electrically connected to the production operation unit 300 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 300. However, it may be executed only at a timing that occurs only once after the power is turned on (for example, immediately after the power is turned on). In such a case, if the frame decoration member becomes unconnected before timing tx arrives, it is possible to determine that the frame decoration member is unconnected at timing tx. However, if the frame decoration member becomes unconnected after timing tx, it cannot be determined that the frame decoration member is unconnected, and the frame decoration disconnection notification is not executed. .

Specifically, at timing tx, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, the effect display device 1600, the door frame, etc., of the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions Regarding the LEDs (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) and the speaker mounted on the various decorative boards No. 3, their normal operations are completed and operations corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification are executed. In this way, except for some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is executed with priority over the normal operation, thereby controlling the frame decoration members. It is necessary not to overlook the occurrence of an abnormality related to disconnection, and to be on guard against fraudulent acts such as connecting a fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after leaving the frame decoration member unconnected. You can make sure that you understand this. On the other hand, the LEDs (LEDs 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue their normal operation without performing any operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification. In this way, even if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the LEDs (outside the frame decoration LED1) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 ), by continuing the normal operation, it is possible to make the player understand that this is the period in which the game can be started even though the frame decoration member is not connected. Note that the LEDs (LEDs in the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member are described as "lights out" in the drawings because the frame decoration member is not connected.

In this example, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the frame decoration disconnection notification except for some of the members for which operation is instructed. However, even if the frame decoration member is then reconnected and the unconnected state of the frame decoration member is resolved, the normal operation will not be restored and the frame decoration disconnection notification will be displayed. We are trying to continue the corresponding action. As a result, even if a fraudulent board is attached to the main control board 1310 or peripheral control board 1510 by removing the frame decoration member, etc., and then the position of the frame decoration member is returned, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification will continue. As a result, traces of the frame decoration member being unconnected remain, which can act as a deterrent against fraudulent acts.

This example has a door frame open sensor that detects the opening/closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a main body frame open sensor that detects the opening/closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. , the main control board 1310 detects whether the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 and whether the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and monitors whether or not it is opened. are doing. Further, when the ON signal of the door frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 transmits the door frame open command to notify the opening of the door frame 3 using the command line. When the OFF signal of the door frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 outputs the signal to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. The door frame closing command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Similarly, when the ON signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 uses the command line to issue a main body frame open command to notify the opening of the main body frame 4. When the OFF signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 transmits the closing signal to the peripheral control board 1510. The main body frame closing command is outputted to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Then, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, when the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 is activated for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Based on receiving the door frame opening command, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. For example, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members (LEDs in the frame decoration) and the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 (frame decoration With the exception of the external LED 1), the effect display device 1600 is configured to display "The door frame is open" on the screen as a display for opening the door frame, and is mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The LED (outside the frame decoration LED 2) lights up or blinks in a single color with strong brightness to signal the opening of the door frame, and the speaker emits a warning sound for opening the door frame. The system outputs a notification sound that says, ``The frame is open.''

Specifically, if the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1 after it is determined at timing tx that the frame decoration member is unconnected, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, if the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, The components that execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t1 are the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (LED2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker. executes the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification with priority over the frame decoration unconnected notification. In this way, for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before the timing t1, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification is performed with priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. Thus, for example, if the door frame 3 is opened due to fraudulent activity, this fact will not be overlooked. Furthermore, regarding the LEDs (LEDs outside the frame decoration 1) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, which are members that have not performed the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t1, Even if the door frame 3 is opened at this point, the normal operation is continued.

If the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2 after the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 will not operate the peripheral control board 1510 for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Based on receiving the door frame closing command, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification is ended, and the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened and closed in a short period of time, it is possible to reliably know that the door frame 3 has been opened by executing the operation corresponding to the door frame closure notification for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to check whether the door frame 3 has been opened by regular work.

Specifically, when the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, the LEDs (outside frame decoration LEDs 2) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 emit light in a single color for closing the door frame. The LED lights up or blinks with strong brightness, and the speaker outputs a notification sound that says "The door frame is closed" as a notification sound for closing the door frame. The light emitting state for closing the door frame is a different light emitting state from the light emitting state for opening the door frame, such as lighting/blinking of an LED or different light emitting color, but the light emitting state may be the same. . In addition, among the members that perform operations corresponding to the door frame open notification at timings t1 to t2, the LEDs (LED2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the speaker are at timing t2. When the door frame 3 is closed, the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification is executed, but the effect display device 1600 does not execute the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification.

When the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 is operated after the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification is completed at timing t2, or after the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is completed at timing t2, or when the performance display device 1600 is After the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) and the speaker have finished operating in response to the door frame closure notification for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from timing t2, these members will return to normal operation. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is restarted without executing the above. As a result, in a situation where an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member occurs and the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the notification of the disconnection of the frame decoration, opening and closing the door frame 3 will notify the disconnection of the frame decoration member. Even if an attempt is made to terminate the operation corresponding to the frame decoration, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification will be resumed after the door frame 3 is closed, leaving traces that the frame decoration member is disconnected, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. can exert a deterrent force against

In this example, a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 is used to detect magnetism, and a structure in which the pachinko machine 1 is detected by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 is used. The pachinko machine 1 is configured to detect vibrations using a vibration sensor that detects vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1, and with these configurations, it is possible to detect whether an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 and to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. are doing. Further, when a signal from a magnetic sensor (detection section A) for detecting magnetism or a vibration sensor (detection section A) for detecting vibration is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 detects abnormalities in magnetism and vibration, and an abnormality notification command for informing the execution of abnormality notification based on the occurrence of the abnormality is outputted to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Then, when magnetism is detected at timing t3 after determining that the frame decoration member is unconnected at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 detects a magnetic abnormality for the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate. Based on receiving the notification command, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. For example, when magnetism is detected, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LEDs inside the frame decoration) and the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) With the exception of For the external LED 2), the LED lights up or flashes in a single color with strong brightness to indicate a magnetic anomaly, and the speaker emits a notification sound saying "A magnetic error has occurred." I am trying to output a notification sound.

Specifically, if magnetism is detected at timing t3 after the frame decoration member is determined to be unconnected at timing tx, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, from timing t3 As for the components that perform the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the effect display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 (LED 2 outside the frame decoration), and the speaker are The operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is executed with priority over the decorative disconnection notification. In this way, for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t3, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is given priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. So, for example, if a magnetic field is detected due to fraudulent activity, this fact will not be overlooked. In addition, regarding the LEDs (LED1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, which are members that have not executed the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t3, Even if magnetism is detected at this point, normal operation continues.

The operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3. After the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is completed, the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (outside the frame decoration LED 2) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker perform normal operations. The operation corresponding to the notification of unconnected frame decoration is restarted without having to do so. As a result, in a situation where an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member occurs and the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the notification of disconnection of the frame decoration member, by bringing the magnet close so that the magnetism is detected, Even if an attempt is made to end the operation corresponding to the decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification will be resumed after a predetermined period of time has passed since magnetism is detected, so the frame decoration member is not connected. This will leave traces behind and act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Note that even if the operation section (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the period in which the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continues to perform the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the frame The operation corresponding to the decorative unconnected notification is not terminated. On the other hand, when the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification, the door frame closed notification, or the magnetic abnormality notification is performed. Even if the operation is executed, after the operation is completed, the operation corresponding to the notification of unconnected frame decoration is resumed. When the operation unit is operated, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification may be terminated and the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players may not be able to erase the traces that the frame decoration members are not connected, and only the hall administrator can erase the traces that the frame decoration members are not connected, thereby preventing fraudulent activities. The hall manager can surely check whether there is any such problem.

Further, at the timing tx, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, no signal regarding the disconnection of the frame decoration member is output from the external terminal board 558. . On the other hand, at timing t1, if the main control board 1310 determines that the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is open, the output from the external terminal board 558 It outputs a signal related to Similarly, at timing t3, if it is determined that the main control board 1310 is detecting magnetism or vibration, a signal related to the detection of magnetism or vibration is output from the external terminal board 558. . As a result, the external device (hall computer) can know whether the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open or not, and whether magnetism or vibration is detected. Although it is not possible to determine whether or not the decorative member is unconnected, if the frame decorative member is unconnected, it will be detected after opening and closing the door frame 3 or main body frame 4, or after detecting magnetism or vibration. By continuing the operation of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 in response to the frame decoration disconnection notification as much as possible, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the frame decoration member is not connected. It is possible to ensure that the user is aware of the situation in which he or she should be on guard against fraudulent activity, such as when an unauthorized board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. As mentioned above, the external device (hall computer) side does not know whether the frame decoration member is disconnected or not, but in this example, when attempting to connect a fraudulent board, the frame decoration member is disconnected. By performing a special operation when the frame decoration member is disconnected, it is possible to prevent fraud that exploits the disconnection of the frame decoration member.

Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the members that perform normal operations, and by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume can be adjusted. For components that enable adjustment of light intensity and perform operations corresponding to frame decoration disconnection notification, operation corresponding to door frame open notification, operation corresponding to door frame closed notification, and operation corresponding to magnetic abnormality notification. Even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, it is impossible to adjust the volume or the light intensity. In other words, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the members that are performing normal operations (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (outside the frame decoration)) Adjustment of volume and light intensity is disabled except for LED1)). In addition, in this example, for the members performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame closed notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification, Although the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is not accepted, the volume and light intensity are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, but it is reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. It may be configured so that this does not occur.

FIG. 280 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line is reconnected while the door frame 3 is open in a situation where the frame decoration member is disconnected after the command line connection is cut off. It is. Here, the frame decoration member is disconnected after a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the door frame 3 A case will be described in which the door frame 3 is closed after the command line is reconnected after the door frame 3 is opened and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved. In addition, although the case where the door frame 3 is closed after the command line is reconnected after the door frame 3 is opened and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved is explained, the command line is reconnected after the main body frame 4 is opened. The same applies to the case where the main body frame 4 is closed after the connection is re-connected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved.

As shown in FIG. 280, after the power is turned on at timing ts, it is controlled to the normal state and the period is set such that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when there is a starting prize, the fluctuating display of the special symbol can be started, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops displaying at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started. You can play normal games.

In this example, after the power is turned on at timing ts, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at timing ty. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the production operation unit 300 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 300, but after the transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing ty. , at timing tx, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected. Note that when a frame decoration member becomes unconnected, a frame decoration disconnection notification is executed, but the frame decoration member is disconnected in the hope that the frame decoration disconnection notification will not be executed. There is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, such as causing a transmission cutoff situation before the above.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of frame decoration members such as the performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit 300, and the performance operation unit 300 (LEDs inside the frame decoration). ), LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as members that are not frame decoration members (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 as members that are not frame decoration members (frame decoration There are an external LED 2), a speaker, etc., and these components are configured to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at timing ts. Regarding such normal operation, even if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing ty, the normal operation is continued after the transmission cutoff situation occurs.

Then, after the transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing ty, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 except for some of the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, The normal operation is ended, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is executed. For example, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LEDs inside the frame decoration) or the various decorative boards of the game board 5 Except for the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) installed in the frame decoration, the effect display device 1600 displays "Frame decoration member disconnection error" on the screen as a display when the frame decoration is not connected. , the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 (LEDs outside the frame decoration 2) are lit or blinking in a single color with strong brightness as light emission when the frame decoration is not connected, and the LEDs are set to light up or blink with strong brightness from the speaker. As the notification sound for unconnected frame decoration, a notification sound saying "An error in disconnection of frame decoration member has occurred" is output.

Specifically, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines at time tx that the frame decoration member is not connected after a transmission interruption occurs at time ty, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, including the performance display device 1600, the LEDs (outside frame decoration LED 2) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker, will cease normal operation and execute an operation corresponding to the frame decoration not being connected notification. In this way, even if the command line connection is interrupted before the frame decoration member is disconnected, by executing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration not being connected notification when the frame decoration member becomes disconnected, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member will not be overlooked, and it can be reliably understood that a state in which caution is required to check for fraudulent activity, such as disconnecting the frame decoration member and then connecting a fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510, is in progress.

It should be noted that the LEDs (LEDs 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to operate normally without performing any operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification. In this way, even if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the LEDs (outside the frame decoration LED1) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 ), by continuing the normal operation, it is possible to make the player understand that this is the period in which the game can be started even though the frame decoration member is not connected. Note that the LEDs (LEDs in the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member are described as "lights out" in the drawings because the frame decoration member is not connected.

Then, at timing t1, when the ON signal of the door frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 issues a door frame open command to notify the opening of the door frame 3. , are output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. However, even if the ON signal of the door frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing t1, the main control board 1310 It is not possible to output a frame opening command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is opened or not. Therefore, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing t1, even after the door frame 3 is opened, the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate will respond to the door frame open notification. Instead, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification that is being executed from timing ty to t1 is continued. In this way, for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t1, even if the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, the frame decoration is not connected. By continuing the operation corresponding to the connection notification, it is possible to avoid overlooking the occurrence of an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member, and it is possible to connect an unauthorized board to the peripheral control board 1510 after leaving the frame decoration member unconnected. This makes it possible to ensure that the user is aware of the situation in which they should be on guard against fraudulent activity. Furthermore, regarding the LEDs (LEDs outside the frame decoration 1) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, which are members that have not performed the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t1, Even if the door frame 3 is opened at this point, the normal operation is continued.

In this example, when the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, a transmission cutoff situation is occurring, and the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate in response to the frame decoration disconnection notification. However, while the door frame 3 is being opened, the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved. Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2. Furthermore, while the transmission interruption situation is occurring, even if the door frame 3 is opened, the frame decoration disconnection notification continues, but the fraudster may expect that the frame decoration disconnection notification will end. , there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, such as by resolving the transmission cutoff situation and closing the door frame 3.

If a transmission cutoff situation has occurred, after the door frame 3 is opened, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate will respond to the frame decoration disconnection notification that is being executed from timing ty. However, even if the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification will not be executed. , the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is continued. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, for the component that performs the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification after the door frame 3 is opened, the frame decoration is not connected. By continuing the operation corresponding to the connection notification, it is possible to avoid overlooking the occurrence of an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member, and it is possible to connect an unauthorized board to the peripheral control board 1510 after leaving the frame decoration member unconnected. This makes it possible to ensure that the user is aware of the situation in which they should be on guard against fraudulent activity.

Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, when the OFF signal of the door frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing t2, the main control board 1310 closes the door frame 3. A door frame closing command to be transmitted is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. However, even if the OFF signal of the door frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, after the door frame 3 is closed, , for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification that has been executed since timing ty is continued without executing the operation corresponding to the door frame closed notification. ing. On the other hand, as described above in detail, if the transmission cutoff situation does not occur while the door frame 3 is open, after the door frame 3 is closed, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate, Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the door frame closing command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In this way, even if the door frame 3 is closed after the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved, for the component that performs the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification after the door frame 3 is opened, the door frame is closed. By continuing the action corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification without executing the action corresponding to the notification, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the unconnected frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the frame decoration member is disconnected. It is possible to ensure that the user is aware of the situation in which he or she should be on guard against fraudulent acts, such as when a fraudulent board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, then when magnetism is detected at timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. Regarding the member for which an operation instruction is given, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the magnetic abnormality notification command, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. There is. For example, when magnetism is detected, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LEDs inside the frame decoration) and the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) With the exception of For the external LED 2), the LED lights up or flashes in a single color with strong brightness to indicate a magnetic anomaly, and the speaker emits a notification sound saying "A magnetic error has occurred." I am trying to output a notification sound.

Specifically, in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if magnetism is detected at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 Among the members that instruct the operation, the members that execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t3 include the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs (frames) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. Regarding the outside decoration LED 2) and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is performed with priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. In this way, for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t3, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is given priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. So, for example, if a magnetic field is detected due to fraudulent activity, this fact will not be overlooked. Note that the LEDs (LEDs outside the frame decoration 1) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are components that have not performed the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before the timing t3. Even if magnetism is detected at this point, normal operation continues.

The operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3. After the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is completed, the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (outside the frame decoration LED 2) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker perform normal operations. The operation corresponding to the notification of unconnected frame decoration is restarted without having to do so. As a result, in a situation where an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member occurs and the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the notification of disconnection of the frame decoration member, by bringing the magnet close so that the magnetism is detected, Even if an attempt is made to end the operation corresponding to the decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification will be resumed after a predetermined period of time has passed since magnetism is detected, so the frame decoration member is not connected. This will leave traces behind and act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Note that even if the operation section (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the period in which the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continues to perform the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the frame The operation corresponding to the decorative unconnected notification is not terminated. On the other hand, if the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the door frame 3 is opened/closed so as to eliminate the transmission cutoff situation while the door frame 3 is open. Even if magnetism or vibration is detected, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is continued, and even if magnetism or vibration is detected, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is continued after the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is completed. Although the operation has resumed, a specific operating section is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates the specific operating section, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is terminated. , the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players may not be able to erase the traces that the frame decoration members are not connected, and only the hall administrator can erase the traces that the frame decoration members are not connected, thereby preventing fraudulent activities. The hall manager can surely check whether there is any such problem.

Further, at the timing tx, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, no signal regarding the disconnection of the frame decoration member is output from the external terminal board 558. . On the other hand, at timing t1, if the main control board 1310 determines that the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is open, the output from the external terminal board 558 It outputs a signal related to Similarly, at timing t3, if it is determined that the main control board 1310 is detecting magnetism or vibration, a signal related to the detection of magnetism or vibration is output from the external terminal board 558. . As a result, the external device (hall computer) can know whether the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open or not, and whether magnetism or vibration is detected. Although it is not possible to determine whether or not the decorative member is unconnected, if the frame decorative member is unconnected, the transmission cutoff situation can be resolved while the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open. Even when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is opened or closed, or after magnetism or vibration is detected, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate in response to the frame decoration disconnection notification as much as possible, so that the frame It is necessary not to overlook the occurrence of abnormalities related to unconnected decorative members, and to be on guard against fraudulent acts such as connecting a fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after leaving a frame decorative member unconnected. It is possible to make sure that the user understands the current state. As mentioned above, the external device (hall computer) side does not know whether the frame decoration member is disconnected or not, but in this example, when attempting to connect a fraudulent board, the frame decoration member is disconnected. By performing special operations when the command line is disconnected before the command line is connected (transmission disconnection situation) or when it is reconnected, it prevents ``fraud that exploits unconnected frame decoration members.'' can do.

Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the members that perform normal operations, and by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume can be adjusted. For components that enable adjustment of light intensity and perform operations corresponding to frame decoration disconnection notification, operation corresponding to door frame open notification, operation corresponding to door frame closed notification, and operation corresponding to magnetic abnormality notification. Even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, it is impossible to adjust the volume or the light intensity. In other words, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the members that are performing normal operations (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (outside the frame decoration)) Adjustment of volume and light intensity is disabled except for LED1)). In addition, in this example, for the members performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame closed notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification, Although the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is not accepted, the volume and light intensity are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, but it is reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. It may be configured so that this does not occur.

FIG. 281 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line is reconnected before opening the main body frame 4 in a situation where the frame decoration member becomes unconnected after the command line connection is cut off. FIG. Here, the frame decoration member is disconnected after a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the main body frame 4 A case will be described in which the command line is reconnected before the main body frame 4 is opened, and the main body frame 4 is opened after the transmission interruption situation is resolved. In addition, the case where the command line is reconnected before opening the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 is opened after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved is explained, but after opening the door frame 3 The same applies to the case where the door frame 3 is closed after the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved.

In this example, after a transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at timing ty, the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx. Since this is the same as FIG. 280 in that it is not connected, a description of these points will be omitted.

First, at timing tx, if a frame decoration member becomes disconnected while a transmission cutoff situation occurs, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 performs an operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification. It is running, but after that, the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved. Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the main body frame 4 is opened at timing t1. In addition, even if the transmission blockage situation is resolved, the frame decoration disconnection notification continues, but the fraudster hopes that the frame decoration disconnection notification will end, and removes the transmission blockage situation and returns to the main unit. There is a possibility that fraudulent activity, such as opening slot 4, is being carried out.

Specifically, at timing tx, if a frame decoration member becomes disconnected while a transmission cutoff situation is occurring, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation instruction for the member from timing ty. However, even if the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification will continue. I'm trying to continue. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved for the component that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, by continuing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the frame It is necessary not to overlook the occurrence of abnormalities related to unconnected decorative members, and to be on guard against fraudulent acts such as connecting a fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after leaving a frame decorative member unconnected. It is possible to make sure that the user understands the current state.

Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, when the ON signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing t2, the main control board 1310 stops the main body frame 4 from being opened. A command to open the body frame is outputted to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. However, even if the ON signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved before the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame 4 will be opened. After that, the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification that has been executed from timing ty without executing the operation corresponding to the main body frame open notification for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. I try to do that. On the other hand, as described above in detail, if the transmission cut-off situation has not occurred before opening the main body frame 4, after opening the main body frame 4, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the member to operate. , the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification based on receiving the main body frame opening command. In this way, even if the main body frame 4 is opened, the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved will perform the operation corresponding to the main body frame open notification. By continuing the operation corresponding to the notification of unconnected frame decoration without disconnecting the frame decoration, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member will not be overlooked. It is possible to make sure that the user is aware that the user should be on guard against illegal acts such as being connected to the board 1510.

Then, after opening the main body frame 4 at timing t1, when the OFF signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing t2, the main control board 1310 A main body frame closing command for conveying the closure of No. 4 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. However, even if the OFF signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved before the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame 4 will be closed. After that, the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification that has been executed from timing ty without executing the operation corresponding to the main body frame closure notification for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. I try to do that. On the other hand, as described above in detail, if the transmission cut-off situation has not occurred before opening the main body frame 4, after the main body frame 4 is closed, the peripheral control board 1510 can instruct the member to operate. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the main body frame closing command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the main body frame closure notification for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In this way, even if the main body frame 4 is closed after the main body frame 4 is opened, for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the main body frame is closed. By continuing the action corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification without executing the action corresponding to the notification, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the unconnected frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the frame decoration member is disconnected. It is possible to ensure that the user is aware of the situation in which he or she should be on guard against fraudulent acts, such as when a fraudulent board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in this example, if the main body frame 4 is opened after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved before the main body frame 4 is opened, the frame is closed without performing the operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification. Although the operation corresponding to the decoration disconnection notification continues, the door frame 3 is opened while the transmission interruption situation is occurring, and only when the main body frame 4 is opened while the door frame 3 is open, the frame decoration is The operation corresponding to the disconnection notification may be continued. In other words, if the door frame 3 is opened while a transmission cutoff situation is occurring, the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to receive the door frame release command, and the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate will not be able to receive the door frame release command. , the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification continues, but if the main body frame 4 is opened after the transmission interruption situation is resolved under such a situation, the operation corresponding to the main body frame open notification is continued. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification may be continued without being executed.

In a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved before opening the main body frame 4, then when magnetism is detected at timing t3, peripheral control Regarding the members for which the board 1510 is instructing to operate, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the magnetic anomaly notification command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification, giving priority to the frame decoration disconnection notification. That's what I do. For example, when magnetism is detected, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LEDs inside the frame decoration) and the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) With the exception of For the external LED 2), the LED lights up or flashes in a single color with strong brightness to indicate a magnetic anomaly, and the speaker emits a notification sound saying "A magnetic error has occurred." I am trying to output a notification sound.

Specifically, in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if magnetism is detected at timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved before opening the main body frame 4, the peripheral control Among the members that the board 1510 instructs to operate, the members that execute the action corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t3 are mounted on the effect display device 1600 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3. Regarding the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is performed with priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. In this way, for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before timing t3, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is given priority over the frame decoration disconnection notification. So, for example, if a magnetic field is detected due to fraudulent activity, this fact will not be overlooked. Note that the LEDs (LEDs outside the frame decoration 1) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 are components that have not performed the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification before the timing t3. Even if magnetism is detected at this point, normal operation continues.

The operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3. After the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is completed, the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (outside the frame decoration LED 2) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker perform normal operations. The operation corresponding to the notification of unconnected frame decoration is restarted without having to do so. As a result, in a situation where an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member occurs and the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the notification of disconnection of the frame decoration member, by bringing the magnet close so that the magnetism is detected, Even if an attempt is made to end the operation corresponding to the decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification will be resumed after a predetermined period of time has passed since magnetism is detected, so the frame decoration member is not connected. This will leave traces behind and act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Note that even if the operation section (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the period in which the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate continues to perform the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the frame The operation corresponding to the decorative unconnected notification is not terminated. On the other hand, if the member that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate is performing the operation corresponding to the notification that the frame decoration is not connected, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the frame decoration is not connected. The operation corresponding to the notification is continued, and even if magnetism or vibration is detected, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is resumed after the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is completed. A specific operation unit is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates the specific operation unit, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is terminated and the normal operation is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, some players may not be able to erase the traces that the frame decoration members are not connected, and only the hall administrator can erase the traces that the frame decoration members are not connected, thereby preventing fraudulent activities. The hall manager can surely check whether there is any such problem.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, a signal regarding the disconnection of the frame decoration member is not output from the external terminal board 558. . On the other hand, at timing t1, if the main control board 1310 determines that the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is open, the output from the external terminal board 558 It outputs a signal related to Similarly, at timing t3, if it is determined that the main control board 1310 is detecting magnetism or vibration, a signal related to the detection of magnetism or vibration is output from the external terminal board 558. . As a result, the external device (hall computer) can know whether the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open or not, and whether magnetism or vibration is detected. Although it is not possible to determine whether or not the decorative member is disconnected, if the frame decorative member is unconnected, it will not be possible to determine whether the frame decorative member is disconnected or not when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is opened or closed after the transmission cutoff situation has been resolved. Even after detecting magnetism or vibration, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate in response to the frame decoration disconnection notification as much as possible, thereby making it possible to overlook the occurrence of an abnormality related to the disconnection of the frame decoration member. It is possible to ensure that the user is aware of a situation in which they should be on guard against fraudulent activity, such as connecting a fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after leaving the frame decoration member unconnected. . As mentioned above, the external device (hall computer) side does not know whether the frame decoration member is disconnected or not, but in this example, when attempting to connect a fraudulent board, the frame decoration member is disconnected. By performing special operations when the command line is disconnected before the command line is connected (transmission disconnection situation) or when it is reconnected, it prevents ``fraud that exploits unconnected frame decoration members.'' can do.

Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the members that perform normal operations, and by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume can be adjusted. For components that enable adjustment of light intensity and perform operations corresponding to frame decoration disconnection notification, operation corresponding to door frame open notification, operation corresponding to door frame closed notification, and operation corresponding to magnetic abnormality notification. Even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, it is impossible to adjust the volume or the light intensity. In other words, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tx, the members that are performing normal operations (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (outside the frame decoration)) Adjustment of volume and light intensity is disabled except for LED1)). In addition, in this example, for the members performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame open notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame closed notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification, Although the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is not accepted, the volume and light intensity are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, but it is reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. It may be configured so that this does not occur.

(Relationship between setting confirmation notification and frame decoration disconnection notification when the command line between the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off)
FIG. 282 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line is disconnected during the settings confirmation state and the frame decoration member becomes disconnected after the command line is reconnected after the settings confirmation state ends. It is a time chart showing. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the settings confirmation state, and the command line is disconnected after the settings confirmation state is completed. A case will be described in which the frame decoration member becomes unconnected after it has been reconnected and the transmission interruption situation has been resolved.

As described above in detail, this is a case where a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and when the setting confirmation state ends. After the command line is reconnected and the transmission interruption situation is resolved, if detection part A detects an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration before detection part B detects winnings in various starting ports. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 273. Specifically, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing t1 during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. For components that are currently in operation, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, and even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2 after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the surrounding parts are For the members for which the control board 1510 is giving instructions to operate, they continue to operate in accordance with the setting confirmation state. When the detection unit A detects magnetism or vibration after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. Regarding the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the speakers, the operation corresponding to abnormality notification is given priority over the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In contrast, the effect display device 1600 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In other words, under such circumstances, when the detection unit A detects magnetism or vibration, the setting confirmation notification (operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state) and the abnormality notification (operation corresponding to the abnormality notification) are performed at the same time. It can be used to detect any abnormalities related to magnetism or vibrations.

In this example, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at timing t1 during the setting confirmation state from timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx. The peripheral control components are configured to continue operating corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and even if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2 after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the peripheral control The members whose operations are instructed by the board 1510 are the same as those in FIG. 273 in that they continue to perform operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and therefore, descriptions of these points will be omitted. In FIG. 273, the detection unit A detects magnetism and vibration after the transmission interruption situation is resolved at timing t2, whereas in FIG. 282, the frame decoration is detected after the transmission interruption situation is resolved at timing t2. Components are not connected.

First, after the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, if the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the components whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the setting confirmation state. However, even if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing t3 after the transmission interruption situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 also issues an operation instruction. Regarding the members that are currently in use, the operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state are continued, and the operations corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification are not executed. In other words, under such a situation, when a frame decoration member becomes unconnected, a setting confirmation notification (operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state) and a frame decoration disconnection notification (operation corresponding to a frame decoration disconnection notification) will be activated. ) are not executed at the same time. Note that, as explained in FIG. 279, when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected in a situation where a transmission cutoff situation has not occurred, the peripheral control board 1510 removes some of the members for which operation is instructed. Then, the normal operation is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is executed.

In the above, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 will not operate the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing to operate. , continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to leave a trace that the command line connection has been interrupted, and it is possible to make it possible to understand that there is a situation in which it is necessary to be on guard against fraudulent activities. In other words, even if the frame decoration member is intentionally left unconnected after the transmission interruption situation has been resolved, traces of the command line connection being interrupted will remain, which will act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities. . In addition, since the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification regarding the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing its operation, traces of the command line connection being interrupted may be disturbed by other notifications. You can check it without any trouble.

Note that if the frame decoration member becomes disconnected during the transmission cutoff situation from timing tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2), the peripheral control board 1510 issues an operation instruction. Regarding the member, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is not completed, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration disconnection notification is not executed. In this way, even if the frame decoration member becomes unconnected before the transmission cut-off situation is resolved at timing t2, at least the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 remains in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, traces of the command line connection being interrupted cannot be erased, and it is possible to make the user aware of the situation in which they should be on guard for fraudulent activity. In other words, even if the frame decoration member is intentionally left unconnected during the transmission cutoff state after the settings confirmation state has ended, traces of the command line connection being cut off will remain, which will act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities. able to demonstrate.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game machine may be a pachislot machine or a game that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. The present invention may also be applied to other machines, and even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, it can be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the player does not touch the game balls B, and to game machines called managed game machines.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 1600 is placed at an eccentric position with respect to the center of the set plate 1650. A display device 1600 may be attached. Further, although one effect display device 1600 is attached to the set board 1650, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect display devices may be attached to the set board 1650.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2555 Center right front plate (retention plate)
2555a First storage section (accommodation section)
2555b Second storage section (accommodation section)
2555c Peeling hole 2555d Front of protrusion (protrusion)
2700 Specified impaired nail group 2701 Grouped nail portion 2710 Guidance area 2711 First guidance area 2712 Second guidance area N Obstructed nail

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a predetermined symbol change based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery start condition, and is capable of awarding a profit after the predetermined symbol variation ends,
a light emitting part provided at a predetermined position;
specific rainbow light emission control means for causing the light emitting section to emit light in a specific rainbow manner;
a separate light emitting section that is a separate member from the light emitting section and capable of emitting light in the specific rainbow mode;
The separate light emitting unit is provided with a plurality of light emitters, and the specific rainbow mode can be expressed by light emission from the plurality of light emitters,
The separate light emitting unit is not determined to be abnormal even when it is not connected to the gaming machine,
The specific rainbow light emission control means causes the light emitting section and the separate light emitting section to emit light in the specific rainbow mode, respectively, during a specific period when the predetermined symbol variation is not being executed. It is possible to cause the separate light emitting section to emit light in the specific rainbow mode, regardless of whether or not it is in a state where it can emit light in the specific rainbow mode,
The specific period does not start at the same time as the period in which the predetermined symbol variation is not executed, but rather, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the period in which the predetermined symbol variation was not executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be started later .

Images